JP2019069329A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play a game in the game machine for simultaneously and dynamically displaying a plurality of special patterns.SOLUTION: In determination of execution of a lottery game resulting in a normal jackpot for shifting to a normal game state after a privilege game executed in winning of the lottery game, and a lottery game resulting in a special jackpot that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state and shifts to a special game state, start of a privilege game resulting in a normal jackpot is adjusted to be ahead of start of a privilege game resulting in a special jackpot. Therefore, a player is allowed to have an expectation toward a jackpot, thus suppressing a decrease in a desire to play a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when game balls enter a plurality of starting openings provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and the dynamic display of the special symbol notifying the lottery result is It is executed on the display device. In such a configuration, the success or failure of the game is drawn individually corresponding to each starting opening, and the drawing result corresponds to each starting opening (for example, the first special for the two starting openings) After dynamically displaying the symbol and the second special symbol), the lottery result is notified. In this way, it has been proposed that a plurality of special symbols can be dynamically displayed at the same time.

  For example, in Patent Document 1, when the game ball enters the first starting opening, the dynamic display of the first special symbol starts, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second special symbol moves dynamically. Start the display. Therefore, when the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the other special symbol while either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed dynamically, the first special symbol and the second special symbol Both will be in the state of displaying dynamically at the same time. Then, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in the display mode informing the big hit, it shifts to the big hit game.

  As a type of jackpot, probability change jackpot transition to the high probability gaming state to improve the probability of becoming the jackpot advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game, and jackpot probability that is lower jackpot probability than the high probability gaming state A normal jackpot to shift to the probability game state is set. If a jackpot is usually started during the high probability game with one special symbol, the other special symbol before it has been started to change and before the fixed stop is determined based on the probability of the normal gaming state.

JP, 2005-319221, A

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, since the dynamic display is executed independently with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are usually short for a big hit and a definite variation big hit. If the big win is usually performed after the odds have been won, the high probability gaming state is ended in a short time, and the player's willingness to play the game in a short time. There was a problem that it was attenuated.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a plurality of special symbols are displayed dynamically at the same time, and the gaming machine is suppressed from reducing the player's willingness to play the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 executes the determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second based on the formation of the second condition. The 1st display means by which the 1st identification information which shows the success / failure determination result of the 1st lottery game by the success / failure determination means which performs the success / failure determination of a lottery game is displayed dynamically, The 1st by the success / failure determination means 2) Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating success / failure determination result of lottery game, said first identification information on said first display means, said second identification information on said second display means The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control respectively and the result of the judgment of the success or failure by the judgment unit of judgment are the winnings, and the first or second identification information is displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means. In the display mode that shows the hit A bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the stop display is made, and the win or absence judgment result by the hit / non-judgment means becomes a win, the bonus game execution means Determined to either the normal jackpot to shift the gaming state after the granted bonus game to the normal gaming state or the special jackpot to transition to the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition based on the determination means and the establishment of the first qualification condition according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition based on the establishment of the means according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition; Before the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, the dynamic display start condition is established whether the normal jackpot or the special jackpot is to be made with respect to the first or second judgment criteria which have already been established. According to one of the first judgment condition and the second judgment condition before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the normal judgment is made when the normal jackpot is reached. If the special jackpot is determined by the judging means, and if it is judged by the prior judging means that the special jackpot is to be made, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the normality deciding condition judged to be the normal jackpot is It has bonus start adjustment means for adjusting the start time of the bonus game so as to be earlier than the start of the bonus game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition determined to be the special jackpot. It is

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the benefit start adjusting means is a dynamic display mode corresponding to the judgment condition judged by the prior judgment means when the normal jackpot is reached. As the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success / failure determination condition determined by the prior determination unit when the special jackpot is achieved, the dynamic display mode is shortened so as to be shorter than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit The dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, or as the dynamic display mode for the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the pass / fail judgment condition to be the special jackpot, the normal / to hit jackpot condition corresponding to the normal Dynamic display mode determination means determines an extended dynamic display mode that results in a dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as the dynamic display mode It is intended to.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the dynamic display start condition corresponds to the satisfaction determination condition established when the first or second determination condition is established. Pending information storage means for storing pending information having at least the pass / fail determination information relating to the pass / fail determination of the first or second pass / fail decision condition established before the step Prior mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information before the establishment of the dynamic display start condition And the remaining information display means of the pending information based on the determination result of the prior aspect determination means and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means Being done An end time determining means for determining time information related to a time until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information ends, the benefit start adjusting means comprising With regard to either the pass / fail judgment condition or the second pass / fail judgment condition, the hold information corresponding to the pass / fail judgment condition judged by the prior judgment means when the normal jackpot is reached is the hold information storage means When it is determined that the other newly established success or failure judgment condition is the success or failure judgment condition for becoming a special jackpot when stored, it is judged by the end time judgment unit The dynamic display such as that the dynamic display corresponding to the special jackpot holding information ends after the time when the dynamic display corresponding to the normal jackpot holding information ends The adjustment dynamic display mode configured by the display time is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the special jackpot holding information, and the first validity determination condition and the above With regard to either one of the second judgment condition and the second judgment condition, when the hold information corresponding to the judgment condition judged by the prior judgment means when the special jackpot is reached is stored in the hold information storage means If it is determined by the prior determination means that the newly established success or failure judgment condition is the success or failure judgment condition that usually results in a large jackpot, the special jackpot determined by the end time determination means Dynamic display time in which the dynamic display corresponding to the normal jackpot holding information ends before the time in which the dynamic display corresponding to the holding information ends The dynamic display mode determining means is configured to determine the adjustment dynamic display mode configured by the above as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the normal jackpot holding information.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied.

  Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently.

  If the success or failure judgment result by the success or failure judgment means wins, it is advantageous to the player over the normal jackpot and the normal gaming state in which the gaming state after the bonus game granted by the bonus game executing means is shifted to the normal gaming state One of the special jackpots to be transferred to the special gaming state is determined by the hit type determination means. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in accordance with the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition based on the satisfaction of the first success or failure judgment condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in accordance with the establishment of the dynamic display start condition.

  Before the dynamic display start condition is established, the dynamic display start condition is satisfied whether the jackpot is a large jackpot or a special jackpot with respect to the already established first or second success or failure judgment condition. Before, it is determined by the prior determination means. Under one of the first and second judgment conditions before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, it is judged by the prior judgment means that the jackpot will usually be a large win, and the other judgment conditions are: The start of the bonus game is adjusted by the bonus start adjustment means so that the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot is earlier than the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot when it is determined by the predetermination means that the special jackpot will be made. Ru.

  Thus, the jackpot is normally started, and after the transition to the normal gaming state, the special jackpot is executed and the transition to the special gaming state is made, so that the player can have a greater expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play the game.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode determination means corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the special jackpot as the dynamic display manner corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the big win The dynamic display mode determination means is caused to determine the reduced dynamic display mode which makes the dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display mode by the bonus start adjustment means. Alternatively, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode determining means corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the normal jackpot as the dynamic display manner corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the special jackpot. The dynamic display mode determination means is made to determine the extended dynamic display mode which makes the dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode by the bonus start adjustment means.

  Thus, by adjusting the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode which is usually a big win or the dynamic display mode which is a special big win, the start of the bonus game of the normal big win is easily performed than the start of the special big win bonus game. It can be adjusted to be ahead. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given many benefits while enjoying the dynamic display mode.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect is exhibited. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied, the validity determination of the first or second validity determination condition which is satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is satisfied. The hold information having at least the validity determination information relating to is stored in the hold information storage means.

  The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit of the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit is before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. It is determined by the prior mode determination means. The first or second information corresponding to the pending information based on the determination result in the prior aspect determination means and the remaining dynamic display aspect of the first or second identification information during dynamic display on the first or second display means Time information relating to the time until dynamic display of identification information ends is determined by the end time determination means.

  With regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the judgment conditions determined by the predetermination means that a large jackpot is normally obtained is newly stored, If it is determined by the prior determination means that the other success / failure determination conditions established in the above are the success / failure determination conditions for the special jackpot, the dynamic display of the suspension information for the normal jackpot determined by the end time determination means The dynamic display mode of the hold information in which the adjustment dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time in which the dynamic display of the special jackpot holding information ends after the time to the end is the special jackpot The dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the benefit start adjusting means.

  On the other hand, with regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the judgment condition determined by the preliminary judgment means when the special jackpot is made is stored. For the other newly established success or failure judgment conditions, when it is judged by the prior judgment means that it is the success or failure judgment condition for becoming a large jackpot, the dynamic of the special jackpot to be special jackpot judged by the end time judgment means The adjustment dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time is such that the dynamic display of the hold information, which is usually a big hit, is finished before the time when the display is finished, the movement of the hold information, which is usually a big hit As a typical display mode, dynamic display mode determination means is determined by the bonus start adjustment means.

  Thus, if the dynamic display time of the adjustment dynamic display mode is set so as to narrow the difference between the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot and the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot, the player performs the bonus game with good tempo It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play more lottery games.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side of the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which saw through the inside from the back side of the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, (b) is a reservation symbol display displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the display mode before rearranging and after rearranging. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, a special symbol holding ball storage area, a special symbol holding ball execution area, a normal symbol holding ball storage area, and a normal symbol holding ball execution area. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the big hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, (C) is a figure which showed typically the jackpot classification table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is a figure which showed typically the random symbol per symbol table in 1st Embodiment typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the rearrangement reserve storage area in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area in 1st Embodiment typically. . (A) is a figure which showed typically the normal time special hitting variation pattern table in a 1st embodiment typically, and (b) showed the normal time special deviation variation pattern table in a 1st embodiment typically FIG. (A) is a figure which showed typically the time reduction and probability change special hitting change pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a model which shows time deviation and probability change special deviation change pattern table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed change display setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the special deviation variation pattern table for adjustment in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st continuous prize determination processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 2 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 5th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the large opening opening and closing process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement order determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the secondary retention rearrangement retention storage area update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. (A) is the see-through view from the front side of the sorting device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is the see-through view from the back side of the sorting device in the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning-route alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 11th Embodiment, (c) is a display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the modification of 11th Embodiment It is the figure which showed the area | region typically. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in 15th execution form. It is the flow chart which showed the 1st cautions notice processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 15th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 16th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the follow sort reserve storage area in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st notification lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st extension change prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd notification lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 17th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 18th embodiment, (b) shows the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of 18th embodiment. It is not shown schematically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the rearrangement reserve storage area in 18th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area in 18th Embodiment typically. . (A) is a figure showing typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of a main control device in an 18th embodiment, (b) is a time shortening and probability change special hits (disengagement in an 18th embodiment) FIG. 6 is a view schematically showing a part of a variation pattern table and a special variation (outlier) variation pattern table in a normal time. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in an 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fusion production lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 18th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of the main control unit in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of time reduction * probability change special hit variation pattern table of ROM of the main control unit in a 19th embodiment, time reduction * probability change special hit deviation variation table table. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 19th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 19th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the rearrangement reserve storage area in 20th Embodiment, (b) is a part of other memory areas in RAM of MPU of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. Are schematically shown. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a twentieth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st duplication per process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the large opening opening and closing process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot inside production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in twentieth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the follow sort reserve storage area in 21st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of normal time extra deviation variation pattern table in 21st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of time deviation and the special outlier fluctuation | variation pattern table for time variation and probability change in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement order determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the suborientation rearrangement reserving storage area update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the subordination rearranging display alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot or the predetermined reach, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61, 62, a first starting opening 63a, a first 2 The starting opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first start opening 63a, the second start opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by wood screws etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A sorting winning device 630 is provided at the lower center of the game area. FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the front. FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the back.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, in the sorting winning device 630, an ordinary electric wheeled product 64 is provided at the top. In the normal state, the ordinary electric character 64 is disposed with the opposing wings 64a and 64b standing upward at an interval (about 11 mm in diameter of the game ball) in which the game balls can enter approximately one ball. . The route through which the game ball enters the sorting device 630 is only the route passing between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 in the normal state (the blades 64a and 64b standing upward). The player first shoots the game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64.

  When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the passive distribution member 640 is disposed, and the accommodation ball 640a or 640b of the passive distribution member 640 receives the entered game ball. When the game ball is received by the housing section 640a, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 4A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first starting opening. Guide to 63a. Here, the passive distribution members 640 are configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right, respectively, and a magnet 640 c is provided on the boundary wall between the housing portion 640 a and the housing portion 640 b.

  In the base body 900 provided on the back side of the sorting winning device 630, the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 is disposed on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric role piece 64 and the base side magnet 900a is disposed. It is done. As shown in a top view of the sorting winning device 630 shown in FIG. 4C, the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a are configured to have mutually opposing polarities. In detail, the base-side magnet 900a is formed of a rod-like magnet fixed to the base body 900, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at its tip. The base-side magnet 900 a is disposed and fixed so that its tip end faces the passive distribution member 640 side.

  The magnet 640c of the passive distribution unit 640 is also formed of a rod-shaped magnet in the same manner as the base side magnet 900a, and is fixed to the passive distribution member 640 so that the tip end faces the base side magnet 900a. At a position where the passive distribution member 640 rotates and the boundary wall of the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b is directly above (the center line of the interval at which the opposing wings 64a and 64b can enter the ball approximately one ball) The base magnet 900a and the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 come closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the repulsion case, the stop of the boundary wall of the passive distribution member 640 may be at a position where it is just upward It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 640c is at a position (upper position) where the magnet 640c is on the center line between the blade 64a and the blade 64b of the normal motorized product 64, the passive distribution member 640 Due to repulsion, the passive distribution member 640 rotates to either the left or right side, and one of the housing portion 640 a and the housing portion 640 b receives the game ball entering the distribution device 630 (upper side of the gaming machine) Will turn to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the entering game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 640a and the accommodation portion 640b.

  Further, for example, the housing portion 640a receives the gaming ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left by the repulsion of the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900c, so that the gaming ball is guided to the first starting opening 63a. It is possible to prevent the distributing member 640 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 640a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the gaming ball to the first starting opening 63a, the accommodation portion 640b is in the state of facing upward, and then the gaming ball having entered the sorting device 630 is received by the accommodation portion 640b, and the gaming ball is The passive distribution member 640 is rotated about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of to guide the gaming ball to the second starting opening 63b. Thus, the passive distribution member 640 can alternately guide the gaming balls entering the distribution device 630 to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b and make a prize, and to be described later, a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the first drawing It is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from the winning of the second start opening 63b.

  On the central left side of the game board 13, a normal symbol start port 67 is provided. The normal symbol start port 67 is formed of a start port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of the game ball in a gate type. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening 67, a lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball having passed to the normal symbol starting opening 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is performed.

  When the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display portion 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, "o" and "x" After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit display). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display portion 88, the number of times of passage is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 Displayed by.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the second symbol display portion 88 is lighted and displayed as "o", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit. When the symbol which is a hit is displayed, the normal motorized symbol 64 is operated, and the blades 64a and 64b of the normal motorized symbol 64, which are normally maintained in the upright position, are substantially vertically erected. By moving the game ball into a substantially V-shape (reverse C shape) and guiding the game balls to the blades 64a and 64b, it is easy to enter the game balls into the sorting device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is dislocated, "x" which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is out is lit and displayed on the second symbol display section 88.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side top (the upper right of FIG. 2) of the game area A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a illuminates the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variable display has not been executed among the balls winning in the first starting opening 63a, the second starting opening 63b, and the normal symbol starting opening 67. It is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot and the error indication are also indicated by the corresponding lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37 b is configured by two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left side of the seven-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the seven segments blinks) until the fluctuation time (dynamic display time) has elapsed, which is determined based on the winning of the first start opening 63a. After that, it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, the symbol "-" is displayed, which indicates the outset in which one central segment is lighted. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the detachment such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation mode or a dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation patterns can be divided into a relatively long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time, as a reach variation pattern and a non-reach variation pattern. In this way, even if roughly classified according to a certain standard of time (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), the dynamic regarding the time information is also It corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, regarding the time information until the fluctuation start time, the time at which the accurate fluctuation start is also applicable, and the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern time information (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern Information on time information (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed until the start of fluctuation, etc.) determined based on whether or not

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, while performing the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) whether or not the big hit, also the determination of the big hit type Do. As jackpot types determined here, 15R normal jackpots, 15R probability variation jackpots, and 2R probability variation jackpots are prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the jackpot type (in the present embodiment, "9" for 15R normal jackpot, "7" for 15R probability variation jackpot, "3" for 2R probability variation jackpot, for example) Is displayed).

  Here, “15R normal jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8 (b)) for low probability, which will be described later. It is the hit when the game is set. The "15R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot of the maximum round number of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time, which will be described later, is set. It is. The "2R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time, which will be described later, is set. It is.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 79 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b as a trigger, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display 37, the third symbol (first A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for performing variable display of a special symbol and a second special symbol is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, as shown in FIG. 5A, the left side In the display area Dm1, three symbol rows on the left, middle and right are displayed, showing a first special symbol which is one of the third symbols. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ((1) Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It makes a decorative display according to it. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Moreover, also in the 2nd special symbol which is one of the 3rd symbol, it is displayed similarly to the 1st special symbol in the right side display area Dm2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.5 (b) is the figure which illustrated the reordering front and after reordering of the reservation symbol display in an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is respectively constituted by 10 types of special symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777") variation display is performed, and the variation display The jackpot is configured to occur after the session is over.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in the upper display area Dm. And a display area for displaying the holding symbol (the number of holdings of the first lottery game and the second lottery game) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is configured to be displayable by being divided into the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Mainly, in the left side display area Dm1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a is variably displayed. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning of the second starting opening 63b is variably displayed.

  The left display area Dm1 displays three symbol rows L1, L2 and L3 for left, middle and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row L1 to L3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row L1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol, symbol rows R1, R2 and R3 are displayed, and variable display is similarly performed.

  In the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1. If the third symbol is stopped on the effective line by the combination of the big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols), the big hit moving image is displayed as the big hit.

  On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided laterally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further equally divided into eight reserved areas Ds1 to Ds8 of small areas in the left-right direction.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of three main symbols of the special symbol (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display region Dm in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, winnings on the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b are respectively suspended up to four times. When the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds) In the display area of the display area of the display area of the lowest number in the area where the reserved symbol is not displayed ("○" which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game is displayed in the reserved symbol display area of the left number) .

  In addition, if the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the "●" which is the holding symbol for the second lottery game is lowered, as in the case of winning in the first starting opening 63a. Displayed in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the side display area Ds.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. When the game balls enter the distribution winning device 630, the game balls are distributed in order to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution member 640 (see FIG. 4). In the state where the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and when there is no hold in the first lottery game, if the first start port 63a is won, whether or not the second special symbol is in the variable display Regardless of, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after being variably displayed in the left display area Dm1. On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol is variably displayed regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously configured to allow variable display simultaneously in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Therefore, the game machine balls that are alternately won are distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distribution winning device 630, so that the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. it can. Although it will be described later, since the first lottery game and the second lottery game are each executed by the lottery whether or not to execute the big hit game, the case of the big hit game lottery opportunity is executed only in the first lottery game The number of times of drawing can be increased by comparison, and the chance of the player getting a big hit can be increased.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the pachinko machine 10 comprised by two, the 1st lottery game and the 2nd lottery game, was explained, it is not restricted to it, 3 or 4 or more lottery games and the starting corresponding to it Naturally, it is also possible to provide a mouth and simultaneously configure each lottery result to be able to change display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting winning device 630 has a mechanical configuration (the sorting configuration of the gaming balls by the passive sorting member 640), but only one starting opening and every time the gaming balls win, Naturally, it may be configured to be alternately distributed to the start timing of the first lottery game and the start timing of the second lottery game. By configuring in this manner, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for distributing the game balls on the game board surface, and the game area can be effectively used.

  When the game ball wins on the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the first starting opening switch or the second starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, a lottery for a big hit is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls are won.

  If one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the other variable symbol is temporarily displayed in a variable display, the variable display is temporarily interrupted, and the jackpot game ( For example, in the case of 15 rounds usually a big hit, after the 15 rounds of jackpot game is finished, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued for the remaining fluctuation time.

  The remaining variable time variable display is displayed in a change mode dedicated to the remaining variable display so that the player can know that the remaining variable display is the remaining variable display for the suspended variable display. Further, as the variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display, the variation display mode is selected in accordance with the remaining variation time. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or less than the reference time (3 seconds or less in the present embodiment), the character "display the lottery result of the fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped!" 3 After displaying on the symbol display device 81 for the remaining fluctuation time, stop display is performed in a display mode indicating the determination result. Then, when the determination result is stopped and displayed, the characters “The lottery result of the temporary display has been displayed!” Are displayed, and continue to be displayed until the next change is started.

  On the other hand, when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), all the main symbols constituting the special symbol are variably displayed at a constant speed, and the character "temporarily stopped fluctuation" A notification mode indicating that the display is changing! Is displayed. After that, when the remaining fluctuation time has passed, the main symbols are simultaneously stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determination result.

  By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize that it is a continuation of the fluctuation display of the special symbol interrupted halfway, and can recognize that it is a lottery result of the fluctuation display which is interrupted. it can. Therefore, even if the variable display is interrupted on the way, the player can be prevented from playing the game with dissatisfaction, doubts and the like that the lottery has disappeared on the way.

  In addition, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, if the other special symbol is in the state of stopping the variable display, a new variable display Start is prohibited. When the big hit game is over, the variable display is set to be started again based on the winning on the corresponding starting openings 63a and 63b.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the occurrence of the jackpot is overlapped and the player can not concentrate on the jackpot game because the lottery game is executed in the other special symbol even during the jackpot.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been suspended is resumed, the character is informed of that to the character, but the present invention is not particularly limited thereto. Of course, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, as shown in the display mode that shows that the player has resumed (for example, displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display has been resumed by the character etc.), the suspended change Of course, notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to the resumption of display. By doing this, the player can correctly recognize that the suspended variable display has been resumed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display is interrupted. Although it is configured to stop the fluctuation display, but not limited to that, during the jackpot game, measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted, but the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued as it is, and the fluctuation time is measured after the jackpot game May be configured to change the display of the special symbol.

  By configuring in this way, since the special symbol is continuously changed and displayed during the jackpot game, the player can confirm that the other change display is continued without disappearing, You can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is in the variable display mode, the variable display is interrupted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display may be continued without interruption, and the lottery game may be executed as usual.

  By configuring in this way, even during the jackpot game, it is possible to further perform the lottery game, and it is possible to play more lottery games in a short time, and the player performs many lottery games. It will be possible to do. In such a configuration, when one of the special symbols during the big hit game is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, the execution of the big hit game is delayed until one big hit game is ended (stock ), The player can play the jackpot game continuously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display mode in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been interrupted is displayed in the fluctuation mode exclusively for remaining fluctuation display. Not only that, the remaining variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display. Specifically, when the remaining variable display is performed on the 7-segment display 37b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed while being blinked. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed by being lit with the remaining color (for example, blue etc.) dedicated to the remaining variable display, thereby displaying the variable. By doing this, the remaining variation display is displayed on the player not only for the third symbol display device 81 but also for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Can be notified.

  Further, as in the case of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display mode may naturally be changed according to the remaining variation time.

  In addition, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked in a predetermined display mode “for example, alphabet h” in a predetermined cycle. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to inform the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

  A horizontally long rectangular shaped variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery regarding the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes the big win, the first stop pattern of the big hit is made after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. While turning on the symbol display device 37, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed in the corresponding display area (the left display region Dm1 or the right display region Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81, and occurrence of a big hit is shown . Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The open / close operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined by the determined type of jackpot, and for example, in the case of 15R normal jackpot, it is possible to repeat at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of the bonus game state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the game value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating a hit based on winning in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, The open / close operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the embodiment, until 30 seconds pass or 10 balls are won). Be done.

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing drive forward on the lower side of the opening / closing plate. . The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 is guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 2nd symbol display part 88, etc. Used in

  In the setting of the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol random number counter C1 used for lottery of the jackpot and a special hit type counter C2 used for selection of the jackpot symbol A variation pattern determination counter C3, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern are used. Further, the random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol display portion 88), and the initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main processing (S1000) (see FIG. 17). It is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, each counter value is stored in the RAM 203 for the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 where the counter value is stored for winning for the first starting opening 63a and the winning for the second starting opening 63b. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are each provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when the game ball wins during the period when it is possible to draw the special symbol, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the big hit of the special symbol is not being played, each counter value Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1, and when the gaming ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2. On the other hand, during a period in which the lottery of special symbols such as during the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, or during the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not possible, the game ball can be used as the first starting opening 63a or In the case where the second starting opening 63b is won, if the number of holdings for the starting opening that has won is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and the starting opening is won Are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning starting opening is the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired but the winning balls (in the present embodiment, 5 game balls) Only) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, although the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for each of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is not limited thereto, but may be four each, or the upper limit value You may choose not to

  Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The special random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399) It has a back configuration. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special random number counter C1 is a loop counter which can take values of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning combination) At timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 corresponding to the winning starting opening of the RAM 203. The value of the jackpot random number is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the special punch random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined that the jackpot is matched if the value of the random number that will be the jackpot (in the present embodiment, “7” at low probability, “0 to 9 at high probability”).

  The special per random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (per wins) that will be the big win is 1 at low probability, its value “7” is 10 at high probability, its value “0 to 9” is big hit It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  The special hit type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment) After reaching, it is configured to return to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, regularly (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball wins in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning combination) At the timing, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning starting opening is stored.

  Here, if the value of the special per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is not a large random number, that is, it is a random number falling out For example, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if it is a random number in which the value of the special random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation display effect The type is that of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern at the big hit and the stop type are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203c.

  The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 stores various tables. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the first jackpot random number counter table 202a, and FIG. 8C an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202 b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds Special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 8 (b)) for low probability time after the big hit game is set "15R normal big hit", maximum The number of rounds is 15 rounds and special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time is set after the big hit game "15R probability variation big hit", maximum round number is high probability after big hit game in 2 rounds There is a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B) for the time is set.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the special hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8C, the value "60 to 99" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, and the value "0 to 49" of the special hit type counter C2 for the 15R probability variation jackpot Are associated, and the value “50 to 59” of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 in which the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "20", 15R probability variation jackpot is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "80", 15R normal big hit as the big hit type) It is determined.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of about 40% when it is a jackpot, and 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 50%, and 2R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 10%. A jackpot type table 202b is defined to be selected.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 100, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100).

  The values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the ball is the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening. The first special symbol or the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner at the timing of winning (start winning) at 63b, and is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b When various counter values of the holding balls are not stored, they are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal-time special hit variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the special hit variation pattern table 202d for normal use is a case where the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state) The 15R jackpot only and the 2R probability variation jackpot referred to when the 15R jackpot is determined if the 15R jackpot is determined if the 15R jackpot is determined if the 2R probability jackpot is determined. Is divided into groups based on the 2R probability variation jackpot referred to in the case where is determined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the special random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (per win value), it is stored in the execution area according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area The fluctuation pattern group is selected from the fluctuation pattern group corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 stored in the execution area.

  There are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of premier reach in the 15R jackpot, and the correspondence with the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for normal reach, 11 to 95 for various super reach, and 96 for various Premier reach. It is about 100. The Norlech variety is a reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a stop at the bitter end). A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, a reach extending from long reach or normal reach), and various Premier Reach variations are longer than super reach The first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after the time reach (for example, the reach that develops further after the super reach or the special reach where the destination from the normal reach differs from the super reach, etc.) Is a variation pattern not selected.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there are many things that effect contents differ also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, the reach which changes the back image rapidly and is displayed, and a certain character There is a reach to be displayed suddenly, etc. In addition, there are multiple reach with different effect contents such as one to which a notice effect before the start of variable display is added, and one to which an effect to be a big hit by re-change display is added.

  In the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3. The 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is, for example, a special variation pattern in which the special symbol is stopped at "341" to notify that the 2R probability variation has been won.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal out-of-time extraneous change pattern table 202 e stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e in the normal game state is a normal reach which is relatively out of various types of normal outliers that become completely out as a stop type at the time of outliers, and a normal reach is relatively short. It consists of various types of normal reach (short) that are out of the normal reach, various types of normal reach that are relatively out of normal reach with a relatively long fluctuation time, and various types of super reach that are out of super reach.

  When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 29”, the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and each fluctuation pattern group is normally out of various types, and in the case of “30 to 60”, normal reach (short The various types of super reach are determined in the case of various types of "61 to 89", in the case of various types of normal reach (long) and of "90 to 100".

  For various types of out-of-normal-time, normal out-of-range A and normal out-of-range B are set in which the variable display ends in a short time and reach is not established. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 100", the fluctuation pattern of the normal deviation B is selected when the normal deviation A is "101 to 198". In addition, a variation pattern of normal reach shorts A to C is set in various out-of-order normal reach (short) types in which the reach is established but the variation time is short. If the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 70", if the normal reach short A is "71 to 128", the normal reach short B is "129 to 198". The variation patterns of the normal reach short C are respectively selected. Similarly, fluctuation patterns are selected for various normal reach lengths and various super reach types.

  FIG. 11A is a view schematically showing the time variation / precise variation special hit variation pattern table 202 d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 11B is a view schematically showing the time-shortening / probability-variation special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202 e stored in the ROM 202. When the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a in the big hit random number table 202a and the special hit variation pattern table 202d for short time and probability change special hit change pattern table 202d It is a table for a variation pattern selection which is selected when the state is set to the probability variation gaming state) and the time reduction counter 203k is set to a value of "0" or more (hereinafter, the gaming state is set to the time reduction gaming state). .

  The selection of the variation pattern is similar to that of the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d and the normal extra deviation variation pattern table 202e, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, about special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e, although only one type was explained here, special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and special for the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively Outset fluctuation pattern table 202e is set, and the distribution of fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol Thus, even if the value of the same variation pattern determination counter C3 is acquired, the same variation pattern is not selected. By configuring in this manner, different variation patterns can be easily selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and various effects can be made.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The ordinary random number counter C4 (see FIG. 8D) is configured as a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). At the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67, it is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol random number table 202c (FIG. 8 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is When it matches the value of the random number which becomes a hit set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit.

  Also, when the per-round random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-round normal random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate) . The number of random numbers to be won is 24, in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5 to 28”. Also, in the high probability gaming state, it is 200, and its range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state, it is determined to be won when the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", and in the high probability gaming state, the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 Is determined to be won when the symbol is in the range of "5-204", and the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88 as a stop symbol (second symbol) and the symbol of the ordinary electric role item 64 is displayed. In the normal gaming state, the blades 64a and 64b are opened twice for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment) and in the high probability gaming state for a predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment). The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

  When the gaming ball passes the normal symbol starting port 67, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in progress, and when each counter value based on the holding ball is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Also, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner or when the random number value corresponding to the holding ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit (4 pieces in this embodiment) Is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the number of times of holding (normal symbol hold 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, and the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or the previous hold is made by digesting the hold. When data is shifted to the area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored reserved area is set to on. Whether or not the data is stored in the reserve area, or whether the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is determined depending on which reserve area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that a common various counter value might be selected about the lottery of a 1st lottery game and a 2nd lottery game, but a 1st lottery game (1st special symbol) and a 2nd lottery With the game (the second special symbol), it sets various counters for exclusive use, respectively and updates with different value by making the update opportunity and the initial value etc of the various counters of the 1st lottery game and the 2nd lottery game different. Naturally, it may be configured by the counter value to be calculated.

  In this way, by configuring, even when the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to acquire counter values of different values, It is possible to suppress a failure that the fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the judgment result of success or failure are synchronized.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to suppress the problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized, and various effects. It can be performed. Further, storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM with a small storage area or the like) can be made.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  RAM 203 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the first special symbol holding ball number Counter 203e, second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, time reduction counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, First big hit flag 203o, second big hit flag 203p, first fluctuation stop flag 203q, second fluctuation stop flag 203r, first fluctuation time storage area 203s, second fluctuation time storage area 203t, reordering storage area 203u, others It has at least memory area 203v .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on winning in the first starting opening 63a up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values obtained based on the game ball winning in the second starting opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). Storage area for

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and the first special symbol is the first special symbol when the variable display is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the storage area is a storage area where the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d are for counters as the start winning combination is detected. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the change pattern determination counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 7) are respectively stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting opening 63a in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and The special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter 203a3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4 of the holding ball storage area 203a are respectively stored. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer and each corresponding, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. They are similarly stored in the area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the above-described first to execute processing such as a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it corresponds to one start winning combination The data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 f are detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of holding balls (number of waits) of the fluctuation display effect (the fluctuation display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f are set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the holding ball number) is a counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a based on the game ball having won in the first starting opening 63a. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the starting winning combination is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one. It is.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (that is, the holding ball number) is a counter value in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b based on the game ball having won in the second starting opening 63b. Is notified, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the starting winning combination is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by one. It is.

  If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are respectively stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 1 Refer to the data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d in the first change start process (Fig. 16, S203) or the second change start process (Fig. 20, S206) Then, based on the reference data, a jackpot lottery is performed, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation display effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (refer to FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning" The variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (based on the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 88) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (waiting number) of each up to four times. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol starting opening 67. By the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after power on, zero is set as an initial value. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 29, S106).

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) is detected along with the detection of the start winning to the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 detects that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the counter buffer normally receives the random number counter C4. A value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203 j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203 h 2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4, normal symbol flag 203j) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding ball is stored in the order from the earliest holding area among the holding areas where the data is vacant, in the order of passing (start winning) to the normal symbol starting opening 67 Be done.

  In addition, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation indication production of normal design on the basis of starting winning a prize, normal counter design sphere execution area 203i, each counter value is housed, the winning lottery of the normal design and the 1st It is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute processing such as winning lottery or setting of display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88 Of the data corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (general hit random number counter C4 value), data corresponding to one starting winning combination, this normal symbol holding ball Shift to execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal random number counter C4 is stored and indicating that the symbol is being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. It is set to ON when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. Also, if the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next pending area (the pending area corresponding to the pending count for which the pending count has been reduced and the number of pending tasks reduced), the value of the pending area before being shifted The normal symbol flag 203j is set to off, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area that has been shifted and stored is set to on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop processing, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to off.

  The time saving counter 203k is a counter area where the time saving count 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the number of times of time saving is set, a random number per table for high probability time is set in the normal pattern per random number table 202c until the number of times of time saving is set to 0. Also, when the symbol "o" indicating the hit of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the open time (in the present embodiment, the wings 64a and 64b of the normal motorized character 64 are longer than the normal gaming state) , 1s) The operation of opening is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time saving gaming state.

  The hour reduction counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops fluctuating display, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203k becomes 0, it shifts from the time reduction gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the ordinary symbol When the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability of per random number counter 202c is set, and the symbol "○" showing the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display section 88, the open time is 0.2 s With the setting of the number of times of opening, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 are opened.

  The probability change flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a flag that is set on based on the end of the jackpot game when it is notified that the 15R probability variation big hit game is won and the 15R probability variation big hit game is executed It is. On the other hand, when the probability change flag 203m is set to ON and the stop display is made with the first special symbol or the second special symbol to indicate the jackpot (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the jackpot game, by the jackpot type It is set to on if it is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

  The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired special hitting random number counter C1 is a hit based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired special hitting random number counter C1 is a hit based on winning in the second starting opening 63b. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The first change stop flag 203 q is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is determined to be a hit while the first special symbol is in a change display. In a second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S717) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S603), the variable display of the first special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop processing is performed.

  The second stop flag 203 r is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S <b> 407) to be executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, the flag is set to ON. Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S 803), the variable display of the second special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop process is executed.

  The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area where the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variation time storage area 203s counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol is displayed for variation display, and the variation time (2 ms in one interruption) is measured.

  The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area where the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). When the second special symbol is started to change, the second change time storage area 203t counts the change time (counts the number of interrupts), and the change time (2 ms in one interrupt) is measured.

  In the present embodiment, the first variation time storage area 203s and the second variation time storage area 203t measure the variation time by counting the number of interrupts, but the invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the time measurement data may be acquired as needed to measure the fluctuation time. In addition, it is also possible to store the fluctuation time in which the fluctuation display is performed in advance and to subtract that value as needed.

  The rearrangement reserve storage area 203u is the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of reservation areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

  FIG. 9A is a view schematically showing the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u. Reordering storage area 203u corresponds to the pending data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each suspension frequency of suspension areas 1 to 8 is stored, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol during variation display And each determination data is stored in the during-variation data storage area.

  In each reserve area 1 to 8 of pending data, a success / failure determination result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern type storage area 203u3, a variation order storage area 203u4, a variation start time storage area 203u5, a prefetch probability change flag 203u6 Are provided respectively. The storage areas 1 to 8 are sequentially stored from the storage area 1 in the order in which the respective storage balls are established (the overall formation order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined). That is, with the pachinko machine 10, the holding areas 1 to 8 combine the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol, and indicate the formation order in which the holding ball is established.

  In the variable display data storage area, in correspondence with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a pass / fail judgment result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern storage area 203u3, and a prefetch probability change flag 203u6 are provided respectively. It is done.

  Judgment result storage area 203u1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the result of the determination in advance of the success or failure of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

  The jackpot type storage area 203u2 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

  The variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). The storage area is a storage area in which the type of the determined variation pattern is stored based on various data stored in. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the data of the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is also used as data to identify whether it is data of

  The variable display order storage area 203u4 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in the storage area. In addition, specifically, the fluctuation display start order is determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of the newly stored holding ball, and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each holding ball stored in advance. .

  The variation start time storage area 203u5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the time until each data of the calculated reserve areas 1 to 8 actually starts variable display is stored based on the various data stored in. It should be noted that, when this fluctuation display start time is stored in the hold area, it is updated as needed in other processing (S112) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  It is predicted that the type of stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S933) to be described later (predetermined (predicted) Storage area that is set to ON and stored. In addition, every time data is shifted to and stored in the upper reservation area, all the areas before the shift are cleared to 0, so that the pre-read probability change flag storage area 203 u 6 is set to off. That is, the pre-read probability variation flag storage area 203u6, which has been set to ON once, is shifted to the in-fluctuation data storage area, and is overwritten by (shifted) new data in the in-fluctuation data storage area. . In addition, in the state where the game machine is powered on and the process of clearing the RAM is executed, the initial value is set to off.

  When power failure occurs in the pachinko machine 10, each piece of data in the sorting reserve storage area 203u is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read out from the stored backup area and set.

  The other memory area 203v is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  As described above, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and a holding ball is generated, each of the holding balls according to the formation order of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of the holding ball are stored. Therefore, the winning a prize command is generated based on the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and the voice lamp control device 113 establishes the holding combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the winning command. A command to be output to the display control device 114 can be generated so as to perform the hold symbol display in order. Therefore, it is possible to display the holding symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also determined and stored in relation to the establishment order, the voice lamp control device 113 is also received by generating a winning command based on the variable display start order. Based on the win command, it is possible to determine the holding order of each hold and the actual variable display start order.

  In addition, since the fluctuation start time of each hold is stored in each hold area, and the time is managed (updated as time passes), it is easy to start the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored hold data. It can be determined.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is opened and closed forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display portion 88, and the specified winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for driving the motor or a solenoid for driving the motorized part is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Various processing is executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34), Setting control of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. The voice output device 226 is controlled to instruct the display control device 114 so that the reserved symbol display being displayed is rearranged and displayed in the order of the variable display start.

  Further, the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since winning in the winning opening is an important factor in determining the gaming state, it is necessary to change the flow of balls by vibration and to prevent the winning in the winning opening intentionally. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the player or the like has given vibration to the pachinko machine 10, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and includes an error type including an error type. It transmits to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2, a first change start flag 223c1, a second change start flag 223c2, a second 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, second stop type selection flag 223d2, second variation stop flag 223e, second variation stop flag 223f, first variation resume flag 223g, second variation resume flag 223h, first variation A variation time storage area 223i, a second variation time storage area 223j, a second post-sorting storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is, like the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, the first special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a variation display (dynamic display) of a symbol and counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the variation display effect held in the main control unit 110 up to 4 times.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 is, like the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, the second special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a variation display (dynamic display) of a symbol and counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the variation display effect held in the main control unit 110 up to 4 times.

  The first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1502). On the other hand, when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1602).

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1505). On the other hand, when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1602).

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1612).

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1612).

  The first variation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. When the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from the main control device 110, it is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1702).

  The second variation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. When the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from the main control device 110, it is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the processing for stopping the variation display of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1706).

  The first variation resuming flag 223g is a flag indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control unit 110, the sub first restart flag 223g is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1710).

  The second variation resumption flag 223h is a flag indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control unit 110, the second restart flag 223h is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1714).

  The first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This storage area is stored at a value synchronized with the first variation time storage area 203 s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms and the fluctuation time actually displayed is stored.

  The second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This storage area is stored at a value synchronized with the second fluctuation time storage area 203t in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Based on the variation display start of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the variation time actually changed and stored is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k has data similar to the sort reserve storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110. Is a storage area stored based on the winning command output from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113.

  FIG. 9B is a view schematically showing the sub sort reserve storage area 223 k. The follow sort reserve storage area 223k stores various data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol while being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the reserve area for pending data from the reserve area 1 to the reserve area 8 And a storage area of data during variable display. The respective reserve areas are a success / failure determination result storage area 223k1, a big hit type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a second reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6, a sorting flag 223k7 The respective data extracted from the received winning command are stored in the corresponding reserved area. In addition, each time the display variation pattern command for starting the variation display of the special symbol is generated, the data of the reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area 223k is shifted and stored in the immediately preceding reserve area. In addition, in the case of the first special symbol, the hold data of the reserve area 1 is in the storage area of the first special symbol in the changing data storage area, and in the case of the second special symbol, the second special symbol in the changing data The data are respectively shifted and stored in the storage area.

  Judgment result storage area 223k1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area that is extracted and stored from the received winning command as a result of having determined in advance whether the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the data has passed or not. Information on the result of determination of success or failure extracted from the winning command is one of the results of determination of result on or off of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holding times (the corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding memory area 203u of the main controller 110). It is stored in 223k1.

  The jackpot type storage area 223k2 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area that is extracted and stored from the received winning command, the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2.

  The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area stored by extracting the type of the determined fluctuation pattern from the received winning command based on various data stored in. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the data of the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is also used as data to identify whether it is data of

  The variation order storage area 223k4 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). This is a storage area which is extracted and stored from the received winning command based on the stored various data and the actual change display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8.

  The variation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Based on various data stored in the storage area, the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 actually calculated starts changing display from the received winning command is a storage area to be stored . Note that this variable display start time is updated as needed in the hold number display process (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when stored in the hold area. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated data of each of the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start fluctuating display, but the invention is not limited thereto. Each counter value for calculating time (for example, the kind of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol during fluctuation (such as the number of interruptions)) and the start of fluctuation display It is good also as a command corresponding to time until it becomes.

  The secondary reading probability change flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored big hit type storage area 223k2 is 15R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit.

  The sorting flag 223k7 indicates that the player is the holding symbol (the holding symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated) for which the player has requested the sorting of the holding symbol display by operating the frame button 22. It is a flag.

  As described above, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63a and a holding ball is generated, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are based on the data extracted from the winning command. The various determination data of each holding ball are memorize | stored according to the formation order of the holding ball which put together. Therefore, the display control device is such that the voice lamp control device 113 performs the holding symbol display in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the data of the follow sort holding storage area 223k. A command to be output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to display the holding symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In addition, based on the winning command, the follow sort hold storage area 223k is updated with data synchronized with the sort hold storage area 203u of the main control unit 110, and there is a change in hold data (new hold being established, etc.) Also, data can be synchronized and updated sequentially.

  The other memory area 223 m is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) properly.

  When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores each data of the reordering storage area 203 u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data of the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and each corresponding suspension area of the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u or being changed It is stored in the data storage area.

  Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), similar to the winning command generated in the first pre-reading update process (FIG. 26, S939), based on the reordering storage area 203u stored and read back up data. All the winning commands are generated and output to the voice lamp control device 113, whereby data synchronized with the same sorting storage area 203u is set in the secondary sorting storage area 223k.

  Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting a prize command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data of the sorting reserve storage area 203u and the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k are also recovered from the time of power failure. Although the configuration for synchronizing has been described, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 backs up each data of the slave sort reserving storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs as well as the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Naturally, it may be stored as

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) depressed when the power is turned on (power is applied while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and various lotterys such as winning and selection of fluctuation patterns for the winnings. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, the lottery of whether to set the game operation suggestion setting is sub-controlled The control load of the main control device 110 can be lightened by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

  The control substrate of the main controller 110 and the audio lamp controller 113 is covered by a box called a substrate box, which is formed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member can not be easily separated. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (? It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an opening mark such as whether the member forming the through hole is broken or the sealing member is broken by clamping. .

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the game ball enters the distribution device 630 and is distributed by the passive distribution member 640 and the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired and acquired After the lottery and the determination of the fluctuation pattern and the like are performed based on the respective counter values, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Variable display (dynamic display). In addition, when the game ball enters the distribution device 630 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is distributed by the passive distribution device 640 and wins the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value (C1 to C3) is displayed for fluctuating display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery play machine, as in the case of winning in the first starting opening 63a. And CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be simultaneously variable display by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, respectively. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, in the 7-segment LED on the left side of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and the 7 on the right In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed on the left side display area Dm1, and the second special on the right side display area Dm2. The variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. By configuring in this manner, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. .

  When the game ball wins in the first starting opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), the respective counter values (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winnings Since the first lottery game for variably displaying the lottery result can not be executed immediately, each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, an aspect (for example, one of the holding number "1" of the first special symbols of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37) The light emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is updated (the number of holding balls is incremented by 1).

  When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. In the winning command, it is possible to identify which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b the winning is to be made, and it is possible to identify what number of holding balls (holding number).

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prize command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pending information such as the number of pending items and information about the starting opening which has won from the received command, and based on the pending information, the third symbol display device A process of displaying a reserved symbol in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) corresponding to the lower display region Ds at 81 is executed. If this holding symbol is a holding symbol corresponding to the holding information of the first special symbol (the first starting opening 63a) as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the "特別" is the second special symbol (the second starting symbol (the second starting symbol). If it is a holding symbol corresponding to the holding information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each holding information (one holding symbol for one holding) if it is a holding symbol.

  Similarly, while the second special symbol is variably displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is acquired, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area The value is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is updated. Then, the holding symbol indicating that the holding information is stored is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined with the game balls that have won. One example shown in FIG. 12 will be specifically described. First, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a variable display, the first special symbol has a remaining 10s variation time, and the second special symbol has a remaining 5s variation time. It shows. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, a pending symbol “in the pending symbol display area Ds1 indicating that it is the pending information of the second special symbol (pending information based on winning in the second starting opening 63b)“ ● "" indicates that the holding symbol display area Ds2 is the holding information of the first special symbol The holding symbol "○" indicates that the holding symbol display area Ds3 is the holding information of the second special symbol " A held symbol “o” indicating that “●” is the held information of the first special symbol is displayed in the held symbol display area Ds4. In this case, it is shown that the order of holding symbol display area Ds4 is from the holding symbol display area Ds1 in order from the holding symbol display area Ds1 in the order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are won.

  In other words, after the game ball wins in the second start opening 63b, it wins in the first start opening 63a, and then the game ball wins in the second start opening 63b and then the first start opening 63a. It shows that it did.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in each reserve data, the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the suspension becomes the variation start is predicted and stored in advance (the type of the variation pattern to be determined is stored) Has been Then, since it is the suspension of the second special symbol stored in the winning order first (the reserve area 1 is appropriate in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u), the remaining of the second special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (5 s) elapses, the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds after, since the fluctuation display starts. Also, since it is the suspension of the first special symbol that is stored in the second winning order (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 2 is appropriate), the remainder of the first special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (10 s) elapses, the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds after, since the fluctuation display starts. Next, since it is the suspension of the second special symbol that is stored in the third winning order (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 3 is appropriate), the second special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (40 s) of the suspension data stored first in the winning sequence elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (5 s), the fluctuation display start time is calculated, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since it is the suspension of the first special symbol that is stored in the fourth winning sequence (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 4 is appropriate), the first special symbol currently displayed in variation is When the fluctuation time (10 s) of the suspension data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10 s), the fluctuation display start time is calculated, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 20 seconds later.

  In this manner, the fluctuation display start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is calculated in the order of establishment in the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and the fluctuation display start time is, in ascending order, based on the fluctuation display start time. And the variable display order is assigned.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 at this timing, the holding symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is shown in the sort display mode shown in FIG. The symbol display is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol in the winning order third (the winning symbol display of the fourth winning order is cut in front of the reserved symbol display of the winning order third) and displayed.

  FIG. 13 shows that the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 25) when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63 a 1s after the state of FIG. 27, it is the figure which showed typically the process which determines the fluctuation | variation display start order of the retention symbol newly memorize | stored in S914).

  Since FIG. 13 shows the state after 1 s from FIG. 12, the first special symbol in the variation display has a remaining variation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining variation time of 4 s. In addition, the fluctuation start time of each reserve area of the sort reserve storage area 203u is also updated.

  Holding of the newly established first starting opening 63a (first special symbol) is the fifth winning order, and each data is stored in the holding area 5 in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u. First, the same as the newly stored first special symbol, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation fluctuation time of the first special symbol of winning order 2 and 4 are newly added, respectively. The time when the hold of the first special symbol that has been established (stored) becomes the variable display start is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

  Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the post-reordering order (variation display start order) is added in the order of the start of the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation display start time of each reserve area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 to request the sorting of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after sorting in FIG. 13, the winning symbol fourth and fifth reserved symbols are displayed. Is rearranged with the third winning symbol display in the winning order (the fourth and fifth winning symbol displays in the winning order are cut in front of the third pending symbol display in the winning order) and displayed.

  In this manner, each time a suspension occurs, the variable display start time is calculated, and the sort order is determined, whereby the player performs an operation (the operation of the frame button 22) to request the sort. In the case of having made, it is possible to quickly display the reserved symbol display after sorting.

  Also, the fluctuation patterns of the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot tend to be longer than the fluctuation patterns selected when the variation time is out. As shown in FIG. 13, the first hold of the winning order has a long fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Therefore, the holding of the same second special symbol established after that, the variable display start time will be later than the holding of the first special symbol established later, and if reordering, a long fluctuation time is selected Behind the held symbol display, a type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) different from the hold whose long fluctuation time is selected is displayed collectively. Therefore, the more the number of the held symbol display displayed by cutting into the subsequent held symbol display area of the held symbol display, the more the player holds the expectation of the big hit for the previous held symbol display, and the player Sorting can be done with the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, the interest in the game increases and the game can be continued without getting tired.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process (FIG. 32) activated upon power-on and a main process (FIG. 33, S1200) executed after the startup process (this embodiment) There is a timer interrupt process (Fig. 14) activated in 2 ms cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (Fig. 31) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the start-up process (FIG. 32) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200) will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), a command etc. to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, etc. is generated based on various processes. It temporarily stores in the ring buffer for command transmission. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the determination command and the like set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, the special winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a prescribed number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, the processing for reading various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is changed to the RAM 203. In the corresponding counter buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the change type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the stop type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum In the embodiment, when reaching 399, 99, 100, 198, 239), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Also, when the special per-random number counter C1 or the per-normal random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the common initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is the special per-random number counter C1 or the per-normal random number counter The initial value of C4 is read, and the initial value is set to the special random number counter C1 or the ordinary random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37, and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, etc. (S107), and then, a start winning process is executed in association with the winning of the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the start winning process (S108), execute the normal symbol variation process which is the variation process of the normal symbol for the game ball having passed the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S109), and then the normal symbol starting aperture 67 Through gate processing for the game ball having passed (S10). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and the details of the through gate processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for executing control relating to the launch of the game ball is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the launch control process (S111), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is released under the condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. Then, when the ball firing is on, the information of the ball firing signal is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball firing signal to the firing control device 112. As a result, the ball emission signal is transmitted to the emission control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol variation process (S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) performs various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by the predetermined control In the aspect, the variable display can be simultaneously controlled by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, or the control of stopping display in the display mode indicating the determination result is executed. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described below.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), it is first determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 17, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display has elapsed, a symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game The process of stopping the variable display and the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big hit, and when the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed, the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display Is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, while processing for resuming the variable display is executed, the temporary stop If the first special symbol holding ball number storage area 203a does not store holding data (various counter values), the jackpot determination based on the holding data and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed. .

  After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S107) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display mode, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), the specified fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display When time passes, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game and the fluctuation display being stopped with the first special symbol indicating the jackpot, the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed When being done, processing of temporarily stopping the second special symbol in the variable display is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variable display mode, the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described later in detail, but, similar to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is the process of resuming the variable display while the temporary data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number storage area 203b when it is not temporarily stopped, The jackpot determination based on the pending data and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed. Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301). Whether or not the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is determined by whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped although the variation time (variation pattern) is set. . If it is determined that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301: Yes), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is resumed (S302). For the variation time of this first special symbol, when the variation pattern etc. is selected when the variation display etc. is started in the first special symbol variation display selection process (FIG. 18, S310) described later. The measurement start of the fluctuation time is set to. When the variation pattern is selected, a variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Further, the main control device 110 starts variable display of the first special symbol of the first display device 37 accordingly. The variable display of the first special symbol (the 7-segment LED on the left side of the 7-segment display 37b) in the first symbol display device 37 is resumed (S303). A first special symbol variation restart command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to resume variable display of the first special symbol during temporary stop (S304). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S305). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S308) . A process of sequentially shifting data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a toward the execution area (S308). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S309). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) will be described in detail later, the game is set based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c Based on the state, a jackpot determination of whether or not a jackpot is performed. When it is determined that the determination result is a big hit, the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to on. Thereby, it is possible to recognize that the big hit game is started after the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol in the variably displayed can be temporarily suspended during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. It can be done.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S310). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) will be described later in detail, but based on the result of the pass / fail determination based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (during a definite change) (S402). Whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or not is determined depending on whether the probability change flag 203m is set to on. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is on (that is, the gaming state is high probability gaming state (during a definite change)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the large hitting random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is off (that is, the gaming state is not the low probability gaming state (not positive variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability Based on the determination, it is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  It is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S405). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON (S407). Thereby, in the big hit determination of the first special symbol, the determination result becomes a big hit, and when the variation display of the first special symbol notifying the determination result is stopped and displayed, temporarily if the second special symbol is changing. The variable display will be stopped.

  In this way, by setting the second fluctuation stop flag 203r to ON before the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, at the time of the fluctuation table stop of the first special symbol, whether to make the temporary stop of the second special symbol As compared with the case where it is judged whether or not it is possible to prevent the problem that the control processing is concentrated at the time of the fluctuation stop.

  A big hit symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2, and the first jackpot flag 203o is set on (S408). Thereby, in the first symbol display device 37, a symbol based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (for example, "7" for 15R probability variation jackpot) is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is off (S405: No), the first symbol display device 37 is detached and the symbol is set (S409). In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “−” indicating detachment is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37 b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be displayed in a stopped state when the variable display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S310), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S310) ). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S501: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S502). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S501: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set.

  The jackpot type table is determined according to the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S504). The jackpot classification table is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, the 15R jackpot table is determined in the case of 15R probability jackpot and 15R regular jackpot, and the 2R jackpot table is determined in the case of 2R probability jackpot . Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S505).

  The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 (S506). Here, a variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the audio lamp control device 113 is also set. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S507). The measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set.

  By starting measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol together with the setting of fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation time can be measured at the same time as the fluctuation start of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation time can be measured, and the fluctuation time is measured accurately can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), first, it is determined whether the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601). If it is determined that the first change stop flag 203 q is set to ON (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602). If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602: Yes), a temporary first fluctuation stop command is issued to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to temporarily stop the first special symbol. The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped, and the first fluctuation stop flag 203 q is set to be off (S 603). Then, the measurement of the first variation time is interrupted (S604).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to temporarily stop the first special symbol as well as the timing at which the second special symbol is stopped changing with the determination symbol that is a hit. Thus, the player can play the game concentrating on the jackpot game in the second lottery game.

  Further, since the measurement of the first fluctuation time is also interrupted in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, it is possible to accurately measure the remaining fluctuation time after the jackpot game.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the third symbol display device 81 stops the display mode in which the player can know that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. Specifically, a character such as "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" is displayed, or the player keeps changing display in the display mode in which the three main symbols on the left, center and right that make up the special symbol are shaken. Informing that the temporary stop is in progress. Moreover, the display mode which alert | reports temporary stop is not restricted to this, You may be notification modes other than that.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not the end time (that is, fluctuation display is in progress) (S602: No), the processing of S605 is executed. If it is determined that the first change stop flag 203 q is off (S601: No), it is determined whether the change time of the first special symbol during the change display is the end time (S605).

  If it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is not the end time (S605: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end time (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606). If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to OFF (S607). Various settings for the jackpot game are made based on the determined variation stop type (S 608). Specifically, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, the number of rounds where the big hit game is executed is set to 15 times, and the maximum opening time of the specified winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30s Ru. Further, in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 2 s.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S606: No), it is determined whether the time reduction counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S609). If it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S609: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 is decremented by 1 (S610). That is, the time saving counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol changes and is displayed once. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value smaller than 0 (that is, 0) (S609: No), the processing of S611 is executed.

  A first determination command instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to stop the change display of the first special symbol is set (S611). The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determined result of acceptance or rejection (S612). The value of the first fluctuation time storage area 203s is cleared to 0, and the first fluctuation time measurement value is cleared to 0 (S613). After this, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), the first special symbol for each of the processes from S301 to S310 with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) described above. , 1st fluctuation time measurement restart, 1st symbol display device 37, 1st special symbol fluctuation restart command, 1st special symbol holding ball number counter value (N1), 1st special symbol holding ball storage area, 1st special symbol In the jackpot determination process, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in each process from S701 to S710, the second special symbol, the second variation time measurement resumption, the second symbol display device 37, the second special symbol holding ball number counter It is the same as the value (N2), the second special symbol holding ball storage area, the second special symbol jackpot determination process, and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, except that they are respectively changed except that they are changed, so Substantially.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709), the first special symbol holding ball execution area for the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) described above with respect to the processing of S401. In the process of S711, in the second special symbol holding ball execution area, the second variation stop flag and the first jackpot flag for each process from S407 to S408 are the first variation in each process from S717 to S718. The description is omitted because it is the same except that the stop flag and the second jackpot flag are respectively changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S710), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 20, S206), will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) described above is the first for each of the processes from S507 to S508. The respective processes from the stop type command and the first fluctuation time measurement start to S727 to S728 are the same except that they are respectively changed to the first stop type command and the first fluctuation time measurement start, and therefore the explanation thereof is the same. I omit it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stop process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the first fluctuation stop with respect to each processing from S601 to S604 with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204) described above. In each process from S801 to S804, the flag, the first special symbol, the temporary first fluctuation stop command, and the first fluctuation time measurement suspension are the second fluctuation stop flag, the second special symbol, the temporary second fluctuation stop command, the second For each processing from S611 to S613, the first confirmation command, the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation time measurement value for each processing from S811 to S813 are changed to the suspension time measurement suspension, and the second confirmation command is performed. Since it is the same except that the second special symbol and the second variation time measurement value are respectively changed, the description is omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the control of the second special symbol is independently and parallelly executable, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  Moreover, compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, the pachinko machine 10 has variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if it is relatively short, in either of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed, and by raising the efficiency of the game, It is possible to suppress the problem that the state in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner is long.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, when the sorting device 630 is provided as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is relatively increased. If you do not shorten it, many overflows will not occur. However, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the lottery game is performed with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the fluctuation having a long fluctuation time is selected, the fluctuation of the special symbol is also performed on the other Can be performed many times in a short time because of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect of a sufficient fluctuation time as needed, and to prevent the player from getting bored more with the game.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed and displayed and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other is selected. Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In addition, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that shows the player that the temporary stop is in progress, the player can not lose the lottery game which was in the process of the variable display. It can be grasped and can play a big hit game in peace.

  In addition, since the sorting device 630 is provided in the pachinko machine 10, the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are easily winning alternately, and the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63a is configured. If the winning is biased to one of the openings 63b and the other starting opening with a small amount of holding is attempted to achieve a winning, the game ball also reaches the upper limit of the number of holdings in one starting opening 63a, 63b. It is possible to suppress the problem that many invalid balls are generated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and when the winning is achieved, the hold upper limit number (first starting opening 63a, It is a process which stores each acquired counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b up to 4) in each of the 2 starting openings 63b. In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Or based on each counter value memorized by each of the 2nd special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, processing which predicts a success / failure determination result, a variation pattern selected, etc. in advance is performed. The start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described below.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won in the first start opening 63a (start winning) (S901). Here, the winning of the first starting opening 63a is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won in the first starting opening 63a (there is a starting winning) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit value of the number of reservations for the first starting port 63a (that is, is the number of reservations being stored to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S904). A ball holding ball number command for notifying the sounding lamp control device 113 of the number of holding balls is set (S 905). Each value of special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, fluctuation pattern judgment counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 which are various counter values are read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding ball of RAM 203 is held. The special hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter storage area 203c3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 of the execution area 203c are respectively reserved (stored) (S906).

  Next, a first prefetch process is performed (S 907). The first read-ahead process (FIG. 25, S108) will be described in detail later, but the first special display is stored with the variable display start order based on the respective counter values newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The combination of the symbol and the second special symbol is used to determine in advance what number it is in advance, and further, from the variation display order and each stored counter value, the result of determination of success or failure, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. A process of determining

  Next, with respect to each processing of S908 to S914, the same processing as the processing performed for the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 63a performed in each processing of S901 to S907 is the second processing. The only difference is that the process is performed for the starting opening 63b, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first prefetch process (S907) which is one process of the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this first pre-reading process (S 907).

  In the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907), first, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. The values of the pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are read out (S921). The read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and variable display based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value) is started The variable display start time is calculated (S922).

  This fluctuation start time, as shown in FIG. 12, is a special symbol in the fluctuation display corresponding to the newly stored holding data (if it is the holding data based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second In the case of holding data based on the starting opening 63b, each holding data previously stored is determined based on the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol) and the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the newly stored holding data. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation time.

  Here, if the newly stored pending data is the pending data based on the first starting port 63a, the newly stored pending data is a previously held data based on the same starting port as the newly stored pending data. (Based on the first special symbol) pending data based on the first starting opening 63a stored in the first storage, while if the newly stored pending data is pending data based on the second starting opening 63b, it is stored first Data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second start port 63b being held.

  When the variable display start time is calculated, the order after the rearrangement is renumbered in the order of the earliest of the variable display start time of all the suspension data stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u (S 923). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, the renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the newly displayed variable data display start order of suspended data is interrupted by the variable data display start sequence of the previously stored data, it is natural that only the change order is renumbered. Good.

  It is determined whether the gaming state when the newly stored held data starts changing is the high probability gaming state (S924). With regard to the gaming state at the time of the start of fluctuation, although there is a thing that the read-ahead certainty change flag 203u6 is on, although it is stopped by the time when the newly stored hold data starts to fluctuate, It is determined by determining whether there is any. When it is determined that the gaming state when the newly stored suspension data starts to change is the high probability gaming state (S 924: Yes), the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202 a for high probability Based on the above, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state when the newly stored suspension data starts changing is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S924: No), the special symbol jackpot for low probability time Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S927).

  The first read ahead update process is executed (S926). The first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) will be described in detail later, but in the order in which the variable display is actually started, the result of the pass / fail judgment of the hold data (various counter values) stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u. , The jackpot type (whether or not it is a positive change) and the change pattern (change time) are stored (updated).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926).

  In the first prefetch update process (S926 in FIG. 26), first, it is determined whether the success or failure determination result predicted in the process of S925 or S927 in the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) is a jackpot (S931). If it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted by the process of S925 or S927 in the first pre-reading process (S907 in FIG. 25) was a big hit (S931: Yes), the predicted big hit is a positive change big hit (15R positive change big hit or It is determined whether it is the second R probability variation jackpot) (S932). If it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a probable variation jackpot (S 932: Yes), the prefetch probability change flag 203 u 6 of the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to ON (S 933) . Note that, when the data is shifted to and stored in the upper reserved area, the data in the reserved area before being shifted is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area, and therefore the prefetch change flag 203 u 6 is set to off. That is, the pre-read certainty change flag 203u6, which has been set to ON once, is shifted to the hold area in order, and the next new data is shifted and overwritten (0 clear) in the changing data storage area to set OFF. Be done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not a definite variation jackpot (that is, 15R is usually a jackpot) (S932: No), the processing of S934 is executed.

  The special hit type counter C2 for the hold data newly stored from the special hit change pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the change display (certainly changed or not or not) The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S934).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted in the process of S925 in the first pre-reading process (S 907 in FIG. 25) is out of step (S931: No), the gaming state (probability change or short Determined based on the values of the variation pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 newly stored in the suspension data from the special outlier variation pattern table 202e corresponding to whether or not A variation pattern is predicted (S935).

  The predicted success or failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in the area corresponding to the winning order in the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u (corresponding to the newly stored hold data) (S 936). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u is stored (changed in order) into the fluctuation display start order stored previously (S937) . When it is determined that the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203 u is interrupted (or changed in order) and stored in the fluctuation display start order stored previously. (S937: Yes), regarding pending data after the newly stored pending data variable display start order (the pending data of the order in which the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored pending data changes after being paused) Then, again, the success or failure, the type of stop, and the change pattern are predicted and updated (S938). Voice lamp control device for each data corresponding to all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203u based on the pass / fail type, the variation pattern, the winning sequence, the variation display start sequence, and the prefetching probability change flag 203u6 A winning command for notifying to 113 is generated for each pending data (S939).

  In this way, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and is held until the corresponding special symbol can be variably displayed, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation display is started. The determination of the fluctuation pattern and the like are executed, and the fluctuation start order in the hold is also calculated. Therefore, when the holding symbol display is displayed, the holding symbol display can be rearranged in the order of start of fluctuation by the operation of the player.

  Also, when a new hold is stored and the change start order is changed due to the hold (the newly stored change start order of the hold is interrupted and stored), the reordering storage area 203u is again performed. Among the stored reserve areas, since the acceptance judgment, the stop type, and the change pattern are updated with respect to the hold that is changed start after the newly stored hold is stopped, the new hold is stored. Thus, even when the gaming state at the start of the change (whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the low probability gaming state) changes, accurate data can be updated.

  In the present embodiment, when the newly stored pending change start order is interrupted and stored, the pending data in the pending area (appropriate judgment, stop type, variation pattern) is updated again. The present invention is not limited to this, and when a new hold is stored, determination may be made again for all the hold areas each time. By configuring in this way, data of the pending area can be updated each time pending is newly stored, and can be always composed of more accurate data.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the second prefetch process (S914) which is one process of the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this second pre-reading process (S914).

  The second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S914) pre-reads pending data based on the fact that the above-described first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) is won in the first starting opening 63a and is stored. While the variable display start order of the held data is determined to perform various determinations, the held data stored in advance is prefetched based on the held data based on the winning of the second start port 63b. The same processing is executed except that the variable display start order is determined and processing is performed to make various determinations, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  The first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) described above is also performed on the second prefetch update process (S946), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, 914) shown in FIG. (1) Various selection data are predicted based on the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data based on winning in the starting opening 63a, and it is processing to generate a winning command, while winning in the second starting opening 63b The same processing is executed except that it is different from the processing of predicting various selection data and generating a winning command based on the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data based on the same, so the detailed description is omitted. Do.

  In this manner, the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When (held data is stored), the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) is executed. The newly stored pending data is stored in the sorting pending ball storage area 203u in the order in which the variable display starts in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914). Since it is determined in comparison with the fluctuation display start time of each held data being played, the game state (whether or not the probability change is in progress) is accurately determined when the fluctuation display of the stored held data is started can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the success / failure determination result, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern displayed in a fluctuating manner. Therefore, the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second is also performed next when the pending data is newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation display start time of the newly stored suspension data can be accurately predicted based on the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of each suspension data predicted in the prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). As a result, the correct variation display start order can be predicted.

  In addition, when the variable display start order of the newly stored hold data is stored in the variable display start order of the hold data previously stored (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold is stored. For each hold data of the variable display start order after the data, the gaming state at the start of the variable display is predicted again by the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) Since the prediction (prefetching) of the pass / fail, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern is performed, the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored pending data from the winning command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, normal symbol variation processing (S109) which is one processing of timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the open time of the ordinary electric power role object 64, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1001). The middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) includes the period from when the second symbol display portion 88 displays a display indicating a hit until the opening / closing control of the normal motorized symbol 64 is performed. If it is determined that a normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S1001: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in contact (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display portion 88 is being variably displayed (S1002). If it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1003). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1017 and the processing of S1018, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  In the process of S1003, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1003: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1003 that the variation time of the normal symbol being variably displayed has elapsed (S1003: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display section 88 is set (S1004) . In the process of S1004, when the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S1018, the "O" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display portion 88 as the second symbol (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the process of S1017, the "x" symbol is displayed in the second symbol display section 88 as the second symbol, and the stop display (lighting It is set to be displayed. When the stop display is set by the process of S1004, the fluctuation display in the second symbol display unit 88 is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the first in the display mode set in the process of S1017 and S1018. 2 The stop display (lighting display) is made on the symbol display unit 88.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1005). If it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S1005: Yes), the start of the open / close control of the ordinary electric role item 64 is set (1006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out (S1005: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1002: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1007). After the process of S1007, the process of S1023 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1008). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1008: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1009).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the normal symbol holding 1 to the normal symbol holding 4 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, normal symbol holding 1 → execution area, normal symbol holding 2 → normal symbol holding 1, normal symbol holding 3 → normal symbol holding 2, normal symbol holding 4 → normal symbol holding 4 etc. Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i is acquired (S1011).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1012). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not in time reduction) (S1012: No), the hit determination value of the random symbol per random symbol table (FIG. 8 (d)) for low probability time Based on the result of step S1013, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1013). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour reduction counter 203 k is not 0 (that is, it is in the middle of a minute) (S1012: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress ( S1014). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1014: Yes), the processing of S1013 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1014: No), the hit judgment value of the normal symbol per random symbol table (FIG. 8 (d)) for high probability is used. Based on the determination result, the result of the determination is obtained (S1015).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (S1016). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is out) (S1016: No), a display mode of "x" which is a display mode at the time of out is set (S1017). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (that is, it is a hit) (S1016: Yes), the display mode of "o" which is the display mode at the time of hit is It is set (S1018).

  It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether the gaming state is time saving (including positive change)) (S1019). If it is determined that the time is not short (S1019: No), the open time of the blades 64a and 64b of the normal motorized character 64 is set to 0.2 s, and the open frequency is set to 1 (S1020).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is short (S1019: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1021). If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1021: Yes), the processing of S1020 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1021: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 is 1s, and the number of times of opening is two. It is set (S1020).

  It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether the gaming state is time saving (including a definite change)) (S1023). When it is determined that the time is short (S1023: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to 3s (S1024). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not short (S1023: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1025).

  Next, the through gate passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67 and there is a passing of the gaming ball. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 30, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031). Here, the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S1031: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1032). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1033).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1033: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S1031: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1033: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203 g is incremented by 1 (S1034). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt processing described above and the first normal symbol flag in the free reservation area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 (normal symbol holding 1 to normal symbol) It is stored in the first area of hold 4) (S1035). In the process of S1035, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is the case, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is the first, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is the first Area.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1041), and ends the NMI interrupt processing Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 32), first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (11605). (S1105: No), since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off has not ended normally, the processing also shifts to S1110 in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1110 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1110). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S1111, S1112), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1112). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1113.

  On the other hand, since the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), power supply interruption occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S1108) while keeping the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1109), and the process shifts to the processing of S1113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1113). Thereafter, the interrupt is permitted (S914). Then, the process proceeds to main processing (S1200) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1200). In the main process (S1200), the process of updating the counter and the process of powering off are roughly executed.

  In the main processing (FIG. 33, S1200), first, in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (100 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). The display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1204).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display unit 88 is executed (S1205). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired at the timing when it passes, and the second symbol display section 88 The variable display of the second symbol is implemented. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the normal random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the ordinary electric wheeled product 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1207) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1207: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the above-described S1201 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1207: No), the initial time within the predetermined time is reached, ie, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1208, S1209).

  First, updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1208). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1202 (S1209).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1205 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is variably displayed. Therefore, by repeatedly executing updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1) The initial value of the random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

  Further, in the process of S1206, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 31 has been executed, so that the processing at the time of the power-off after S1210 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1210), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1211). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1212), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1213), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1206 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1201 to S1205 or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1208 and S1209 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process that is started up with the power on and a main process (S1400) that is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 34, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1418 (see FIG. 35) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") of the current start-up process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 35), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1418. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1418 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process in S1418 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is performed (see FIG. 35, S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is performed, the process of S1308 is performed instantaneously when the power-off flag is turned on until the process of S1308 is performed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1418 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1109), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310). The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main processing (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1308 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1304 to S1306 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that, when the process of S1308 is reached via the processes of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). When the main process (S1400) is performed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1400) was started or the process of S1401 was performed last time (S1400). S1401), if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the processing of S1402 to S1410 is not performed, and the processing shifts to the processing of S1411. In the process of S1401, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process relating to display (rendering) in S1402 to S1410, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1411 and the command determination process of S1412 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1414 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1402). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1404). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1405 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update processing (S1406), although described later in detail, processing of updating the display of the held symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data of the follow sort hold storage area 223k. .

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearranging possible period (period in which a large hit game and a state without a hold are omitted) described later, the hold symbol display displayed in the hold establishment order starts variable display It is sorted and displayed in order.

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1411, in order to display the variation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set to transmit the image data, is executed. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), a temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). In this temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating temporary stop of the first special symbol from the main controller 110 or a temporary second fluctuation stop command indicating temporary stop of the second special symbol On the basis of having received the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Details of the temporary variation stop process (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), a hold reordering process is executed (S1413). In this pending sorting process, based on the winning command output from the main control unit 110, the pending symbol display is sorted and displayed based on the player's button operation from the winning order to the variable display start order. Execute the process The details of the pending reordering process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the pending reordering process (S1413), a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1414). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1414 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process (S1400) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main process (S1400) is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1414). This command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 Determine The details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main control apparatus 110 Further, it is determined whether the first variation pattern command has been received (S1501). Here, the first change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the first fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1501: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). A variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 as being the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether the second variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1505). Here, the second change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the second fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1504: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). A variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 to be the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second type-of-stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1507). If it is determined that the first or second type-of-stop command has been received (S1507: Yes), if the first type-of-stop command has been received, the first type-of-stop selection flag is set to ON. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to on. (S1508). A stop type (either 15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223 m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the first stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol Are stored so as to be identifiable.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1510). If it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol holding ball included in the received holding ball number command The value of the number counter f (ie, the number of balls held for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of balls held for the first special symbol is the voice lamp The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113 is stored, and the second special symbol holding ball number is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 (S1511).

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, whenever there is a starting winning combination , By the process of S1508, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 and the first (2) It can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, correct the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 at the start winning detection Can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f.

  If it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S1512). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), the information of each holding area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each reserve area in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203 u to be extracted is the time until it becomes the variation display order, the variation display order, the variation display start, the success / failure determination result for each suspension, for each reserve .

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command has been received (S1515). If it is determined that the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command is received (S1515: Yes), if the temporary first change stop command is received, the sub first change stop flag 223e If the temporary second change stop command is received, the sub second change stop flag 223f is set on (S1516).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command is not received (S1515: No), the first special symbol change restart command or the second special symbol change restart command is received. It is judged whether or not (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol variation resume command corresponding to the received command is received. In the case, the first variation resumption flag 223g is set to on. Also, when the second special symbol variation resume command is received, the sub second variation resume flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is not received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the pending number display update process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process (S1406). This pending number display updating process (S1406) is a process for updating the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each pending area of the sub sort pending storage area 223k. .

  In the number-of-helds display update process (S1406 in FIG. 37), first, the variable display start time of the change start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the follow sort hold storage area 223k is updated (S1431). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 of the follow sort hold memory area 223k is on is a hold corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 is off in the variable display start order. In the symbol display, the holding symbol display is displayed in the order of establishment of the holding (S1432).

  Here, the reordering flag 223k7 is operated (in the present embodiment, the frame button 22 in a reorderable period) in the pending reordering process (S1413 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. When pressed, it is set to ON in all pending areas where pending data is stored. As a result, all displayed pending symbol displays are sorted and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending order of holding. On the other hand, after the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON, regarding the newly stored hold, the sorting flag 223k7 is off, so the order established without being sorted, ie, the third symbol display device 81 Displayed at the end of the display of the pending symbol displayed on.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter Also, while the display of the sorted symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, the display of the symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurred) hold is displayed first in the formation order for the display of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold. Since it is displayed at the tail end without being interrupted and displayed on the held symbol display being played, the player can suppress a defect that confuses the order in which the current display is displayed. Can.

  Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to inform the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

  Also, in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, when the holding symbol of the late formation order is interrupted and displayed before the holding symbol of the early formation order, Among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, it may be a big hit about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption You can have expectations.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot in the holding symbol display, and can operate the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. The frame button 22 can be operated with a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is a process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from main controller 110 in order to cause variation display effect to be displayed on third symbol display device 81. Then, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot), a process of setting a first or second display type command for display to notify the display control device 114 of the stop classification. Run.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1411 in FIG. 38), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). Then, if it is determined that the first change start flag 223c1 is off (S1601: No), since the first change pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process of S1606 is executed. Do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to be off (S1602).

  In the process of S1603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 Thus, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). In addition, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command of 2 bytes configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01" the second special symbol It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, The first special symbol (the third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed).

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the first special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the holding data stored in the follow sort holding memory area 223k is in the immediately preceding holding area It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the data under pending area 1 → variable display, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, pending area 4 → pending area 3, pending The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area 5 → reserve area 4, reserve area 6 → reserve area 5, reserve area 7 → reserve area 6, reserve area 8 → reserve area 7, and so on. The measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started using the first variation time storage area 223i (S1605).

  It is judged whether the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). When it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is not on (that is, off) (S1606: No), the first fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S1611 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S1606: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to be off (S1607). In the process of S1506 in the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, A variation pattern command for display of a special symbol is generated (S1608).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the right side display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, The second special symbol (the third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the second special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 is decremented by 1, and the holding data stored in the follow sort holding memory area 223k is in the immediately preceding holding area It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the data under pending area 1 → variable display, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, pending area 4 → pending area 3, pending The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area 5 → reserve area 4, reserve area 6 → reserve area 5, reserve area 7 → reserve area 6, reserve area 8 → reserve area 7, and so on.

  Measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started using the second variation time storage area 223j (S1610).

  It is determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to on (that is, off) (S1611: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S1611: Yes), if the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, If the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to off (S1612).

  In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (S1414 in FIG. 36), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or the second stop type command is set (S1613). If the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 in the stop type (15R probability variation hit, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot based on the stop type A first display type stop command for notifying “is there?” Is generated. In addition, when the stop type which is set is the stop type of the 2nd special symbol, in the display control device 114 stop type (15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit either) based on the stop type ) Is generated (S1614). The first or second stop type command notified from the main control unit 110 is for notifying the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the determination result is out of order. . If the determination result is out, the out type is not referred to and the out pattern is set.

  By being configured in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to change and display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being set, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control device 110 by also shifting the data of the follow sort reserving storage area 223k. The control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced without the need to control transmission.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this temporary change stop process (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is a process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the other variable display is During the jackpot game, processing for temporary stop is executed.

  In temporary fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is judged if the second fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. If it is determined that the first variation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the first variation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

  A first display temporary stop command is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the first special symbol being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81. When setting the first temporary stop command for display, the display control device 114 causes the first special symbol (main symbol in the left, right, and left main symbols) to be slightly shaken and displayed after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, the player is notified that the variable display is temporarily stopped. In addition, by displaying the characters "the first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand, and it is temporarily assumed that the variable display is stopped. It is configured to notify.

  In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol in the variable display has been temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of the jackpot, and the lottery in the variable display may disappear or be invalidated. You can play with peace of mind by preventing you from becoming anxious.

  In addition, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the first special symbol may be erased from the left side display area Dm, and the character may be notified of temporary stop using only characters. Naturally, other configurations may be adopted.

  When the display first temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol measured in the subordinate first fluctuation time storage area 223i is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is resumed, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation stop flag 223e is not set to on (ie, is off) (S1701: No), is the second variation stop flag 223f set to on? It is determined (S1705). If it is determined that the second variation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the second variation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second temporary stop command for display Are generated (S1707). Similarly to the first display temporary stop command, the second display temporary stop command controls the display control device 114 so that the second special symbol currently displayed in the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 is temporarily stopped in the variable display. Is a command to Similarly to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of the temporary stop.

  When the second temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol measured in the second fluctuation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is resumed, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

  It is determined whether the second variation resumption flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). If it is determined that the sub first fluctuation resumption flag 223g is set to on (S1709: Yes), the sub first fluctuation resumption flag 223g is set to off (S1710).

  It is determined whether the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711). If it is determined that the measured remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol stored in the second fluctuation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711: Yes), the first short fluctuation mode for display A resume command is set (S1712). When this display first short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first short fluctuation mode restart command displays the characters "Display the lottery result of the fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped" on the display control device 114 in the left display area Dm1 for the remaining fluctuation time. Then, based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display will change to the characters “I displayed the lottery result of the variable display that had been temporarily stopped!” And will continue to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3 s (S1711: No), the first normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1713). When this display first normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first normal variation mode restart command displays the characters "temporarily stopped variation display in change!" In the left side display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time, and all of the first special symbols are displayed. After displaying the main symbols (3 symbols on the left, right and left) in a fluctuating manner during the remaining fluctuation time, the first special symbol is displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110 Stop display. Next, measurement of the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time memory area 223i is resumed (S1714).

  By configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control is performed even if main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining variation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation manner, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub first variation resumption flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the sub second variation resumption flag 223h is set to on (S1715). If it is determined that the sub second variation resumption flag 223h is set to on (S1715: Yes), the sub second variation resumption flag 223g is set to off (S1716).

  It is determined whether the measured remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717). If it is determined that the remaining measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode for display A resume command is set (S1718). When this display second short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. The second short fluctuation mode restart command for display displays the characters “Display the lottery result of the temporary display that has been temporarily stopped” on the display control device 114 for the remaining fluctuation time in the right display area Dm 2 Then, based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display will change to the characters "The result of the temporary display of the variable display which has been temporarily stopped!" And will continue to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3 s (S1717: No), the second normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1719). When this display second normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This second normal variation mode restart command for display displays the character "temporarily stopped variation display during variation!" In the right side display area Dm2 during the remaining variation time, and all of the second special symbols are displayed. After displaying the main symbols (3 symbols on the left, right and left) in a fluctuating manner during the remaining fluctuation time, the second special symbol is displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110 Stop display. Next, measurement of the fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time memory area 223j is resumed (S1720). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation resumption flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process ends.

  By configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control is performed even if main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining variation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation manner, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been suspended is resumed, the character is informed of that to the character, but the present invention is not particularly limited thereto. Of course, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, as shown in the display mode that shows that the player has resumed (for example, displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display has been resumed by the character etc.), the suspended change Of course, notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to the resumption of display. By doing this, the player can correctly recognize that the suspended variable display has been resumed.

  In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select the variation pattern in accordance with the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when main controller 110 resumes the temporarily stopped fluctuation table time, the remaining fluctuation time causes the same fluctuation time fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time. The variation pattern may be configured to be selected. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 is controlled to delay the difference between the variation pattern of the remaining variation time and the variation pattern of the slightly short variation time and cause the variation table time to occur. The variation table of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be performed according to the remaining variation time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the suspension rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this pending reordering process (S1413). This hold rearrangement process (S1413 in FIG. 40) is one of main processes (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, in the hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), when the player operates the frame button 22 in the effective period, the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of establishment of the hold A process of setting the display to be rearranged in the variable display start order is executed.

  In the pending reordering process (S1413 in FIG. 40), it is first determined whether it is a reorderable period (S1801). In the sortable period, gaming states other than the state with no hold established in the big hit game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is not one or more hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively) are arranged The exchangeable period is set.

  If it is determined that it is a sortable period (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the character "May be reorderable!" And the player can operate the frame button 22. Informing a period that is The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be controlled to light a dedicated lamp or the like.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation can be performed, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. In addition, as long as the rearrangement possible period is not particularly provided, and the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the arrangement display may naturally be performed.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the reordering flag 223k7 of all the pending areas in which the pending data of the follow reorder pending storage area 223k is stored is set to on. (S1804).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a reorderable period (S1801: No) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1803: No), the process is ended.

  By this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be focused next (the special symbol to be the variable display start). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and to play the game smoothly.

  Further, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, since the distribution ball 630 is configured to easily win the game ball alternately by the distribution device 630, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured. The game is played evenly and the game can be played efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, sorting of the holding symbol is performed as a configuration to be executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and is executed whenever a new holding is stored. Naturally, it may be configured as well. By configuring in this manner, the player can always correctly recognize the fluctuation display start order by the holding symbols rearranged in the fluctuation start order.

  In this embodiment, the sortable period is other than a state in which there is no hold established in the jackpot game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (state in which there is no hold of one or more first special symbols and second special symbols). The game state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a sortable period even during a jackpot game, or conversely, a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed It may be set to other than, etc., and may be determined as appropriate.

  When the jackpot game is set to a sortable period, it is necessary to sort in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped in the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being suspended and the remaining fluctuation time during temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode is combined with the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode is displayed. The sorting can be performed in the correct fluctuation start order, and the player can be notified of the correct fluctuation start order even in the jackpot gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reordering storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the secondary reordering storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 are configured to store data in which the reordering is performed mutually. Not only that, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data (relevant judgment result, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern type, etc.) necessary for sorting by a prize command, Reordering may be performed only by the audio lamp control device 113.

  By configuring in this manner, even when a power failure occurs, main controller 110 backs up various data necessary for sorting in RAM 203, and when power is restored, the various processes in startup processing (FIG. 32) are performed. By outputting the data to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 can easily perform recovery from the power failure by performing sorting based on the various data.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol or the first reserved due to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the variation start and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the reordering storage area 203u 2 The variation start time of the special symbol was calculated to calculate the variation start order. Not only that, at the time of game ball winning, it decides information (time information) whether it is the fluctuation aspect longer than fixed time by deciding whether it is the fluctuation aspect which becomes reach or not, the time information and fluctuation The fluctuation start order may be roughly determined and rearranged from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation mode that will be a reach at the time of winning (whether it is a long time fluctuation mode or a short time fluctuation mode), and the accurate fluctuation time (fluctuation mode) is Even with the pachinko machine 10 determined based on information such as the number of balls held at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to inform the player of a rough fluctuation start order.

  Therefore, the player may not be in the correct order of starting the change, but the fact that the sorting has been performed is included in the one in which the long-time fluctuation mode (the fluctuation mode to become reach) is suspended. Can play games with the expectation of a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the sortable period is determined according to the gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether the sort is possible (for example, a state in which the held symbol display is displayed), You may be comprised so that it may alert | report that rearrangement is possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to flexibly set the period in which sorting is possible, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities for sorting.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) In the above, the case has been described in which the special hitting fluctuation pattern table or the special falling fluctuation pattern table according to the gaming state is selected based on the jackpot success / failure determination result, and various fluctuation patterns are selected.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a predetermined number of holding balls of the first special symbol or more in the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol In the example, three or more) and the difference between the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol and the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol is that the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (this implementation) In the form, it is determined whether there are more than two or more, and in the case where there are more, a variation pattern out of a short time out of a variation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) shorter than other variation patterns is selected. Ru. As for the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, similarly to the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the difference between the number of holding balls of the second special symbol and the number of holding spheres of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is determined whether or not the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is larger than a predetermined number, and a fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the MPU 201 determines the state of the holding balls of each other and selects the special one. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the fluctuation pattern (in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern deviated from the short time) is selected.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 41 is a view schematically showing an adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e in the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table selected in common with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is used in the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (FIG. 43, S320) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (not shown), which will be described later. It is a fluctuation pattern table to be selected. Specifically, the number of holding balls of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern is three or more, and the difference between the number of holding balls of the other special symbol (the second special symbol in the case of the first special symbol) is two If the number is larger than the above, the adjustment extra deviation variation pattern table is selected. The adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a fluctuation pattern table which is selected only when the result of judgment of acceptance is out, and is constituted of only one type whose fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds. There is. Therefore, regardless of the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern determination counter CS3, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds) out of a short time is selected.

  Thus, by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, the number of holding balls is 3 or more, and the difference with the holding ball of the other special symbol is 2 or more, and the number of holding balls is equal to each other Even if it is not, it is possible to speed up the digestion of many holding balls, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be equally held, and only the other can be kept. The upper limit number (four in the present embodiment) can be prevented, and the occurrence of overflow can be prevented.

  In addition, by determining whether there are three or more holding balls of the special symbol to select the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of short time deviation is frequently selected in the state with few holding balls, the effect of the game ( It is possible to prevent the loss of the interest due to the change of the special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only one kind of fluctuation pattern (short time of 0.5 seconds) deviated in a short time is set in the adjustment special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41), but it is not limited thereto. It may be configured with a variation pattern of a short time deviation that is configured with a variation time of. In this way, by configuring, when the other special symbol is in motion, by changing the type (variation time) of the variation pattern out of the short time period to be selected according to the remaining variation time, it is possible to more hold ball The numbers can be equal to one another. In addition, the fluctuation time of the holding ball of the other special symbol may be predicted to change the fluctuation pattern of the short time deviation to be selected. By doing this, even if there is a relatively long fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C, etc.) among the holding balls of the special symbol with the smaller number of holding balls, it is possible to select It is possible to adjust the holding balls of the special symbols to each other more evenly by selecting the short-term deviation fluctuation pattern in accordance with it.

  In addition, although it was set as the structure which discriminate | determines the difference of a holding ball and determines the fluctuation pattern for adjustment in this embodiment, it is not restricted to it, The fluctuation which a special symbol of each other selects without judging the difference of a holding ball The pattern may be determined to select a fluctuation pattern such that the difference in fluctuation time is reduced. In detail, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation pattern selected by the second special symbol is determined, and if the variation pattern having a long variation time is selected, the variation of a relatively long variation time It may be configured to make the digesting speed of the holding balls equal to each other by determining the pattern (the variation time according to the variation end of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, etc.).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to adjust the numbers of holding balls to be equal to each other without determining extremely short or long variation patterns.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution winning device 630 assists the game balls to be easily winning alternately in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64b. Therefore, since the digesting speed of the holding ball is different depending on the difference of the selected fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time) between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the holding ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number may be uneven, or the distribution device 630 may not alternately distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, which may result in uneven distribution. However, when a bias occurs, if there are two or more differences between the holding balls in the three states before the number of holding balls reaches the upper limit number (four in this embodiment), the short time Since the variation pattern of the deviation is selected, the player can continue the game without worrying about the occurrence of the overflow at the holding ball of one of the special symbols.

  Referring to FIG. 42, in the second embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 43, in the second embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 2 (S320) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (S320). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, in the case where the result of the determination is out of order, it is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern out of a short time according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit ( S511). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S511: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S512). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is determined based on the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S513). The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, and in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot, the 15R jackpot table is in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot , 2R jackpot table is determined.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S511: No), it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more (S514). The number of holding balls of the first special symbol is determined based on the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. When it is determined that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more (S514: Yes), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol It is determined whether the value is 2 or more (that is, the number of the holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of the holding balls of the second special symbol) (S515). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e.

  When it is determined that the holding ball of the first special symbol is two or more more than the holding ball of the second special symbol (S515: Yes), the adjustment special out-of-out fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set . On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 3 (S514: No), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol If it is determined that the result is less than two (S515: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table 202e corresponding to the game state is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set.

  Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S518). The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the first variation pattern command is generated (S519). Here, the first variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S520). Then, the measurement start of the 1st fluctuation time which is the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol is set up (S521).

  Thus, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more, and further, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, The adjustment special out-of-variation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol ends in 0.5 seconds by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, and the next first special The holding ball is digested by starting the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the holding ball of the symbol. Therefore, the holding ball of the first special symbol is digested one after 0.5 seconds, and the speed of digesting the holding ball of the first special symbol is increased, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol Adjustment can be made to reduce the difference in holding balls.

  In addition, when a large number of gaming balls are won in the first starting opening 63a in a short time, and the difference in holding balls becomes large, or the first special symbol has a relatively long fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C, etc. ) Is selected, but in the second special symbol, if relatively short fluctuation patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern of normal deviation A etc.) are continuously selected and the difference between the holding balls becomes large (for example, the second (1) Even if the holding ball of the special symbol is 4 and the holding ball of the second special symbol is 1 etc.) The state of the holding ball is judged every time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, and the fluctuation pattern deviates from short time Because the process of whether or not to select is performed, in the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern of the short time deviation will be selected continuously, and it is adjusted promptly to reduce the difference of the holding ball Can. Therefore, the first special symbol reaches the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment), and the second special symbol is smaller (for example, one) than the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment), The game balls are also distributed to the first winning opening 63a by alternately allocating by the allocation winning device 630 when it is attempted to suspend the holding balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). It is possible to prevent the trouble of winning the prize and becoming an overflow.

  In addition, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is three or more, the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is the upper limit number (four in this embodiment) by determining the difference between the holding balls. The variation pattern out of a short time is not selected until the player gets one more piece, the variation pattern out of a short time is frequently selected, and the player can not enjoy the effect due to the variation of the special symbol sufficiently. It can prevent getting bored. In addition, it is also prevented that the player recognizes that the lottery result is out before the stop of the special symbol by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, and can not have a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. be able to.

  In addition, even if a difference in the holding balls occurs by selecting a relatively long fluctuation pattern (such as the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C), the fluctuation pattern of the short time deviation is selected thereafter, and It can be adjusted to reduce the difference. Therefore, the over-flow can be reduced, and a lot of fluctuation patterns with relatively long fluctuation time (such as the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C) can be selected to make the player enjoy the effect by the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent boredom in the game. Therefore, it is possible to perform a variety of effects, and to suppress the problem that the selection of fluctuation patterns can be limited (for example, extremely reducing the ratio of selecting fluctuation patterns such as spar reach C). it can.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the distribution winning device 630 alternately distributes the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. Therefore, in the case where the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is one difference, the holding ball of the first special symbol and the first special symbol are not selected so that the variation pattern out of a short time is not selected. 2 is to determine whether the difference between the special symbol and the holding ball is 2 or more. Therefore, even in the case where distribution is uniformly performed by the distribution winning device 630, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation pattern of the short time deviation from being selected frequently.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the determination result of the 1st special symbol is a hit, it comprised so that the fluctuation pattern for adjustment might not be selected. By configuring in this manner, the fluctuation pattern to be hit can be selected as a fluctuation pattern indicating a normal hit, and it is possible to produce a fluctuation pattern to be sufficiently hit by the player. In addition, when the success or failure judgment result of the first special symbol is a hit, since the big hit game is started after the change is stopped, there is no need to cope with problems such as overflow even if the change pattern for adjustment is not selected. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it discriminate | determined whether the number of the holding balls of a 1st special symbol is three or more, it may not be restricted to it but may be two or more, and you may set suitably by another number. Further, it is also possible to configure the difference between the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol directly without judging the number of holding balls of the first special symbol.

  Also, in this embodiment, it was determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, but three or more may be used. You may

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the variation pattern out of a short time is one kind of variation time of 0.5 seconds, the present invention is not limited thereto. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided and selected. The selection may be made using the counter value as in the selection of other variation patterns, or the state of the holding ball of the second special symbol (number of holding balls, difference of holding balls, held) You may select based on the fluctuation time etc. which were determined in advance, or if the second special symbol is fluctuating, it may be selected based on the remaining time.

  By comprising in this way, it can adjust so that the difference with the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol may be decreased more. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, to cause the player to play the game with the effect according to the normal fluctuation pattern, and to prevent being bored with the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected, but a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of the normal deviation A etc.) is selected from the normal deviation fluctuation pattern table. You may configure it. By configuring in this manner, the special symbol can be varied by the player according to the normal out-of-order variation pattern, and the player can reduce the sense of discomfort in selecting the variation pattern for adjustment.

  As for the second special symbol, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment as well as the first special symbol. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S203) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) is executed. .

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, in each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), the first is the second, the second, the second Is the only change to the first, and the detailed description and the effects to be obtained are the same, so the description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

  In this embodiment, if the difference between the number of balls held by the first special symbol and the number of balls held by the second special symbol is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (two or more in this embodiment), the fluctuation pattern deviates in a short time Is selected, but not limited to that, it is not limited to the case where the result of the judgment is out, and the variation pattern to be selected by the other special symbol is determined, so that the difference in the number of holding balls disappears The variation pattern may be configured to be selected. Specifically, if the number of the first special symbol holding ball is two more than the number of the second special symbol holding ball, and the fluctuation pattern selected by the second special symbol holding ball is a relatively short fluctuation pattern, Choose a short variation pattern (eg, a variation time of 0.5 seconds), and select a relatively long variation pattern that has a shorter variation pattern than that variation pattern and the difference in holding balls can be adjusted You should do it.

  By comprising in this way, the difference of a holding ball can be adjusted, performing a change of a more natural special symbol. Therefore, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern table dedicated for short time deviation is provided as the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the normal fluctuation pattern (both hit and deviation), A change pattern (for example, a short time change of 0.5 seconds) is set in the address for adjustment, and the head address is selected to select the change pattern for adjustment according to the difference of the holding balls. May be

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the game balls are equally distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distributing device 630 has been described, the distributing device 630 is not provided, and the first starting opening is provided. Even in the configuration in which the game balls randomly win at 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the difference between the holding balls can be adjusted to be even in the configuration of the present embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 45, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment described above, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the state of the holding ball, a fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected and adjusted to reduce the difference. Explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, under the same conditions for holding balls as in the first embodiment, the variation pattern with the smaller number of holding balls is the first among the holding balls with the larger number of holding balls. A variation pattern is selected in which the time until the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball starting to change starts to change is stopped.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in the following points. In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 adjusts the variation time of the special symbol with the smaller number of holding balls to adjust the difference between the holding balls with each other in a second embodiment. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 44, in the third embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) of the third embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. Instead of 2 (FIG. 43, S320), first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the third embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 45, in the third embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 44, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 3 (S330) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (S330). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, when the result of determination is out of order, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is smaller than the predetermined number of holding balls of the second special symbol by the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the case, it is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern for adjusting the difference.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), each process from S534 to S536 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (FIG. 45, S330), when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S531: No), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 3 It is determined whether the number is one or more (S534). The number of holding balls of the second special symbol is determined based on the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f. When it is determined that the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is three or more (S534: Yes), the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the second special symbol It is determined whether the value is 2 or more (that is, the holding ball of the second special symbol is two or more more than the holding ball of the first special symbol) (S535). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e from the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f.

  If it is determined that the holding ball of the second special symbol is two or more more than the holding ball of the first special symbol (S535: Yes), the second special symbol from the present time based on the reordering storage area 203u The first adjustment for special outlier fluctuation with the time until the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the first hold of the first (the reserved area of the second special symbol with the earliest change order) Pattern command is set.

  Here, among the value of the second variation time storage area 203t and the reserve area of the second special symbol in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u, it is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the suspension area, which has the earliest variation order. The fluctuation time is calculated by adding the value of the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern. When the first adjustment special deviation change pattern is selected, the selection of the change pattern in the process of S539 is skipped, and the next process of S540 is performed.

  Thus, at the time of the variation pattern selection of the first special symbol, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (three or more in the present embodiment), and the difference of the holding balls is two or more. In the case of (the first special symbol holding ball is less), among the holding balls of the second special symbol, consisting of the fluctuation time until the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the earliest holding of fluctuation order The selected fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, since the holding ball of the second special symbol is not digested until one of the holding balls of the second special symbol is digested and the second is to be digested, the digestion speed of the holding ball of the first special symbol is It becomes late and it can adjust so that the difference of the holding ball of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol decreases.

  Further, by determining whether or not the holding balls of the second special symbol are three or more, the fluctuation pattern for adjustment is frequently selected, and it is possible to suppress such a defect that the effect of the game is impaired.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the determination result of the 1st special symbol is a hit, it comprised so that the fluctuation pattern for adjustment might not be selected. By configuring in this manner, the fluctuation pattern to be hit can be selected as a fluctuation pattern indicating a normal hit, and it is possible to produce a fluctuation pattern to be sufficiently hit by the player. In addition, when the success or failure judgment result of the first special symbol is a hit, since the big hit game is started after the change is stopped, there is no need to cope with problems such as overflow even if the change pattern for adjustment is not selected. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it discriminate | determined whether the number of the holding balls of a 2nd special symbol is three or more, not only it but two or more may be sufficient, and you may set suitably by another number. In addition, it is also possible to configure so as to directly determine the difference between the holding balls of the second special symbol and the first special symbol without judging the number of holding balls of the second special symbol.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was judged whether the holding ball of the 2nd special symbol is 2 or more more than the holding ball of the 1st special symbol, 3 or more may be sufficient, and it is suitably set by other numbers You may

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the fluctuation time until the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol currently suspended first is selected is selected, it is not restricted to it, rather than the remaining fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol in fluctuation. It may be a long fluctuation time. In addition, a variation time longer than the variation time of the special symbol that is first reserved may be selected.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time until the end of the fluctuation of the first reserved special symbol is selected, but the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time close to or longer than the fluctuation time is selected. May be selected from the out-of-normal-time fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)). By configuring in this manner, the special symbol can be varied by the player according to the normal out-of-order variation pattern, and the player can reduce the sense of discomfort in selecting the variation pattern for adjustment.

  Further, the configurations of the second embodiment and the third embodiment may be combined. By configuring in this way, the difference between the holding balls can be adjusted to be reduced at the timing when both special symbols change, and it is possible to respond more quickly.

  In addition, also about the 2nd special symbol, each processing of the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (Drawing 45, S330) like the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (not shown) in a 2nd embodiment In the above, only the first one is changed to the second one, and the second one is changed to the first, and the detailed description and the advantageous effects are the same, so the description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

  Also, in this embodiment, it was determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, but three or more may be used. You may

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the variation pattern out of a short time is one kind of variation time of 0.5 seconds, the present invention is not limited thereto. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided and selected. The selection may be made using the counter value as in the selection of other variation patterns, or the state of the holding ball of the second special symbol (number of holding balls, difference of holding balls, held) You may select based on the fluctuation time etc. which were determined in advance, or if the second special symbol is fluctuating, it may be selected based on the remaining time.

  By comprising in this way, it can adjust so that the difference with the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol may be decreased more. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, to cause the player to play the game with the effect according to the normal fluctuation pattern, and to prevent being bored with the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected, but a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of the normal deviation A etc.) is selected from the normal deviation fluctuation pattern table. You may configure it. By configuring in this manner, the special symbol can be varied by the player according to the normal out-of-order variation pattern, and the player can reduce the sense of discomfort in selecting the variation pattern for adjustment.

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the game balls are equally distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distributing device 630 has been described, the distributing device 630 is not provided, and the first starting opening is provided. Even in the configuration in which the game balls randomly win at 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the difference between the holding balls can be adjusted to be even in the configuration of the present embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment described above, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the state of the holding ball, a fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected and adjusted to reduce the difference. Explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been won continuously in either one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, and the winning is continuously made. In this case, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the successive winning is selected so that the variation pattern of the short time deviation is selected, and the difference of the holding balls is reduced.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, the second embodiment is to select the variation pattern out of a short time based on the fact that the game ball is continuously won in either one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in form.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 46 is a view schematically showing a part of another memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  The first winning flag 203v1 is a flag indicating that the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 63a. Specifically, the first winning flag 203v1 is such that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a and the first winning flag 203v1 is off in the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) described later. It is a flag that is set to on. On the other hand, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, it is set to off.

  The second winning flag 203v2 is the same as the first winning flag 203v1 except for the point to the second starting opening 63b, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  By configuring in this way, for example, when the game ball is continuously won in the first starting opening 63a without being distributed alternately to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distributing winning device 630. If the game ball has won the first starting opening 63a for the second time, the first winning flag 203v1 has already been set to ON, and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening 63a has been won continuously. It is configured to be able to.

  The first continuous winning flag 203v3 is a flag indicating that the gaming ball has won continuously in the first starting opening 63a. Specifically, in the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) described later, when the game ball has won in the first starting opening 63a, the first winning flag 203v1 is already set to ON. Is a flag set to on. On the other hand, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (FIG. 49, S340) described later, when the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set in the processing of S526, it is set to OFF.

  The second continuous winning flag 203v4 is the same as the first continuous winning flag 203v3 except for the point with respect to the second starting opening 63b, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  With such a configuration, it can be easily determined whether or not the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b has continuously won. Therefore, by selecting the variation pattern for adjustment based on the fact that the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 or the second winning flag 203v4 is set to ON, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are easily reserved. It can be configured to reduce ball differences.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process of the fourth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the second embodiment in part of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), and the start winning process (FIG. 15) 24 and S108), a start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) is added.

  Referring to FIG. 48, in the fourth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 47) executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) of the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. Instead of 2 (FIG. 43, S320), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the fourth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 49, in the fourth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 48, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 4 (S340) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S340). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, if the result of the determination is out of judgment, it is determined whether or not the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on (that is, whether the gaming ball has won continuously in the first starting opening 63a), if it is on, This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern out of a short time in order to adjust the difference.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), each process from S554 to S556 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), when it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is off (S551: No), whether the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on? (That is, whether or not the game ball has won continuously in the first starting opening 63a) is determined (S554). If it is determined that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on (S554: Yes), the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is set off. (S556).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is off (S554: No), a value obtained by subtracting the number of holding balls of the second special symbol from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is 2 It is determined whether or not the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more (i.e., more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol) (S555). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e.

  If it is determined that the holding ball of the first special symbol is two or more more than the holding ball of the second special symbol (S555: Yes), the processing of S556 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of subtracting the number of holding balls of the second special symbol from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 2 (S555: No), the special outlier fluctuation according to the gaming state The pattern table 202e is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set.

  By being configured in this manner, when the winning combination device 630 does not alternately distribute to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, if winning is continuously made on either one, Since the variation pattern is selected, the reserve of the player who has won the prize continuously is quickened, and can be made substantially the same as the one distributed alternately. Therefore, it can adjust so that the difference of the holding ball of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be made small.

  In addition, even when the first continuous winning flag 203v is off, the difference between the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (the holding ball of the first special symbol is 2) If there are more than a predetermined number, a variation pattern out of a short time is selected. Thereby, in the distribution winning device 630, even if the distribution is alternately made, the difference in the number of balls held by a predetermined number or more is caused by the difference in fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if (for example, two or more) occur, it is possible to adjust the difference of the holding balls to be small by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time.

  In the present embodiment, when the first continuous winning flag 203v is off, the difference in the holding balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same as in the second embodiment. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the game without sufficiently enjoying the effect due to the variation of the special symbol because the variation pattern out of the short time is frequently selected for a short time. In addition, it is also prevented that the player recognizes that the lottery result is out before the stop of the special symbol by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, and can not have a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the first continuous winning flag 203v is on, the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When the flag 203v is on, the process of S555 is executed, and when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol by two or more, the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) may be set. By configuring in this manner, even when the first starting opening 63a is continuously prized, if the difference between the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not less than a predetermined number, a normal fluctuation pattern is displayed. It can be configured to select, and it can be suppressed that the fluctuation pattern out of the frequent for a short time is selected.

  In addition, also about the 2nd special symbol, each processing of the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (Drawing 49, S340) similarly to the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (not shown) in a 2nd embodiment In the above, only the first one is changed to the second one, and the second one is changed to the first, and the detailed description and the advantageous effects are the same, so the description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 50, in the fourth embodiment, start winning process 2 (S120), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120). The start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) of the fourth embodiment is different from the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the second embodiment in the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S906) and the second Continuous winning determination processing (S980) is added to each. In the processes of S901 to S914 in the fourth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S901 to S914 in the second embodiment are executed. If it is determined in the process of S901 that the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 63a (S901: Yes), the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) is executed.

  In the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), it is first determined whether the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON (that is, after the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 63a last time) (S961). If it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is on, the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is set on (S962). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is off (that is, the gaming ball has won the second starting hole 63b last time) (S961: No), the first winning flag 203v1 is set to on. (S963). Thereafter, the second winning flag 203v2 is set to off (S964).

  By configuring in this way, it is determined whether the gaming ball has won continuously in the first starting opening 63a without the gaming ball alternately winning in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Can.

  In the present embodiment, when the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on, the variation pattern of the short time deviation is selected, but it is determined whether the second continuous winning flag 203v4 is on, When it is on, as in the third embodiment, a variation pattern composed of variation times until the special symbol for the one with the earliest variation start order of the second special symbol is suspended for variation stop It may be selected. By comprising in this way, it can adjust so that the difference of the holding ball of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be made small.

  The second consecutive winning determination process (S 907) is a modification of the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S 960), since the first is changed to the second and the second to the first. , Detailed illustration and explanation are omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the first winning flag 203v1 and the second winning flag 203v2 are respectively provided, but only one of them may be provided, and it may be configured to be discriminated according to the on / off state thereof. . Specifically, in the case where only the first winning flag 203v1 is configured, if the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON, the first starting hole 63a is won, and the first winning flag 203v1 is off. If it is set, it is determined that the second starting port 63b is a prize. With this configuration, the number of flags and the like can be reduced, and the required capacity of the RAM can be reduced. The same applies to the first continuous winning flag 203v3 and the second continuous winning flag 203v4.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of winning two consecutive prizes in one starting opening, the variation pattern for adjustment is determined and the difference in the holding balls is adjusted, but it is not limited thereto. It is a special symbol, and the variation pattern for adjustment is configured to be determined when the variation of the special symbol is completed twice or more continuously while the other starts and ends the variation of one special symbol. You may In addition, by combining winning in a row and variation in a row, it is possible to adjust the difference in holding balls more evenly.

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the game balls are equally distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distributing device 630 has been described, the distributing device 630 is not provided, and the first starting opening is provided. Even in the configuration in which the game balls randomly win at 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the difference between the holding balls can be adjusted to be even in the configuration of the present embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the holding symbol displayed in the lower display area Ds is frame button 22 by the holding number display update process (FIG. 37, S1406) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the above case, the held symbol display corresponding to the held area where the reordering flag 223k7 is on is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting to change.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON in the pending number display updating process 2 (S1440 in FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Sort the held symbol display corresponding to the held area in the order of starting to change, and display the background (held symbol display of the held symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the held area for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON Background)) (flash display).

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifth embodiment, one of the reserved symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) in which the reserved symbol display (sorting display corresponding to the pending area where the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON) on which the sorting has been performed is displayed The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the background screen of b) is displayed in a blinking manner (flash display) indicating that sorting has been performed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 52 is a view showing the display from before the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to after the rearrangement in the fifth embodiment. Before sorting, the hold display symbols corresponding to the order in which the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b are won in the lower display area Ds (if it is a hold symbol display based on winning in the first start opening 63a “○”, “●” is displayed in the case of a held symbol display based on winning in the second start opening 63 b. In the present embodiment, since the distribution winning device 630 alternately distributes the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is easily displayed alternately.

  Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display is executed, and the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display is executed in the order of starting the fluctuation. Then, the background is blinked (indicated by hatching in FIG. 52) with respect to the held symbol display (in FIG. 52, the held symbol displayed in Ds1 to Ds5) displayed at that time. Thereafter, with respect to the holding symbol display for the game ball which has newly won the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the holding symbol display is displayed in the order of winning (the order in which the winning is established) The symbol display area (Ds6 to Ds7 in FIG. 52) is displayed in a normal background pattern (for example, a blue background color) without being blinked.

  As described above, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player executes the sorting by causing the background of the held symbol display area to blink on the displayed held symbol display. It is possible to easily recognize the holding symbol display. Therefore, with respect to the order in which the display of the reserved symbol display is displayed, it is possible to easily identify whether it is an order of winning or an order of starting to change. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, with respect to the held symbol display winning after the rearrangement is performed, the held symbol display is displayed in the order of winning and the background of the held symbol display area is also the normal background, so the player , It can be easily identified that the displayed reserved symbol display is before sorting. Furthermore, with respect to the held symbol display for which rearrangement has been performed, since the background display blinks, the player recognizes the held symbol display before and after rearrangement at once. be able to.

  In addition, when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display starts to change, the reserved symbol display is erased (digested), and each displayed reserved symbol display is shifted one by one to the right reserved symbol display area and displayed However, since the blinking display of the background is also shifted and displayed accordingly, the player can easily identify the reserved symbol display for which sorting has been performed even if the digested symbol display is digested. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the background is blinked and displayed as a notification mode indicating the reserved symbol display on which sorting has been performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The color of the background is changed (for example, sorting is usually blue). It may be configured to change to red when executed, or the display may be changed as appropriate, such as blinking a reserved symbol display, changing a color, adding a pattern, or the like, instead of the background. Furthermore, it may be configured to notify by voice, characters, etc. (For example, voices and characters “The third reserved symbols have been rearranged” are displayed).

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 53, S1400). With respect to the main processing (FIG. 53, S1400) of the fifth embodiment, with respect to the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment, the pending number display updating process (FIG. 37, S1406) is replaced with the pending number display update. In place of the process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) and the pending reordering process (FIG. 40, S1413), a pending reordering process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is added. In the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the fifth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S1405 is completed, the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 54, in the fifth embodiment, pending number display update processing 2 (S1440), which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pending number display update process 2 (S1440). The number-of-helds display update processing 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is processing for setting a command for displaying the held symbol display in the held symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display region Ds.

  In the number-of-holds display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440), first, the variable display start time of the change start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the follow sort hold storage area 223k is updated (S1441). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 of the follow sort hold memory area 223k is on is a hold corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 is off in the variable display start order. In the symbol display, the holding symbol display is displayed in the holding order (S 1442).

  The background of the holding symbol display area corresponding to the holding symbol display area corresponding to the holding area of the secondary sorting holding storage area 223k in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in flashing (flash) display, and the sorting flag 223k7 The background display of the held symbol display area where the held symbol display corresponding to the held area where is off is displayed generates a background display change command to be displayed on the display control device 114 with a normal background (for example, blue in this embodiment) (S1443).

  In this manner, the player performs sorting on the player's side by displaying the background of the holding symbol display area in which the holding symbol display of the holding area for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in a blinking manner. It can be informed that it is a symbol display. Therefore, the player can recognize that the displayed holding symbol display is displayed in the order of the start of fluctuation according to the notification mode.

  In addition, the background of the held symbol display area in which the held symbol display corresponding to the held area for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed blinked, and the held area for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to OFF Since the background of the holding symbol display area corresponding to the holding symbol display corresponding to (that is, the holding that has been established after the reordering has been performed) is displayed with the normal background, the player can It is possible to easily recognize the executed held symbol display and the held symbol display that has not been reordered.

  In addition, every time this pending number display updating process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed, a new background display change command is generated, so that a new on hold occurs or a special corresponding to the on-hold symbol display Even when the symbol starts to change and the reserve is digested, the reserve symbol display and the blinking display indicating that the sorting has been performed can be updated appropriately in accordance with the state.

  Further, the reordering flag 223k7 is operated (in this embodiment, the frame button 22 in the reorderable period) in the pending reordering process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. When pressed, it is set to ON in all pending areas where pending data is stored. As a result, all displayed pending symbol displays are sorted and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending order of holding. On the other hand, after the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON, regarding the newly stored hold, the sorting flag 223k7 is off, so the order established without being sorted, ie, the third symbol display device 81 Displayed at the end of the display of the pending symbol displayed on.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter Also, while the display of the sorted symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, the display of the symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurred) hold is displayed first in the formation order for the display of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold. Since it is displayed at the tail end without being interrupted and displayed on the held symbol display being played, the player can suppress the problem of confusing the order in which the current display is displayed. Can.

  Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to inform the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

  Also, in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, when the holding symbol of the late formation order is interrupted and displayed before the holding symbol of the early formation order, Among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, it may be a big hit about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption You can have expectations.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot in the holding symbol display, and can operate the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. The frame button 22 can be operated with a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, a voice is output, so it is possible to further amplify and produce an expectation for the jackpot.

  Returning to the main processing (FIG. 53, S1400), the description will be continued. In the processes of S1407 to S1412 in the fifth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1407 to S1412 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S1412 is completed, the pending reordering process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 55, pending reordering processing 2 (S1450), which is one of the main processing (S1400 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this reservation rearrangement process 2 (S1450). In the case of the pending sort process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450), when the frame button 22 is operated, it is informed that the sort is executed (executed) when it is the sortable period of the reserved symbol display. This is a process for setting the sorting notification sound command and setting the sorting flag 223k7 of the sub sort suspension storage area 223k to ON.

  In pending reordering process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450), first, it is determined whether or not it is a reorderable period (S1451). In the sortable period, gaming states other than the state with no hold established in the big hit game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is not one or more hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively) are arranged The exchangeable period is set.

  When it is determined that it is the sortable period (S1451: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1452). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the character "May be reorderable!" And the player can operate the frame button 22. Informing a period that is The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be controlled to light a dedicated lamp or the like.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation can be performed, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. In addition, as long as the rearrangement possible period is not particularly provided, and the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the arrangement display may naturally be performed.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1453). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1453: Yes), a rearrangement notification sound command is set (S1454). As the sorting notification sound command, a notification sound (in the present embodiment, a voice "sorting") indicating that the sorting is performed (executed) is output from the voice output device 226.

  In the present embodiment, although sound is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific sound effect (for example, music of a fanfare, etc.) may be output. The output time may be set appropriately in accordance with the effect, and it may be configured such that a dedicated melody or sound effect is output while the rearranged reserved symbol display is displayed. By configuring in this manner, the player can be strongly aware that the sorting has been performed, and can easily understand that the reserved symbol display is sorted.

  The reordering flag 223k7 of all the reserve areas in which the reserve data of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k is stored is set to ON (S1455).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reordering period is not reached (S1451: No) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1453: No), this process is ended. By this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be focused next (the special symbol to be the variable display start). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and to play the game smoothly.

  Further, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, since the distribution ball 630 is configured to easily win the game ball alternately by the distribution device 630, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured. The game is played evenly and the game can be played efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, sorting of the holding symbol is performed as a configuration to be executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and is executed whenever a new holding is stored. Naturally, it may be configured as well. By configuring in this manner, the player can always correctly recognize the fluctuation display start order by the holding symbols rearranged in the fluctuation start order.

  In this embodiment, the sortable period is other than a state in which there is no hold established in the jackpot game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (state in which there is no hold of one or more first special symbols and second special symbols). The game state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a sortable period even during a jackpot game, or conversely, a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed It may be set to other than, etc., and may be determined as appropriate.

  When the jackpot game is set to a sortable period, it is necessary to sort in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped in the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being suspended and the remaining fluctuation time during temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode is combined with the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode is displayed. The sorting can be performed in the correct fluctuation start order, and the player can be notified of the correct fluctuation start order even in the jackpot gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 57, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fifth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the holding symbol display area is blinked with respect to all the holding symbol displays displayed in the holding symbol display area. The case was explained.

  On the other hand, in the modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the background of the reserved symbol display area is only for the reserved symbol display of the variation start order which is rearranged and executed in an order different from the establishment order. Blinks.

  That is, the modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in the following point. In the modification of the fifth embodiment, in the pending area display updating process 2 (FIG. 57, S1440), the pending area with the change start order different from the winning order in the pending area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that a background display change command for causing the background to blink on and off is generated with respect to the reserved symbol display area in which the symbol display is displayed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing from before the reordering of the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to after the reordering in the modification of the fifth embodiment. Before sorting, the first special symbol holding symbol display (in the present embodiment, "○") and the second special symbol holding symbol display (in the present embodiment, "●") are displayed in the order of establishment . The first special symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3 is displayed in the reserved symbol display "○" and the reserved symbol display area Ds4 because the player operates the frame button 22 to execute sorting. The reserved symbol display "●" of the second special symbol is rearranged, and the background is displayed in a blinking manner, which is a display mode (informing mode) indicating that the rearrangement is performed.

  In addition, in the case where the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved usually, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru.

  Here, the background blinks only for the reserved symbol display whose display order is changed due to the formation order and the change start order being different and rearrangement being performed. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol whose order is late is inserted before the holding symbol whose order is early, and the order is changed. It is possible to easily recognize the displayed reserved symbol display. Therefore, among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, in the jackpot about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption I can have hopes.

  In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot reserve in the held symbol display, and operates the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. It is possible to operate the frame button 22 with a sense of expectation to the jackpot.

  In addition, when the display order of the held symbol display is changed to show that the rearrangement has been performed, the background is blinked and, further, against the held symbol display displayed when the rearrangement is performed. Alternatively, the background may be displayed in a special color (for example, red) so that the display of the reserved symbol display on which the rearrangement has been performed may be identified. By configuring in this manner, the player can identify both the reserved symbol display displayed when the rearrangement is performed and the reserved symbol display whose display order has been changed by the rearrangement. Therefore, confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

  57, in the modification of the fifth embodiment, pending number display update processing 2 (FIG. 57, FIG. 57) which is one of main processing (FIG. 53, S1400) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113. S1440) will be described.

  The processes in S1441 to S1442 in the modification of the fifth embodiment are the same as the processes in S1441 to S1442 in the fifth embodiment. In the modification of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1442 is executed, the winning order and the order of starting to change start from among the reserve areas of the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k for which the sort flag 223k7 is set to ON are selected. It is determined whether there is a different reserved area (S1445). Here, the reserve area and the variation start order storage area 223k4 are determined to determine whether the order is different. Specifically, if the change start order stored in the change start order storage area 223k4 in the reserve area 2 is the third, although the winning order is the second, the change start order is the third. And it is determined that the order is different.

  When it is determined that there is a holding area in which the winning order and the change start order are different among the holding areas of the sub sort holding memory area 223k for which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON (S1445: Yes) Of the holding areas for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON, the background of the holding symbol display area in which the holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area determined to be different from the winning order and the change start order is displayed is blinked. A background display change command to be displayed (changed) is generated (S1446).

  In this manner, when the sorting is performed, the background is blinked and displayed for the held symbol display in which the display order has been changed with respect to the held symbol display being displayed, whereby the player is changed in the order It is possible to identify the holding symbol.

  In addition, the notification mode which notifies the held symbol display whose display order has been changed is not limited to blinking display, but may be indicated by character display, or may be notified by voice, or other display instead of blinking display. It may be an aspect, or the reserved symbol display may be displayed in a special color or pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fifth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the holding symbol display area is blinked with respect to all the holding symbol displays displayed in the holding symbol display area. The case was explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the lower display area Ds is displayed with the reserved symbol display in the winning order before the rearrangement, and the fluctuation before the rearrangement display area Dsa and the rearrangement after the rearrangement A post-sorting pending display area Dsb is provided in which the pending symbol display is displayed in the order of starting the. Until the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order only in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the held symbol display displayed at that time changes. Are displayed in the hold display area Dsb after sorting.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in the following points. The sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order and the reserved symbol display is displayed in the order of starting the variation separately.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before sorting (sorting not executed) and after sorting (sorted execution completed) in the sixth embodiment. . Before sorting, the first special symbol holding symbol display ("O" in the present embodiment) and the second special symbol holding symbol in the holding symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds5) of the pre-sorting holding display area Dsa The displays (in the present embodiment, “●”) are displayed in the order of winning. At this time, the reserved symbol display is not displayed in the after-sorting suspension display area Dsb.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 and sorting is performed, the sorting symbol is displayed in the order of winning in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa, as sorted. In the pending display area Dsb, the pending symbol display currently displayed in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa is displayed in the order of starting to change.

  In this way, when sorting is executed, the display of the reserved symbols before and after sorting is displayed in parallel at the top and bottom, so the player can sort how the sorting was performed. It is possible to compare and recognize the reserved symbol display of the pre-replacement reserve display area Dsa and the reserve symbol display of the post-sorting reserve display area Dsb. Therefore, in the order of starting to change, it is possible to easily recognize the held symbol display in which the order changes from the winning order.

  In addition, in the case where the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved usually, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru.

  Here, with regard to the held symbol display whose order of establishment and change start order are different and the display order is changed by the reordering, the pre-resort hold display area Dsa is compared with the post-sort hold display area Dsb. It can be easily recognized by doing. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol whose order is late is inserted before the holding symbol whose order is early, and the order is changed. It is possible to easily recognize the displayed reserved symbol display. Therefore, among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, in the jackpot about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption I can have hopes.

  In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot reserve in the held symbol display, and operates the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. It is possible to operate the frame button 22 with a sense of expectation to the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol display that was displayed when the frame button 22 was operated is displayed in the order for starting to change in the after-reorder-hold display area Dsb, but the invention is not limited thereto, and is thereafter established. It is also possible to display in the reserve chart display area Dsb after sorting in the winning order with respect to the pending.

  Further, it is also possible to always display the reserved symbol display after sorting and before sorting, regardless of the player's operation of the frame button 22. By configuring in this manner, the player can always visually recognize the held symbol display displayed in the winning order and the order of starting to change, so that the change is started in the order different from the winning order by sorting. It can quickly recognize that there is a symbol display.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 59, S1400). The main process (S1400 in FIG. 59) of the sixth embodiment is the same as the main process (S1400 in FIG. 53) of the fifth embodiment except for the pending number display updating process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440). An update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is added. In the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the sixth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S1405 is completed, the pending number display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 60, in the sixth embodiment, pending number display update processing 3 (S1460) which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the pending number display updating process 3 (S1460). In the number-of-holds display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), the hold symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display region Ds before the reordering hold display region Dsa and the reordering hold display region Dsb are reserved symbols It is a process for setting a command for displaying a display.

  In the number-of-holds display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), first, the change display start time of the change start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the follow sort change storage area 223k is updated (S1461). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  It is determined whether the follow sort flag 223k7 of the pending area 1 in the follow sort pending storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462). If it is determined that the follow sort flag 223k7 of the pending area 1 in the follow sort pending storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462: Yes), the sort flag is turned on in the post-sort pending display area Dsb. A display suspension display command is set to display the suspension symbol display of the suspension area set to in the order of starting to change (S1463).

  By performing control in this way, when the reordering is performed, the post-sorting pending display area Dsb is displayed only for the displayed reserved symbol display (the pending area where the reordering flag 223k7 is set to on). You can display the hold symbol display on.

  In response to the hold stored in the hold area in the pre-resort hold display area Dsa, a display hold display command to be displayed in order of winning is generated (S1464). As a result, it is possible to always display the reserved symbol display in the winning order in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa. In addition, when the sorting flag 223k7 is on, it is possible to display the pending symbol display in the after-sorting pending display area Dsb and the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the follow sort flag 223k7 of the pending area 1 in the sort pending storage area 223k is set to off (S1462: No), the processing of S1464 is executed. Thereby, when the sorting flag is off in the pending area 1 (that is, all pending areas), the pending symbol display is displayed in the winning order only in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa, and the sorting is executed. It is possible to easily make the player recognize that it is not done.

  Further, in the state where the sorting is not performed, the holding symbol display is not displayed in the after-sorting holding display area Dsb until the player operates the frame button 22, so the player operated the frame button 22. At the same time, it is possible to make the player more motivated to perform sorting by increasing the change of the display when the holding symbol display is displayed in the after-sorting hold display region Dsb.

  In the present embodiment, the sorting flag 223k7 is judged only in the holding area 1, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the sorting flag may be judged for all the holding areas in which various data are stored. Naturally, it may be configured to determine whether or not the switch is on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the post-reorder hold display area Dsb is always displayed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Only the pre-reorder hold display area Dsa is displayed at all times, and the rearranging is performed. Is displayed (when the player operates the frame switch 22) and the display of the reserved display area Dsb is displayed, and when all the rearranged reserved symbol displays are digested (variation start), the display is automatically hidden. May be configured as follows. In addition, when it comes to the rearrangement possible period, it is made the constitution which displays the letter which informs that it is possible to rearrange, but instead, when it becomes possible to rearrange, after the rearrangement reservation reservation display area Dsb (displayed symbol display is displayed (Not shown) may be displayed to notify the player that sorting of the reserved symbol display is possible. By configuring in this way, the post-reorder hold display area Dsb is not always displayed, and the space can be set as the upper display area Dm, and variable display of main symbols, display of effect symbols, etc. It can be displayed in a large space. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result which is easy to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, there is no suspension established during the jackpot game or different starting openings 63a and 63b (a state in which there is one or more suspension of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) In the gaming states other than the above, the case of setting as the sortable period has been described.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is set to be included in the sortable period even during the jackpot game.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot game starts, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 recalculates the time when the fluctuation of each hold is started from the jackpot game after. Then, the sorting data is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 sets the sorting possible period even during the big hit game and executes the sorting in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. It is different from.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 61, in the seventh embodiment, the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 61, S103) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. Do. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 61, S103). The large opening opening and closing process (FIG. 61, S103) of the seventh embodiment not only controls the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 65, but also when the big hit game starts, the fluctuation of each suspension starting from the big hit This is a process for recalculating the start time and generating sorting data based on the data recalculated in the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 61, S103), first, it is determined whether it is the start of the jackpot game (S131). Determination of whether it is the start of the jackpot game is the process of S608 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204) or the process of S808 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the jackpot It is determined whether or not the start of has been set.

  If it is determined that the jackpot game starts (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each suspension area stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u The value is recalculated taking into account the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol or second special symbol starting from the jackpot after the big hit (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each reserve area stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u The value of 大 is recalculated starting from the jackpot (S 134).

  Based on the change start time recalculated in the process of S133 or S134 and stored in the change start time storage area 203u5, a rearrangement data command is generated for each reserve area (S135).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is judged whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S136: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S137). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S137: Yes), processing is performed to open the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S137: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140). If it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), processing to close the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S142). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S142: Yes), the ending command is set (generated) (S143).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is over (S144). If it is determined that the jackpot game is over (S144: Yes), the end of the jackpot game is set (S145). It is determined whether it is a definite variation jackpot (S146). The determination as to whether it was a probability variation jackpot became an opportunity to carry out a jackpot game, and it is determined whether the lottery result is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

  If it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has been made (S146: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S144: No), or if it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is not found (S146: No), this processing ends.

  Thus, when the jackpot game starts, the fluctuation start time in each holding area starting from after the jackpot game is updated. Therefore, even when the player operates the frame button 22 during the jackpot game, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also generates the rearrangement data command based on the updated fluctuation start time. It is possible to update the data of the sort rearranging storage area 223k and rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting the fluctuation after the big hit game.

  In addition, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and if it is temporarily stopped, after the remaining fluctuation time has elapsed for the suspension of the special symbol, By calculating the fluctuation start time as a starting point, it is possible to calculate a more accurate fluctuation start time and generate a rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting more accurate change based on the change start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 62, S1400). The main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) of the seventh embodiment is different from the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) with respect to the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. 63, S1470) has been added. In the processes of S1401 to S1413 in the seventh embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S1413 is completed, command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed.

  The command determination process 2 (S1470) which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 2 (S1470). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed in the main process (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

  In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) of the seventh embodiment, the processes of S1520 and S1521 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. In the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the seventh embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment are performed. If it is determined in the process of S1517 that the first or second special symbol variation resume command has not been received (S1517: No), the process of S1520 is executed.

  In the process of S1520, it is determined whether or not the reordering data command output by the main control device 110 has been received. If it is determined that the reordering data command has been received (S1520: Yes), the data in the change start time storage area 223k5 of the sub sort reserving storage area 223k is updated based on the received reordering data command. Here, the rearrangement data command is data indicating the recalculated variation start time. Note that the rearrangement data command is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and may naturally be generated based on each data of the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement data command has not been received (S1520: No), processing according to the other commands is executed (S1519).

  In the present embodiment, the description is omitted, but if the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b during the big hit game, the first prefetching process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. In S923 of S25 or S907 or S942 of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), the fluctuation start time is calculated starting from after the end of the jackpot game.

  In this way, when the jackpot game is started, the fluctuation start time of each hold is recalculated starting from after the jackpot game end, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a sort data command, Since the value of the variation start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the area 223k is also updated, the reserve symbol display can be rearranged in the order of the variation start even if the jackpot game is set as the sortable period.

  In addition, even if a game ball is won in the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b during the jackpot game, data indicating the change start time after the end of the jackpot game is transmitted by the prize command, so the voice lamp control device The 113 can also rearrange the start order of fluctuation based on the fact that the frame button 22 has been operated with respect to the newly held held symbol display. Therefore, even during a jackpot game that tends to be monotonous, the player can perform an operation to rearrange the reserved symbol display, and can rearrange the reserved symbol display to enjoy the game.

  In addition, in the case where the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved usually, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru.

  Therefore, the player operates the frame button 22 even during a big hit, and rearranges the holding symbol display, thereby interrupting the holding symbol displayed before the holding symbol displayed by interruption. It is possible to have an expectation as to whether or not it is a jackpot for the suspension generated by the winning of the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the suspension symbol displayed in.

  In this manner, the player operates the frame button 22 during the jackpot to hold the jackpot in the held symbol display and is expected to change the arrangement order whether the jackpot can not be obtained continuously. The frame button can be operated to increase the fun in the jackpot game.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64-72. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, 907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. In the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914), winning commands which are numbered in order of fluctuation start time and which indicate the order are output to the audio lamp control device 113b, and rearrangement is performed based on the order. Case was explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs the first prefetching process (FIG. 25) even if the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. , 907) or in the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S914), a prize command is generated for various counter values acquired based on a prize without being numbered in the order of start of fluctuation. When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command, it calculates the variation start time based on the counter values indicated by the winning command, assigns the variation start order, and operates the frame button 22. Based on what has been done, the sort of the held symbol display is performed in that order.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eighth embodiment, the first embodiment is performed in that the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 executes sorting of the reserved symbol display by calculating and numbering the variation start order based on the received winning command. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in form.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 64 is a view schematically showing a part of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. The ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a big hit random number table 222a, a big hit type table 222b, a special hit variation pattern table 222c, and a special out variation pattern table 222d. Note that these tables are the same as the big hit random number table 202a, the big hit type table 202b, the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. , I omit the explanation.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the rearrangement pending storage area 203 u of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 is deleted. About this, illustration is omitted.

  As described above, since each table is stored also in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the ROM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the pay command from the main control device 110 Based on each counter value, before the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display starts to change, the jackpot determination and the selection of the change pattern are performed in advance, the change start time is calculated, and the change start time is arranged in the order of starting change The change start order can be numbered based on the change start time so as to be replaceable. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not have to execute each control process for determining the change start order in advance, and the control load can be reduced.

  In the eighth embodiment, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process of the eighth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment in the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) instead of the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). Has been added.

  Referring to FIG. 66, in the eighth embodiment, start winning process 3 (S150) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). The start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) of the eighth embodiment is a first preread process (FIG. 25, S 907) as compared to the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment. The prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) is replaced with the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), and the second prefetch process 2 (S1060) is added.

  67, in the eighth embodiment, the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) which is one process of the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050). In the first pre-reading process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) of the eighth embodiment, each counter value obtained based on the game ball winning in the first starting opening in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) Is a process for generating a winning command.

  In the first look-ahead processing 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), first, each counter value (special hit random number) newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in the start winning processing 3 (FIG. 66, S150) The counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C4) are read out (S1051).

  A winning command is generated based on each counter value (the value read in S1051) newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S1052). The winning command indicates each counter value, and the voice lamp control device 113 is a command that can determine the winning order based on the winning command.

  Further, as for the second prefetch process 2 (S1060), since the first is only changed to the second in the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), the illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Do.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the jackpot, selects the variation pattern, calculates the variation start time, and starts the variation based on the acquired counter value in the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050). Since the numbering of the order is not performed, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Further, although the present embodiment is configured to generate only for the newly established hold for the prize command, the present invention is not limited thereto, for all the holds stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. It may be configured to generate again. By configuring in this manner, the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 can update all the data of the follow sort reserving storage area 223k every time the game ball wins, and the data is broken due to noise or the like. Also in this case, the processing such as sorting can be performed by being updated.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 68, S1400). The main process (FIG. 68, S1400) of the eighth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) with respect to the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. 69, S1490) is replaced with the pending reordering process (FIG. 40, S1413), and pending reordering process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) is added.

  In the eighth embodiment, a command determination process 3 (S1490) which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 68) performed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 3 (S1490). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S 1490) of the eighth embodiment, the process of S 1530 is added instead of the processes of S 1513 and S 1514 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S 1414) of the first embodiment. There is. For the other processing, the same processing as the command determination processing (S1414 in FIG. 36) of the first embodiment is executed.

  In command determination processing 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, it is determined whether a winning command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1512). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), each received counter value (from special winning random number counter C1, special hitting type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, variation pattern determination counter C4) Is extracted and stored in the other memory area 223m in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1530). Here, in the other memory area, a winning sequence (a winning sequence obtained by combining the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b) indicated by the winning command is identifiably stored for each counter value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), the processing of S1517 is executed. The processing after this has already been described in the first embodiment, and thus will not be described.

  In the present embodiment, each counter value extracted from the winning command is stored in the other memory area 223m. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to be stored in the corresponding holding area of the secondary sorting hold storage area 223m. It is also good. By configuring in this manner, the winning order of each counter value can be determined by the hold area, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG. 70, pending reordering processing 3 (S1480) which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this pending reordering process 3 (S1480). With regard to pending reordering processing 3 (FIG. 70, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, the processes of S1811 and S1812 are added to the pending reordering processing (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment. For the other processing, the same processing as the pending reordering processing (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment is executed.

  In reserve rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480), first, in command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490), a winning command is received, and each counter value is stored in the other memory area 223 m (ie, It is determined whether or not a winning command has been received (S1811). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1811: Yes), the pending sort order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is executed. The pending sort order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) will be described in detail later, but is a process for determining the variation start order of the pending symbol display based on each counter value indicated by the received winning command. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S 1811: No), the processing of S 1801 is executed. Since the process from S1801 is the same as the process from S1801 of the pending reordering process (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment, the detailed description will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 71, in the eighth embodiment, a pending sort order determination process (S1812) which is one process of the pending sort process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Will be explained. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the pending reordering order determination processing 3 (S1812). The pending reordering order determination process 3 (FIG. 71, S1812) of the eighth embodiment is a process for determining the change start order based on the respective counter values indicated by the winning command.

  In the hold rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S 1812), first, each counter value stored in the other memory area 223 m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (special hit random number counter C 1, special hit type counter C 2, The fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern determination counter C4) are read out (S1821).

  The read data is stored in the hold area corresponding to the winning order indicated by the winning command in the rearrangement hold storage area 223k (in the present embodiment, the winning commands are output in the order of winning, so among the free storage areas, It may be stored in the area where the winning order is the smallest). A fluctuation display start time is calculated at which fluctuation display based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value) is started (S1822).

  This fluctuation start time, as shown in FIG. 12, is a special symbol in the fluctuation display corresponding to the newly stored holding data (if it is the holding data based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second If it is a reserve data based on the special symbol 63b, each reserve data previously stored is determined based on the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol) and the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the newly stored reserve data. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation time. Here, the remaining variation time is determined based on the first variation time storage area 223i or the second variation time storage area 223j.

  Here, if the newly stored pending data is the pending data based on the first starting port 63a, the newly stored pending data is a previously held data based on the same starting port as the newly stored pending data. (Based on the first special symbol) pending data based on the first starting opening 63a stored in the first storage, while if the newly stored pending data is pending data based on the second starting opening 63b, it is stored first Data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second start port 63b being held.

  When the variable display start time is calculated, the post-rearrangement order is renumbered in the ascending order of the variable display start time of all the suspension data stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S1823). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, the renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the newly displayed variable data display start order of suspended data is interrupted by the variable data display start sequence of the previously stored data, it is natural that only the change order is renumbered. Good.

  It is determined whether the gaming state at the start of variation is a high probability gaming state (probable variation gaming state) (S1824). Here, by the time the special symbol corresponding to the newly established hold becomes the fluctuation start, the special symbol which is determined by stopping the fluctuation is determined and the gaming state at the time of the fluctuation start is determined.

  If it is determined that the gaming state at the start of the change is the high probability gaming state (S1824: Yes), the first special symbol is based on the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time. The judgment result is stored in the pass / fail judgment result storage area 223k1 of the hold area of the corresponding secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S1825). On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S1824: No), the jackpot determination value of the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability is set. Based on the judgment of the first special symbol, the judgment result is stored in the judgment result storage area 223k1 of the holding area of the corresponding sorting rearrangement storage area 223k (S1826).

  Next, the sub hold reordering storage area updating process (FIG. 72) is executed (S1827). The follow sort storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827) will be described in detail later, but based on the result of the pass / fail judgment of the pending data stored in the follow sort pending storage area 223k in the order of actual variable display start. The jackpot type (whether or not it is a positive change) and the change pattern (change time) are determined based on the respective counter values and stored (updated).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the secondary suspension rearrangement storage area updating process (S1827), which is one process of the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812), will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the sub hold reordering pending storage area updating process (S1827).

  In the secondary reserve rearranging storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827), it is first determined whether the success / failure determination result predicted in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the secondary sort order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) was a big hit (S1831). If it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted in the processing of S1825 or S1826 in the pending sort order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is a big hit (S1831: Yes), the predicted big hit is a probability variation big hit (15R probability variation It is determined whether it is a jackpot or a second R probability variation jackpot) (S1832). If it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a probable variation jackpot (S 1832: Yes), the follow reading probability change flag 223 k 6 of the follow sort hold storage area 223 k corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to on ( S1833). Note that, when the data is shifted to the upper reserved area and stored, the data on the reserved area before being shifted is cleared to 0, so the follow-up read change flag 223k6 is set to OFF there. That is, the follow-up read change flag 223k6, which has been set to ON once, is shifted in the hold area in order, and is overwritten (0 clear) when the next new data is shifted in the storage area of the data during fluctuation. Set to off.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not a definite variation jackpot (that is, 15R is usually a jackpot) (S1832: No), the processing of S1834 is executed.

  The special hit type counter C2 of the hold data newly stored from the special hit change pattern table 222c corresponding to the gaming state (certainly changed or not or not) at the start of the change display, change pattern determination counter C3 The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S1834).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination of success or failure in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the pending sort order determination process (S1812 in FIG. 71) is out of step (S1831: No) Based on the values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 of the suspension data newly stored from the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 222d corresponding to (whether or not it is a definite change or time delay) A variation pattern determined from time to time is predicted (S1835).

  The predicted success or failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored (corresponding to the newly stored pending data) in the corresponding storage areas of the pending area corresponding to the winning order in the sub sort pending storage area 223k (S1836) ). It is determined whether or not the variable display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the sub sort suspension storage area 223k is stored by changing (changing the order) to the variable display start order stored previously (S1837 ). When it is determined that the variable display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the sub sort suspension storage area 223k is interrupted (or changed in order) and stored in the variable display start order previously stored. (S1837: Yes), with regard to the pending data after the variation display start order of the newly stored pending data, again predict the yes / no, the stop type, and the variation pattern and update (S1838).

  As described above, in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, based on each counter value indicated by the winning command output by the main control unit 110, the determination of the acceptance or rejection, the selection of the variation pattern, and the determination of the sorting order (variation start order) Since each operation is performed, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 reliably executes the process even when the game balls are concentrated on the first start hole 63a or the second start hole 63b and the process of selecting the variation pattern is concentrated. Can.

  Further, since the winning command output from main control device 110 only indicates each counter value, it is difficult to determine whether the determination is a big hit even if the command is intercepted by a hanging board or the like. Yes, you can control fraud.

  In addition, since the data amount of the winning command output by main controller 110 can be configured small, the burden of transmitting and receiving the command between main controller 110 and voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the command can be transmitted and received. Can reduce the time required for

  In addition, if the value of each counter value is backed up by the voice lamp control device 113, there is no need for the main control device 110 to output each counter value again even when the power is restored, and the pachinko machine 10 Power-on startup time can be shortened.

  In the present embodiment, each time the game is suspended, it is determined whether there is a change in the order of start of change (the program is interrupted and stored in order), and the game state at the start of change (high probability or low probability) However, if there is a hit in the hold, the hold, which is a hit, of the hold that has been established later is established first. It may be configured not to stop the change earlier than the hit retention. By configuring in this way, there is no case where the gaming state at the start of the change is changed due to the change start order, there is no need to repeat the prior judgment again again, and the control load in the game can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 78, a pachinko machine 10 according to a ninth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the sorting winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the sorting winning device 630 next, the game ball is moved to either the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. A prize notification lamp 660 is provided to indicate whether the operation is to be performed.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that it is notified to which of the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b the game ball is distributed when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 630. Do.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The distribution winning device 630 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. In the sorting winning device 630 in the ninth embodiment, a winning notification lamp 660 is added on the front side visible to the player of the sorting winning device 630 in the first embodiment. The prize notification lamp 660 is a lamp for notifying which of the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b the state is to be distributed when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 630.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the winning notification lamp 660 is composed of a left route winning notification lamp 660a and a right route winning notification lamp 660b. The left route winning notification lamp 660a is disposed at a position where the passive distribution member 640 can be rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the accommodating portion 640a can receive the game ball entered into the distribution winning device 630. (In other words, in the state of guiding the gaming ball to the first start opening 63a), it is controlled to light up.

  In addition, the right route winning notification lamp 660b is disposed at a position where the passive distribution member 640 can be rotated in a left-handed direction as viewed from the front, and the accommodating portion 640b can receive the game ball entered into the distribution device 630 It is controlled to light up when it is in the on state (that is, in the state of guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 63b).

  In the distribution winning device 630, a rotation angle sensor 670 for detecting the rotation of the passive distribution member 640 is provided on the rotary shaft portion of the passive distribution member 640, and when the passive distribution member 640 rotates, the rotation angle is detected Is configured. The rotation angle sensor 670 is set such that the position at which the passive distribution member 640 pivots to the position where the magnet 640 c provided on the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900 a overlap is the origin (rotation angle 0 degree). ing. When the passive distribution member 640 pivots clockwise from the origin position (see FIG. 74 (a)), it becomes a positive rotation angle, and conversely, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position (FIG. 74 When it is turned to a)), it is set so as to be a negative rotation angle.

  Here, the position at which the passive distribution member 640 is rotated to the position where the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a overlap is the origin position of the rotation angle sensor 670, thereby the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900a. And the passive distribution member 640 does not stop at this origin position, and stops at the position rotated in either direction in the front view and the rotation angle sensor is positive. Value or negative value. Therefore, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is at a position where the gaming ball can be guided to the first starting opening 63a. On the other hand, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a negative value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is at a position where the gaming ball can be guided to the second starting opening 63b. Therefore, by turning on the winning notification lamp 660 on the basis of the determination result, when the player next enters the sorting winning device 630, the gaming ball is divided between the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. It can be determined in advance which of the two is allocated.

  Further, the position at which the passive distribution member 640 stops is always the position of the left route prize notification lamp 660a of the prize notification lamp 660 or the right, since the rotation angle sensor 670 is at a position where the rotation angle sensor 670 is negative or positive (ie, other than the origin). The route winning notification lamp 660b is turned on, and the player can always be notified of the winning route.

  In this way, when the game ball enters the sorting winning device 630, it can be determined in advance which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b it will be distributed, so for example, the first starting When the holding ball corresponding to the opening 63a is the upper limit number of times (4 in the present embodiment) and the holding ball corresponding to the second starting opening 63b is one less three than the upper limit number of times (3 in the present embodiment) Next, when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 630 and is distributed to the first start port 63a, an overflow occurs and the game ball is consumed uselessly, so the player If it is not determined which of the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b is allocated, the problem that the game ball can not be fired always occurs.

  However, in the present embodiment, the prize notification lamp 660 allows the player to know in advance whether the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b is to be distributed next, and therefore, if it overflows Only when it is determined that the game ball can not be fired can be played efficiently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A winning notification lamp 660 and rotation sensors 670 are added to the main control unit 110. The prize notification lamp 660 is connected via an input / output port so that lighting control is performed based on a command from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the rotation angle sensor 670, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected so as to be able to acquire the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 via the input / output port.

  Referring to FIG. 76, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process of the ninth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment in the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) instead of the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). Has been added.

  With reference to FIG. 77, in the ninth embodiment, start winning process 4 (S160) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). In the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment, a winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is added to the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment. . In the processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S901 to S914 in the first embodiment are executed.

  Referring to FIG. 78, in the ninth embodiment, the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) which is one of the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. Do. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this winning route notification processing (FIG. 78, S1070). In the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) of the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the sorting winning device 630 next, it is sorted to whichever of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. It is a process for performing lighting control for notifying whether it is possible.

  In the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070), first, it is determined whether the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value (that is, whether the gaming ball is guided to the first starting opening) (S1071) ). If it is determined that the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value (S1071: Yes), the left route winning notification lamp 660a is turned on (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation angle sensor has a negative value (S1071: No), the right route winning notification lamp 660b is turned on (S1073).

  As described above, when the gaming ball next wins the sorting winning device 630 by determining the state of the passive sorting member 640 according to the value of the rotation angle sensor 670, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b It is possible to accurately determine which is allocated to which, it is possible to inform the player of accurate information.

  In the present embodiment, the lamp is used for notification. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, sound may be used for notification, or the third symbol display device 81 may be used for notification using characters or symbols. You may By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player more easily. In addition, if the third symbol display device 81 reports by characters, symbols, etc., the player can also check the winning route of the sorting winning device 630 while visually recognizing the variation display of the special symbol, making it easier to play the game .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, a pachinko machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described ninth embodiment, the state of the passive distribution member of the distribution winning device 630 is determined by the rotation angle sensor 670, and the gaming ball is either the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. The case of determining whether to distribute is described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, the sorting winning device 630 is in a state of guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 63b. When it is determined that the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 63b, the sorting winning device 630 determines that the gaming ball is in a state of being guided to the first starting opening 63a.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment in the following points. In the tenth embodiment, when the game ball is prized in the distribution winning device 630 based on winning in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, whichever of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b The second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment in that it is determined whether it is distributed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the ninth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the rotating sensors 670 are eliminated from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the ninth embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 80, a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process of the tenth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) of the ninth embodiment in place of the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) and the start winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). ) Has been added.

  Referring to FIG. 81, in the tenth embodiment, start winning process 5 (S170) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the start winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). The start winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170) of the tenth embodiment is different from the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment in that the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is deleted. The processes of S1080 and S1090 are added. In the processes of S901 to S914 in the tenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment are executed.

  If it is determined whether the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 63a (S901: Yes), lighting control is performed to light the right route winning notification lamp (S1080). Here, since the distribution winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the gaming balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is detected that the gaming balls have won in the first starting opening 63a. In this case, it can be determined by the distribution winning device 630 that the game ball entered next to the second starting opening 63b is distributed. Thus, the configuration makes it possible to predict and determine the state of the passive distribution member 640 without having to detect the state of the passive distribution member 640, and it is necessary to provide a sensor or the like for detection. Configuration can be simplified. Similarly, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 63b (S908: Yes), lighting control is performed to light the left route winning notification lamp (S1090).

  As described above, since the lighting display of the winning notification lamp 660 is switched every time the game ball wins the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the player gets the game ball winning in the distribution winning device 630. In this case, it can be confirmed in advance which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in the state of being distributed, and when entering the game ball, it does not become a holding ball, It is possible to determine whether it overflows and play a game.

  In the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 640 is configured to rotate by coming into contact with the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be movable by a motor, a solenoid, or the like.

  In such a configuration, the passive distribution member 640 is moved (rotated) so as to alternately distribute the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. In addition, when the passive distribution member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, the state of the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined, and the first corresponding to the special symbol with less holding The movable control may be performed so as to be distributed to the starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. By configuring in this way, in one special symbol, it is suppressed that an overflow that the upper limit number of times of holding balls exceeds will occur, and the upper limit number of times is equally applied to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can hold it until.

  When moving the passive distribution member 640 by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, the boundary wall between the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b of the passive distribution member 640 is detected when an error or fraud (abnormal winning etc.) is detected in the game. The game ball is moved to a position on the center line between the blades 64a and the blades 64b of the ordinary electric product 64 (that is, a position where the magnet 640c and the base side magnet 900a overlap), and the game ball is moved to the first starting opening. You may comprise so that it may prevent winning in 63a and the 2nd starting opening 63b. By configuring in this manner, when the pachinko machine 10 is tampered with or the like, it is possible to control so that the lottery game is not performed, and it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b) to 84. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a power failure occurs, the data in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the data in the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are backed up (backup from the power supply device 115 Data is held by power supply). Then, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10, it is confirmed whether each data of the RAM 23 and the RAM 223 is not broken, and if not broken, the data is loaded (used) as it is, and the power is turned off. The case where it returns from the state just before and starts a game was explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the reordering suspension in the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Based on each data of the storage area 203 u, a rearrangement return data command is generated and output to the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 compares the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command with the data of the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the RAM 223, and if they match, it returns as it is to play the game. If it does not match, the data in each reserve area of the sort rearrangement reserve storage area 223k is updated to the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command, and the game is started.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eleventh embodiment, the first embodiment is carried out in that each data in the reordering storage area 203u backed up at the time of power-on and the subsorting reserving storage area 223k are collated, and processing is performed to see if they match. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in form.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  82 (a) and 82 (b) are diagrams schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the reserved symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of establishment and returned. In the upper display area Dm, the characters "displaying in the hold order of holding" is displayed, which indicates that the held symbol display is displayed in the order of formation. This character is displayed until the game is resumed and the newly established held symbol display is displayed. Although details will be described later, when the reserved symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the establishment order and returns, the reordering storage area 203u of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 When the data in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the above is compared with each other and they do not match.

  FIG. 82 (b) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the reserved symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of start of fluctuation and recovered. In the upper display area Dm, the characters “displaying hold in change start order” indicating that the held symbol display is displayed by being rearranged in the change start order are displayed. This character is displayed until the game is resumed and the newly established held symbol display is displayed. Although the details will be described later, when the reserved symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed and returned in the change start order, the reordering storage area 203u of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 When the data in the sub sort reserving storage area 223 k of the RAM 223 in is matched with each other.

  In this way, by configuring, it is possible for the game arcade side or a maintenance worker to check whether or not the data mismatch has occurred for some reason when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In addition, since the player has a normal display, he / she can not know that some trouble has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and the player can be prevented from having anxiety or doubt.

  In addition, since data comparison is performed at the time of initial setting when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the pachinko machine 10 can be restored with a more accurate display of a reserved symbol. Furthermore, if the data do not match, the data is updated with the data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u, so the data in the follow rearrangement hold storage area 223k should coincide with the data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u at startup. It is possible to prevent the problem that an erroneous holding symbol display is displayed at the time of recovery.

  In this embodiment, notification is made by displaying characters in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of recovery, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured to be notified by displaying (for example, flashing or displaying as a special pattern) the reserved symbol display in a special display mode at the time of return.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 are backup power supplies from the power supply device 115 (power stored in the capacitor Is supplied even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, so that the contents of the RAM 203 and the RAM 223 are not initialized and are held for a certain period (one week in this embodiment).

  A start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The start-up process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the start-up process (FIG. 32) of the first embodiment except for the process of S1120. In the processes of S1101 to S1114 in the eleventh embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment are performed.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S1109 or S1112 is performed, the process of S1120 is performed. In the process of S1120, the reordering recovery data command is generated based on each data of each reserve area of the reorder reserve storage area 203u, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113. This rearrangement return data command is generated for each reserve area, and data (reserve areas 1 to 8) indicating each reserve area is attached, and each data of each reserve area (qualification result storage area 203u1, large hit type memory The area 203 u 2, the variation pattern type storage area 203 u 4, the variation start time storage area 203 u 5, and the pre-read probability change flag 203 u 5) are commands.

  As described above, in the start-up process (FIG. 83) that is executed before the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the normal game (the main process (FIG. 33, S1200)) is executed, the reordering storage area Since the data of 203u is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a sort recovery return data command, the sort hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are set at the initial setting at power on. The data can be collated with the sub sort reserve storage area 223k, and the data of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 matches the data of the sort reserve storage area 203u of the main control unit 110. It can be done.

  Here, for example, even if secondary sort reserve storage area 223k of audio lamp control device 113 stores correct data, the data in sort reserve storage area 203u of main controller 110 is erroneous or is initialized. When the power is restored, even if the reserved symbol display is displayed based on the data of the sort rearranging storage area 223k, there may be a problem that it becomes an erroneous reserved symbol display. However, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 are collated. Problems can be prevented.

  The start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The start-up process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the start-up process (FIG. 34) of the first embodiment except for the processes of S1320 to S1325. The processes in S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1311 in the first embodiment.

  In the start-up process (84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S1131 is executed, the process of S1320 is executed. It is determined whether the reordering return data command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1320). If it is determined that the reordering return data command has not been received (S1320: No), this process is repeatedly executed. In other words, it is in a state of waiting until receiving the rearrangement return data command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reordering recovery data command has been received (S1320: Yes), it is determined whether the data in the follow reordering storage area 223k matches the data indicated by the reordering recovery data command. (S1321). If it is determined that the data in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k matches the data indicated by the sort recovery data command (S1321: Yes), all sort flags 223k7 of the reserve area in which the data is stored are turned on. Is set (S1322). Display the characters “displaying pending with change start order” indicating that the held symbol display is displayed in the order of start of change in the left display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 And generates a display command instructing the display control unit 114 to output the command to the display control unit 114 (S1323).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k and the data indicated by the sort return data command do not match (S1321: No), the sort return data command output by the main control device 110 is Based on the data shown, the data of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k is updated, and all the sort flags 223k7 of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k are set to off (S1324). It instructs that the character of "displaying hold in order of establishment" is displayed in the left side display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, which indicates that the suspension symbol display is displayed in order of establishment A display command is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1325).

  In the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the process of the wait time (S1102) is executed to perform step S1311 of the start-up process (FIG. 84) of the audio lamp control apparatus 113. The main process (S1200) is configured to be executed after the process of (1) and after the start-up process (not shown) of the display control device 114 is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 is performed before the reordering recovery data command is output from the main control device 110. In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221, the process of S1320 is executed to wait for the main controller 110 to output the rearrangement return data command.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from dropping the rearrangement return data command. Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, after executing the process of setting the interrupt permission (S1311), the process of receiving the reordering recovery data command and collating is performed. Therefore, even if the main control unit 110 starts the main processing (Fig. 33, S1200) first and sends a command, it should be performed after executing processing corresponding to the processing. It is possible to prevent the control process required for the normal game from being performed and to prevent the problem of freezing.

  In the present embodiment, when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on, or the like, and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is initialized, the rearrangement recovery data command is rearranged. This command is a command indicating that there is no data in the replacement storage area 203 u. This command may be substituted by a dedicated initial value setting command or the like.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when collation is in agreement, it is comprised so that reservation symbol display may be displayed in the change start order, and it is comprised so that suspension symbol display may be displayed in establishment order when it does not correspond, but it is especially limited. Instead, if they match, they may be displayed in the order of establishment, and if they do not match, they may be displayed in the order of start of variation. In addition, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the state (arrangement order) immediately before the power is turned off, with the third symbol display device 81, a dedicated lamp, etc. You may comprise so that it may alert | report. With such a configuration, even if a momentary loss of power or the like occurs, the state of the display of the reserved symbol before the power-off can be more accurately restored, and the player can play the game again safely.

  In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main control device 110, the game state immediately before the main control device 110 is turned off (the game state has a high probability or a low probability or a short time (a high probability of a normal symbol) If it is in the state) or time is short, the number of times (time value of the time reduction counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the gaming state at the time of return, and can determine sorting and the like.

  Next, a modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 (c) and 85. In the modification of 11th Embodiment, when a collation result does not correspond, as shown to FIG. 82C, a reservation symbol display is displayed by a temporary symbol.

  FIG. 82C is a diagram showing an example when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the reserved symbol display is displayed with a temporary symbol and returned in the modification of the eleventh embodiment. In the upper display area Dm, characters of "temporarily displaying on hold" indicating that the on-hold symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol are displayed. The game is resumed, and a new winning command is generated based on the respective hold areas of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control unit 110. Are displayed until the respective pending areas of the sort rearranging storage area 223k are updated. Although the details will be described later, when the reserved symbol display is displayed as a temporary reserved symbol display and returns, the rearrangement pending storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 It is when the data in the sub sort reserve storage area 223 k is not collated.

  By configuring in this way, when the data of the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 and the sort reserve storage area 203u of the main control unit 110 do not match, a temporary reserve symbol display is displayed Thus, it is possible for the gaming shop side and a vendor etc. who performs maintenance inspection of the pachinko machine 10 to confirm that the pachinko machine 10 has some abnormality and the data do not match. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from displaying an erroneous holding symbol display by continuing to display the temporary holding symbol display until a new winning command is received.

  In the present embodiment, the temporary holding symbol display is displayed, but not limited thereto, the temporary holding symbol display is not displayed, and the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to 8 have special colors or display modes (for example, yellow) Or may be displayed in a blinking manner).

  With reference to FIG. 85, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The startup process (FIG. 85) of the modification of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment except for the processes of S1330 to S1331 instead of the processes of S1324 to S1325. ing. The processes in S1301 to S1323 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1323 in the eleventh embodiment.

  In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment, the data in the subsorting reserving storage area 223k matches the data indicated by the reordering return data command in the process of S1321. If it is not determined (S1321: No), the data of each reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area 223k is cleared to 0 (initialized) (S1330). A display command for causing the display control device 114 to display a temporary holding symbol display for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, a period until a new winning command is received and a holding symbol display is newly displayed) A temporary symbol command is generated and output (S1331).

  As described above, when the collation of the data does not match, the temporary holding symbol display is performed, and by delaying the normal holding symbol display until the winning command is newly received, the holding symbol is more correct. The display can be notified to the player.

  In addition, since it is configured that the normal reserved symbol display is restored at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the holding symbol display is displayed because the player starts the game. Also, it can be recognized as if the display is resumed again, and the game can be played with ease.

  In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main control device 110, the game state immediately before the main control device 110 is turned off (the game state has a high probability or a low probability or a short time (a high probability of a normal symbol) If it is in the state) or time is short, the number of times (time value of the time reduction counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the gaming state at the time of return, and can determine sorting and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 87, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described eleventh embodiment, the backup power is supplied from the power supply 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 so that data is backed up even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The case has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the backup power is not supplied from the power supply apparatus 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, based on the reordering return data command from the main control unit 110, the data of the follow sort reserving storage area 223k is updated, and the holding symbol display is restored to the state immediately before the power is turned off.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the twelfth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 does not back up data when the power is turned off, and based on the reordering recovery data command output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on again. Is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the process of restoring the reserved symbol display to the state immediately before the power is turned off is executed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Although not illustrated, in the twelfth embodiment, backup power from the power supply device 115 is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). The main processing (FIG. 86, S1400) of the twelfth embodiment is the same as the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the eleventh embodiment except for the processing of S1417 to S1419. In the processes of S1401 to S1416 in the twelfth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1416 in the eleventh embodiment are performed.

  In the main process (FIG. 86) according to the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is present (S1415: Yes), no processing is executed and the process waits until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. It will be in the state of

  Referring to FIG. 87, the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The startup process (FIG. 87) of the twelfth embodiment is different from the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment, in that processes of S1340 to S1343 are added instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. The processes in S1301 to S1311 in the twelfth embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

  When the process of S1311 is executed, it is determined whether the reordering restoration data command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1340). If it is determined that the reordering recovery data command has not been received (S1340: No), a process of waiting until the reordering recovery data command is received is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reordering recovery data command has been received (S1340: Yes), the data in each pending area of the sort reserving storage area 223k is updated based on the data indicated by the reordering recovery data command. (S1341). The rearrangement flag 223k7 of each reserve area is set to off (S1342). The display control device 114 generates a display command that causes the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to display the characters "displaying in the hold order in the hold order" indicating that the hold symbol display is displayed in the order of formation. Output (S1343).

  As described above, even if backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 causes the audio lamp control device 113 to reorder storage area 203u when the power is turned on. The rearrangement and recovery data command based on the data stored in is output. Therefore, even if the backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to return and display the reserved symbol display when the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. Therefore, the capacity of the backup power supply of the power supply device 115 can be reduced, and the size of the power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be made compact.

  In addition, when the power is turned on again, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the order of establishment and the notification that it is displayed in the order of establishment is performed regardless of the state at the time of power off. It is possible to easily determine the order in which the reserved symbol display is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main control device 110, the game state immediately before the main control device 110 is turned off (the game state has a high probability or a low probability or a short time (a high probability of a normal symbol) If it is in the state) or time is short, the number of times (time value of the time reduction counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the gaming state at the time of return, and can determine sorting and the like.

  Next, a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification of the twelfth embodiment, in the start-up process (FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, when the reordering return data command is received from the main control device 110, The data is updated, all sorting flags 223k7 of the holding area in which the data is stored are set to ON, and the holding symbol display after return is displayed in the order of start of fluctuation.

  Referring to FIG. 88, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The start-up process (FIG. 88) of the modification of the twelfth embodiment differs from the processes of S1342 to S1343 with respect to the start-up process (FIG. 87) of the twelfth embodiment, and each process of S1350 to S1351 is added. It is done. In the processes of S1301 to S1341 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1301 to S1341 in the twelfth embodiment are performed.

  In the start-up process (88) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S1341 is executed, in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k, of the reserve area where data is stored. All sort flags 223k7 are set to ON (S1350). A display command is generated that causes the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to be displayed with the character "displaying pending with change start order" indicating that the reserved symbol display is sorted and displayed in the change start order. And output to the display control device 114 (S1351).

  In this way, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10 from the power-off state and the display of the reserved symbol display is restored, the held symbol display is displayed regardless of the sequence displayed immediately before the power is turned off. Sorted and displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the power has been restored and the data has been forcibly rearranged.

  In addition, when returning from the power off, it is automatically rearranged and the reserved symbol display is displayed, so it is recognized that the reserved symbol display displayed being rearranged is the one established before the power off. Even if the power is cut off during the normal game, the game can be resumed safely.

  In the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110, the speech lamp control device 113 sets all the rearrangement flags 223k7 to ON, and in the main processing executed thereafter, The reserved symbol display is arranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the reordering recovery data command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the value indicated by the change order storage area 203u4 of the reordering storage area 203u indicated by the reordering recovery data command. It is good also as composition which generates and outputs a display command which rearranges and displays a reservation symbol display based on it. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to reduce the control addition to rearrange the reserved symbol display at the time of startup processing. Therefore, if the rearrangement return data command output from the main control device 110 is received, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged and displayed. In this case, all sorting flags 223k7 may be set to be on, and the reserved symbol display may be configured to be kept sorted even after start-up processing, or displayed at the time of start-up processing. The sorting and holding symbol display may be configured to be maintained in the sorted state until it is digested.

  In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main control device 110, the game state immediately before the main control device 110 is turned off (the game state has a high probability or a low probability or a short time (a high probability of a normal symbol) If it is in the state) or time is short, the number of times (time value of the time reduction counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the gaming state at the time of return, and can determine sorting and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 90, a pachinko machine 10 according to a thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, in the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device is based on the data of the reordering storage area 203u backed up. The sort recovery return data command is output to 113, the data indicated by the output sort recovery return data command is compared with the data of the secondary sort hold storage area 223k, and power supply interruption occurs in the hold symbol display The case of returning to the previous state has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the backup power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, in the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the slave sort is backed up without receiving the sort recovery data command from the main control unit 110. Based on the data of the storage area 223k, the reserved symbol display is displayed and restored.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the thirteenth embodiment, the main control unit 110 backs up in the slave sort reserving storage area 223k of the voice lamp control unit 113 without outputting the sort recovery data command to the voice lamp control unit 113. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that the processing for restoring the reserved symbol display is executed based on the data.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the same manner as the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control unit 113 of the present embodiment is supplied with backup power when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the backup power is supplied. Each data stored in the RAM 223 is configured to be held.

  Referring to FIG. 89, the start-up process performed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The startup process (FIG. 89) of the thirteenth embodiment is the same as the startup process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment except that the process of S1120 is deleted. In the processes of S1101 to S1114 in the thirteenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment are performed. That is, the same process as the start-up process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the first embodiment is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 90, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. In the startup process (FIG. 90) of the thirteenth embodiment, the process of S1360 is added to the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment, instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. The processes in S1301 to S1311 in the thirteenth embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

  In the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirteenth embodiment, when the process of S1310 is executed, based on the data stored in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k, A display command for causing the display control device 114 to display the reserved symbol display is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1360).

  Here, the holding symbol display to be displayed is displayed based on the data of each holding area stored in the sub sort holding memory area 223k immediately before the power is turned off. Since the state of the rearrangement flag 223k7 of each reserve area is stored, the reserve symbol display is displayed in the order in which it was displayed immediately before the power-off.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the processing performed when the main control device 110 is turned on, and to shorten the rise time (time until the normal game is executed) when the power is turned on.

  In addition, in the state immediately before the power is turned off, it is possible to restore the display of the holding symbol, and the player can resume the game with ease even after the power is turned on again.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation start of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes possible has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, there is a high probability that it will be selected when becoming a big hit such as super reach at the timing when the fluctuation start becomes possible. When the variation pattern is selected, a notification mode for notifying the player is displayed so as to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fourteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when becoming a jackpot such as super reach is selected, the player is notified to pay attention to the display area displayed in the variation pattern. The point is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (a)-FIG. 91 (c), the display aspect displayed on the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 91 (a) is a view schematically showing that a background image of the right display area Dm2 is blinked when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right display area Dm2.

  FIG. 91 (b) shows the second special symbol (in the present embodiment, the reach state is displayed in the right display region Dm2 when the variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right display region Dm2 FIG. 16 schematically shows that the size of the symbol) is displayed with a symbol larger than that of the normal time.

  In FIG. 91 (c), when the variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right side display area Dm2, the player is notified to look at the right side display area Dm2 in the left side display area Dm1. It is the figure which showed typically that the character of "was displayed.

  In this way, by configuring, the player pays attention to the display area on the side on which the background image is blinked and plays a game, thereby displaying a fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when a jackpot such as super reach occurs. It is possible to play a game while preventing missed variation modes.

  In addition, the player can easily see which display area to view, and it is not necessary to always pay attention to both display areas to play a game, and it is possible to play the game comfortably. Therefore, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the player's fatigue can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol to be noticed is notified by the above notification, but not limited thereto, the left side display region Dm1 or the right side of the upper display region Dm displaying the special symbol to be noticed The size of the display area of the display area Dm2 may be varied. Specifically, in order to pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol, the size of the left side display area Dm1 is enlarged and displayed on the right side display area Dm2 side, and the size of the right side display area Dm2 is reduced. Alternatively, the display may be changed so as to be eliminated (set the upper display area Dm to the left display area Dm1). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the variation pattern of the special symbol that he / she wants to pay attention to. Also, the player can play a game expecting whether the left side display area Dm1 or the right side display area Dm2 is greatly varied, and it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the game at an early stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 92 is a view schematically showing a part of another memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. As shown in FIG. In the other memory area 203v, a first delay time storage area 203v5 and a second delay time storage area 203v6 are added.

  In the first delay time storage area 203v5, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the second special symbol, the same time as the selected variation time is for delaying the start of variation of the first special symbol It is a storage area stored as a delay time.

  Although the first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described later in detail, the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 If the variation pattern is or the variation pattern of the super reach is deviated, the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

  Further, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated each time the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed. . In detail, 2 ms which is an interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed is subtracted.

  In the second delay time storage area 203v6, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the first special symbol, the same time as the selected variation time is for delaying the start of variation of the second special symbol It is a storage area stored as a delay time.

  Although the second delay time storage area 203v6 will be described in detail later, the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 If the variation pattern is or the variation pattern of the super reach is deviated, the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

  Further, when the delay time is stored in the second delay time storage area 203v6, the time is updated each time the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is executed. . In detail, 2 ms which is an interval of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is subtracted.

  As described above, when the fluctuation pattern that becomes the jackpot or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is selected in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the fluctuation start of the other special symbol that becomes the fluctuation start thereafter is delayed. Therefore, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation pattern having a high probability of being selected in the case of a big hit from fluctuating display at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a complicated gaming state in which the player needs to pay attention to both the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2.

  Although the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5 and the second delay time storage area 203v6 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a count value or the like may be stored. May be With such a configuration, each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the count value is decremented by 1 to count the number of times the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed. Naturally, it may be configured to measure time.

  Referring to FIG. 93, in the fourteenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is added. The processes in S301 to S309 in the fourteenth embodiment are the same as the processes in S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed.

  94, in the fourteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 93, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 5 (S350) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S350). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Also, if the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an out-of-order fluctuation pattern of super reach, a delay time for delaying the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol is set, and the first special is selected. This is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player so as to look at the variation mode of the symbol.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, the variation that becomes the big hit in the variation mode of the second special symbol) Whether or not the pattern or the outreach super reach is fluctuatingly displayed is determined (S571). If it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S571: No), the first delay time is reduced by 2 ms and updated (S584). On the other hand, if it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S571: Yes), it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S572). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S572: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S573). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S572: No), a special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S575). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S576).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S577).

  The fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S577 is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an out-of-order super reach (S578). If it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or a deviation pattern of a super reach that is deviating (S578: Yes), the same fluctuation time as the selected fluctuation pattern is a delay time Are set in the second delay time storage 203v5 (S579). A first warning notice command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the left side display area Dm1 where the first special symbol is displayed (S580).

  A second mute command is set to mute the sound effect and voice (the sound effect and voice set to the variation pattern in which the second special symbol is varied) for varying the second special symbol (S581). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S582). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S 583).

  Thus, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, the notification mode is set so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol when the variation pattern to be the big hit or the super reach to be off is selected in the variation mode of the first special symbol. Therefore, the player can be prevented from missing the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to focus on, and can play the game comfortably.

  In addition, in the variation pattern of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern to be the jackpot or the super reach to be distracted is selected, it is related to the variation of the second special symbol so as to pay attention to the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Sound effects and sounds are muted. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of which special symbol to pay attention to. In addition, it becomes easy to hear the sound and sound effects of the first special symbol, and it is possible to enjoy the game more.

  Also, in the first special symbol variation mode, when the jackpot variation pattern or the out-of-point super reach is selected, the variation start of the second special symbol is delayed, so the left display area Dm1 and the right display are simultaneously displayed. In the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the display of a notable fluctuation mode, and provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Also, by displaying the variation mode in which the player has an expectation that the jackpot might be expected at different times (states not displayed simultaneously), it is possible to play the game while maintaining the sense of expectation of the jackpot for a longer time. The game can be prevented from getting bored early.

  In addition, by setting the variation pattern command and starting measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time can be measured at the same time as the variation start of the first special symbol, and the variation time can be measured accurately. Can be measured.

  The size of the first special symbol may be configured to be large as a notification mode for notifying the player to pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol (see FIG. 91B). In addition, to notice the first special symbol, the right side display area Dm2 may be configured to display the letter "Look at the left!" Which informs the attention of the first special symbol (see FIG. 91 (c)). Also, the above contents may be combined with each other. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is focused on the variation mode of the first special symbol when the variation pattern that becomes the jackpot or the super reach that becomes the out-of-order is selected. It was set as the structure by which the sound effect and the sound in connection with the fluctuation of a design are muffled. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two speakers, and on the other hand, it is configured to output voice and sound effects related to the first special symbol, and on the other hand, sound and sound effects related to the second special symbol Etc., and in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when a variation pattern that is a big hit or a super reach that is out is selected, a voice or sound effect related to the second special symbol is output. By making a speaker into a non-operation or low output configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbol may be noticed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily switch between voice and sound effects (switching between which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the sound or sound effect is to be output).

  Referring to FIG. 95, in the fourteenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110. A second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the second special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is added. In the processes of S701 to S709 in the fourteenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 96, in the fourteenth embodiment, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 95, S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 5 (S750) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S750). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Also, if the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an out-of-order fluctuation pattern of super reach, a delay time for delaying the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol is set, and the second special is selected. This is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player so as to look at the variation mode of the symbol.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750), first, whether the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v 6 (that is, the variation that becomes the big hit in the variation mode of the first special symbol) Whether a pattern or out-of-order super reach is fluctuatingly displayed is determined (S751). If it is determined that the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (S751: No), the second delay time is reduced by 2 ms and updated (S764). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second delay time is not set (S751: Yes), it is determined whether the result determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot (S752). The determination as to whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. If it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S752: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table 202d according to the gaming state is set (S753). In the present embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol dedicated to the second special symbol is set. ing. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S752: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S755). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S756).

  The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S757).

  The variation pattern selected in the process of S757 is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern serving as a jackpot or a super reach (S758). If it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or a deviation pattern of a super reach that is deviating (S758: Yes), the same fluctuation time as the selected fluctuation pattern is a delay time Are set in the first delay time storage 203v5 (S759). A second warning notice command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the right side display area Dm2 where the second special symbol is displayed (S760).

  A first mute command is set to mute the sound effect and voice (the sound effect and voice set to the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is varied) for fluctuating the first special symbol (S761). The second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S762). The measurement start of the second fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, is set (S763).

  Thus, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, the notification mode is set so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the second special symbol when the variation pattern serving as the jackpot or the super reach serving as the deviation is selected. Therefore, the player can be prevented from missing the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to focus on, and can play the game comfortably.

  In addition, in the variation pattern of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is the jackpot or the super reach that is the gap is selected, it is related to the variation of the first special symbol so as to pay attention to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Sound effects and sounds are muted. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to easily understand which special symbol to pay attention to. In addition, it becomes easy to hear the sound and sound effects of the second special symbol, it is possible to enjoy the game more.

  In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation mode, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the out-of-focus super reach is selected, the first special symbol fluctuation start is delayed, so the left display area Dm1 and the side display are simultaneously displayed. In the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the display of a notable fluctuation mode, and provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Also, by displaying the variation mode in which the player has an expectation that the jackpot might be expected at different times, it is possible to play the game while maintaining the expectation of the jackpot for a longer time, and the game gets bored early Can be prevented.

  In addition, by setting the variation pattern command and starting measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time can be measured at the same time as the variation start of the second special symbol, and the variation time can be measured accurately. Can be measured.

  The size of the second special symbol may be set large as the notification mode for notifying the player of the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see FIG. 91 (b)). In addition, in order to pay attention to the second special symbol, the left display area Dm1 may be configured to display the character "look at the right!" Notifying that attention is given to the second special symbol (see FIG. 91 (c)). Also, the above contents may be combined with each other. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 98. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation start of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes possible has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, there is a high probability that it will be selected when becoming a big hit such as super reach at the timing when the fluctuation start becomes possible. When the variation pattern is selected, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of displaying a notification mode for notifying the player so as to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when becoming a jackpot such as super reach is selected and a command indicating the variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, voice is generated. The lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the notification is given so that the player pays attention to the display area displayed in the variation pattern.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The variation display setting process (S1411), which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) of the fifteenth embodiment is the same as the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) of the first embodiment except for the processes of S1630 and S1640. The processes in S1601 to S1614 in the fifteenth embodiment are the same as the processes in S1601 to S1614 in the first embodiment.

  In the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1603 is executed, the first attention notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is executed. Ru. The first warning notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) will be described in detail later, but in the main control unit 110, the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit, or it is a super In the case of the reach, in order to set a command to execute notification to make the player pay attention to the first special symbol fluctuation mode, and a command to mute sound and sound effects relating to the second special symbol fluctuation mode Processing.

  In the first caution notification process (FIG. 98, S1630), first, it is determined whether the first variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is a variation pattern serving as a big hit or a super reach that is out of order (S1631). When it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that makes a big hit or is a super reach of out-of-range (S1631: Yes), the background of the left display area Dm1 displaying the first special symbol A first notice notice command is generated to instruct the display control device 114 to blink the image (see FIG. 91A), and is output to the display control device 114 (S1632).

  A second mute command to mute the voice and sound effects related to the variation mode of the second special symbol is generated and output (S1633). On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that is a big hit, or not being a non-super reach (S1631: No), this process ends.

  Returning to the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the description will be continued. When the first caution notification process (FIG. 98, S1411) is executed, the processes from S1604 to S1608 are executed. When the process of S1608 is executed, the process of the second warning notification process (S1640) is executed. For the second warning notice process (S1640), the process of the first warning notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is as follows: the first notice notice command is the second notice notice command, and the second silence command is the first silence command. Since only the changes are made and the others are the same, the detailed description will be omitted.

  In this manner, when the type of fluctuation pattern output from the main control device 110 is determined, and the player is expecting the jackpot to be a jackpot fluctuation pattern or out-of-order super reach, it is possible to play the fluctuation mode. Since the notification mode that causes the player to pay attention to is set, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode. Therefore, the player can determine which of the special symbol variation modes should be noted, and can play the game comfortably. Therefore, the player's fatigue can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, in the first caution command or the second caution command, the background image of the display area on the side where the special symbol is displayed is displayed in a blinking manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The length may be increased (see FIG. 91 (b)). In addition, in the case of a notification mode informing that attention is given to the second special symbol, for example, to notice the special symbol on the side to which attention is given, the character “informing that the second display symbol Dm1 focuses on the second special symbol It may be configured to display the character "look at the right!" (See FIG. 91 (c)). Also, the above contents may be combined with each other. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation pattern of the special symbol with a high probability of being selected when becoming a jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation start of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes possible has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern in the first special symbol, the variation pattern or jackpot super reach (that is, the probability of being selected when winning If the variation pattern is selected, it is determined whether or not the same variation pattern is selected in the second special symbol, and if it is selected, the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol is selected. To delay the onset of fluctuation of

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the sixteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when becoming a big hit is selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is taken. The second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that processing for delaying until the variable display in the second special symbol is finished is executed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the display aspect displayed on the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in the upper drawing of FIG. 99, the first special symbol (FIG. 99) is displayed in a state where the variation pattern of the super reach to be detached is selected and displayed in the second special symbol (left display area Dm2) Also in the right side display area Dm1), the super reach to be removed is selected, and the start of fluctuation in the first special symbol is delayed, and in the notification mode that notifies that the second special symbol (left side display area Dm2) is focused on There is a word, "Look at the right!" Then, when the variation pattern of the super reach indicated by the second special symbol is ended, the variation pattern of the first reach of the first special symbol, which has been delayed, is started to be varied as shown in the lower part of FIG. Are schematically shown.

  As described above, the variation pattern in the first special symbol is selected when the variation pattern with high probability of being selected in the case of jackpot (for example, super reach) is selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Since the change start of is delayed, the player can concentrate on the change aspect of one special symbol, and can play a game calmly.

  In addition, since the variation pattern having a high expectation to the jackpot is successively started to sequentially change between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player plays the game with the expectation for the jackpot for a long time. It can be done, and it can prevent getting bored with a game early.

  Although not shown in the present embodiment, a first delay time storage area 203v5 is provided in the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. This first delay time storage area 203v5 is the second special symbol when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when becoming a jackpot such as a super reach is selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The same time as the time until the end of fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern being selected or variably displayed is the storage area stored as a delay time for delaying the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol.

  Although the first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described later in detail, the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 If the variation pattern is selected similarly in the second special symbol, the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol ends the variation. The same delay time as the time until is stored.

  In addition, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated each time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed. . In detail, 2 ms which is an interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed is subtracted.

  Referring to FIG. 100, in the sixteenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) of the sixteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the sixteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 101, in the sixteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 100, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 6 (S360) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (S360). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, if the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an out-of-order fluctuation pattern of super reach, it is determined whether or not the same fluctuation pattern is selected in the second special symbol, and is selected. If it is, a delay time for delaying the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is set, and a process for setting a notification mode or the like to notify the player to pay attention to the second special symbol It is.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Whether the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the out-of-the-top fluctuation pattern is selected is determined (S621). If it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S621: No), the first delay time is reduced by 2 ms and updated (S635). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S621: Yes), it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S622). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203 o is set to ON (S 622: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202 d according to the gaming state is set (S 623). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203 o is off (S 622: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S 625). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected variation pattern table (S626).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S627).

  The variation pattern selected in the process of S627 is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern serving as a jackpot or an out-of-order super reach (S628). If it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or a deviation pattern of a super reach that is deviating (S628: Yes), the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the jackpot fluctuation pattern in the second special symbol It is determined whether or not the outlier super reach is being selected or changed (S629).

  In the second special symbol, if it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the outreach super reach is selected or fluctuating (S629: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation is the jackpot during selection or fluctuation The time until the variation end of the pattern or out-of-line super reach is stored as the delay time in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S630).

  The voice lamp control device 113 is displayed in the left display area Dm1 where the first special symbol is displayed to notify the user to pay attention to the second special symbol (right display area Dm2). A second warning notice command to be issued to the is set (S631). On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the outreach super reach is not selected or fluctuating (S629: No), the processing of S632 is executed. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S632). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S633).

  As described above, when the variation pattern that is the big hit or the variation pattern of the super reach that is the difference is selected in the first special symbol and the variation mode of the second special symbol, the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is started. Is delayed until the end of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern displayed in the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern in which the player has a great sense of expectation for the jackpot is fluctuated and displayed in both display areas at the same time. It is possible to suppress it. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the display of the variation pattern of one special symbol with an expectation to the jackpot, and to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, by being displayed in both display areas, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the fluctuation of one of the special symbols.

  In addition, in the second special symbol, while the fluctuation pattern is being displayed, a notification mode for notifying to pay attention to the second special symbol is displayed, so the player can easily distinguish the special symbol to be focused on The game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, in the second special symbol, when the fluctuation pattern which can have a sense of expectation to the jackpot ends, next, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol which has been delayed is variably displayed, and the player continuously wins the jackpot. It is possible to enjoy the fluctuation mode having a large sense of expectation to the player, and to prevent the player from being bored early in the game.

  In the present embodiment, as a notification mode for giving notice of focusing on the second special symbol, a letter is used for notification, but the present invention is not limited to that, even if the background image of the left display area Dm2 is displayed in blink or special color good. Further, the size of the second special symbol may be displayed large. Also, it may be configured to notify by combining them.

  Moreover, although the variation start of the first special symbol is delayed in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto, but the time until the variation of the second special symbol is added is added to the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol. The first special symbol is not displayed on the right side display area Dm1 or the small symbol is changed and displayed until the second special symbol is finished changing, and the variation display of the second special symbol is ended. It may be configured to display the selected fluctuation pattern (super reach etc.). With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the timing of the start of fluctuation, and the control load can be suppressed as compared with the case of delaying.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which delays a 1st special symbol in this embodiment, you may comprise so that a 2nd special symbol may be delayed, and it may be comprised later among a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. The change start may be delayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 116, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the case where the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is notified by the display mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and becomes the holding ball, it is made before the change start becomes possible. If the result of the determination is a jackpot, it is determined by lottery whether the player is informed in advance that the result of the judgment of jackpot will be a jackpot due to the change due to the suspension.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventeenth embodiment, in the state where the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a holding ball as a holding ball before fluctuation starts, it is informed that it is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as one-shot notification) And the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the display aspect displayed on the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this embodiment is demonstrated. In FIG. 102 (a), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, of the reserved symbol displays of the second special symbol, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is normally "●" The special reserve symbol display “「 ”is displayed, and the display mode notifying in advance to the player that the stop display is performed in the special symbol display mode indicating the jackpot is schematically shown. FIG.

  Further, in FIG. 102 (b), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, of the reserved symbol displays of the first special symbol, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is normally “ A display mode in which the player is notified in advance that the stop display is performed in the display mode of the special symbol indicating the big hit, which is displayed by “と こ ろ” which is the special hold symbol display while being displayed by “O”. It is the figure shown typically.

  By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize in advance the result of the pass / fail determination by the holding symbol display, and every time the holding symbol display is displayed, the special holding symbol display for notifying the jackpot is displayed. So you can have expectations and be more interested in playing games.

  In the present embodiment, in the reserved symbol display, the big hit is notified in advance (notice of one shot), but it is not limited thereto, and may be notified by voice, or it is configured to be notified by a dedicated lamp or the like Of course, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to notify by letters, symbols, and the like.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a view schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. As shown in FIG. In the other memory area 203v, a first notification flag 203v7, a second notification flag 203v8, and a notification timer storage area 203v9 are added.

  The first notification flag 203v7 is a flag indicating that in the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol, a reserved symbol display (in the present embodiment, “Δ”) is displayed to notify that a big hit is made. Although this first notification flag 203v7 will be described later in detail, in the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a special hold symbol display for notifying a big hit is displayed. , And is set to ON based on the instruction to the audio lamp control device 113. Although illustration is omitted, the first notification flag 203v7 is set to OFF when the jackpot game is started based on the hold symbol display for notifying that the jackpot is hit. In addition, at the time of initialization, it is a flag set to OFF.

  The second notification flag 203v8 is a flag indicating that a special hold symbol display (in the present embodiment, “▲”) is displayed to notify that a big hit is made in the held symbol display of the second special symbol. Although the second notification flag 203v8 will be described in detail later, the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 displays a special hold symbol display for notifying a big hit. , And is set to ON based on the instruction to the audio lamp control device 113. Although illustration is omitted, the second notification flag 203v8 is set to OFF when the jackpot game is started based on the special hold symbol display notifying that a jackpot is made. In addition, at the time of initialization, it is a flag set to OFF.

  The notification timer storage area 203v9 is displayed when one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed with a hold symbol display (one-shot notification) notifying that a big hit is made, and then the hold symbol display is displayed. Is a storage area in which the time until the variation of the special symbol based on is stopped is stored. When a one-shot notification is performed with one special symbol, when a variation pattern that is a hit with the other special symbol is selected, it is more than the set time stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9. A long fluctuating time is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring before the jackpot by the one-shot reserved symbol display, and to prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, after being notified of one shot, a special symbol different from the special symbol notified of that one shot (for example, when a notification of one shot is performed in a reserved symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, the second If the suspension corresponding to the special symbol) is established and the change is stopped earlier than the one-shot notified suspension symbol display, the gaming state may be changed when it becomes a big hit. In detail, it is predicted that the fluctuation start in the high probability gaming state, and it is judged in advance that the big hit is made, and a one-shot notification is given, but due to the hold established after that, the difference in the fluctuation start order Fluctuation starts earlier and stop display at the normal 15R big hit, then the game is changed to the game in the normal probability (low probability) gaming state, and the result of the pass / fail judgment corresponding to the one-shot held symbol display The problem of not being a jackpot but falling off occurs.

  However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the one-shot notification is performed, the selection of the variation pattern is performed prior to the occurrence of the jackpot game, so that the above-described problems can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent a notification that may cause confusion to the player.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k in the seventeenth embodiment, a suspension notification flag 223k8 is added to the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k in the first embodiment.

  The hold notification flag 223k8 is provided for each hold area, and when the first notification command or the second notification command is received from the main control unit 110, the hold notification flag 223k8 of the hold area indicated by the command is turned on. It is set. In addition, when the pending notification flag 223k8 is suspended and the pending area is shifted and shifted from the pending data storage area to the changing data storage area, each data in the pending area is reset to the initial value ( It is set to off by being cleared to 0).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 105, S926) in the seventeenth embodiment, a first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) and the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment are performed. A first extension variation prefetching process (FIG. 107, S1160) is added. In the seventeenth embodiment, the processes of S931 to S939 are the same as the processes of S931 to S939 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S931, when it is determined that the predicted result of the determination of the success or failure is a big hit (S931: Yes), the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) is executed. Although the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) will be described later, a process of lottery whether or not to execute one-shot notification is executed when one-shot notification has not been executed.

  In the first notification lottery process (S1150 in FIG. 106), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1151). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1151: No), in the reordering storage area 203u, the change order is the first one and the hit is stored. It is determined whether it has been done (S1152).

  If it is determined that the change order is the previous one and there is the one in the reordering storage area 203 u (S 1152: Yes), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the previous change order is out of the reordering storage area 203u (S1152: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1153). The notification count value is a value from which the value of the special hit type counter C2 is obtained. In the present embodiment, the special hit type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a notification counter may be provided exclusively.

  It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a hit count value (in the present embodiment, any one of 0 to 30) (S1154). When it is determined that the obtained notification count value is a hit (S1154: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is a hold for notifying a big hit of the hold symbol display of the first special symbol for which this determination is made. A first notification command instructing to display with symbol display (one-shot notification) is generated (S1155). The first notification command is a command indicating which holding area is the command for holding symbol display.

  The time until the special symbol corresponding to this reserved symbol display is finished changing is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1156). The first notification flag 203v7 is set to on (S1157). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out (S1154: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S1151: Yes), the notification timer is updated by subtracting 2 ms from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9. Is performed (S1158).

  As described above, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on, the lottery for performing one-shot notification is not performed, and therefore, once the one-shot notification is performed, the lottery is performed. The next one-shot notification is not performed until the jackpot game is ended, and the one-shot notification is performed a plurality of times, which can prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent a one-shot notification from being carried out each time even with a hold symbol display that is a big hit by performing a lottery whether or not to make a one-shot notification, and an expectation to a big hit if a one-shot notification is not performed Can be prevented from becoming inconvenient for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the time until the end of fluctuation is stored as the notification timer. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a counter value or the like may be stored, and the counter value may be updated at each update.

  Referring to FIG. 105, the process returns to the process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 105, S926) to continue the description. When the process of S934 or S935 is executed, a first extension change prefetch process (FIG. 107, S1160) is executed.

  In the first extension change prefetching process (S1160 in FIG. 107), first, it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161). If it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to on (S1161: Yes), the second notification flag 203v8 is set to be on, which is stored in the reordering storage area 203u. The variation pattern (variation time) to be selected by calculating (predicting) the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 when the second special symbol corresponding to the suspension area starts to fluctuate with respect to the data of the suspension area being ) (Determination) (S1162). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to off (S1161: No), this process is ended.

  By configuring in this way, in the reserved symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, a one-shot notification is performed, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is also displayed as an extension pattern (variation pattern (variation By determining (predicting) time) in advance, it is possible to rearrange the reserved symbol display in the correct fluctuation start order. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct change start order, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the second prefetch update process (S946) which is one process of the second prefetch process (S914 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing this second prefetch update processing (S946). In the second prefetch update process (FIG. 108, S946) in the seventeenth embodiment, a second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) is performed with respect to the second prefetch update process (FIG. 28, S946) in the first embodiment. A second extension variation prefetching process (FIG. 108, S1180) is added. In the seventeenth embodiment, the processes of S951 to S959 are the same as the processes of S951 to S959 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S951, when it is determined that the predicted success / failure determination result is a big hit (S951: Yes), a second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) is executed. Although the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) will be described later, if one-shot notification has not been executed, a process of lottery whether or not to execute one-shot notification is executed.

  In the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1171). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1171: No), in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u, the change order is the first one and the hit is stored It is determined whether it has been done (S1172).

  If it is determined that the change order is the previous one and there is the one in the reordering storage area 203u (S1172: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the previous change order is out of the reordering storage area 203 u (S1172: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1173). The notification count value is a value from which the value of the special hit type counter C2 is obtained. In the present embodiment, the special hit type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a notification counter may be provided exclusively.

  It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a hit count value (in the present embodiment, any one of 0 to 30) (S1174). If it is determined that the obtained notification count value is a hit (S1174: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of a large hit of the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol for which this determination has been made. A second notification command instructing to display in the reserved symbol display (one-shot notification) is generated (S1175). The second notification command is a command indicating which holding area is the command for holding symbol display.

  The time until the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display is finished changing is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1176). The second notification flag 203v8 is set to on (S1177). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out (S1174: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S1171: Yes), the timer interrupt process is started from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (FIG. 14). The notification timer is updated by subtracting 2 ms, which is the execution cycle of (1) (S1178).

  As described above, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on, the lottery for performing one-shot notification is not performed, and therefore, once the one-shot notification is performed, the lottery is performed. The next one-shot notification is not performed until the jackpot game is ended, and the one-shot notification is performed a plurality of times, which can prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent a one-shot notification from being carried out each time even if the one-shot notification is made, by performing a lottery whether or not to make a one-shot notification, and to a big hit It is possible to prevent the problem that the player loses expectations.

  In the present embodiment, the time until the end of fluctuation is stored as the notification timer. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a counter value or the like may be stored, and the counter value may be updated at each update.

  Referring to FIG. 108, the process returns to the processing of the second read ahead update process (FIG. 108, S946) to continue the description. When the process of S954 or S955 is executed, a second extension change prefetch process (S1180) is executed. The second extension change prefetching process (S1180) is the same as the other processes except that the second notification flag 203v8 is changed to the first notification flag 203v7 in the first extension change prefetching process (FIG. 107, S1160). Since they are present, illustration and detailed description will be omitted.

  By configuring in this way, a one-shot notification is performed in the reserved symbol display corresponding to the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is also extended (delayed) in advance. By determining the fluctuation time, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the correct fluctuation start order. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct change start order, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Referring to FIG. 110, in the seventeenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) of the seventeenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the seventeenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 111, in the seventeenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 110, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 7 (S370) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S370). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, in the second special symbol, when a one-shot notification is performed, the variation pattern is longer than the time until the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the one-shot notified suspension symbol display is finished changing It is set.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S651) . The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S651: Yes), it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S652). If it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S652: Yes), the variation pattern of the variation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 serves as a first alternative variation pattern, the first alternative variation pattern It is set as a command (S653).

  Here, as the selection of the fluctuation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the gaming state at that time from the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d for normal time or the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d for time reduction and probability change, Among the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, the fluctuation pattern of the closest fluctuation time is selected. For example, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), if the jackpot type is 15R big hit and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot jackpot B is It is selected.

  When the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than all the variation patterns in the variation pattern table, a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is set as the variation time. An alternative variation pattern is set. This alternative variation pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot after all the main symbols in the special symbol are variably displayed during the variation time. Also, even if the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, instead of the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern at normal times, the alternative variation pattern is a variation time with a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 It is selected.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S652: No), the special hit variation pattern table 202d according to the gaming state is set (S654). In the present embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol dedicated to the second special symbol is set. ing. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S655).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S651: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the game state is set (S656). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S657).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S658).

  The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S659). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S660).

  Referring to FIG. 112, in the seventeenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) of the seventeenth embodiment is the second special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S26) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is added. In the processes of S701 to S709 in the seventeenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 113, in the seventeenth embodiment, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 112, S206) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 7 (S770) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S770). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol. In addition, in the first special symbol, when a one-shot notification is performed, the variation time until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the one-shot reserved symbol display is changed is set.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a big hit (S771) . The determination as to whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. If it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S771: Yes), it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S772). If it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is on (S772: Yes), a second variation pattern is used as a second alternative variation pattern as a variation pattern of variation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9. A command is set (S773).

  Here, as the selection of the fluctuation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the gaming state at that time from the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d for normal time or the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d for time reduction and probability change, With the fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, the fluctuation pattern of the closest time is selected. For example, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), if the jackpot type is 15R big hit and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot jackpot B is It is selected.

  If the value of notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than any variation pattern in the variation pattern table, an alternative variation pattern is set with a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of notification timer storage area 203v9 as the variation time. Ru. This alternative variation pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot after all the main symbols in the special symbol are variably displayed during the variation time. Also, even if the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, instead of the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern at normal times, the alternative variation pattern is a variation time with a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 It is selected.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is off (S772: No), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S774). In the present embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol dedicated to the second special symbol is set. ing. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set. Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, the jackpot type table 202b is set, and the jackpot type is determined (S775).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S771: No), a special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S776). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected variation pattern table (S777).

  The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S778). The second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S779). The measurement start of the second fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, is set (S780).

  Thus, when one-shot notification is executed in the held symbol display corresponding to the second special symbol, one-shot notification is performed in the held symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol of the first special symbol In the case of the second special symbol, the variation mode in which the success or failure judgment result is a big hit is delayed until the special symbol corresponding to the special hold symbol display notified once is stopped, so it is announced once It can prevent that a big hit occurs earlier than a big hit game based on a special reservation symbol display.

  Therefore, even if one-shot notification is made on the assumption that the lottery is made in the high probability gaming state, since a big hit does not occur earlier than that, a change in the gaming state can not occur, and one-shot notification It is possible to prevent the problem that the lottery game based on the held symbol display made is not a big hit. Therefore, the player can be prevented from being confused and the game can be played with ease.

  In the present embodiment, the alternative variation pattern is selected to delay the occurrence of the jackpot, but it is also possible to delay the start of the variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent another jackpot from occurring before the jackpot triggered by the held symbol display for which one-shot notification has been made.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which delays all the jackpots in this embodiment, it is good also as a structure which makes only 15R large jackpots delay. By configuring in this way, the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot occur earlier than the jackpot based on the hold symbol display for which one-shot notification was made, but the gaming state is changed from high probability to low probability It is possible to prevent that and make a lottery game based on the held symbol display for which one-shot notification has been made a big hit. Also, even before the jackpot based on the one-shot reserved symbol display, a jackpot can be generated to provide the player with many jackpot games to increase the player's expectation for jackpot.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 114, S1400). The main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) of the seventeenth embodiment is different from the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment in command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) and pending number display update processing (FIG. 37). , S1406), the command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) and the pending number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) are added. In the processes of S1401 to S1413 in the seventeenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment are performed. When the process of S1413 is completed, command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, command determination processing 4 (S1560), which is one processing of the main processing (S1400 in FIG. 114, S1400) executed in the seventeenth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 4 (S1560). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

  In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1470) of the seventeenth embodiment, the processes of S1561 and S1562 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. In the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the seventeenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment are executed. If it is determined in the process of S1517 that the first or second special symbol variation resume command has not been received (S1517: No), the process of S1561 is executed.

  In the process of S1561, it is determined whether the first notification command or the second notification command output by the main control device 110 has been received (S1561). If it is determined that the first notification command or the second notification command has been received (S1561: Yes), the hold notification flag 223k8 in the hold area of the slave sort hold storage area 223k indicated by the received notification command is set to ON. (S1562).

  With reference to FIG. 116, in the seventeenth embodiment, pending number display update processing 4 (S1550), which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the pending number display update process 4 (S1550). In the number-of-holds display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), the sort symbol display is rearranged. The hold symbol display in which the flag 223k7 is set to ON is in change start order, and the hold symbol display set to OFF is in formation order. In addition, the suspension symbol display corresponding to the suspension area where the suspension notification flag 223k8 is set to ON is a special suspension symbol display (in the present embodiment, if it is the first special symbol, “Δ”, the second special symbol If it is, it is a process for displaying by "▲").

  In the number-of-holds display updating process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), first, the change display start time of the change start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the follow rearrangement hold storage area 223k is updated (S1551). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  The symbol display of the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to on is displayed in the order of starting to change, and the holding symbol is displayed in the order in which the holding is established for the holding area where the sorting flag 223k7 is off. Is set (S1552).

  By performing control in this manner, when the reordering is performed (when the frame switch 22 is operated), the displayed symbol display (the reserving area in which the reordering flag 223k7 is set to on) is displayed. Only in contrast, it is possible to rearrange and display the reserved symbol display in the change start order.

  It is determined whether there is a hold area for which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553). If it is determined that there is a pending area for which the pending notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: Yes), the pending symbol display for which the pending notification flag 223k8 is set to ON is displayed as a special pending symbol In the form, a display suspension display command to be displayed as “Δ” for the first special symbol and “▲” for the second special symbol is generated (S1554). A voice command is generated to output a voice indicating that one-shot notification has been made (in the present embodiment, a voice of “big hit !!”) (S1555). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hold area for which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, the player is set to hold a new hold symbol display because it is set to be displayed as a special hold symbol display that informs that the hold symbol display is a big hit. Every time the symbol display is displayed, it is possible to play a game with expectation that it will not be displayed in the special hold symbol display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In addition, when the special hold symbol display is displayed, it is also notified by voice that it is a jackpot, so it is possible to further enhance the player's irritability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored earlier.

  In addition, since the holding symbol display is updated and displayed each time the holding symbol display updating process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) is executed, the holding symbol display and the special holding symbol are performed along with the holding of the holding. The display can also be moved and displayed, and the player can be made to display the correct hold symbol display, which can suppress confusion of the player.

  In the present embodiment, the voice notifying that one-shot notification has been made is configured to be repeatedly notified while the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, but the invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to be output.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which alert | reports one-shot notification by displaying a reserve symbol display by a special reserve symbol display in this embodiment, it is not restricted to it, and the background is different colors and display modes (for example, blink display) The notification may be made by displaying, or the notification may be made by displaying a character on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) and the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is configured to output various commands such as a command, a first notification command, and a second notification command. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the main control device 110 may issue a command indicating various count values (special hit random number counter C1 etc.) acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. In the main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) which is output to the audio lamp control device 113 and executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the first pre-reading processing (FIG. 25, S907) and the first It is good also as composition which performs 2 pre-reading processing (Drawing 27, S914) and the like. By configuring in this manner, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to carry out the processing of the game (such as the detection of winning on various winning openings) without losing it. Note that this configuration can be similarly applied to the first to sixteenth embodiments described above, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 123, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern is selected separately, and the case where notification of the result of the pass / fail determination is performed has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment, when displaying the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the left side display area Dm1 for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner and the second special The relevant effects are displayed on the right side display area Dm2 in which the symbols are variably displayed, and the results of the respective judgments on the success or failure are notified.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the eighteenth embodiment, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when a specific condition is satisfied, the variable display aspect in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively related (hereinafter referred to as This is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the player is notified of the result of determination of acceptance or rejection, by displaying the combined effect).

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the display mode of the fusion effect variation pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. When it is determined by the first special symbol or the second special symbol that the fusion effect variation pattern is selected, the variation display of the special symbol by the fusion effect variation pattern at the timing synchronized with the first special symbol and the second special symbol (Fusion effect) is started. In the fusion effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the display mode for performing competition by throwing is displayed in the left side display area Dm1 for displaying the first special symbol and the right side display area Dm2 for displaying the second special symbol. Be done. In detail, in left side display area Dm1, it shows that the yes / no decision result of the 1st special symbol is informed as a red group, and in right side display area Dm2, it announces the propriety result of the 2nd special symbol as white group. It is shown that. If the red set wins the white set in a row, it indicates that the first special symbol will be a big hit, and if the white set wins the red set, it will be a big hit in the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the case where the result of putting the ball in the red group and the white group is a draw, it is shown that the result of the judgment of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is both out.

  As described above, in normal times, in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, although the success / failure determination results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are separately displayed, the fusion effect is determined. In the variable display mode (fusion effect) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different from the normal time, the result of judgment of acceptance is notified, giving a fresh feeling to the player. The game can be prevented from getting bored early.

  In addition, since the fusion effect is configured to be easily determined when the success or failure judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit, the player is expected to the jackpot when the variable display of the fusion effect is started. It is possible to play the game with a great feeling. Therefore, the player can play with expectation whether the variable display of the fusion effect is started and also at the normal time (period in which the fusion effect is not displayed), and can be performed while enjoying the game for a long time .

  In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is the effect by putting in a ball, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If the distinction between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is eliminated and the hero (player) wins the enemy, The effect may be a jackpot with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In such a case, when the fusion effect is started, the division between the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2 disappears, and in the upper side display area Dm, an effect such as performing a one-to-one car race with the enemy Is displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can understand that it will be a jackpot if the hero's car ends earlier than the enemy's car anyway, and the player can play the game easily.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which does not display the special symbol (main symbol) as a number in this embodiment, it may be comprised so that it may carry out a small fluctuation | variation display not only in it but in each display area. By configuring in this manner, the player can confirm the result of the determination of the success or failure even when looking at the main symbol, and can easily recognize whether the effect has reported the out or the notification. .

  In addition, the main symbol may be configured to be changed to a number and displayed as a temporary symbol such as "o" or "x". By configuring in this manner, the area for displaying the main symbol can be reduced, and the display area that can be used for the fusion effect can be configured larger.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the present embodiment will be described. In this sorting reserve storage area 203u, the adjustment effect flag 203u10 and the fusion effect execution are performed for each of the reserve areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (the changing data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). The flag 203u11 is added, respectively.

  Although the adjustment effect flag 203u10 will be described later in detail, it indicates that it is a hold to select a fluctuation pattern for time adjustment so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can simultaneously start fluctuating display. It is a flag. The adjustment effect flag 203u10 performs time adjustment to execute fusion effect when it is determined that fusion effect is to be performed in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. It is set to on about the reservation area corresponding to the special symbol which changes. On the other hand, when the reserve area is shifted due to reserve termination and the variation of the special symbol is finished, it is set to off by being overwritten by the data of the reserve area to be newly shifted. In addition, the fusion effect is a fusion effect variation pattern in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is simultaneously started, and the variation display with relation is performed between the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Shows the contents to be displayed variably with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is a flag indicating that it is pending to execute the fusion effect. Although the details will be described later, the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 executes the fusion effect when it is determined to execute the fusion effect in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Then, the on-hold area corresponding to the determined on-hold is set to on. On the other hand, when each data of the reserve area is shifted due to reserve termination and the variation of the special symbol is finished, it is set to off by being overwritten by the data of the reserve area to be newly shifted.

  With reference to FIG. 118 (b), the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. Similar to the sorting reserve storage area 203u of the main control unit 110, the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k includes the reserve areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (during variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). An adjustment effect flag 223k10 and a fusion effect execution flag 223k11 are respectively added to each of the data). The adjustment effect flag 223 k and the fusion effect execution flag 223 k 11 are adjusted in the reordering storage area 203 u of the main control device 110 except that the adjustment effect flag 223 k and the fusion effect execution flag 223 k 11 are set on based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. Since the effect flag 203u10 and the combined effect execution flag 203u11 are the same, the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 119 (a) is a view schematically showing a part of another memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to this embodiment. A fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is added to the other memory area 203v. The fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a counter value acquired when it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed by the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) described later. Further, in the main processing (FIG. 33), fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is incremented by one each in processing (S1209) in which fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated, and after being added up to the upper limit value of 99, 100 and so on. Then, the counter value is updated to an initial value of 0.

  Next, FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing a fusion effect variation pattern list stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the present embodiment. The list of fusion effect variation patterns is a view representing together the fusion effect variation patterns added to the special hit variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The fusion presentation variation pattern is allocated to and stored in a specific address of the special hit variation pattern table 202d and the special outlier variation pattern table 202e. Specifically, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected as the fusion effect variation pattern to be selected when the first special symbol's determination result of the first special symbol is a hit and the second special symbol is not. In the top address of the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d, the fluctuation pattern in which the first special symbol wins with the throwing effect is stored. In addition, a variation pattern in which the second special symbol loses in the throwing effect is stored at the top address of the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

  In addition, as the fusion effect variation pattern selected when the first special symbol is out and the second special symbol is a hit or not determination result, the top address of the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the first special symbol loses in the throwing effect is stored. Further, at the top address of the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202e for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern in which the second special symbol wins with the throwing effect is stored.

  Furthermore, as the fusion effect variation pattern to be selected in the case of the determination result of the first special symbol being out and the second special symbol being out, the special outlier variation of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol At the end address of the pattern, there are stored variation patterns that become tied in the throwing-in effect.

  Thus, by configuring, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines to execute the fusion effect, the fusion effect can be easily performed based on the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute the fusion effect. Can be selected, and the control load can be reduced as compared with the case of selection using a counter value or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the fusion effect selects the fusion effect variation pattern for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and voices the display mode in which the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2 are variably displayed. Although the configuration is such that the lamp control device 113 is notified, the present invention is not limited thereto, and one fusion effect variation pattern is displayed as the display mode displayed by the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 It may be configured to be selected as With this configuration, it is possible to suppress deviation of the display mode displayed by the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Further, the control load of the display control device 114 can be reduced as compared with the case of displaying the fusion effect separately.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, main controller 110 selects the fusion effect variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and outputs the variation pattern command to sound lamp control device 113, respectively. Then, the display control may be performed as one variation mode in the display control unit 114 that has received the display command based on the voice lamp control unit 113 or the voice lamp control unit 113 that has received the variation pattern command. . By configuring in this manner, even when selecting the fusion effect variation pattern, main controller 110 selects the fusion effect variation pattern by the same control as when selecting the normal variation pattern, and the audio lamp control device It can output to 113 and can suppress that the control which the main control apparatus 110 performs becomes complicated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect variation patterns are stored in the special hit variation pattern table 202d and the special outlier variation pattern table 202e, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this. Of course, it may be configured to set and store the configured special variation pattern table.

  Next, referring to FIG. 120, in the eighteenth embodiment, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) of the eighteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the eighteenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 121, in the eighteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 120, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 8 (S380) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S380). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the fusion effect is to be performed, a synchronous fluctuation pattern or a fusion effect fluctuation pattern for executing the fusion effect is selected.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S671) . The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S671: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S672). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special hit variation pattern table 202d for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set. Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, the jackpot type table 202b is set, and the jackpot type is determined (S673).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203 o is off (S 671: No), a special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S 674). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11B) is set.

  It is determined whether the adjustment effect flag 203u10 in the hold area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u corresponding to the start of fluctuation start is ON (S675). If it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is on (S675: Yes), the synchronous fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the holding area is selected and selected. A first variation pattern command indicating the synchronization variation pattern is generated (S676). Here, in the fusion effect lottery process (not shown), which is executed in one process of the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) described later or the second pre-reading update process (not shown), this synchronous variation pattern When it is decided to execute fusion production, the fluctuation start time is adjusted so that the suspension of the first special symbol determined to execute that fusion and the suspension of the second special symbol become the fluctuation display start at the same timing Variation pattern to Specifically, of the suspension of the first special symbol and the second special symbol determined to execute the fusion effect, the variation start time of the variation start time is earlier in the variation start time of the later variation start time. Is stored, with respect to the suspension which starts fluctuation immediately before that, the fluctuation time added to the selected fluctuation time is stored.

  The synchronous variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the result of determination of acceptance is out, and the main symbol is variably displayed during a set variation time, and is variably displayed so as to be displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation. It is a fluctuation pattern.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is off (S675: No), the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 in the hold area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u corresponding to the hold that starts changing is set on. Is determined (S677). If it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S677: Yes), the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the sorting reserve storage area 203u for which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to on The fusion effect variation pattern is selected based on the determination result of the above and the first variation pattern command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the selected fusion effect variation pattern is generated (S678).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S677: No), the variation pattern type is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c. It is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S679).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S680). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S 681). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S682).

  As described above, it is normal to select the fluctuation pattern based on each counter value by determining when the fluctuation pattern is selected whether the adjustment effect flag 203u10 or the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fusion effect is to be performed, a method of selecting a variation pattern different from normal can be made, and the selection of the variation pattern can be flexibly performed according to the situation.

  In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (not shown) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380), the second For the point that the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected and the second variation pattern command is generated based on the selected variation pattern, the processing of S681 is changed to the second stop type command, the processing for S682 Since the same processing is executed except that measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is started, detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 122, S926) in the eighteenth embodiment, a fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) and S1240 are performed on the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. The processing of S1241 is added. In the eighteenth embodiment, each process from S931 to S935 is the same as each process from S931 to S935 in the first embodiment.

  When the process of S934 or S935 ends, the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) is executed. The details of the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) will be described in detail later, but it is determined whether or not the fusion effect is to be executed when the selected fluctuation pattern is a hit pattern or out-of-target super reach. Run.

  Next, after the process of S936 is executed, it is determined whether the sorting order is interrupted and renumbered or whether the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1240). If it is determined that the reordering order is interrupted and renumbered or the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1240: Yes), the pass / fail judgment result storage area stored in each holding area 203u1, the big hit stop type storage area 203u2, the variation pattern type storage area 203u4, the variation start time storage area 203u5, and the prefetch correct probability change flag 203u6, and rearrange the rearranging order based on the variation start time (S1241). In this case, when the change start order changes due to a newly generated hold, there may be a case where the gaming state at the start of the change (whether positive change or normal) changes, but even in such a case, the change start again It is possible to recognize the correct sort order (order to start change) by re-executing the success or failure judgment in the gaming state and updating the selected change pattern.

  In addition, even if it is decided that fusion effect is executed, the order to start fluctuation is changed by selecting the synchronous fluctuation pattern, but also in that case, in the gaming state when fluctuation starts again Since the determination of success or failure and the update of the fluctuation pattern are performed, it is possible to recognize the correct fluctuation start order. Note that the change pattern is not reselected for the reserved area for which the synchronous fluctuation pattern or the fusion effect fluctuation pattern is selected, and the fluctuation start is started based on the selected synchronous fluctuation pattern or the fusion effect fluctuation pattern. Time etc. are calculated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order is not renumbered by interrupting and it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S1240: Yes), the processing of S939 is executed.

  By configuring in this manner, when it is determined in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) that the fusion effect is to be performed, the reexecution of the pass / fail judgment on each holding area, the variation pattern Since the reselection is performed, it is possible to redetermine the correct fluctuation start order.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the fusion rendering lottery process (S1220), which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIGS. 122 and 926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the fusion effect lottery process (S1220).

  In the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220), first, it is determined whether or not there is a suspension area in which fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set ON among the suspension areas of reordering storage area 203u of main controller 110 (S1221). If it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off in all the reserve areas (S1221: No), the result of determination of success or failure is one of the reserve areas of the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u of the main control device 110. It is determined whether there is a pending area of (S1222).

  In the case where it is determined that the acceptance determination result is out of all the reserve areas (S1222: No), the variation pattern expected to be selected is the variation pattern for which the acceptance determination result is a hit (ie, It is determined (S1223) whether or not a variation pattern has been selected in the S934 processing of the first prefetch update processing (FIG. 122, S926). If it is determined that the variation pattern predicted to be selected is the hitting variation pattern (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether or not fusion rendering can be performed (S1224). Here, in the present embodiment, the condition as to whether or not the fusion effect can be performed is that there are two or more holdings corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. In addition, the number of suspension of the first special symbol is the number including the suspension newly generated this time.

  As described above, by setting the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to two or more as a condition, one is a hold for executing the fusion effect change pattern, and the other is a synchronous change. It can be set as a hold for executing a pattern, and the start of execution of the fusion effect can be synchronized between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is a deviation fluctuation pattern (S1223: No), the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is a super reach outlier or not. Is determined (S1225). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern expected to be selected is the out-of-order super reach (S1225: Yes), the process of S1224 is performed.

  If it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed (S1224: Yes), the value of the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is acquired (S1226). It is determined whether the acquired counter value is the counter value set for the hit (S1227). In the present embodiment, the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a counter value of "0 to 99", and the counter values of "0 to 19" are set as the hit counter value.

  If it is determined that the acquired counter value is the counter value set for the hit (S1227: No), the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON for the hold area for executing the fusion effect (S1228) ). Here, with respect to the hold area for executing the fusion effect, the first special symbol is a hold area corresponding to the hold newly generated this time. On the other hand, with regard to the second special symbol, of the reserved areas of the second special symbol stored, the holding area to which the fluctuation start order is the last is set as the holding area for executing the fusion effect.

  The variation start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the reserve area where the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to on is compared, and the fusion among the reserve areas corresponding to the special symbol whose variation start time is earlier The adjustment effect flag 203u10 is set to ON for the hold area in front of the hold area for which the effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1229).

  The difference of the fluctuation start time of the holding area in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON is calculated. A variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is a synchronous variation pattern indicating a time obtained by adding the difference of the calculated variation start time to the variation time of the variation pattern expected to be selected in the holding area in which the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is set to ON. (S1330).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S1221: Yes), if it is determined that there is a holding area with a success or failure determination result (S1222), the selected fluctuation pattern is out of super If it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern other than reach (S1223: No and S1225: No), fusion effect is not executable (ie, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is 2 or less) When it is determined (S1224: No), when it is determined that the value of the acquired combined effect lottery counter 203v10 is the out-of-counter value (S1227: No), this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, if the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (that is, it has already been decided to execute the fusion effect) in any of the reserve areas, whether or not the fusion effect is to be executed. Since the processing of (1) is not performed, it is possible to prevent the fusion effect from being continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the fusion effect early due to the fusion effect occurring frequently.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect is not performed when there is a pending area with a success or failure determination result in any of the pending areas (except for the pending area corresponding to the newly occurring pending). did. By being configured in this manner, it is possible to prevent a shift due to the restart timing of the special symbol that has temporarily stopped the execution start time of the fusion effect or the like by the jackpot game being sandwiched.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where the variation pattern expected to be selected is configured to determine whether or not the fusion effect is to be executed by lottery if the variation pattern predicted to be selected is a hit variation pattern or an out-of-order super reach, This is a variation pattern that is easy to be selected when the determination result is a hit, and it is possible for the player to have a high expectation for a hit when the combined effect is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game in anticipation of the fusion effect being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the fusion effect is to be performed by satisfying a predetermined condition and further by acquiring the counter value and performing lottery, so that the fusion effect is frequently performed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the fusion effect at an early stage.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the number of holding balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is two or more as a condition under which the fusion effect can be performed, the fusion effect is executed. It can be configured to be able to set the synchronization variation pattern to match the timing, it is possible to easily match the timing to perform the fusion effect between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) is configured to be executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, but is limited thereto Alternatively, it may be configured to execute at another timing. The timing for executing the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) may be set as appropriate, but specifically, for example, an RTC etc. may be provided and configured to be executed when a predetermined set time is reached. .

  By configuring in this way, the fusion effect will be executed by lottery for every predetermined time, and by adjusting the execution start time and the lottery probability, it is possible to provide a game that does not make the player get bored more. it can. Also, by notifying the player of the time for drawing the fusion effect and the like in advance to the player with the third symbol display device 81 etc., the player can play the game expecting that time, and the long-time game can be performed. It can be performed while the player enjoys it.

  Although the number of holding balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is two or more as conditions under which fusion effects can be performed, the number is not limited to two but may be three or more, etc. Instead of the number of reservations, it may be configured to determine whether the fusion effect can be performed at synchronized timing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the opportunity to execute the fusion presentation, and to further entertain the player.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which synchronizes the timing which performs fusion production by setting one to a synchronous fluctuation pattern among holding balls, it is not restricted to it, but the fluctuation time of the special symbol in fluctuation May be extended or shortened to synchronize.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to synchronize the variation start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited thereto, the variation start time is not synchronized and the variation start is synchronized. While the change of the special symbol on the earlier side is displayed until the other special symbol starts to change, the screen of blackout etc. is displayed or the delay fluctuation mode such as keeping the main symbol being changed is displayed, The fusion effect may be performed at the timing when the special symbol (special symbol for performing the fusion effect of the later one of the fluctuation start) becomes the fluctuation start. With this configuration, the process for synchronizing the fluctuation start time is not necessary, and the control load of main controller 10 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to start execution of the fusion effect at the synchronized timing, the synchronization variation pattern is used to synchronize. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the timing to start the variation may be delayed. With this configuration, control processing for synchronization can be reduced, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the fusion effect of this embodiment is configured to display the associated variation mode with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player does not win a big hit with either one of the special symbols. You can play games with great expectations. Also, the effects of both special symbols can be viewed in an easy-to-understand manner, and a game effect that is easy to understand can be provided to the player.

  In addition, also in the second prefetch update process (not shown), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), the first prefetch update process (the process relating to the second special symbol is different) The same process as FIG. 122, S926) is performed. The detailed description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, when it is predicted that the fluctuation pattern of the win or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is selected, the fusion effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the following configuration may be employed. . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first variation pattern command by selecting the first variation pattern variation selection process (FIG. 18, S310) of the first variation pattern or the out-of-order super reach. Controls the display control device 114 so as to enlarge and display the area of the display area for displaying the change pattern of the hit or the change pattern of the super reach as shown in FIG. 117 (b). .

  By this configuration, the player can easily recognize the display area to be focused on, and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the display area is expanded when it is a fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected in the case of a big hit, it becomes easy to see the fluctuation mode, pay attention to the fluctuation of the other special symbol, and miss the fluctuation mode It is possible to prevent the problem of In the present embodiment, when the hit variation pattern or the out-of-point variation pattern of super reach is displayed in both display regions, control is performed to prohibit the enlargement of the display region when the variation starts simultaneously. In addition, when the timing of the start of the change is different, the case where the display area is enlarged first is changed to the size at normal time (area of the uniform display area), and in the case of a big hit in both cases. It can be recognized that a variation pattern that is easy to select is selected. Therefore, if the player changes the display area to the normal display area after the display area is expanded and before it stops fluctuating, an expectation for a larger jackpot (expected that two consecutive hits are obtained It is possible to play the game with a sense of feeling, and to increase the interest in the game.

  Based on the time stored in the change start time storage area 203u5, the change start order of each reserve area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is renumbered again. By configuring in this manner, the player can arrange the holding symbol display in the order of starting the fluctuation by operating the frame button 22 even during the probability change chance game, and the player can accurately start the fluctuation. The order can be recognized.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, in the case of executing the probability variation chance game, it is configured to be able to be executed when there is no hit such as a probability variation jackpot in the reserve area first. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the other jackpot from disrupting the player when the odds game is started.

  In this embodiment, since the synchronous fluctuation pattern is selected for the hold stored immediately before the holding area for executing the fusion effect, the player can perform the fusion effect by the effect of the synchronous fluctuation pattern. It is possible to recognize that it is started, and it is possible to prevent the fusion rendering from being missed. Thus, the player can prepare in advance to watch the fusion effect.

  In the present embodiment, since the probability variation chance game is executed in the high probability gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol individually perform lotterys. Can be set to shift the game to Therefore, the player can increase the enjoyment in the higher probability gaming state as compared to the gaming machine in which one special symbol is sequentially displayed in a variable manner.

  In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to determine whether or not to be executed based on the selection of the fluctuation pattern of the big hit or the out-of-super reach pattern by one of the special symbols. Not limited thereto, the following configuration may be employed. For example, when the jackpot is determined, the fusion effect may be configured to be executed, and the type of the jackpot may be determined in the variation mode of the fusion effect. Specifically, based on the fact that the 15R normal jackpot has been determined in the first special symbol, the fusion effect is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in the throwing effect shown in FIG. 117 (a). If the red set in the left display area Dm1 wins, the 15R normal jackpot is won, while if the white set in the right display area Dm2 where the second special symbol is displayed wins, the 15R definite variation jackpot is notified and the red set wins the effect Configure to

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the fusion effect. Moreover, not only the expectation to the jackpot but also the expectation of the probability variation jackpot can be greatly given to the player. In such a configuration, a jackpot having different numbers of rounds may be set, for example, a configuration in which either 15R jackpot or 5R jackpot wins may be awarded, or a large profit to be given to other players. It may be configured to notify to give either of the different ones.

  The first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) is also performed in the second prefetch update process (not shown), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. ), The same process is executed except that the process is changed to the process relating to the second special symbol, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the variation start timings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are synchronized to start the fusion effect, but in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the variation start timing is It does not synchronize especially. Specifically, in the fusion effect of the special symbol that starts changing first, the fusion effect is performed first, and when the fusion effect of the special symbol that starts thereafter is started, the fusion that is started earlier The fusion effect is started so as to interrupt the effect, and the result of the judgment of the success or failure is informed by the variable display mode in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are related.

  Specifically, in the combined effect, the player competes in a boxing confrontation between the red corner player displayed in the left side display area Dm1 and the blue corner player displayed in the right side display area Dm2. In the first pre-read update process (not shown) or the second pre-read update process (not shown) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the fusion effect is displayed when the hold determined that either is a hit is established. It is decided to carry out. Next, the suspension to execute the fusion effect is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol (one is a notification of being hit and held). Here, if the determined type of the hit is a 15R probability variation jackpot, if the player in the display area corresponding to the special symbol (for example, the player in the red corner if the first special symbol) wins, the 15R probability variation The player is informed that the jackpot will be awarded.

  In the change display mode in which the change start is earlier among the suspension determined to execute the fusion effect, first, the character “Challenging for Challenger!” Is displayed until the other special symbol becomes the change start, and the boxing The fusion effect is started with the player displayed. On the other hand, when the change of the special symbol to execute the fusion effect to be started later is started, the boxing player is also displayed, and the effect that the boxing game is started is executed. Then, in accordance with the variation finish time of the special symbol to be hit, the boxing player corresponding to the special symbol to be hit is rendered to be won.

  Thereby, in order to execute the fusion effect with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is not necessary to execute the processing for synchronizing the fluctuation start time, so that the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. It can be reduced.

  In addition, all variation modes performed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be set as the display mode of the fusion effect. In such a configuration, in the case of being out of each other, the effect that the boxing game is continuing is displayed, and when the combined effect variation pattern determined to be a hit is selected, the player corresponding to the special symbol wins. It should be configured to By configuring in this manner, the player can easily recognize the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol more easily.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 selects the fusion effect, but in the main control unit 110, the fluctuation time is determined, and the signal indicating the fluctuation time and the signal indicating the result of the judgment of acceptance are voiced respectively. It may be configured to output to the lamp control device 113 to determine whether the audio lamp control device 113 is capable of executing the fusion effect and to display the fusion effect based on the fluctuation time and the result of the determination of the acceptance or rejection. By configuring in this manner, it is not necessary to execute the lottery whether or not the main control device 110 executes the fusion effect, and the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the fusion effect by viewing the state of the number of holdings. Specifically, when holding of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is equally stored, it is configured to execute the fusion effect. Furthermore, if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute the fusion effect based on the fact that the same variation time variation pattern is stored alternately, respectively, the first special symbol The execution and the end of the fusion effect can be easily matched with the symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 130, a pachinko machine 10 according to a nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the case of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, regardless of the mutual determination result, the variation pattern is determined by lottery and the respective lottery games are executed. explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed, the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (probable variation gaming state). If it is predicted that a jackpot (hereinafter, usually a jackpot) serving as a trigger to shift to a low probability gaming state with one special symbol is predicted to be won (if it is determined in advance before the start of fluctuation), until the jackpot starts In the other special symbol, the game is performed with an indication as to whether the player can win the probability variation jackpot in the other special symbol.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the nineteenth embodiment, when the jackpot is normally won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the high probability gaming state, the delay until the jackpot occurs, in the meantime, the other special symbol When the jackpot is won, it differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that control is performed to extend the jackpot so as to be usually executed after the jackpot.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, an effect display mode in the probability change chance game as to whether or not the high probability gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment is extended will be described. When it is determined that the normal jackpot has been won in the first special symbol (the left display area Dm1) during the high probability gaming state by the variation change process (FIG. 130, S1250) described later, the countdown effect command is set In the left side display area Dm1, an effect display mode indicating the start of the probability variation chance game is displayed. In the present embodiment, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 124, a balloon is displayed in the left side display area Dm1, and is displayed so as to expand as time passes. In addition, if the balloon is broken, it is indicated by characters that the high probability gaming state (probable change) is ended.

  When the effect display mode indicating the probability change chance game is displayed, the player usually recognizes that the jackpot has been won with the special symbol of the displayed balloon. By the time the jackpot game is started, the player plays the game thinking that he or she can not win the jackpot. By configuring in this manner, the player can play the game whether he or she can win the probability change jackpot in a short time as well as the jackpot unlike before, which is different from the normal time You can play with the goal.

  The variable display of the first special symbol is smallly displayed at the central position of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in the upper view of FIG. By configuring in this manner, it can be understood that the first special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the digestion of the reserved symbol display, and it can be confirmed whether or not the lottery game is being executed. Also, each time the reserved symbol display is digested, it can be recognized that the start of the jackpot is approaching, and every time the first special symbol displayed is stopped changing, the player is Since it is possible to enjoy the feeling, the taste of the game can be increased.

  If the normal jackpot is decided with the first special symbol without being able to win the probability variation jackpot with the second special symbol, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 124, it becomes an effect display mode in which the balloons are broken, and the stop symbol of the special symbol usually showing the jackpot Is displayed. Moreover, although not shown in the drawings, when the probability variation jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the stop symbol of the special symbol usually showing the jackpot is displayed without breaking the balloon. Thereby, the player recognizes that the special variation jackpot normally displayed with the second special symbol is started after the normal jackpot by displaying the special symbol indicating the normal jackpot being stopped without breaking the balloon. Can. Therefore, the player can play a game expecting that the balloon is not broken, and can be more interested in the game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the alert for the fact that the second special symbol was won by the probability variation jackpot is that the balloon is not broken, the present invention is not limited thereto, for example, displaying characters such as "Positive variation still continues!" Then, it may be notified to the player. Moreover, it is not limited to the effect of whether or not the balloon is broken, and other effect display modes may naturally be adopted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a view schematically showing a part of another memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. As shown in FIG. In the other memory area 203v, a first change change flag 203v11 and a second change change flag 203v12 are added.

  The first change change flag 203v11 is predicted to have won the normal jackpot with the first special symbol when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state) (it is determined earlier than the start of the change) ) Is a flag indicating that. This first change change flag 203v11 is set to ON in the process of S1254 of the change change process (FIG. 130, S1250) which is one process of the first pre-reading update process (S129 in FIG. 129) described later. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the fact that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot has been started. In the initialized state when the power is turned on, it is set to off. The flag is also backed up by the backup accompanying the power-off, and is loaded in the start-up process (FIG. 34) to return to the state before the power-off.

  Also, the second variation change flag 203v12 is predicted to have won the normal jackpot with the second special symbol when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state) (determined earlier than the start of fluctuation) Flag that indicates that The second change change flag 203v12 is set to ON in the same way as the first change change flag 203v11 in the change change process (not shown) of the second read ahead update process (not shown), and the jackpot game accompanying the normal big hit is usually Set to off when started. The other changes are only different from the first variation change flag 203v11 in terms of the second special symbol, and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a part of the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d and the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described.

  The upper diagram of FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the special hitting variation pattern table 202d for time reduction / probability variation of the special hitting variation pattern table 202d. A variation variation pattern and a variation variation pattern are added to the time variation / precise variation special hitting variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment.

  The hit variation change pattern is a variation pattern which is selected on condition that the result of the judgment of winning is a hit when the player usually wins a big hit when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. The fluctuation time is set to 180 seconds, which is longer than the other fluctuation times. Therefore, since it takes time until it is stopped and displayed by the stop symbol which shows a hit, in the meantime, the opportunity to perform the multiple pass / fail determination with the other special symbol can be obtained. Therefore, during that time, it is possible to make the player have an expectation as to whether or not the other special symbol may be a big change jackpot. In addition, even if the jackpot is not the jackpot, it is possible to give more jackpots to the player, and the player can enjoy the game more.

  In the high probability gaming state, the variation variation pattern is selected when one of the special symbols usually wins a big hit or a probability variation big jack if it is predicted that the other special symbol usually wins a big hit. It is a pattern. This extended fluctuation pattern is configured with a fluctuation time longer than the other fluctuation patterns of 300 seconds. In addition, the time until the normal jackpot won with the other special symbol during the definite variation chance game is decided and stopped is up to 240 seconds in the variation of the reserved special symbol. This is that when the jackpot is usually the fourth of the special symbols held, the hold 1 to 3 are fluctuatingly displayed in the outlier change change pattern of 20 seconds described later, and usually the jackpot is a fluctuation time of 180 seconds It is.

  By configuring in this way, in a high probability gaming state, when one jackpot is usually won by a special symbol and then the other jackpot is selected by a jackpot, the jackpot is always one of the usual jackpot games A big hit game will be started later. Therefore, when the hit with the other special symbol is a probability variation big hit, usually the big hit is executed, it shifts to low probability game state. After that, it is possible to shift to the high probability gaming state again by the probability variation jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high probability gaming state for a longer time.

  The lower part of FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the special out-of-order variation pattern table 202e for time reduction and probability change of the special out-of-order variation pattern table 202e. The time variation / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the present embodiment has a deviation variation change pattern and a deviation extension variation pattern added to the time shortening / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the first embodiment. .

  In the outlier change change pattern, when it is predicted that the jackpot is usually won in the high probability gaming state, the result of judging whether the hold is stored in the hold area corresponding to the special symbol won in the normal jackpot is out of judgment It is a fluctuation pattern selected when fluctuation starts on the condition that there is a certain condition. The outlier variation change pattern is configured with a variation time of 20 seconds, and is configured with a relatively long variation time as compared to other variation patterns. Therefore, when a hold that is normally predicted to be won by the jackpot is established, if there are a large number of holding balls corresponding to the special symbol, this outlier variation change pattern is executed for the hold. Thus, up to three variable change patterns are implemented, usually delaying the start of the jackpot by up to 60 seconds. Therefore, the delayed time can increase the possibility of winning a jackpot with the other special symbol. Therefore, the player can be given many opportunities to get a jackpot.

  The deviation extension fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern which is selected in the case where it is judged that the success or failure judgment result is out in one special symbol, when it is predicted that the other special symbol usually wins a big hit in the high probability gaming state. The out-of-extension variation pattern is configured with a variation time that is relatively shorter than the other variation patterns in which the variation time is 3 seconds. Therefore, one lottery cycle can be shortened, and more lottery games can be executed with one special symbol. Therefore, during the probability change chance game, more lottery games can be played in a short time, and it is possible to give the player an opportunity to get a big hit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 127, in the nineteenth embodiment, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the nineteenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is executed.

  128, in the nineteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 127, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 9 (S390) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 (S390). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Further, in the high probability gaming state, when it is predicted that the second special symbol usually makes a big hit, the hit extension change pattern or the out-extension change pattern is selected based on the result of the pass / fail determination. On the other hand, in the first special symbol and in the high probability gaming state, when it is predicted to be a large jackpot, the hit change change pattern or the out-of-change change pattern is selected based on the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S821) . The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S821: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S822). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special hit variation pattern table 202d for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the special hit variation pattern table 202d (upper view in FIG. 126) for time reduction / probability change is set. Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, the jackpot type table 202b is set, and the jackpot type is determined (S823).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S821: No), a special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S824). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. If the gaming state is a high probability gaming state or time is short (time reduction counter 203k is greater than 0), the time reduction / probability change special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 126 lower figure) is set.

  It is determined whether the second change change flag 203v12 is set to ON (ie, it is predicted that the second special symbol usually makes a big hit during the high probability gaming state) (S825). When it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is on (S825: Yes), the extension variation pattern of the selected variation pattern table is selected, and the extension variation pattern is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The first variation pattern command of is generated (S826).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (S825: No), the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to on (that is, the high probability gaming state with the first special symbol) It is determined whether or not it is normally predicted to be a jackpot) (S827). If it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to ON (S827: Yes), the variation change pattern of the selected variation pattern table is selected, and the variation change pattern is selected as the voice lamp control device 113. A first variation pattern command for notification is generated (S828).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first change change flag 203v11 is off (S827: No), the change pattern type is stored based on the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c. Is selected (decided) from the selected variation pattern table (S829).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S830). The first type-of-stop command is set based on the type of stop being determined (S831). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S 832).

  As described above, when it is predicted that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is usually a jackpot during the high probability gaming state, a probability changing chance game is executed. During the probability change chance game, if it is predicted that the second special symbol usually makes a big hit, the out-of-order variation pattern is selected for the variation of the out-of-order judgment result of the first special symbol, so 3 It becomes a lottery game for a short time of seconds, and the cycle for starting the lottery game can be shortened. Therefore, more lottery games can be executed in the first special symbol, and a player can be provided with many opportunities to obtain a lottery game that will be a jackpot. Therefore, the probability that the player gets a jackpot can be increased.

  In addition, in the second special symbol, since the normal jackpot to transition to the low probability gaming state has been elected, if it can be elected in the first special symbol probability variable jackpot, the probability variation jackpot is the second by the extension change pattern per hit (2) Since it is executed later than the normal jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state shifted to the low probability gaming state can be shifted to the high probability gaming state again. Therefore, the player can be made to play in the high probability gaming state for a longer time. Therefore, the player can be given the opportunity to get more jackpots.

  Moreover, although it was set as the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time of 300 seconds as a hit extension fluctuation pattern in this embodiment, it is not restricted to it, time until the usual big hit of the 2nd special symbol is calculated, and based on it , And may be configured to set the fluctuation time. By configuring in this manner, the time until the jackpot of the first special symbol is started can be shortened, and it is possible to suppress the player from seeing the effect of the long fluctuation time in vain.

  In addition, when it is predicted that the first special symbol will usually be a big hit, it was configured to select the outlier change change pattern for the suspension of the first special symbol that has been suspended so far, but not limited to that It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern of relatively long fluctuation time, such as any of outlier super reach. With this configuration, the same variation pattern as usual is displayed even in the probability variation chance game, and it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the game. In addition, since the number of variation patterns can be reduced, the capacity of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the start of the jackpot is normally delayed by selecting the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the fluctuation start may be delayed for a predetermined time. Specifically, in the high probability gaming state, when it is predicted that a normal jackpot will be won, it may be configured to determine the time to delay the start of fluctuation by lottery, and to delay the start of fluctuation during that time . By configuring in this way, the player wants to get more lottery games with the other special symbol while the variation of the special symbol is stopped (delayed), and wants to get a probability change jackpot It is possible to play games and to concentrate by playing games. Further, in the probability change chance game, the variation start of one of the special symbols is stopped (delayed), and it is possible to show the player that a more special game is being played.

  In addition, in the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the same processing is executed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 only in the point regarding the second special symbol, so the detailed description Is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) in the nineteenth embodiment, the change change process (FIG. 130, S926) and S1130 to the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. The processes up to S1131 are added. In the nineteenth embodiment, the processes of S931 to S932 are the same as the processes of S931 to S932 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S932, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a normal jackpot (S932: No), the change change process (FIG. 130, S1250) is executed. The change change process (FIG. 130, S1250) is a process for setting a probability change chance game if it is not in the probability change chance game when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, which will be described later.

  The process of S933 of the nineteenth embodiment is the same process as S933 of the first embodiment. When the process of S933 ends, it is determined whether the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (that is, it is predicted that the second special symbol usually becomes a big hit) (S1130). If it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1130: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted probability variation jackpot will be a hit even in the normal gaming state (S1131) ). If it is determined that the game is to be hit even in the normal gaming state (S1131: Yes), a countdown effect avoidance command is generated (S1132).

  The countdown effect avoidance command is a command to keep the balloon displayed in the odds chance game being displayed without breaking. When the balloon is displayed in the second special symbol (right side display area Dm2) and the probability changing chance game can be performed whether the probability variation jackpot can be obtained in the first special symbol (left side display area Dm1), If it is predicted that the special symbol will be a probability change jackpot in the special symbol, in the probability variation chance game, the balloon is switched to the effect display mode in which the balloon is not broken in order to notify that the probability variation can be obtained. Thereby, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot can be obtained in the probability variation game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second change change flag 203v12 is off (S1130: No), or if it is determined that the second game is out in the normal gaming state (S1131: No), the process of S1132 is skipped. Then, the process of S934 is performed.

  In this manner, in the process of S1131, by determining whether or not to be a hit even in the normal gaming state, during the probability change chance game, the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed after the normal jackpot with the second special symbol It may be the case. In that case, a case where it does not become a big hit occurs by being drawn in the low probability gaming state, but in such a case, since the countdown effect avoidance command is not set, the probability variation jackpot for the player is the first special The symbol does not indicate that he has won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of erroneous information.

  The processes of S934 to S939 in the nineteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S934 to S939 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the first pre-reading update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the holding with the probability changing jackpot in the probability changing chance game is Since the configuration is configured to set whether or not to be established, the effect can be changed based on the establishment of the hold, and it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of erroneous information.

  Further, the setting of the countdown effect avoidance command may be configured to be set based on the winning command by the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the winning command. With this configuration, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the change change process (S1250) which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the change change process (S1250).

  In the change change process (FIG. 130, S1250), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (probable variation gaming state) (S1251). Whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state is determined based on whether or not the probability change flag 203m of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 is set to ON in the main control device 110.

  If it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is off (S1251: No), based on the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter from the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the variation The variation pattern is predicted and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reserve area of the corresponding rearrangement reserve storage area 203u (S1252).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is on (S1251: Yes), whether the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is set on (ie, in the probability variation chance game) It is determined (S1253). If it is determined that the first change change flag 203v11 or the second change change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1253: Yes), the process of S1252 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first change change flag 203v11 or the second change change flag 203v12 is off (that is, the probability change game is not in progress) (S1253: No), the first change change change flag 203v11 is turned on. Is set (S1254). The hit variation change pattern is stored in the change pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reserve area of the corresponding rearrangement reserve storage area 203u (S1255).

  The time until the set fluctuation change pattern ends fluctuation is calculated (S1256). In addition, the time until this fluctuation change pattern ends fluctuation is the number of reservations of the first special symbol in the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol currently fluctuating (this number does not include the suspension which will be the normal hit) The result obtained by multiplying 20 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the out-of-variation change pattern, is added to the above to add 180 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the per-variation change pattern.

  A countdown effect command is set based on the time calculated in the process of S1256 (S1257). When the countdown effect command set here is output to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 so that the effect display mode in which the balloon is broken is displayed after the calculated time. . By configuring in this manner, in the odds chance game, even if the second special symbol does not hold the hold that is the odd symbol, the main control device 110 executes an effect such that the balloon is broken at the end of the odd chance game There is no need to notify the command again, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, whether the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is determined to be a hit in the processing of S1131. (That is, whether it is the jackpot random number value in the low probability gaming state), but it is not limited thereto, the jackpot random number value (judgment value) determined to be the jackpot in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state respectively It may be configured to determine as the value of (no common value). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to generate a countdown avoidance command by determining whether or not the random value is determined to be a hit in the low probability gaming state in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926). Therefore, the control processing amount of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the high probability gaming state, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol, usually winning a big hit, its start is delayed, the effect that the balloon notifying that it is delayed is broken However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the time until the jackpot is usually performed (confirmed) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to count down. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining time of the high probability gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently while determining the time.

  In addition, after the jackpot is usually delayed and the effect of the countdown is started, the number of times the lottery game of the other special symbol is executed is counted, and if the countdown is 0 or the balloon is broken, You may comprise so that it may alert | report. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to evaluate how much the player has been able to play using the high probability gaming state effectively. In addition, after the countdown effect is started, each reference value (for example, 0 to 10 times, 11 times to 20 times, etc.) is set as the number of times of lottery performed for the other special symbol, and corresponds to each reference value. It may be configured to display the ranked rank. By doing this, the player can easily evaluate the game in the high probability gaming state based on the displayed rank.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot is usually delayed during the high probability gaming state, and the effect of the countdown (in the present embodiment, whether or not the balloon is broken or not) is executed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. And a special symbol that is different from the other special symbol (for example, if the start of the jackpot is usually delayed in the first special symbol, the second special symbol) to execute the lottery game (corresponding special symbol starting opening To target)). Specifically, if the normal jackpot is delayed for the first special symbol, the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 "Please start changing the second special symbol more!" It may be configured to display a letter “Aim for the starting opening (second starting opening 63b)!” To notify the player.

  Next, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are configured to be alternately established by the distributing device 630. However, in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the first start port 63a is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the second start port 63b is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. With this configuration, the player operates the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the gaming ball reaches the upper center position of the variable display device unit 80, and the left side of the variable display device unit 80 By firing the game balls so that the game balls are distributed to the right and to the right, respectively, it is possible to win the game balls in both starting openings. In addition, if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is adjusted and the gaming ball is fired with the strength that the gaming ball reaches the upper left side of the variable display device 80, the gaming ball can easily flow down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (The flow amount of the game ball to the left of the variable display unit 80 increases), so the game ball can be easily made to win in the first starting opening 63a (or the winning in the second starting opening 63b is reduced be able to). In addition, if the game ball is fired with the strength that the game ball reaches the upper right portion (or the return rubber 69) of the variable display device 80 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, the game ball is a variable display device unit Since it becomes easy to flow down the right side of 80 (the flow-down amount of the game ball to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 increases), the game ball can be made easy to win in the second starting opening 63b (or the first start) It is possible to reduce winnings in the mouth 63a).

  In the nineteenth embodiment, a countdown effect command is set in the process of S1257 of the change change process (S1250 in FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, whereby notification as shown in FIG. 124 is performed. Configuration has been described. On the other hand, in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, main control device 110 does not set the countdown effect command, but outputs the determination result of the established success or failure determination condition and the information of the selected variation pattern as a winning command. . The voice lamp control device 113 determines, based on the winning command, whether or not the suspension of selection of the hit variation change pattern is established, and sets the notification mode as shown in FIG. 124 to the voice lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 executes this. In addition, as the notification mode, a special symbol different from the special symbol for which the change change pattern is selected (for example, the second special symbol if the change change pattern is selected in the first special symbol) is given priority to the player Informing to start the fluctuation. As a specific notification mode, for example, the characters “Aim for the left side starting opening (the first starting opening 63a) !!” are displayed in the right side display area Dm2.

  In addition, it is possible to set the case of notifying the player and the case of not notifying the player by executing the lottery whether or not to set the notification mode, and to suppress the advantage to the player excessively. it can. The lottery may be based on the setting value of the setting means which can be set by the gaming shop side, or random numbers may be acquired and the lottery may be made with a predetermined probability, and the state of withdrawal of the gaming machine so far A lottery may be made on the basis of (the number of big hits, the number of difference balls, the number of changes from the current previous big hit, etc.). By doing this, it is possible to adjust the profit given to the player based on the state of the gaming machine and the profit obtained by the player. Therefore, the player can be given a profit within the range of the profit assumed in advance.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that it might alert | reported that the big jack to shift from a high probability gaming state to a normal gaming state was elected, not only that but when the big number of rounds with few rounds is determined Notification may be made, or when a winning not giving time reduction is won, it may be made to notify. Also, the present invention is not limited to a hit, and may be configured to be notified in advance based on the fact that it is decided to shift from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 140, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twentieth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the case of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, regardless of the mutual success or failure determination results, the fluctuation pattern is determined by lottery and each lottery game is executed Explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment, when the holding balls determined to be the big hit in the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol overlap, the big hit is usually the big hit It determines whether it is a jackpot or a jackpot, and usually executes control so that the jackpot starts before the jackpot.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the twentieth embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol overlap to be a big hit, if one is a big hit and the other is a big hit, the big hit is usually after the big hit. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the control for selecting the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is executed so that the jackpot game is started.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, notification effects during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. The upper diagram in FIG. 131 is a diagram showing one of each round in the jackpot game. Each time each round is started, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 131, the character "Please hit a button in a row!" Which is a notification prompting the player to hit the frame button 22 in a row is the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on. This is whether or not there is a hit ball among the holding balls stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b by continuously hitting the button. It is an effect for informing the player in advance.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 (in this embodiment, presses the button), a predetermined lottery is executed, the lottery is won, and if the holding ball serving as a hit is stored, FIG. 131 (a) As shown, the word "one more time, big hit" is displayed to indicate that the hit ball is stored in the holding ball. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated and a predetermined lottery is not won, or even if the lottery is won, if a hit ball is not stored in the holding ball, FIG. 131 (b The words "Sorry !!" as shown in) are displayed.

  By operating the frame button 22, the player can know in advance whether one more jackpot will be obtained early. In addition, since the player who does not want to know in advance does not display the information on whether or not there is a hit in the holding ball by operating the frame button 22, the player can adjust it according to the preference. Can choose a game.

  This notification effect is displayed each time the round is started. Once notified that there is a hit in the holding ball, it will not be notified from the next round. By configuring in this manner, the player can play the game with an expectation that there is a hit in the holding ball until the final round, and it is possible to prevent boredom during the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132 (a), the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the twentieth embodiment will be described. A duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is added to the sorting reserve storage area 203u with respect to the sorting reserve storage area 203u of the first embodiment.

  In the case of overlapping adjustment flag 203u12, when the holding ball which is a hit with the holding ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is overlapped, the special symbol of the holding ball which is a probability variation jackpot is usually a big hit It is a flag indicating that the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is the holding ball selected so that the jackpot game is started later than the special symbol of the holding ball.

  The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is a reserve area of the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u determined to select the extension fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern in the process of S1280 of the first duplication processing (FIG. 136, S1270) described later. Set to on. On the other hand, the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is the next fluctuation started when the fluctuation is ended after the holding ball is digested, the holding area is shifted, and the fluctuation data is stored and shifted to the data storage area during fluctuation Sometimes set to off by being overwritten with new data. The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is backed up when the power is turned off, and is restored to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. When the gaming machine is initialized, it is a flag set to off. Although the duplicate adjustment flag 203u12 has not been described and illustrated in this case, the first duplicate winning process (not shown) is also performed in the second duplicate winning process (not shown) which is one process of the second prefetch update process (not shown). It differs in the point which sets the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 of the reservation area for and the 2nd special design to on, but is set to on similarly.

  The other memory area 223m set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) schematically shows a part of the other memory area 223m. A determination notification flag 223m1 and a determination notification counter 223m2 are added to the other memory area 223m in the first embodiment.

  The confirmation notification flag 223m1 is a flag indicating that in the notification effect during the big hit, it is notified that there is a holding ball that is a hit in the holding ball. In detail, in the jackpot inside effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, a confirmation notification display is provided to notify that there is a holding ball to be hit in the holding ball. After that, it is set to on in the process of S1581. Also, with the end of the jackpot is set to off.

  The determination notification counter 223m2 is a storage area for storing a counter value which is incremented by one each time the large hitting medium effect processing (S1570 in FIG. 140) is executed. The finalized notification counter is set to an initial value "0" when the power is turned on, added to the upper limit value "255", and then set to an initial value "0" when one is added. . The confirmation notification counter is a counter value for determining whether to notify whether or not there is a holding ball to be hit in the holding ball in the notification effect during the big hit. The hit counter value is set for each round of the big hit. In the present embodiment, values from “0 to 1” are set as the hit counter value for 1R to 10R, and “0 to 9” are set as the hit counter value for 11R to 15R.

  With this configuration, since the lottery is performed each time the player operates the frame button 22, it is possible to make the notified timing different for each big hit, and to give the player a sense of mannerism. It can be suppressed. Also, if the player does not win the lottery, the notification is not executed even if there is a hit in the holding ball, so a state not to be notified can always be made, and the player can be hit by a big hit later and be surprised You can continue to have expectations without it. Further, since the lottery is performed each time the frame switch 22 is operated, the probability of being notified increases as the frame switch 22 is operated, and the player operates the frame switch 22 to be motivated, It is possible to participate in the game.

  Furthermore, since the round progresses and the lottery probability becomes five times after 11R, it becomes easy to win even when the lottery has not been won until 11R, preventing the player from giving up without being hit (not informed). it can. Therefore, the player can participate in the notification effect with an expectation that the notification may be issued after 11R.

  In the present embodiment, the hit count value is configured to be variable between 1R to 10R and 11R to 15R. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The hit count value may be changed every round. It may be configured to make a decision. By configuring in this manner, it is notified that the player has a hit at an unexpected timing, and the interest of the game can be further increased.

  Next, referring to FIG. 133, in the twentieth embodiment, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the twentieth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 134, in the twentieth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process, which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 133, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 10 (S410) will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S410). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, if the winning judgment result of the special symbol starting to change is a hit, if there is a hit in the second special symbol holding ball, usually select the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern so that the big hit game is started first Do.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S840) . The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S840: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S841). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special hit variation pattern table 202d for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set. Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, the jackpot type table 202b is set, and the jackpot type is determined (S842).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203 o is off (S 840: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S 843). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11B) is set.

  It is determined whether the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 of the reordering storage area 203u corresponding to the suspension starting to change is set to ON (S844). If it is determined that the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S844), the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reordering storage area is selected, and based on the variation pattern To generate a first variation pattern command.

  Here, the variation patterns stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the sorting reserve storage area 203u are the extension variation patterns or shortening variations set in the first overlap processing (FIG. 136, S1270) described later. It becomes a pattern. In addition, the extension variation pattern and the shortening variation pattern are displaying the main design pattern during the set variation time, and displaying the notification result of the judgment result based on the lapse of the set variation time. Is a fluctuation pattern that is stopped and displayed.

  The shortening fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for controlling (adjusting) to start the normal jackpot of the first special symbol that starts to fluctuate this time before the probability variation jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserve is there. On the other hand, the extension fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation for controlling (adjusting) to start the probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol which starts to fluctuate now after the normal jackpot stored in the second special symbol hold It is a pattern.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S844: No), the variation pattern type is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c. The selected variation pattern table is selected (decided) (S846). Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S847). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S848). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S849).

  By configuring in this way, if the lottery game of the first special symbol that is about to start to change is a probability change jackpot, adjust so that the jackpot game is started after the normal jackpot of the second special symbol Can. On the other hand, if the lottery game of the first special symbol that is about to start to change is usually a jackpot, it can be adjusted so that the jackpot game is started earlier than the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol. Therefore, even when the jackpot and the definite special jackpot overlap between the first special symbol and the second special symbol among the holding balls, the positive jackpot is usually performed after the jackpot is usually performed, so the high is high. Probability game state can be maintained longer. Thus, the player can be awarded more jackpots.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is determined in the first double hitting process (FIG. 136, S1270) executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 63a. Although it comprised as mentioned above, you may be comprised so that a fluctuation time may be calculated and each determined not only in it but in the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is adjusted so that the probability change jackpot is usually executed later than the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the start of fluctuation of the probability fluctuation jackpot is delayed by a predetermined time. It may be adjusted so that the start of the probability variation jackpot will come later. By configuring in this way, by delaying the start of fluctuation, the player can recognize that the jackpot is further executed, and can recognize the subsequent jackpot early.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the extension fluctuation pattern and the shortening fluctuation pattern are newly set, respectively, but a fluctuation pattern in which a large jackpot is usually displayed first is selected from existing fluctuation pattern tables. You may configure it. In such a configuration, a short fluctuation pattern or a long fluctuation pattern may be set in advance in the existing fluctuation pattern table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment, each process of S1260 to S1261 and the first overlap processing are compared to the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. (FIG. 136, S1270) are added.

  In the process of S1260, it is determined whether or not the thing corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the hold area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u (S1260). In addition, it may be determined whether this determination is stored as a hold which is a big hit in the hold stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. When it is determined that the jackpot is held due to the second special symbol being held (S1260: Yes), the first overlap winning process (FIG. 136, S1270) is executed.

  Although the details will be described later with regard to the first duplicate winning process (FIG. 136, S1270), the start of the jackpot is usually started when the winning to be held in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is overlapped. The process for selecting the variation pattern or shortening variation pattern is executed so that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is extended so as to precede the start of the probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is all out of hold (S1260: No), or after the execution of the first overlap processing (FIG. 135, S1270), the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON. If not, the variation pattern is based on the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter C3 from the special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the variation for the newly stored hold. It is predicted (previously determined) and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 (S1261).

  The processes of S931 to S933 and S935 to S939 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment are S931 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) of the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S93 to S935 to S939 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the first overlap processing (S1270), which is one of the first prefetch update processing (S, FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this first overlap processing (S1270). The first overlap winning process (FIG. 136, S1270) in the twentieth embodiment determines whether or not the pending to be hit by the pending corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, and the pending to be hit is stored. Is used to determine the type of each variation, and to select the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern as the variation pattern of the first special symbol so that the start of the jackpot is usually executed before the start of the oddity jackpot It is a process.

  In the first overlap processing (FIG. 136, S1270), first, it is determined whether any of the hold areas in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u has a hold area for which the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON. If the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S1271: Yes), this process ends. As described above, when the jackpot is already overlapped with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and there is a hold in which the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is selected, the processing in the case of overlapping again is performed. It is configured not to do. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load of main controller 110 excessively. In addition, in a state where three or more jackpots are held, by not performing control such that the jackpot is given to the player, it is possible to suppress excessive increase in gambling.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S1271: No), the probability variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stored in the reserve area of the sort reserve storage area 203u is Even if it is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), it is determined whether or not it is a winning determined to be a hit (S1272). In the normal gaming state, if it is determined that the game is out (S1272: No), this process is ended. As described above, when it is determined that the probability change jackpot will be a hit even in the normal gaming state and the probability change jackpot is delayed than the actual fluctuation start time, the one that starts to change in the high probability gaming state is the low probability game Even if it starts to fluctuate in the state, it is possible to sort out only the ones that will be the jackpot. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being lost.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal gaming state is determined to be a hit (S1272: Yes), whether or not the prefetch certainty change flag 203u6 in the reserve area of the newly stored sort reserve storage area 203u is on (ie, The newly stored hold is determined whether or not it is a definite variation jackpot) (S1273). When it is determined that the newly stored suspension is a probability variation jackpot (S1273: Yes), it is determined whether the hit of the suspension area corresponding to the second special symbol is usually a jackpot (S1274). When it is determined that the hit of the holding area corresponding to the second special symbol is usually a big hit (S1274: Yes), the time until the normal jackpot of the holding area of the second special symbol stops fluctuating ((1127) S1275).

  The time until the fluctuation of the normal jackpot of this second special symbol stops is currently stored before the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol during fluctuation and the second special symbol of normal jackpot Calculated by adding each of the special symbol hold change time.

  The fluctuation time is calculated and the fluctuation time is calculated so that the suspension of becoming the probability variation jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol is stopped fluctuatingly after the time until the fluctuation stop calculated in the process of S1275 Are set (selected), and stored in the change pattern type storage area 203u3 of the corresponding reserved area (S1276). Here, the variation time of the extension variation pattern is stored prior to the suspension of becoming the probability variation jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol at the remaining variation time of the first special symbol currently being varied. (1) Add the fluctuation time of suspension of special symbol, and calculate the fluctuation start time of the probability variation jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol. Then, the time obtained by subtracting 3 seconds from the result of subtracting the fluctuation start time from the time calculated in the process of S1275 is determined as the fluctuation time. If the fluctuation start time is later than the time calculated in the process of S1275, an extended fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit in the suspension of the second special symbol is the probability variation jackpot (S1274: No), this processing is ended. If it is determined that the pre-read certainty change flag 203u6 of the newly stored reserve area is off (S1273: No), it is determined whether the hit of the reserve area corresponding to the second special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (S1277). If it is determined that the second special symbol suspension is a probability variation jackpot (S1277: Yes), the time until the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol suspension area stops fluctuating is calculated (S1278). The time is calculated by the same method as the process of S1275.

  Based on the change start time of the first special symbol's normal jackpot, the newly stored first special symbol's normal jackpot starts earlier than the probability variation jackpot stored in the second special symbol's hold. It is determined whether it is possible (shortened) (S1279). Here, is it possible to determine whether or not it is possible to start earlier than the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol when the change time of each holding area corresponding to the first special symbol is configured by the shortening fluctuation time of one second? To determine

  If it is determined that it is possible to start the normal jackpot of the first special symbol newly stored earlier than the probability variation jackpot stored in the second special symbol hold (S 1279: Yes), newly The shortening change pattern is stored in the change pattern type storage area of the reserve area corresponding to the stored reserve area and the first special symbol stored earlier than that. The shortening variation pattern is a variation pattern composed of a one second variation pattern.

  The overlap adjustment flag 203u12 of the reservation area storing the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is set to ON (S1281). Each reserved area is renumbered in order of change start time (S1282).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust the variation time so that when the jackpot is duplicated for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the probability variation jackpot is usually started later than the jackpot. . Therefore, after the jackpot is usually executed, although it is transitioned to or maintained in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), then the probability variation jackpot is executed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) The gaming state can be shifted. Therefore, the player can play the game in the high probability gaming state for a long time. Also, more jackpots can be awarded to the player.

  In addition, when the jackpots overlapping in the first special symbol and the second special symbol are usually jackpots in the probability variation jackpot or both in both, the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern is not selected (the selection is prohibited) Thus, the player can enjoy the game with the normal fluctuation pattern.

  Also, after the extension fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation start time of each reserve area is updated, and the fluctuation start order is renumbered in the order of the fluctuation start time, so the extension fluctuation pattern Alternatively, even if the change start order changes due to the shortening change pattern, the correct change start order can be updated. Therefore, a winning command can be generated based on the correct fluctuation start order, and even when the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern is selected, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the correct fluctuation start order.

  In the present embodiment, the extension fluctuation pattern is calculated based on the time until the second special symbol, which usually becomes a big hit, stops fluctuating, but it is not limited thereto, and it is the most common fluctuation pattern. Assuming that the maximum fluctuation time when combined with a long fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time longer than that may be preset and selected as an extended fluctuation pattern.

  In addition, although it was configured with a reduction variation pattern of 1 second all to the temporary variation big hit of the newly stored first special symbol, but it is not limited to that, from the time until the normal jackpot of the second special symbol stops fluctuating It may be configured to be calculated and appropriately set so as to be short.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern for adjusting the fluctuation time is set respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, delaying the start of fluctuation or invalidating suspension of deviation It may be configured to adjust. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the control load for the main controller 110 to adjust the fluctuation time.

  In the second prefetch update process (not shown), which is one process of the second prefetch process (S 914 in FIG. 27) executed based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 63b, The same processing as the first prefetch update processing (FIG. 135, S926) is executed although the processing is different from the processing for the holding ball of 2 special symbols, so the detailed description is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 137, in the twentieth embodiment, the large opening opening / closing process (S103) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the large opening opening / closing process (S103). The large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 137, S103) of the twentieth embodiment controls the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 65.

  In the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 137, S103), first, it is determined whether it is the start of the jackpot game (S131). Determination of whether it is the start of the jackpot game is the process of S608 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204) or the process of S808 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the jackpot It is determined whether or not the start of has been set.

  If it is determined that the jackpot game starts (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each suspension area stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u The value is recalculated taking into account the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol or second special symbol starting from the jackpot after the big hit (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each reserve area stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u The value of 大 is recalculated starting from the jackpot (S 134).

  Based on the change start time recalculated in the process of S133 or S134 and stored in the change start time storage area 203u5, a rearrangement data command is generated for each reserve area (S135).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is judged whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S136: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S137). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S137: Yes), processing is performed to open the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S137: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140). If it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), processing to close the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S142). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S142: Yes), the ending command is set (generated) (S143).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is over (S144). If it is determined that the jackpot game is over (S144: Yes), the end of the jackpot game is set (S145). It is determined whether it is a definite variation jackpot (S146). The determination as to whether it was a probability variation jackpot became an opportunity to carry out a jackpot game, and it is determined whether the lottery result is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

  If it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has been made (S146: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S144: No), or if it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is not found (S146: No), this processing ends.

  Thus, when the jackpot game starts, the fluctuation start time in each holding area starting from after the jackpot game is updated. Therefore, even when the player operates the frame button 22 during the jackpot game, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also generates the rearrangement data command based on the updated fluctuation start time. It is possible to update the data of the sort rearranging storage area 223k and rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting the fluctuation after the big hit game.

  In addition, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and if it is temporarily stopped, after the remaining fluctuation time has elapsed for the suspension of the special symbol, By calculating the fluctuation start time as a starting point, it is possible to calculate a more accurate fluctuation start time and generate a rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting more accurate change based on the change start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

  Referring to FIG. 138, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). In the main process (FIG. 138, S1400) of the twentieth embodiment, a jackpot inside effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) is added to the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. 36, S1414) is changed to the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414). In the processes of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, and S1415 to S1419 in the twentieth embodiment, the same processes as those of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, and S1415 to S1419 in the first embodiment are performed. . When the process of S1413 is completed, a command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) is executed.

  In the twentieth embodiment, a command determination process (S1414) which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 138, S1400) performed by the MPU 221 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1414). In the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment, each process up to S1565 to S1566 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) in the first embodiment. The processing up to S1501 to 1519 of the command determination processing (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment is the same processing as each processing up to S1501 to 1519 in the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. Is executed.

  In the process of S1517 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) of the twentieth embodiment, when it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation resume command is not received (S1517), during the jackpot game It is determined whether a round number command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1565). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1565: Yes), the jackpot round number and the round effective time are set based on the received round number command (S1566). The round effective time is set to a time of 5 seconds, during which a notification effect during a jackpot game is executed.

  Next, returning to the main processing (S1400) of FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the main processing of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 138, S1400), after the processing of S1410 is executed, or when it is determined that the processing of S1401 is less than 1 ms (S1401: No), the jackpot middle effect processing ( FIG. 140, S1570) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 140, in the twentieth embodiment, a jackpot effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570) which is one of the main processing (FIG. 138, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570). In the jackpot effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570) of the twentieth embodiment, a lottery is performed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player in the notification effect in the jackpot game, and the jackpot becomes a jackpot in the holding ball A process is performed to notify the player whether there is a holding ball.

  In the jackpot middle effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570), first, the value of the final notification counter 223m2 is read out, “1” is added to the value, and the value of the final notification counter 223m2 is updated (S1571). Next, it is determined whether it is in the round effective time (S1572). Whether it is a round effective time or not is determined whether it is a round effective time (five seconds from the start of the round in the present embodiment) set in the process of S1566 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414). If it is determined that it is outside the round effective time (S1572: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the round effective time is in progress (S1572: Yes), it is determined whether the determination notification flag 223m1 is set to ON (that is, determination notification has already been made) (S1573) . If it is determined that the determination notification flag 223m1 is on (S1573: Yes), this process ends.

  If it is determined that the determination notification flag 223m1 is off (S1573: No), a display determination effect command is generated (set). The display confirmation effect command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a background screen or the like for notification effect on the display control device 114.

  A display button operation display command is generated (set) (S1575). This display button operation display command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the character "Please continuously press a button!" On the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize that the notification effect has been started, and can start the operation of the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can easily participate in the notification effect.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576). Here, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) once. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1576: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576: Yes), the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is acquired (S1577). It is determined whether or not the value of the determined notification counter 223m2 acquired with the hit probability based on the number of rounds is met (S1578). Here, when the number of rounds is from 1R to 10R, “0 to 1” is set as the hit determination value, and when the number of rounds is from 11R to 15R, “0 to 9” is as the hit determination value. It is set.

  It is determined whether the obtained determination result of the determination notification counter 223m2 is a hit or not (S1579). If it is determined that the result of the determination is a hit (S1580), it is determined whether there is a pending hold in any of the hold areas of the sorting hold storage area 203u (S1580). If it is determined that there is a hold to be a hit (S1580: Yes), a display confirmation notification command for instructing a confirmation notification display is generated (set) (S1581). The determination notification flag 223m1 is set to on (S1582). Here, the confirmation notification command for display is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the characters "one more time, big hit !!" as shown in FIG. 131 (a) on the third symbol display device 81. . The player can recognize from this display that there is a jackpot in the hold. Therefore, the player can operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of this display. Therefore, even in the big hit, it is possible to play the game without getting bored with the game.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the determination is out of step (S1579: No), or in the case where it is determined that all of the hold areas are out (S1580: No), a display instructing non-confirmation notification display An indeterminate notification command for use is generated (set) (S 1583). Here, the display non-confirmation notification command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the character “Sorry !!!” on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 131 (b). When the character "Sorry!" Is displayed, the player can recognize that the notification is not given because the holding ball is not hit or the number of times the player continuously hit is not enough. Since the notification effect is configured to be executed every round until the confirmation notification is displayed, the player is still hit in the holding ball even if the display "Sorry !!" is displayed in one round. In the hope that there may be, the next round can also participate in the informing effect.

  As described above, when the jackpots overlap between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is adjusted so that the probability variation jackpot is usually started later than the jackpot. Furthermore, when it is informed that there is a big hit in the holding ball, by executing the production of whether or not there is a big hit in the holding ball during the big hit, the running big hit is usually a big hit Even, the player can play the game with expectation that the held hit is not a definite jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing the game with expectation even during the jackpot to the player.

  In addition, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpot is overlapped, and the shortening fluctuation pattern is selected in order to usually start the jackpot earlier than the probability jackpot. Thereby, the player can participate in the notification effect in anticipation that the probability change jackpot should be stored in the hold when the normal jackpot is started through the shortening variation pattern.

  In addition, even if the notification effect is stored when the jackpot is stored, the notification effect is not notified unless the lottery for notifying or not is won, so the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times. It can be made to participate in notification effects for a longer time.

  In addition, since the lottery whether to notify or not is executed each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the timing (such as the number of operations) to be notified every time is not constant, giving the player unexpectedness. Can.

  In addition, since the lottery probability of whether to notify in a round is changed, the easiness of being notified in a round can be changed, and a round in which the player is expected to be notified more can be set. . In the present embodiment, since 11R and higher are set with a high probability, even if the notification effect continues up to 11R, if there is a hit in 11R and later, the fixed effect can be easily displayed. Therefore, the player can continue participating in the notification effect with an expectation that the notification may be issued after 11R even if the notification is not made for several rounds.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when a big hit or a probability change big hit has already been established with one special symbol already, when the other special symbol is established afterward, by adjusting the fluctuation time which becomes the hit, Although the jackpot game of the odd variation jackpot was usually configured to be started later than the jackpot game of the jackpot, the present invention is not limited thereto, but in the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are held, usually the jackpot and the special jackpot The probability variation jackpot may be controlled to be normally started after the jackpot by determining whether each is stored and adjusting the variation time of both reserved special symbols. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time can be adjusted more efficiently. In addition, even when there is only a short time before the start of the probability variation jackpot, it is possible to select the variation pattern so as to normally start the jackpot first.

  Also, if it is determined in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) that a probability change jackpot will be made, a relatively long variation pattern of the variation time is forced in the variation pattern. May be configured to be selected. By configuring in this way, the start of the probability variation jackpot will be delayed further, and in the meanwhile, it is more likely to be played by expecting that the hold that would normally be a jackpot will be established with the other special symbol. The jackpot can be given to the player.

  Further, the configuration described in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment may be combined to cause the sound lamp control device 113 to perform notification.

  In this embodiment, the notification effect can operate the frame button 22 many times during the round effective time, and is configured to execute the lottery each time, but it is not limited to that, it can be performed only once in one round You may configure it. Further, instead of executing the notification effect for each round, only one specific round may be performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not this particular round is to be a round for performing an informing effect by a lottery during a jackpot. By configuring in this manner, the round in which the informing effect is executed becomes random, and when the informing effect is executed, it is possible to feel more fresh and participate in the informing effect. In addition, when the notification effect is executed, if there is a hit in the holding area, it can have more expectation.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is started on one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery game determined to be the other hit that is starting to change is also after one jackpot game. Although the case where the success / failure determination result is maintained has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and when the jackpot is started with one special symbol, the variation determined to be the fluctuation started with the other special symbol is the variation It may be configured to be disabled. In such a configuration, when a big hit and a definite variation big hit are respectively determined for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the big hit is usually started first, until the big hit is finished, It is good to execute the control which delays so that the odd variable jackpot does not start. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the special symbol serving as the probability variation jackpot from fluctuating and becoming invalidated when the jackpot is normally started.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 141 to 149, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described eighth embodiment (see FIGS. 64-72), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined regardless of the number of holding balls at the start of variation.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute control to select the variation pattern based on the number of holding balls at the start of variation. .

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in the following points. In the twenty-first embodiment, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes variable startable, the number of holding balls of the corresponding special symbol is determined, and the variation pattern is selected based on the value. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. The secondary sort reserve storage area 223k of the twenty first embodiment is different from the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k (see FIG. 9B) of the eighth embodiment in the sort order change flag in the reserve areas 1 to 8, respectively. 223k9 has been added.

  When the sort order change flag 223k9 is a sort of the held symbol, and the held symbol display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the change start order, It is a flag which shows that change occurred in the change start order of the reservation symbol display. The rearranging order change flag 223k9 is set to ON by the process of S1895 of the secondary suspension rearranging display notification process (S1871 in FIG. 148) described later. On the other hand, the reserve area is shifted by the reserve being digested, and the special symbol corresponding to the reserve can start changing, and it is turned off when shifting from reserve area 1 of the pending data storage area to the varying data storage area Set to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e (in the twenty-first embodiment) set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the RAM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113. 222 d) will be described.

  The special out-of-time variation pattern table 202e in the twenty-first embodiment is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, and when the variation start of the special symbol, the result of judgment of acceptance is out and the gaming state is low probability gaming state It is a fluctuation pattern table selected by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the (normal probability gaming state). The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 changes the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) or the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) according to the normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e. The number of holding balls corresponding to the special symbol to start (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol in the case of starting to change the first special symbol), the value of the change type counter CS1, and the change pattern determination counter The variation pattern is determined based on the value of CS3.

  The normal special deviation variation pattern table 222d in the twenty-first embodiment is set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and has the same content as the normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the main controller 110. . In the normal special deviation variation pattern table 222d, the winning combination output from the main control device 110 in the follow reordering storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. Based on the command, it is used to discriminate (predict) the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation before starting the fluctuation of the data of each reservation area stored in the sub sort reserve memory area 223k Be Specifically, the variation pattern table 222d for normal time special deviation variation pattern is selected variation pattern when the gaming state at the start of the variation is the low probability gaming state and the result of determination of success or failure determined at that time is out. It is a table. The variation type counter CS1 and variation pattern determination counter CS3 stored based on the prize command in each reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area 223k, and the number of holding balls of the special symbol corresponding to the current condition (the first special symbol In the case of holding, the variation pattern is determined in advance based on the number of holding balls of the first special symbol), and is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 223k3 of the follow sort suspension storage area 223k.

  In addition, the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected is different when the number of holding balls is “0”, “1 to 2”, and “3” in the special-time outlier variation pattern table 202e (222d) Is configured (each counter value is set). When the number of holding balls is “0”, a fluctuation pattern of relatively long fluctuation time is configured to be more easily selected than in the case of other numbers of holding balls. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern to be reached is configured to be more easily selected than in the case of other numbers of holding balls. When the number of holding balls is “1 to 2”, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is set more easily than when the number of holding balls is “0”, while the number of holding balls is set. A fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time relatively shorter than in the case of "3" is set to be easily selected. When the number of holding balls is “3”, a relatively short fluctuation time fluctuation pattern is configured to be selected more easily than in the case of other numbers of holding balls. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the special special deviation variation pattern table 202e (222d) which selects the fluctuation pattern of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, respectively, is omitted for the special special variation pattern table 202e (222d) at the time of normal. ) Are set respectively.

  By configuring in this way, when the holding ball is small, the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b during that time by selecting the fluctuation pattern of a relatively long fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changed (the state in which the lottery game is not being performed) because the holding balls disappear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored by the occurrence of a state in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped changing.

  In addition, when the number of holding balls is "3", which is close to the upper limit value "4", a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, so that the digestion cycle of holding becomes faster and holding It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b in a state where the number of balls becomes the upper limit "4" and overflowing as an invalid ball that does not become a holding ball . Therefore, the player can set the holding ball to the upper limit value “4” and shorten the time for stopping the firing of the game ball, and an efficient game can be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 143, the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the time reduction set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113. The probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 222d will be described.

  The special shortfall variation pattern table 202e for time shortening and certainty variation is selected when the gaming state is the short time gaming state or the high probability gaming state (probable oddity gaming state) with respect to the above-mentioned special occasion special variation fluctuation pattern table 202e described above. It differs in the point.

When the number of holding balls is “0”, the special out-of-order variation pattern table 222d for time shortening / probability change selects a fluctuation pattern with a relatively longer fluctuation time than the case where the number of holding balls is “1 to 3” It is easily configured. Further, at this time, the short / probability variation extra deviation variation pattern table is configured so that a variation pattern of variation time having a relatively short variation time is easily selected even when the number of holding balls is “1 to 2” It is done. Therefore, when it is in the time saving game state or the high probability game state, it is possible to make the reserve ball digestion cycle faster. Therefore, in the time-saving game state or the high probability game state, by setting the success / failure determination probability of the normal symbol to a high probability, the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric role member 64 become easy to open, and one open time Since the number of times of opening is also increased, the gaming ball can easily enter the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, but since the holding ball is digested in an early cycle, it is possible to play a game with good tempo.

  The time deviation / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 222d set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has the same configuration as the time reduction / probability change special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e of the main control unit 110. . In addition, it is similarly used to determine the fluctuation pattern in advance, except that it is a fluctuation pattern selected to be in the short game state or the high probability game state with respect to the normal time special out fluctuation pattern table 222d. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  In addition, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the same as the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d set in the ROM 201 of the main control device 113 and the time variation / precise variation special hit variation table 202d. Are set as a special time variation pattern table 222c and a time variation / probability variation special pattern variation table 222c. That is, when the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern is selected based on the respective counter values regardless of the number of holding balls.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). The main processing (FIG. 144, S1400) of the twenty-first embodiment is the same as the main processing (FIG. 68, S1400) of the eighth embodiment except for the pending number display updating process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840) and the pending reordering process 4. (FIG. 145, S1850) are added. In the processes of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, and S1414 to S1419 in the twenty-first embodiment, the same processes as those of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, and S1414 to S1419 in the eighth embodiment are performed. . When the process of S1412 is completed, the pending reordering process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 145, pending sorting processing 4 (S1850), which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described in the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing this pending reordering process 4 (S1850). The pending rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) in the twenty-first embodiment is executed based on the data of each pending area stored in the follow reorder pending storage area 223k and the number of current pending balls. This is a process for updating the selected fluctuation pattern and updating the fluctuation start order and the like.

  In the pending reordering process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) of the twenty-first embodiment, the pending reordering order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed first. Although this pending rearrangement order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) will be described later, based on the data of each pending area stored in the follow sort pending storage area 223k and the number of current pending balls, This is processing for selecting and updating the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation again.

  After the pending rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed, it is determined whether or not it is a possible rearrangement period (S1852). In the sortable period, gaming states other than the state with no hold established in the big hit game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is not one or more hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively) are arranged The exchangeable period is set.

  If it is determined that it is a sortable period (S1852: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1853). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the character "May be reorderable!" And the player can operate the frame button 22. Informing a period that is The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be controlled to light a dedicated lamp or the like.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation can be performed, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. In addition, as long as the rearrangement possible period is not particularly provided, and the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the arrangement display may naturally be performed.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1854). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1854: Yes), the reordering flag 223k7 of all the pending areas in which the pending data of the follow sort pending storage area 223k is stored is set to on. (S1855).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reordering period is not reached (S1852: No), or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1854: No), this process is ended.

  With this configuration, when the player wishes to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be focused next (the special symbol to be the variable display start). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and to play the game smoothly.

  Further, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, since the distribution ball 630 is configured to easily win the game ball alternately by the distribution device 630, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured. The game is played evenly and the game can be played efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, based on the fact that the player operates the frame button 22, the control is performed to rearrange and display the held symbol display in the fluctuation start order, but the present invention is not limited thereto, but a new hold Of course, it may be configured to execute each time it is stored. By configuring in this manner, the player can always correctly recognize the order of starting the variable display by the reserved symbol display sorted in the fluctuation start order.

  In this embodiment, the sortable period is other than a state in which there is no hold established in the jackpot game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (state in which there is no hold of one or more first special symbols and second special symbols). The game state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a sortable period even during a jackpot game, or conversely, a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed It may be set to other than, etc., and may be determined as appropriate.

  When the jackpot game is set to a sortable period, it is necessary to sort in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped in the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being suspended and the remaining fluctuation time during temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new holding symbol display is displayed during the jackpot game, the holding symbol display is combined with the display mode already displayed before the holding symbol display is displayed. The sorting can be performed in the correct fluctuation start order, and the player can be notified of the correct fluctuation start order even in the jackpot gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reordering storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the secondary reordering storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 are configured to store data in which the reordering is performed mutually. Not only that, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data (relevant judgment result, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern type, etc.) necessary for sorting by a prize command, Reordering may be performed only by the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, referring to FIG. 146, in the twenty-first embodiment, pending reordering process 2 which is one process of pending reordering process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control apparatus 113. (S1851) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the pending reordering order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851).

  In the pending / reordering order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) in the twenty-first embodiment, it is first determined whether a winning command from the main control device 110 has been received (S1861). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1861: Yes), each counter value stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern determination counter C4) are read out (S1862). The respective data read out in the process of S1862 are stored in the corresponding hold area (the area with the smallest number of the hold areas among the hold areas in which no data is stored) (S1863). On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command is not received (S1861: No), the processing of S1862 to S1863 is skipped and the processing of S1864 is executed.

  Of each reserve area of the sort rearrangement reserve storage area 223k, each data such as the variation pattern and the variation start time is an unupdated reserve area, and the variation start time is calculated sequentially from the reserve area with the earliest variation start time, The change start time storage area 223k5 of the reserve area is stored (S1864). In addition, if it is an unupdated holding area for all the holding areas, the fluctuation start time is determined from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently fluctuating, and the fluctuation start time Recalculate and store from the earlier reserved area of.

  In the process of S1864, it is determined whether the gaming state when the special symbol corresponding to the holding area for which the fluctuation start time has been recalculated becomes capable of fluctuation start is the high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state) (S1864). If it is determined that the gaming state at the start of the change is the high probability gaming state (S1865: Yes), it is stored in the success / failure determination result storage area 223k1 based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time. The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is determined, and the determination result is stored in the acceptance determination result storage area 223k1 (S1866). On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S1865: No), based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability, The value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the pass / fail judgment result storage area 223k1 of the reserve area of the rearrangement hold storage area 223k is judged, and the judgment result is stored in the pass / fail judgment result storage area 223k1 (S1867).

  The sub hold reordering storage area updating process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) is executed. Although subordinating reordering storage area update processing 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) will be described later, the variation pattern is determined in advance for each suspension area based on the result of determination of adequacy determination based on the change start time in advance. Is a process for updating. It is determined whether or not there is a pending area for which each data such as the variation start time and the variation pattern has not been updated in the pending area of the sort rearrangement pending storage area 223k (S1869). If it is determined that there is an unupdated pending area (S1869: Yes), the process returns to S1864 and the same process is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no unupdated pending area in the follow sort pending area 223k (S1869: No), the change start order of each pending area is renumbered based on the change start time, and the change is made It stores in the order storage area 223k4 (S1870). The sub hold rearranging display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) is executed. Although the subordination rearranging display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) will be described later, the reserved symbol display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is rearranged and displayed in the order of start of variation This is a process for executing a notification process for notifying the player that the sort order has been changed, when there is a change in the order of the displayed reserved symbol display, when the player is on.

  Referring to FIG. 147, in the twenty-first embodiment, sub hold reordering hold storage area updating which is one process of sub hold reordering order determination processing (S 1461 in FIG. 146) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113. Process 2 (S1868) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the sub hold reordering pending storage area updating process 2 (S1868).

  In subordinating reordering reserving storage area update processing 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) in the twenty-first embodiment, first, the result of the propriety determination predicted in the processing of S1866 and S1867 of the pending reordering order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851). Is determined to be a jackpot (S1881). If it is determined that the predicted success / failure determination result is a jackpot (S1881: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S1882). It is determined based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type storage area 223k2 in the reserve area of the sort rearrangement reserve storage area 223k.

  If it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S1882: Yes), the follow reading certainty change flag 223k6 of the rearrangement hold storage area 223k is set to ON (S1883). On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is normally a jackpot (S1882: No), the processing of S1883 is skipped and the processing of S1884 is executed.

  The game state at the start of the change is determined, and it is selected at the start of change based on the value of the change type counter CS1 and the value of the change pattern determination counter CS3 from the special hit change pattern table 222c corresponding to the play state. The fluctuation pattern is discriminated (predicted) in advance (S1884). On the other hand, if the predicted success or failure judgment result is out of order (S1881: No), the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is determined, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 222d corresponding to the gaming state And the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter CS3 and the special symbol that selects this fluctuation pattern, the number of the corresponding special symbol held (if the fluctuation pattern for the holding ball of the first special symbol is predicted, that reservation Based on (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol established after the ball), the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation is discriminated (predicted) in advance (S1885). The predicted success or failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in the corresponding storage area of the reordering storage area (S1886).

  As described above, the change start time and change pattern of the reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area are updated in the reserve sort order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851), so that the increase or decrease of the reserve ball, the new reserve Even if a change occurs in the change start order of the reserved symbol display that is already sorted and displayed in the change start order due to the establishment of the, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the change start order based on the updated data each time it can. Therefore, the player can recognize the latest change start order in the changing gaming state, and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, main controller 110 does not execute control for rearranging the reserved symbol display, transmits a winning command, and performs processing necessary for rearranging in voice lamp control device 113, so that the main controller The control load of 110 can be reduced. Therefore, frequently, the data of the pending area can be updated to always update to the latest change order.

  The variation start time of each reserve area changes with the reserve variation time of the same special symbol stored before that. Here, since the variation pattern for determining the variation time varies depending on the number of holding balls, it is changed by increasing the number of holding balls while being held. However, every time there is a change in the number of holding balls, the fluctuation start time, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. are updated, so that it is possible to always update to the correct fluctuation start order. In addition, the number of holding balls can be adjusted to an appropriate number by changing the selected fluctuation pattern according to the number of holding balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the holding ball is lost and a time when the drawing of the special symbol is not performed occurs or the holding ball reaches the upper limit value and the overflow occurs.

  In the present embodiment, the data of the holding area is constantly updated regardless of the increase or decrease of the holding ball, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the data of the holding area is updated when the number of holding balls increases or decreases. It may be configured as follows. Also, the data of the holding area may be updated only when the number of holdings increases. With this configuration, the frequency of updating the hold area can be reduced, and the control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, in the twenty-first embodiment, secondary reordering display which is one process of pending reordering order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The notification process (S1871) will be described. FIG. 148 illustrates the secondary suspension sort indication notification processing (S1871).

  In the sub hold reordering display notification process (S1871 in FIG. 148), it is first determined whether there is an area in which the reordering flag 223k7 is on in any of the respective reserve areas of the sub sort reserving storage area 223k (S1891). . If it is determined that there is a holding area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is on (S1891: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a change in the change order of the holding area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set on (S1892) ). Here, whether or not there is a change in the change start order, it is determined whether or not the update is performed in a different order when renumbering is performed in the process of S1870.

  If it is determined that the change start order has been changed (S1892: Yes), it is determined whether the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1893). If it is determined that the rearranging order change flag 223k9 is on (S1893: Yes), a notification command to notify that the rearranging order has been changed again is generated (set) (S1893). In the present embodiment, as a notification that the rearranging order has been changed again, characters of “the rearranging order has been changed again!” Are displayed in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is off (S1893: No), the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to be on (S1895). A notification command notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed is generated (set) (S1896). Here, as a notification mode for notifying that the sort order has been changed, characters of “the sort order has been changed!” Are displayed in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the player is notified that the reserved symbol display has been rearranged.

  By configuring in this way, even if the change start order is changed, the change pattern which is previously determined to be selected at the start of the change of each hold area is changed due to increase or decrease of the number of hold etc. It is possible to notify the player that the sorting of the reserved symbol display being reordered and displayed has been changed, in an easily understandable notification mode. Therefore, after the player knows that the reserved symbol display has been rearranged, identifying the reserved symbol display can suppress the confusion of the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display. it can.

  In addition, since it was configured to give a different notification when the re-sorted one is changed again, the player can easily make it easy that the current change is changed again. By recognizing, confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

  In this embodiment, when the rearranging order is changed again, the notification is given by characters. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the third symbol display device before changing the rearranging order and after changing the rearranging order It may be configured to be displayed side by side in the lower display area Ds 81. Also, the number of changes may be represented by a number, etc., and the color corresponding to the number of changes (for example, blue for the first change, red for the second change, etc.) May be configured to be displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily identify that the rearranging order has been changed by changing the number of times and the color.

  In addition, when the rearrangement order of the holding area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is changed, a dedicated flag indicating that may be set and set to ON. In this case, the flag may be set to OFF based on execution of the process of notifying of the sort order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the player operates the frame button 22 at the effective time to rearrange and display the held symbol display in the order of start of change, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to display the reserved symbol display, and may be configured to always change the change start order every time it is changed.

  Next, the main processing (FIG. 144, S1400) is returned to continue the description. In the twenty-first embodiment, in the main processing (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the pending number display update processing 5 (FIG. 149, S1871) is executed after the processing of S1405 is executed. Be done.

  149, in the twenty-first embodiment, pending number display updating process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. explain. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the pending number display update process 5 (S1871). In the number-of-retentions display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1871), the reordering flag 223k7 is set to off in the change start order for the suspension symbol display corresponding to the reserving area for which the reordering flag 223k7 is set to on. Display the pending symbol display corresponding to the pending area in the order in which the pending was established. In addition, with respect to the holding symbols displayed in the order of start of fluctuation, with respect to the held symbol display in which the start order of fluctuation is changed, the held symbol display is blinked to be displayed to notify that the change start order has been changed. Execute the process

  In the number-of-helds display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840), first, the held symbol display corresponding to the held area in which the follow sort flag 223k7 is set on is displayed in the variation start order, and the sort flag 223k7 is turned off. A display holding display command for causing the display control device 114 to display the holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area set in the display order in the holding establishment order is generated (S1921).

  It is determined whether or not there is a hold area for which the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON in any of the hold areas of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k (S1922). If it is determined that there is a holding area in which the sorting order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1922: Yes), a holding symbol corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting order change flag 223k9 is set to ON Is displayed blinking (S1923). A rearranging order change notification sound command is set (S1924). Here, as the rearranging order change notification sound command, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as ping-pong) indicating that the rearranging has been performed is output. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is off (S1922: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, when the sort order is changed again, the portion is displayed in a blinking manner, so that the player can easily recognize where the change is made. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to whether or not the displayed holding symbol display has been changed again or not.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which the symbol display for which the sorting order change flag 223k7 is set to ON is repeatedly blinked and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The order change flag 223k7 may be set to OFF, and the blinking display may be performed for a predetermined time to end.

  In addition, although it is configured to blink on the re-changed holding symbol display, notification such as blinking display may be performed on the holding symbol display whose rearranging order has been changed. In addition, as a notification mode to notify that the sort order has been changed, it is configured to notify that the sort order has been changed in a notification mode such as displaying a reserved symbol display in a rotating manner etc. May be In addition, the notification mode may be changed based on the number of times the order has been changed. Specifically, if the number of changes is one, the display of the reserved symbol is shaken and displayed, and if the number of changes is two, the display of the reserved symbol is repeatedly displayed by enlargement and reduction, etc.

  Further, the notification sound notified by the rearranging order change notification sound command may be a voice of “the rearranging order has been changed!”. In addition, based on the number of times of change, notification may be provided such as “Reordering order has been changed again!”, “Reordering order has been changed for the 0th time!”, Or the like.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the variation pattern to be selected is determined by the number of reserved items at the start of variation, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 always always based on the game state. Since the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation is determined in advance and updated, it is possible to always notify the correct start order of the display of the display symbol display.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which updates data each time with respect to the pending | holding area in which all pending | holding data are memorized in this embodiment, the pending | holding area (for example, the special symbol Of the number of holding balls, for the first holding area, even if the holding balls are stored up to four, which is the upper limit value, etc., even if it is configured to stop or prohibit updating Good. By configuring in this manner, the control load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, among the reserved symbol displays displayed in the order of variation start, the variation start order is determined with respect to the reserved symbol display (the future, the variation start order is not changed any more). It may be displayed in a display mode informing that it is being done (for example, the display color of the held symbol display is displayed in a specific color, or fluctuation order such as "HOLD" with respect to the held symbol display which has been confirmed Display a letter to indicate that the

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the rearrangement control is performed in the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, but as described in the first embodiment, the main control device 110 executes the rearrangement process. It may be configured to In this case, each data (variation pattern, fluctuation start time, etc.) of the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u may be updated for each timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Then, each time updating is performed, an update command may be generated based on the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u, and the update command may be output to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, a modification of the twenty first embodiment will be described. In the twenty-first embodiment, the dynamic display of each reserve area of the sub sort reserve area 223k is performed each time the reserve sort order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. By updating the mode on the basis of the current number of balls held, it is informed about the case of notifying the player of the correct start order of fluctuation as needed. However, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, various variation patterns of the super reach are selected by the same value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of increase or decrease in the number of holdings. Further, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter CS3 for which each super reach is selected is configured to be constant regardless of the number of holding balls. By configuring in this manner, in the case of out-of-order super reach, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914). Therefore, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, the pending rearrangement order determination process (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored in each pending area of the follow rearrangement pending storage area 223k. If the fluctuation pattern is constituted by a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation pattern is not changed even if the number of balls is increased or decreased, it is set as a reorderable period. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation pattern is changed due to the increase or decrease of the hold is stored, the rearrangement possible period is canceled (or set to the rearrangement prohibition period) to prevent the rearrangement. In addition, the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation pattern is not changed due to the increase or decrease of the hold is composed of the fluctuation pattern stored at the top of the hold, the fluctuation pattern of the win, and the fluctuation pattern which becomes the outreach Ru.

  By configuring in this manner, when it is possible to notify the player of the correct change start order, the player is informed that the sort is possible, and the sort is executed by operating the frame button 22. It is possible to reduce confusion to the player.

  The configurations of the first to twenty-first embodiments may be combined as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the game machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. The second identification information corresponding to the satisfaction / decision condition that is satisfied is determined based on the establishment of the second validity / decision unit, which determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction / decision condition that is satisfied. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode related to time information of the first and second identifications corresponding to the established success or failure determination conditions when the first or second The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the fulfillment order of the qualification conditions combining the first and the second qualification conditions established until the dynamic display of the information is started. Information about The first information for each suspension information is distinguished while the suspension information storage means for storing the suspension information having at least the suspension information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the suspension information storage means Hold display means displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode, and the first or second success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied, the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions combining the success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition When new hold information is stored, it is based on the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the dynamic display mode for each hold information previously stored. Dynamic display start time information determining means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to new hold information becomes dynamic display start, and storing the information in the hold information storage means; That a predetermined condition is established Triggered by the dynamic display start time information determination unit, based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage unit, the dynamic display mode displayed on the hold display unit, the dynamic display A game machine A1 comprising: rearranging means for rearranging in an order to start the game.

  According to the gaming machine A1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is started when dynamic display is started when the first or second qualification condition is satisfied, the first propriety determination condition and the first 2 Hold information having at least the establishment order of the success / failure determination conditions including the success / failure determination conditions and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is stored in the hold information storage unit. Success or failure of the combination of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition for each hold information while distinguishing the hold information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. The establishment order of the determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. When the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information during dynamic display is stored first Based on the dynamic display mode for each hold information, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means And stored in the pending information storage means. Then, when the predetermined condition is established, the hold displayed on the hold display unit is based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage unit by the dynamic display start time determination unit. The display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display. Thereby, for example, the hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display time of the first identification information in the dynamic display is longer than the remaining dynamic display time of the second identification information in the dynamic display, a newly stored second lottery game The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of 1 is more than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It gets faster. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it has condition distributing means for assisting that the first and second judgment conditions are met alternately in the gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is assisted by the distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be performed in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the first or second judgment condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the sorting means holds the hold information The first or second information corresponding to the newly established holding information and the previously stored holding information, based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each holding information previously stored in the storage means. A game machine A3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order of identification information is determined, and the order is related to hold information and stored in the hold information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the dynamic corresponding to each hold information previously stored in the hold information storage means Based on the display start time information, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is each hold It is stored in the hold information storage means by the sorting means in association with the information. Thus, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and the hold information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display mode can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display mode in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player is notified of the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  The game machine according to any one of the game machines A1 to A3 has operation means operable by the player, and the sorting means satisfies the predetermined condition when the operation means is operated. A game machine A4 characterized in that the hold display mode is rearranged.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the player has operation means operable by the player, and the rearrangement means rearranges the hold display mode on condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated. A game machine A4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to rearrange the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to notify the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  In the gaming machine of any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, the sorting means determines that the predetermined condition is established when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established, the hold display A game machine A5 characterized in that the hold display mode displayed on the means is rearranged.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is newly satisfied, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is rearranged by the rearrangement unit on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display mode is rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A5, in the special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are likely to be hit than the normal time The lottery information for drawing whether or not to shift is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second yes / no decision condition, the first or second yes / no decision condition is established, and the decision condition established And storing the lottery information in the suspension information storage unit in association with the suspension information, and storing the reservation information in the suspension information storage unit, the acceptance / rejection determination unit including the suspension information storage unit Until the dynamic display start of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the memory based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means , It is determined by the game state lottery means whether the game state of the dynamic display start time information corresponding to the hold information is the special game state, and a preliminary determination is performed to determine in advance whether the acceptance or rejection is performed, the results are each hold In the case where the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes dynamically displayable while being stored in the hold information storage means in association with the information The decision is made formally based on the gaming state when the variation start becomes possible, and the dynamic display mode determination means corresponds to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means. Until the first or second identification information becomes able to start dynamic display, the success or failure judgment means determines the dynamic display mode based on the judgment result of the prior judgment stored in the hold information storage means, Retention When the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the information storage means can start dynamic display, the dynamic display is performed based on the determination result of the pass / fail determination means executed in that case. A game machine B1 characterized by determining an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in order to make a lottery whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to win than normal. The lottery information of is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes able to start dynamic display, based on the dynamic display start time decided by the dynamic display start time decision means It is judged by the game state lottery means whether the game state at the time of the dynamic display start corresponding to each hold information is the special game state, and the pre-judgment to perform the presumptive judgment in advance is executed by the pass / fail judgment means. Then, the result is stored in the hold storage means by the pass / fail judgment means in association with each hold information. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, the pass / fail judgment based on the gaming state in that case is judged to be a pass / fail. Officially implemented by means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the determination result of the prior determination by the pass / fail decision means stored in the pending information storage means The dynamic display time is determined. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means executed in that case. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. As a result, even if the hold information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the gaming state at the start of the dynamic display is judged based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the propriety determination is performed. . Therefore, the dynamic display time can be determined in advance based on the correct validity determination result, and it is possible to determine the correct dynamic display start order also when a new success or failure determination condition is satisfied next.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for providing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure condition The first or the first upper limit number of times up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, which is assisted by the condition distributing unit assisting the establishment of the judgment condition alternately and the condition distribution unit [2] A game machine C1 having a reserve storage means for storing a right to play a lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine C1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. It is assisted by the condition distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. The right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the hold storage means when the first or second validity determination conditions are satisfied, assisted by the condition distribution means. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored uniformly, and the first lottery game is played. It is possible to prevent any one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored earlier up to the upper limit number. Therefore, to store the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game up to the upper limit number respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right more than the upper limit number is generated in either one and becomes invalid. it can.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C1, when the gaming area and the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enter, the first starting opening, which satisfies the first success or failure judgment condition, and the game flowing down the gaming area The ball has a second start-up opening where the second hit / fail determination condition is satisfied when the ball enters the ball, and the condition distributing means has game balls at the first start-up opening and the second start-up opening. A game machine C2 characterized by having a game ball guiding portion for assisting in entering alternately.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first hit determination condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second hit determination condition is satisfied. Ru. It is assisted by the game ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means that the game balls alternately enter the first starting opening and the second starting opening. As a result, the player can easily cause the game ball to alternately enter the first starting port and the second starting port by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game Can be performed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

  In the gaming machine of gaming machine C2, when the first or second judgment condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the sorting means holds the hold information storage means Of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established holding information and the previously stored holding information, based on the dynamic display start time corresponding to each holding information previously stored in A game machine C3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is stored in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming ball entered from the entrance of the condition distributing means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction to the first starting opening through the first guiding path to the gaming ball by the gaming ball guiding portion After being guided, the game ball entered from the ball entry next is received while being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated at a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming ball is guided by the gaming ball guiding portion to the second starting opening through the second guiding path. Thereby, it becomes possible to distribute and guide game balls alternately to the first starting opening and the second starting opening using a common member, and a member for distributing to the first starting opening and the second starting opening respectively As compared with the case where is provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine of gaming machine C3, the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance while being rotated to the predetermined angle in the first direction. And the ball enters the ball entrance when the game machine ball receives the ball and enters the second direction, and the first passive part rotates to the predetermined angle, and the second direction rotates to the predetermined angle. A second passive unit is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball, receives the gaming ball having entered the ball, and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the gaming ball received by the first passive unit from the ball entry port is received Prevents the game ball from rotating in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entry port after the game machine rotates in the second direction, or the second passive part enters the ball After receiving the game ball entered from the mouth and rotating it in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entry port next time Gaming machine C4, characterized in that a, a rotation restricting portion which prevents the pivoting in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first passive portion of the gaming ball guiding portion is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. When the first passive portion receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the gaming ball guiding part is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding part of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive portion receives the entered game ball, the game ball is rotated in the first direction to a predetermined angle. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may then rotate in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entrance and is rotated in the first direction, it is then rotated in the second direction before the game ball enters the ball inlet. This is prevented by the rotation restricting portion. Thus, after the gaming ball guiding portion is rotated to guide the gaming ball to one of the guiding paths, the next gaming ball is rotated in the other direction before entering the ball, and then the ball is entered next. A game ball can also be prevented from having a problem that it is guided to the same route as the game ball entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game ball entering the ball entrance to the first starting opening and the second starting opening more accurately alternately, and the right to carry out the first lottery game and the second lottery game is equalized. Can be stored.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine C1 has a gaming area and a common starting opening which establishes the first or second pass / fail judgment condition when a game ball flowing down the gaming area enters the ball, The condition distributing means is characterized in that the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are satisfied alternately in a controlled manner every time the game ball enters the common starting opening. Machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, each time the game ball flowing down the game area enters the common starting opening, establishment of the first and second judgment conditions is alternately distributed by the condition distributing means in a controlled manner. Thereby, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately performed with the common starting opening, and the gaming area can be configured compactly.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5 or B1, after the execution of sorting display of the hold display mode on the hold display means by the sorting means, the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established. In this case, with the display order of the displayed pending display modes being rearranged, the pending display mode indicating the newly established first or second success or failure judgment condition is in the order in which the pending display modes are established. A game machine D1 characterized by being displayed on a display means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, after the execution of the rearrangement display of the suspension display mode by the suspension display means by the rearrangement means, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the display order of the suspension display mode displayed in rearrangement is maintained In the hold state, the hold display mode indicating the newly established first or second pass / fail judgment condition is displayed on the hold display means in the order of the hold. As a result, even when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and the corresponding hold display mode is displayed after the execution of the sort display, the display order of the hold display modes displayed in the rear view is maintained. Thus, the player can correctly recognize the order of starting the dynamic display at the time of sorting. Therefore, the player must identify whether the display mode in which the sorting has been performed or the display mode in which the sorting is not performed is performed before or after the timing in which the display mode is displayed is before or after the sorting is performed. Can. Therefore, it can be easily recognized which order the hold display mode indicates.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine D1, the sorting display is performed in a state where the pending display mode in which the sorting display has been performed and the pending display mode in which the sorting display is not performed are mixedly displayed on the pending display means. When a predetermined condition which becomes an execution trigger of the means is newly established, the sorting means sorts all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. A game machine D2 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in a state in which the pending display mode in which the sorting display has been performed and the pending display mode not yet executed are mixedly displayed on the pending display means, a predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the sorting means is newly added. If the condition is satisfied, all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means are rearranged by the sorting means in the order of starting the dynamic display. As a result, even if the pending display modes of the reordering execution and the reordering non-execution are mixedly displayed, the reordering is executed again to arrange the order of starting the accurate dynamic display, It can be identified by the pending display mode after execution of replacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the on-hold information storage means determines the on / off status by the on / off determination means based on the establishment of the first or second on / off determination condition. A normal hold storage area in which normal hold information including at least the decision information for use and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored, and the normal hold storage area Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored normal holding information can be displayed dynamically, based on the normal holding information, the result of the judgment of the appropriateness by the judgment unit and the determination of the dynamic display mode are made in advance Means for determining the dynamic display mode by the means and the dynamic display start time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means, and storing as sorting information Storage area, and when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area. The first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area newly established and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area. A game machine E1 comprising: rearrangement order determination means for determining the order in which the dynamic display is started and storing the order in the rearrangement storage area.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second propriety determination condition, the normal suspension information having at least the propriety determination information used for the propriety determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode is the suspension information storage It is stored in the normal storage area of the means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area can be dynamically displayed, a result of determination of success or failure and a dynamic display mode are made in advance based on the normal hold information. Dynamic display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting storage area of the storage information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, the condition is newly established based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area, and the normal holding is performed. Determining the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the memory area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal memory area is started, The order is stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area by the rearrangement order determining means. This makes it possible to separately process the data for performing the lottery game and the data for determining the rearrangement order, and to facilitate the process of determining the rearrangement order. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the processing for executing the rearrangement and the like, and it is possible to facilitate the development of the gaming machine.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 includes main control means for executing main control of the game and slave control means for executing game control according to a slave control signal output by the master control means, the main control The means has the pending information storage means, the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means, and the sorting order is determined by the sorting order determining means based on the sorting information. Each time it is determined, a winning signal indicating each sorting order stored in the sorting reserve storage area is output to the slave control means, and the slave control means indicates the winning signal based on the winning signal. According to the secondary suspension information storage means having secondary secondary storage area in which each secondary sort order is stored, and the secondary display mode rearrangement based on the primary sequence stored in the secondary secondary storage area. Gaming machine E2, characterized in that it has a, and the rearrangement unit that row.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means which executes the main control of the game. Reordering information is stored in the reordering storage area of the main control means, and stored in the reordering storage area every time the reordering order is determined by the reordering order determining means based on the reordering information. A winning signal indicating each sort order is output by the main control means to the secondary control means. Further, in the secondary control means, the respective rearranging orders indicated by the winning signal are stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area of the secondary hold information storage means. Then, based on the sorting order stored in the secondary sorting reserve storage area, the sorting of the reserve display mode is executed by the sorting means of the secondary control means. As a result, the main control means does not have to perform processing to rearrange the hold display mode even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the control load of the main control means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 includes main control means for executing main control of the game and slave control means for executing game control according to a slave control signal output by the master control means, the main control The means has the pending information storage means, and indicates each of the sorting information stored in the sorting pending storage area every time the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means. A prize signal is output to the slave control means, and the slave control means includes a slave sort information storage means having a slave sort storage area in which each sort of sorting information indicated by the winning signal is stored based on the prize signal. And determining the sorting order based on the dynamic display start time in each sorting information of the secondary sorting reserve storage area, and storing the secondary sorting reserve storage area in the secondary sorting reserve storage area; ,Previous Gaming machine E3 based on the sort order stored in the slave rearrangement reserved memory area, and having a said rearrangement means for performing the rearrangement of the hold display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means which executes the main control of the game. Every time the sorting information is stored in the sorting storage area of the main control means, a winning signal indicating each sorting information stored in the sorting storage area is outputted by the main control means to the secondary control means. Further, in the secondary control means, the respective rearrangement information indicated by the winning signal is stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area of the secondary hold information storage means. Then, the sorting order is determined based on the dynamic display start time in the sorting information stored in the secondary sorting reserve storage area, and the secondary sorting reserve storage area according to the sorting order determination means of the control means It is memorized. Reordering of the hold display mode is executed by the reordering means of the sub control means based on the stored reordering order. As a result, the main control means does not have to determine the rearrangement order, and the secondary control means can determine the rearrangement order based on the winning signal, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced. . Therefore, the reordering of the hold display mode can be executed with the control load of the main control means suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, the on-hold information storage unit determines the on-off state based on the establishment of the first or second on-off determination condition. Stored in a normal hold storage area in which the pass / fail judgment information used for the pass / fail judgment by the means and the dynamic display decision information used in the determination of the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode decision means Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information can be displayed dynamically, based on the respective information in advance, the result of A reordering storage area in which a dynamic display mode and dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored as reordering information; When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the means stores the reordering valid information in the reordering pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the reordering pending storage area A gaming machine F1 for performing sorting of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means based on each sort of sorting information.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition, the normality holding storage area of the holding information storage means is the success / failure determination information used for the success / failure determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode. Is stored in Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information stored in the normal storage area can be displayed dynamically, based on the respective information, a result of determination of success or failure and a dynamic display mode and a motion are made in advance. The target display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting holding storage area of the holding information storage means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the reordering means stores the reordering effective information in the reordering pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the respective reordering pending storage areas Based on the sorting information, sorting of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is performed. Therefore, the hold display mode displayed when the predetermined condition is established can be accurately rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine F1, the sorting means repeatedly updates and displays the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means for each predetermined update opportunity, and holds the hold display means to the hold display means. With regard to the display mode of the display mode, the hold display mode of the rearrangement hold storage area in which the rearrangement effective information is stored is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, while the rearrangement effective information is stored. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the pending display mode of the sorting pending storage area not being displayed is displayed in the order in which the first or second pass / fail determination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is repeatedly updated every predetermined update opportunity and displayed by the sorting means. The pending display mode of the sorting pending display area in which the sorting valid information is stored is sorted by the order in which the dynamic display is started and displayed by the sorting means. On the other hand, the pending display mode in which the sorting effective information is not stored is displayed by the sorting means in the order in which the first or second yes / no decision condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to maintain and display the pending display mode in which the sorting is performed, in the order in which the dynamic display starts accurately. Therefore, it is possible to divide and display the pending display mode which has not been sorted and has not been sorted, and even if a new pending display mode is displayed after the sorting is executed, the dynamic of the pending display mode which has already been sorted The player can easily recognize the order in which the display is started.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the first lottery game and the second lottery are executed after the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game The lottery information for lottery whether or not to make a transition to a special gaming state in which the success or failure judgment with the game is likely to be hit is obtained on the basis of the establishment of the first or second success / failure judgment condition When storing the hold information corresponding to the 1st or 2nd success or failure judgment condition satisfied and the satisfied or not judgment condition satisfied, the game in which the lottery information is stored in the hold information storage means in relation to the held information The dynamic display start time information includes state lottery means, and when the first or second yes / no decision condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means The game when it becomes possible to start the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored suspension information based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the deciding means The game state lottery means determines whether the state is the special game state, performs pre-judgment to make a pass / fail judgment in advance, stores the result in the hold information storage means, and the result of the pass / fail judgment is If it is a touch to shift to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is earlier than the hold information previously stored, the newly stored With respect to the hold information which becomes an order after the order to become the dynamic display start corresponding to the held information, whether the game state when starting the dynamic display is the special game state again, The game state lottery means Each of the determinations is performed to execute in advance a preliminary determination to perform a yes or no decision, and the result is stored in the suspension information storage unit, and the dynamic display mode determination unit is the suspension information storage unit Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the memory can be dynamically displayed, the acceptance determination unit determines whether or not new suspension information is stored in the suspension information storage unit. The dynamic display mode is determined in advance based on the determination result of the prior determination stored in the suspension information storage unit and stored in the suspension information storage unit while the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit is stored. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the information becomes able to start dynamic display, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the propriety determination means executed in that case. To A game machine G1 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in order to make a lottery whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to win than normal. The lottery information of is selected by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition. Further, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied or not judgment condition is stored, the lottery result is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means The game state lottery means determines whether the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information is able to start dynamic display is the special game state, in advance The pre-judging to make a pass / fail decision is executed by the pass / fail decision means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Then, if the result is the transition to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is earlier than the hold information previously stored, then The game state lottery means respectively determines whether or not the game state when starting the dynamic display is the special game state again with respect to the hold information which becomes the order of, and the prior judgment to make a pass / fail judgment in advance is success or failure It is executed by the determination means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Until new display information is stored in the suspension information storage unit, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit becomes capable of dynamic display start, The dynamic display mode is determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result, and is stored in the hold information storage unit. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means executed in that case. The dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. As a result, the hold information is newly stored, and the order of starting the dynamic display is changed, and even if the hold determination result of the hold information stored earlier is changed, the hold determination result is used. It can be re-judged in advance as appropriate. Therefore, the dynamic display mode can be determined again based on the latest result of the success or failure determination, and the order in which the dynamic display starts can be correctly determined. Therefore, the hold display modes can be rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display starts.

  The main control means for performing main control of the game, and the secondary control means for performing control of the game based on the secondary control signal from the main control means, the main control means is the first success or failure determination condition The second lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the second lottery condition based on the establishment of the first lottery game, and the sub-control unit is configured to execute the second lottery procedure based on the establishment of the second lottery condition; First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means of the main control means, in the order in which the first success / failure determination conditions are satisfied; The second display means is dynamically displayed with the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means of the means in the order in which the second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the first identification information The second display of the second identification information on the first display means And a display control unit capable of performing dynamic display control on each of the stages, and the judgment result of the judgment by the judgment unit becomes a hit, and the first or second display unit displays the first display unit by the display control unit. Alternatively, in the gaming machine to which a bonus game advantageous to the player is given when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the main control means is based on the judgment result of the success or failure judgment means. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information at a predetermined dynamic display time, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means In the case where the display mode signal generation means generates the display mode signal based on the mode and outputs it to the secondary control means, and either the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit If, on the other hand, the first or second identification information is being displayed dynamically, an interruption signal instructing interruption of the dynamic display is generated, while based on the completion of the bonus game based on that hit And management signal generation means for generating a restart signal for instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display, and the display control means of the slave control means displays the display based on the reception of the display mode signal. The dynamic display mode indicated by the mode signal is displayed dynamically on the first or second display means, and the slave control means determines the time of the dynamic display based on the reception of the display mode signal. Based on the dynamic display time measuring means for measuring, the slave time managing means for interrupting the measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means based on the reception of the interruption signal, and the reception of the resume signal. Suspended dynamic display The remaining remaining dynamic display time is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measuring means, and the remaining of the first or second identification information interrupted according to the remaining dynamic display time A following redisplay mode determination means for determining a dynamic redisplay mode which is a dynamic display mode to be displayed during the dynamic display time of the game machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the control of the game is executed by the slave control means in accordance with the slave control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, in the secondary control means, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success / failure determination of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success / failure determination conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the judgment result of the judgment by the judgment unit becomes a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit by the display control unit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is awarded. . Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Further, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information in a predetermined dynamic display time. A display mode signal is generated by the display mode signal generating means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, and is output to the slave control means. Then, when one of the first and second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a collision, the other first or second identification information is dynamically displayed, if An interruption signal indicating interruption is generated by the management signal generating means. On the other hand, on the basis of the end of the bonus game based on the winning, a restart signal instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display is generated by the management signal generation means. In the slave control means, on the basis of the reception of the display mode signal, the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal is displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means. Based on the reception of the display mode signal from the main control means, the time of the dynamic display is measured by the dynamic display time measuring means. The measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means is interrupted by the slave time managing means based on the reception of the interruption signal from the main control means. On the other hand, based on the reception of the resumption signal from the main control means, the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended dynamic display mode is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measurement means, and the remaining The dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode to be displayed at the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information which has been interrupted according to the dynamic display time of Be done. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information interrupted during the bonus game is started, the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining time is determined. The lottery result can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner in the dynamic redisplay mode according to the display time. Also, even if the main control means does not select the dynamic re-displaying mode according to the remaining dynamic display time and instructs the slave control means, the slave control means performs the dynamic re-reading according to the remaining dynamic display time. Since the display mode is determined, the control load on the main control means can be reduced. Therefore, even with the gaming machine that simultaneously executes the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is possible to suppress the load increase of the main control means and perform various effects of the game.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine H1, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the driven redisplay mode determination means is configured by the dynamic display time within the reference time. While determining the short dynamic redisplay aspect which is the dynamic redisplay aspect, the dynamic display time being longer than the reference time if it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time A game machine H2 characterized by determining a normal dynamic re-display mode which is the dynamic re-display mode configured by a display time.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined by the secondary control means that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the short dynamic redisplay mode is a dynamic redisplay mode configured with the dynamic display time within the reference time. The display mode is determined by the driven redisplay mode determining means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, the normal dynamic redisplay mode is determined by the driven redisplay determination means. Thus, it is possible to determine the dynamic redisplay mode in accordance with the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even when the remaining dynamic display time is short, by determining the dedicated dynamic re-display mode, it is possible to inform the determination result of the lottery game so that the player can easily understand.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. A dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition A dynamic display mode determination means for determining an aspect, and a reserve storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. And the number of times determination means for determining the number of times of establishment of the first yes or no determination condition and the second yes or no determination condition stored in the pending storage means, the dynamic display mode determination means determining the number of times Means is the first success or failure When it is determined that there is a difference between the number of times of establishment of each of the condition and the second success or failure determination condition that is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic corresponding to the first or second success or failure determination condition of the larger number of times of establishment. The display mode is determined to be a short dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode of dynamic display time shorter than a dynamic display mode corresponding to the smaller one of the first and second success or failure judgment conditions. The game machine I1 which features.

  According to claim I1, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is established. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the right to perform the first or second lottery game is stored by the hold storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number of times. The number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions stored in the pending storage means is judged by the number judgment means. If the number of times determination means determines that the number of times of establishment of each of the first and second determination conditions is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition is the dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display manner corresponding to the first or second success / failure judgment condition having the smaller number of times of establishment Determine the short dynamic display mode that is the mode. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition with the higher number of times of establishment is performed in a short time, so the first success or failure judgment condition and the first (2) Adjustment can be made so that the difference in the number of occurrences with the pass / fail judgment condition becomes smaller. Therefore, the number of times the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied can be easily stored in the hold storage unit equally up to the upper limit number, and an overflow can be suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. A dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition A dynamic display mode determination means for determining an aspect, and a reserve storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. And the number of times determination means for determining the number of times of establishment of the first yes or no determination condition and the second yes or no determination condition stored in the pending storage means, the dynamic display mode determination means determining the number of times Means is the first success or failure If it is determined that there is a difference between the number of times of establishment of each of the condition and the second success or failure determination condition that is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, It is determined that the display mode is a long dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode of a dynamic display time longer than a dynamic display mode corresponding to the larger number of the first or second success / failure determination conditions. Feature game machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is established. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the right to perform the first or second lottery game is stored by the hold storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number of times. The number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions stored in the pending storage means is judged by the number judgment means. If the number of times determination means determines that the number of times of establishment of each of the first and second determination conditions is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition is the dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success / failure judgment condition of the larger number of times of establishment Determine the long dynamic display mode that is the mode. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this manner, the lottery game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition with a smaller number of times of establishment becomes longer, and the number of times of establishment of the success or failure judgment condition stored in the hold storage unit becomes difficult to reduce. It is possible to adjust so that the difference in the number of times of establishment between the first and second judgment conditions stored in the reserve storage means becomes smaller. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly enabled, the number-of-times determination unit is stored in the hold storage unit The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result determined by the number-of-times determination means. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition is newly enabled, the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition stored in the pending storage means The number of occurrences of is determined by the number determining means. And based on the judgment result, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode. Therefore, the dynamic display mode determination means can determine the dynamic display mode based on the information of the latest establishment number stored in the hold storage means in synchronization with the timing of starting the dynamic display.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the determination result of the success or failure determination means is a hit, the dynamic display manner determination means determines the dynamic display manner regardless of the determination result of the number determination means. And the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the number-of-times determination means if the determination result of the success or failure determination means is not determined. .

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects can be achieved. That is, when the determination result of the pass / fail determination unit is a hit, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit regardless of the determination result of the number determination unit. On the other hand, when the determination result of the success or failure determination means is out, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the determination result of the number determination means. Therefore, in the case of winning, a normal dynamic display mode indicating the winning can be determined to allow the player to have a sense of anticipation as to whether or not to be a bonus game, and in the case of falling off, By determining the dynamic display mode for adjusting the number of times of establishment stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to prevent the loss of the effect of the game.

  A game machine I5 according to any one of the game machines I1 to I4, wherein it is determined that there is a difference of 2 times or more.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, it is stored in the holding storage means when it is determined that there is a difference of two or more Since the dynamic display mode for adjusting the number of times of establishment is determined, the short dynamic display mode or the long dynamic display mode is frequently determined, which makes it difficult to understand the presentation of the game. It can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 and I3 to I5, the dynamic display mode determining means determines that the number of times of establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition of the higher number of establishment times stored in the hold storage means is a predetermined number of times. This is the gaming machine I6 characterized in that the short dynamic display mode is determined when it is determined that the number of times determining means has a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 and I3 to I5, the following effects are exerted. That is, there is a difference between the number of times of establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition which is greater in the number of times of establishment stored in the reserve storage means being equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times and the number of times determination means having a predetermined number of times or more If it is determined that the short dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, when the number of establishments equal to or more than the predetermined number is not stored, the short dynamic display mode is not determined even if there is a difference more than the predetermined number of times by the number judgment means An aspect is determined and it can suppress that the presentation of a game becomes monotonous.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the dynamic display mode determining means determines that the number of times of establishment of the first or second judgment conditions stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and A game machine I7 characterized in that the long dynamic display mode is determined when the judgment means judges that there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the following effects are exerted. That is, there is a difference between the number of times of establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition which is larger in the number of times of establishment stored in the reserve storage means being equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times and When it is determined that the long dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, in the case where the number of times of establishment is not stored a predetermined number of times, the long dynamic display mode is not determined even if there is a difference more than the number of times predetermined by the number of times determination means An aspect is determined and it can suppress that the presentation of a game becomes monotonous.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7, the dynamic display mode determining means moves the identification information corresponding to the first and second judgment conditions stored in the holding storage means. Before the dynamic display can be started, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance, and among the dynamic display modes determined in advance, the pass / fail judgment of the one having the higher number of times of establishment stored in the holding storage means Of the plurality of long dynamic display modes, one long dynamic display mode is determined based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the condition.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7, the following effects are exerted. That is, before the identification information corresponding to the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the reserve storage means can start the dynamic display, the dynamic display mode is determined dynamically Each is determined in advance by means. Among the dynamic display modes determined in advance, one of a plurality of long dynamic display modes is selected based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the pass / fail determination condition of the higher number of establishments stored in the reserve storage means. The long dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, by determining the long dynamic display mode based on the previously determined dynamic display mode corresponding to the success / failure determination condition with the smaller number of times of establishment stored in the reserve storage means, the difference between the numbers of establishment times with each other It is possible to determine a more suitable long dynamic display mode by reducing.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7 or I8, the dynamic display mode determining means includes the identification information corresponding to the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means. Before the dynamic display of can be started, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance, and of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, the one with the larger number of times of occurrence stored in the hold storage means. A game machine I9 characterized in that the dynamic display time of the long dynamic display mode is determined based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the pass / fail determination condition.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7 or I8, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode is determined dynamically before the identification information can start the dynamic display corresponding to the first and second judgment conditions stored in the reserve storage means. Each is determined in advance by means. Among the previously determined dynamic display modes, the long dynamic display is performed based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the pass / fail determination condition in the one having the higher number of establishments stored in the reserve storage means. The dynamic display time of the aspect is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, since the long dynamic display mode is determined in accordance with the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode determined to have the larger number of times of establishment, the difference in the number of times of establishment can be adjusted to be smaller.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. A dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition A dynamic display mode determination means for determining an aspect, and a reserve storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. And a continuous establishment monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition is continuously established, and the dynamic display mode determination means The monitoring means is the first If it is determined that one of the determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition is satisfied continuously, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure determination condition that is continuously satisfied, It is determined to be a short dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode of a dynamic display time shorter than a dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second success / failure determination condition I10.

  According to the gaming machine I10, the first display means performs the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination means, in the order in which the first determination condition is established. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the right to perform the first or second lottery game is stored by the hold storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number of times. Then, it is determined by the continuous establishment monitoring means whether or not one of the first and second determination conditions is continuously established. When the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first success or failure determination condition or the second success or failure determination condition is continuously established, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the first or the first established condition. A short dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode corresponding to the second validity determination condition is a dynamic display mode of the dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second success / failure determination condition Decide on. By thus determining the short dynamic display mode, since the lottery game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition of the continuously established one is performed in a short time, with the first success / failure judgment condition stored in the suspension storage means It can adjust so that the difference of the frequency | count of establishment with the 2nd judgment conditions becomes small. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. A dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition A dynamic display mode determination means for determining an aspect, and a reserve storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. And a continuous establishment monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition is continuously established, and the dynamic display mode determination means The monitoring means is the first When it is determined that either the determination condition or the second success or failure determination condition is satisfied continuously, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure determination condition that is not continuously satisfied Is determined to be a long dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode of a dynamic display time longer than a dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success / failure determination condition of the continuously established one. A game machine I11 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I11, the first display means performs the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the right to perform the first or second lottery game is stored by the hold storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number of times. Then, it is determined by the continuous establishment monitoring means whether or not one of the first and second determination conditions is continuously established. When the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition is continuously established, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the first one that is not continuously established. Dynamic display mode of the dynamic display time longer than dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success / failure judgment condition which is established successively, corresponding to the first / second success / failure judgment condition To determine the long dynamic display mode. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this manner, the lottery game corresponding to the condition of success or failure not established continuously becomes longer, and the number of times of establishment of the condition of success or failure stored in the storage means decreases. Since it becomes difficult, it can adjust so that the difference of the frequency | count of formation of the 1st yes-no decision conditions and the 2nd yes-no-does memorize | stored in the pending | holding memory means may become small. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  A game machine I12, comprising condition distribution means for assisting the first and second judgment conditions to be alternately established in any one of the game machines I1 to I11.

  According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11, the following effects are exerted. That is, the condition distribution means assists the first and second determination conditions to be alternately established. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied in the hold storage means by making the first and second judgment conditions substantially equal.

  In the gaming machine I10 or I12, there is provided a number determination means for determining the number of times of establishment of the first yes or no determination condition and the second yes or no determination condition stored in the hold storage means, the dynamic display mode determination means The continuous satisfaction monitoring means does not judge that either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number of times judgment means is the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition And the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success / failure determination condition having the larger number of occurrences, when it is determined that there is a difference between the number of occurrences of each and a predetermined number of occurrences. A game machine I13 characterized in that the dynamic display mode is determined.

  According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I10 or I12, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions stored in the reserve storage means is judged by the number judgment means. The continuous establishment monitoring means does not determine that either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number of times judgment means determines that the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition If it is determined that there is a difference between the number of times of each establishment and the predetermined number of times or more, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second pass / fail judgment condition having the higher number of times of establishment. , Determine the short dynamic display mode. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, even if the condition is not established continuously, if there is a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined number of occurrences, the condition corresponding to the success or failure determination condition having the higher number of occurrences Since the lottery game to be played is performed in a short time, it is possible to adjust so that the difference in the number of times of establishment between the first and second judgment conditions stored in the holding storage means becomes smaller. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  The game machine I11 or I12 includes number determination means for determining the number of times of establishment of the first yes or no determination condition and the second yes or no determination condition stored in the hold storage means, and the dynamic display mode determination means The said continuous establishment monitoring means does not judge that either the 1st yes / no judgment condition or the 2nd yes / no judgment condition is satisfied continuously, and the said frequency judgment means does not judge with the 1st yes / no judgment condition and the 2nd yes / no judgment condition In response to the determination that there is a difference between the number of times of each establishment and the number of times predetermined, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition with the smaller number of times of establishment Game machine I14 which is characterized in that it is determined in the target display mode.

  According to the gaming machine I14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I11 or I12, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions stored in the reserve storage means is judged by the number judgment means. The continuous establishment monitoring means does not determine that either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number of times judgment means determines that the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition If it is determined that there is a difference between the number of times of each establishment and the predetermined number of times or more, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second pass / fail judgment condition having the higher number of times of establishment. , Determine the short dynamic display mode. As described above, by determining the long dynamic display mode, even if not continuously established, if there is a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined number in the number of establishments, it corresponds to the success / failure determination condition of the smaller number Because the number of lottery games to be played becomes long, and the frequency of establishment of the qualification conditions stored in the suspension storage means is hard to decrease, the difference in the number of establishments between the first acceptance criteria and the second Can be adjusted to be smaller. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2 or G1, displayed at the time when the predetermined condition is established A gaming machine characterized by comprising sorting notification means for giving notification of an executed notification mode indicating that sorting has been performed when sorting is executed by the sorting means for the pending display mode. J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2 or G1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, when reordering is performed for the pending display mode displayed at that time, an executed notification mode indicating that the reordering is performed is arranged It is notified by the change notification means. In this manner, the player can identify whether the currently displayed hold display mode indicates the establishment order or indicates the start order of the dynamic display according to the executed notification mode. Since it is possible, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress confusion of the player's game.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine J1, the sorting notification means is characterized by displaying, as the executed notification mode, a display mode capable of identifying that the sorting has been performed on the hold display means. A game machine J2 to be played.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is displayed by the sorting notification means in a display manner capable of identifying that the reordering has been performed on the hold display means as the notification mode of completion. Therefore, by notifying the executed display mode to the same held display mode as the held display mode, the executed notification mode can be displayed closer to the held display mode, and the player misses the executed notification mode. The effect is that it is possible to prevent the

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the sorting notification means indicates that the sorting display mode has been displayed when sorting is performed by the sorting means. The pending display mode displayed after the reordering execution by the sorting means is reported in the unexecuted informing mode which indicates that the reordering is not performed while the informing informing mode is performed. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exerted. That is, as for the pending display mode displayed when the sorting is performed by the sorting means, the executed notification mode indicating that the sorting has been performed is notified by the sorting notifying means. On the other hand, with regard to the pending display mode displayed after the reordering execution by the reordering means, the non-execution notification mode indicating that reordering is not executed is notified by the reordering informing means. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to distinguish between reordering execution and reordering non-execution, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the arrangement order of the hold display mode, and it is possible to prevent confusion for the game. .

  In the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the pending display modes sorted by the sorting means in an order different from the fulfilling order are individually triggered when the predetermined condition is fulfilled. It has reordering identification means to identify, and the reordering informing means is displayed in the reordering order different from the establishment order based on the information identified by the reordering identifying means as the executed notification mode A game machine J4 characterized by notifying in the display mode which shows that it is the said pending display mode.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the predetermined condition is established, the pending display modes rearranged by the rearrangement unit in the order different from the establishment order are individually identified by the rearrangement identification unit. As an executed notification mode, a display mode indicating that the on-hold display mode is displayed in the sorting order different from the establishment order is notified by the sorting notification means based on the information identified by the sorting identification means . As a result, the player can easily recognize the hold display mode in which the change start order is different from the formation order, and can easily recognize the display order of the hold display mode.

  In the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the suspension display means is configured to display the suspension display area for displaying the suspension display mode in the establishment order, separately from the establishment order suspension display area and the establishment order suspension display area. And a start order hold display area for displaying the hold display mode in the order of starting display, and while the hold display mode is displayed in the establishment order hold display area, the predetermined condition is satisfied. In a state where the display of the hold display mode in the establishment order hold display area is maintained triggered by the event, the dynamic display arranged in the start order hold display area by the rearranging unit is started in the order of starting the dynamic display A game display device J5 characterized in that a hold display mode is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display order is displayed by the hold display area in the hold display means in the order in which the hold display mode is realized. In addition to the establishment order suspension display area, the suspension display mode is displayed in the start order suspension display area of the suspension display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. While the hold display mode is displayed in the establishment order hold display area, the display of the hold display mode in the establishment order hold display area is maintained in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the start order hold display area The hold display mode is displayed in the order sorted by the sorting unit. As a result, the player can simultaneously identify the pending display mode before sorting and after sorting, and can easily determine how sorting has been performed.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1 or J1 to J5, the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit Temporarily stopping means for temporarily stopping the first or second identification information during dynamic display based on the event, and the remaining dynamic of the first or second identification information during temporary suspension after the end of the bonus game The dynamic display start time information based on the fact that the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win, and The determination means dynamically takes time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes a dynamic display start, starting from the end of the bonus game Until the display starts And time information of the redetermined each gaming machine is characterized in that stored in the hold information storage means K1.

  According to the gaming machine K1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1 or J1 to J5, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first or second identification information in the dynamic display is temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means. Then, after the end of the bonus game, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being temporarily stopped is dynamically displayed again by the re-dynamic display start means. The first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information display means becomes the dynamic display start based on the display of the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the collision. The time information until the dynamic display is started from the end of the bonus game as a starting point is redetermined respectively by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the hold information storage means. As described above, when the bonus game is started, the time information until the dynamic display starts is re-determined to the time information starting from the end of the bonus game, so that it is determined in advance during the bonus game. Even when the above conditions are satisfied, the hold display modes can be rearranged in the order of accurately starting the dynamic display.

  In the gaming machine K1, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the dynamic display start time information determination means is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means. With respect to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information, the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the hold information stored in the hold information are stored. Based on the dynamic display mode, the time information until the dynamic display starts from the end of the bonus game as a starting point is re-determined respectively, while the first or second identification displayed in the display mode indicating a win With respect to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means corresponding to the information, the dynamic display starting from the end of the bonus game based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored hold information Gaming machine K2 to, wherein the time until the start is to re-determine respectively.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, it is stored in the hold information storage unit corresponding to the first or second identification information temporarily stopped by the temporary stop unit. Dynamically starting from the end of the bonus game based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored hold information with respect to the current hold information The time information until the display start is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. On the other hand, with respect to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information displayed in the display mode indicating a hit, the corresponding dynamic display corresponding to the stored hold information Based on the mode, the time until the dynamic display start starting from the end of the bonus game is redetermined by the dynamic display start time information determination means. Therefore, since the time information until the dynamic display start is determined by distinguishing the hold information corresponding to the temporarily stopped identification information and the hold information not temporarily stopped, dynamic display is more accurate. Time information until the start can be determined.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the on-hold information storage means determines on / off determination information used for the on / off determination by the on / off determination means and the dynamic display mode based on the establishment of the first or second on / off determination condition. A normal hold storage area in which normal hold information having at least dynamic display determination information used for determining a dynamic display mode by means is stored, and a first or corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area Before the second identification information can be displayed dynamically, based on the normal hold information, the result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means and the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means and the start of the dynamic display in advance The time information is determined by the time information determining means and stored as sorting information, while the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit. And a reordering storage area in which the time information stored as the reordering information is updated and stored in the time information redetermined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. And when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, the condition is newly established based on the time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area. Dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area starts A game machine K3 comprising: rearranging order determining means for determining an order to be stored and storing the order in the rearrangement reserve storage area.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second validity determination condition, the validity determination information used for the determination of success or failure by the validity determination means and the dynamic display determination information used for determination of the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means The normal holding information having at least the following information is stored in the normal holding storage area of the holding information storage means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area can be dynamically displayed, it is determined in advance based on the normal hold information that the result of judgment by the pass / fail judgment means is The dynamic display mode by the target display mode determining means and the time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting storage area of the holding information storage means. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the time information stored as the sort information is the time information redetermined by the dynamic display start time information determination means It is updated and stored in the rearrangement pending storage area. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established, it is stored in the newly established normal suspension storage area based on the time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the rearrangement suspension storage area. The order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal holding information and the normal holding information previously stored in the normal holding storage area is started is determined by the rearrangement order determining means. The order is stored in the reordering storage area. This makes it possible to separately process the data for performing the lottery game and the data for determining the sorting order, and the processing for determining the sorting order can be easily performed. Further, even when the bonus game starts, the time information is updated based on the end of the bonus game, so that sorting can be performed easily even during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine K3, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied during the bonus game, the sorting order determining means corresponds to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting storage area. The normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area newly established based on the time information redetermined by the dynamic display start time determination unit and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area The order in which the dynamic display is started is determined, starting from the end of the bonus game of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to each of the normal holding information, and the order is determined. A game machine K4 characterized by being stored in the rearrangement hold storage area.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied during the bonus game, the time re-determined by the dynamic display start time determining means corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting storage area First identification information and second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the newly established normal hold storage area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area based on the information Starting from the end of the bonus game with, the order in which the dynamic display is started is determined by the rearrangement order determination means, and the order is stored in the rearrangement hold storage area.

  Therefore, also for the first or second success or failure judgment conditions established during the bonus game, the order for starting more accurate dynamic display is determined, and the hold display mode is made in the order for starting the accurate dynamic display It can be rearranged. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed even when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is established during the bonus game.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition that Dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the corresponding first identification information, and determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition Mode determination means and, in the case where the first or second success or failure judgment condition is fulfilled, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied or false acceptance condition is started, the success or failure judgment In the judgment of the success or failure by means The main hold information includes the success / failure determination information to be determined and the dynamic display determination information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the order information for which the success / failure determination condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied Main hold information storage means for identifiably storing whether the determined success or failure judgment condition is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition; and that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means And a main hold information signal generating unit for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control unit of information related to the stored main hold information, the slave control unit including the main hold information signal Sub hold information storage means for storing, as sub hold information, information related to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal based on reception of the first hold information stored in the sub hold information storage means The distinction order of the success or failure judgment conditions in which the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are combined for each subordination information while discriminating subordination information of the judgment condition and the second validity or failure judgment condition is identified Dynamic display mode determined by dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means based on the hold display means displayed in the possible hold display mode and the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means The first or second identification during dynamic display on the first or second display means when the follow-up display mode determination means for determining and the new follow-on information are stored in the sub-hold information storage means Based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the information and the dynamic display mode determined by the follow-up display mode determination unit for each of the sub-hold information previously stored in the sub-hold information storage unit, a new sub The first or second corresponding to the pending information The dynamic display start time information determination means which determines the time information until the separate information becomes the dynamic display start and stores it in the sub-hold information storage means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, Based on each of the time information stored in the sub hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display A gaming machine L1 having sorting means.

  According to the gaming machine L1, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal generating means for generating information on the stored main hold information to the slave control means is generated by the main hold information signal generation means Ru. Then, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition are matched for each sub-hold information while distinguishing the subsidy information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the subwaiting information storage means. The establishment order of the success / failure determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. In the secondary control means, based on the secondary suspension information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the driven display mode determination means. When new secondary hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the first secondary hold information are stored in the secondary hold information storage means The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to new sub hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow display mode determination means for each sub hold information The information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the sub hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Sorting is performed by the sorting unit in the order in which the dynamic display starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means determines that the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. A distinction signal is generated to distinguish between the first and second determination conditions and the first and second determination conditions are met, and the first and second determination conditions are established. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction condition is established based on the establishment signal generation unit sequentially output to the sub control unit and the establishment of the first condition determination condition, and the second Condition of the success or failure judgment Based on standing, and dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to enacted spruce determination condition,
When the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes / no determination condition is dynamically started when the first or second yes / no determination condition is satisfied, the determination regarding the yes / no determination by the yes / no determination unit With the main hold information as the main hold information and the dynamic display determination information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the order information for which the main check information corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied is satisfied A main hold information storage means for identifiably storing whether the success or failure judgment condition is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition, and that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means Based on the main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information related to the stored main hold information, the slave control means comprising: With respect to the number of receptions of the establishment signal until the first or second identification information corresponding to the propriety determination condition that triggered generation of the establishment signal becomes possible based on the reception. Information is distinguished between the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition indicated by the success signal, and the order of establishment of the success or failure judgment condition including the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition is The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition on the basis of the number of sub-holding number storage means which are identifiably stored as sub-holding number information, and the number of sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means. Of the substantive display condition which can identify the fulfillment order of the propriety determination condition which is the combination of the first propriety determination condition and the second propriety determination condition for each sub reserved number information while distinguishing the sub reserved number information of Displayed in Display means, sub-hold information storage means for storing, as sub-hold information, information on main-hold information indicated by the main-hold information signal based on the reception of the main-hold information signal; Followed display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means based on the stored secondary hold information, and new secondary hold in the secondary hold information storage means When the information is stored, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the sub-hold information storage means are previously stored. The first or second identification information corresponding to new sub-hold information becomes dynamic display start based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow-up display mode determination means for each sub-hold information Determine time information The dynamic display start time information determining means stored in the secondary suspension information storage means and the secondary display information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determining means triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a sorting means for sorting the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on the stored each time information. Gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The main control means distinguishes between the first and second judgment conditions based on the first and second judgment conditions and holds the first and second judgment conditions. A formation signal for notifying of is generated by the formation signal generating means, and is output to the control means in accordance with the formation order of the first or second yes / no determination condition. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal generating means for generating information on the stored main hold information to the slave control means is generated by the main hold information signal generation means Ru. Then, the slave control means, based on the reception of the establishment signal, during the period until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition that triggered the generation of the establishment signal becomes possible. Information on the number of receptions of the establishment signal distinguishes the establishment condition from the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition, and the condition determination condition combining the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition Are stored in sub-holding number storage means as sub-holding number information so that they can be identified. The sub-control means distinguishes the sub-holding number information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition based on the sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means for each sub-holding number information. The hold display means performs the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions in which the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are combined with each other as the display of the distinguishable held display mode. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information related to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means is determined by the follow-up display mode determining means based on the sub-holding information stored in the sub-holding information storage means. In the secondary control means, when new secondary hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the secondary hold information storage means First or second identification information corresponding to new sub hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow display mode determination means for each sub hold information stored in The time information until it becomes is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Sorting is performed by the sorting unit in the order in which the dynamic display starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine L3 characterized in that the gaming machine L1 or L2 has condition distributing means for assisting that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is assisted by the distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be performed in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, when the primary hold information signal is received and the secondary hold information storage unit is stored with the secondary hold information, the sort unit holds the secondary hold information storage unit. The first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established sub hold information and the previously stored sub hold information, based on the time information corresponding to each sub hold information previously stored. A game machine L4 characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is related to sub hold information and stored in the sub hold information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the primary hold information signal is received and the secondary hold information is stored according to the secondary hold information storage means, based on the time information corresponding to the respective secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means. The dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is associated with each sub hold information. It is stored in the sub hold information storage means by the sorting means. Thus, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the sub-hold information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display mode can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display mode in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player is notified of the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  One of the gaming machines L1 to L4 has operation means operable by the player, and the sorting means is configured as the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated. A gaming machine L5 characterized by rearranging the hold display mode.

  According to the game described in the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to rearrange the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to notify the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  The rearrangement unit rearranges the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the establishment signal or the main hold information signal is received. The gaming machine L6 according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that

  According to the game described in the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the establishment signal or the main hold information signal is received from the main control unit, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is rearranged by the rearrangement unit on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display mode is rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

  The main control means makes a lottery whether or not to shift the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game is performed, to a special gaming state in which the success or failure of the first lottery game and the second lottery game is likely to be hit than usual. Lottery information is obtained based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition, the first or second success or failure judgment condition is fulfilled, and the main hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored. In this case, it has game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the main hold information storage means in association with the main hold information, and the slave control means is stored in the sub hold information storage means Based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the first and second identification information corresponding to the respective sub hold information can correspond to the respective sub hold information until the dynamic display start becomes possible. Said first or first According to the lottery information, it is determined whether the gaming state when the identification information can be dynamically displayed is the special gaming state, and pre-judging is performed in advance to perform a pass / fail determination, and the results are said to be suspended There is a pre-engagement determination means stored in the sub-hold information storage means in association with information, and the follow-up display mode determination means of the sub-control means corresponds to the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means Before the first or second identification information can be dynamically displayed, based on the determination result of the prior determination stored in the sub-holding information storage unit by the pre-engagement determination unit and the dynamic display determination information The gaming machine L7 according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the dynamic display mode is determined.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, in order to draw lottery whether or not to transition to a special gaming state that is more likely to hit the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after executing the bonus game The lottery information of is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the main hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is associated with the main hold information, and the game state lottery means Are stored in the main hold information storage means. In the secondary control means, the dynamic display start time information determination means determines until the first or second identification information corresponding to each secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means can start dynamic display. Based on selected time information, whether or not the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to each sub-hold information can be dynamically displayed is the special game state according to the lottery information by the game state lottery means The pre-judgment means executes the pre-judgment in which the judgment is made and the acceptance judgment is made in advance. Then, the result is stored by the predetermination means according to the sub hold storage means in association with each sub hold information. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means can start dynamic display, the determination of the prior determination stored in the sub-hold information storage means by the pre-engagement determination means Based on the result and the dynamic display determination information, the dynamic display mode is determined by the follow-up display determination unit of the secondary control unit. As a result, even if the new display information is stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the gaming state at the start of the dynamic display is judged based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the judgment of the status is performed. It will be. Therefore, the dynamic display time information can be determined in advance based on the correct validity determination result, and the dynamic display start order can be determined also when a new validity determination condition is satisfied next.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for providing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure condition The first or the first upper limit number of times up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, which is assisted by the condition distributing unit assisting the establishment of the judgment condition alternately and the condition distribution unit 2 Hold storage means for storing the right to play the lottery game, and the condition distribution means is in a state to assist the establishment of either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition next It comprises: establishment condition identification means for identifying, and identification result notification means for notifying the player of information indicating the identification result based on the identification result of the establishment identification means. Game machine M1 characterized by Rukoto.

  According to the gaming machine M1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. It is assisted by the condition distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. The right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the hold storage means when the first or second validity determination conditions are satisfied, assisted by the condition distribution means. Further, it is discriminated by the satisfaction condition discriminating means whether the condition distributing means is in the state of assisting the establishment of the first yes / no decision condition or the second yes / no decision condition next. Information indicating the identification result is notified to the player by the identification result notification unit based on the identification result of the establishment condition identification unit. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored uniformly, and the first lottery game is played. It is possible to prevent any one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored earlier up to the upper limit number. Therefore, to store the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game up to the upper limit number respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right more than the upper limit number is generated in either one and becomes invalid. it can. In addition, since the identification result notification means is informed of which state the acceptance / rejection determination condition is to be assisted so as to be satisfied next, it is assisted to be satisfied next after being notified. Even if the success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the player can play the game so that the success or failure judgment condition is not satisfied, as long as the success or failure judgment condition is an overflow.

  In the gaming machine M1, when the game area and the game ball flowing down the game area enter, the first starting opening that satisfies the first success or failure judgment condition and the game ball flowing down the game area enter. It has a second starting opening where the second success or failure judgment condition is established by the ball, and the condition distributing means alternately inserts game balls into the first starting opening and the second starting opening. The gaming machine M2 according to claim 1, further comprising a gaming ball guiding portion for assisting in balling.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first hit determination condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second hit determination condition is satisfied. Ru. It is assisted by the game ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means that the game balls alternately enter the first starting opening and the second starting opening. As a result, the player can easily cause the game ball to alternately enter the first starting port and the second starting port by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game Can be performed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

  In the gaming machine M2, the condition distributing means is a ball entry port through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a game ball entered into the ball entrance through the game ball guiding portion. The game ball guidance unit includes a first induction passage leading to a first starting opening, and a second induction passage leading to the second starting opening via the gaming ball guiding unit, and the gaming ball guiding unit After receiving the game ball entered from the ball mouth and rotating it to a predetermined angle in the first direction to guide the game ball to the first induction path, the game ball entered next from the ball entry port is then said It is received in a state of being rotated in the first direction, is rotated to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and guides the gaming ball to the second guiding path. The game machine M3 which features.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming ball entered from the entrance of the condition distributing means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction to the first starting opening through the first guiding path to the gaming ball by the gaming ball guiding portion After being guided, the game ball entered from the ball entry next is received while being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated at a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming ball is guided by the gaming ball guiding portion to the second starting opening through the second guiding path. Thereby, it becomes possible to distribute and guide game balls alternately to the first starting opening and the second starting opening using a common member, and a member for distributing to the first starting opening and the second starting opening respectively As compared with the case where is provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine M3, the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance in a state of being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, A first passive portion that receives the game ball having entered the ball and pivots to the second direction to a predetermined angle, and the game ball entered to the ball entrance when pivoted to the second direction to the predetermined angle; The second passive unit is disposed at a facing position, receives the gaming ball entered, and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the first passive unit receives the gaming ball entered from the ball entry port, and After pivoting in two directions, before the game ball enters the ball entry port next time, preventing it from pivoting in the first direction, or the second passive part enters from the ball entry port After receiving the ball game ball and rotating it in the first direction, then before the game ball enters the ball entrance, Gaming machine M4, characterized in that it has a rotation restricting portion which prevents the pivots direction.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first passive portion of the gaming ball guiding portion is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. When the first passive portion receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the gaming ball guiding part is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding part of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive portion receives the entered game ball, the game ball is rotated in the first direction to a predetermined angle. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may then rotate in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entrance and is rotated in the first direction, it is then rotated in the second direction before the game ball enters the ball inlet. This is prevented by the rotation restricting portion. Thus, after the gaming ball guiding portion is rotated to guide the gaming ball to one of the guiding paths, the next gaming ball is rotated in the other direction before entering the ball, and then the ball is entered next. A game ball can also be prevented from having a problem that it is guided to the same route as the game ball entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game ball entering the ball entrance to the first starting opening and the second starting opening more accurately alternately, and the right to carry out the first lottery game and the second lottery game is equalized. Can be stored.

  In any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the condition distributing means next enters the ball based on the fact that the game ball enters the first or second starting opening in the establishment condition identifying means. A game machine M5 characterized by identifying a starting opening to be assisted.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first or second starting opening, the condition distributing means identifies the starting opening that assists to enter the ball next. Therefore, the player can recognize the starting opening to be distributed next, and can play a game by suppressing an invalid ball due to an overflow.

  The establishment condition identifying unit detects a state in which the gaming ball guiding unit is pivoted, and based on the detection result, the gaming ball guiding unit guides the gaming ball by a guiding path to be guided next A game machine M6 characterized by identifying an auxiliary starting port.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball guiding unit guides the game ball next, based on the detection result, by detecting the rotation state of the game ball guiding unit of the condition distributing means, so that the game ball enters the ball The start-up ports assisted by the vehicle are identified by the satisfied condition identifying means. Therefore, the state of the condition distributing means can be accurately identified and notified, and the player can be notified of accurate information to play the game so as to suppress the overflow.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition that Dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the corresponding first identification information, and determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition Mode determination means and, in the case where the first or second success or failure judgment condition is fulfilled, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied or false acceptance condition is started, the success or failure judgment In the judgment of the success or failure by means With the main hold information as the main hold information and the dynamic display determination information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the order information for which the success / failure judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied The main hold information storage means stores the main hold information storage means for identifiably storing whether the success or failure judgment condition is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition, and the main hold information is newly stored in the main hold information storage means. In this case, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and each of the main hold information previously stored in the main hold information storage means Time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to new main hold information starts dynamic display on the basis of the dynamic display determination information of Master display start time to memorize Based on information determining means and that new main holding information is stored in the main holding information storing means, information relating to the stored main holding information and time information corresponding to the main holding information is slave control means A main hold information signal generating unit for generating a main hold information signal to be notified, and the slave control unit relates to information indicated by the main hold information signal based on the reception of the main hold information signal. The sub-hold information of the sub-hold information storing means for storing information as sub-hold information and the sub-hold information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the sub-hold information storage means The hold display means displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode, and the predetermined condition is satisfied, in which case the fulfillment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions obtained by combining the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition is satisfied. The opportunity The hold display mode displayed on the hold display means based on each time information determined by the primary dynamic display start time information determination means indicated by the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means; A gaming machine N1 having sorting means for sorting in the order of starting display.

  According to the gaming machine N1, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, when main hold information is newly stored in the main hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the main hold information storage means first The time information until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new main hold information becomes active based on the dynamic display determination information for each main hold information stored in the It is determined by the display start time information determination means and stored in the sub hold information storage means. The main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information related to the stored main hold information and time information corresponding to the main hold information. Is generated by the main hold information signal generation means. Then, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition are matched for each sub-hold information while distinguishing the subsidy information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the subwaiting information storage means. The order of establishment of the success or failure judgment conditions is performed by the hold display means as a display of the distinguishable hold display mode, and the secondary control means causes the secondary hold information storage means to be triggered when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Based on each time information determined by the primary dynamic display start time information determination means indicated by the stored sub-hold information, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is arranged in the order in which dynamic display is started It is rearranged. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition that Dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the corresponding first identification information, and determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition Mode determination means and, in the case where the first or second success or failure judgment condition is fulfilled, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied or false acceptance condition is started, the success or failure judgment In the judgment of the success or failure by means The main hold information includes the success / failure determination information to be determined and the dynamic display determination information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the order information for which the success / failure determination condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied A main hold information storage means capable of identifiably storing whether the judgment condition is the first judgment condition or the second judgment condition and capable of holding the memory even when the power is off, and the main hold information And a main hold information signal generation means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information related to the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information is stored in the storage means. The slave control information storage unit stores, as slave hold information, information related to the master hold information indicated by the master hold information signal based on the reception of the master hold information signal; The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition are set for each sub-hold information while discriminating the subsidy information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. Dynamic display of the main control means based on the hold display means in which the establishment order of the combined good or bad judgment conditions is displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode, and the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage means A follow-up display mode determination unit that determines the dynamic display mode determined by the mode determination unit, and when the new suspension information is stored in the secondary suspension information storage unit, the first or second display unit The remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the motion determined by the follow-up display mode determination means for each of the sub-hold information previously stored in the sub-hold information storage means New display based on Dynamic display start time information determination means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to sub hold information becomes dynamic display start, and storing it in the sub hold information storage means; The hold display mode displayed on the hold display means based on each of the time information stored in the sub hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means in response to the establishment of the specified condition, A gaming machine N2 comprising: sorting means for sorting in the order of starting the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine N2, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal generating means for generating information on the stored main hold information to the slave control means is generated by the main hold information signal generation means Ru. Then, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition are matched for each sub-hold information while distinguishing the subsidy information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the subwaiting information storage means. The establishment order of the success / failure determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. In the secondary control means, based on the secondary suspension information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the driven display mode determination means. When new secondary hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the first secondary hold information are stored in the secondary hold information storage means The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to new sub hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow display mode determination means for each sub hold information The information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the sub hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Sorting is performed by the sorting unit in the order in which the dynamic display starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means determines that the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. A distinction signal is generated to distinguish between the first and second determination conditions and the first and second determination conditions are met, and the first and second determination conditions are established. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction condition is established based on the establishment signal generation unit sequentially output to the sub control unit and the establishment of the first condition determination condition, and the second Condition of the success or failure judgment Dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition based on the establishment, and the condition is satisfied when the first or second success or failure determination condition is established Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the validity determination condition is dynamically displayed, the validity determination information on the validity determination by the validity determination means and the dynamic determined by the dynamic display mode determination means Whether the dynamic display determination information related to the display mode is the main hold information and the order information in which the validity determination condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied and the validity determination condition that is satisfied is the first success or failure determination condition or not Means for identifiably storing the information as to the stored main holding information based on the fact that the main holding information is stored in the main holding information storage means A main hold information signal generation means for generating a main hold information signal to be notified to the control means, the slave control means being a trigger for generating the formation signal based on the reception of the formation signal Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the yes / no decision condition can be dynamically displayed, information on the number of receptions of the formation signal is indicated by the first Sub-holding number storage means that distinguishes the second validity determination condition and stores the establishment order of the first determination condition and the second determination condition in combination as the sub hold number information in a distinguishable manner And the number of sub-holdings of each of the sub-holdings of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition based on the sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means The first success or failure per information Based on the holding display means displayed in the distinguishable holding display mode and the reception order of the main holding information signal, the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions combining the constant condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is Sub-hold information storage means for storing information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as sub-hold information, and dynamic display of the main control means based on the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means A follow-up display mode determination unit that determines the dynamic display mode determined by the mode determination unit, and when the new suspension information is stored in the secondary suspension information storage unit, the first or second display unit The remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the motion determined by the follow-up display mode determination means for each of the sub-hold information previously stored in the sub-hold information storage means Visual display To determine the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new sub hold information becomes the dynamic display start, and the dynamic display start time stored in the sub hold information storage means Displayed on the hold display means based on each of the time information stored in the sub hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means in response to the information determination means and that a predetermined condition is satisfied A gaming machine N3 having rearranging means for rearranging the held display mode in the order of starting the dynamic display;

  According to the gaming machine N3, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The main control means distinguishes between the first and second judgment conditions based on the first and second judgment conditions and holds the first and second judgment conditions. A formation signal for notifying of is generated by the formation signal generating means, and is output to the control means in accordance with the formation order of the first or second yes / no determination condition. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal generating means for generating information on the stored main hold information to the slave control means is generated by the main hold information signal generation means Ru. Then, the slave control means, based on the reception of the establishment signal, during the period until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition that triggered the generation of the establishment signal becomes possible. Information on the number of receptions of the establishment signal distinguishes the establishment condition from the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition, and the condition determination condition combining the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition Are stored in sub-holding number storage means as sub-holding number information so that they can be identified. The sub-control means distinguishes the sub-holding number information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition based on the sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means for each sub-holding number information. The hold display means performs the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions in which the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are combined with each other as the display of the distinguishable held display mode. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information related to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means is determined by the follow-up display mode determining means based on the sub-holding information stored in the sub-holding information storage means. In the secondary control means, when new secondary hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the secondary hold information storage means First or second identification information corresponding to new sub hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow display mode determination means for each sub hold information stored in The time information until it becomes is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Sorting is performed by the sorting unit in the order in which the dynamic display starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N1, the main storage information storage means is configured to be capable of holding data even when the power is off, and the main control means is a gaming machine when the gaming machine is powered on. Main initial control execution means for executing a main initial control process, which is initial setting, and as one process of the main initial control process, based on the main hold information and time information stored in the main hold information storage means The return data signal generation means for generating return data signals and outputting the same to the sub control means, wherein the sub control means is configured to initialize the game machine when the game machine is powered on. In the slave initial control execution means for executing slave initial control processing, and in the slave initial control processing executed by the slave initial control execution means, the return data signal indicates based on the return data signal from the main control means. Follow up information Gaming machine N4, characterized in that those having the sub suspension information returning unit to be stored in the sub suspension information storage means as the distillate information.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main hold information storage means of the main control means, data is held even when the power is off. In the main control means, when the game machine is powered on, the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, the return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation means based on the main hold information and time information stored in the main hold information storage means, and It is output. In the slave control means, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, slave initial control processing, which is initial setting of the gaming machine, is executed by the slave initial control execution means. In the slave initial control process executed by the slave initial control execution means, the information indicated by the return data signal is based on the return data signal from the main control means as the slave return hold information, and the slave hold information memory means hold information return It is stored by means. As a result, when power is switched back to the gaming machine after a power failure occurs, data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, According to the information storage means, return suspension information is stored. Therefore, the data stored in the secondary hold information storage means can be restored to the state immediately before the power is turned off. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the on-hold display mode displayed immediately before the power-off can be displayed to the player. Since the slave return hold information is stored as information based on the main hold information and the time information, the hold display mode is arranged in the order of the start of change of the hold display mode even when the power is turned off and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It can be changed and displayed.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the main storage information storage means is configured to be capable of holding data even when the power is off, and the main control means is configured to turn on the gaming machine. A main initial control execution means for executing a main initial control process which is an initial setting of the gaming machine, and as one process of the initial control process, stored in the main storage information storage means for the secondary control means And a return data signal generating unit that generates a return data signal based on the main hold information and outputs the generated return data signal to the slave control unit, the slave control unit turning on the game machine. A slave initial control execution means for executing slave initial control processing which is an initial setting of the gaming machine, and slave initial control processing executed by the slave initial control execution means, based on a return data signal from the main control means Return Gaming machine N5, characterized in that those having the sub suspension information returning means for said to be stored in the slave holding information storage means information indicating the data signal as a slave return hold information.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main hold information storage means of the main control means, data is held even when the power is off. In the main control means, when the game machine is powered on, the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, the return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation means based on the main hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, and is output to the sub control means. In the slave control means, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, slave initial control processing, which is initial setting of the gaming machine, is executed by the slave initial control execution means. In the slave initial control process executed by the slave initial control execution means, the information indicated by the return data signal is based on the return data signal from the main control means as the slave return hold information, and the slave hold information memory means hold information return It is stored by means. As a result, when power is switched back to the gaming machine after a power failure occurs, data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, According to the information storage means, return suspension information is stored. Therefore, the data stored in the secondary hold information storage means can be restored to the state before the power-off in the state immediately before the power-off. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the on-hold display mode displayed immediately before the power-off can be displayed to the player.

  In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the secondary storage information storage means is configured to be able to retain stored data even when the power is off, and the secondary storage information return means is from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is collated with the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage means, and if it is determined that they match, the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage means is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the sub-holding information storage means as sub-return holding information.

  According to the game described in the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4 or N5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the slave hold information storage unit of the slave control unit, data is held even when the power is off. In the secondary control means, the secondary holding information return means collates the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means with the information stored in the secondary holding information storage means. As a result, when it is determined that the two match, the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage unit is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub return hold information. Therefore, it is possible to update the data in the hold information storage means more correctly. Therefore, when the power is restored, the correct hold display mode can be displayed to prevent the player from being confused.

  In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the secondary storage information storage means is configured to be able to retain stored data even when the power is off, and the secondary storage information return means is from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is collated with the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, and when they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained; A game machine N7 characterized in that when there is no match, the sub-hold information storage means is initialized and displayed in a hold display mode indicating a temporary hold display mode.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4 or N5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the slave hold information storage unit of the slave control unit, data is held even when the power is off. In the secondary control means, the secondary holding information return means collates the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means with the information stored in the secondary holding information storage means. As a result, when it is determined that the two match, the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage unit is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the sub hold information storage means is initialized, and a hold display mode indicating a temporary hold display mode is displayed. Therefore, by displaying the temporary holding display mode, a clerk or the like of the game shop can recognize that the data stored in the sub-holding information storage means is abnormal. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display of the hold display mode based on erroneous information for the player, and to prevent the player from being confused.

  In any one of the gaming machines N5 to N7, the dynamic display start time information determining means responds to stored slave return hold information based on the slave return hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. A game machine N8 characterized by determining time information to be stored and storing it in the sub-holding information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N5 to N7, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the slave control means, based on the fact that the slave return hold information is stored in the slave hold information storage means, the time information corresponding to the stored slave return hold information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means , Is stored in the sub hold information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to rearrange and display the hold display mode corresponding to the stored slave return hold information in the order of the variable start after returning from the power-off. Therefore, even after the occurrence of the power failure, the player can be prevented from being confused by notifying the player of the order of starting the change.

  In any one of the gaming machines N4 to N8, the sorting means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the slave return hold information is stored in the slave hold information storage means, A game machine N9 characterized by sorting and displaying the hold display mode.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N4 to N8, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the slave return hold information is stored in the slave hold information storage means, the slave control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the hold display mode starts the dynamic display in the order Sorted and displayed by sorting means. Therefore, by recovering from the power-off, the hold display mode can be rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display, so that the order of starting the dynamic display can be recognized immediately after resuming the game, and the game can be understood It can be done easily.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. Determining the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition from the dynamic display mode group group configured in a plurality of dynamic display modes, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination means Dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established pass / fail determination condition from the dynamic display mode group configured in a plurality of dynamic display modes; Notification destination determination means for determining which identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information is to be notified to the player based on the result of the determination of success or failure of the determination means; Determined by the notification destination determination means Gaming machine O1, characterized in that those having a visible informing means for informing to view the different information to the player.

  According to the gaming machine O1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display manner of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display manner group including the plurality of dynamic display manners It is determined by means. Also, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display manner of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is dynamically displayed from the dynamic display manner group constituted by a plurality of dynamic display manners. It is determined by an aspect determining means. The notification destination determination means determines which of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed to notify the player to visually recognize which identification information. The identification information determined by the notification destination determining means is notified by the visual identification notifying means so as to visually recognize the player. As a result, the identification information to be viewed is determined based on the determination result of the pass / fail, so the player can easily identify the identification information to be viewed, and the game can be played easily. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine O1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode on the basis of the result of the determination by the success or failure determining means, and the dynamic display mode group includes the condition determining means. The high expectation degree dynamic display mode which is easier to be determined in the case where the success or failure determination result is a hit than in the case of the out-of-focus condition, and the notification destination determination means determines the dynamic display mode determination means Based on the determination of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode, the high expectation degree dynamic display mode is to determine the first or second identification information of the dynamically displayed one as the notification destination. A game machine O2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the result of the success or failure determination of the success or failure determination means. The dynamic display mode group is configured to include a high expectation degree dynamic display mode which is more easily determined than the case of out-of-focus condition when the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means is a hit. Based on the determination of the high expectation degree dynamic display manner by the dynamic display manner determination means, the first or second identification information of the person whose dynamic display manner of the high expectation degree is dynamically displayed is a notification destination It is determined by the notification destination determination means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the high expectation degree dynamic display manner by notifying the player so as to visually recognize the high expectation degree dynamic display manner.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, it is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means that either the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the high expectation dynamic display mode Means for delaying the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the determined high expectation dynamic display mode is terminated, A gaming machine O3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the dynamic display mode determination means determines that the dynamic display mode is to be displayed dynamically by the high expectation degree dynamic display mode by either the first identification information or the second identification information. The dynamic display delay means delays the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode ends. This makes it possible to prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting when the high expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Thus, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high expectation dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, it is determined that the dynamic display mode determining means dynamically displays the high expectation degree dynamic display mode with either one of the first identification information and the second identification information. And the dynamic display time of the other identification information is extended until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed in the selected high expectation dynamic display mode is finished. Gaming machine O4 characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the dynamic display mode determination means determines that the dynamic display mode is to be displayed dynamically by the high expectation degree dynamic display mode by either the first identification information or the second identification information. The dynamic display extension time of the other identification information is extended by the dynamic display extension means until the dynamic display of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode ends. This makes it possible to prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting when the high expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Thus, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high expectation dynamic display mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, a voice output means for outputting a voice preset according to the dynamic display mode, and identification information notified by the notification destination determination means are the first identification information and Volume changing means for muting the sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information or setting the volume to a smaller volume than that based on that determined based on one of the second identification information and the second identification information; A game machine O5 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the audio output means outputs the audio preset according to the dynamic display mode. The voice corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information is silenced or not based on the fact that the identification information notified by the notification destination determination means is determined to either one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The sound volume changing means sets the sound volume smaller than that of the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being concentrated on the identification information determined by the notification destination determination means and to miss the dynamic display mode that is displayed dynamically.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established satisfaction determination condition is based on the determination result of the determination by the determination section, in the case where the determination result of the determination by the determination section is a win, than in the case of out of Determined from a group of dynamic display modes configured with a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high expectation degree dynamic display mode that is easy to be determined, and cope with the success or failure judgment conditions established based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment means Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information to be displayed from the dynamic display mode group on the basis of the result of the determination of the appropriateness by the appropriateness determination means, and the establishment of the first or second Based on When the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is the high expectation dynamic display mode, it is different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the determined high expectation dynamic display mode. With respect to identification information, the high expectation degree dynamic display aspect also for the different identification information by the duplication judgment means for judging whether or not the high expectation degree dynamic display aspect is determined, and the duplication judgment means Dynamically determining the start of the dynamic display of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode corresponding to one of the first identification information and the second identification information when it is determined that And a display delay means, game machine O6 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine O6, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition, the success or failure determination on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure determination means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition is easier to be determined than the case of out-of-focus condition if the success or failure judgment result by the success or failure judgment means is a hit It is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from the dynamic display mode group configured with a plurality of dynamic display modes including the high expectation degree dynamic display mode. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display manner of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display manner group by the dynamic display manner determination means. If the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition is a high expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high expectation dynamic Whether or not the high expectation degree dynamic display mode is determined for the identification information different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the display mode is determined by the duplication determination means. When it is determined that the high expectation dynamic display mode is determined for the different identification information by the duplication determination means, either the first identification information or the second identification information is corresponded The start of the high expectation dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Thereby, even when the high expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, the start of one high expectation dynamic display mode is delayed, Both can prevent the dynamic display of the high expectation dynamic display mode from being started. Therefore, the player can play the game concentrating on the high expectation degree dynamic display mode dynamically displayed first. As a result, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine O6, the dynamic display delay means is longer in dynamic display than the high expectation dynamic display mode in which the identification information of the one whose start of the dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed. A game machine O7 characterized in that the start of the dynamic display of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode in the identification information of the person who delays the start is delayed.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the high expectation degree in the identification information of the person who delays the start of the dynamic display longer than the end of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode in which the identification information of the one whose start of the dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed The start of the dynamic display of the dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. As a result, after the dynamic display of one high expectation dynamic display mode is ended, the dynamic display of the delayed high expectation dynamic display mode is started, so that the player can It is possible to play the game concentrating on the high expectation degree dynamic display mode. Therefore, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The gaming machine O6 or O7 has visual indication notification means for notifying the player to identify identification information different from the identification information whose start of the dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. A game machine O8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O6 or O7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the visual indication notifying means notifies the player of the identification information different from the identification information whose start of the dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Therefore, the player can easily determine which of the identification information should be displayed dynamically. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied In the case where the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is dynamically displayed, the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is dynamically displayed Hold information storage means for storing hold information having at least the pass / fail judgment information of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means executed when the start becomes possible, and the hold information newly stored in the hold information storage means Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes dynamic display start ready, it is judged in advance whether the hold information is appropriated or not. Prior notification determining means and prior notification determining means for determining whether to notify that the result of the prior determination was a hit based on the determination of the success or failure by the prior determination means, and the notification A gaming machine P1 characterized in that it comprises prefetching notification means for notifying a player of the result of judgment of the prior judgment whether the preliminary notification is determined to be notified.

  According to the gaming machine P1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is started when dynamic display is started when the first or second validity determination condition is established, a second function corresponds to the qualification condition established. The hold information storage means stores the hold information including at least the pass / fail judgment information of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means executed when the first or second identification information can be dynamically displayed. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes able to start dynamic display based on the hold information being newly stored in the hold information storage means The decision on the propriety of the hold information is made in advance by the preliminary decision means. It is determined by the advance notification determination means whether to notify that the result of the prior determination was a hit based on the fact that the success / failure determination result by the advance success / failure determination means is a hit. When the advance notification determination means determines to notify that the result of the prior determination is a win, the player is notified by the advance notification means of the success / failure determination result of the advance success / failure determination means. As a result, since the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment is notified in advance by the identification information, the player can be notified of the result of the success or failure judgment more quickly, and the expectation to the jackpot can be increased. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P1, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established qualification conditions is determined based on the establishment of the first qualification conditions, and on the basis of the establishment of the second propriety determination means, There is provided a dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the met or not judgment condition, and the hold information storage means satisfies the first or second judgment condition. Pending information having at least information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established yes-no decision condition is started Is stored, and when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display of the first or second identification information during dynamic display Remembered time and ahead Time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start based on the dynamic display mode for each hold information The dynamic display start time information determination means to be stored in, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game execution means execute the bonus game, are likely to be hit more than usual. The lottery information for lottery whether or not to shift to the gaming state is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second judgment condition, and the first or second judgment condition is established and established And storing the holding information corresponding to the determined judgment condition, the game state drawing means for storing the drawing information in the holding information storage means in association with the holding information, Start the dynamic display Based on the time information determined by the interval information determination means, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start corresponding to each hold information is the special gaming state according to the lottery information, and the presence or absence is determined in advance A game machine P2 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition. The dynamic display mode determining means determines until the dynamic display is started when the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes / no determination condition is started when the first or second yes / no determination condition is satisfied Hold information having at least information on a dynamic display mode is stored in the hold information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information during dynamic display is stored first Based on the dynamic display mode for each hold information, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means And stored in the pending information storage means. A lottery for lottery whether or not to make a transition to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to be hit than usual. Information is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means, it is determined by lottery information whether the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start corresponding to each hold information is the special gaming state, and the prior pass / fail judgment means In accordance with the above, the pass / fail judgment is performed in advance. As a result, the game state at the start of the change is determined in advance, and based on the result thereof, the determination of whether the game is successful or not is performed in advance, so that it is possible to execute the more accurate judgment of success or failure. Therefore, the player can be notified of accurate information in advance, and confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine P2, after it is determined by the prior notification determination means to notify that the result of the prior determination was a hit, if the result of the success or failure determination performed based on the established success or failure determination condition is In the second embodiment, the dynamic display mode determination means has notified that the notification determination means has been hit as the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition. A game machine P3 characterized in that the first or second identification information corresponding to information determines an extended dynamic display mode longer than the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exerted. That is, if it is determined that the preliminary notification determination means announces that the result of the prior determination is notification, then the dynamic is determined if the result of the determination on the basis of the established determination conditions becomes successful. The display mode determining means is a first or second means for responding to the hold information informing that the notification determining means has been a win as the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition. The extended display mode determining means determines an extended dynamic display mode longer than the identification information starts the dynamic display. Here, after being notified that the result of the prior determination is a hit by the pre-read notification means, the lottery game based on the success or failure determination condition established thereafter is stopped and the identification information is displayed earlier than the notified lottery game. When the gaming state is changed, the result of the prior determination may change. Then, as a result of changing the result of the predetermination, although the hit is notified by the pre-reading notification means, a failure that does not become a hit may occur. However, since the extended dynamic display mode is determined, identification information corresponding to the hold information notified in advance is dynamically displayed first. Therefore, since the dynamic display is started in the same gaming state as the gaming state determined when the pre-judgment is performed, the result of the pre-judgment can be matched with the judgment at the start of the dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating success or failure determination result of the first lottery game by means, and second identification information for indicating success / failure determination result of second lottery game by said success or failure determination means is dynamically A second display means to be displayed, a display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display unit by the display control unit, the player is notified Benefit game to be advantageous The first or second identification information corresponding to the established pass / fail determination condition is dynamically displayed when the first or second pass / fail determination condition is established. Pending information storage means for storing pending information having at least the pass / fail judgment information relating to the pass / fail judgment of the first pass / fail judgment condition or the second pass / fail judgment condition established, and the first pass / fail judgment in the hold information storage means The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed in a mutually related dynamic display mode in response to the storage information of the condition and the second success / failure determination condition being stored respectively. It is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determination means for determining a fusion dynamic display mode for informing the determination result of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Tricks machine Q1.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine Q1, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition, the success or failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure determination means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The first success or failure determination condition or first condition established until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure determination condition is started when the first or second validity or failure determination condition is satisfied. 2 Hold information having at least the pass / fail judgment information related to the pass / fail judgment of the pass / fail judgment is stored in the hold information storage means. Dynamically in which the first identification information and the second identification information are related to each other triggered by the holding information of the first and second judgment conditions being stored in the holding information storage means The dynamic display mode determination means determines a fusion dynamic display mode for notifying the determination result of the first lottery gaming machine and the second lottery game by dynamically displaying in the display mode. In this way, it is possible to easily determine at a time the success or failure judgment results of the first lottery game and the second lottery game by the fusion dynamic display mode. Therefore, confusion of the player in which the determination result can not be identified can be suppressed by the player being dynamically and independently displayed the determination result of the first lottery game and the second lottery game.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the fusion dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed in response to the holding information of the first and second judgment conditions being stored in the holding information storage means. A fusion determination unit configured to determine whether a fusion dynamic condition is established, and the dynamic display mode determination unit determines that the fusion dynamic condition is established by the fusion determination unit; If the dynamic determination mode is determined while the fusion determination means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is not established, the determination is made based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. Dynamic display mode independent of the dynamic display mode of the first identification information to be performed and the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment means To decide Gaming machine Q2, characterized in that the at it.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the fusion dynamic condition for dynamically displaying the fusion dynamic display condition is satisfied when the suspension information storage means respectively stores the suspension information of the first yes / no determination condition and the second yes / no determination condition. The determination is made by the fusion determination means. If it is determined that the fusion dynamic condition is established by the fusion discrimination means, the fusion dynamic display mode is determined by the fusion dynamic display mode determination means. On the other hand, when it is determined by the fusion determination means that the fusion dynamic condition is not established, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. And the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied propriety determination condition based on the establishment of the second propriety determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as an independent dynamic display mode. Ru. Thereby, even when the fusion dynamic display mode can not be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the fusion dynamic display mode is dynamic display It is possible to prevent the trouble that the lottery game is interrupted until it becomes possible. Therefore, the player can appropriately execute the dynamic display in accordance with the state of the game.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or 2, the fusion dynamic display mode is configured by a first fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a second fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. Game machine Q3 characterized in that the dynamic display mode determination means synchronously determines the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode, respectively. .

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the fusion dynamic display mode is configured by the first fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and the second fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. The first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are synchronously determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Thereby, since the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are determined in synchronization, the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are started at the same timing. Easy to configure. Therefore, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed in the mutually associated dynamic display mode, it is possible to suppress deviation from the setting of the mutual dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically display a fusion dynamic display mode that can be easily understood by the player, and it is possible to further suppress confusion of the player.

  In the gaming machine Q3, when it is determined that the fusion dynamic condition is established by the fusion determination unit, the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition stored in the hold information storage unit A synchronization adjustment means is provided for assisting the dynamic display mode determination means to determine at a timing synchronized with the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode based on the corresponding hold information. A game machine Q4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined that the fusion dynamic condition is established by the fusion determination unit, the first based on the suspension information corresponding to the first and second determination criteria stored in the suspension information storage unit. It is assisted by the synchronization adjustment means that the dynamic display mode determination means determines the timing at which the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are synchronized. Thus, the dynamic display mode determination means can more easily determine the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode in synchronization with each other. Therefore, the dynamic display related to the first lottery game and the second lottery game is started at the same time by dynamically displaying the first dynamic display mode and the second dynamic display mode in synchronization with each other. The player can easily recognize that. Therefore, confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating success or failure determination result of the first lottery game by means, and second identification information for indicating success / failure determination result of second lottery game by said success or failure determination means is dynamically A second display means to be displayed, a display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display unit by the display control unit, the player is notified Benefit game to be advantageous The game state after the bonus game provided by the bonus game execution means is the normal game state and the bonus game execution means to be provided, based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. It is determined that the success or failure judgment means is a hit when the special game state determination means determines the transition to the special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the success or failure determination means Lottery monitoring means for determining establishment of the first or second success or failure determination condition determined to be shifted to the normal gaming state by the gaming state determination means, and the first or second condition satisfying the condition by the lottery monitoring means Privilege delay means for delaying the start of the bonus game corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition judged to satisfy the success or failure judgment condition, and Gaming machine R1, wherein those having.

  According to the gaming machine R1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. A special gaming state in which the gaming state after the bonus game provided by the special game executing means is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state based on the establishment of the first or second success determination condition. The game state determination means determines which of the two to shift to. If it is in the special game state, it is determined to be a hit by the pass / fail judgment means, and the establishment of the first or second pass / fail judgment condition determined to shift to the normal game state by the game state decision means is determined by the lottery monitoring means Ru. If it is determined by the lottery monitoring means that the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition determined to satisfy the condition is Delayed by the bonus game delay means. Thus, even when winning in the transition to the normal gaming state, the game is executed in the special gaming state until the bonus game is executed, so the player can play the game in the special gaming state longer. It can be done. Thus, the player can be given more benefits.

  In the gaming machine R1, one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means with the other identification information, the one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed. A bonus game carry over means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the identification information until the other bonus game is over, and a determination result of yes or no of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over after the bonus game is over by the bonus game carry over means. A gaming machine R2 comprising: pass / fail determination maintaining means for maintaining the pass / fail determination result determined in the playing state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the playing state after the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when a bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means with the other identification information during dynamic display of either one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the remaining movement of one of the identification information is performed. The target game is carried over by the bonus game carry over means until the other bonus game ends. Then, whether the first identification information or the second identification information carried over after the end of the bonus game by the bonus game carrying over means is determined by the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start regardless of the gaming state after the bonus game It is maintained by the pass / fail judgment maintaining means according to the pass / fail judgment result.

  As a result, while delaying the start of the bonus game, which is a hit to shift to the normal game state, during the special game state, the determination in the special game state of the lottery game in which the dynamic display is started is maintained. Therefore, even if the bonus game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the player is disadvantaged. Therefore, while the bonus game is being delayed, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new winning.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2 of the gaming machine, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition is at least a normal dynamic display mode and the normal It is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group configured with the extended dynamic display mode having the dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode, and based on the establishment of the second validity determination unit And dynamic display mode determination means for determining dynamic display of second identification information corresponding to the established pass / fail determination condition according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group, and the benefit delay means comprises A game machine R3 characterized by delaying the start of a bonus game by causing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the extended dynamic display mode.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition is at least the dynamic display mode than the normal dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode group from the dynamic display mode group including the long extended dynamic display modes according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Also, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition It is determined by means. Then, the start of the bonus game is delayed by the bonus delay unit by causing the dynamic display mode determination unit to determine the extension dynamic display mode. Therefore, the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed even while the start of the bonus game is delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the delayed time.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. Hold information storage means in which hold information having at least the presence / absence determination information related to the success / failure determination of the first or second success / failure determination condition and the game state information determined by the game state determination means is stored; Based on the fact that the suspension information is newly stored in the storage means, the above-mentioned determination result corresponding to the suspension information and the above-mentioned gaming state determined are determined before the above-mentioned dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The lottery monitoring means is configured to determine, based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the first condition or the first condition that satisfies the condition. It is determined whether or not the second success or failure judgment condition is established, and the benefit delay means holds the hold information corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition determined that the lottery monitoring means satisfies the condition. The dynamic display is performed for the same determination result as the determination which is stored in the hold information storage unit prior to the determined determination result on the basis of being stored in the information storage unit. A game machine R4 characterized in that the dynamic display mode determining means determines the extended dynamic display mode in accordance with the establishment of the start condition.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied, the validity determination of the first or second validity determination condition which is satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is satisfied. The hold information storage means stores hold information including at least the judgment information relating to and the gaming state relating to the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination means. Based on the fact that the pending information is newly stored in the pending information storage means, the gaming state determined as a result to the critical hand corresponding to the pending information is the pass / fail judgment information before the dynamic display start condition is established. It is determined by the prior determination means from the game state information and the game state information. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, it is determined by the lottery monitoring means whether the first or second success or failure determination condition is satisfied. The hold information corresponding to the hold information corresponding to the first or the second pass / fail judgment condition determined that the lottery monitoring means satisfies the condition is stored in the hold information storage means prior to the judged hold condition. With respect to the same propriety determination conditions stored in the storage means, the bonus display means determines the extended dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Thus, even when the hold information to be dynamically displayed earlier is stored when the hold information to be a hit to shift to the normal gaming state is stored in the hold information storage means, it is stored ahead of that Since the extended dynamic display mode is determined as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the held information being held, it is possible to delay the start of the bonus game corresponding to the held information serving as a hit to shift to the normal gaming state. Thus, even when the on-off information storage means stores on-hold information in the on-hold information storage unit, the player is in the on-off special game state for a longer time, when the success or failure determination condition for winning transition to the normal game state is established. I can play a game.

  In the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the benefit delaying means is configured to hold information corresponding to one of the first and second judgment conditions determined to satisfy the condition by the lottery monitoring means. Is stored in the hold information storage unit, and the other determination criterion determined to be determined as the special gaming state is newly established when the determination result is a hit by the prior determination unit. , And the start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information of the other success or failure judgment condition which is a hit to shift to the newly established special game state, a hit to be transferred to the normal game state stored in the hold information storage means A game machine R5 delayed from the start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the state where the hold information corresponding to one of the first and second judgment conditions determined to satisfy the condition by the lottery monitoring means is stored in the hold information storage means, the preliminary judgment means wins the judgment result. In the case where the other success or failure judgment condition determined to determine the special gaming state is newly established, a benefit corresponding to the suspension information of the success or failure judgment condition which is a winning to shift to the newly established special gaming state The start of the game is delayed by the benefit delay means from the start of the benefit game corresponding to the hold information which is a hit to shift to the normal gaming state stored in the hold information storage means. Thus, after the bonus game corresponding to the transition to the normal gaming state is executed, the bonus game corresponding to the transition to the special game state is executed, so even after the two bonus games are executed. In the special game state, the player can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game in a more advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to suppress inhibition of the expectation to the jackpot.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition Success / failure determination means for executing the first lottery game success / failure determination and executing the second lottery game success / failure determination based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, and the first lottery game success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means The first propriety determination signal includes propriety determination signal generation means for generating a second propriety determination signal based on the determination result of the second lottery game by the propriety determination means, based on the result. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of determination of a first lottery game based on the first determination result, and a second display means based on the second determination signal. , Indicates the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game (2) A second display means for dynamically displaying identification information, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second identification information indicating a hit on the first or second display means is a display of a stop If it is determined that a bonus game advantageous to the player is awarded, and the main control unit determines that the hit / fail determination unit determines that the game is a win, the gaming state after the bonus game is first A hit type determining means for determining whether to make the first jackpot to shift to the gaming state or to make the second jackpot to shift to the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state; Or, based on the satisfaction of the second success or failure judgment condition, whether the hit or failure is the first jackpot or the second jackpot for the satisfied success or failure condition is the success or failure Based on the determination result of the prior determination means to be determined before the dynamic display start condition which is the condition for the identification information corresponding to the fixed condition to start the dynamic display, and the determination result of the prior determination means A preliminary determination signal generation unit for generating a preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control unit of the determination information, and outputting the preliminary determination signal to the secondary control unit, the secondary control unit including the preliminary determination signal Sub hold information storage means for storing prior determination information until dynamic display start conditions of acceptance determination conditions corresponding to the prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination signal are satisfied based on reception of And a slave monitoring unit that determines, based on the preliminary determination information stored in the secondary storage information storage unit, whether the preliminary determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be made is stored, and the secondary monitoring unit Whether to notify the player of gaming state transition information regarding the prior determination information determined to be the first jackpot based on the determination that the prior determination information indicating that the first jackpot is to be stored is stored. Notification means for notifying the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information when it is determined to notify the player by the prior notification determination means for determining the game notification and the advance notification determination means And a game machine S1 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine S1, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, if it is determined that the winning judgment means wins, the gaming state after the bonus game is made the first jackpot to shift to the first gaming state, or the player than the first gaming state Whether to make a second jackpot to shift to the second gaming state which is advantageous to is determined by the hit type determination means. Based on the establishment of the first or second validity determination condition, whether the condition is the first jackpot or the second jackpot is satisfied with respect to the satisfied qualification condition. The identification information corresponding to the pass / fail determination condition is determined by the prior determination means before the dynamic display start condition which is the condition for starting the dynamic display is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, a preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control means of the preliminary determination information on the determination result is generated by the preliminary determination signal generation means and output to the secondary control means . Then, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the prior determination signal, the prior determination information is stored in the sub-holding information storage means until the dynamic display start condition of the pass / fail determination condition corresponding to the prior determination information is satisfied. It is memorized. Based on the prior determination information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not prior determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be made is stored. The game state transition information regarding the prior determination information determined to be the first jackpot is determined based on the fact that the secondary monitoring means determines that the prior determination information indicating that the first jackpot is to be stored is the player. It is determined by the prior notification determining means whether or not to notify to. As a result, when it is determined to notify the player, the notification means notifies the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information. As a result, when the gaming state transition notification mode is notified, the player determines that the remaining time of the second gaming state is short if the current gaming state is the second gaming state, and the rest The game can be played using time effectively. Thus, the player can be given more benefits.

  In the gaming machine S1, the predetermination signal generation means of the main control means generates the predetermination signal capable of identifying a propriety determination condition corresponding to the determination result from the determination result of the predetermination means. The gaming state transition notification mode is configured by a notification mode capable of identifying whether the success or failure determination condition corresponding to the prior determination information is the first success or failure determination condition or the second success or failure determination condition. Game machine S2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, with respect to the judgment result of the preliminary judgment means, the preliminary judgment signal generation means generates a preliminary judgment signal capable of identifying the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the judgment result. The game state transition notification mode is configured as a notification mode capable of identifying whether the success or failure determination condition corresponding to the advance determination notification mode is the first success or failure determination condition or the second success or failure determination condition. As a result, the player can play the game in such a manner that priority determination conditions in which the first jackpot is not established by the gaming state transition notification mode are preferentially established. Therefore, it is possible to play a game by more effectively utilizing the second gaming state. Therefore, more benefits can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, when the main control means determines that the first or second success or failure judgment condition to be the first jackpot is established by the prior determination means during the second gaming state A gaming machine S3 having bonus delay means for delaying the start of the bonus game corresponding to the determined first or second judgment condition.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, when it is determined that the first or second success or failure judgment condition for the first jackpot is established by the pre-judgment means during the second gaming state, the first or second success or failure determined When it is determined that the determination condition is established, the start of the determined benefit game is delayed by the benefit delay means. As a result, the second gaming state is given to the player for a longer time, and the player can be given more profits.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the player performs the first operation of the operation means operable by the player and the operation means thereof, whereby the first success or failure judgment condition is established more than the second success or failure judgment condition. Variable means for changing the first advantageous state which is easy and the second advantageous state where the second success or failure judgment condition is more easily established than the first success or failure judgment condition by performing the second operation different from the first operation. A game machine S4 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the following effects are exerted. That is, by the player operating the operation means operable by the player by the first operation, the first advantageous state in which the first acceptance judgment condition is more easily established than the second acceptance judgment condition, and the first operation different from the first operation By performing two operations, the variable means can change the second advantageous state in which the second success or failure judgment condition is more easily established than the first success or failure judgment condition. Thus, based on the delay information notified by the notification means, the operation means is operated to vary the condition into a state in which the success or failure judgment condition different from the success or failure judgment condition in which the bonus game is delayed is easily established. It is possible for the player to play more lottery games during the second gaming state. Therefore, more profits can be given to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the main control means is provided with a bonus game by the other identification information while dynamically displaying one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The second identification information or second information carried over after the end of the bonus game by the bonus game carry over means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information until the other bonus game is over, and the bonus game carry over means. Characterizing the determination result of the identification information, regardless of the gaming state after the bonus game, according to the determination result in the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start is characterized by including: The gaming machine S5 to be.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the following effects can be achieved. That is, in the main control means, when a bonus game is given by the other identification information during dynamic display of either one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the remaining operation of one of the identification information is performed. The target game is carried over by the bonus game carry over means until the other bonus game ends. Then, whether the first identification information or the second identification information carried over after the end of the bonus game by the bonus game carrying over means is determined by the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start regardless of the gaming state after the bonus game It is maintained by the pass / fail judgment maintaining means according to the pass / fail judgment result.

  Thereby, during the second gaming state, while delaying the start of the bonus game to be transitioned to the first gaming state, the lottery game in which the dynamic display is started is determined in the second gaming state. Since this is maintained, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the player is disadvantaged even if the bonus game is started while the dynamic display is being performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new win while the bonus game is being delayed.

  In any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the main control means moves at least the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established yes / no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes / no determination condition. It is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group including the dynamic display mode and the extended dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the normal dynamic display mode, and the second pass / fail judgment Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established pass / fail determination condition based on the establishment of the means from the dynamic display mode group according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition; A prior dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined before the dynamic display start condition is established based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure determination condition Determining means; A preliminary dynamic display mode signal is generated to notify the secondary control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the pre-article dynamic display mode determination means, to the secondary control means And means for generating the preliminary dynamic display mode signal to be output, the secondary monitoring means being a first jackpot in which the extended dynamic display mode is determined based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal It is determined whether or not the prior determination information is stored. A game machine S6 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition based on the establishment of the first qualification condition is at least from the normal dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. The dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group configured with the extended dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display time. Also, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition It is determined by means. In addition, before the dynamic display start condition is established, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition It is determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determining means. The preliminary dynamic display mode signal for notifying the secondary control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means is generated by the preliminary dynamic display mode signal generation means, and is output to the secondary control means Ru. Based on the advance dynamic display mode signal, it is determined by the secondary monitoring means whether or not the advance determination information to be the first jackpot for which the extended dynamic display mode is determined is stored. As a result, the gaming state transition notification mode informs the player that the first jackpot delayed for the start delayed during the second gaming state is satisfied. Therefore, the player can determine that the remainder of the second gaming state is more quickly by notifying the gaming state transition notification mode, and can effectively utilize the remaining second gaming state.

In any one of the gaming machines S3 to S6, the main control means determines whether the first jackpot will be made or the positive variation with respect to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. The main hold information storage means stores the hold information for determining whether the jackpot will be made until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the prior determination means of the main control means The determination is performed based on the stored hold information, and the benefit delay means of the main control means is configured to hold the hold information corresponding to one of the first and second judgment conditions. In a state where it is determined by the pre-article determination means that the first big hit, the hold information corresponding to the other is newly established, and when it is determined that the hold information becomes the second big hit by the prior determination means, The start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information of the other success or failure judgment condition established is delayed from the start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information serving as the first jackpot stored in the hold information storage means A game machine S7 characterized by
According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines S3 to S6, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, on the basis of the satisfaction of the first or second success or failure judgment condition, a hold for determining whether to become the first jackpot or the probability variation jackpot for the satisfied success or failure judgment condition. The information is stored in the main hold information storage means until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Then, based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage unit, the determination is performed by the prior determination unit. In the main control means, the hold information corresponding to one of the first and second judgment conditions is determined to be the first jackpot by the predetermination means, and the hold information corresponding to the other is newly added. When it is determined that the hold information is to be the second jackpot by the predetermination means, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information of the other newly established success or failure judgment condition is the hold information storage means The benefit delay means delays the start of the benefit game corresponding to the stored first jackpot holding information. Thus, after the bonus game corresponding to the transition to the first gaming state is executed, the bonus game corresponding to the transition to the second gaming state is executed, so two bonus games are executed. The player can be made to play in the second gaming state also later. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game in a more advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to suppress inhibition of the expectation to the jackpot.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating success or failure determination result of the first lottery game by means, and second identification information for indicating success / failure determination result of second lottery game by said success or failure determination means is dynamically A second display means to be displayed, a display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display unit by the display control unit, the player is notified Benefit game to be advantageous It has a bonus game execution means to grant, and when the result of the judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means wins, the game state after the bonus game provided by the bonus game execution means is shifted to the normal game state Based on the establishment of the first type determination means, which is a type determination means for determining either a normal jackpot to be played or a special jackpot to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, and the first display unit corresponds to the established success / failure determination condition based on the establishment of the second 2 Dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, which has already been established before the dynamic display start condition is established Pre-determination means for determining whether the normal or special jackpot is to be made with respect to the first or second success or failure judgment condition before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display start condition is satisfied Under one of the first and second judgment conditions before the first judgment and the second judgment condition, it is judged by the prior judgment means that the normal jackpot will occur, and the other special judgment condition is the special judgment condition. When it is determined by the pre-judgment means that the jackpot will be, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition judged to be the normal jackpot is the bonus corresponding to the judgment criteria judged to be the special jackpot A game machine T1 comprising: benefit start adjustment means for adjusting a start time of a bonus game to be earlier than a start of the game.

  According to the gaming machine T1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. If the success or failure judgment result by the success or failure judgment means wins, it is advantageous to the player over the normal jackpot and the normal gaming state in which the gaming state after the bonus game granted by the bonus game executing means is shifted to the normal gaming state One of the special jackpots to be transferred to the special gaming state is determined by the hit type determination means. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in accordance with the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition based on the satisfaction of the first success or failure judgment condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in accordance with the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Before the dynamic display start condition is established, the dynamic display start condition is satisfied whether the jackpot is a large jackpot or a special jackpot with respect to the already established first or second success or failure judgment condition. Before, it is determined by the prior determination means. Under one of the first and second judgment conditions before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, it is judged by the prior judgment means that the jackpot will usually be a large win, and the other judgment conditions are: The start of the bonus game is adjusted by the bonus start adjustment means so that the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot is earlier than the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot when it is determined by the predetermination means that the special jackpot will be made. Ru. Thus, the jackpot is normally started, and after the transition to the normal gaming state, the special jackpot is executed and the transition to the special gaming state is made, so that the player can have a greater expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ambition of the player from playing the game.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine T1, when the special jackpot is reached as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the acceptance determination condition determined by the prior determination means when the bonus start adjusting means becomes the normal jackpot Dynamic display mode determination means for reducing dynamic display mode having dynamic display time shorter than dynamic display mode determined by dynamic display mode determination means as dynamic display mode corresponding to the pass / fail judgment condition determined by the means As a dynamic display mode for the success or failure judgment condition corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition to be determined to be the special jackpot, or a dynamic display condition determination means as a dynamic display manner corresponding to the normal or not And causing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine an extended dynamic display mode that results in a dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode determined by That the gaming machine T2.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode determination means corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the special jackpot as the dynamic display manner corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the big win The dynamic display mode determination means is caused to determine the reduced dynamic display mode which makes the dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display mode by the bonus start adjustment means. Alternatively, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode determining means corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the normal jackpot as the dynamic display manner corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the special jackpot. The dynamic display mode determination means is made to determine the extended dynamic display mode which makes the dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode by the bonus start adjustment means. Thus, by adjusting the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode which is usually a big win or the dynamic display mode which is a special big win, the start of the bonus game of the normal big win is easily performed than the start of the special big win bonus game. It can be adjusted to be ahead. Therefore, many benefits can be given to the player while enjoying the dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine according to the gaming machine T1 or T2, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is satisfied before the condition is satisfied. Holding information storing means for storing holding information having at least the pass / fail judgment information relating to the pass / fail judgment of the first or second pass / fail judgment conditions, and the first corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means Or the prior mode determination means which determines the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of 2nd identification information before the said dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the determination of the prior mode determination means It corresponds to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means based on the result and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being displayed dynamically on the first or second display means. An end time determining unit configured to determine time information related to a time until dynamic display of the first or second identification information ends, and the benefit start adjusting unit includes: (2) With regard to either one of the success or failure judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition judged by the prior judgment means when the normal jackpot is stored is stored in the hold information storage means The other judgment condition newly established is determined to be the special jackpot condition judged to be the special jackpot by the prior judgment unit, the normal jackpot determined to be the normal jackpot determined by the end time judgment unit The dynamic display time is configured such that the dynamic display corresponding to the special jackpot holding information ends after the dynamic display corresponding to the information ends. The dynamic display mode determining means is configured to determine the dynamic display mode as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the suspension information for the special jackpot, and the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition With regard to either one of the success or failure judgment conditions, newly established when the hold information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition judged by the prior judgment means when the special jackpot is stored is stored in the hold information storage means If it is determined by the prior determination means that the other success / failure determination conditions are the success / failure determination conditions for the normal jackpot, the motion corresponding to the special jackpot information for the special jackpot determined by the end time determination means Dynamic display time configured such that dynamic display corresponding to the normal jackpot holding information ends before dynamic display end time A game machine T3, characterized in that the display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the hold information that usually results in a jackpot.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied, the validity determination of the first or second validity determination condition which is satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is satisfied. The hold information having at least the validity determination information relating to is stored in the hold information storage means. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit of the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit is before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. It is determined by the prior mode determination means. The first or second information corresponding to the pending information based on the determination result in the prior aspect determination means and the remaining dynamic display aspect of the first or second identification information during dynamic display on the first or second display means Time information relating to the time until dynamic display of identification information ends is determined by the end time determination means. With regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the judgment conditions determined by the predetermination means that a large jackpot is normally obtained is newly stored, If it is determined by the prior determination means that the other success / failure determination conditions established in the above are the success / failure determination conditions for the special jackpot, the dynamic display of the suspension information for the normal jackpot determined by the end time determination means The dynamic display mode of the hold information in which the adjustment dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time in which the dynamic display of the special jackpot holding information ends after the time to the end is the special jackpot The dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the benefit start adjusting means. On the other hand, with regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the judgment condition determined by the preliminary judgment means when the special jackpot is made is stored. For the other newly established success or failure judgment conditions, when it is judged by the prior judgment means that it is the success or failure judgment condition for becoming a large jackpot, the dynamic of the special jackpot to be special jackpot judged by the end time judgment means The adjustment dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time is such that the dynamic display of the hold information, which is usually a big hit, is finished before the time when the display is finished, the movement of the hold information, which is usually a big hit As a typical display mode, dynamic display mode determination means is determined by the bonus start adjustment means. Thus, if the dynamic display time of the adjustment dynamic display mode is set so as to narrow the difference between the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot and the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot, the player performs the bonus game with good tempo It becomes possible. Thus, the player can play more lottery games.

  Based on the establishment of the success or failure judgment conditions, the success or failure judgment information acquiring means for acquiring the game's success or failure judgment information, the success or failure judgment means for judging the success or failure judgment information acquired by the success or failure judgment information acquiring means And a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the judgment that the player has won, and an operation means operable by the player and a preset valid period. Operation lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the operation means, and notification means for notifying a player of information related to a game when it is determined that the operation lottery means is a hit A lottery probability of setting a lottery probability that the operation lottery means determines to be a lottery probability different between a first effective period within the effective period and a second effective period different from the first effective period. Characterized in that further means are those having a game machine U1.

  According to the gaming machine U1, on the basis of the establishment of the success or failure judgment conditions, the game success or failure judgment information is acquired by the success or failure judgment information acquiring means. The propriety determination information acquired by the propriety determination information acquisition means is determined by the propriety determination means. The bonus game execution means executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination that the hit is determined by the success or failure determination means. A predetermined lottery is executed by the operation lottery means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player within a predetermined effective period. If the operation lottery means determines that the game is a win, information on the game is notified to the player by the notifying means. The lottery probability that the operation lottery means determines to be a hit is set by the lottery probability changing means to a different lottery probability for the first effective period within the effective period and the second effective period different from the first effective period. As a result, when the player operates the operation means within the valid period, the probability of being notified of the information related to the game can be changed depending on whether it is the first valid period or the second valid period. It is possible to improve the desire to operate the operation means of Therefore, since information relating to the game can be notified by the operation of the player himself, it is possible to suppress boredom in the game.

  In the gaming machine U1, the bonus game is composed of a plurality of small bonus games, and the first valid period is a period during which any small bonus game is executed among the plurality of small bonus games. The second effective period is set during the period in which any one of the plurality of small bonus games different from the small bonus game set during the first valid period is executed. A game machine U2 characterized in that it is set.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1, the following effects are exerted. That is, a bonus game is configured by a plurality of small bonus games. A first valid period is set during a period in which any of the small bonus games is executed among the plurality of small bonus games. In addition, a second validity period is set during a period in which a small bonus game different from the small bonus game for which the first valid period is set among the plurality of small bonus games is executed. As a result, the probability of notifying information related to the game can be changed between the first and second effective periods during the bonus game, and the motivation to operate the operation means can be improved even during the bonus game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game even during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, based on the establishment of the qualification conditions, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the established qualification conditions is established, the qualification determination Before the start of the dynamic display start condition based on the hold information storage means for storing hold information having at least the validity determination information acquired by the information acquisition means and the hold information stored in the hold information storage means The information related to the game is determined to be a hit by the prior determination means among the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means. A game machine U3 characterized by being information related to whether or not hold information is stored.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is acquired by the success / failure determination information acquisition means until dynamic display start conditions for starting dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the satisfied success / failure determination conditions are satisfied based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination conditions. The hold information having at least the success / failure determination information is stored by the hold information storage means. Based on the hold information stored in the hold information storage unit, the preliminary determination unit determines the result of the pass / fail judgment before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The information related to the game to be notified to the player is made up of the information related to whether or not the hold information determined to be a hit by the predetermination means among the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is stored. ing. Therefore, the player can know the result of the pass / fail judgment on the hold information stored in the hold information storage means before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied by operating the operation means. Therefore, the player can know the result of the pass / fail judgment earlier by the operation of the player. In addition, even if the hold information to be hit is not notified by the operation of the operation means, it is expected that there is a hold information to be actually hit only by falling out of the lottery by the operation means, You can enjoy the dynamic display. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player gets bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine U2, regarding the winning determined by the success or failure determining means, a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state in which the gaming state after the bonus game is executed is shifted to the normal gaming state There is a hit type determination unit that determines one of the special jackpot to be transferred to the special game state, and the information related to the game is the jackpot that is the trigger for the bonus game being executed. A game machine U4 characterized in that the information relates to whether it is the special jackpot or the special jackpot.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the advantageous effects described in the gaming machine U2, the following advantageous effects can be obtained. In other words, in the special gaming state where the game state after the bonus game is executed is shifted to the normal gaming state with respect to the win determined by the success or failure judging means, the normal jackpot and the gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The special jackpot to be transferred is determined by the hit type determination means. Information related to whether the winning event of the bonus game being executed is a normal jackpot or a special jackpot is notified as information related to the game.

  In this way, the player can quickly recognize the gaming state after the bonus game is executed during the bonus game by operating the operation means. In addition, since the lottery probability based on operating the operation means is also changed during the bonus game, it is possible to give a change due to the difference in the period in which the operation means is operated during the bonus game. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player gets bored with the game during the bonus game.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification A bonus game executing means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, and is established based on the establishment of the first eligibility determination condition The right to execute the first lottery game is held until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition And holding means for holding the right to execute the second lottery game until dynamic display start conditions for starting dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied based on The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first success / failure determination condition is determined based on the number of reservations held by the holding unit, triggered by the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, Second identification information corresponding to the second success or failure judgment condition Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the video display mode based on the number of reservations suspended by the suspension means in response to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition; For each hold held by the holding means, advance dynamic display mode judgment for judging the dynamic display mode based on the number of holds of the holding means when the judgment condition is satisfied Means, and when the first or second success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the success / failure determination combining the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition which are satisfied until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied Hold information storage means for storing hold information having at least an establishment order of conditions and information on a dynamic display mode determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means, and first success / failure stored in the hold information storage means Judgment condition and second success or failure The order of establishment of the pass / fail judgment conditions, which is the combination of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition, is displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode while distinguishing the hold information from the judgment condition. And the preliminary dynamic display mode discrimination means for each piece of suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means each time the determination condition of the preliminary dynamic display mode discrimination means is satisfied. Based on the dynamic display mode and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display, until the first or second identification information becomes the dynamic display start for each piece of suspension information Time information is determined or updated and stored in the hold information storage means by the start time information update means in response to the start time information update means stored in the hold information storage means and that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the said each time information The hold display mode to be displayed on the hold display unit, a game machine and said those having a rearranging means for rearranging the order to start the dynamic display, the V1.

  According to the gaming machine V1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The right to execute the first lottery game until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is established based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition Is put on hold by the holding means. In addition, the second lottery game is executed until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the second qualification condition. The right to do is held by the holding means. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first success / failure determination condition is triggered by the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, and is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the number of reservations held by the suspension unit. It is determined. Further, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second success / failure determination condition is triggered by the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, based on the number of holds held by the holding means. It is determined by the determination means. The dynamic display mode is an advance dynamic display mode discrimination means based on the number of the hold when the discrimination condition is satisfied for each hold held by the holding means every time a predetermined judgment condition is satisfied. It is determined by If the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied, and until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the establishment order of the validity determination condition which is the combination of the first and second determination conditions satisfied. Hold information having at least information on the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means is stored in the hold information storage means. Success or failure of the combination of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition for each hold information while distinguishing the hold information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. The establishment order of the determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. The dynamic display mode determined by the prior dynamic display mode determination unit for each piece of suspension information and the first or second identification information during dynamic display, each time the determination condition of the preliminary dynamic display mode determination unit is satisfied. Based on the remaining dynamic display mode, time information until the first or second identification information becomes dynamic display start is determined or updated by the start time information update means for each hold information, and the hold information storage means It is memorized. Then, when the predetermined condition is met, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is dynamically displayed based on each time information stored in the hold information storage unit by the start time information update unit. Are rearranged by the rearranging means in the order of starting. Thereby, for example, the hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. In addition, since the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information is determined based on the number of holdings of the holding means when the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, it is held while being held. A change occurs in the dynamic display mode determined in advance to be determined by increase or decrease. Therefore, the order in which dynamic display starts is also changed, but each time a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, time information to start dynamic display is also determined or updated, so that more correct dynamic display The player can be informed of the order to start. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine V1, when the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is displayed by being sorted and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, the hold display mode being displayed being sorted As a result of the time information of the corresponding hold information being updated by the start time information updating means, the order monitoring means determines whether or not a change has occurred in the reordered displayed order, and the order monitoring means changes the order Game is characterized by including rearranging and updating means for rearranging and displaying the pending display mode being displayed, in the order of starting a new dynamic display, when it is determined that Machine V2.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is displayed sorted by the order of starting the dynamic display, the time of the hold information corresponding to the hold display mode displayed being rearranged As a result of the information being updated by the start time information updating means, it is judged by the order monitoring means whether or not there is a change in the order displayed. When it is determined by the order monitoring means that a change has occurred in the order, the pending display manners displayed being rearranged are rearranged by the rearrangement update means in the order of starting a new dynamic display. As a result, even if a change occurs in the order in which the dynamic display is started due to increase or decrease of the hold, etc. after the hold display mode is rearranged and displayed after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sort is As it is performed, the player can recognize the correct sort order. Therefore, confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

  In the gaming machine V1 or V2, when the sorting / updating unit rearranges in the order to start a new dynamic display, a change occurs in the change start order of the suspension display mode being displayed being reordered A game machine V3 characterized by having a notification means for notifying the player of.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the sort update unit rearranges in the order of starting a new dynamic display, the player is notified that the change start order of the change of the hold display mode displayed is displayed. It is informed by. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that a change has occurred in the change start order of the hold display mode displayed by the player being rearranged. Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, and V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A game machine Z1 characterized by. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a slot machine Feature game machine Z2. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that it is a combination of Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (1st display means, 2nd display means)
114 Display control device (display control means)
201 MPU (judgment means)
202b Big hit type counter (part of hit type deciding means)
203u Reorder pending storage area (part of pending information storage means)
S103 (Bonus game execution means)
S410 (Dynamic display mode determination means)
S845 (Reward start adjustment means)
S926 (pre-judgment means, part of pre-judgment means)
S1270 (part of end time judgment means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the game balls to a plurality of ball entrance means provided on the game board is ball entrance is a predetermined judgment, the dynamic display of FIG pattern for notifying the determination result It is executed on the display device. In such a configuration, for each of ball entrance means, is the predetermined judgment separately, after the determination result is dynamically displayed is the symbol corresponding to each of the ball entrance means, the determination result is notified . Thus a plurality of FIG patterns have been proposed that are dynamically capable of displaying, respectively.

JP, 2005-319221, A

By the way, in such a gaming machine, further improvement in the interest of the game has been desired.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this object, a first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first-size constant conditions, determine to perform the second determination based on the establishment of the second-size constant conditions a constant unit, a first display means for dynamically displaying a first identification information for indicating a first determination result of the first determination, the second identification information for indicating a second determination result of the second determination a second display means for dynamically displaying, when the first identification information to indicate particular the first determination result to the first display means is displayed stopped, first award game which is advantageous to the player A second benefit which is advantageous to the player when the first identification game executing means for executing the second game and the second identification information for indicating the second determination result specific to the second display means are stopped and displayed A second benefit game execution means for executing a game, and When it is determined that the result is a plurality of game states set after the first bonus game, the game states include at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The first identification information for setting the first gaming state when the second gaming state is set, and the first identification information to be set when the second gaming state is set is stopped and displayed. Period information discriminating means capable of discriminating period information corresponding to the period up to and including an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the period information discriminated by the period information discriminating means; The effect to be executed by the effect execution means includes at least a suggestion aspect that suggests the player the period information determined by the period information determination means, and the suggestion aspect corresponds to the passage of the period. It is variable and is configured in advance in a mode until the end of the period corresponding to the period information, and the gaming machine is used in the second determination by the determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. And acquisition means for acquiring information for the purpose, and storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means at least until establishment of the second determination condition, and the indication mode includes the period A pre-suggestion aspect is included before the end of the period to indicate to the player about information corresponding to the indication aspect performed at the end of the period.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first determination is performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination means performs the second determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, and the first determination A first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result of the second, and a second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result of the second determination And a first benefit game execution for executing a first benefit game which is advantageous to a player when the first identification information for indicating the first determination result specific to the first display means is stopped and displayed A second benefit game for executing a second benefit game which is advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the second determination result specific to the means and the second display means is stopped and displayed An execution means, and it is determined that the specific first determination result is made by the determination means In one of the plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state set after the first bonus game. In a period until the first identification information for which the first gaming state is to be set is stopped and displayed when the gaming state determining means for determining the gaming state and the second gaming state are set. It has period information determination means capable of determining corresponding period information, and effect execution means for executing an effect based on the period information determined by the period information determination means, and is executed by the effect execution means The effect to be made includes at least a suggestion aspect that suggests the player the period information determined by the period information determination means, and the suggestion aspect is variable according to the passage of the period, and the period The game machine is configured in advance in such a manner that the period corresponding to the information is over, and the gaming machine acquires the information to be used in the second determination by the determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. Acquisition means, and storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored at least until the establishment of the second determination condition, and the indication mode indicates that the period has ended. Before, a pre-suggestion mode is included to show the player in advance the information corresponding to the suggestion mode to be executed at the end of the period.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side of the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which saw through the inside from the back side of the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, (b) is a reservation symbol display displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the display mode before rearranging and after rearranging. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, a special symbol holding ball storage area, a special symbol holding ball execution area, a normal symbol holding ball storage area, and a normal symbol holding ball execution area. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the big hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, (C) is a figure which showed typically the jackpot classification table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is a figure which showed typically the random symbol per symbol table in 1st Embodiment typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the rearrangement reserve storage area in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area in 1st Embodiment typically. . (A) is a figure which showed typically the normal time special hitting variation pattern table in a 1st embodiment typically, and (b) showed the normal time special deviation variation pattern table in a 1st embodiment typically FIG. (A) is a figure which showed typically the time reduction and probability change special hitting change pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a model which shows time deviation and probability change special deviation change pattern table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed change display setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the special deviation variation pattern table for adjustment in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st continuous prize determination processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 2 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 5th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the large opening opening and closing process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement order determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the secondary retention rearrangement retention storage area update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. (A) is the see-through view from the front side of the sorting device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is the see-through view from the back side of the sorting device in the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning-route alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 11th Embodiment, (c) is a display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the modification of 11th Embodiment It is the figure which showed the area | region typically. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in 15th execution form. It is the flow chart which showed the 1st cautions notice processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 15th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 16th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the follow sort reserve storage area in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st notification lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st extension change prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd notification lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 17th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 18th embodiment, (b) shows the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of 18th embodiment. It is not shown schematically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the rearrangement reserve storage area in 18th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area in 18th Embodiment typically. . (A) is a figure showing typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of a main control device in an 18th embodiment, (b) is a time shortening and probability change special hits (disengagement in an 18th embodiment) FIG. 6 is a view schematically showing a part of a variation pattern table and a special variation (outlier) variation pattern table in a normal time. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in an 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fusion production lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 18th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory areas of RAM of the main control unit in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of time reduction * probability change special hit variation pattern table of ROM of the main control unit in a 19th embodiment, time reduction * probability change special hit deviation variation table table. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 19th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 19th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the rearrangement reserve storage area in 20th Embodiment, (b) is a part of other memory areas in RAM of MPU of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. Are schematically shown. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a twentieth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st duplication per process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the large opening opening and closing process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot inside production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in twentieth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the follow sort reserve storage area in 21st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of normal time extra deviation variation pattern table in 21st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of time deviation and the special outlier fluctuation | variation pattern table for time variation and probability change in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement order determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the suborientation rearrangement reserving storage area update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the subordination rearranging display alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot or the predetermined reach, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61, 62, a first starting opening 63a, a first 2 The starting opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first start opening 63a, the second start opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by wood screws etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A sorting winning device 630 is provided at the lower center of the game area. FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the front. FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the back.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, in the sorting winning device 630, an ordinary electric wheeled product 64 is provided at the top. In the normal state, the ordinary electric character 64 is disposed with the opposing wings 64a and 64b standing upward at an interval (about 11 mm in diameter of the game ball) in which the game balls can enter approximately one ball. . The route through which the game ball enters the sorting device 630 is only the route passing between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 in the normal state (the blades 64a and 64b standing upward). The player first shoots the game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64.

  When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the passive distribution member 640 is disposed, and the accommodation ball 640a or 640b of the passive distribution member 640 receives the entered game ball. When the game ball is received by the housing section 640a, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 4A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first starting opening. Guide to 63a. Here, the passive distribution members 640 are configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right, respectively, and a magnet 640 c is provided on the boundary wall between the housing portion 640 a and the housing portion 640 b.

  In the base body 900 provided on the back side of the sorting winning device 630, the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 is disposed on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric role piece 64 and the base side magnet 900a is disposed. It is done. As shown in a top view of the sorting winning device 630 shown in FIG. 4C, the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a are configured to have mutually opposing polarities. In detail, the base-side magnet 900a is formed of a rod-like magnet fixed to the base body 900, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at its tip. The base-side magnet 900 a is disposed and fixed so that its tip end faces the passive distribution member 640 side.

  The magnet 640c of the passive distribution unit 640 is also formed of a rod-shaped magnet in the same manner as the base side magnet 900a, and is fixed to the passive distribution member 640 so that the tip end faces the base side magnet 900a. At a position where the passive distribution member 640 rotates and the boundary wall of the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b is directly above (the center line of the interval at which the opposing wings 64a and 64b can enter the ball approximately one ball) The base magnet 900a and the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 come closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the repulsion case, the stop of the boundary wall of the passive distribution member 640 may be at a position where it is just upward It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 640c is at a position (upper position) where the magnet 640c is on the center line between the blade 64a and the blade 64b of the normal motorized product 64, the passive distribution member 640 Due to repulsion, the passive distribution member 640 rotates to either the left or right side, and one of the housing portion 640 a and the housing portion 640 b receives the game ball entering the distribution device 630 (upper side of the gaming machine) Will turn to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the entering game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 640a and the accommodation portion 640b.

  Further, for example, the housing portion 640a receives the gaming ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left by the repulsion of the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900c, so that the gaming ball is guided to the first starting opening 63a. It is possible to prevent the distributing member 640 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 640a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the gaming ball to the first starting opening 63a, the accommodation portion 640b is in the state of facing upward, and then the gaming ball having entered the sorting device 630 is received by the accommodation portion 640b, and the gaming ball is The passive distribution member 640 is rotated about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of to guide the gaming ball to the second starting opening 63b. Thus, the passive distribution member 640 can alternately guide the gaming balls entering the distribution device 630 to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b and make a prize, and to be described later, a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the first drawing It is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from the winning of the second start opening 63b.

  On the central left side of the game board 13, a normal symbol start port 67 is provided. The normal symbol start port 67 is formed of a start port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of the game ball in a gate type. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening 67, a lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball having passed to the normal symbol starting opening 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is performed.

  When the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display portion 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, "o" and "x" After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit display). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display portion 88, the number of times of passage is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 Displayed by.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the second symbol display portion 88 is lighted and displayed as "o", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit. When the symbol which is a hit is displayed, the normal motorized symbol 64 is operated, and the blades 64a and 64b of the normal motorized symbol 64, which are normally maintained in the upright position, are substantially vertically erected. By moving the game ball into a substantially V-shape (reverse C shape) and guiding the game balls to the blades 64a and 64b, it is easy to enter the game balls into the sorting device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is dislocated, "x" which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is out is lit and displayed on the second symbol display section 88.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side top (the upper right of FIG. 2) of the game area A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a illuminates the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variable display has not been executed among the balls winning in the first starting opening 63a, the second starting opening 63b, and the normal symbol starting opening 67. It is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot and the error indication are also indicated by the corresponding lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37 b is configured by two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left side of the seven-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the seven segments blinks) until the fluctuation time (dynamic display time) has elapsed, which is determined based on the winning of the first start opening 63a. After that, it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, the symbol "-" is displayed, which indicates the outset in which one central segment is lighted. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the detachment such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation mode or a dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation patterns can be divided into a relatively long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time, as a reach variation pattern and a non-reach variation pattern. In this way, even if roughly classified according to a certain standard of time (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), the dynamic regarding the time information is also It corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, regarding the time information until the fluctuation start time, the time at which the accurate fluctuation start is also applicable, and the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern time information (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern Information on time information (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed until the start of fluctuation, etc.) determined based on whether or not

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, while performing the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) whether or not the big hit, also the determination of the big hit type Do. As jackpot types determined here, 15R normal jackpots, 15R probability variation jackpots, and 2R probability variation jackpots are prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the jackpot type (in the present embodiment, "9" for 15R normal jackpot, "7" for 15R probability variation jackpot, "3" for 2R probability variation jackpot, for example) Is displayed).

  Here, “15R normal jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8 (b)) for low probability, which will be described later. It is the hit when the game is set. The "15R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot of the maximum round number of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time, which will be described later, is set. It is. The "2R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time, which will be described later, is set. It is.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 79 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b as a trigger, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display 37, the third symbol (first A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for performing variable display of a special symbol and a second special symbol is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, as shown in FIG. 5A, the left side In the display area Dm1, three symbol rows on the left, middle and right are displayed, showing a first special symbol which is one of the third symbols. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ((1) Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It makes a decorative display according to it. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Moreover, also in the 2nd special symbol which is one of the 3rd symbol, it is displayed similarly to the 1st special symbol in the right side display area Dm2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.5 (b) is the figure which illustrated the reordering front and after reordering of the reservation symbol display in an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is respectively constituted by 10 types of special symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777") variation display is performed, and the variation display The jackpot is configured to occur after the session is over.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in the upper display area Dm. And a display area for displaying the holding symbol (the number of holdings of the first lottery game and the second lottery game) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is configured to be displayable by being divided into the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Mainly, in the left side display area Dm1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a is variably displayed. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning of the second starting opening 63b is variably displayed.

  The left display area Dm1 displays three symbol rows L1, L2 and L3 for left, middle and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row L1 to L3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row L1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol, symbol rows R1, R2 and R3 are displayed, and variable display is similarly performed.

  In the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1. If the third symbol is stopped on the effective line by the combination of the big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols), the big hit moving image is displayed as the big hit.

  On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided laterally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further equally divided into eight reserved areas Ds1 to Ds8 of small areas in the left-right direction.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of three main symbols of the special symbol (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display region Dm in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, winnings on the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b are respectively suspended up to four times. When the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds) In the display area of the display area of the display area of the lowest number in the area where the reserved symbol is not displayed ("○" which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game is displayed in the reserved symbol display area of the left number) .

  In addition, if the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the "●" which is the holding symbol for the second lottery game is lowered, as in the case of winning in the first starting opening 63a. Displayed in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the side display area Ds.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. When the game balls enter the distribution winning device 630, the game balls are distributed in order to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution member 640 (see FIG. 4). In the state where the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and when there is no hold in the first lottery game, if the first start port 63a is won, whether or not the second special symbol is in the variable display Regardless of, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after being variably displayed in the left display area Dm1. On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol is variably displayed regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously configured to allow variable display simultaneously in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Therefore, the game machine balls that are alternately won are distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distribution winning device 630, so that the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. it can. Although it will be described later, since the first lottery game and the second lottery game are each executed by the lottery whether or not to execute the big hit game, the case of the big hit game lottery opportunity is executed only in the first lottery game The number of times of drawing can be increased by comparison, and the chance of the player getting a big hit can be increased.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the pachinko machine 10 comprised by two, the 1st lottery game and the 2nd lottery game, was explained, it is not restricted to it, 3 or 4 or more lottery games and the starting corresponding to it Naturally, it is also possible to provide a mouth and simultaneously configure each lottery result to be able to change display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting winning device 630 has a mechanical configuration (the sorting configuration of the gaming balls by the passive sorting member 640), but only one starting opening and every time the gaming balls win, Naturally, it may be configured to be alternately distributed to the start timing of the first lottery game and the start timing of the second lottery game. By configuring in this manner, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for distributing the game balls on the game board surface, and the game area can be effectively used.

  When the game ball wins on the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the first starting opening switch or the second starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, a lottery for a big hit is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls are won.

  If one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the other variable symbol is temporarily displayed in a variable display, the variable display is temporarily interrupted, and the jackpot game ( For example, in the case of 15 rounds usually a big hit, after the 15 rounds of jackpot game is finished, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued for the remaining fluctuation time.

  The remaining variable time variable display is displayed in a change mode dedicated to the remaining variable display so that the player can know that the remaining variable display is the remaining variable display for the suspended variable display. Further, as the variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display, the variation display mode is selected in accordance with the remaining variation time. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or less than the reference time (3 seconds or less in the present embodiment), the character "display the lottery result of the fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped!" 3 After displaying on the symbol display device 81 for the remaining fluctuation time, stop display is performed in a display mode indicating the determination result. Then, when the determination result is stopped and displayed, the characters “The lottery result of the temporary display has been displayed!” Are displayed, and continue to be displayed until the next change is started.

  On the other hand, when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), all the main symbols constituting the special symbol are variably displayed at a constant speed, and the character "temporarily stopped fluctuation" A notification mode indicating that the display is changing! Is displayed. After that, when the remaining fluctuation time has passed, the main symbols are simultaneously stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determination result.

  By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize that it is a continuation of the fluctuation display of the special symbol interrupted halfway, and can recognize that it is a lottery result of the fluctuation display which is interrupted. it can. Therefore, even if the variable display is interrupted on the way, the player can be prevented from playing the game with dissatisfaction, doubts and the like that the lottery has disappeared on the way.

  In addition, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, if the other special symbol is in the state of stopping the variable display, a new variable display Start is prohibited. When the big hit game is over, the variable display is set to be started again based on the winning on the corresponding starting openings 63a and 63b.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the occurrence of the jackpot is overlapped and the player can not concentrate on the jackpot game because the lottery game is executed in the other special symbol even during the jackpot.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been suspended is resumed, the character is informed of that to the character, but the present invention is not particularly limited thereto. Of course, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, as shown in the display mode that shows that the player has resumed (for example, displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display has been resumed by the character etc.), the suspended change Of course, notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to the resumption of display. By doing this, the player can correctly recognize that the suspended variable display has been resumed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display is interrupted. Although it is configured to stop the fluctuation display, but not limited to that, during the jackpot game, measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted, but the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued as it is, and the fluctuation time is measured after the jackpot game May be configured to change the display of the special symbol.

  By configuring in this way, since the special symbol is continuously changed and displayed during the jackpot game, the player can confirm that the other change display is continued without disappearing, You can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is in the variable display mode, the variable display is interrupted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display may be continued without interruption, and the lottery game may be executed as usual.

  By configuring in this way, even during the jackpot game, it is possible to further perform the lottery game, and it is possible to play more lottery games in a short time, and the player performs many lottery games. It will be possible to do. In such a configuration, when one of the special symbols during the big hit game is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, the execution of the big hit game is delayed until one big hit game is ended (stock ), The player can play the jackpot game continuously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display mode in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been interrupted is displayed in the fluctuation mode exclusively for remaining fluctuation display. Not only that, the remaining variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display. Specifically, when the remaining variable display is performed on the 7-segment display 37b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed while being blinked. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed by being lit with the remaining color (for example, blue etc.) dedicated to the remaining variable display, thereby displaying the variable. By doing this, the remaining variation display is displayed on the player not only for the third symbol display device 81 but also for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Can be notified.

  Further, as in the case of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display mode may naturally be changed according to the remaining variation time.

  In addition, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked in a predetermined display mode “for example, alphabet h” in a predetermined cycle. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to inform the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

  A horizontally long rectangular shaped variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery regarding the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes the big win, the first stop pattern of the big hit is made after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. While turning on the symbol display device 37, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed in the corresponding display area (the left display region Dm1 or the right display region Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81, and occurrence of a big hit is shown . Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The open / close operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined by the determined type of jackpot, and for example, in the case of 15R normal jackpot, it is possible to repeat at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of the bonus game state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the game value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating a hit based on winning in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, The open / close operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the embodiment, until 30 seconds pass or 10 balls are won). Be done.

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing drive forward on the lower side of the opening / closing plate. . The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 is guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 2nd symbol display part 88, etc. Used in

  In the setting of the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol random number counter C1 used for lottery of the jackpot and a special hit type counter C2 used for selection of the jackpot symbol A variation pattern determination counter C3, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern are used. Further, the random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol display portion 88), and the initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main processing (S1000) (see FIG. 17). It is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, each counter value is stored in the RAM 203 for the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 where the counter value is stored for winning for the first starting opening 63a and the winning for the second starting opening 63b. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are each provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when the game ball wins during the period when it is possible to draw the special symbol, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the big hit of the special symbol is not being played, each counter value Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1, and when the gaming ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2. On the other hand, during a period in which the lottery of special symbols such as during the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, or during the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not possible, the game ball can be used as the first starting opening 63a or In the case where the second starting opening 63b is won, if the number of holdings for the starting opening that has won is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and the starting opening is won Are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning starting opening is the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired but the winning balls (in the present embodiment, 5 game balls) Only) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, although the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for each of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is not limited thereto, but may be four each, or the upper limit value You may choose not to

  Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The special random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399) It has a back configuration. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special random number counter C1 is a loop counter which can take values of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning combination) At timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 corresponding to the winning starting opening of the RAM 203. The value of the jackpot random number is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the special punch random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined that the jackpot is matched if the value of the random number that will be the jackpot (in the present embodiment, “7” at low probability, “0 to 9 at high probability”).

  The special per random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (per wins) that will be the big win is 1 at low probability, its value “7” is 10 at high probability, its value “0 to 9” is big hit It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  The special hit type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment) After reaching, it is configured to return to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, regularly (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball wins in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning combination) At the timing, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning starting opening is stored.

  Here, if the value of the special per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is not a large random number, that is, it is a random number falling out For example, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if it is a random number in which the value of the special random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation display effect The type is that of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern at the big hit and the stop type are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203c.

  The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 stores various tables. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the first jackpot random number counter table 202a, and FIG. 8C an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202 b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds Special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 8 (b)) for low probability time after the big hit game is set "15R normal big hit", maximum The number of rounds is 15 rounds and special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time is set after the big hit game "15R probability variation big hit", maximum round number is high probability after big hit game in 2 rounds There is a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B) for the time is set.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the special hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8C, the value "60 to 99" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, and the value "0 to 49" of the special hit type counter C2 for the 15R probability variation jackpot Are associated, and the value “50 to 59” of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 in which the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "20", 15R probability variation jackpot is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "80", 15R normal big hit as the big hit type) It is determined.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of about 40% when it is a jackpot, and 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 50%, and 2R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 10%. A jackpot type table 202b is defined to be selected.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 100, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100).

  The values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the ball is the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening. The first special symbol or the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner at the timing of winning (start winning) at 63b, and is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b When various counter values of the holding balls are not stored, they are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal-time special hit variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the special hit variation pattern table 202d for normal use is a case where the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state) The 15R jackpot only and the 2R probability variation jackpot referred to when the 15R jackpot is determined if the 15R jackpot is determined if the 15R jackpot is determined if the 2R probability jackpot is determined. Is divided into groups based on the 2R probability variation jackpot referred to in the case where is determined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the special random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (per win value), it is stored in the execution area according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area The fluctuation pattern group is selected from the fluctuation pattern group corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 stored in the execution area.

  There are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of premier reach in the 15R jackpot, and the correspondence with the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for normal reach, 11 to 95 for various super reach, and 96 for various Premier reach. It is about 100. The Norlech variety is a reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a stop at the bitter end). A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, a reach extending from long reach or normal reach), and various Premier Reach variations are longer than super reach The first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after the time reach (for example, the reach that develops further after the super reach or the special reach where the destination from the normal reach differs from the super reach, etc.) Is a variation pattern not selected.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there are many things that effect contents differ also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, the reach which changes the back image rapidly and is displayed, and a certain character There is a reach to be displayed suddenly, etc. In addition, there are multiple reach with different effect contents such as one to which a notice effect before the start of variable display is added, and one to which an effect to be a big hit by re-change display is added.

  In the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3. The 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is, for example, a special variation pattern in which the special symbol is stopped at "341" to notify that the 2R probability variation has been won.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal out-of-time extraneous change pattern table 202 e stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e in the normal game state is a normal reach which is relatively out of various types of normal outliers that become completely out as a stop type at the time of outliers, and a normal reach is relatively short. It consists of various types of normal reach (short) that are out of the normal reach, various types of normal reach that are relatively out of normal reach with a relatively long fluctuation time, and various types of super reach that are out of super reach.

  When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 29”, the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and each fluctuation pattern group is normally out of various types, and in the case of “30 to 60”, normal reach (short The various types of super reach are determined in the case of various types of "61 to 89", in the case of various types of normal reach (long) and of "90 to 100".

  For various types of out-of-normal-time, normal out-of-range A and normal out-of-range B are set in which the variable display ends in a short time and reach is not established. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 100", the fluctuation pattern of the normal deviation B is selected when the normal deviation A is "101 to 198". In addition, a variation pattern of normal reach shorts A to C is set in various out-of-order normal reach (short) types in which the reach is established but the variation time is short. If the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 70", if the normal reach short A is "71 to 128", the normal reach short B is "129 to 198". The variation patterns of the normal reach short C are respectively selected. Similarly, fluctuation patterns are selected for various normal reach lengths and various super reach types.

  FIG. 11A is a view schematically showing the time variation / precise variation special hit variation pattern table 202 d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 11B is a view schematically showing the time-shortening / probability-variation special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202 e stored in the ROM 202. When the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a in the big hit random number table 202a and the special hit variation pattern table 202d for short time and probability change special hit change pattern table 202d It is a table for a variation pattern selection which is selected when the state is set to the probability variation gaming state) and the time reduction counter 203k is set to a value of "0" or more (hereinafter, the gaming state is set to the time reduction gaming state). .

  The selection of the variation pattern is similar to that of the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d and the normal extra deviation variation pattern table 202e, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, about special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e, although only one type was explained here, special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and special for the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively Outset fluctuation pattern table 202e is set, and the distribution of fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol Thus, even if the value of the same variation pattern determination counter C3 is acquired, the same variation pattern is not selected. By configuring in this manner, different variation patterns can be easily selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and various effects can be made.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The ordinary random number counter C4 (see FIG. 8D) is configured as a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). At the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67, it is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol random number table 202c (FIG. 8 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is When it matches the value of the random number which becomes a hit set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit.

  Also, when the per-round random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-round normal random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate) . The number of random numbers to be won is 24, in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5 to 28”. Also, in the high probability gaming state, it is 200, and its range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state, it is determined to be won when the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", and in the high probability gaming state, the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 Is determined to be won when the symbol is in the range of "5-204", and the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88 as a stop symbol (second symbol) and the symbol of the ordinary electric role item 64 is displayed. In the normal gaming state, the blades 64a and 64b are opened twice for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment) and in the high probability gaming state for a predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment). The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

  When the gaming ball passes the normal symbol starting port 67, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in progress, and when each counter value based on the holding ball is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Also, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner or when the random number value corresponding to the holding ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit (4 pieces in this embodiment) Is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the number of times of holding (normal symbol hold 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, and the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or the previous hold is made by digesting the hold. When data is shifted to the area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored reserved area is set to on. Whether or not the data is stored in the reserve area, or whether the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is determined depending on which reserve area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that a common various counter value might be selected about the lottery of a 1st lottery game and a 2nd lottery game, but a 1st lottery game (1st special symbol) and a 2nd lottery With the game (the second special symbol), it sets various counters for exclusive use, respectively and updates with different value by making the update opportunity and the initial value etc of the various counters of the 1st lottery game and the 2nd lottery game different. Naturally, it may be configured by the counter value to be calculated.

  In this way, by configuring, even when the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to acquire counter values of different values, It is possible to suppress a failure that the fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the judgment result of success or failure are synchronized.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to suppress the problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized, and various effects. It can be performed. Further, storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM with a small storage area or the like) can be made.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  RAM 203 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the first special symbol holding ball number Counter 203e, second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, time reduction counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, First big hit flag 203o, second big hit flag 203p, first fluctuation stop flag 203q, second fluctuation stop flag 203r, first fluctuation time storage area 203s, second fluctuation time storage area 203t, reordering storage area 203u, others It has at least memory area 203v .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on winning in the first starting opening 63a up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values obtained based on the game ball winning in the second starting opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). Storage area for

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and the first special symbol is the first special symbol when the variable display is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the storage area is a storage area where the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d are for counters as the start winning combination is detected. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the change pattern determination counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 7) are respectively stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting opening 63a in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and The special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter 203a3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4 of the holding ball storage area 203a are respectively stored. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer and each corresponding, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. They are similarly stored in the area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the above-described first to execute processing such as a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it corresponds to one start winning combination The data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 f are detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of holding balls (number of waits) of the fluctuation display effect (the fluctuation display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f are set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the holding ball number) is a counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a based on the game ball having won in the first starting opening 63a. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the starting winning combination is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one. It is.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (that is, the holding ball number) is a counter value in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b based on the game ball having won in the second starting opening 63b. Is notified, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the starting winning combination is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by one. It is.

  If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are respectively stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 1 Refer to the data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d in the first change start process (Fig. 16, S203) or the second change start process (Fig. 20, S206) Then, based on the reference data, a jackpot lottery is performed, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation display effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (refer to FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning" The variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (based on the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 88) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (waiting number) of each up to four times. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol starting opening 67. By the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after power on, zero is set as an initial value. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 29, S106).

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) is detected along with the detection of the start winning to the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 detects that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the counter buffer normally receives the random number counter C4. A value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203 j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203 h 2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4, normal symbol flag 203j) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding ball is stored in the order from the earliest holding area among the holding areas where the data is vacant, in the order of passing (start winning) to the normal symbol starting opening 67 Be done.

  In addition, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation indication production of normal design on the basis of starting winning a prize, normal counter design sphere execution area 203i, each counter value is housed, the winning lottery of the normal design and the 1st It is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute processing such as winning lottery or setting of display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88 Of the data corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (general hit random number counter C4 value), data corresponding to one starting winning combination, this normal symbol holding ball Shift to execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal random number counter C4 is stored and indicating that the symbol is being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. It is set to ON when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. Also, if the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next pending area (the pending area corresponding to the pending count for which the pending count has been reduced and the number of pending tasks reduced), the value of the pending area before being shifted The normal symbol flag 203j is set to off, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area that has been shifted and stored is set to on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop processing, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to off.

  The time saving counter 203k is a counter area where the time saving count 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the number of times of time saving is set, a random number per table for high probability time is set in the normal pattern per random number table 202c until the number of times of time saving is set to 0. Also, when the symbol "o" indicating the hit of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the open time (in the present embodiment, the wings 64a and 64b of the normal motorized character 64 are longer than the normal gaming state) , 1s) The operation of opening is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time saving gaming state.

  The hour reduction counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops fluctuating display, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203k becomes 0, it shifts from the time reduction gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the ordinary symbol When the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability of per random number counter 202c is set, and the symbol "○" showing the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display section 88, the open time is 0.2 s With the setting of the number of times of opening, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 are opened.

  The probability change flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a flag that is set on based on the end of the jackpot game when it is notified that the 15R probability variation big hit game is won and the 15R probability variation big hit game is executed It is. On the other hand, when the probability change flag 203m is set to ON and the stop display is made with the first special symbol or the second special symbol to indicate the jackpot (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the jackpot game, by the jackpot type It is set to on if it is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

  The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired special hitting random number counter C1 is a hit based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired special hitting random number counter C1 is a hit based on winning in the second starting opening 63b. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The first change stop flag 203 q is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is determined to be a hit while the first special symbol is in a change display. In a second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S717) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S603), the variable display of the first special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop processing is performed.

  The second stop flag 203 r is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S <b> 407) to be executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, the flag is set to ON. Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S 803), the variable display of the second special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop process is executed.

  The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area where the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variation time storage area 203s counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol is displayed for variation display, and the variation time (2 ms in one interruption) is measured.

  The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area where the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). When the second special symbol is started to change, the second change time storage area 203t counts the change time (counts the number of interrupts), and the change time (2 ms in one interrupt) is measured.

  In the present embodiment, the first variation time storage area 203s and the second variation time storage area 203t measure the variation time by counting the number of interrupts, but the invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the time measurement data may be acquired as needed to measure the fluctuation time. In addition, it is also possible to store the fluctuation time in which the fluctuation display is performed in advance and to subtract that value as needed.

  The rearrangement reserve storage area 203u is the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of reservation areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

  FIG. 9A is a view schematically showing the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u. Reordering storage area 203u corresponds to the pending data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each suspension frequency of suspension areas 1 to 8 is stored, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol during variation display And each determination data is stored in the during-variation data storage area.

  In each reserve area 1 to 8 of pending data, a success / failure determination result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern type storage area 203u3, a variation order storage area 203u4, a variation start time storage area 203u5, a prefetch probability change flag 203u6 Are provided respectively. The storage areas 1 to 8 are sequentially stored from the storage area 1 in the order in which the respective storage balls are established (the overall formation order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined). That is, with the pachinko machine 10, the holding areas 1 to 8 combine the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol, and indicate the formation order in which the holding ball is established.

  In the variable display data storage area, in correspondence with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a pass / fail judgment result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern storage area 203u3, and a prefetch probability change flag 203u6 are provided respectively. It is done.

  Judgment result storage area 203u1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the result of the determination in advance of the success or failure of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

  The jackpot type storage area 203u2 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

  The variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). The storage area is a storage area in which the type of the determined variation pattern is stored based on various data stored in. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the data of the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is also used as data to identify whether it is data of

  The variable display order storage area 203u4 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in the storage area. In addition, specifically, the fluctuation display start order is determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of the newly stored holding ball, and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each holding ball stored in advance. .

  The variation start time storage area 203u5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the time until each data of the calculated reserve areas 1 to 8 actually starts variable display is stored based on the various data stored in. It should be noted that, when this fluctuation display start time is stored in the hold area, it is updated as needed in other processing (S112) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  It is predicted that the type of stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S933) to be described later (predetermined (predicted) Storage area that is set to ON and stored. In addition, every time data is shifted to and stored in the upper reservation area, all the areas before the shift are cleared to 0, so that the pre-read probability change flag storage area 203 u 6 is set to off. That is, the pre-read probability variation flag storage area 203u6, which has been set to ON once, is shifted to the in-fluctuation data storage area, and is overwritten by (shifted) new data in the in-fluctuation data storage area. . In addition, in the state where the game machine is powered on and the process of clearing the RAM is executed, the initial value is set to off.

  When power failure occurs in the pachinko machine 10, each piece of data in the sorting reserve storage area 203u is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read out from the stored backup area and set.

  The other memory area 203v is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  As described above, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and a holding ball is generated, each of the holding balls according to the formation order of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of the holding ball are stored. Therefore, the winning a prize command is generated based on the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and the voice lamp control device 113 establishes the holding combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the winning command. A command to be output to the display control device 114 can be generated so as to perform the hold symbol display in order. Therefore, it is possible to display the holding symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also determined and stored in relation to the establishment order, the voice lamp control device 113 is also received by generating a winning command based on the variable display start order. Based on the win command, it is possible to determine the holding order of each hold and the actual variable display start order.

  In addition, since the fluctuation start time of each hold is stored in each hold area, and the time is managed (updated as time passes), it is easy to start the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored hold data. It can be determined.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is opened and closed forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display portion 88, and the specified winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for driving the motor or a solenoid for driving the motorized part is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Various processing is executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34), Setting control of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. The voice output device 226 is controlled to instruct the display control device 114 so that the reserved symbol display being displayed is rearranged and displayed in the order of the variable display start.

  Further, the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since winning in the winning opening is an important factor in determining the gaming state, it is necessary to change the flow of balls by vibration and to prevent the winning in the winning opening intentionally. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the player or the like has given vibration to the pachinko machine 10, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and includes an error type including an error type. It transmits to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2, a first change start flag 223c1, a second change start flag 223c2, a second 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, second stop type selection flag 223d2, second variation stop flag 223e, second variation stop flag 223f, first variation resume flag 223g, second variation resume flag 223h, first variation A variation time storage area 223i, a second variation time storage area 223j, a second post-sorting storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is, like the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, the first special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a variation display (dynamic display) of a symbol and counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the variation display effect held in the main control unit 110 up to 4 times.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 is, like the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, the second special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a variation display (dynamic display) of a symbol and counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the variation display effect held in the main control unit 110 up to 4 times.

  The first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1502). On the other hand, when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1602).

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1505). On the other hand, when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1602).

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1612).

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1612).

  The first variation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. When the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from the main control device 110, it is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1702).

  The second variation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. When the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from the main control device 110, it is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the processing for stopping the variation display of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1706).

  The first variation resuming flag 223g is a flag indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control unit 110, the sub first restart flag 223g is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1710).

  The second variation resumption flag 223h is a flag indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control unit 110, the second restart flag 223h is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1714).

  The first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This storage area is stored at a value synchronized with the first variation time storage area 203 s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms and the fluctuation time actually displayed is stored.

  The second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This storage area is stored at a value synchronized with the second fluctuation time storage area 203t in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Based on the variation display start of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the variation time actually changed and stored is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k has data similar to the sort reserve storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110. Is a storage area stored based on the winning command output from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113.

  FIG. 9B is a view schematically showing the sub sort reserve storage area 223 k. The follow sort reserve storage area 223k stores various data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol while being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the reserve area for pending data from the reserve area 1 to the reserve area 8 And a storage area of data during variable display. The respective reserve areas are a success / failure determination result storage area 223k1, a big hit type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a second reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6, a sorting flag 223k7 The respective data extracted from the received winning command are stored in the corresponding reserved area. In addition, each time the display variation pattern command for starting the variation display of the special symbol is generated, the data of the reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area 223k is shifted and stored in the immediately preceding reserve area. In addition, in the case of the first special symbol, the hold data of the reserve area 1 is in the storage area of the first special symbol in the changing data storage area, and in the case of the second special symbol, the second special symbol in the changing data The data are respectively shifted and stored in the storage area.

  Judgment result storage area 223k1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area that is extracted and stored from the received winning command as a result of having determined in advance whether the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the data has passed or not. Information on the result of determination of success or failure extracted from the winning command is one of the results of determination of result on or off of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holding times (the corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding memory area 203u of the main controller 110). It is stored in 223k1.

  The jackpot type storage area 223k2 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area that is extracted and stored from the received winning command, the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2.

  The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area stored by extracting the type of the determined fluctuation pattern from the received winning command based on various data stored in. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the data of the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is also used as data to identify whether it is data of

  The variation order storage area 223k4 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). This is a storage area which is extracted and stored from the received winning command based on the stored various data and the actual change display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8.

  The variation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Based on various data stored in the storage area, the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 actually calculated starts changing display from the received winning command is a storage area to be stored . Note that this variable display start time is updated as needed in the hold number display process (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when stored in the hold area. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated data of each of the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start fluctuating display, but the invention is not limited thereto. Each counter value for calculating time (for example, the kind of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol during fluctuation (such as the number of interruptions)) and the start of fluctuation display It is good also as a command corresponding to time until it becomes.

  The secondary reading probability change flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored big hit type storage area 223k2 is 15R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit.

  The sorting flag 223k7 indicates that the player is the holding symbol (the holding symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated) for which the player has requested the sorting of the holding symbol display by operating the frame button 22. It is a flag.

  As described above, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63a and a holding ball is generated, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are based on the data extracted from the winning command. The various determination data of each holding ball are memorize | stored according to the formation order of the holding ball which put together. Therefore, the display control device is such that the voice lamp control device 113 performs the holding symbol display in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the data of the follow sort holding storage area 223k. A command to be output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to display the holding symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In addition, based on the winning command, the follow sort hold storage area 223k is updated with data synchronized with the sort hold storage area 203u of the main control unit 110, and there is a change in hold data (new hold being established, etc.) Also, data can be synchronized and updated sequentially.

  The other memory area 223 m is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) properly.

  When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores each data of the reordering storage area 203 u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data of the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and each corresponding suspension area of the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u or being changed It is stored in the data storage area.

  Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), similar to the winning command generated in the first pre-reading update process (FIG. 26, S939), based on the reordering storage area 203u stored and read back up data. All the winning commands are generated and output to the voice lamp control device 113, whereby data synchronized with the same sorting storage area 203u is set in the secondary sorting storage area 223k.

  Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting a prize command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data of the sorting reserve storage area 203u and the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k are also recovered from the time of power failure. Although the configuration for synchronizing has been described, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 backs up each data of the slave sort reserving storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs as well as the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Naturally, it may be stored as

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) depressed when the power is turned on (power is applied while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and various lotterys such as winning and selection of fluctuation patterns for the winnings. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, the lottery of whether to set the game operation suggestion setting is sub-controlled The control load of the main control device 110 can be lightened by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

  The control substrate of the main controller 110 and the audio lamp controller 113 is covered by a box called a substrate box, which is formed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member can not be easily separated. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (? It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an opening mark such as whether the member forming the through hole is broken or the sealing member is broken by clamping. .

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the game ball enters the distribution device 630 and is distributed by the passive distribution member 640 and the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired and acquired After the lottery and the determination of the fluctuation pattern and the like are performed based on the respective counter values, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Variable display (dynamic display). In addition, when the game ball enters the distribution device 630 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is distributed by the passive distribution device 640 and wins the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value (C1 to C3) is displayed for fluctuating display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery play machine, as in the case of winning in the first starting opening 63a. And CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be simultaneously variable display by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, respectively. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, in the 7-segment LED on the left side of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and the 7 on the right In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed on the left side display area Dm1, and the second special on the right side display area Dm2. The variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. By configuring in this manner, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. .

  When the game ball wins in the first starting opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), the respective counter values (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winnings Since the first lottery game for variably displaying the lottery result can not be executed immediately, each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, an aspect (for example, one of the holding number "1" of the first special symbols of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37) The light emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is updated (the number of holding balls is incremented by 1).

  When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. In the winning command, it is possible to identify which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b the winning is to be made, and it is possible to identify what number of holding balls (holding number).

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prize command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pending information such as the number of pending items and information about the starting opening which has won from the received command, and based on the pending information, the third symbol display device A process of displaying a reserved symbol in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) corresponding to the lower display region Ds at 81 is executed. If this holding symbol is a holding symbol corresponding to the holding information of the first special symbol (the first starting opening 63a) as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the "特別" is the second special symbol (the second starting symbol (the second starting symbol). If it is a holding symbol corresponding to the holding information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each holding information (one holding symbol for one holding) if it is a holding symbol.

  Similarly, while the second special symbol is variably displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is acquired, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area The value is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is updated. Then, the holding symbol indicating that the holding information is stored is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined with the game balls that have won. One example shown in FIG. 12 will be specifically described. First, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a variable display, the first special symbol has a remaining 10s variation time, and the second special symbol has a remaining 5s variation time. It shows. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, a pending symbol “in the pending symbol display area Ds1 indicating that it is the pending information of the second special symbol (pending information based on winning in the second starting opening 63b)“ ● "" indicates that the holding symbol display area Ds2 is the holding information of the first special symbol The holding symbol "○" indicates that the holding symbol display area Ds3 is the holding information of the second special symbol " A held symbol “o” indicating that “●” is the held information of the first special symbol is displayed in the held symbol display area Ds4. In this case, it is shown that the order of holding symbol display area Ds4 is from the holding symbol display area Ds1 in order from the holding symbol display area Ds1 in the order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are won.

  In other words, after the game ball wins in the second start opening 63b, it wins in the first start opening 63a, and then the game ball wins in the second start opening 63b and then the first start opening 63a. It shows that it did.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in each reserve data, the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the suspension becomes the variation start is predicted and stored in advance (the type of the variation pattern to be determined is stored) Has been Then, since it is the suspension of the second special symbol stored in the winning order first (the reserve area 1 is appropriate in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u), the remaining of the second special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (5 s) elapses, the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds after, since the fluctuation display starts. Also, since it is the suspension of the first special symbol that is stored in the second winning order (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 2 is appropriate), the remainder of the first special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (10 s) elapses, the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds after, since the fluctuation display starts. Next, since it is the suspension of the second special symbol that is stored in the third winning order (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 3 is appropriate), the second special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (40 s) of the suspension data stored first in the winning sequence elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (5 s), the fluctuation display start time is calculated, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since it is the suspension of the first special symbol that is stored in the fourth winning sequence (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 4 is appropriate), the first special symbol currently displayed in variation is When the fluctuation time (10 s) of the suspension data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10 s), the fluctuation display start time is calculated, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 20 seconds later.

  In this manner, the fluctuation display start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is calculated in the order of establishment in the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and the fluctuation display start time is, in ascending order, based on the fluctuation display start time. And the variable display order is assigned.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 at this timing, the holding symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is shown in the sort display mode shown in FIG. The symbol display is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol in the winning order third (the winning symbol display of the fourth winning order is cut in front of the reserved symbol display of the winning order third) and displayed.

  FIG. 13 shows that the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 25) when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63 a 1s after the state of FIG. 27, it is the figure which showed typically the process which determines the fluctuation | variation display start order of the retention symbol newly memorize | stored in S914).

  Since FIG. 13 shows the state after 1 s from FIG. 12, the first special symbol in the variation display has a remaining variation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining variation time of 4 s. In addition, the fluctuation start time of each reserve area of the sort reserve storage area 203u is also updated.

  Holding of the newly established first starting opening 63a (first special symbol) is the fifth winning order, and each data is stored in the holding area 5 in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u. First, the same as the newly stored first special symbol, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation fluctuation time of the first special symbol of winning order 2 and 4 are newly added, respectively. The time when the hold of the first special symbol that has been established (stored) becomes the variable display start is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

  Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the post-reordering order (variation display start order) is added in the order of the start of the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation display start time of each reserve area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 to request the sorting of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after sorting in FIG. 13, the winning symbol fourth and fifth reserved symbols are displayed. Is rearranged with the third winning symbol display in the winning order (the fourth and fifth winning symbol displays in the winning order are cut in front of the third pending symbol display in the winning order) and displayed.

  In this manner, each time a suspension occurs, the variable display start time is calculated, and the sort order is determined, whereby the player performs an operation (the operation of the frame button 22) to request the sort. In the case of having made, it is possible to quickly display the reserved symbol display after sorting.

  Also, the fluctuation patterns of the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot tend to be longer than the fluctuation patterns selected when the variation time is out. As shown in FIG. 13, the first hold of the winning order has a long fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Therefore, the holding of the same second special symbol established after that, the variable display start time will be later than the holding of the first special symbol established later, and if reordering, a long fluctuation time is selected Behind the held symbol display, a type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) different from the hold whose long fluctuation time is selected is displayed collectively. Therefore, the more the number of the held symbol display displayed by cutting into the subsequent held symbol display area of the held symbol display, the more the player holds the expectation of the big hit for the previous held symbol display, and the player Sorting can be done with the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, the interest in the game increases and the game can be continued without getting tired.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process (FIG. 32) activated upon power-on and a main process (FIG. 33, S1200) executed after the startup process (this embodiment) There is a timer interrupt process (Fig. 14) activated in 2 ms cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (Fig. 31) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the start-up process (FIG. 32) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200) will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), a command etc. to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, etc. is generated based on various processes. It temporarily stores in the ring buffer for command transmission. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the determination command and the like set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, the special winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a prescribed number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, the processing for reading various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is changed to the RAM 203. In the corresponding counter buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the change type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the stop type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum In the embodiment, when reaching 399, 99, 100, 198, 239), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Also, when the special per-random number counter C1 or the per-normal random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the common initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is the special per-random number counter C1 or the per-normal random number counter The initial value of C4 is read, and the initial value is set to the special random number counter C1 or the ordinary random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37, and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, etc. (S107), and then, a start winning process is executed in association with the winning of the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the start winning process (S108), execute the normal symbol variation process which is the variation process of the normal symbol for the game ball having passed the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S109), and then the normal symbol starting aperture 67 Through gate processing for the game ball having passed (S10). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and the details of the through gate processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for executing control relating to the launch of the game ball is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the launch control process (S111), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is released under the condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. Then, when the ball firing is on, the information of the ball firing signal is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball firing signal to the firing control device 112. As a result, the ball emission signal is transmitted to the emission control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol variation process (S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) performs various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by the predetermined control In the aspect, the variable display can be simultaneously controlled by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, or the control of stopping display in the display mode indicating the determination result is executed. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described below.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), it is first determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 17, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display has elapsed, a symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game The process of stopping the variable display and the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big hit, and when the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed, the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display Is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, while processing for resuming the variable display is executed, the temporary stop If the first special symbol holding ball number storage area 203a does not store holding data (various counter values), the jackpot determination based on the holding data and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed. .

  After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S107) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display mode, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), the specified fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display When time passes, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game and the fluctuation display being stopped with the first special symbol indicating the jackpot, the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed When being done, processing of temporarily stopping the second special symbol in the variable display is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variable display mode, the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described later in detail, but, similar to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is the process of resuming the variable display while the temporary data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number storage area 203b when it is not temporarily stopped, The jackpot determination based on the pending data and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed. Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301). Whether or not the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is determined by whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped although the variation time (variation pattern) is set. . If it is determined that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301: Yes), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is resumed (S302). For the variation time of this first special symbol, when the variation pattern etc. is selected when the variation display etc. is started in the first special symbol variation display selection process (FIG. 18, S310) described later. The measurement start of the fluctuation time is set to. When the variation pattern is selected, a variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Further, the main control device 110 starts variable display of the first special symbol of the first display device 37 accordingly. The variable display of the first special symbol (the 7-segment LED on the left side of the 7-segment display 37b) in the first symbol display device 37 is resumed (S303). A first special symbol variation restart command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to resume variable display of the first special symbol during temporary stop (S304). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S305). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S308) . A process of sequentially shifting data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a toward the execution area (S308). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S309). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) will be described in detail later, the game is set based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c Based on the state, a jackpot determination of whether or not a jackpot is performed. When it is determined that the determination result is a big hit, the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to on. Thereby, it is possible to recognize that the big hit game is started after the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol in the variably displayed can be temporarily suspended during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. It can be done.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S310). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) will be described later in detail, but based on the result of the pass / fail determination based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (during a definite change) (S402). Whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or not is determined depending on whether the probability change flag 203m is set to on. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is on (that is, the gaming state is high probability gaming state (during a definite change)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the large hitting random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is off (that is, the gaming state is not the low probability gaming state (not positive variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability Based on the determination, it is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  It is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S405). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON (S407). Thereby, in the big hit determination of the first special symbol, the determination result becomes a big hit, and when the variation display of the first special symbol notifying the determination result is stopped and displayed, temporarily if the second special symbol is changing. The variable display will be stopped.

  In this way, by setting the second fluctuation stop flag 203r to ON before the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, at the time of the fluctuation table stop of the first special symbol, whether to make the temporary stop of the second special symbol As compared with the case where it is judged whether or not it is possible to prevent the problem that the control processing is concentrated at the time of the fluctuation stop.

  A big hit symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2, and the first jackpot flag 203o is set on (S408). Thereby, in the first symbol display device 37, a symbol based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (for example, "7" for 15R probability variation jackpot) is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is off (S405: No), the first symbol display device 37 is detached and the symbol is set (S409). In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “−” indicating detachment is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37 b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be displayed in a stopped state when the variable display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S310), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S310) ). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S501: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S502). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S501: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set.

  The jackpot type table is determined according to the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S504). The jackpot classification table is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, the 15R jackpot table is determined in the case of 15R probability jackpot and 15R regular jackpot, and the 2R jackpot table is determined in the case of 2R probability jackpot . Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S505).

  The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 (S506). Here, a variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the audio lamp control device 113 is also set. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S507). The measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set.

  By starting measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol together with the setting of fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation time can be measured at the same time as the fluctuation start of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation time can be measured, and the fluctuation time is measured accurately can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), first, it is determined whether the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601). If it is determined that the first change stop flag 203 q is set to ON (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602). If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602: Yes), a temporary first fluctuation stop command is issued to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to temporarily stop the first special symbol. The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped, and the first fluctuation stop flag 203 q is set to be off (S 603). Then, the measurement of the first variation time is interrupted (S604).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to temporarily stop the first special symbol as well as the timing at which the second special symbol is stopped changing with the determination symbol that is a hit. Thus, the player can play the game concentrating on the jackpot game in the second lottery game.

  Further, since the measurement of the first fluctuation time is also interrupted in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, it is possible to accurately measure the remaining fluctuation time after the jackpot game.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the third symbol display device 81 stops the display mode in which the player can know that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. Specifically, a character such as "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" is displayed, or the player keeps changing display in the display mode in which the three main symbols on the left, center and right that make up the special symbol are shaken. Informing that the temporary stop is in progress. Moreover, the display mode which alert | reports temporary stop is not restricted to this, You may be notification modes other than that.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not the end time (that is, fluctuation display is in progress) (S602: No), the processing of S605 is executed. If it is determined that the first change stop flag 203 q is off (S601: No), it is determined whether the change time of the first special symbol during the change display is the end time (S605).

  If it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is not the end time (S605: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end time (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606). If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to OFF (S607). Various settings for the jackpot game are made based on the determined variation stop type (S 608). Specifically, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, the number of rounds where the big hit game is executed is set to 15 times, and the maximum opening time of the specified winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30s Ru. Further, in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 2 s.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S606: No), it is determined whether the time reduction counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S609). If it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S609: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 is decremented by 1 (S610). That is, the time saving counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol changes and is displayed once. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value smaller than 0 (that is, 0) (S609: No), the processing of S611 is executed.

  A first determination command instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to stop the change display of the first special symbol is set (S611). The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determined result of acceptance or rejection (S612). The value of the first fluctuation time storage area 203s is cleared to 0, and the first fluctuation time measurement value is cleared to 0 (S613). After this, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), the first special symbol for each of the processes from S301 to S310 with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) described above. , 1st fluctuation time measurement restart, 1st symbol display device 37, 1st special symbol fluctuation restart command, 1st special symbol holding ball number counter value (N1), 1st special symbol holding ball storage area, 1st special symbol In the jackpot determination process, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in each process from S701 to S710, the second special symbol, the second variation time measurement resumption, the second symbol display device 37, the second special symbol holding ball number counter It is the same as the value (N2), the second special symbol holding ball storage area, the second special symbol jackpot determination process, and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, except that they are respectively changed except that they are changed, so Substantially.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709), the first special symbol holding ball execution area for the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) described above with respect to the processing of S401. In the process of S711, in the second special symbol holding ball execution area, the second variation stop flag and the first jackpot flag for each process from S407 to S408 are the first variation in each process from S717 to S718. The description is omitted because it is the same except that the stop flag and the second jackpot flag are respectively changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S710), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 20, S206), will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) described above is the first for each of the processes from S507 to S508. The respective processes from the stop type command and the first fluctuation time measurement start to S727 to S728 are the same except that they are respectively changed to the first stop type command and the first fluctuation time measurement start, and therefore the explanation thereof is the same. I omit it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stop process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the first fluctuation stop with respect to each processing from S601 to S604 with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204) described above. In each process from S801 to S804, the flag, the first special symbol, the temporary first fluctuation stop command, and the first fluctuation time measurement suspension are the second fluctuation stop flag, the second special symbol, the temporary second fluctuation stop command, the second For each processing from S611 to S613, the first confirmation command, the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation time measurement value for each processing from S811 to S813 are changed to the suspension time measurement suspension, and the second confirmation command is performed. Since it is the same except that the second special symbol and the second variation time measurement value are respectively changed, the description is omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the control of the second special symbol is independently and parallelly executable, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  Moreover, compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, the pachinko machine 10 has variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if it is relatively short, in either of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed, and by raising the efficiency of the game, It is possible to suppress the problem that the state in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner is long.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, when the sorting device 630 is provided as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is relatively increased. If you do not shorten it, many overflows will not occur. However, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the lottery game is performed with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the fluctuation having a long fluctuation time is selected, the fluctuation of the special symbol is also performed on the other Can be performed many times in a short time because of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect of a sufficient fluctuation time as needed, and to prevent the player from getting bored more with the game.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed and displayed and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other is selected. Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In addition, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that shows the player that the temporary stop is in progress, the player can not lose the lottery game which was in the process of the variable display. It can be grasped and can play a big hit game in peace.

  In addition, since the sorting device 630 is provided in the pachinko machine 10, the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are easily winning alternately, and the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63a is configured. If the winning is biased to one of the openings 63b and the other starting opening with a small amount of holding is attempted to achieve a winning, the game ball also reaches the upper limit of the number of holdings in one starting opening 63a, 63b. It is possible to suppress the problem that many invalid balls are generated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and when the winning is achieved, the hold upper limit number (first starting opening 63a, It is a process which stores each acquired counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b up to 4) in each of the 2 starting openings 63b. In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Or based on each counter value memorized by each of the 2nd special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, processing which predicts a success / failure determination result, a variation pattern selected, etc. in advance is performed. The start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described below.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won in the first start opening 63a (start winning) (S901). Here, the winning of the first starting opening 63a is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won in the first starting opening 63a (there is a starting winning) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit value of the number of reservations for the first starting port 63a (that is, is the number of reservations being stored to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S904). A ball holding ball number command for notifying the sounding lamp control device 113 of the number of holding balls is set (S 905). Each value of special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, fluctuation pattern judgment counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 which are various counter values are read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding ball of RAM 203 is held. The special hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter storage area 203c3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 of the execution area 203c are respectively reserved (stored) (S906).

  Next, a first prefetch process is performed (S 907). The first read-ahead process (FIG. 25, S108) will be described in detail later, but the first special display is stored with the variable display start order based on the respective counter values newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The combination of the symbol and the second special symbol is used to determine in advance what number it is in advance, and further, from the variation display order and each stored counter value, the result of determination of success or failure, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. A process of determining

  Next, with respect to each processing of S908 to S914, the same processing as the processing performed for the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 63a performed in each processing of S901 to S907 is the second processing. The only difference is that the process is performed for the starting opening 63b, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first prefetch process (S907) which is one process of the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this first pre-reading process (S 907).

  In the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907), first, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. The values of the pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are read out (S921). The read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and variable display based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value) is started The variable display start time is calculated (S922).

  This fluctuation start time, as shown in FIG. 12, is a special symbol in the fluctuation display corresponding to the newly stored holding data (if it is the holding data based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second In the case of holding data based on the starting opening 63b, each holding data previously stored is determined based on the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol) and the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the newly stored holding data. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation time.

  Here, if the newly stored pending data is the pending data based on the first starting port 63a, the newly stored pending data is a previously held data based on the same starting port as the newly stored pending data. (Based on the first special symbol) pending data based on the first starting opening 63a stored in the first storage, while if the newly stored pending data is pending data based on the second starting opening 63b, it is stored first Data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second start port 63b being held.

  When the variable display start time is calculated, the order after the rearrangement is renumbered in the order of the earliest of the variable display start time of all the suspension data stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u (S 923). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, the renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the newly displayed variable data display start order of suspended data is interrupted by the variable data display start sequence of the previously stored data, it is natural that only the change order is renumbered. Good.

  It is determined whether the gaming state when the newly stored held data starts changing is the high probability gaming state (S924). With regard to the gaming state at the time of the start of fluctuation, although there is a thing that the read-ahead certainty change flag 203u6 is on, although it is stopped by the time when the newly stored hold data starts to fluctuate, It is determined by determining whether there is any. When it is determined that the gaming state when the newly stored suspension data starts to change is the high probability gaming state (S 924: Yes), the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202 a for high probability Based on the above, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state when the newly stored suspension data starts changing is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S924: No), the special symbol jackpot for low probability time Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S927).

  The first read ahead update process is executed (S926). The first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) will be described in detail later, but in the order in which the variable display is actually started, the result of the pass / fail judgment of the hold data (various counter values) stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u. , The jackpot type (whether or not it is a positive change) and the change pattern (change time) are stored (updated).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926).

  In the first prefetch update process (S926 in FIG. 26), first, it is determined whether the success or failure determination result predicted in the process of S925 or S927 in the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) is a jackpot (S931). If it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted by the process of S925 or S927 in the first pre-reading process (S907 in FIG. 25) was a big hit (S931: Yes), the predicted big hit is a positive change big hit (15R positive change big hit or It is determined whether it is the second R probability variation jackpot) (S932). If it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a probable variation jackpot (S 932: Yes), the prefetch probability change flag 203 u 6 of the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to ON (S 933) . Note that, when the data is shifted to and stored in the upper reserved area, the data in the reserved area before being shifted is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area, and therefore the prefetch change flag 203 u 6 is set to off. That is, the pre-read certainty change flag 203u6, which has been set to ON once, is shifted to the hold area in order, and the next new data is shifted and overwritten (0 clear) in the changing data storage area to set OFF. Be done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not a definite variation jackpot (that is, 15R is usually a jackpot) (S932: No), the processing of S934 is executed.

  The special hit type counter C2 for the hold data newly stored from the special hit change pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the change display (certainly changed or not or not) The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S934).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted in the process of S925 in the first pre-reading process (S 907 in FIG. 25) is out of step (S931: No), the gaming state (probability change or short Determined based on the values of the variation pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 newly stored in the suspension data from the special outlier variation pattern table 202e corresponding to whether or not A variation pattern is predicted (S935).

  The predicted success or failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in the area corresponding to the winning order in the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u (corresponding to the newly stored hold data) (S 936). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u is stored (changed in order) into the fluctuation display start order stored previously (S937) . When it is determined that the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203 u is interrupted (or changed in order) and stored in the fluctuation display start order stored previously. (S937: Yes), regarding pending data after the newly stored pending data variable display start order (the pending data of the order in which the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored pending data changes after being paused) Then, again, the success or failure, the type of stop, and the change pattern are predicted and updated (S938). Voice lamp control device for each data corresponding to all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203u based on the pass / fail type, the variation pattern, the winning sequence, the variation display start sequence, and the prefetching probability change flag 203u6 A winning command for notifying to 113 is generated for each pending data (S939).

  In this way, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and is held until the corresponding special symbol can be variably displayed, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation display is started. The determination of the fluctuation pattern and the like are executed, and the fluctuation start order in the hold is also calculated. Therefore, when the holding symbol display is displayed, the holding symbol display can be rearranged in the order of start of fluctuation by the operation of the player.

  Also, when a new hold is stored and the change start order is changed due to the hold (the newly stored change start order of the hold is interrupted and stored), the reordering storage area 203u is again performed. Among the stored reserve areas, since the acceptance judgment, the stop type, and the change pattern are updated with respect to the hold that is changed start after the newly stored hold is stopped, the new hold is stored. Thus, even when the gaming state at the start of the change (whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the low probability gaming state) changes, accurate data can be updated.

  In the present embodiment, when the newly stored pending change start order is interrupted and stored, the pending data in the pending area (appropriate judgment, stop type, variation pattern) is updated again. The present invention is not limited to this, and when a new hold is stored, determination may be made again for all the hold areas each time. By configuring in this way, data of the pending area can be updated each time pending is newly stored, and can be always composed of more accurate data.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the second prefetch process (S914) which is one process of the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this second pre-reading process (S914).

  The second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S914) pre-reads pending data based on the fact that the above-described first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) is won in the first starting opening 63a and is stored. While the variable display start order of the held data is determined to perform various determinations, the held data stored in advance is prefetched based on the held data based on the winning of the second start port 63b. The same processing is executed except that the variable display start order is determined and processing is performed to make various determinations, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  The first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) described above is also performed on the second prefetch update process (S946), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, 914) shown in FIG. (1) Various selection data are predicted based on the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data based on winning in the starting opening 63a, and it is processing to generate a winning command, while winning in the second starting opening 63b The same processing is executed except that it is different from the processing of predicting various selection data and generating a winning command based on the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data based on the same, so the detailed description is omitted. Do.

  In this manner, the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When (held data is stored), the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) is executed. The newly stored pending data is stored in the sorting pending ball storage area 203u in the order in which the variable display starts in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914). Since it is determined in comparison with the fluctuation display start time of each held data being played, the game state (whether or not the probability change is in progress) is accurately determined when the fluctuation display of the stored held data is started can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the success / failure determination result, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern displayed in a fluctuating manner. Therefore, the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second is also performed next when the pending data is newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation display start time of the newly stored suspension data can be accurately predicted based on the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of each suspension data predicted in the prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). As a result, the correct variation display start order can be predicted.

  In addition, when the variable display start order of the newly stored hold data is stored in the variable display start order of the hold data previously stored (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold is stored. For each hold data of the variable display start order after the data, the gaming state at the start of the variable display is predicted again by the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) Since the prediction (prefetching) of the pass / fail, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern is performed, the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored pending data from the winning command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, normal symbol variation processing (S109) which is one processing of timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the open time of the ordinary electric power role object 64, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1001). The middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) includes the period from when the second symbol display portion 88 displays a display indicating a hit until the opening / closing control of the normal motorized symbol 64 is performed. If it is determined that a normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S1001: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in contact (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display portion 88 is being variably displayed (S1002). If it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1003). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1017 and the processing of S1018, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  In the process of S1003, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1003: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1003 that the variation time of the normal symbol being variably displayed has elapsed (S1003: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display section 88 is set (S1004) . In the process of S1004, when the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S1018, the "O" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display portion 88 as the second symbol (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the process of S1017, the "x" symbol is displayed in the second symbol display section 88 as the second symbol, and the stop display (lighting It is set to be displayed. When the stop display is set by the process of S1004, the fluctuation display in the second symbol display unit 88 is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the first in the display mode set in the process of S1017 and S1018. 2 The stop display (lighting display) is made on the symbol display unit 88.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1005). If it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S1005: Yes), the start of the open / close control of the ordinary electric role item 64 is set (1006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out (S1005: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1002: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1007). After the process of S1007, the process of S1023 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1008). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1008: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1009).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the normal symbol holding 1 to the normal symbol holding 4 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, normal symbol holding 1 → execution area, normal symbol holding 2 → normal symbol holding 1, normal symbol holding 3 → normal symbol holding 2, normal symbol holding 4 → normal symbol holding 4 etc. Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i is acquired (S1011).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1012). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not in time reduction) (S1012: No), the hit determination value of the random symbol per random symbol table (FIG. 8 (d)) for low probability time Based on the result of step S1013, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1013). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour reduction counter 203 k is not 0 (that is, it is in the middle of a minute) (S1012: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress ( S1014). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1014: Yes), the processing of S1013 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1014: No), the hit judgment value of the normal symbol per random symbol table (FIG. 8 (d)) for high probability is used. Based on the determination result, the result of the determination is obtained (S1015).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (S1016). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is out) (S1016: No), a display mode of "x" which is a display mode at the time of out is set (S1017). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (that is, it is a hit) (S1016: Yes), the display mode of "o" which is the display mode at the time of hit is It is set (S1018).

  It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether the gaming state is time saving (including positive change)) (S1019). If it is determined that the time is not short (S1019: No), the open time of the blades 64a and 64b of the normal motorized character 64 is set to 0.2 s, and the open frequency is set to 1 (S1020).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is short (S1019: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1021). If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1021: Yes), the processing of S1020 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1021: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 is 1s, and the number of times of opening is two. It is set (S1020).

  It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether the gaming state is time saving (including a definite change)) (S1023). When it is determined that the time is short (S1023: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to 3s (S1024). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not short (S1023: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1025).

  Next, the through gate passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67 and there is a passing of the gaming ball. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 30, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031). Here, the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S1031: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1032). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1033).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1033: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S1031: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1033: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203 g is incremented by 1 (S1034). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt processing described above and the first normal symbol flag in the free reservation area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 (normal symbol holding 1 to normal symbol) It is stored in the first area of hold 4) (S1035). In the process of S1035, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is the case, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is the first, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is the first Area.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1041), and ends the NMI interrupt processing Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 32), first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (11605). (S1105: No), since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off has not ended normally, the processing also shifts to S1110 in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1110 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1110). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S1111, S1112), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1112). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1113.

  On the other hand, since the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), power supply interruption occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S1108) while keeping the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1109), and the process shifts to the processing of S1113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1113). Thereafter, the interrupt is permitted (S914). Then, the process proceeds to main processing (S1200) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1200). In the main process (S1200), the process of updating the counter and the process of powering off are roughly executed.

  In the main processing (FIG. 33, S1200), first, in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (100 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). The display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1204).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display unit 88 is executed (S1205). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired at the timing when it passes, and the second symbol display section 88 The variable display of the second symbol is implemented. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the normal random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the ordinary electric wheeled product 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1207) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1207: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the above-described S1201 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1207: No), the initial time within the predetermined time is reached, ie, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1208, S1209).

  First, updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1208). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1202 (S1209).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1205 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is variably displayed. Therefore, by repeatedly executing updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1) The initial value of the random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

  Further, in the process of S1206, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 31 has been executed, so that the processing at the time of the power-off after S1210 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1210), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1211). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1212), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1213), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1206 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1201 to S1205 or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1208 and S1209 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process that is started up with the power on and a main process (S1400) that is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 34, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1418 (see FIG. 35) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") of the current start-up process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 35), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1418. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1418 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process in S1418 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is performed (see FIG. 35, S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is performed, the process of S1308 is performed instantaneously when the power-off flag is turned on until the process of S1308 is performed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1418 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1109), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310). The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main processing (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1308 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1304 to S1306 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that, when the process of S1308 is reached via the processes of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). When the main process (S1400) is performed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1400) was started or the process of S1401 was performed last time (S1400). S1401), if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the processing of S1402 to S1410 is not performed, and the processing shifts to the processing of S1411. In the process of S1401, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process relating to display (rendering) in S1402 to S1410, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1411 and the command determination process of S1412 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1414 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1402). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1404). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1405 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update processing (S1406), although described later in detail, processing of updating the display of the held symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data of the follow sort hold storage area 223k. .

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearranging possible period (period in which a large hit game and a state without a hold are omitted) described later, the hold symbol display displayed in the hold establishment order starts variable display It is sorted and displayed in order.

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1411, in order to display the variation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set to transmit the image data, is executed. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), a temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). In this temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating temporary stop of the first special symbol from the main controller 110 or a temporary second fluctuation stop command indicating temporary stop of the second special symbol On the basis of having received the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Details of the temporary variation stop process (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), a hold reordering process is executed (S1413). In this pending sorting process, based on the winning command output from the main control unit 110, the pending symbol display is sorted and displayed based on the player's button operation from the winning order to the variable display start order. Execute the process The details of the pending reordering process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the pending reordering process (S1413), a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1414). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1414 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process (S1400) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main process (S1400) is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1414). This command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 Determine The details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main control apparatus 110 Further, it is determined whether the first variation pattern command has been received (S1501). Here, the first change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the first fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1501: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). A variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 as being the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether the second variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1505). Here, the second change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the second fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1504: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). A variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 to be the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second type-of-stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1507). If it is determined that the first or second type-of-stop command has been received (S1507: Yes), if the first type-of-stop command has been received, the first type-of-stop selection flag is set to ON. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to on. (S1508). A stop type (either 15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223 m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the first stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol Are stored so as to be identifiable.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1510). If it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol holding ball included in the received holding ball number command The value of the number counter f (ie, the number of balls held for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of balls held for the first special symbol is the voice lamp The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113 is stored, and the second special symbol holding ball number is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 (S1511).

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, whenever there is a starting winning combination , By the process of S1508, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 and the first (2) It can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, correct the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 at the start winning detection Can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f.

  If it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S1512). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), the information of each holding area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each reserve area in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203 u to be extracted is the time until it becomes the variation display order, the variation display order, the variation display start, the success / failure determination result for each suspension, for each reserve .

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command has been received (S1515). If it is determined that the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command is received (S1515: Yes), if the temporary first change stop command is received, the sub first change stop flag 223e If the temporary second change stop command is received, the sub second change stop flag 223f is set on (S1516).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command is not received (S1515: No), the first special symbol change restart command or the second special symbol change restart command is received. It is judged whether or not (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol variation resume command corresponding to the received command is received. In the case, the first variation resumption flag 223g is set to on. Also, when the second special symbol variation resume command is received, the sub second variation resume flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is not received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the pending number display update process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process (S1406). This pending number display updating process (S1406) is a process for updating the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each pending area of the sub sort pending storage area 223k. .

  In the number-of-helds display update process (S1406 in FIG. 37), first, the variable display start time of the change start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the follow sort hold storage area 223k is updated (S1431). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 of the follow sort hold memory area 223k is on is a hold corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 is off in the variable display start order. In the symbol display, the holding symbol display is displayed in the order of establishment of the holding (S1432).

  Here, the reordering flag 223k7 is operated (in the present embodiment, the frame button 22 in a reorderable period) in the pending reordering process (S1413 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. When pressed, it is set to ON in all pending areas where pending data is stored. As a result, all displayed pending symbol displays are sorted and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending order of holding. On the other hand, after the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON, regarding the newly stored hold, the sorting flag 223k7 is off, so the order established without being sorted, ie, the third symbol display device 81 Displayed at the end of the display of the pending symbol displayed on.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter Also, while the display of the sorted symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, the display of the symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurred) hold is displayed first in the formation order for the display of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold. Since it is displayed at the tail end without being interrupted and displayed on the held symbol display being played, the player can suppress a defect that confuses the order in which the current display is displayed. Can.

  Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to inform the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

  Also, in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, when the holding symbol of the late formation order is interrupted and displayed before the holding symbol of the early formation order, Among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, it may be a big hit about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption You can have expectations.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot in the holding symbol display, and can operate the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. The frame button 22 can be operated with a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is a process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from main controller 110 in order to cause variation display effect to be displayed on third symbol display device 81. Then, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot), a process of setting a first or second display type command for display to notify the display control device 114 of the stop classification. Run.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1411 in FIG. 38), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). Then, if it is determined that the first change start flag 223c1 is off (S1601: No), since the first change pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process of S1606 is executed. Do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to be off (S1602).

  In the process of S1603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 Thus, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). In addition, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command of 2 bytes configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01" the second special symbol It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, The first special symbol (the third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed).

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the first special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the holding data stored in the follow sort holding memory area 223k is in the immediately preceding holding area It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the data under pending area 1 → variable display, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, pending area 4 → pending area 3, pending The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area 5 → reserve area 4, reserve area 6 → reserve area 5, reserve area 7 → reserve area 6, reserve area 8 → reserve area 7, and so on. The measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started using the first variation time storage area 223i (S1605).

  It is judged whether the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). When it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is not on (that is, off) (S1606: No), the first fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S1611 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S1606: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to be off (S1607). In the process of S1506 in the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, A variation pattern command for display of a special symbol is generated (S1608).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the right side display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, The second special symbol (the third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the second special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 is decremented by 1, and the holding data stored in the follow sort holding memory area 223k is in the immediately preceding holding area It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the data under pending area 1 → variable display, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, pending area 4 → pending area 3, pending The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area 5 → reserve area 4, reserve area 6 → reserve area 5, reserve area 7 → reserve area 6, reserve area 8 → reserve area 7, and so on.

  Measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started using the second variation time storage area 223j (S1610).

  It is determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to on (that is, off) (S1611: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S1611: Yes), if the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, If the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to off (S1612).

  In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (S1414 in FIG. 36), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or the second stop type command is set (S1613). If the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 in the stop type (15R probability variation hit, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot based on the stop type A first display type stop command for notifying “is there?” Is generated. In addition, when the stop type which is set is the stop type of the 2nd special symbol, in the display control device 114 stop type (15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit either) based on the stop type ) Is generated (S1614). The first or second stop type command notified from the main control unit 110 is for notifying the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the determination result is out of order. . If the determination result is out, the out type is not referred to and the out pattern is set.

  By being configured in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to change and display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being set, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control device 110 by also shifting the data of the follow sort reserving storage area 223k. The control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced without the need to control transmission.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this temporary change stop process (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is a process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the other variable display is During the jackpot game, processing for temporary stop is executed.

  In temporary fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is judged if the second fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. If it is determined that the first variation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the first variation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

  A first display temporary stop command is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the first special symbol being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81. When setting the first temporary stop command for display, the display control device 114 causes the first special symbol (main symbol in the left, right, and left main symbols) to be slightly shaken and displayed after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, the player is notified that the variable display is temporarily stopped. In addition, by displaying the characters "the first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand, and it is temporarily assumed that the variable display is stopped. It is configured to notify.

  In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol in the variable display has been temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of the jackpot, and the lottery in the variable display may disappear or be invalidated. You can play with peace of mind by preventing you from becoming anxious.

  In addition, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the first special symbol may be erased from the left side display area Dm, and the character may be notified of temporary stop using only characters. Naturally, other configurations may be adopted.

  When the display first temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol measured in the subordinate first fluctuation time storage area 223i is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is resumed, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation stop flag 223e is not set to on (ie, is off) (S1701: No), is the second variation stop flag 223f set to on? It is determined (S1705). If it is determined that the second variation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the second variation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second temporary stop command for display Are generated (S1707). Similarly to the first display temporary stop command, the second display temporary stop command controls the display control device 114 so that the second special symbol currently displayed in the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 is temporarily stopped in the variable display. Is a command to Similarly to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of the temporary stop.

  When the second temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol measured in the second fluctuation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is resumed, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

  It is determined whether the second variation resumption flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). If it is determined that the sub first fluctuation resumption flag 223g is set to on (S1709: Yes), the sub first fluctuation resumption flag 223g is set to off (S1710).

  It is determined whether the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711). If it is determined that the measured remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol stored in the second fluctuation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711: Yes), the first short fluctuation mode for display A resume command is set (S1712). When this display first short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first short fluctuation mode restart command displays the characters "Display the lottery result of the fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped" on the display control device 114 in the left display area Dm1 for the remaining fluctuation time. Then, based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display will change to the characters “I displayed the lottery result of the variable display that had been temporarily stopped!” And will continue to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3 s (S1711: No), the first normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1713). When this display first normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first normal variation mode restart command displays the characters "temporarily stopped variation display in change!" In the left side display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time, and all of the first special symbols are displayed. After displaying the main symbols (3 symbols on the left, right and left) in a fluctuating manner during the remaining fluctuation time, the first special symbol is displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110 Stop display. Next, measurement of the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time memory area 223i is resumed (S1714).

  By configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control is performed even if main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining variation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation manner, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub first variation resumption flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the sub second variation resumption flag 223h is set to on (S1715). If it is determined that the sub second variation resumption flag 223h is set to on (S1715: Yes), the sub second variation resumption flag 223g is set to off (S1716).

  It is determined whether the measured remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717). If it is determined that the remaining measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode for display A resume command is set (S1718). When this display second short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. The second short fluctuation mode restart command for display displays the characters “Display the lottery result of the temporary display that has been temporarily stopped” on the display control device 114 for the remaining fluctuation time in the right display area Dm 2 Then, based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display will change to the characters "The result of the temporary display of the variable display which has been temporarily stopped!" And will continue to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3 s (S1717: No), the second normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1719). When this display second normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This second normal variation mode restart command for display displays the character "temporarily stopped variation display during variation!" In the right side display area Dm2 during the remaining variation time, and all of the second special symbols are displayed. After displaying the main symbols (3 symbols on the left, right and left) in a fluctuating manner during the remaining fluctuation time, the second special symbol is displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110 Stop display. Next, measurement of the fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time memory area 223j is resumed (S1720). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation resumption flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process ends.

  By configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control is performed even if main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining variation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation manner, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been suspended is resumed, the character is informed of that to the character, but the present invention is not particularly limited thereto. Of course, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, as shown in the display mode that shows that the player has resumed (for example, displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display has been resumed by the character etc.), the suspended change Of course, notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to the resumption of display. By doing this, the player can correctly recognize that the suspended variable display has been resumed.

  In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select the variation pattern in accordance with the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when main controller 110 resumes the temporarily stopped fluctuation table time, the remaining fluctuation time causes the same fluctuation time fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time. The variation pattern may be configured to be selected. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 is controlled to delay the difference between the variation pattern of the remaining variation time and the variation pattern of the slightly short variation time and cause the variation table time to occur. The variation table of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be performed according to the remaining variation time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the suspension rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this pending reordering process (S1413). This hold rearrangement process (S1413 in FIG. 40) is one of main processes (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, in the hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), when the player operates the frame button 22 in the effective period, the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of establishment of the hold A process of setting the display to be rearranged in the variable display start order is executed.

  In the pending reordering process (S1413 in FIG. 40), it is first determined whether it is a reorderable period (S1801). In the sortable period, gaming states other than the state with no hold established in the big hit game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is not one or more hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively) are arranged The exchangeable period is set.

  If it is determined that it is a sortable period (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the character "May be reorderable!" And the player can operate the frame button 22. Informing a period that is The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be controlled to light a dedicated lamp or the like.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation can be performed, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. In addition, as long as the rearrangement possible period is not particularly provided, and the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the arrangement display may naturally be performed.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the reordering flag 223k7 of all the pending areas in which the pending data of the follow reorder pending storage area 223k is stored is set to on. (S1804).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a reorderable period (S1801: No) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1803: No), the process is ended.

  By this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be focused next (the special symbol to be the variable display start). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and to play the game smoothly.

  Further, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, since the distribution ball 630 is configured to easily win the game ball alternately by the distribution device 630, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured. The game is played evenly and the game can be played efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, sorting of the holding symbol is performed as a configuration to be executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and is executed whenever a new holding is stored. Naturally, it may be configured as well. By configuring in this manner, the player can always correctly recognize the fluctuation display start order by the holding symbols rearranged in the fluctuation start order.

  In this embodiment, the sortable period is other than a state in which there is no hold established in the jackpot game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (state in which there is no hold of one or more first special symbols and second special symbols). The game state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a sortable period even during a jackpot game, or conversely, a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed It may be set to other than, etc., and may be determined as appropriate.

  When the jackpot game is set to a sortable period, it is necessary to sort in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped in the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being suspended and the remaining fluctuation time during temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode is combined with the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode is displayed. The sorting can be performed in the correct fluctuation start order, and the player can be notified of the correct fluctuation start order even in the jackpot gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reordering storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the secondary reordering storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 are configured to store data in which the reordering is performed mutually. Not only that, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data (relevant judgment result, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern type, etc.) necessary for sorting by a prize command, Reordering may be performed only by the audio lamp control device 113.

  By configuring in this manner, even when a power failure occurs, main controller 110 backs up various data necessary for sorting in RAM 203, and when power is restored, the various processes in startup processing (FIG. 32) are performed. By outputting the data to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 can easily perform recovery from the power failure by performing sorting based on the various data.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol or the first reserved due to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the variation start and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the reordering storage area 203u 2 The variation start time of the special symbol was calculated to calculate the variation start order. Not only that, at the time of game ball winning, it decides information (time information) whether it is the fluctuation aspect longer than fixed time by deciding whether it is the fluctuation aspect which becomes reach or not, the time information and fluctuation The fluctuation start order may be roughly determined and rearranged from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation mode that will be a reach at the time of winning (whether it is a long time fluctuation mode or a short time fluctuation mode), and the accurate fluctuation time (fluctuation mode) is Even with the pachinko machine 10 determined based on information such as the number of balls held at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to inform the player of a rough fluctuation start order.

  Therefore, the player may not be in the correct order of starting the change, but the fact that the sorting has been performed is included in the one in which the long-time fluctuation mode (the fluctuation mode to become reach) is suspended. Can play games with the expectation of a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the sortable period is determined according to the gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether the sort is possible (for example, a state in which the held symbol display is displayed), You may be comprised so that it may alert | report that rearrangement is possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to flexibly set the period in which sorting is possible, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities for sorting.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) In the above, the case has been described in which the special hitting fluctuation pattern table or the special falling fluctuation pattern table according to the gaming state is selected based on the jackpot success / failure determination result, and various fluctuation patterns are selected.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a predetermined number of holding balls of the first special symbol or more in the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol In the example, three or more) and the difference between the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol and the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol is that the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (this implementation) In the form, it is determined whether there are more than two or more, and in the case where there are more, a variation pattern out of a short time out of a variation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) shorter than other variation patterns is selected. Ru. As for the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, similarly to the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the difference between the number of holding balls of the second special symbol and the number of holding spheres of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is determined whether or not the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is larger than a predetermined number, and a fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the MPU 201 determines the state of the holding balls of each other and selects the special one. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the fluctuation pattern (in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern deviated from the short time) is selected.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 41 is a view schematically showing an adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e in the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table selected in common with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is used in the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (FIG. 43, S320) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (not shown), which will be described later. It is a fluctuation pattern table to be selected. Specifically, the number of holding balls of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern is three or more, and the difference between the number of holding balls of the other special symbol (the second special symbol in the case of the first special symbol) is two If the number is larger than the above, the adjustment extra deviation variation pattern table is selected. The adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a fluctuation pattern table which is selected only when the result of judgment of acceptance is out, and is constituted of only one type whose fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds. There is. Therefore, regardless of the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern determination counter CS3, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds) out of a short time is selected.

  Thus, by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, the number of holding balls is 3 or more, and the difference with the holding ball of the other special symbol is 2 or more, and the number of holding balls is equal to each other Even if it is not, it is possible to speed up the digestion of many holding balls, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be equally held, and only the other can be kept. The upper limit number (four in the present embodiment) can be prevented, and the occurrence of overflow can be prevented.

  In addition, by determining whether there are three or more holding balls of the special symbol to select the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of short time deviation is frequently selected in the state with few holding balls, the effect of the game ( It is possible to prevent the loss of the interest due to the change of the special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only one kind of fluctuation pattern (short time of 0.5 seconds) deviated in a short time is set in the adjustment special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41), but it is not limited thereto. It may be configured with a variation pattern of a short time deviation that is configured with a variation time of. In this way, by configuring, when the other special symbol is in motion, by changing the type (variation time) of the variation pattern out of the short time period to be selected according to the remaining variation time, it is possible to more hold ball The numbers can be equal to one another. In addition, the fluctuation time of the holding ball of the other special symbol may be predicted to change the fluctuation pattern of the short time deviation to be selected. By doing this, even if there is a relatively long fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C, etc.) among the holding balls of the special symbol with the smaller number of holding balls, it is possible to select It is possible to adjust the holding balls of the special symbols to each other more evenly by selecting the short-term deviation fluctuation pattern in accordance with it.

  In addition, although it was set as the structure which discriminate | determines the difference of a holding ball and determines the fluctuation pattern for adjustment in this embodiment, it is not restricted to it, The fluctuation which a special symbol of each other selects without judging the difference of a holding ball The pattern may be determined to select a fluctuation pattern such that the difference in fluctuation time is reduced. In detail, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation pattern selected by the second special symbol is determined, and if the variation pattern having a long variation time is selected, the variation of a relatively long variation time It may be configured to make the digesting speed of the holding balls equal to each other by determining the pattern (the variation time according to the variation end of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, etc.).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to adjust the numbers of holding balls to be equal to each other without determining extremely short or long variation patterns.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution winning device 630 assists the game balls to be easily winning alternately in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64b. Therefore, since the digesting speed of the holding ball is different depending on the difference of the selected fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time) between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the holding ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number may be uneven, or the distribution device 630 may not alternately distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, which may result in uneven distribution. However, when a bias occurs, if there are two or more differences between the holding balls in the three states before the number of holding balls reaches the upper limit number (four in this embodiment), the short time Since the variation pattern of the deviation is selected, the player can continue the game without worrying about the occurrence of the overflow at the holding ball of one of the special symbols.

  Referring to FIG. 42, in the second embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 43, in the second embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 2 (S320) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (S320). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, in the case where the result of the determination is out of order, it is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern out of a short time according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit ( S511). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S511: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S512). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is determined based on the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S513). The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, and in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot, the 15R jackpot table is in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot , 2R jackpot table is determined.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S511: No), it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more (S514). The number of holding balls of the first special symbol is determined based on the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. When it is determined that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more (S514: Yes), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol It is determined whether the value is 2 or more (that is, the number of the holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of the holding balls of the second special symbol) (S515). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e.

  When it is determined that the holding ball of the first special symbol is two or more more than the holding ball of the second special symbol (S515: Yes), the adjustment special out-of-out fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set . On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 3 (S514: No), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol If it is determined that the result is less than two (S515: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table 202e corresponding to the game state is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set.

  Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S518). The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the first variation pattern command is generated (S519). Here, the first variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S520). Then, the measurement start of the 1st fluctuation time which is the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol is set up (S521).

  Thus, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more, and further, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, The adjustment special out-of-variation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol ends in 0.5 seconds by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, and the next first special The holding ball is digested by starting the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the holding ball of the symbol. Therefore, the holding ball of the first special symbol is digested one after 0.5 seconds, and the speed of digesting the holding ball of the first special symbol is increased, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol Adjustment can be made to reduce the difference in holding balls.

  In addition, when a large number of gaming balls are won in the first starting opening 63a in a short time, and the difference in holding balls becomes large, or the first special symbol has a relatively long fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C, etc. ) Is selected, but in the second special symbol, if relatively short fluctuation patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern of normal deviation A etc.) are continuously selected and the difference between the holding balls becomes large (for example, the second (1) Even if the holding ball of the special symbol is 4 and the holding ball of the second special symbol is 1 etc.) The state of the holding ball is judged every time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, and the fluctuation pattern deviates from short time Because the process of whether or not to select is performed, in the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern of the short time deviation will be selected continuously, and it is adjusted promptly to reduce the difference of the holding ball Can. Therefore, the first special symbol reaches the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment), and the second special symbol is smaller (for example, one) than the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment), The game balls are also distributed to the first winning opening 63a by alternately allocating by the allocation winning device 630 when it is attempted to suspend the holding balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). It is possible to prevent the trouble of winning the prize and becoming an overflow.

  In addition, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is three or more, the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is the upper limit number (four in this embodiment) by determining the difference between the holding balls. The variation pattern out of a short time is not selected until the player gets one more piece, the variation pattern out of a short time is frequently selected, and the player can not enjoy the effect due to the variation of the special symbol sufficiently. It can prevent getting bored. In addition, it is also prevented that the player recognizes that the lottery result is out before the stop of the special symbol by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, and can not have a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. be able to.

  In addition, even if a difference in the holding balls occurs by selecting a relatively long fluctuation pattern (such as the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C), the fluctuation pattern of the short time deviation is selected thereafter, and It can be adjusted to reduce the difference. Therefore, the over-flow can be reduced, and a lot of fluctuation patterns with relatively long fluctuation time (such as the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C) can be selected to make the player enjoy the effect by the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent boredom in the game. Therefore, it is possible to perform a variety of effects, and to suppress the problem that the selection of fluctuation patterns can be limited (for example, extremely reducing the ratio of selecting fluctuation patterns such as spar reach C). it can.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the distribution winning device 630 alternately distributes the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. Therefore, in the case where the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is one difference, the holding ball of the first special symbol and the first special symbol are not selected so that the variation pattern out of a short time is not selected. 2 is to determine whether the difference between the special symbol and the holding ball is 2 or more. Therefore, even in the case where distribution is uniformly performed by the distribution winning device 630, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation pattern of the short time deviation from being selected frequently.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the determination result of the 1st special symbol is a hit, it comprised so that the fluctuation pattern for adjustment might not be selected. By configuring in this manner, the fluctuation pattern to be hit can be selected as a fluctuation pattern indicating a normal hit, and it is possible to produce a fluctuation pattern to be sufficiently hit by the player. In addition, when the success or failure judgment result of the first special symbol is a hit, since the big hit game is started after the change is stopped, there is no need to cope with problems such as overflow even if the change pattern for adjustment is not selected. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it discriminate | determined whether the number of the holding balls of a 1st special symbol is three or more, it may not be restricted to it but may be two or more, and you may set suitably by another number. Further, it is also possible to configure the difference between the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol directly without judging the number of holding balls of the first special symbol.

  Also, in this embodiment, it was determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, but three or more may be used. You may

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the variation pattern out of a short time is one kind of variation time of 0.5 seconds, the present invention is not limited thereto. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided and selected. The selection may be made using the counter value as in the selection of other variation patterns, or the state of the holding ball of the second special symbol (number of holding balls, difference of holding balls, held) You may select based on the fluctuation time etc. which were determined in advance, or if the second special symbol is fluctuating, it may be selected based on the remaining time.

  By comprising in this way, it can adjust so that the difference with the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol may be decreased more. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, to cause the player to play the game with the effect according to the normal fluctuation pattern, and to prevent being bored with the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected, but a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of the normal deviation A etc.) is selected from the normal deviation fluctuation pattern table. You may configure it. By configuring in this manner, the special symbol can be varied by the player according to the normal out-of-order variation pattern, and the player can reduce the sense of discomfort in selecting the variation pattern for adjustment.

  As for the second special symbol, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment as well as the first special symbol. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S203) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) is executed. .

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, in each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), the first is the second, the second, the second Is the only change to the first, and the detailed description and the effects to be obtained are the same, so the description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

  In this embodiment, if the difference between the number of balls held by the first special symbol and the number of balls held by the second special symbol is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (two or more in this embodiment), the fluctuation pattern deviates in a short time Is selected, but not limited to that, it is not limited to the case where the result of the judgment is out, and the variation pattern to be selected by the other special symbol is determined, so that the difference in the number of holding balls disappears The variation pattern may be configured to be selected. Specifically, if the number of the first special symbol holding ball is two more than the number of the second special symbol holding ball, and the fluctuation pattern selected by the second special symbol holding ball is a relatively short fluctuation pattern, Choose a short variation pattern (eg, a variation time of 0.5 seconds), and select a relatively long variation pattern that has a shorter variation pattern than that variation pattern and the difference in holding balls can be adjusted You should do it.

  By comprising in this way, the difference of a holding ball can be adjusted, performing a change of a more natural special symbol. Therefore, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern table dedicated for short time deviation is provided as the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the normal fluctuation pattern (both hit and deviation), A change pattern (for example, a short time change of 0.5 seconds) is set in the address for adjustment, and the head address is selected to select the change pattern for adjustment according to the difference of the holding balls. May be

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the game balls are equally distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distributing device 630 has been described, the distributing device 630 is not provided, and the first starting opening is provided. Even in the configuration in which the game balls randomly win at 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the difference between the holding balls can be adjusted to be even in the configuration of the present embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 45, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment described above, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the state of the holding ball, a fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected and adjusted to reduce the difference. Explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, under the same conditions for holding balls as in the first embodiment, the variation pattern with the smaller number of holding balls is the first among the holding balls with the larger number of holding balls. A variation pattern is selected in which the time until the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball starting to change starts to change is stopped.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in the following points. In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 adjusts the variation time of the special symbol with the smaller number of holding balls to adjust the difference between the holding balls with each other in a second embodiment. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 44, in the third embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) of the third embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. Instead of 2 (FIG. 43, S320), first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the third embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 45, in the third embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 44, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 3 (S330) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (S330). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, when the result of determination is out of order, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is smaller than the predetermined number of holding balls of the second special symbol by the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the case, it is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern for adjusting the difference.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), each process from S534 to S536 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (FIG. 45, S330), when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S531: No), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 3 It is determined whether the number is one or more (S534). The number of holding balls of the second special symbol is determined based on the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f. When it is determined that the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is three or more (S534: Yes), the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the second special symbol It is determined whether the value is 2 or more (that is, the holding ball of the second special symbol is two or more more than the holding ball of the first special symbol) (S535). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e from the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f.

  If it is determined that the holding ball of the second special symbol is two or more more than the holding ball of the first special symbol (S535: Yes), the second special symbol from the present time based on the reordering storage area 203u The first adjustment for special outlier fluctuation with the time until the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the first hold of the first (the reserved area of the second special symbol with the earliest change order) Pattern command is set.

  Here, among the value of the second variation time storage area 203t and the reserve area of the second special symbol in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u, it is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the suspension area, which has the earliest variation order. The fluctuation time is calculated by adding the value of the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern. When the first adjustment special deviation change pattern is selected, the selection of the change pattern in the process of S539 is skipped, and the next process of S540 is performed.

  Thus, at the time of the variation pattern selection of the first special symbol, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (three or more in the present embodiment), and the difference of the holding balls is two or more. In the case of (the first special symbol holding ball is less), among the holding balls of the second special symbol, consisting of the fluctuation time until the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the earliest holding of fluctuation order The selected fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, since the holding ball of the second special symbol is not digested until one of the holding balls of the second special symbol is digested and the second is to be digested, the digestion speed of the holding ball of the first special symbol is It becomes late and it can adjust so that the difference of the holding ball of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol decreases.

  Further, by determining whether or not the holding balls of the second special symbol are three or more, the fluctuation pattern for adjustment is frequently selected, and it is possible to suppress such a defect that the effect of the game is impaired.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the determination result of the 1st special symbol is a hit, it comprised so that the fluctuation pattern for adjustment might not be selected. By configuring in this manner, the fluctuation pattern to be hit can be selected as a fluctuation pattern indicating a normal hit, and it is possible to produce a fluctuation pattern to be sufficiently hit by the player. In addition, when the success or failure judgment result of the first special symbol is a hit, since the big hit game is started after the change is stopped, there is no need to cope with problems such as overflow even if the change pattern for adjustment is not selected. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it discriminate | determined whether the number of the holding balls of a 2nd special symbol is three or more, not only it but two or more may be sufficient, and you may set suitably by another number. In addition, it is also possible to configure so as to directly determine the difference between the holding balls of the second special symbol and the first special symbol without judging the number of holding balls of the second special symbol.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was judged whether the holding ball of the 2nd special symbol is 2 or more more than the holding ball of the 1st special symbol, 3 or more may be sufficient, and it is suitably set by other numbers You may

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the fluctuation time until the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol currently suspended first is selected is selected, it is not restricted to it, rather than the remaining fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol in fluctuation. It may be a long fluctuation time. In addition, a variation time longer than the variation time of the special symbol that is first reserved may be selected.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time until the end of the fluctuation of the first reserved special symbol is selected, but the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time close to or longer than the fluctuation time is selected. May be selected from the out-of-normal-time fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)). By configuring in this manner, the special symbol can be varied by the player according to the normal out-of-order variation pattern, and the player can reduce the sense of discomfort in selecting the variation pattern for adjustment.

  Further, the configurations of the second embodiment and the third embodiment may be combined. By configuring in this way, the difference between the holding balls can be adjusted to be reduced at the timing when both special symbols change, and it is possible to respond more quickly.

  In addition, also about the 2nd special symbol, each processing of the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (Drawing 45, S330) like the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (not shown) in a 2nd embodiment In the above, only the first one is changed to the second one, and the second one is changed to the first, and the detailed description and the advantageous effects are the same, so the description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

  Also, in this embodiment, it was determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, but three or more may be used. You may

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the variation pattern out of a short time is one kind of variation time of 0.5 seconds, the present invention is not limited thereto. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided and selected. The selection may be made using the counter value as in the selection of other variation patterns, or the state of the holding ball of the second special symbol (number of holding balls, difference of holding balls, held) You may select based on the fluctuation time etc. which were determined in advance, or if the second special symbol is fluctuating, it may be selected based on the remaining time.

  By comprising in this way, it can adjust so that the difference with the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol may be decreased more. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, to cause the player to play the game with the effect according to the normal fluctuation pattern, and to prevent being bored with the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected, but a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of the normal deviation A etc.) is selected from the normal deviation fluctuation pattern table. You may configure it. By configuring in this manner, the special symbol can be varied by the player according to the normal out-of-order variation pattern, and the player can reduce the sense of discomfort in selecting the variation pattern for adjustment.

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the game balls are equally distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distributing device 630 has been described, the distributing device 630 is not provided, and the first starting opening is provided. Even in the configuration in which the game balls randomly win at 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the difference between the holding balls can be adjusted to be even in the configuration of the present embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment described above, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the state of the holding ball, a fluctuation pattern out of a short time is selected and adjusted to reduce the difference. Explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been won continuously in either one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, and the winning is continuously made. In this case, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the successive winning is selected so that the variation pattern of the short time deviation is selected, and the difference of the holding balls is reduced.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, the second embodiment is to select the variation pattern out of a short time based on the fact that the game ball is continuously won in either one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in form.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 46 is a view schematically showing a part of another memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  The first winning flag 203v1 is a flag indicating that the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 63a. Specifically, the first winning flag 203v1 is such that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a and the first winning flag 203v1 is off in the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) described later. It is a flag that is set to on. On the other hand, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, it is set to off.

  The second winning flag 203v2 is the same as the first winning flag 203v1 except for the point to the second starting opening 63b, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  By configuring in this way, for example, when the game ball is continuously won in the first starting opening 63a without being distributed alternately to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distributing winning device 630. If the game ball has won the first starting opening 63a for the second time, the first winning flag 203v1 has already been set to ON, and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening 63a has been won continuously. It is configured to be able to.

  The first continuous winning flag 203v3 is a flag indicating that the gaming ball has won continuously in the first starting opening 63a. Specifically, in the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) described later, when the game ball has won in the first starting opening 63a, the first winning flag 203v1 is already set to ON. Is a flag set to on. On the other hand, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (FIG. 49, S340) described later, when the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set in the processing of S526, it is set to OFF.

  The second continuous winning flag 203v4 is the same as the first continuous winning flag 203v3 except for the point with respect to the second starting opening 63b, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  With such a configuration, it can be easily determined whether or not the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b has continuously won. Therefore, by selecting the variation pattern for adjustment based on the fact that the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 or the second winning flag 203v4 is set to ON, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are easily reserved. It can be configured to reduce ball differences.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process of the fourth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the second embodiment in part of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), and the start winning process (FIG. 15) 24 and S108), a start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) is added.

  Referring to FIG. 48, in the fourth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 47) executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) of the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. Instead of 2 (FIG. 43, S320), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the fourth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 49, in the fourth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 48, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 4 (S340) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S340). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, if the result of the determination is out of judgment, it is determined whether or not the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on (that is, whether the gaming ball has won continuously in the first starting opening 63a), if it is on, This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern out of a short time in order to adjust the difference.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), each process from S554 to S556 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), when it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is off (S551: No), whether the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on? (That is, whether or not the game ball has won continuously in the first starting opening 63a) is determined (S554). If it is determined that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on (S554: Yes), the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is set off. (S556).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is off (S554: No), a value obtained by subtracting the number of holding balls of the second special symbol from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is 2 It is determined whether or not the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more (i.e., more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol) (S555). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e.

  If it is determined that the holding ball of the first special symbol is two or more more than the holding ball of the second special symbol (S555: Yes), the processing of S556 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of subtracting the number of holding balls of the second special symbol from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 2 (S555: No), the special outlier fluctuation according to the gaming state The pattern table 202e is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set.

  By being configured in this manner, when the winning combination device 630 does not alternately distribute to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, if winning is continuously made on either one, Since the variation pattern is selected, the reserve of the player who has won the prize continuously is quickened, and can be made substantially the same as the one distributed alternately. Therefore, it can adjust so that the difference of the holding ball of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be made small.

  In addition, even when the first continuous winning flag 203v is off, the difference between the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (the holding ball of the first special symbol is 2) If there are more than a predetermined number, a variation pattern out of a short time is selected. Thereby, in the distribution winning device 630, even if the distribution is alternately made, the difference in the number of balls held by a predetermined number or more is caused by the difference in fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if (for example, two or more) occur, it is possible to adjust the difference of the holding balls to be small by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time.

  In the present embodiment, when the first continuous winning flag 203v is off, the difference in the holding balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same as in the second embodiment. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the game without sufficiently enjoying the effect due to the variation of the special symbol because the variation pattern out of the short time is frequently selected for a short time. In addition, it is also prevented that the player recognizes that the lottery result is out before the stop of the special symbol by selecting the fluctuation pattern out of a short time, and can not have a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the first continuous winning flag 203v is on, the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When the flag 203v is on, the process of S555 is executed, and when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol by two or more, the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) may be set. By configuring in this manner, even when the first starting opening 63a is continuously prized, if the difference between the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not less than a predetermined number, a normal fluctuation pattern is displayed. It can be configured to select, and it can be suppressed that the fluctuation pattern out of the frequent for a short time is selected.

  In addition, also about the 2nd special symbol, each processing of the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (Drawing 49, S340) similarly to the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (not shown) in a 2nd embodiment In the above, only the first one is changed to the second one, and the second one is changed to the first, and the detailed description and the advantageous effects are the same, so the description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 50, in the fourth embodiment, start winning process 2 (S120), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120). The start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) of the fourth embodiment is different from the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the second embodiment in the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S906) and the second Continuous winning determination processing (S980) is added to each. In the processes of S901 to S914 in the fourth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S901 to S914 in the second embodiment are executed. If it is determined in the process of S901 that the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 63a (S901: Yes), the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) is executed.

  In the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), it is first determined whether the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON (that is, after the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 63a last time) (S961). If it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is on, the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is set on (S962). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is off (that is, the gaming ball has won the second starting hole 63b last time) (S961: No), the first winning flag 203v1 is set to on. (S963). Thereafter, the second winning flag 203v2 is set to off (S964).

  By configuring in this way, it is determined whether the gaming ball has won continuously in the first starting opening 63a without the gaming ball alternately winning in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Can.

  In the present embodiment, when the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on, the variation pattern of the short time deviation is selected, but it is determined whether the second continuous winning flag 203v4 is on, When it is on, as in the third embodiment, a variation pattern composed of variation times until the special symbol for the one with the earliest variation start order of the second special symbol is suspended for variation stop It may be selected. By comprising in this way, it can adjust so that the difference of the holding ball of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be made small.

  The second consecutive winning determination process (S 907) is a modification of the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S 960), since the first is changed to the second and the second to the first. , Detailed illustration and explanation are omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the first winning flag 203v1 and the second winning flag 203v2 are respectively provided, but only one of them may be provided, and it may be configured to be discriminated according to the on / off state thereof. . Specifically, in the case where only the first winning flag 203v1 is configured, if the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON, the first starting hole 63a is won, and the first winning flag 203v1 is off. If it is set, it is determined that the second starting port 63b is a prize. With this configuration, the number of flags and the like can be reduced, and the required capacity of the RAM can be reduced. The same applies to the first continuous winning flag 203v3 and the second continuous winning flag 203v4.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of winning two consecutive prizes in one starting opening, the variation pattern for adjustment is determined and the difference in the holding balls is adjusted, but it is not limited thereto. It is a special symbol, and the variation pattern for adjustment is configured to be determined when the variation of the special symbol is completed twice or more continuously while the other starts and ends the variation of one special symbol. You may In addition, by combining winning in a row and variation in a row, it is possible to adjust the difference in holding balls more evenly.

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the game balls are equally distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distributing device 630 has been described, the distributing device 630 is not provided, and the first starting opening is provided. Even in the configuration in which the game balls randomly win at 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the difference between the holding balls can be adjusted to be even in the configuration of the present embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the holding symbol displayed in the lower display area Ds is frame button 22 by the holding number display update process (FIG. 37, S1406) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the above case, the held symbol display corresponding to the held area where the reordering flag 223k7 is on is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting to change.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON in the pending number display updating process 2 (S1440 in FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Sort the held symbol display corresponding to the held area in the order of starting to change, and display the background (held symbol display of the held symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the held area for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON Background)) (flash display).

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifth embodiment, one of the reserved symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) in which the reserved symbol display (sorting display corresponding to the pending area where the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON) on which the sorting has been performed is displayed The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the background screen of b) is displayed in a blinking manner (flash display) indicating that sorting has been performed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 52 is a view showing the display from before the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to after the rearrangement in the fifth embodiment. Before sorting, the hold display symbols corresponding to the order in which the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b are won in the lower display area Ds (if it is a hold symbol display based on winning in the first start opening 63a “○”, “●” is displayed in the case of a held symbol display based on winning in the second start opening 63 b. In the present embodiment, since the distribution winning device 630 alternately distributes the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is easily displayed alternately.

  Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display is executed, and the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display is executed in the order of starting the fluctuation. Then, the background is blinked (indicated by hatching in FIG. 52) with respect to the held symbol display (in FIG. 52, the held symbol displayed in Ds1 to Ds5) displayed at that time. Thereafter, with respect to the holding symbol display for the game ball which has newly won the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the holding symbol display is displayed in the order of winning (the order in which the winning is established) The symbol display area (Ds6 to Ds7 in FIG. 52) is displayed in a normal background pattern (for example, a blue background color) without being blinked.

  As described above, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player executes the sorting by causing the background of the held symbol display area to blink on the displayed held symbol display. It is possible to easily recognize the holding symbol display. Therefore, with respect to the order in which the display of the reserved symbol display is displayed, it is possible to easily identify whether it is an order of winning or an order of starting to change. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, with respect to the held symbol display winning after the rearrangement is performed, the held symbol display is displayed in the order of winning and the background of the held symbol display area is also the normal background, so the player , It can be easily identified that the displayed reserved symbol display is before sorting. Furthermore, with respect to the held symbol display for which rearrangement has been performed, since the background display blinks, the player recognizes the held symbol display before and after rearrangement at once. be able to.

  In addition, when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display starts to change, the reserved symbol display is erased (digested), and each displayed reserved symbol display is shifted one by one to the right reserved symbol display area and displayed However, since the blinking display of the background is also shifted and displayed accordingly, the player can easily identify the reserved symbol display for which sorting has been performed even if the digested symbol display is digested. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the background is blinked and displayed as a notification mode indicating the reserved symbol display on which sorting has been performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The color of the background is changed (for example, sorting is usually blue). It may be configured to change to red when executed, or the display may be changed as appropriate, such as blinking a reserved symbol display, changing a color, adding a pattern, or the like, instead of the background. Furthermore, it may be configured to notify by voice, characters, etc. (For example, voices and characters “The third reserved symbols have been rearranged” are displayed).

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 53, S1400). With respect to the main processing (FIG. 53, S1400) of the fifth embodiment, with respect to the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment, the pending number display updating process (FIG. 37, S1406) is replaced with the pending number display update. In place of the process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) and the pending reordering process (FIG. 40, S1413), a pending reordering process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is added. In the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the fifth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S1405 is completed, the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 54, in the fifth embodiment, pending number display update processing 2 (S1440), which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pending number display update process 2 (S1440). The number-of-helds display update processing 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is processing for setting a command for displaying the held symbol display in the held symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display region Ds.

  In the number-of-holds display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440), first, the variable display start time of the change start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the follow sort hold storage area 223k is updated (S1441). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 of the follow sort hold memory area 223k is on is a hold corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 is off in the variable display start order. In the symbol display, the holding symbol display is displayed in the holding order (S 1442).

  The background of the holding symbol display area corresponding to the holding symbol display area corresponding to the holding area of the secondary sorting holding storage area 223k in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in flashing (flash) display, and the sorting flag 223k7 The background display of the held symbol display area where the held symbol display corresponding to the held area where is off is displayed generates a background display change command to be displayed on the display control device 114 with a normal background (for example, blue in this embodiment) (S1443).

  In this manner, the player performs sorting on the player's side by displaying the background of the holding symbol display area in which the holding symbol display of the holding area for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in a blinking manner. It can be informed that it is a symbol display. Therefore, the player can recognize that the displayed holding symbol display is displayed in the order of the start of fluctuation according to the notification mode.

  In addition, the background of the held symbol display area in which the held symbol display corresponding to the held area for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed blinked, and the held area for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to OFF Since the background of the holding symbol display area corresponding to the holding symbol display corresponding to (that is, the holding that has been established after the reordering has been performed) is displayed with the normal background, the player can It is possible to easily recognize the executed held symbol display and the held symbol display that has not been reordered.

  In addition, every time this pending number display updating process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed, a new background display change command is generated, so that a new on hold occurs or a special corresponding to the on-hold symbol display Even when the symbol starts to change and the reserve is digested, the reserve symbol display and the blinking display indicating that the sorting has been performed can be updated appropriately in accordance with the state.

  Further, the reordering flag 223k7 is operated (in this embodiment, the frame button 22 in the reorderable period) in the pending reordering process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. When pressed, it is set to ON in all pending areas where pending data is stored. As a result, all displayed pending symbol displays are sorted and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending order of holding. On the other hand, after the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON, regarding the newly stored hold, the sorting flag 223k7 is off, so the order established without being sorted, ie, the third symbol display device 81 Displayed at the end of the display of the pending symbol displayed on.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter Also, while the display of the sorted symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, the display of the symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurred) hold is displayed first in the formation order for the display of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold. Since it is displayed at the tail end without being interrupted and displayed on the held symbol display being played, the player can suppress the problem of confusing the order in which the current display is displayed. Can.

  Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to inform the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

  Also, in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, when the holding symbol of the late formation order is interrupted and displayed before the holding symbol of the early formation order, Among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, it may be a big hit about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption You can have expectations.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot in the holding symbol display, and can operate the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. The frame button 22 can be operated with a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, a voice is output, so it is possible to further amplify and produce an expectation for the jackpot.

  Returning to the main processing (FIG. 53, S1400), the description will be continued. In the processes of S1407 to S1412 in the fifth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1407 to S1412 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S1412 is completed, the pending reordering process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 55, pending reordering processing 2 (S1450), which is one of the main processing (S1400 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this reservation rearrangement process 2 (S1450). In the case of the pending sort process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450), when the frame button 22 is operated, it is informed that the sort is executed (executed) when it is the sortable period of the reserved symbol display. This is a process for setting the sorting notification sound command and setting the sorting flag 223k7 of the sub sort suspension storage area 223k to ON.

  In pending reordering process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450), first, it is determined whether or not it is a reorderable period (S1451). In the sortable period, gaming states other than the state with no hold established in the big hit game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is not one or more hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively) are arranged The exchangeable period is set.

  When it is determined that it is the sortable period (S1451: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1452). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the character "May be reorderable!" And the player can operate the frame button 22. Informing a period that is The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be controlled to light a dedicated lamp or the like.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation can be performed, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. In addition, as long as the rearrangement possible period is not particularly provided, and the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the arrangement display may naturally be performed.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1453). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1453: Yes), a rearrangement notification sound command is set (S1454). As the sorting notification sound command, a notification sound (in the present embodiment, a voice "sorting") indicating that the sorting is performed (executed) is output from the voice output device 226.

  In the present embodiment, although sound is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific sound effect (for example, music of a fanfare, etc.) may be output. The output time may be set appropriately in accordance with the effect, and it may be configured such that a dedicated melody or sound effect is output while the rearranged reserved symbol display is displayed. By configuring in this manner, the player can be strongly aware that the sorting has been performed, and can easily understand that the reserved symbol display is sorted.

  The reordering flag 223k7 of all the reserve areas in which the reserve data of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k is stored is set to ON (S1455).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reordering period is not reached (S1451: No) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1453: No), this process is ended. By this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be focused next (the special symbol to be the variable display start). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and to play the game smoothly.

  Further, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, since the distribution ball 630 is configured to easily win the game ball alternately by the distribution device 630, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured. The game is played evenly and the game can be played efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, sorting of the holding symbol is performed as a configuration to be executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and is executed whenever a new holding is stored. Naturally, it may be configured as well. By configuring in this manner, the player can always correctly recognize the fluctuation display start order by the holding symbols rearranged in the fluctuation start order.

  In this embodiment, the sortable period is other than a state in which there is no hold established in the jackpot game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (state in which there is no hold of one or more first special symbols and second special symbols). The game state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a sortable period even during a jackpot game, or conversely, a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed It may be set to other than, etc., and may be determined as appropriate.

  When the jackpot game is set to a sortable period, it is necessary to sort in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped in the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being suspended and the remaining fluctuation time during temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode is combined with the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode is displayed. The sorting can be performed in the correct fluctuation start order, and the player can be notified of the correct fluctuation start order even in the jackpot gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 57, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fifth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the holding symbol display area is blinked with respect to all the holding symbol displays displayed in the holding symbol display area. The case was explained.

  On the other hand, in the modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the background of the reserved symbol display area is only for the reserved symbol display of the variation start order which is rearranged and executed in an order different from the establishment order. Blinks.

  That is, the modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in the following point. In the modification of the fifth embodiment, in the pending area display updating process 2 (FIG. 57, S1440), the pending area with the change start order different from the winning order in the pending area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that a background display change command for causing the background to blink on and off is generated with respect to the reserved symbol display area in which the symbol display is displayed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing from before the reordering of the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to after the reordering in the modification of the fifth embodiment. Before sorting, the first special symbol holding symbol display (in the present embodiment, "○") and the second special symbol holding symbol display (in the present embodiment, "●") are displayed in the order of establishment . The first special symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3 is displayed in the reserved symbol display "○" and the reserved symbol display area Ds4 because the player operates the frame button 22 to execute sorting. The reserved symbol display "●" of the second special symbol is rearranged, and the background is displayed in a blinking manner, which is a display mode (informing mode) indicating that the rearrangement is performed.

  In addition, in the case where the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved usually, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru.

  Here, the background blinks only for the reserved symbol display whose display order is changed due to the formation order and the change start order being different and rearrangement being performed. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol whose order is late is inserted before the holding symbol whose order is early, and the order is changed. It is possible to easily recognize the displayed reserved symbol display. Therefore, among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, in the jackpot about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption I can have hopes.

  In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot reserve in the held symbol display, and operates the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. It is possible to operate the frame button 22 with a sense of expectation to the jackpot.

  In addition, when the display order of the held symbol display is changed to show that the rearrangement has been performed, the background is blinked and, further, against the held symbol display displayed when the rearrangement is performed. Alternatively, the background may be displayed in a special color (for example, red) so that the display of the reserved symbol display on which the rearrangement has been performed may be identified. By configuring in this manner, the player can identify both the reserved symbol display displayed when the rearrangement is performed and the reserved symbol display whose display order has been changed by the rearrangement. Therefore, confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

  57, in the modification of the fifth embodiment, pending number display update processing 2 (FIG. 57, FIG. 57) which is one of main processing (FIG. 53, S1400) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113. S1440) will be described.

  The processes in S1441 to S1442 in the modification of the fifth embodiment are the same as the processes in S1441 to S1442 in the fifth embodiment. In the modification of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1442 is executed, the winning order and the order of starting to change start from among the reserve areas of the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k for which the sort flag 223k7 is set to ON are selected. It is determined whether there is a different reserved area (S1445). Here, the reserve area and the variation start order storage area 223k4 are determined to determine whether the order is different. Specifically, if the change start order stored in the change start order storage area 223k4 in the reserve area 2 is the third, although the winning order is the second, the change start order is the third. And it is determined that the order is different.

  When it is determined that there is a holding area in which the winning order and the change start order are different among the holding areas of the sub sort holding memory area 223k for which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON (S1445: Yes) Of the holding areas for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON, the background of the holding symbol display area in which the holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area determined to be different from the winning order and the change start order is displayed is blinked. A background display change command to be displayed (changed) is generated (S1446).

  In this manner, when the sorting is performed, the background is blinked and displayed for the held symbol display in which the display order has been changed with respect to the held symbol display being displayed, whereby the player is changed in the order It is possible to identify the holding symbol.

  In addition, the notification mode which notifies the held symbol display whose display order has been changed is not limited to blinking display, but may be indicated by character display, or may be notified by voice, or other display instead of blinking display. It may be an aspect, or the reserved symbol display may be displayed in a special color or pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fifth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the holding symbol display area is blinked with respect to all the holding symbol displays displayed in the holding symbol display area. The case was explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the lower display area Ds is displayed with the reserved symbol display in the winning order before the rearrangement, and the fluctuation before the rearrangement display area Dsa and the rearrangement after the rearrangement A post-sorting pending display area Dsb is provided in which the pending symbol display is displayed in the order of starting the. Until the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order only in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the held symbol display displayed at that time changes. Are displayed in the hold display area Dsb after sorting.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in the following points. The sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order and the reserved symbol display is displayed in the order of starting the variation separately.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before sorting (sorting not executed) and after sorting (sorted execution completed) in the sixth embodiment. . Before sorting, the first special symbol holding symbol display ("O" in the present embodiment) and the second special symbol holding symbol in the holding symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds5) of the pre-sorting holding display area Dsa The displays (in the present embodiment, “●”) are displayed in the order of winning. At this time, the reserved symbol display is not displayed in the after-sorting suspension display area Dsb.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 and sorting is performed, the sorting symbol is displayed in the order of winning in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa, as sorted. In the pending display area Dsb, the pending symbol display currently displayed in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa is displayed in the order of starting to change.

  In this way, when sorting is executed, the display of the reserved symbols before and after sorting is displayed in parallel at the top and bottom, so the player can sort how the sorting was performed. It is possible to compare and recognize the reserved symbol display of the pre-replacement reserve display area Dsa and the reserve symbol display of the post-sorting reserve display area Dsb. Therefore, in the order of starting to change, it is possible to easily recognize the held symbol display in which the order changes from the winning order.

  In addition, in the case where the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved usually, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru.

  Here, with regard to the held symbol display whose order of establishment and change start order are different and the display order is changed by the reordering, the pre-resort hold display area Dsa is compared with the post-sort hold display area Dsb. It can be easily recognized by doing. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol whose order is late is inserted before the holding symbol whose order is early, and the order is changed. It is possible to easily recognize the displayed reserved symbol display. Therefore, among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, in the jackpot about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption I can have hopes.

  In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot reserve in the held symbol display, and operates the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. It is possible to operate the frame button 22 with a sense of expectation to the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol display that was displayed when the frame button 22 was operated is displayed in the order for starting to change in the after-reorder-hold display area Dsb, but the invention is not limited thereto, and is thereafter established. It is also possible to display in the reserve chart display area Dsb after sorting in the winning order with respect to the pending.

  Further, it is also possible to always display the reserved symbol display after sorting and before sorting, regardless of the player's operation of the frame button 22. By configuring in this manner, the player can always visually recognize the held symbol display displayed in the winning order and the order of starting to change, so that the change is started in the order different from the winning order by sorting. It can quickly recognize that there is a symbol display.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 59, S1400). The main process (S1400 in FIG. 59) of the sixth embodiment is the same as the main process (S1400 in FIG. 53) of the fifth embodiment except for the pending number display updating process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440). An update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is added. In the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the sixth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S1405 is completed, the pending number display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 60, in the sixth embodiment, pending number display update processing 3 (S1460) which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the pending number display updating process 3 (S1460). In the number-of-holds display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), the hold symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display region Ds before the reordering hold display region Dsa and the reordering hold display region Dsb are reserved symbols It is a process for setting a command for displaying a display.

  In the number-of-holds display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), first, the change display start time of the change start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the follow sort change storage area 223k is updated (S1461). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  It is determined whether the follow sort flag 223k7 of the pending area 1 in the follow sort pending storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462). If it is determined that the follow sort flag 223k7 of the pending area 1 in the follow sort pending storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462: Yes), the sort flag is turned on in the post-sort pending display area Dsb. A display suspension display command is set to display the suspension symbol display of the suspension area set to in the order of starting to change (S1463).

  By performing control in this way, when the reordering is performed, the post-sorting pending display area Dsb is displayed only for the displayed reserved symbol display (the pending area where the reordering flag 223k7 is set to on). You can display the hold symbol display on.

  In response to the hold stored in the hold area in the pre-resort hold display area Dsa, a display hold display command to be displayed in order of winning is generated (S1464). As a result, it is possible to always display the reserved symbol display in the winning order in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa. In addition, when the sorting flag 223k7 is on, it is possible to display the pending symbol display in the after-sorting pending display area Dsb and the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the follow sort flag 223k7 of the pending area 1 in the sort pending storage area 223k is set to off (S1462: No), the processing of S1464 is executed. Thereby, when the sorting flag is off in the pending area 1 (that is, all pending areas), the pending symbol display is displayed in the winning order only in the pre-sorting pending display area Dsa, and the sorting is executed. It is possible to easily make the player recognize that it is not done.

  Further, in the state where the sorting is not performed, the holding symbol display is not displayed in the after-sorting holding display area Dsb until the player operates the frame button 22, so the player operated the frame button 22. At the same time, it is possible to make the player more motivated to perform sorting by increasing the change of the display when the holding symbol display is displayed in the after-sorting hold display region Dsb.

  In the present embodiment, the sorting flag 223k7 is judged only in the holding area 1, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the sorting flag may be judged for all the holding areas in which various data are stored. Naturally, it may be configured to determine whether or not the switch is on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the post-reorder hold display area Dsb is always displayed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Only the pre-reorder hold display area Dsa is displayed at all times, and the rearranging is performed. Is displayed (when the player operates the frame switch 22) and the display of the reserved display area Dsb is displayed, and when all the rearranged reserved symbol displays are digested (variation start), the display is automatically hidden. May be configured as follows. In addition, when it comes to the rearrangement possible period, it is made the constitution which displays the letter which informs that it is possible to rearrange, but instead, when it becomes possible to rearrange, after the rearrangement reservation reservation display area Dsb (displayed symbol display is displayed (Not shown) may be displayed to notify the player that sorting of the reserved symbol display is possible. By configuring in this way, the post-reorder hold display area Dsb is not always displayed, and the space can be set as the upper display area Dm, and variable display of main symbols, display of effect symbols, etc. It can be displayed in a large space. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result which is easy to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, there is no suspension established during the jackpot game or different starting openings 63a and 63b (a state in which there is one or more suspension of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) In the gaming states other than the above, the case of setting as the sortable period has been described.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is set to be included in the sortable period even during the jackpot game.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot game starts, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 recalculates the time when the fluctuation of each hold is started from the jackpot game after. Then, the sorting data is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 sets the sorting possible period even during the big hit game and executes the sorting in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. It is different from.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 61, in the seventh embodiment, the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 61, S103) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. Do. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 61, S103). The large opening opening and closing process (FIG. 61, S103) of the seventh embodiment not only controls the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 65, but also when the big hit game starts, the fluctuation of each suspension starting from the big hit This is a process for recalculating the start time and generating sorting data based on the data recalculated in the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 61, S103), first, it is determined whether it is the start of the jackpot game (S131). Determination of whether it is the start of the jackpot game is the process of S608 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204) or the process of S808 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the jackpot It is determined whether or not the start of has been set.

  If it is determined that the jackpot game starts (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each suspension area stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u The value is recalculated taking into account the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol or second special symbol starting from the jackpot after the big hit (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each reserve area stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u The value of 大 is recalculated starting from the jackpot (S 134).

  Based on the change start time recalculated in the process of S133 or S134 and stored in the change start time storage area 203u5, a rearrangement data command is generated for each reserve area (S135).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is judged whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S136: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S137). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S137: Yes), processing is performed to open the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S137: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140). If it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), processing to close the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S142). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S142: Yes), the ending command is set (generated) (S143).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is over (S144). If it is determined that the jackpot game is over (S144: Yes), the end of the jackpot game is set (S145). It is determined whether it is a definite variation jackpot (S146). The determination as to whether it was a probability variation jackpot became an opportunity to carry out a jackpot game, and it is determined whether the lottery result is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

  If it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has been made (S146: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S144: No), or if it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is not found (S146: No), this processing ends.

  Thus, when the jackpot game starts, the fluctuation start time in each holding area starting from after the jackpot game is updated. Therefore, even when the player operates the frame button 22 during the jackpot game, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also generates the rearrangement data command based on the updated fluctuation start time. It is possible to update the data of the sort rearranging storage area 223k and rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting the fluctuation after the big hit game.

  In addition, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and if it is temporarily stopped, after the remaining fluctuation time has elapsed for the suspension of the special symbol, By calculating the fluctuation start time as a starting point, it is possible to calculate a more accurate fluctuation start time and generate a rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting more accurate change based on the change start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 62, S1400). The main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) of the seventh embodiment is different from the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) with respect to the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. 63, S1470) has been added. In the processes of S1401 to S1413 in the seventh embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S1413 is completed, command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed.

  The command determination process 2 (S1470) which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 2 (S1470). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed in the main process (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

  In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) of the seventh embodiment, the processes of S1520 and S1521 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. In the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the seventh embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment are performed. If it is determined in the process of S1517 that the first or second special symbol variation resume command has not been received (S1517: No), the process of S1520 is executed.

  In the process of S1520, it is determined whether or not the reordering data command output by the main control device 110 has been received. If it is determined that the reordering data command has been received (S1520: Yes), the data in the change start time storage area 223k5 of the sub sort reserving storage area 223k is updated based on the received reordering data command. Here, the rearrangement data command is data indicating the recalculated variation start time. Note that the rearrangement data command is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and may naturally be generated based on each data of the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement data command has not been received (S1520: No), processing according to the other commands is executed (S1519).

  In the present embodiment, the description is omitted, but if the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b during the big hit game, the first prefetching process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. In S923 of S25 or S907 or S942 of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), the fluctuation start time is calculated starting from after the end of the jackpot game.

  In this way, when the jackpot game is started, the fluctuation start time of each hold is recalculated starting from after the jackpot game end, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a sort data command, Since the value of the variation start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the area 223k is also updated, the reserve symbol display can be rearranged in the order of the variation start even if the jackpot game is set as the sortable period.

  In addition, even if a game ball is won in the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b during the jackpot game, data indicating the change start time after the end of the jackpot game is transmitted by the prize command, so the voice lamp control device The 113 can also rearrange the start order of fluctuation based on the fact that the frame button 22 has been operated with respect to the newly held held symbol display. Therefore, even during a jackpot game that tends to be monotonous, the player can perform an operation to rearrange the reserved symbol display, and can rearrange the reserved symbol display to enjoy the game.

  In addition, in the case where the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved usually, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru.

  Therefore, the player operates the frame button 22 even during a big hit, and rearranges the holding symbol display, thereby interrupting the holding symbol displayed before the holding symbol displayed by interruption. It is possible to have an expectation as to whether or not it is a jackpot for the suspension generated by the winning of the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the suspension symbol displayed in.

  In this manner, the player operates the frame button 22 during the jackpot to hold the jackpot in the held symbol display and is expected to change the arrangement order whether the jackpot can not be obtained continuously. The frame button can be operated to increase the fun in the jackpot game.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64-72. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, 907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. In the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914), winning commands which are numbered in order of fluctuation start time and which indicate the order are output to the audio lamp control device 113b, and rearrangement is performed based on the order. Case was explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs the first prefetching process (FIG. 25) even if the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. , 907) or in the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S914), a prize command is generated for various counter values acquired based on a prize without being numbered in the order of start of fluctuation. When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command, it calculates the variation start time based on the counter values indicated by the winning command, assigns the variation start order, and operates the frame button 22. Based on what has been done, the sort of the held symbol display is performed in that order.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eighth embodiment, the first embodiment is performed in that the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 executes sorting of the reserved symbol display by calculating and numbering the variation start order based on the received winning command. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in form.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 64 is a view schematically showing a part of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. The ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a big hit random number table 222a, a big hit type table 222b, a special hit variation pattern table 222c, and a special out variation pattern table 222d. Note that these tables are the same as the big hit random number table 202a, the big hit type table 202b, the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. , I omit the explanation.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the rearrangement pending storage area 203 u of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 is deleted. About this, illustration is omitted.

  As described above, since each table is stored also in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the ROM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the pay command from the main control device 110 Based on each counter value, before the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display starts to change, the jackpot determination and the selection of the change pattern are performed in advance, the change start time is calculated, and the change start time is arranged in the order of starting change The change start order can be numbered based on the change start time so as to be replaceable. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not have to execute each control process for determining the change start order in advance, and the control load can be reduced.

  In the eighth embodiment, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process of the eighth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment in the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) instead of the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). Has been added.

  Referring to FIG. 66, in the eighth embodiment, start winning process 3 (S150) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). The start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) of the eighth embodiment is a first preread process (FIG. 25, S 907) as compared to the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment. The prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) is replaced with the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), and the second prefetch process 2 (S1060) is added.

  67, in the eighth embodiment, the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) which is one process of the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050). In the first pre-reading process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) of the eighth embodiment, each counter value obtained based on the game ball winning in the first starting opening in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) Is a process for generating a winning command.

  In the first look-ahead processing 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), first, each counter value (special hit random number) newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in the start winning processing 3 (FIG. 66, S150) The counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C4) are read out (S1051).

  A winning command is generated based on each counter value (the value read in S1051) newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S1052). The winning command indicates each counter value, and the voice lamp control device 113 is a command that can determine the winning order based on the winning command.

  Further, as for the second prefetch process 2 (S1060), since the first is only changed to the second in the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), the illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Do.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the jackpot, selects the variation pattern, calculates the variation start time, and starts the variation based on the acquired counter value in the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050). Since the numbering of the order is not performed, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Further, although the present embodiment is configured to generate only for the newly established hold for the prize command, the present invention is not limited thereto, for all the holds stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. It may be configured to generate again. By configuring in this manner, the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 can update all the data of the follow sort reserving storage area 223k every time the game ball wins, and the data is broken due to noise or the like. Also in this case, the processing such as sorting can be performed by being updated.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 68, S1400). The main process (FIG. 68, S1400) of the eighth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) with respect to the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. 69, S1490) is replaced with the pending reordering process (FIG. 40, S1413), and pending reordering process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) is added.

  In the eighth embodiment, a command determination process 3 (S1490) which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 68) performed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 3 (S1490). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S 1490) of the eighth embodiment, the process of S 1530 is added instead of the processes of S 1513 and S 1514 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S 1414) of the first embodiment. There is. For the other processing, the same processing as the command determination processing (S1414 in FIG. 36) of the first embodiment is executed.

  In command determination processing 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, it is determined whether a winning command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1512). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), each received counter value (from special winning random number counter C1, special hitting type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, variation pattern determination counter C4) Is extracted and stored in the other memory area 223m in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1530). Here, in the other memory area, a winning sequence (a winning sequence obtained by combining the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b) indicated by the winning command is identifiably stored for each counter value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), the processing of S1517 is executed. The processing after this has already been described in the first embodiment, and thus will not be described.

  In the present embodiment, each counter value extracted from the winning command is stored in the other memory area 223m. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to be stored in the corresponding holding area of the secondary sorting hold storage area 223m. It is also good. By configuring in this manner, the winning order of each counter value can be determined by the hold area, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG. 70, pending reordering processing 3 (S1480) which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this pending reordering process 3 (S1480). With regard to pending reordering processing 3 (FIG. 70, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, the processes of S1811 and S1812 are added to the pending reordering processing (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment. For the other processing, the same processing as the pending reordering processing (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment is executed.

  In reserve rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480), first, in command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490), a winning command is received, and each counter value is stored in the other memory area 223 m (ie, It is determined whether or not a winning command has been received (S1811). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1811: Yes), the pending sort order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is executed. The pending sort order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) will be described in detail later, but is a process for determining the variation start order of the pending symbol display based on each counter value indicated by the received winning command. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S 1811: No), the processing of S 1801 is executed. Since the process from S1801 is the same as the process from S1801 of the pending reordering process (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment, the detailed description will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 71, in the eighth embodiment, a pending sort order determination process (S1812) which is one process of the pending sort process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Will be explained. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the pending reordering order determination processing 3 (S1812). The pending reordering order determination process 3 (FIG. 71, S1812) of the eighth embodiment is a process for determining the change start order based on the respective counter values indicated by the winning command.

  In the hold rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S 1812), first, each counter value stored in the other memory area 223 m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (special hit random number counter C 1, special hit type counter C 2, The fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern determination counter C4) are read out (S1821).

  The read data is stored in the hold area corresponding to the winning order indicated by the winning command in the rearrangement hold storage area 223k (in the present embodiment, the winning commands are output in the order of winning, so among the free storage areas, It may be stored in the area where the winning order is the smallest). A fluctuation display start time is calculated at which fluctuation display based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value) is started (S1822).

  This fluctuation start time, as shown in FIG. 12, is a special symbol in the fluctuation display corresponding to the newly stored holding data (if it is the holding data based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second If it is a reserve data based on the special symbol 63b, each reserve data previously stored is determined based on the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol) and the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the newly stored reserve data. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation time. Here, the remaining variation time is determined based on the first variation time storage area 223i or the second variation time storage area 223j.

  Here, if the newly stored pending data is the pending data based on the first starting port 63a, the newly stored pending data is a previously held data based on the same starting port as the newly stored pending data. (Based on the first special symbol) pending data based on the first starting opening 63a stored in the first storage, while if the newly stored pending data is pending data based on the second starting opening 63b, it is stored first Data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second start port 63b being held.

  When the variable display start time is calculated, the post-rearrangement order is renumbered in the ascending order of the variable display start time of all the suspension data stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S1823). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, the renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the newly displayed variable data display start order of suspended data is interrupted by the variable data display start sequence of the previously stored data, it is natural that only the change order is renumbered. Good.

  It is determined whether the gaming state at the start of variation is a high probability gaming state (probable variation gaming state) (S1824). Here, by the time the special symbol corresponding to the newly established hold becomes the fluctuation start, the special symbol which is determined by stopping the fluctuation is determined and the gaming state at the time of the fluctuation start is determined.

  If it is determined that the gaming state at the start of the change is the high probability gaming state (S1824: Yes), the first special symbol is based on the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time. The judgment result is stored in the pass / fail judgment result storage area 223k1 of the hold area of the corresponding secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S1825). On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S1824: No), the jackpot determination value of the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability is set. Based on the judgment of the first special symbol, the judgment result is stored in the judgment result storage area 223k1 of the holding area of the corresponding sorting rearrangement storage area 223k (S1826).

  Next, the sub hold reordering storage area updating process (FIG. 72) is executed (S1827). The follow sort storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827) will be described in detail later, but based on the result of the pass / fail judgment of the pending data stored in the follow sort pending storage area 223k in the order of actual variable display start. The jackpot type (whether or not it is a positive change) and the change pattern (change time) are determined based on the respective counter values and stored (updated).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the secondary suspension rearrangement storage area updating process (S1827), which is one process of the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812), will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the sub hold reordering pending storage area updating process (S1827).

  In the secondary reserve rearranging storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827), it is first determined whether the success / failure determination result predicted in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the secondary sort order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) was a big hit (S1831). If it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted in the processing of S1825 or S1826 in the pending sort order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is a big hit (S1831: Yes), the predicted big hit is a probability variation big hit (15R probability variation It is determined whether it is a jackpot or a second R probability variation jackpot) (S1832). If it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a probable variation jackpot (S 1832: Yes), the follow reading probability change flag 223 k 6 of the follow sort hold storage area 223 k corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to on ( S1833). Note that, when the data is shifted to the upper reserved area and stored, the data on the reserved area before being shifted is cleared to 0, so the follow-up read change flag 223k6 is set to OFF there. That is, the follow-up read change flag 223k6, which has been set to ON once, is shifted in the hold area in order, and is overwritten (0 clear) when the next new data is shifted in the storage area of the data during fluctuation. Set to off.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not a definite variation jackpot (that is, 15R is usually a jackpot) (S1832: No), the processing of S1834 is executed.

  The special hit type counter C2 of the hold data newly stored from the special hit change pattern table 222c corresponding to the gaming state (certainly changed or not or not) at the start of the change display, change pattern determination counter C3 The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S1834).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination of success or failure in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the pending sort order determination process (S1812 in FIG. 71) is out of step (S1831: No) Based on the values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 of the suspension data newly stored from the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 222d corresponding to (whether or not it is a definite change or time delay) A variation pattern determined from time to time is predicted (S1835).

  The predicted success or failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored (corresponding to the newly stored pending data) in the corresponding storage areas of the pending area corresponding to the winning order in the sub sort pending storage area 223k (S1836) ). It is determined whether or not the variable display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the sub sort suspension storage area 223k is stored by changing (changing the order) to the variable display start order stored previously (S1837 ). When it is determined that the variable display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the sub sort suspension storage area 223k is interrupted (or changed in order) and stored in the variable display start order previously stored. (S1837: Yes), with regard to the pending data after the variation display start order of the newly stored pending data, again predict the yes / no, the stop type, and the variation pattern and update (S1838).

  As described above, in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, based on each counter value indicated by the winning command output by the main control unit 110, the determination of the acceptance or rejection, the selection of the variation pattern, and the determination of the sorting order (variation start order) Since each operation is performed, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 reliably executes the process even when the game balls are concentrated on the first start hole 63a or the second start hole 63b and the process of selecting the variation pattern is concentrated. Can.

  Further, since the winning command output from main control device 110 only indicates each counter value, it is difficult to determine whether the determination is a big hit even if the command is intercepted by a hanging board or the like. Yes, you can control fraud.

  In addition, since the data amount of the winning command output by main controller 110 can be configured small, the burden of transmitting and receiving the command between main controller 110 and voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the command can be transmitted and received. Can reduce the time required for

  In addition, if the value of each counter value is backed up by the voice lamp control device 113, there is no need for the main control device 110 to output each counter value again even when the power is restored, and the pachinko machine 10 Power-on startup time can be shortened.

  In the present embodiment, each time the game is suspended, it is determined whether there is a change in the order of start of change (the program is interrupted and stored in order), and the game state at the start of change (high probability or low probability) However, if there is a hit in the hold, the hold, which is a hit, of the hold that has been established later is established first. It may be configured not to stop the change earlier than the hit retention. By configuring in this way, there is no case where the gaming state at the start of the change is changed due to the change start order, there is no need to repeat the prior judgment again again, and the control load in the game can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 78, a pachinko machine 10 according to a ninth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the sorting winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the sorting winning device 630 next, the game ball is moved to either the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. A prize notification lamp 660 is provided to indicate whether the operation is to be performed.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that it is notified to which of the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b the game ball is distributed when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 630. Do.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The distribution winning device 630 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. In the sorting winning device 630 in the ninth embodiment, a winning notification lamp 660 is added on the front side visible to the player of the sorting winning device 630 in the first embodiment. The prize notification lamp 660 is a lamp for notifying which of the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b the state is to be distributed when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 630.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the winning notification lamp 660 is composed of a left route winning notification lamp 660a and a right route winning notification lamp 660b. The left route winning notification lamp 660a is disposed at a position where the passive distribution member 640 can be rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the accommodating portion 640a can receive the game ball entered into the distribution winning device 630. (In other words, in the state of guiding the gaming ball to the first start opening 63a), it is controlled to light up.

  In addition, the right route winning notification lamp 660b is disposed at a position where the passive distribution member 640 can be rotated in a left-handed direction as viewed from the front, and the accommodating portion 640b can receive the game ball entered into the distribution device 630 It is controlled to light up when it is in the on state (that is, in the state of guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 63b).

  In the distribution winning device 630, a rotation angle sensor 670 for detecting the rotation of the passive distribution member 640 is provided on the rotary shaft portion of the passive distribution member 640, and when the passive distribution member 640 rotates, the rotation angle is detected Is configured. The rotation angle sensor 670 is set such that the position at which the passive distribution member 640 pivots to the position where the magnet 640 c provided on the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900 a overlap is the origin (rotation angle 0 degree). ing. When the passive distribution member 640 pivots clockwise from the origin position (see FIG. 74 (a)), it becomes a positive rotation angle, and conversely, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position (FIG. 74 When it is turned to a)), it is set so as to be a negative rotation angle.

  Here, the position at which the passive distribution member 640 is rotated to the position where the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a overlap is the origin position of the rotation angle sensor 670, thereby the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900a. And the passive distribution member 640 does not stop at this origin position, and stops at the position rotated in either direction in the front view and the rotation angle sensor is positive. Value or negative value. Therefore, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is at a position where the gaming ball can be guided to the first starting opening 63a. On the other hand, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a negative value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is at a position where the gaming ball can be guided to the second starting opening 63b. Therefore, by turning on the winning notification lamp 660 on the basis of the determination result, when the player next enters the sorting winning device 630, the gaming ball is divided between the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. It can be determined in advance which of the two is allocated.

  Further, the position at which the passive distribution member 640 stops is always the position of the left route prize notification lamp 660a of the prize notification lamp 660 or the right, since the rotation angle sensor 670 is at a position where the rotation angle sensor 670 is negative or positive (ie, other than the origin). The route winning notification lamp 660b is turned on, and the player can always be notified of the winning route.

  In this way, when the game ball enters the sorting winning device 630, it can be determined in advance which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b it will be distributed, so for example, the first starting When the holding ball corresponding to the opening 63a is the upper limit number of times (4 in the present embodiment) and the holding ball corresponding to the second starting opening 63b is one less three than the upper limit number of times (3 in the present embodiment) Next, when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 630 and is distributed to the first start port 63a, an overflow occurs and the game ball is consumed uselessly, so the player If it is not determined which of the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b is allocated, the problem that the game ball can not be fired always occurs.

  However, in the present embodiment, the prize notification lamp 660 allows the player to know in advance whether the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b is to be distributed next, and therefore, if it overflows Only when it is determined that the game ball can not be fired can be played efficiently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A winning notification lamp 660 and rotation sensors 670 are added to the main control unit 110. The prize notification lamp 660 is connected via an input / output port so that lighting control is performed based on a command from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the rotation angle sensor 670, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected so as to be able to acquire the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 via the input / output port.

  Referring to FIG. 76, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process of the ninth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment in the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) instead of the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). Has been added.

  With reference to FIG. 77, in the ninth embodiment, start winning process 4 (S160) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). In the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment, a winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is added to the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment. . In the processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S901 to S914 in the first embodiment are executed.

  Referring to FIG. 78, in the ninth embodiment, the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) which is one of the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. Do. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this winning route notification processing (FIG. 78, S1070). In the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) of the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the sorting winning device 630 next, it is sorted to whichever of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. It is a process for performing lighting control for notifying whether it is possible.

  In the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070), first, it is determined whether the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value (that is, whether the gaming ball is guided to the first starting opening) (S1071) ). If it is determined that the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value (S1071: Yes), the left route winning notification lamp 660a is turned on (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation angle sensor has a negative value (S1071: No), the right route winning notification lamp 660b is turned on (S1073).

  As described above, when the gaming ball next wins the sorting winning device 630 by determining the state of the passive sorting member 640 according to the value of the rotation angle sensor 670, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b It is possible to accurately determine which is allocated to which, it is possible to inform the player of accurate information.

  In the present embodiment, the lamp is used for notification. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, sound may be used for notification, or the third symbol display device 81 may be used for notification using characters or symbols. You may By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player more easily. In addition, if the third symbol display device 81 reports by characters, symbols, etc., the player can also check the winning route of the sorting winning device 630 while visually recognizing the variation display of the special symbol, making it easier to play the game .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, a pachinko machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described ninth embodiment, the state of the passive distribution member of the distribution winning device 630 is determined by the rotation angle sensor 670, and the gaming ball is either the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. The case of determining whether to distribute is described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, the sorting winning device 630 is in a state of guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 63b. When it is determined that the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 63b, the sorting winning device 630 determines that the gaming ball is in a state of being guided to the first starting opening 63a.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment in the following points. In the tenth embodiment, when the game ball is prized in the distribution winning device 630 based on winning in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, whichever of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b The second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment in that it is determined whether it is distributed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the ninth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the rotating sensors 670 are eliminated from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the ninth embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 80, a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process of the tenth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) of the ninth embodiment in place of the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) and the start winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). ) Has been added.

  Referring to FIG. 81, in the tenth embodiment, start winning process 5 (S170) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the start winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). The start winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170) of the tenth embodiment is different from the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment in that the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is deleted. The processes of S1080 and S1090 are added. In the processes of S901 to S914 in the tenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment are executed.

  If it is determined whether the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 63a (S901: Yes), lighting control is performed to light the right route winning notification lamp (S1080). Here, since the distribution winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the gaming balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is detected that the gaming balls have won in the first starting opening 63a. In this case, it can be determined by the distribution winning device 630 that the game ball entered next to the second starting opening 63b is distributed. Thus, the configuration makes it possible to predict and determine the state of the passive distribution member 640 without having to detect the state of the passive distribution member 640, and it is necessary to provide a sensor or the like for detection. Configuration can be simplified. Similarly, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 63b (S908: Yes), lighting control is performed to light the left route winning notification lamp (S1090).

  As described above, since the lighting display of the winning notification lamp 660 is switched every time the game ball wins the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the player gets the game ball winning in the distribution winning device 630. In this case, it can be confirmed in advance which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in the state of being distributed, and when entering the game ball, it does not become a holding ball, It is possible to determine whether it overflows and play a game.

  In the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 640 is configured to rotate by coming into contact with the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be movable by a motor, a solenoid, or the like.

  In such a configuration, the passive distribution member 640 is moved (rotated) so as to alternately distribute the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. In addition, when the passive distribution member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, the state of the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined, and the first corresponding to the special symbol with less holding The movable control may be performed so as to be distributed to the starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. By configuring in this way, in one special symbol, it is suppressed that an overflow that the upper limit number of times of holding balls exceeds will occur, and the upper limit number of times is equally applied to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can hold it until.

  When moving the passive distribution member 640 by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, the boundary wall between the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b of the passive distribution member 640 is detected when an error or fraud (abnormal winning etc.) is detected in the game. The game ball is moved to a position on the center line between the blades 64a and the blades 64b of the ordinary electric product 64 (that is, a position where the magnet 640c and the base side magnet 900a overlap), and the game ball is moved to the first starting opening. You may comprise so that it may prevent winning in 63a and the 2nd starting opening 63b. By configuring in this manner, when the pachinko machine 10 is tampered with or the like, it is possible to control so that the lottery game is not performed, and it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b) to 84. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a power failure occurs, the data in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the data in the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are backed up (backup from the power supply device 115 Data is held by power supply). Then, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10, it is confirmed whether each data of the RAM 23 and the RAM 223 is not broken, and if not broken, the data is loaded (used) as it is, and the power is turned off. The case where it returns from the state just before and starts a game was explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the reordering suspension in the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Based on each data of the storage area 203 u, a rearrangement return data command is generated and output to the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 compares the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command with the data of the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the RAM 223, and if they match, it returns as it is to play the game. If it does not match, the data in each reserve area of the sort rearrangement reserve storage area 223k is updated to the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command, and the game is started.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eleventh embodiment, the first embodiment is carried out in that each data in the reordering storage area 203u backed up at the time of power-on and the subsorting reserving storage area 223k are collated, and processing is performed to see if they match. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in form.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  82 (a) and 82 (b) are diagrams schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the reserved symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of establishment and returned. In the upper display area Dm, the characters "displaying in the hold order of holding" is displayed, which indicates that the held symbol display is displayed in the order of formation. This character is displayed until the game is resumed and the newly established held symbol display is displayed. Although details will be described later, when the reserved symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the establishment order and returns, the reordering storage area 203u of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 When the data in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the above is compared with each other and they do not match.

  FIG. 82 (b) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the reserved symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of start of fluctuation and recovered. In the upper display area Dm, the characters “displaying hold in change start order” indicating that the held symbol display is displayed by being rearranged in the change start order are displayed. This character is displayed until the game is resumed and the newly established held symbol display is displayed. Although the details will be described later, when the reserved symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed and returned in the change start order, the reordering storage area 203u of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 When the data in the sub sort reserving storage area 223 k of the RAM 223 in is matched with each other.

  In this way, by configuring, it is possible for the game arcade side or a maintenance worker to check whether or not the data mismatch has occurred for some reason when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In addition, since the player has a normal display, he / she can not know that some trouble has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and the player can be prevented from having anxiety or doubt.

  In addition, since data comparison is performed at the time of initial setting when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the pachinko machine 10 can be restored with a more accurate display of a reserved symbol. Furthermore, if the data do not match, the data is updated with the data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u, so the data in the follow rearrangement hold storage area 223k should coincide with the data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u at startup. It is possible to prevent the problem that an erroneous holding symbol display is displayed at the time of recovery.

  In this embodiment, notification is made by displaying characters in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of recovery, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured to be notified by displaying (for example, flashing or displaying as a special pattern) the reserved symbol display in a special display mode at the time of return.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 are backup power supplies from the power supply device 115 (power stored in the capacitor Is supplied even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, so that the contents of the RAM 203 and the RAM 223 are not initialized and are held for a certain period (one week in this embodiment).

  A start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The start-up process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the start-up process (FIG. 32) of the first embodiment except for the process of S1120. In the processes of S1101 to S1114 in the eleventh embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment are performed.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S1109 or S1112 is performed, the process of S1120 is performed. In the process of S1120, the reordering recovery data command is generated based on each data of each reserve area of the reorder reserve storage area 203u, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113. This rearrangement return data command is generated for each reserve area, and data (reserve areas 1 to 8) indicating each reserve area is attached, and each data of each reserve area (qualification result storage area 203u1, large hit type memory The area 203 u 2, the variation pattern type storage area 203 u 4, the variation start time storage area 203 u 5, and the pre-read probability change flag 203 u 5) are commands.

  As described above, in the start-up process (FIG. 83) that is executed before the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the normal game (the main process (FIG. 33, S1200)) is executed, the reordering storage area Since the data of 203u is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a sort recovery return data command, the sort hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are set at the initial setting at power on. The data can be collated with the sub sort reserve storage area 223k, and the data of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 matches the data of the sort reserve storage area 203u of the main control unit 110. It can be done.

  Here, for example, even if secondary sort reserve storage area 223k of audio lamp control device 113 stores correct data, the data in sort reserve storage area 203u of main controller 110 is erroneous or is initialized. When the power is restored, even if the reserved symbol display is displayed based on the data of the sort rearranging storage area 223k, there may be a problem that it becomes an erroneous reserved symbol display. However, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 are collated. Problems can be prevented.

  The start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The start-up process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the start-up process (FIG. 34) of the first embodiment except for the processes of S1320 to S1325. The processes in S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1311 in the first embodiment.

  In the start-up process (84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S1131 is executed, the process of S1320 is executed. It is determined whether the reordering return data command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1320). If it is determined that the reordering return data command has not been received (S1320: No), this process is repeatedly executed. In other words, it is in a state of waiting until receiving the rearrangement return data command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reordering recovery data command has been received (S1320: Yes), it is determined whether the data in the follow reordering storage area 223k matches the data indicated by the reordering recovery data command. (S1321). If it is determined that the data in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k matches the data indicated by the sort recovery data command (S1321: Yes), all sort flags 223k7 of the reserve area in which the data is stored are turned on. Is set (S1322). Display the characters “displaying pending with change start order” indicating that the held symbol display is displayed in the order of start of change in the left display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 And generates a display command instructing the display control unit 114 to output the command to the display control unit 114 (S1323).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k and the data indicated by the sort return data command do not match (S1321: No), the sort return data command output by the main control device 110 is Based on the data shown, the data of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k is updated, and all the sort flags 223k7 of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k are set to off (S1324). It instructs that the character of "displaying hold in order of establishment" is displayed in the left side display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, which indicates that the suspension symbol display is displayed in order of establishment A display command is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1325).

  In the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the process of the wait time (S1102) is executed to perform step S1311 of the start-up process (FIG. 84) of the audio lamp control apparatus 113. The main process (S1200) is configured to be executed after the process of (1) and after the start-up process (not shown) of the display control device 114 is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 is performed before the reordering recovery data command is output from the main control device 110. In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221, the process of S1320 is executed to wait for the main controller 110 to output the rearrangement return data command.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from dropping the rearrangement return data command. Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, after executing the process of setting the interrupt permission (S1311), the process of receiving the reordering recovery data command and collating is performed. Therefore, even if the main control unit 110 starts the main processing (Fig. 33, S1200) first and sends a command, it should be performed after executing processing corresponding to the processing. It is possible to prevent the control process required for the normal game from being performed and to prevent the problem of freezing.

  In the present embodiment, when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on, or the like, and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is initialized, the rearrangement recovery data command is rearranged. This command is a command indicating that there is no data in the replacement storage area 203 u. This command may be substituted by a dedicated initial value setting command or the like.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when collation is in agreement, it is comprised so that reservation symbol display may be displayed in the change start order, and it is comprised so that suspension symbol display may be displayed in establishment order when it does not correspond, but it is especially limited. Instead, if they match, they may be displayed in the order of establishment, and if they do not match, they may be displayed in the order of start of variation. In addition, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the state (arrangement order) immediately before the power is turned off, with the third symbol display device 81, a dedicated lamp, etc. You may comprise so that it may alert | report. With such a configuration, even if a momentary loss of power or the like occurs, the state of the display of the reserved symbol before the power-off can be more accurately restored, and the player can play the game again safely.

  In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main control device 110, the game state immediately before the main control device 110 is turned off (the game state has a high probability or a low probability or a short time (a high probability of a normal symbol) If it is in the state) or time is short, the number of times (time value of the time reduction counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the gaming state at the time of return, and can determine sorting and the like.

  Next, a modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 (c) and 85. In the modification of 11th Embodiment, when a collation result does not correspond, as shown to FIG. 82C, a reservation symbol display is displayed by a temporary symbol.

  FIG. 82C is a diagram showing an example when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the reserved symbol display is displayed with a temporary symbol and returned in the modification of the eleventh embodiment. In the upper display area Dm, characters of "temporarily displaying on hold" indicating that the on-hold symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol are displayed. The game is resumed, and a new winning command is generated based on the respective hold areas of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control unit 110. Are displayed until the respective pending areas of the sort rearranging storage area 223k are updated. Although the details will be described later, when the reserved symbol display is displayed as a temporary reserved symbol display and returns, the rearrangement pending storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 It is when the data in the sub sort reserve storage area 223 k is not collated.

  By configuring in this way, when the data of the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 and the sort reserve storage area 203u of the main control unit 110 do not match, a temporary reserve symbol display is displayed Thus, it is possible for the gaming shop side and a vendor etc. who performs maintenance inspection of the pachinko machine 10 to confirm that the pachinko machine 10 has some abnormality and the data do not match. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from displaying an erroneous holding symbol display by continuing to display the temporary holding symbol display until a new winning command is received.

  In the present embodiment, the temporary holding symbol display is displayed, but not limited thereto, the temporary holding symbol display is not displayed, and the holding symbol display areas Ds1 to 8 have special colors or display modes (for example, yellow) Or may be displayed in a blinking manner).

  With reference to FIG. 85, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The startup process (FIG. 85) of the modification of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment except for the processes of S1330 to S1331 instead of the processes of S1324 to S1325. ing. The processes in S1301 to S1323 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1323 in the eleventh embodiment.

  In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment, the data in the subsorting reserving storage area 223k matches the data indicated by the reordering return data command in the process of S1321. If it is not determined (S1321: No), the data of each reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area 223k is cleared to 0 (initialized) (S1330). A display command for causing the display control device 114 to display a temporary holding symbol display for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, a period until a new winning command is received and a holding symbol display is newly displayed) A temporary symbol command is generated and output (S1331).

  As described above, when the collation of the data does not match, the temporary holding symbol display is performed, and by delaying the normal holding symbol display until the winning command is newly received, the holding symbol is more correct. The display can be notified to the player.

  In addition, since it is configured that the normal reserved symbol display is restored at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the holding symbol display is displayed because the player starts the game. Also, it can be recognized as if the display is resumed again, and the game can be played with ease.

  In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main control device 110, the game state immediately before the main control device 110 is turned off (the game state has a high probability or a low probability or a short time (a high probability of a normal symbol) If it is in the state) or time is short, the number of times (time value of the time reduction counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the gaming state at the time of return, and can determine sorting and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 87, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described eleventh embodiment, the backup power is supplied from the power supply 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 so that data is backed up even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The case has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the backup power is not supplied from the power supply apparatus 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, based on the reordering return data command from the main control unit 110, the data of the follow sort reserving storage area 223k is updated, and the holding symbol display is restored to the state immediately before the power is turned off.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the twelfth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 does not back up data when the power is turned off, and based on the reordering recovery data command output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on again. Is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the process of restoring the reserved symbol display to the state immediately before the power is turned off is executed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Although not illustrated, in the twelfth embodiment, backup power from the power supply device 115 is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). The main processing (FIG. 86, S1400) of the twelfth embodiment is the same as the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the eleventh embodiment except for the processing of S1417 to S1419. In the processes of S1401 to S1416 in the twelfth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1416 in the eleventh embodiment are performed.

  In the main process (FIG. 86) according to the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is present (S1415: Yes), no processing is executed and the process waits until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. It will be in the state of

  Referring to FIG. 87, the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The startup process (FIG. 87) of the twelfth embodiment is different from the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment, in that processes of S1340 to S1343 are added instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. The processes in S1301 to S1311 in the twelfth embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

  When the process of S1311 is executed, it is determined whether the reordering restoration data command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1340). If it is determined that the reordering recovery data command has not been received (S1340: No), a process of waiting until the reordering recovery data command is received is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reordering recovery data command has been received (S1340: Yes), the data in each pending area of the sort reserving storage area 223k is updated based on the data indicated by the reordering recovery data command. (S1341). The rearrangement flag 223k7 of each reserve area is set to off (S1342). The display control device 114 generates a display command that causes the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to display the characters "displaying in the hold order in the hold order" indicating that the hold symbol display is displayed in the order of formation. Output (S1343).

  As described above, even if backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 causes the audio lamp control device 113 to reorder storage area 203u when the power is turned on. The rearrangement and recovery data command based on the data stored in is output. Therefore, even if the backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to return and display the reserved symbol display when the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. Therefore, the capacity of the backup power supply of the power supply device 115 can be reduced, and the size of the power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be made compact.

  In addition, when the power is turned on again, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the order of establishment and the notification that it is displayed in the order of establishment is performed regardless of the state at the time of power off. It is possible to easily determine the order in which the reserved symbol display is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main control device 110, the game state immediately before the main control device 110 is turned off (the game state has a high probability or a low probability or a short time (a high probability of a normal symbol) If it is in the state) or time is short, the number of times (time value of the time reduction counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the gaming state at the time of return, and can determine sorting and the like.

  Next, a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification of the twelfth embodiment, in the start-up process (FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, when the reordering return data command is received from the main control device 110, The data is updated, all sorting flags 223k7 of the holding area in which the data is stored are set to ON, and the holding symbol display after return is displayed in the order of start of fluctuation.

  Referring to FIG. 88, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The start-up process (FIG. 88) of the modification of the twelfth embodiment differs from the processes of S1342 to S1343 with respect to the start-up process (FIG. 87) of the twelfth embodiment, and each process of S1350 to S1351 is added. It is done. In the processes of S1301 to S1341 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1301 to S1341 in the twelfth embodiment are performed.

  In the start-up process (88) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S1341 is executed, in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k, of the reserve area where data is stored. All sort flags 223k7 are set to ON (S1350). A display command is generated that causes the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to be displayed with the character "displaying pending with change start order" indicating that the reserved symbol display is sorted and displayed in the change start order. And output to the display control device 114 (S1351).

  In this way, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10 from the power-off state and the display of the reserved symbol display is restored, the held symbol display is displayed regardless of the sequence displayed immediately before the power is turned off. Sorted and displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the power has been restored and the data has been forcibly rearranged.

  In addition, when returning from the power off, it is automatically rearranged and the reserved symbol display is displayed, so it is recognized that the reserved symbol display displayed being rearranged is the one established before the power off. Even if the power is cut off during the normal game, the game can be resumed safely.

  In the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110, the speech lamp control device 113 sets all the rearrangement flags 223k7 to ON, and in the main processing executed thereafter, The reserved symbol display is arranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the reordering recovery data command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the value indicated by the change order storage area 203u4 of the reordering storage area 203u indicated by the reordering recovery data command. It is good also as composition which generates and outputs a display command which rearranges and displays a reservation symbol display based on it. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to reduce the control addition to rearrange the reserved symbol display at the time of startup processing. Therefore, if the rearrangement return data command output from the main control device 110 is received, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged and displayed. In this case, all sorting flags 223k7 may be set to be on, and the reserved symbol display may be configured to be kept sorted even after start-up processing, or displayed at the time of start-up processing. The sorting and holding symbol display may be configured to be maintained in the sorted state until it is digested.

  In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main control device 110, the game state immediately before the main control device 110 is turned off (the game state has a high probability or a low probability or a short time (a high probability of a normal symbol) If it is in the state) or time is short, the number of times (time value of the time reduction counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the gaming state at the time of return, and can determine sorting and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 90, a pachinko machine 10 according to a thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, in the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device is based on the data of the reordering storage area 203u backed up. The sort recovery return data command is output to 113, the data indicated by the output sort recovery return data command is compared with the data of the secondary sort hold storage area 223k, and power supply interruption occurs in the hold symbol display The case of returning to the previous state has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the backup power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, in the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the slave sort is backed up without receiving the sort recovery data command from the main control unit 110. Based on the data of the storage area 223k, the reserved symbol display is displayed and restored.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the thirteenth embodiment, the main control unit 110 backs up in the slave sort reserving storage area 223k of the voice lamp control unit 113 without outputting the sort recovery data command to the voice lamp control unit 113. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that the processing for restoring the reserved symbol display is executed based on the data.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the same manner as the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control unit 113 of the present embodiment is supplied with backup power when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the backup power is supplied. Each data stored in the RAM 223 is configured to be held.

  Referring to FIG. 89, the start-up process performed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The startup process (FIG. 89) of the thirteenth embodiment is the same as the startup process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment except that the process of S1120 is deleted. In the processes of S1101 to S1114 in the thirteenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment are performed. That is, the same process as the start-up process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the first embodiment is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 90, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. In the startup process (FIG. 90) of the thirteenth embodiment, the process of S1360 is added to the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment, instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. The processes in S1301 to S1311 in the thirteenth embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

  In the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirteenth embodiment, when the process of S1310 is executed, based on the data stored in the sub sort reserve storage area 223k, A display command for causing the display control device 114 to display the reserved symbol display is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1360).

  Here, the holding symbol display to be displayed is displayed based on the data of each holding area stored in the sub sort holding memory area 223k immediately before the power is turned off. Since the state of the rearrangement flag 223k7 of each reserve area is stored, the reserve symbol display is displayed in the order in which it was displayed immediately before the power-off.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the processing performed when the main control device 110 is turned on, and to shorten the rise time (time until the normal game is executed) when the power is turned on.

  In addition, in the state immediately before the power is turned off, it is possible to restore the display of the holding symbol, and the player can resume the game with ease even after the power is turned on again.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation start of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes possible has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, there is a high probability that it will be selected when becoming a big hit such as super reach at the timing when the fluctuation start becomes possible. When the variation pattern is selected, a notification mode for notifying the player is displayed so as to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fourteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when becoming a jackpot such as super reach is selected, the player is notified to pay attention to the display area displayed in the variation pattern. The point is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (a)-FIG. 91 (c), the display aspect displayed on the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 91 (a) is a view schematically showing that a background image of the right display area Dm2 is blinked when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right display area Dm2.

  FIG. 91 (b) shows the second special symbol (in the present embodiment, the reach state is displayed in the right display region Dm2 when the variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right display region Dm2 FIG. 16 schematically shows that the size of the symbol) is displayed with a symbol larger than that of the normal time.

  In FIG. 91 (c), when the variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right side display area Dm2, the player is notified to look at the right side display area Dm2 in the left side display area Dm1. It is the figure which showed typically that the character of "was displayed.

  In this way, by configuring, the player pays attention to the display area on the side on which the background image is blinked and plays a game, thereby displaying a fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when a jackpot such as super reach occurs. It is possible to play a game while preventing missed variation modes.

  In addition, the player can easily see which display area to view, and it is not necessary to always pay attention to both display areas to play a game, and it is possible to play the game comfortably. Therefore, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the player's fatigue can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol to be noticed is notified by the above notification, but not limited thereto, the left side display region Dm1 or the right side of the upper display region Dm displaying the special symbol to be noticed The size of the display area of the display area Dm2 may be varied. Specifically, in order to pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol, the size of the left side display area Dm1 is enlarged and displayed on the right side display area Dm2 side, and the size of the right side display area Dm2 is reduced. Alternatively, the display may be changed so as to be eliminated (set the upper display area Dm to the left display area Dm1). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the variation pattern of the special symbol that he / she wants to pay attention to. Also, the player can play a game expecting whether the left side display area Dm1 or the right side display area Dm2 is greatly varied, and it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the game at an early stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 92 is a view schematically showing a part of another memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. As shown in FIG. In the other memory area 203v, a first delay time storage area 203v5 and a second delay time storage area 203v6 are added.

  In the first delay time storage area 203v5, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the second special symbol, the same time as the selected variation time is for delaying the start of variation of the first special symbol It is a storage area stored as a delay time.

  Although the first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described later in detail, the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 If the variation pattern is or the variation pattern of the super reach is deviated, the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

  Further, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated each time the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed. . In detail, 2 ms which is an interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed is subtracted.

  In the second delay time storage area 203v6, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the first special symbol, the same time as the selected variation time is for delaying the start of variation of the second special symbol It is a storage area stored as a delay time.

  Although the second delay time storage area 203v6 will be described in detail later, the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 If the variation pattern is or the variation pattern of the super reach is deviated, the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

  Further, when the delay time is stored in the second delay time storage area 203v6, the time is updated each time the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is executed. . In detail, 2 ms which is an interval of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is subtracted.

  As described above, when the fluctuation pattern that becomes the jackpot or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is selected in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the fluctuation start of the other special symbol that becomes the fluctuation start thereafter is delayed. Therefore, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation pattern having a high probability of being selected in the case of a big hit from fluctuating display at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a complicated gaming state in which the player needs to pay attention to both the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2.

  Although the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5 and the second delay time storage area 203v6 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a count value or the like may be stored. May be With such a configuration, each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the count value is decremented by 1 to count the number of times the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed. Naturally, it may be configured to measure time.

  Referring to FIG. 93, in the fourteenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is added. The processes in S301 to S309 in the fourteenth embodiment are the same as the processes in S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed.

  94, in the fourteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 93, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 5 (S350) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S350). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Also, if the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an out-of-order fluctuation pattern of super reach, a delay time for delaying the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol is set, and the first special is selected. This is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player so as to look at the variation mode of the symbol.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, the variation that becomes the big hit in the variation mode of the second special symbol) Whether or not the pattern or the outreach super reach is fluctuatingly displayed is determined (S571). If it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S571: No), the first delay time is reduced by 2 ms and updated (S584). On the other hand, if it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S571: Yes), it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S572). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S572: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S573). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S572: No), a special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S575). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S576).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S577).

  The fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S577 is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an out-of-order super reach (S578). If it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or a deviation pattern of a super reach that is deviating (S578: Yes), the same fluctuation time as the selected fluctuation pattern is a delay time Are set in the second delay time storage 203v5 (S579). A first warning notice command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the left side display area Dm1 where the first special symbol is displayed (S580).

  A second mute command is set to mute the sound effect and voice (the sound effect and voice set to the variation pattern in which the second special symbol is varied) for varying the second special symbol (S581). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S582). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S 583).

  Thus, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, the notification mode is set so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol when the variation pattern to be the big hit or the super reach to be off is selected in the variation mode of the first special symbol. Therefore, the player can be prevented from missing the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to focus on, and can play the game comfortably.

  In addition, in the variation pattern of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern to be the jackpot or the super reach to be distracted is selected, it is related to the variation of the second special symbol so as to pay attention to the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Sound effects and sounds are muted. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of which special symbol to pay attention to. In addition, it becomes easy to hear the sound and sound effects of the first special symbol, and it is possible to enjoy the game more.

  Also, in the first special symbol variation mode, when the jackpot variation pattern or the out-of-point super reach is selected, the variation start of the second special symbol is delayed, so the left display area Dm1 and the right display are simultaneously displayed. In the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the display of a notable fluctuation mode, and provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Also, by displaying the variation mode in which the player has an expectation that the jackpot might be expected at different times (states not displayed simultaneously), it is possible to play the game while maintaining the sense of expectation of the jackpot for a longer time. The game can be prevented from getting bored early.

  In addition, by setting the variation pattern command and starting measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time can be measured at the same time as the variation start of the first special symbol, and the variation time can be measured accurately. Can be measured.

  The size of the first special symbol may be configured to be large as a notification mode for notifying the player to pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol (see FIG. 91B). In addition, to notice the first special symbol, the right side display area Dm2 may be configured to display the letter "Look at the left!" Which informs the attention of the first special symbol (see FIG. 91 (c)). Also, the above contents may be combined with each other. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is focused on the variation mode of the first special symbol when the variation pattern that becomes the jackpot or the super reach that becomes the out-of-order is selected. It was set as the structure by which the sound effect and the sound in connection with the fluctuation of a design are muffled. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two speakers, and on the other hand, it is configured to output voice and sound effects related to the first special symbol, and on the other hand, sound and sound effects related to the second special symbol Etc., and in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when a variation pattern that is a big hit or a super reach that is out is selected, a voice or sound effect related to the second special symbol is output. By making a speaker into a non-operation or low output configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbol may be noticed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily switch between voice and sound effects (switching between which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the sound or sound effect is to be output).

  Referring to FIG. 95, in the fourteenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110. A second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the second special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is added. In the processes of S701 to S709 in the fourteenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 96, in the fourteenth embodiment, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 95, S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 5 (S750) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S750). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Also, if the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an out-of-order fluctuation pattern of super reach, a delay time for delaying the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol is set, and the second special is selected. This is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player so as to look at the variation mode of the symbol.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750), first, whether the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v 6 (that is, the variation that becomes the big hit in the variation mode of the first special symbol) Whether a pattern or out-of-order super reach is fluctuatingly displayed is determined (S751). If it is determined that the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (S751: No), the second delay time is reduced by 2 ms and updated (S764). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second delay time is not set (S751: Yes), it is determined whether the result determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot (S752). The determination as to whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. If it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S752: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table 202d according to the gaming state is set (S753). In the present embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol dedicated to the second special symbol is set. ing. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S752: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S755). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S756).

  The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S757).

  The variation pattern selected in the process of S757 is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern serving as a jackpot or a super reach (S758). If it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or a deviation pattern of a super reach that is deviating (S758: Yes), the same fluctuation time as the selected fluctuation pattern is a delay time Are set in the first delay time storage 203v5 (S759). A second warning notice command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the right side display area Dm2 where the second special symbol is displayed (S760).

  A first mute command is set to mute the sound effect and voice (the sound effect and voice set to the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is varied) for fluctuating the first special symbol (S761). The second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S762). The measurement start of the second fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, is set (S763).

  Thus, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, the notification mode is set so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the second special symbol when the variation pattern serving as the jackpot or the super reach serving as the deviation is selected. Therefore, the player can be prevented from missing the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to focus on, and can play the game comfortably.

  In addition, in the variation pattern of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is the jackpot or the super reach that is the gap is selected, it is related to the variation of the first special symbol so as to pay attention to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Sound effects and sounds are muted. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to easily understand which special symbol to pay attention to. In addition, it becomes easy to hear the sound and sound effects of the second special symbol, it is possible to enjoy the game more.

  In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation mode, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the out-of-focus super reach is selected, the first special symbol fluctuation start is delayed, so the left display area Dm1 and the side display are simultaneously displayed. In the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the display of a notable fluctuation mode, and provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Also, by displaying the variation mode in which the player has an expectation that the jackpot might be expected at different times, it is possible to play the game while maintaining the expectation of the jackpot for a longer time, and the game gets bored early Can be prevented.

  In addition, by setting the variation pattern command and starting measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time can be measured at the same time as the variation start of the second special symbol, and the variation time can be measured accurately. Can be measured.

  The size of the second special symbol may be set large as the notification mode for notifying the player of the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see FIG. 91 (b)). In addition, in order to pay attention to the second special symbol, the left display area Dm1 may be configured to display the character "look at the right!" Notifying that attention is given to the second special symbol (see FIG. 91 (c)). Also, the above contents may be combined with each other. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 98. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation start of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes possible has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, there is a high probability that it will be selected when becoming a big hit such as super reach at the timing when the fluctuation start becomes possible. When the variation pattern is selected, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of displaying a notification mode for notifying the player so as to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when becoming a jackpot such as super reach is selected and a command indicating the variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, voice is generated. The lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the notification is given so that the player pays attention to the display area displayed in the variation pattern.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The variation display setting process (S1411), which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) of the fifteenth embodiment is the same as the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) of the first embodiment except for the processes of S1630 and S1640. The processes in S1601 to S1614 in the fifteenth embodiment are the same as the processes in S1601 to S1614 in the first embodiment.

  In the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1603 is executed, the first attention notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is executed. Ru. The first warning notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) will be described in detail later, but in the main control unit 110, the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit, or it is a super In the case of the reach, in order to set a command to execute notification to make the player pay attention to the first special symbol fluctuation mode, and a command to mute sound and sound effects relating to the second special symbol fluctuation mode Processing.

  In the first caution notification process (FIG. 98, S1630), first, it is determined whether the first variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is a variation pattern serving as a big hit or a super reach that is out of order (S1631). When it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that makes a big hit or is a super reach of out-of-range (S1631: Yes), the background of the left display area Dm1 displaying the first special symbol A first notice notice command is generated to instruct the display control device 114 to blink the image (see FIG. 91A), and is output to the display control device 114 (S1632).

  A second mute command to mute the voice and sound effects related to the variation mode of the second special symbol is generated and output (S1633). On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that is a big hit, or not being a non-super reach (S1631: No), this process ends.

  Returning to the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the description will be continued. When the first caution notification process (FIG. 98, S1411) is executed, the processes from S1604 to S1608 are executed. When the process of S1608 is executed, the process of the second warning notification process (S1640) is executed. For the second warning notice process (S1640), the process of the first warning notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is as follows: the first notice notice command is the second notice notice command, and the second silence command is the first silence command. Since only the changes are made and the others are the same, the detailed description will be omitted.

  In this manner, when the type of fluctuation pattern output from the main control device 110 is determined, and the player is expecting the jackpot to be a jackpot fluctuation pattern or out-of-order super reach, it is possible to play the fluctuation mode. Since the notification mode that causes the player to pay attention to is set, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode. Therefore, the player can determine which of the special symbol variation modes should be noted, and can play the game comfortably. Therefore, the player's fatigue can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, in the first caution command or the second caution command, the background image of the display area on the side where the special symbol is displayed is displayed in a blinking manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The length may be increased (see FIG. 91 (b)). In addition, in the case of a notification mode informing that attention is given to the second special symbol, for example, to notice the special symbol on the side to which attention is given, the character “informing that the second display symbol Dm1 focuses on the second special symbol It may be configured to display the character "look at the right!" (See FIG. 91 (c)). Also, the above contents may be combined with each other. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation pattern of the special symbol with a high probability of being selected when becoming a jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation start of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes possible has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern in the first special symbol, the variation pattern or jackpot super reach (that is, the probability of being selected when winning If the variation pattern is selected, it is determined whether or not the same variation pattern is selected in the second special symbol, and if it is selected, the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol is selected. To delay the onset of fluctuation of

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the sixteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when becoming a big hit is selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is taken. The second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that processing for delaying until the variable display in the second special symbol is finished is executed.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the display aspect displayed on the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in the upper drawing of FIG. 99, the first special symbol (FIG. 99) is displayed in a state where the variation pattern of the super reach to be detached is selected and displayed in the second special symbol (left display area Dm2) Also in the right side display area Dm1), the super reach to be removed is selected, and the start of fluctuation in the first special symbol is delayed, and in the notification mode that notifies that the second special symbol (left side display area Dm2) is focused on There is a word, "Look at the right!" Then, when the variation pattern of the super reach indicated by the second special symbol is ended, the variation pattern of the first reach of the first special symbol, which has been delayed, is started to be varied as shown in the lower part of FIG. Are schematically shown.

  As described above, the variation pattern in the first special symbol is selected when the variation pattern with high probability of being selected in the case of jackpot (for example, super reach) is selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Since the change start of is delayed, the player can concentrate on the change aspect of one special symbol, and can play a game calmly.

  In addition, since the variation pattern having a high expectation to the jackpot is successively started to sequentially change between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player plays the game with the expectation for the jackpot for a long time. It can be done, and it can prevent getting bored with a game early.

  Although not shown in the present embodiment, a first delay time storage area 203v5 is provided in the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. This first delay time storage area 203v5 is the second special symbol when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when becoming a jackpot such as a super reach is selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The same time as the time until the end of fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern being selected or variably displayed is the storage area stored as a delay time for delaying the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol.

  Although the first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described later in detail, the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 If the variation pattern is selected similarly in the second special symbol, the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol ends the variation. The same delay time as the time until is stored.

  In addition, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated each time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed. . In detail, 2 ms which is an interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed is subtracted.

  Referring to FIG. 100, in the sixteenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) of the sixteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the sixteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 101, in the sixteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 100, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 6 (S360) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (S360). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, if the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an out-of-order fluctuation pattern of super reach, it is determined whether or not the same fluctuation pattern is selected in the second special symbol, and is selected. If it is, a delay time for delaying the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is set, and a process for setting a notification mode or the like to notify the player to pay attention to the second special symbol It is.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Whether the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the out-of-the-top fluctuation pattern is selected is determined (S621). If it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S621: No), the first delay time is reduced by 2 ms and updated (S635). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S621: Yes), it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S622). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203 o is set to ON (S 622: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202 d according to the gaming state is set (S 623). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203 o is off (S 622: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S 625). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected variation pattern table (S626).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S627).

  The variation pattern selected in the process of S627 is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern serving as a jackpot or an out-of-order super reach (S628). If it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or a deviation pattern of a super reach that is deviating (S628: Yes), the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the jackpot fluctuation pattern in the second special symbol It is determined whether or not the outlier super reach is being selected or changed (S629).

  In the second special symbol, if it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the outreach super reach is selected or fluctuating (S629: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation is the jackpot during selection or fluctuation The time until the variation end of the pattern or out-of-line super reach is stored as the delay time in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S630).

  The voice lamp control device 113 is displayed in the left display area Dm1 where the first special symbol is displayed to notify the user to pay attention to the second special symbol (right display area Dm2). A second warning notice command to be issued to the is set (S631). On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the outreach super reach is not selected or fluctuating (S629: No), the processing of S632 is executed. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S632). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S633).

  As described above, when the variation pattern that is the big hit or the variation pattern of the super reach that is the difference is selected in the first special symbol and the variation mode of the second special symbol, the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is started. Is delayed until the end of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern displayed in the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern in which the player has a great sense of expectation for the jackpot is fluctuated and displayed in both display areas at the same time. It is possible to suppress it. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the display of the variation pattern of one special symbol with an expectation to the jackpot, and to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, by being displayed in both display areas, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the fluctuation of one of the special symbols.

  In addition, in the second special symbol, while the fluctuation pattern is being displayed, a notification mode for notifying to pay attention to the second special symbol is displayed, so the player can easily distinguish the special symbol to be focused on The game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, in the second special symbol, when the fluctuation pattern which can have a sense of expectation to the jackpot ends, next, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol which has been delayed is variably displayed, and the player continuously wins the jackpot. It is possible to enjoy the fluctuation mode having a large sense of expectation to the player, and to prevent the player from being bored early in the game.

  In the present embodiment, as a notification mode for giving notice of focusing on the second special symbol, a letter is used for notification, but the present invention is not limited to that, even if the background image of the left display area Dm2 is displayed in blink or special color good. Further, the size of the second special symbol may be displayed large. Also, it may be configured to notify by combining them.

  Moreover, although the variation start of the first special symbol is delayed in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto, but the time until the variation of the second special symbol is added is added to the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol. The first special symbol is not displayed on the right side display area Dm1 or the small symbol is changed and displayed until the second special symbol is finished changing, and the variation display of the second special symbol is ended. It may be configured to display the selected fluctuation pattern (super reach etc.). With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the timing of the start of fluctuation, and the control load can be suppressed as compared with the case of delaying.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which delays a 1st special symbol in this embodiment, you may comprise so that a 2nd special symbol may be delayed, and it may be comprised later among a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. The change start may be delayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 116, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the case where the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is notified by the display mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and becomes the holding ball, it is made before the change start becomes possible. If the result of the determination is a jackpot, it is determined by lottery whether the player is informed in advance that the result of the judgment of jackpot will be a jackpot due to the change due to the suspension.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventeenth embodiment, in the state where the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a holding ball as a holding ball before fluctuation starts, it is informed that it is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as one-shot notification) And the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the display aspect displayed on the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this embodiment is demonstrated. In FIG. 102 (a), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, of the reserved symbol displays of the second special symbol, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is normally "●" The special reserve symbol display “「 ”is displayed, and the display mode notifying in advance to the player that the stop display is performed in the special symbol display mode indicating the jackpot is schematically shown. FIG.

  Further, in FIG. 102 (b), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, of the reserved symbol displays of the first special symbol, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is normally “ A display mode in which the player is notified in advance that the stop display is performed in the display mode of the special symbol indicating the big hit, which is displayed by “と こ ろ” which is the special hold symbol display while being displayed by “O”. It is the figure shown typically.

  By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize in advance the result of the pass / fail determination by the holding symbol display, and every time the holding symbol display is displayed, the special holding symbol display for notifying the jackpot is displayed. So you can have expectations and be more interested in playing games.

  In the present embodiment, in the reserved symbol display, the big hit is notified in advance (notice of one shot), but it is not limited thereto, and may be notified by voice, or it is configured to be notified by a dedicated lamp or the like Of course, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to notify by letters, symbols, and the like.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a view schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. As shown in FIG. In the other memory area 203v, a first notification flag 203v7, a second notification flag 203v8, and a notification timer storage area 203v9 are added.

  The first notification flag 203v7 is a flag indicating that in the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol, a reserved symbol display (in the present embodiment, “Δ”) is displayed to notify that a big hit is made. Although this first notification flag 203v7 will be described later in detail, in the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a special hold symbol display for notifying a big hit is displayed. , And is set to ON based on the instruction to the audio lamp control device 113. Although illustration is omitted, the first notification flag 203v7 is set to OFF when the jackpot game is started based on the hold symbol display for notifying that the jackpot is hit. In addition, at the time of initialization, it is a flag set to OFF.

  The second notification flag 203v8 is a flag indicating that a special hold symbol display (in the present embodiment, “▲”) is displayed to notify that a big hit is made in the held symbol display of the second special symbol. Although the second notification flag 203v8 will be described in detail later, the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 displays a special hold symbol display for notifying a big hit. , And is set to ON based on the instruction to the audio lamp control device 113. Although illustration is omitted, the second notification flag 203v8 is set to OFF when the jackpot game is started based on the special hold symbol display notifying that a jackpot is made. In addition, at the time of initialization, it is a flag set to OFF.

  The notification timer storage area 203v9 is displayed when one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed with a hold symbol display (one-shot notification) notifying that a big hit is made, and then the hold symbol display is displayed. Is a storage area in which the time until the variation of the special symbol based on is stopped is stored. When a one-shot notification is performed with one special symbol, when a variation pattern that is a hit with the other special symbol is selected, it is more than the set time stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9. A long fluctuating time is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring before the jackpot by the one-shot reserved symbol display, and to prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, after being notified of one shot, a special symbol different from the special symbol notified of that one shot (for example, when a notification of one shot is performed in a reserved symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, the second If the suspension corresponding to the special symbol) is established and the change is stopped earlier than the one-shot notified suspension symbol display, the gaming state may be changed when it becomes a big hit. In detail, it is predicted that the fluctuation start in the high probability gaming state, and it is judged in advance that the big hit is made, and a one-shot notification is given, but due to the hold established after that, the difference in the fluctuation start order Fluctuation starts earlier and stop display at the normal 15R big hit, then the game is changed to the game in the normal probability (low probability) gaming state, and the result of the pass / fail judgment corresponding to the one-shot held symbol display The problem of not being a jackpot but falling off occurs.

  However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the one-shot notification is performed, the selection of the variation pattern is performed prior to the occurrence of the jackpot game, so that the above-described problems can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent a notification that may cause confusion to the player.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k in the seventeenth embodiment, a suspension notification flag 223k8 is added to the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k in the first embodiment.

  The hold notification flag 223k8 is provided for each hold area, and when the first notification command or the second notification command is received from the main control unit 110, the hold notification flag 223k8 of the hold area indicated by the command is turned on. It is set. In addition, when the pending notification flag 223k8 is suspended and the pending area is shifted and shifted from the pending data storage area to the changing data storage area, each data in the pending area is reset to the initial value ( It is set to off by being cleared to 0).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 105, S926) in the seventeenth embodiment, a first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) and the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment are performed. A first extension variation prefetching process (FIG. 107, S1160) is added. In the seventeenth embodiment, the processes of S931 to S939 are the same as the processes of S931 to S939 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S931, when it is determined that the predicted result of the determination of the success or failure is a big hit (S931: Yes), the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) is executed. Although the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) will be described later, a process of lottery whether or not to execute one-shot notification is executed when one-shot notification has not been executed.

  In the first notification lottery process (S1150 in FIG. 106), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1151). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1151: No), in the reordering storage area 203u, the change order is the first one and the hit is stored. It is determined whether it has been done (S1152).

  If it is determined that the change order is the previous one and there is the one in the reordering storage area 203 u (S 1152: Yes), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the previous change order is out of the reordering storage area 203u (S1152: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1153). The notification count value is a value from which the value of the special hit type counter C2 is obtained. In the present embodiment, the special hit type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a notification counter may be provided exclusively.

  It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a hit count value (in the present embodiment, any one of 0 to 30) (S1154). When it is determined that the obtained notification count value is a hit (S1154: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is a hold for notifying a big hit of the hold symbol display of the first special symbol for which this determination is made. A first notification command instructing to display with symbol display (one-shot notification) is generated (S1155). The first notification command is a command indicating which holding area is the command for holding symbol display.

  The time until the special symbol corresponding to this reserved symbol display is finished changing is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1156). The first notification flag 203v7 is set to on (S1157). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out (S1154: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S1151: Yes), the notification timer is updated by subtracting 2 ms from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9. Is performed (S1158).

  As described above, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on, the lottery for performing one-shot notification is not performed, and therefore, once the one-shot notification is performed, the lottery is performed. The next one-shot notification is not performed until the jackpot game is ended, and the one-shot notification is performed a plurality of times, which can prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent a one-shot notification from being carried out each time even with a hold symbol display that is a big hit by performing a lottery whether or not to make a one-shot notification, and an expectation to a big hit if a one-shot notification is not performed Can be prevented from becoming inconvenient for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the time until the end of fluctuation is stored as the notification timer. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a counter value or the like may be stored, and the counter value may be updated at each update.

  Referring to FIG. 105, the process returns to the process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 105, S926) to continue the description. When the process of S934 or S935 is executed, a first extension change prefetch process (FIG. 107, S1160) is executed.

  In the first extension change prefetching process (S1160 in FIG. 107), first, it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161). If it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to on (S1161: Yes), the second notification flag 203v8 is set to be on, which is stored in the reordering storage area 203u. The variation pattern (variation time) to be selected by calculating (predicting) the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 when the second special symbol corresponding to the suspension area starts to fluctuate with respect to the data of the suspension area being ) (Determination) (S1162). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to off (S1161: No), this process is ended.

  By configuring in this way, in the reserved symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, a one-shot notification is performed, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is also displayed as an extension pattern (variation pattern (variation By determining (predicting) time) in advance, it is possible to rearrange the reserved symbol display in the correct fluctuation start order. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct change start order, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the second prefetch update process (S946) which is one process of the second prefetch process (S914 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing this second prefetch update processing (S946). In the second prefetch update process (FIG. 108, S946) in the seventeenth embodiment, a second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) is performed with respect to the second prefetch update process (FIG. 28, S946) in the first embodiment. A second extension variation prefetching process (FIG. 108, S1180) is added. In the seventeenth embodiment, the processes of S951 to S959 are the same as the processes of S951 to S959 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S951, when it is determined that the predicted success / failure determination result is a big hit (S951: Yes), a second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) is executed. Although the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) will be described later, if one-shot notification has not been executed, a process of lottery whether or not to execute one-shot notification is executed.

  In the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1171). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1171: No), in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u, the change order is the first one and the hit is stored It is determined whether it has been done (S1172).

  If it is determined that the change order is the previous one and there is the one in the reordering storage area 203u (S1172: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the previous change order is out of the reordering storage area 203 u (S1172: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1173). The notification count value is a value from which the value of the special hit type counter C2 is obtained. In the present embodiment, the special hit type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a notification counter may be provided exclusively.

  It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a hit count value (in the present embodiment, any one of 0 to 30) (S1174). If it is determined that the obtained notification count value is a hit (S1174: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of a large hit of the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol for which this determination has been made. A second notification command instructing to display in the reserved symbol display (one-shot notification) is generated (S1175). The second notification command is a command indicating which holding area is the command for holding symbol display.

  The time until the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display is finished changing is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1176). The second notification flag 203v8 is set to on (S1177). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out (S1174: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S1171: Yes), the timer interrupt process is started from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (FIG. 14). The notification timer is updated by subtracting 2 ms, which is the execution cycle of (1) (S1178).

  As described above, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on, the lottery for performing one-shot notification is not performed, and therefore, once the one-shot notification is performed, the lottery is performed. The next one-shot notification is not performed until the jackpot game is ended, and the one-shot notification is performed a plurality of times, which can prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent a one-shot notification from being carried out each time even if the one-shot notification is made, by performing a lottery whether or not to make a one-shot notification, and to a big hit It is possible to prevent the problem that the player loses expectations.

  In the present embodiment, the time until the end of fluctuation is stored as the notification timer. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a counter value or the like may be stored, and the counter value may be updated at each update.

  Referring to FIG. 108, the process returns to the processing of the second read ahead update process (FIG. 108, S946) to continue the description. When the process of S954 or S955 is executed, a second extension change prefetch process (S1180) is executed. The second extension change prefetching process (S1180) is the same as the other processes except that the second notification flag 203v8 is changed to the first notification flag 203v7 in the first extension change prefetching process (FIG. 107, S1160). Since they are present, illustration and detailed description will be omitted.

  By configuring in this way, a one-shot notification is performed in the reserved symbol display corresponding to the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is also extended (delayed) in advance. By determining the fluctuation time, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the correct fluctuation start order. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct change start order, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Referring to FIG. 110, in the seventeenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) of the seventeenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the seventeenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 111, in the seventeenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 110, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 7 (S370) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S370). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, in the second special symbol, when a one-shot notification is performed, the variation pattern is longer than the time until the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the one-shot notified suspension symbol display is finished changing It is set.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S651) . The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S651: Yes), it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S652). If it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S652: Yes), the variation pattern of the variation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 serves as a first alternative variation pattern, the first alternative variation pattern It is set as a command (S653).

  Here, as the selection of the fluctuation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the gaming state at that time from the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d for normal time or the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d for time reduction and probability change, Among the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, the fluctuation pattern of the closest fluctuation time is selected. For example, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), if the jackpot type is 15R big hit and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot jackpot B is It is selected.

  When the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than all the variation patterns in the variation pattern table, a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is set as the variation time. An alternative variation pattern is set. This alternative variation pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot after all the main symbols in the special symbol are variably displayed during the variation time. Also, even if the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, instead of the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern at normal times, the alternative variation pattern is a variation time with a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 It is selected.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S652: No), the special hit variation pattern table 202d according to the gaming state is set (S654). In the present embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol dedicated to the second special symbol is set. ing. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S655).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S651: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the game state is set (S656). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S657).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S658).

  The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S659). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S660).

  Referring to FIG. 112, in the seventeenth embodiment, one of special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. A second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) of the seventeenth embodiment is the second special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S26) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is added. In the processes of S701 to S709 in the seventeenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 113, in the seventeenth embodiment, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 112, S206) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 7 (S770) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S770). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol. In addition, in the first special symbol, when a one-shot notification is performed, the variation time until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the one-shot reserved symbol display is changed is set.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a big hit (S771) . The determination as to whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. If it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S771: Yes), it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S772). If it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is on (S772: Yes), a second variation pattern is used as a second alternative variation pattern as a variation pattern of variation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9. A command is set (S773).

  Here, as the selection of the fluctuation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the gaming state at that time from the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d for normal time or the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d for time reduction and probability change, With the fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, the fluctuation pattern of the closest time is selected. For example, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), if the jackpot type is 15R big hit and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot jackpot B is It is selected.

  If the value of notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than any variation pattern in the variation pattern table, an alternative variation pattern is set with a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of notification timer storage area 203v9 as the variation time. Ru. This alternative variation pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot after all the main symbols in the special symbol are variably displayed during the variation time. Also, even if the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, instead of the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern at normal times, the alternative variation pattern is a variation time with a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 It is selected.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is off (S772: No), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S774). In the present embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol dedicated to the second special symbol is set. ing. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set. Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, the jackpot type table 202b is set, and the jackpot type is determined (S775).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S771: No), a special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S776). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected variation pattern table (S777).

  The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S778). The second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S779). The measurement start of the second fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, is set (S780).

  Thus, when one-shot notification is executed in the held symbol display corresponding to the second special symbol, one-shot notification is performed in the held symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol of the first special symbol In the case of the second special symbol, the variation mode in which the success or failure judgment result is a big hit is delayed until the special symbol corresponding to the special hold symbol display notified once is stopped, so it is announced once It can prevent that a big hit occurs earlier than a big hit game based on a special reservation symbol display.

  Therefore, even if one-shot notification is made on the assumption that the lottery is made in the high probability gaming state, since a big hit does not occur earlier than that, a change in the gaming state can not occur, and one-shot notification It is possible to prevent the problem that the lottery game based on the held symbol display made is not a big hit. Therefore, the player can be prevented from being confused and the game can be played with ease.

  In the present embodiment, the alternative variation pattern is selected to delay the occurrence of the jackpot, but it is also possible to delay the start of the variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent another jackpot from occurring before the jackpot triggered by the held symbol display for which one-shot notification has been made.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which delays all the jackpots in this embodiment, it is good also as a structure which makes only 15R large jackpots delay. By configuring in this way, the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot occur earlier than the jackpot based on the hold symbol display for which one-shot notification was made, but the gaming state is changed from high probability to low probability It is possible to prevent that and make a lottery game based on the held symbol display for which one-shot notification has been made a big hit. Also, even before the jackpot based on the one-shot reserved symbol display, a jackpot can be generated to provide the player with many jackpot games to increase the player's expectation for jackpot.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 114, S1400). The main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) of the seventeenth embodiment is different from the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment in command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) and pending number display update processing (FIG. 37). , S1406), the command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) and the pending number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) are added. In the processes of S1401 to S1413 in the seventeenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment are performed. When the process of S1413 is completed, command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, command determination processing 4 (S1560), which is one processing of the main processing (S1400 in FIG. 114, S1400) executed in the seventeenth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 4 (S1560). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

  In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1470) of the seventeenth embodiment, the processes of S1561 and S1562 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. In the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the seventeenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment are executed. If it is determined in the process of S1517 that the first or second special symbol variation resume command has not been received (S1517: No), the process of S1561 is executed.

  In the process of S1561, it is determined whether the first notification command or the second notification command output by the main control device 110 has been received (S1561). If it is determined that the first notification command or the second notification command has been received (S1561: Yes), the hold notification flag 223k8 in the hold area of the slave sort hold storage area 223k indicated by the received notification command is set to ON. (S1562).

  With reference to FIG. 116, in the seventeenth embodiment, pending number display update processing 4 (S1550), which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the pending number display update process 4 (S1550). In the number-of-holds display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), the sort symbol display is rearranged. The hold symbol display in which the flag 223k7 is set to ON is in change start order, and the hold symbol display set to OFF is in formation order. In addition, the suspension symbol display corresponding to the suspension area where the suspension notification flag 223k8 is set to ON is a special suspension symbol display (in the present embodiment, if it is the first special symbol, “Δ”, the second special symbol If it is, it is a process for displaying by "▲").

  In the number-of-holds display updating process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), first, the change display start time of the change start time storage area 223k5 of each reserve area of the follow rearrangement hold storage area 223k is updated (S1551). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  The symbol display of the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to on is displayed in the order of starting to change, and the holding symbol is displayed in the order in which the holding is established for the holding area where the sorting flag 223k7 is off. Is set (S1552).

  By performing control in this manner, when the reordering is performed (when the frame switch 22 is operated), the displayed symbol display (the reserving area in which the reordering flag 223k7 is set to on) is displayed. Only in contrast, it is possible to rearrange and display the reserved symbol display in the change start order.

  It is determined whether there is a hold area for which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553). If it is determined that there is a pending area for which the pending notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: Yes), the pending symbol display for which the pending notification flag 223k8 is set to ON is displayed as a special pending symbol In the form, a display suspension display command to be displayed as “Δ” for the first special symbol and “▲” for the second special symbol is generated (S1554). A voice command is generated to output a voice indicating that one-shot notification has been made (in the present embodiment, a voice of “big hit !!”) (S1555). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hold area for which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, the player is set to hold a new hold symbol display because it is set to be displayed as a special hold symbol display that informs that the hold symbol display is a big hit. Every time the symbol display is displayed, it is possible to play a game with expectation that it will not be displayed in the special hold symbol display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In addition, when the special hold symbol display is displayed, it is also notified by voice that it is a jackpot, so it is possible to further enhance the player's irritability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored earlier.

  In addition, since the holding symbol display is updated and displayed each time the holding symbol display updating process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) is executed, the holding symbol display and the special holding symbol are performed along with the holding of the holding. The display can also be moved and displayed, and the player can be made to display the correct hold symbol display, which can suppress confusion of the player.

  In the present embodiment, the voice notifying that one-shot notification has been made is configured to be repeatedly notified while the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, but the invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to be output.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which alert | reports one-shot notification by displaying a reserve symbol display by a special reserve symbol display in this embodiment, it is not restricted to it, and the background is different colors and display modes (for example, blink display) The notification may be made by displaying, or the notification may be made by displaying a character on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) and the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is configured to output various commands such as a command, a first notification command, and a second notification command. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the main control device 110 may issue a command indicating various count values (special hit random number counter C1 etc.) acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. In the main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) which is output to the audio lamp control device 113 and executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the first pre-reading processing (FIG. 25, S907) and the first It is good also as composition which performs 2 pre-reading processing (Drawing 27, S914) and the like. By configuring in this manner, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to carry out the processing of the game (such as the detection of winning on various winning openings) without losing it. Note that this configuration can be similarly applied to the first to sixteenth embodiments described above, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 123, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern is selected separately, and the case where notification of the result of the pass / fail determination is performed has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment, when displaying the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the left side display area Dm1 for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner and the second special The relevant effects are displayed on the right side display area Dm2 in which the symbols are variably displayed, and the results of the respective judgments on the success or failure are notified.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the eighteenth embodiment, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when a specific condition is satisfied, the variable display aspect in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively related (hereinafter referred to as This is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the player is notified of the result of determination of acceptance or rejection, by displaying the combined effect).

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the display mode of the fusion effect variation pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. When it is determined by the first special symbol or the second special symbol that the fusion effect variation pattern is selected, the variation display of the special symbol by the fusion effect variation pattern at the timing synchronized with the first special symbol and the second special symbol (Fusion effect) is started. In the fusion effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the display mode for performing competition by throwing is displayed in the left side display area Dm1 for displaying the first special symbol and the right side display area Dm2 for displaying the second special symbol. Be done. In detail, in left side display area Dm1, it shows that the yes / no decision result of the 1st special symbol is informed as a red group, and in right side display area Dm2, it announces the propriety result of the 2nd special symbol as white group. It is shown that. If the red set wins the white set in a row, it indicates that the first special symbol will be a big hit, and if the white set wins the red set, it will be a big hit in the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the case where the result of putting the ball in the red group and the white group is a draw, it is shown that the result of the judgment of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is both out.

  As described above, in normal times, in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, although the success / failure determination results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are separately displayed, the fusion effect is determined. In the variable display mode (fusion effect) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different from the normal time, the result of judgment of acceptance is notified, giving a fresh feeling to the player. The game can be prevented from getting bored early.

  In addition, since the fusion effect is configured to be easily determined when the success or failure judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit, the player is expected to the jackpot when the variable display of the fusion effect is started. It is possible to play the game with a great feeling. Therefore, the player can play with expectation whether the variable display of the fusion effect is started and also at the normal time (period in which the fusion effect is not displayed), and can be performed while enjoying the game for a long time .

  In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is the effect by putting in a ball, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If the distinction between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is eliminated and the hero (player) wins the enemy, The effect may be a jackpot with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In such a case, when the fusion effect is started, the division between the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2 disappears, and in the upper side display area Dm, an effect such as performing a one-to-one car race with the enemy Is displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can understand that it will be a jackpot if the hero's car ends earlier than the enemy's car anyway, and the player can play the game easily.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which does not display the special symbol (main symbol) as a number in this embodiment, it may be comprised so that it may carry out a small fluctuation | variation display not only in it but in each display area. By configuring in this manner, the player can confirm the result of the determination of the success or failure even when looking at the main symbol, and can easily recognize whether the effect has reported the out or the notification. .

  In addition, the main symbol may be configured to be changed to a number and displayed as a temporary symbol such as "o" or "x". By configuring in this manner, the area for displaying the main symbol can be reduced, and the display area that can be used for the fusion effect can be configured larger.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the present embodiment will be described. In this sorting reserve storage area 203u, the adjustment effect flag 203u10 and the fusion effect execution are performed for each of the reserve areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (the changing data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). The flag 203u11 is added, respectively.

  Although the adjustment effect flag 203u10 will be described later in detail, it indicates that it is a hold to select a fluctuation pattern for time adjustment so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can simultaneously start fluctuating display. It is a flag. The adjustment effect flag 203u10 performs time adjustment to execute fusion effect when it is determined that fusion effect is to be performed in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. It is set to on about the reservation area corresponding to the special symbol which changes. On the other hand, when the reserve area is shifted due to reserve termination and the variation of the special symbol is finished, it is set to off by being overwritten by the data of the reserve area to be newly shifted. In addition, the fusion effect is a fusion effect variation pattern in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is simultaneously started, and the variation display with relation is performed between the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Shows the contents to be displayed variably with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is a flag indicating that it is pending to execute the fusion effect. Although the details will be described later, the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 executes the fusion effect when it is determined to execute the fusion effect in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Then, the on-hold area corresponding to the determined on-hold is set to on. On the other hand, when each data of the reserve area is shifted due to reserve termination and the variation of the special symbol is finished, it is set to off by being overwritten by the data of the reserve area to be newly shifted.

  With reference to FIG. 118 (b), the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. Similar to the sorting reserve storage area 203u of the main control unit 110, the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k includes the reserve areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (during variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). An adjustment effect flag 223k10 and a fusion effect execution flag 223k11 are respectively added to each of the data). The adjustment effect flag 223 k and the fusion effect execution flag 223 k 11 are adjusted in the reordering storage area 203 u of the main control device 110 except that the adjustment effect flag 223 k and the fusion effect execution flag 223 k 11 are set on based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. Since the effect flag 203u10 and the combined effect execution flag 203u11 are the same, the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 119 (a) is a view schematically showing a part of another memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to this embodiment. A fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is added to the other memory area 203v. The fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a counter value acquired when it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed by the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) described later. Further, in the main processing (FIG. 33), fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is incremented by one each in processing (S1209) in which fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated, and after being added up to the upper limit value of 99, 100 and so on. Then, the counter value is updated to an initial value of 0.

  Next, FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing a fusion effect variation pattern list stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the present embodiment. The list of fusion effect variation patterns is a view representing together the fusion effect variation patterns added to the special hit variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The fusion presentation variation pattern is allocated to and stored in a specific address of the special hit variation pattern table 202d and the special outlier variation pattern table 202e. Specifically, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected as the fusion effect variation pattern to be selected when the first special symbol's determination result of the first special symbol is a hit and the second special symbol is not. In the top address of the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d, the fluctuation pattern in which the first special symbol wins with the throwing effect is stored. In addition, a variation pattern in which the second special symbol loses in the throwing effect is stored at the top address of the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

  In addition, as the fusion effect variation pattern selected when the first special symbol is out and the second special symbol is a hit or not determination result, the top address of the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the first special symbol loses in the throwing effect is stored. Further, at the top address of the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202e for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern in which the second special symbol wins with the throwing effect is stored.

  Furthermore, as the fusion effect variation pattern to be selected in the case of the determination result of the first special symbol being out and the second special symbol being out, the special outlier variation of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol At the end address of the pattern, there are stored variation patterns that become tied in the throwing-in effect.

  Thus, by configuring, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines to execute the fusion effect, the fusion effect can be easily performed based on the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute the fusion effect. Can be selected, and the control load can be reduced as compared with the case of selection using a counter value or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the fusion effect selects the fusion effect variation pattern for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and voices the display mode in which the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2 are variably displayed. Although the configuration is such that the lamp control device 113 is notified, the present invention is not limited thereto, and one fusion effect variation pattern is displayed as the display mode displayed by the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 It may be configured to be selected as With this configuration, it is possible to suppress deviation of the display mode displayed by the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Further, the control load of the display control device 114 can be reduced as compared with the case of displaying the fusion effect separately.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, main controller 110 selects the fusion effect variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and outputs the variation pattern command to sound lamp control device 113, respectively. Then, the display control may be performed as one variation mode in the display control unit 114 that has received the display command based on the voice lamp control unit 113 or the voice lamp control unit 113 that has received the variation pattern command. . By configuring in this manner, even when selecting the fusion effect variation pattern, main controller 110 selects the fusion effect variation pattern by the same control as when selecting the normal variation pattern, and the audio lamp control device It can output to 113 and can suppress that the control which the main control apparatus 110 performs becomes complicated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect variation patterns are stored in the special hit variation pattern table 202d and the special outlier variation pattern table 202e, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this. Of course, it may be configured to set and store the configured special variation pattern table.

  Next, referring to FIG. 120, in the eighteenth embodiment, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) of the eighteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the eighteenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 121, in the eighteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 120, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 8 (S380) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S380). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the fusion effect is to be performed, a synchronous fluctuation pattern or a fusion effect fluctuation pattern for executing the fusion effect is selected.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S671) . The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S671: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S672). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special hit variation pattern table 202d for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set. Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, the jackpot type table 202b is set, and the jackpot type is determined (S673).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203 o is off (S 671: No), a special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S 674). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11B) is set.

  It is determined whether the adjustment effect flag 203u10 in the hold area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u corresponding to the start of fluctuation start is ON (S675). If it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is on (S675: Yes), the synchronous fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the holding area is selected and selected. A first variation pattern command indicating the synchronization variation pattern is generated (S676). Here, in the fusion effect lottery process (not shown), which is executed in one process of the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) described later or the second pre-reading update process (not shown), this synchronous variation pattern When it is decided to execute fusion production, the fluctuation start time is adjusted so that the suspension of the first special symbol determined to execute that fusion and the suspension of the second special symbol become the fluctuation display start at the same timing Variation pattern to Specifically, of the suspension of the first special symbol and the second special symbol determined to execute the fusion effect, the variation start time of the variation start time is earlier in the variation start time of the later variation start time. Is stored, with respect to the suspension which starts fluctuation immediately before that, the fluctuation time added to the selected fluctuation time is stored.

  The synchronous variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the result of determination of acceptance is out, and the main symbol is variably displayed during a set variation time, and is variably displayed so as to be displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation. It is a fluctuation pattern.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is off (S675: No), the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 in the hold area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u corresponding to the hold that starts changing is set on. Is determined (S677). If it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S677: Yes), the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the sorting reserve storage area 203u for which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to on The fusion effect variation pattern is selected based on the determination result of the above and the first variation pattern command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the selected fusion effect variation pattern is generated (S678).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S677: No), the variation pattern type is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c. It is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S679).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S680). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S 681). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S682).

  As described above, it is normal to select the fluctuation pattern based on each counter value by determining when the fluctuation pattern is selected whether the adjustment effect flag 203u10 or the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fusion effect is to be performed, a method of selecting a variation pattern different from normal can be made, and the selection of the variation pattern can be flexibly performed according to the situation.

  In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (not shown) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380), the second For the point that the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected and the second variation pattern command is generated based on the selected variation pattern, the processing of S681 is changed to the second stop type command, the processing for S682 Since the same processing is executed except that measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is started, detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 122, S926) in the eighteenth embodiment, a fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) and S1240 are performed on the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. The processing of S1241 is added. In the eighteenth embodiment, each process from S931 to S935 is the same as each process from S931 to S935 in the first embodiment.

  When the process of S934 or S935 ends, the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) is executed. The details of the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) will be described in detail later, but it is determined whether or not the fusion effect is to be executed when the selected fluctuation pattern is a hit pattern or out-of-target super reach. Run.

  Next, after the process of S936 is executed, it is determined whether the sorting order is interrupted and renumbered or whether the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1240). If it is determined that the reordering order is interrupted and renumbered or the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1240: Yes), the pass / fail judgment result storage area stored in each holding area 203u1, the big hit stop type storage area 203u2, the variation pattern type storage area 203u4, the variation start time storage area 203u5, and the prefetch correct probability change flag 203u6, and rearrange the rearranging order based on the variation start time (S1241). In this case, when the change start order changes due to a newly generated hold, there may be a case where the gaming state at the start of the change (whether positive change or normal) changes, but even in such a case, the change start again It is possible to recognize the correct sort order (order to start change) by re-executing the success or failure judgment in the gaming state and updating the selected change pattern.

  In addition, even if it is decided that fusion effect is executed, the order to start fluctuation is changed by selecting the synchronous fluctuation pattern, but also in that case, in the gaming state when fluctuation starts again Since the determination of success or failure and the update of the fluctuation pattern are performed, it is possible to recognize the correct fluctuation start order. Note that the change pattern is not reselected for the reserved area for which the synchronous fluctuation pattern or the fusion effect fluctuation pattern is selected, and the fluctuation start is started based on the selected synchronous fluctuation pattern or the fusion effect fluctuation pattern. Time etc. are calculated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order is not renumbered by interrupting and it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S1240: Yes), the processing of S939 is executed.

  By configuring in this manner, when it is determined in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) that the fusion effect is to be performed, the reexecution of the pass / fail judgment on each holding area, the variation pattern Since the reselection is performed, it is possible to redetermine the correct fluctuation start order.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the fusion rendering lottery process (S1220), which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIGS. 122 and 926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the fusion effect lottery process (S1220).

  In the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220), first, it is determined whether or not there is a suspension area in which fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set ON among the suspension areas of reordering storage area 203u of main controller 110 (S1221). If it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off in all the reserve areas (S1221: No), the result of determination of success or failure is one of the reserve areas of the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u of the main control device 110. It is determined whether there is a pending area of (S1222).

  In the case where it is determined that the acceptance determination result is out of all the reserve areas (S1222: No), the variation pattern expected to be selected is the variation pattern for which the acceptance determination result is a hit (ie, It is determined (S1223) whether or not a variation pattern has been selected in the S934 processing of the first prefetch update processing (FIG. 122, S926). If it is determined that the variation pattern predicted to be selected is the hitting variation pattern (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether or not fusion rendering can be performed (S1224). Here, in the present embodiment, the condition as to whether or not the fusion effect can be performed is that there are two or more holdings corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. In addition, the number of suspension of the first special symbol is the number including the suspension newly generated this time.

  As described above, by setting the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to two or more as a condition, one is a hold for executing the fusion effect change pattern, and the other is a synchronous change. It can be set as a hold for executing a pattern, and the start of execution of the fusion effect can be synchronized between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is a deviation fluctuation pattern (S1223: No), the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is a super reach outlier or not. Is determined (S1225). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern expected to be selected is the out-of-order super reach (S1225: Yes), the process of S1224 is performed.

  If it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed (S1224: Yes), the value of the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is acquired (S1226). It is determined whether the acquired counter value is the counter value set for the hit (S1227). In the present embodiment, the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a counter value of "0 to 99", and the counter values of "0 to 19" are set as the hit counter value.

  If it is determined that the acquired counter value is the counter value set for the hit (S1227: No), the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON for the hold area for executing the fusion effect (S1228) ). Here, with respect to the hold area for executing the fusion effect, the first special symbol is a hold area corresponding to the hold newly generated this time. On the other hand, with regard to the second special symbol, of the reserved areas of the second special symbol stored, the holding area to which the fluctuation start order is the last is set as the holding area for executing the fusion effect.

  The variation start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the reserve area where the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to on is compared, and the fusion among the reserve areas corresponding to the special symbol whose variation start time is earlier The adjustment effect flag 203u10 is set to ON for the hold area in front of the hold area for which the effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1229).

  The difference of the fluctuation start time of the holding area in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON is calculated. A variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is a synchronous variation pattern indicating a time obtained by adding the difference of the calculated variation start time to the variation time of the variation pattern expected to be selected in the holding area in which the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is set to ON. (S1330).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S1221: Yes), if it is determined that there is a holding area with a success or failure determination result (S1222), the selected fluctuation pattern is out of super If it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern other than reach (S1223: No and S1225: No), fusion effect is not executable (ie, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is 2 or less) When it is determined (S1224: No), when it is determined that the value of the acquired combined effect lottery counter 203v10 is the out-of-counter value (S1227: No), this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, if the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (that is, it has already been decided to execute the fusion effect) in any of the reserve areas, whether or not the fusion effect is to be executed. Since the processing of (1) is not performed, it is possible to prevent the fusion effect from being continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the fusion effect early due to the fusion effect occurring frequently.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect is not performed when there is a pending area with a success or failure determination result in any of the pending areas (except for the pending area corresponding to the newly occurring pending). did. By being configured in this manner, it is possible to prevent a shift due to the restart timing of the special symbol that has temporarily stopped the execution start time of the fusion effect or the like by the jackpot game being sandwiched.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where the variation pattern expected to be selected is configured to determine whether or not the fusion effect is to be executed by lottery if the variation pattern predicted to be selected is a hit variation pattern or an out-of-order super reach, This is a variation pattern that is easy to be selected when the determination result is a hit, and it is possible for the player to have a high expectation for a hit when the combined effect is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game in anticipation of the fusion effect being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the fusion effect is to be performed by satisfying a predetermined condition and further by acquiring the counter value and performing lottery, so that the fusion effect is frequently performed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the fusion effect at an early stage.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the number of holding balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is two or more as a condition under which the fusion effect can be performed, the fusion effect is executed. It can be configured to be able to set the synchronization variation pattern to match the timing, it is possible to easily match the timing to perform the fusion effect between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) is configured to be executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, but is limited thereto Alternatively, it may be configured to execute at another timing. The timing for executing the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) may be set as appropriate, but specifically, for example, an RTC etc. may be provided and configured to be executed when a predetermined set time is reached. .

  By configuring in this way, the fusion effect will be executed by lottery for every predetermined time, and by adjusting the execution start time and the lottery probability, it is possible to provide a game that does not make the player get bored more. it can. Also, by notifying the player of the time for drawing the fusion effect and the like in advance to the player with the third symbol display device 81 etc., the player can play the game expecting that time, and the long-time game can be performed. It can be performed while the player enjoys it.

  Although the number of holding balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is two or more as conditions under which fusion effects can be performed, the number is not limited to two but may be three or more, etc. Instead of the number of reservations, it may be configured to determine whether the fusion effect can be performed at synchronized timing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the opportunity to execute the fusion presentation, and to further entertain the player.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which synchronizes the timing which performs fusion production by setting one to a synchronous fluctuation pattern among holding balls, it is not restricted to it, but the fluctuation time of the special symbol in fluctuation May be extended or shortened to synchronize.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to synchronize the variation start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited thereto, the variation start time is not synchronized and the variation start is synchronized. While the change of the special symbol on the earlier side is displayed until the other special symbol starts to change, the screen of blackout etc. is displayed or the delay fluctuation mode such as keeping the main symbol being changed is displayed, The fusion effect may be performed at the timing when the special symbol (special symbol for performing the fusion effect of the later one of the fluctuation start) becomes the fluctuation start. With this configuration, the process for synchronizing the fluctuation start time is not necessary, and the control load of main controller 10 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to start execution of the fusion effect at the synchronized timing, the synchronization variation pattern is used to synchronize. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the timing to start the variation may be delayed. With this configuration, control processing for synchronization can be reduced, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the fusion effect of this embodiment is configured to display the associated variation mode with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player does not win a big hit with either one of the special symbols. You can play games with great expectations. Also, the effects of both special symbols can be viewed in an easy-to-understand manner, and a game effect that is easy to understand can be provided to the player.

  In addition, also in the second prefetch update process (not shown), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), the first prefetch update process (the process relating to the second special symbol is different) The same process as FIG. 122, S926) is performed. The detailed description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, when it is predicted that the fluctuation pattern of the win or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is selected, the fusion effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the following configuration may be employed. . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first variation pattern command by selecting the first variation pattern variation selection process (FIG. 18, S310) of the first variation pattern or the out-of-order super reach. Controls the display control device 114 so as to enlarge and display the area of the display area for displaying the change pattern of the hit or the change pattern of the super reach as shown in FIG. 117 (b). .

  By this configuration, the player can easily recognize the display area to be focused on, and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the display area is expanded when it is a fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected in the case of a big hit, it becomes easy to see the fluctuation mode, pay attention to the fluctuation of the other special symbol, and miss the fluctuation mode It is possible to prevent the problem of In the present embodiment, when the hit variation pattern or the out-of-point variation pattern of super reach is displayed in both display regions, control is performed to prohibit the enlargement of the display region when the variation starts simultaneously. In addition, when the timing of the start of the change is different, the case where the display area is enlarged first is changed to the size at normal time (area of the uniform display area), and in the case of a big hit in both cases. It can be recognized that a variation pattern that is easy to select is selected. Therefore, if the player changes the display area to the normal display area after the display area is expanded and before it stops fluctuating, an expectation for a larger jackpot (expected that two consecutive hits are obtained It is possible to play the game with a sense of feeling, and to increase the interest in the game.

  Based on the time stored in the change start time storage area 203u5, the change start order of each reserve area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is renumbered again. By configuring in this manner, the player can arrange the holding symbol display in the order of starting the fluctuation by operating the frame button 22 even during the probability change chance game, and the player can accurately start the fluctuation. The order can be recognized.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, in the case of executing the probability variation chance game, it is configured to be able to be executed when there is no hit such as a probability variation jackpot in the reserve area first. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the other jackpot from disrupting the player when the odds game is started.

  In this embodiment, since the synchronous fluctuation pattern is selected for the hold stored immediately before the holding area for executing the fusion effect, the player can perform the fusion effect by the effect of the synchronous fluctuation pattern. It is possible to recognize that it is started, and it is possible to prevent the fusion rendering from being missed. Thus, the player can prepare in advance to watch the fusion effect.

  In the present embodiment, since the probability variation chance game is executed in the high probability gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol individually perform lotterys. Can be set to shift the game to Therefore, the player can increase the enjoyment in the higher probability gaming state as compared to the gaming machine in which one special symbol is sequentially displayed in a variable manner.

  In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to determine whether or not to be executed based on the selection of the fluctuation pattern of the big hit or the out-of-super reach pattern by one of the special symbols. Not limited thereto, the following configuration may be employed. For example, when the jackpot is determined, the fusion effect may be configured to be executed, and the type of the jackpot may be determined in the variation mode of the fusion effect. Specifically, based on the fact that the 15R normal jackpot has been determined in the first special symbol, the fusion effect is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in the throwing effect shown in FIG. 117 (a). If the red set in the left display area Dm1 wins, the 15R normal jackpot is won, while if the white set in the right display area Dm2 where the second special symbol is displayed wins, the 15R definite variation jackpot is notified and the red set wins the effect Configure to

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the fusion effect. Moreover, not only the expectation to the jackpot but also the expectation of the probability variation jackpot can be greatly given to the player. In such a configuration, a jackpot having different numbers of rounds may be set, for example, a configuration in which either 15R jackpot or 5R jackpot wins may be awarded, or a large profit to be given to other players. It may be configured to notify to give either of the different ones.

  The first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) is also performed in the second prefetch update process (not shown), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. ), The same process is executed except that the process is changed to the process relating to the second special symbol, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the variation start timings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are synchronized to start the fusion effect, but in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the variation start timing is It does not synchronize especially. Specifically, in the fusion effect of the special symbol that starts changing first, the fusion effect is performed first, and when the fusion effect of the special symbol that starts thereafter is started, the fusion that is started earlier The fusion effect is started so as to interrupt the effect, and the result of the judgment of the success or failure is informed by the variable display mode in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are related.

  Specifically, in the combined effect, the player competes in a boxing confrontation between the red corner player displayed in the left side display area Dm1 and the blue corner player displayed in the right side display area Dm2. In the first pre-read update process (not shown) or the second pre-read update process (not shown) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the fusion effect is displayed when the hold determined that either is a hit is established. It is decided to carry out. Next, the suspension to execute the fusion effect is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol (one is a notification of being hit and held). Here, if the determined type of the hit is a 15R probability variation jackpot, if the player in the display area corresponding to the special symbol (for example, the player in the red corner if the first special symbol) wins, the 15R probability variation The player is informed that the jackpot will be awarded.

  In the change display mode in which the change start is earlier among the suspension determined to execute the fusion effect, first, the character “Challenging for Challenger!” Is displayed until the other special symbol becomes the change start, and the boxing The fusion effect is started with the player displayed. On the other hand, when the change of the special symbol to execute the fusion effect to be started later is started, the boxing player is also displayed, and the effect that the boxing game is started is executed. Then, in accordance with the variation finish time of the special symbol to be hit, the boxing player corresponding to the special symbol to be hit is rendered to be won.

  Thereby, in order to execute the fusion effect with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is not necessary to execute the processing for synchronizing the fluctuation start time, so that the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. It can be reduced.

  In addition, all variation modes performed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be set as the display mode of the fusion effect. In such a configuration, in the case of being out of each other, the effect that the boxing game is continuing is displayed, and when the combined effect variation pattern determined to be a hit is selected, the player corresponding to the special symbol wins. It should be configured to By configuring in this manner, the player can easily recognize the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol more easily.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 selects the fusion effect, but in the main control unit 110, the fluctuation time is determined, and the signal indicating the fluctuation time and the signal indicating the result of the judgment of acceptance are voiced respectively. It may be configured to output to the lamp control device 113 to determine whether the audio lamp control device 113 is capable of executing the fusion effect and to display the fusion effect based on the fluctuation time and the result of the determination of the acceptance or rejection. By configuring in this manner, it is not necessary to execute the lottery whether or not the main control device 110 executes the fusion effect, and the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the fusion effect by viewing the state of the number of holdings. Specifically, when holding of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is equally stored, it is configured to execute the fusion effect. Furthermore, if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute the fusion effect based on the fact that the same variation time variation pattern is stored alternately, respectively, the first special symbol The execution and the end of the fusion effect can be easily matched with the symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 130, a pachinko machine 10 according to a nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the case of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, regardless of the mutual determination result, the variation pattern is determined by lottery and the respective lottery games are executed. explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed, the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (probable variation gaming state). If it is predicted that a jackpot (hereinafter, usually a jackpot) serving as a trigger to shift to a low probability gaming state with one special symbol is predicted to be won (if it is determined in advance before the start of fluctuation), until the jackpot starts In the other special symbol, the game is performed with an indication as to whether the player can win the probability variation jackpot in the other special symbol.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the nineteenth embodiment, when the jackpot is normally won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the high probability gaming state, the delay until the jackpot occurs, in the meantime, the other special symbol When the jackpot is won, it differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that control is performed to extend the jackpot so as to be usually executed after the jackpot.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, an effect display mode in the probability change chance game as to whether or not the high probability gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment is extended will be described. When it is determined that the normal jackpot has been won in the first special symbol (the left display area Dm1) during the high probability gaming state by the variation change process (FIG. 130, S1250) described later, the countdown effect command is set In the left side display area Dm1, an effect display mode indicating the start of the probability variation chance game is displayed. In the present embodiment, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 124, a balloon is displayed in the left side display area Dm1, and is displayed so as to expand as time passes. In addition, if the balloon is broken, it is indicated by characters that the high probability gaming state (probable change) is ended.

  When the effect display mode indicating the probability change chance game is displayed, the player usually recognizes that the jackpot has been won with the special symbol of the displayed balloon. By the time the jackpot game is started, the player plays the game thinking that he or she can not win the jackpot. By configuring in this manner, the player can play the game whether he or she can win the probability change jackpot in a short time as well as the jackpot unlike before, which is different from the normal time You can play with the goal.

  The variable display of the first special symbol is smallly displayed at the central position of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in the upper view of FIG. By configuring in this manner, it can be understood that the first special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the digestion of the reserved symbol display, and it can be confirmed whether or not the lottery game is being executed. Also, each time the reserved symbol display is digested, it can be recognized that the start of the jackpot is approaching, and every time the first special symbol displayed is stopped changing, the player is Since it is possible to enjoy the feeling, the taste of the game can be increased.

  If the normal jackpot is decided with the first special symbol without being able to win the probability variation jackpot with the second special symbol, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 124, it becomes an effect display mode in which the balloons are broken, and the stop symbol of the special symbol usually showing the jackpot Is displayed. Moreover, although not shown in the drawings, when the probability variation jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the stop symbol of the special symbol usually showing the jackpot is displayed without breaking the balloon. Thereby, the player recognizes that the special variation jackpot normally displayed with the second special symbol is started after the normal jackpot by displaying the special symbol indicating the normal jackpot being stopped without breaking the balloon. Can. Therefore, the player can play a game expecting that the balloon is not broken, and can be more interested in the game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the alert for the fact that the second special symbol was won by the probability variation jackpot is that the balloon is not broken, the present invention is not limited thereto, for example, displaying characters such as "Positive variation still continues!" Then, it may be notified to the player. Moreover, it is not limited to the effect of whether or not the balloon is broken, and other effect display modes may naturally be adopted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a view schematically showing a part of another memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. As shown in FIG. In the other memory area 203v, a first change change flag 203v11 and a second change change flag 203v12 are added.

  The first change change flag 203v11 is predicted to have won the normal jackpot with the first special symbol when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state) (it is determined earlier than the start of the change) ) Is a flag indicating that. This first change change flag 203v11 is set to ON in the process of S1254 of the change change process (FIG. 130, S1250) which is one process of the first pre-reading update process (S129 in FIG. 129) described later. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the fact that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot has been started. In the initialized state when the power is turned on, it is set to off. The flag is also backed up by the backup accompanying the power-off, and is loaded in the start-up process (FIG. 34) to return to the state before the power-off.

  Also, the second variation change flag 203v12 is predicted to have won the normal jackpot with the second special symbol when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state) (determined earlier than the start of fluctuation) Flag that indicates that The second change change flag 203v12 is set to ON in the same way as the first change change flag 203v11 in the change change process (not shown) of the second read ahead update process (not shown), and the jackpot game accompanying the normal big hit is usually Set to off when started. The other changes are only different from the first variation change flag 203v11 in terms of the second special symbol, and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a part of the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d and the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described.

  The upper diagram of FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the special hitting variation pattern table 202d for time reduction / probability variation of the special hitting variation pattern table 202d. A variation variation pattern and a variation variation pattern are added to the time variation / precise variation special hitting variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment.

  The hit variation change pattern is a variation pattern which is selected on condition that the result of the judgment of winning is a hit when the player usually wins a big hit when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. The fluctuation time is set to 180 seconds, which is longer than the other fluctuation times. Therefore, since it takes time until it is stopped and displayed by the stop symbol which shows a hit, in the meantime, the opportunity to perform the multiple pass / fail determination with the other special symbol can be obtained. Therefore, during that time, it is possible to make the player have an expectation as to whether or not the other special symbol may be a big change jackpot. In addition, even if the jackpot is not the jackpot, it is possible to give more jackpots to the player, and the player can enjoy the game more.

  In the high probability gaming state, the variation variation pattern is selected when one of the special symbols usually wins a big hit or a probability variation big jack if it is predicted that the other special symbol usually wins a big hit. It is a pattern. This extended fluctuation pattern is configured with a fluctuation time longer than the other fluctuation patterns of 300 seconds. In addition, the time until the normal jackpot won with the other special symbol during the definite variation chance game is decided and stopped is up to 240 seconds in the variation of the reserved special symbol. This is that when the jackpot is usually the fourth of the special symbols held, the hold 1 to 3 are fluctuatingly displayed in the outlier change change pattern of 20 seconds described later, and usually the jackpot is a fluctuation time of 180 seconds It is.

  By configuring in this way, in a high probability gaming state, when one jackpot is usually won by a special symbol and then the other jackpot is selected by a jackpot, the jackpot is always one of the usual jackpot games A big hit game will be started later. Therefore, when the hit with the other special symbol is a probability variation big hit, usually the big hit is executed, it shifts to low probability game state. After that, it is possible to shift to the high probability gaming state again by the probability variation jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high probability gaming state for a longer time.

  The lower part of FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the special out-of-order variation pattern table 202e for time reduction and probability change of the special out-of-order variation pattern table 202e. The time variation / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the present embodiment has a deviation variation change pattern and a deviation extension variation pattern added to the time shortening / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the first embodiment. .

  In the outlier change change pattern, when it is predicted that the jackpot is usually won in the high probability gaming state, the result of judging whether the hold is stored in the hold area corresponding to the special symbol won in the normal jackpot is out of judgment It is a fluctuation pattern selected when fluctuation starts on the condition that there is a certain condition. The outlier variation change pattern is configured with a variation time of 20 seconds, and is configured with a relatively long variation time as compared to other variation patterns. Therefore, when a hold that is normally predicted to be won by the jackpot is established, if there are a large number of holding balls corresponding to the special symbol, this outlier variation change pattern is executed for the hold. Thus, up to three variable change patterns are implemented, usually delaying the start of the jackpot by up to 60 seconds. Therefore, the delayed time can increase the possibility of winning a jackpot with the other special symbol. Therefore, the player can be given many opportunities to get a jackpot.

  The deviation extension fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern which is selected in the case where it is judged that the success or failure judgment result is out in one special symbol, when it is predicted that the other special symbol usually wins a big hit in the high probability gaming state. The out-of-extension variation pattern is configured with a variation time that is relatively shorter than the other variation patterns in which the variation time is 3 seconds. Therefore, one lottery cycle can be shortened, and more lottery games can be executed with one special symbol. Therefore, during the probability change chance game, more lottery games can be played in a short time, and it is possible to give the player an opportunity to get a big hit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 127, in the nineteenth embodiment, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is added. In the processes of S301 to S309 in the nineteenth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment are executed. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is executed.

  128, in the nineteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 127, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 9 (S390) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 (S390). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Further, in the high probability gaming state, when it is predicted that the second special symbol usually makes a big hit, the hit extension change pattern or the out-extension change pattern is selected based on the result of the pass / fail determination. On the other hand, in the first special symbol and in the high probability gaming state, when it is predicted to be a large jackpot, the hit change change pattern or the out-of-change change pattern is selected based on the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S821) . The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S821: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S822). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special hit variation pattern table 202d for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the special hit variation pattern table 202d (upper view in FIG. 126) for time reduction / probability change is set. Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, the jackpot type table 202b is set, and the jackpot type is determined (S823).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S821: No), a special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S824). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. If the gaming state is a high probability gaming state or time is short (time reduction counter 203k is greater than 0), the time reduction / probability change special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 126 lower figure) is set.

  It is determined whether the second change change flag 203v12 is set to ON (ie, it is predicted that the second special symbol usually makes a big hit during the high probability gaming state) (S825). When it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is on (S825: Yes), the extension variation pattern of the selected variation pattern table is selected, and the extension variation pattern is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The first variation pattern command of is generated (S826).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (S825: No), the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to on (that is, the high probability gaming state with the first special symbol) It is determined whether or not it is normally predicted to be a jackpot) (S827). If it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to ON (S827: Yes), the variation change pattern of the selected variation pattern table is selected, and the variation change pattern is selected as the voice lamp control device 113. A first variation pattern command for notification is generated (S828).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first change change flag 203v11 is off (S827: No), the change pattern type is stored based on the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c. Is selected (decided) from the selected variation pattern table (S829).

  Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S830). The first type-of-stop command is set based on the type of stop being determined (S831). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S 832).

  As described above, when it is predicted that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is usually a jackpot during the high probability gaming state, a probability changing chance game is executed. During the probability change chance game, if it is predicted that the second special symbol usually makes a big hit, the out-of-order variation pattern is selected for the variation of the out-of-order judgment result of the first special symbol, so 3 It becomes a lottery game for a short time of seconds, and the cycle for starting the lottery game can be shortened. Therefore, more lottery games can be executed in the first special symbol, and a player can be provided with many opportunities to obtain a lottery game that will be a jackpot. Therefore, the probability that the player gets a jackpot can be increased.

  In addition, in the second special symbol, since the normal jackpot to transition to the low probability gaming state has been elected, if it can be elected in the first special symbol probability variable jackpot, the probability variation jackpot is the second by the extension change pattern per hit (2) Since it is executed later than the normal jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state shifted to the low probability gaming state can be shifted to the high probability gaming state again. Therefore, the player can be made to play in the high probability gaming state for a longer time. Therefore, the player can be given the opportunity to get more jackpots.

  Moreover, although it was set as the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time of 300 seconds as a hit extension fluctuation pattern in this embodiment, it is not restricted to it, time until the usual big hit of the 2nd special symbol is calculated, and based on it , And may be configured to set the fluctuation time. By configuring in this manner, the time until the jackpot of the first special symbol is started can be shortened, and it is possible to suppress the player from seeing the effect of the long fluctuation time in vain.

  In addition, when it is predicted that the first special symbol will usually be a big hit, it was configured to select the outlier change change pattern for the suspension of the first special symbol that has been suspended so far, but not limited to that It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern of relatively long fluctuation time, such as any of outlier super reach. With this configuration, the same variation pattern as usual is displayed even in the probability variation chance game, and it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the game. In addition, since the number of variation patterns can be reduced, the capacity of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the start of the jackpot is normally delayed by selecting the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the fluctuation start may be delayed for a predetermined time. Specifically, in the high probability gaming state, when it is predicted that a normal jackpot will be won, it may be configured to determine the time to delay the start of fluctuation by lottery, and to delay the start of fluctuation during that time . By configuring in this way, the player wants to get more lottery games with the other special symbol while the variation of the special symbol is stopped (delayed), and wants to get a probability change jackpot It is possible to play games and to concentrate by playing games. Further, in the probability change chance game, the variation start of one of the special symbols is stopped (delayed), and it is possible to show the player that a more special game is being played.

  In addition, in the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the same processing is executed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 only in the point regarding the second special symbol, so the detailed description Is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) in the nineteenth embodiment, the change change process (FIG. 130, S926) and S1130 to the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. The processes up to S1131 are added. In the nineteenth embodiment, the processes of S931 to S932 are the same as the processes of S931 to S932 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S932, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a normal jackpot (S932: No), the change change process (FIG. 130, S1250) is executed. The change change process (FIG. 130, S1250) is a process for setting a probability change chance game if it is not in the probability change chance game when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, which will be described later.

  The process of S933 of the nineteenth embodiment is the same process as S933 of the first embodiment. When the process of S933 ends, it is determined whether the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (that is, it is predicted that the second special symbol usually becomes a big hit) (S1130). If it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1130: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted probability variation jackpot will be a hit even in the normal gaming state (S1131) ). If it is determined that the game is to be hit even in the normal gaming state (S1131: Yes), a countdown effect avoidance command is generated (S1132).

  The countdown effect avoidance command is a command to keep the balloon displayed in the odds chance game being displayed without breaking. When the balloon is displayed in the second special symbol (right side display area Dm2) and the probability changing chance game can be performed whether the probability variation jackpot can be obtained in the first special symbol (left side display area Dm1), If it is predicted that the special symbol will be a probability change jackpot in the special symbol, in the probability variation chance game, the balloon is switched to the effect display mode in which the balloon is not broken in order to notify that the probability variation can be obtained. Thereby, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot can be obtained in the probability variation game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second change change flag 203v12 is off (S1130: No), or if it is determined that the second game is out in the normal gaming state (S1131: No), the process of S1132 is skipped. Then, the process of S934 is performed.

  In this manner, in the process of S1131, by determining whether or not to be a hit even in the normal gaming state, during the probability change chance game, the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed after the normal jackpot with the second special symbol It may be the case. In that case, a case where it does not become a big hit occurs by being drawn in the low probability gaming state, but in such a case, since the countdown effect avoidance command is not set, the probability variation jackpot for the player is the first special The symbol does not indicate that he has won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of erroneous information.

  The processes of S934 to S939 in the nineteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S934 to S939 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the first pre-reading update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the holding with the probability changing jackpot in the probability changing chance game is Since the configuration is configured to set whether or not to be established, the effect can be changed based on the establishment of the hold, and it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of erroneous information.

  Further, the setting of the countdown effect avoidance command may be configured to be set based on the winning command by the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the winning command. With this configuration, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the change change process (S1250) which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the change change process (S1250).

  In the change change process (FIG. 130, S1250), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (probable variation gaming state) (S1251). Whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state is determined based on whether or not the probability change flag 203m of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 is set to ON in the main control device 110.

  If it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is off (S1251: No), based on the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter from the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the variation The variation pattern is predicted and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reserve area of the corresponding rearrangement reserve storage area 203u (S1252).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is on (S1251: Yes), whether the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is set on (ie, in the probability variation chance game) It is determined (S1253). If it is determined that the first change change flag 203v11 or the second change change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1253: Yes), the process of S1252 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first change change flag 203v11 or the second change change flag 203v12 is off (that is, the probability change game is not in progress) (S1253: No), the first change change change flag 203v11 is turned on. Is set (S1254). The hit variation change pattern is stored in the change pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reserve area of the corresponding rearrangement reserve storage area 203u (S1255).

  The time until the set fluctuation change pattern ends fluctuation is calculated (S1256). In addition, the time until this fluctuation change pattern ends fluctuation is the number of reservations of the first special symbol in the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol currently fluctuating (this number does not include the suspension which will be the normal hit) The result obtained by multiplying 20 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the out-of-variation change pattern, is added to the above to add 180 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the per-variation change pattern.

  A countdown effect command is set based on the time calculated in the process of S1256 (S1257). When the countdown effect command set here is output to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 so that the effect display mode in which the balloon is broken is displayed after the calculated time. . By configuring in this manner, in the odds chance game, even if the second special symbol does not hold the hold that is the odd symbol, the main control device 110 executes an effect such that the balloon is broken at the end of the odd chance game There is no need to notify the command again, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, whether the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is determined to be a hit in the processing of S1131. (That is, whether it is the jackpot random number value in the low probability gaming state), but it is not limited thereto, the jackpot random number value (judgment value) determined to be the jackpot in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state respectively It may be configured to determine as the value of (no common value). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to generate a countdown avoidance command by determining whether or not the random value is determined to be a hit in the low probability gaming state in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926). Therefore, the control processing amount of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the high probability gaming state, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol, usually winning a big hit, its start is delayed, the effect that the balloon notifying that it is delayed is broken However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the time until the jackpot is usually performed (confirmed) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to count down. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining time of the high probability gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently while determining the time.

  In addition, after the jackpot is usually delayed and the effect of the countdown is started, the number of times the lottery game of the other special symbol is executed is counted, and if the countdown is 0 or the balloon is broken, You may comprise so that it may alert | report. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to evaluate how much the player has been able to play using the high probability gaming state effectively. In addition, after the countdown effect is started, each reference value (for example, 0 to 10 times, 11 times to 20 times, etc.) is set as the number of times of lottery performed for the other special symbol, and corresponds to each reference value. It may be configured to display the ranked rank. By doing this, the player can easily evaluate the game in the high probability gaming state based on the displayed rank.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot is usually delayed during the high probability gaming state, and the effect of the countdown (in the present embodiment, whether or not the balloon is broken or not) is executed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. And a special symbol that is different from the other special symbol (for example, if the start of the jackpot is usually delayed in the first special symbol, the second special symbol) to execute the lottery game (corresponding special symbol starting opening To target)). Specifically, if the normal jackpot is delayed for the first special symbol, the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 "Please start changing the second special symbol more!" It may be configured to display a letter “Aim for the starting opening (second starting opening 63b)!” To notify the player.

  Next, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are configured to be alternately established by the distributing device 630. However, in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the first start port 63a is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the second start port 63b is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. With this configuration, the player operates the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the gaming ball reaches the upper center position of the variable display device unit 80, and the left side of the variable display device unit 80 By firing the game balls so that the game balls are distributed to the right and to the right, respectively, it is possible to win the game balls in both starting openings. In addition, if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is adjusted and the gaming ball is fired with the strength that the gaming ball reaches the upper left side of the variable display device 80, the gaming ball can easily flow down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (The flow amount of the game ball to the left of the variable display unit 80 increases), so the game ball can be easily made to win in the first starting opening 63a (or the winning in the second starting opening 63b is reduced be able to). In addition, if the game ball is fired with the strength that the game ball reaches the upper right portion (or the return rubber 69) of the variable display device 80 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, the game ball is a variable display device unit Since it becomes easy to flow down the right side of 80 (the flow-down amount of the game ball to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 increases), the game ball can be made easy to win in the second starting opening 63b (or the first start) It is possible to reduce winnings in the mouth 63a).

  In the nineteenth embodiment, a countdown effect command is set in the process of S1257 of the change change process (S1250 in FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, whereby notification as shown in FIG. 124 is performed. Configuration has been described. On the other hand, in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, main control device 110 does not set the countdown effect command, but outputs the determination result of the established success or failure determination condition and the information of the selected variation pattern as a winning command. . The voice lamp control device 113 determines, based on the winning command, whether or not the suspension of selection of the hit variation change pattern is established, and sets the notification mode as shown in FIG. 124 to the voice lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 executes this. In addition, as the notification mode, a special symbol different from the special symbol for which the change change pattern is selected (for example, the second special symbol if the change change pattern is selected in the first special symbol) is given priority to the player Informing to start the fluctuation. As a specific notification mode, for example, the characters “Aim for the left side starting opening (the first starting opening 63a) !!” are displayed in the right side display area Dm2.

  In addition, it is possible to set the case of notifying the player and the case of not notifying the player by executing the lottery whether or not to set the notification mode, and to suppress the advantage to the player excessively. it can. The lottery may be based on the setting value of the setting means which can be set by the gaming shop side, or random numbers may be acquired and the lottery may be made with a predetermined probability, and the state of withdrawal of the gaming machine so far A lottery may be made on the basis of (the number of big hits, the number of difference balls, the number of changes from the current previous big hit, etc.). By doing this, it is possible to adjust the profit given to the player based on the state of the gaming machine and the profit obtained by the player. Therefore, the player can be given a profit within the range of the profit assumed in advance.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that it might alert | reported that the big jack to shift from a high probability gaming state to a normal gaming state was elected, not only that but when the big number of rounds with few rounds is determined Notification may be made, or when a winning not giving time reduction is won, it may be made to notify. Also, the present invention is not limited to a hit, and may be configured to be notified in advance based on the fact that it is decided to shift from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 140, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twentieth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the case of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, regardless of the mutual success or failure determination results, the fluctuation pattern is determined by lottery and each lottery game is executed Explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment, when the holding balls determined to be the big hit in the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol overlap, the big hit is usually the big hit It determines whether it is a jackpot or a jackpot, and usually executes control so that the jackpot starts before the jackpot.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the twentieth embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol overlap to be a big hit, if one is a big hit and the other is a big hit, the big hit is usually after the big hit. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the control for selecting the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is executed so that the jackpot game is started.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, notification effects during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. The upper diagram in FIG. 131 is a diagram showing one of each round in the jackpot game. Each time each round is started, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 131, the character "Please hit a button in a row!" Which is a notification prompting the player to hit the frame button 22 in a row is the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on. This is whether or not there is a hit ball among the holding balls stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b by continuously hitting the button. It is an effect for informing the player in advance.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 (in this embodiment, presses the button), a predetermined lottery is executed, the lottery is won, and if the holding ball serving as a hit is stored, FIG. 131 (a) As shown, the word "one more time, big hit" is displayed to indicate that the hit ball is stored in the holding ball. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated and a predetermined lottery is not won, or even if the lottery is won, if a hit ball is not stored in the holding ball, FIG. 131 (b The words "Sorry !!" as shown in) are displayed.

  By operating the frame button 22, the player can know in advance whether one more jackpot will be obtained early. In addition, since the player who does not want to know in advance does not display the information on whether or not there is a hit in the holding ball by operating the frame button 22, the player can adjust it according to the preference. Can choose a game.

  This notification effect is displayed each time the round is started. Once notified that there is a hit in the holding ball, it will not be notified from the next round. By configuring in this manner, the player can play the game with an expectation that there is a hit in the holding ball until the final round, and it is possible to prevent boredom during the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132 (a), the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the twentieth embodiment will be described. A duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is added to the sorting reserve storage area 203u with respect to the sorting reserve storage area 203u of the first embodiment.

  In the case of overlapping adjustment flag 203u12, when the holding ball which is a hit with the holding ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is overlapped, the special symbol of the holding ball which is a probability variation jackpot is usually a big hit It is a flag indicating that the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is the holding ball selected so that the jackpot game is started later than the special symbol of the holding ball.

  The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is a reserve area of the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u determined to select the extension fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern in the process of S1280 of the first duplication processing (FIG. 136, S1270) described later. Set to on. On the other hand, the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is the next fluctuation started when the fluctuation is ended after the holding ball is digested, the holding area is shifted, and the fluctuation data is stored and shifted to the data storage area during fluctuation Sometimes set to off by being overwritten with new data. The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is backed up when the power is turned off, and is restored to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. When the gaming machine is initialized, it is a flag set to off. Although the duplicate adjustment flag 203u12 has not been described and illustrated in this case, the first duplicate winning process (not shown) is also performed in the second duplicate winning process (not shown) which is one process of the second prefetch update process (not shown). It differs in the point which sets the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 of the reservation area for and the 2nd special design to on, but is set to on similarly.

  The other memory area 223m set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) schematically shows a part of the other memory area 223m. A determination notification flag 223m1 and a determination notification counter 223m2 are added to the other memory area 223m in the first embodiment.

  The confirmation notification flag 223m1 is a flag indicating that in the notification effect during the big hit, it is notified that there is a holding ball that is a hit in the holding ball. In detail, in the jackpot inside effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, a confirmation notification display is provided to notify that there is a holding ball to be hit in the holding ball. After that, it is set to on in the process of S1581. Also, with the end of the jackpot is set to off.

  The determination notification counter 223m2 is a storage area for storing a counter value which is incremented by one each time the large hitting medium effect processing (S1570 in FIG. 140) is executed. The finalized notification counter is set to an initial value "0" when the power is turned on, added to the upper limit value "255", and then set to an initial value "0" when one is added. . The confirmation notification counter is a counter value for determining whether to notify whether or not there is a holding ball to be hit in the holding ball in the notification effect during the big hit. The hit counter value is set for each round of the big hit. In the present embodiment, values from “0 to 1” are set as the hit counter value for 1R to 10R, and “0 to 9” are set as the hit counter value for 11R to 15R.

  With this configuration, since the lottery is performed each time the player operates the frame button 22, it is possible to make the notified timing different for each big hit, and to give the player a sense of mannerism. It can be suppressed. Also, if the player does not win the lottery, the notification is not executed even if there is a hit in the holding ball, so a state not to be notified can always be made, and the player can be hit by a big hit later and be surprised You can continue to have expectations without it. Further, since the lottery is performed each time the frame switch 22 is operated, the probability of being notified increases as the frame switch 22 is operated, and the player operates the frame switch 22 to be motivated, It is possible to participate in the game.

  Furthermore, since the round progresses and the lottery probability becomes five times after 11R, it becomes easy to win even when the lottery has not been won until 11R, preventing the player from giving up without being hit (not informed). it can. Therefore, the player can participate in the notification effect with an expectation that the notification may be issued after 11R.

  In the present embodiment, the hit count value is configured to be variable between 1R to 10R and 11R to 15R. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The hit count value may be changed every round. It may be configured to make a decision. By configuring in this manner, it is notified that the player has a hit at an unexpected timing, and the interest of the game can be further increased.

  Next, referring to FIG. 133, in the twentieth embodiment, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the twentieth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 134, in the twentieth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process, which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 133, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 10 (S410) will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S410). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, if the winning judgment result of the special symbol starting to change is a hit, if there is a hit in the second special symbol holding ball, usually select the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern so that the big hit game is started first Do.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S840) . The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S840: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S841). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special hit variation pattern table 202d for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set. Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, the jackpot type table 202b is set, and the jackpot type is determined (S842).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203 o is off (S 840: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S 843). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the special symbol for the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol for the second special symbol is set to the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e for the second special symbol. It is configured. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11B) is set.

  It is determined whether the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 of the reordering storage area 203u corresponding to the suspension starting to change is set to ON (S844). If it is determined that the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S844), the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reordering storage area is selected, and based on the variation pattern To generate a first variation pattern command.

  Here, the variation patterns stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the sorting reserve storage area 203u are the extension variation patterns or shortening variations set in the first overlap processing (FIG. 136, S1270) described later. It becomes a pattern. In addition, the extension variation pattern and the shortening variation pattern are displaying the main design pattern during the set variation time, and displaying the notification result of the judgment result based on the lapse of the set variation time. Is a fluctuation pattern that is stopped and displayed.

  The shortening fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for controlling (adjusting) to start the normal jackpot of the first special symbol that starts to fluctuate this time before the probability variation jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserve is there. On the other hand, the extension fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation for controlling (adjusting) to start the probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol which starts to fluctuate now after the normal jackpot stored in the second special symbol hold It is a pattern.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S844: No), the variation pattern type is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c. The selected variation pattern table is selected (decided) (S846). Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is It is generated (S847). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S848). The measurement start of the first fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (S849).

  By configuring in this way, if the lottery game of the first special symbol that is about to start to change is a probability change jackpot, adjust so that the jackpot game is started after the normal jackpot of the second special symbol Can. On the other hand, if the lottery game of the first special symbol that is about to start to change is usually a jackpot, it can be adjusted so that the jackpot game is started earlier than the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol. Therefore, even when the jackpot and the definite special jackpot overlap between the first special symbol and the second special symbol among the holding balls, the positive jackpot is usually performed after the jackpot is usually performed, so the high is high. Probability game state can be maintained longer. Thus, the player can be awarded more jackpots.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is determined in the first double hitting process (FIG. 136, S1270) executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 63a. Although it comprised as mentioned above, you may be comprised so that a fluctuation time may be calculated and each determined not only in it but in the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is adjusted so that the probability change jackpot is usually executed later than the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the start of fluctuation of the probability fluctuation jackpot is delayed by a predetermined time. It may be adjusted so that the start of the probability variation jackpot will come later. By configuring in this way, by delaying the start of fluctuation, the player can recognize that the jackpot is further executed, and can recognize the subsequent jackpot early.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the extension fluctuation pattern and the shortening fluctuation pattern are newly set, respectively, but a fluctuation pattern in which a large jackpot is usually displayed first is selected from existing fluctuation pattern tables. You may configure it. In such a configuration, a short fluctuation pattern or a long fluctuation pattern may be set in advance in the existing fluctuation pattern table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment, each process of S1260 to S1261 and the first overlap processing are compared to the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. (FIG. 136, S1270) are added.

  In the process of S1260, it is determined whether or not the thing corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the hold area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u (S1260). In addition, it may be determined whether this determination is stored as a hold which is a big hit in the hold stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. When it is determined that the jackpot is held due to the second special symbol being held (S1260: Yes), the first overlap winning process (FIG. 136, S1270) is executed.

  Although the details will be described later with regard to the first duplicate winning process (FIG. 136, S1270), the start of the jackpot is usually started when the winning to be held in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is overlapped. The process for selecting the variation pattern or shortening variation pattern is executed so that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is extended so as to precede the start of the probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is all out of hold (S1260: No), or after the execution of the first overlap processing (FIG. 135, S1270), the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON. If not, the variation pattern is based on the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter C3 from the special hit variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the variation for the newly stored hold. It is predicted (previously determined) and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 (S1261).

  The processes of S931 to S933 and S935 to S939 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment are S931 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) of the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S93 to S935 to S939 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the first overlap processing (S1270), which is one of the first prefetch update processing (S, FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this first overlap processing (S1270). The first overlap winning process (FIG. 136, S1270) in the twentieth embodiment determines whether or not the pending to be hit by the pending corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, and the pending to be hit is stored. Is used to determine the type of each variation, and to select the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern as the variation pattern of the first special symbol so that the start of the jackpot is usually executed before the start of the oddity jackpot It is a process.

  In the first overlap processing (FIG. 136, S1270), first, it is determined whether any of the hold areas in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u has a hold area for which the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON. If the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S1271: Yes), this process ends. As described above, when the jackpot is already overlapped with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and there is a hold in which the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is selected, the processing in the case of overlapping again is performed. It is configured not to do. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load of main controller 110 excessively. In addition, in a state where three or more jackpots are held, by not performing control such that the jackpot is given to the player, it is possible to suppress excessive increase in gambling.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S1271: No), the probability variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stored in the reserve area of the sort reserve storage area 203u is Even if it is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), it is determined whether or not it is a winning determined to be a hit (S1272). In the normal gaming state, if it is determined that the game is out (S1272: No), this process is ended. As described above, when it is determined that the probability change jackpot will be a hit even in the normal gaming state and the probability change jackpot is delayed than the actual fluctuation start time, the one that starts to change in the high probability gaming state is the low probability game Even if it starts to fluctuate in the state, it is possible to sort out only the ones that will be the jackpot. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being lost.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal gaming state is determined to be a hit (S1272: Yes), whether or not the prefetch certainty change flag 203u6 in the reserve area of the newly stored sort reserve storage area 203u is on (ie, The newly stored hold is determined whether or not it is a definite variation jackpot) (S1273). When it is determined that the newly stored suspension is a probability variation jackpot (S1273: Yes), it is determined whether the hit of the suspension area corresponding to the second special symbol is usually a jackpot (S1274). When it is determined that the hit of the holding area corresponding to the second special symbol is usually a big hit (S1274: Yes), the time until the normal jackpot of the holding area of the second special symbol stops fluctuating ((1127) S1275).

  The time until the fluctuation of the normal jackpot of this second special symbol stops is currently stored before the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol during fluctuation and the second special symbol of normal jackpot Calculated by adding each of the special symbol hold change time.

  The fluctuation time is calculated and the fluctuation time is calculated so that the suspension of becoming the probability variation jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol is stopped fluctuatingly after the time until the fluctuation stop calculated in the process of S1275 Are set (selected), and stored in the change pattern type storage area 203u3 of the corresponding reserved area (S1276). Here, the variation time of the extension variation pattern is stored prior to the suspension of becoming the probability variation jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol at the remaining variation time of the first special symbol currently being varied. (1) Add the fluctuation time of suspension of special symbol, and calculate the fluctuation start time of the probability variation jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol. Then, the time obtained by subtracting 3 seconds from the result of subtracting the fluctuation start time from the time calculated in the process of S1275 is determined as the fluctuation time. If the fluctuation start time is later than the time calculated in the process of S1275, an extended fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit in the suspension of the second special symbol is the probability variation jackpot (S1274: No), this processing is ended. If it is determined that the pre-read certainty change flag 203u6 of the newly stored reserve area is off (S1273: No), it is determined whether the hit of the reserve area corresponding to the second special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (S1277). If it is determined that the second special symbol suspension is a probability variation jackpot (S1277: Yes), the time until the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol suspension area stops fluctuating is calculated (S1278). The time is calculated by the same method as the process of S1275.

  Based on the change start time of the first special symbol's normal jackpot, the newly stored first special symbol's normal jackpot starts earlier than the probability variation jackpot stored in the second special symbol's hold. It is determined whether it is possible (shortened) (S1279). Here, is it possible to determine whether or not it is possible to start earlier than the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol when the change time of each holding area corresponding to the first special symbol is configured by the shortening fluctuation time of one second? To determine

  If it is determined that it is possible to start the normal jackpot of the first special symbol newly stored earlier than the probability variation jackpot stored in the second special symbol hold (S 1279: Yes), newly The shortening change pattern is stored in the change pattern type storage area of the reserve area corresponding to the stored reserve area and the first special symbol stored earlier than that. The shortening variation pattern is a variation pattern composed of a one second variation pattern.

  The overlap adjustment flag 203u12 of the reservation area storing the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is set to ON (S1281). Each reserved area is renumbered in order of change start time (S1282).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust the variation time so that when the jackpot is duplicated for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the probability variation jackpot is usually started later than the jackpot. . Therefore, after the jackpot is usually executed, although it is transitioned to or maintained in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), then the probability variation jackpot is executed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) The gaming state can be shifted. Therefore, the player can play the game in the high probability gaming state for a long time. Also, more jackpots can be awarded to the player.

  In addition, when the jackpots overlapping in the first special symbol and the second special symbol are usually jackpots in the probability variation jackpot or both in both, the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern is not selected (the selection is prohibited) Thus, the player can enjoy the game with the normal fluctuation pattern.

  Also, after the extension fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation start time of each reserve area is updated, and the fluctuation start order is renumbered in the order of the fluctuation start time, so the extension fluctuation pattern Alternatively, even if the change start order changes due to the shortening change pattern, the correct change start order can be updated. Therefore, a winning command can be generated based on the correct fluctuation start order, and even when the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortening fluctuation pattern is selected, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the correct fluctuation start order.

  In the present embodiment, the extension fluctuation pattern is calculated based on the time until the second special symbol, which usually becomes a big hit, stops fluctuating, but it is not limited thereto, and it is the most common fluctuation pattern. Assuming that the maximum fluctuation time when combined with a long fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time longer than that may be preset and selected as an extended fluctuation pattern.

  In addition, although it was configured with a reduction variation pattern of 1 second all to the temporary variation big hit of the newly stored first special symbol, but it is not limited to that, from the time until the normal jackpot of the second special symbol stops fluctuating It may be configured to be calculated and appropriately set so as to be short.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern for adjusting the fluctuation time is set respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, delaying the start of fluctuation or invalidating suspension of deviation It may be configured to adjust. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the control load for the main controller 110 to adjust the fluctuation time.

  In the second prefetch update process (not shown), which is one process of the second prefetch process (S 914 in FIG. 27) executed based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 63b, The same processing as the first prefetch update processing (FIG. 135, S926) is executed although the processing is different from the processing for the holding ball of 2 special symbols, so the detailed description is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 137, in the twentieth embodiment, the large opening opening / closing process (S103) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the large opening opening / closing process (S103). The large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 137, S103) of the twentieth embodiment controls the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 65.

  In the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 137, S103), first, it is determined whether it is the start of the jackpot game (S131). Determination of whether it is the start of the jackpot game is the process of S608 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204) or the process of S808 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the jackpot It is determined whether or not the start of has been set.

  If it is determined that the jackpot game starts (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each suspension area stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u The value is recalculated taking into account the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol or second special symbol starting from the jackpot after the big hit (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each reserve area stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u The value of 大 is recalculated starting from the jackpot (S 134).

  Based on the change start time recalculated in the process of S133 or S134 and stored in the change start time storage area 203u5, a rearrangement data command is generated for each reserve area (S135).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is judged whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S136: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S137). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S137: Yes), processing is performed to open the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S137: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140). If it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), processing to close the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S142). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S142: Yes), the ending command is set (generated) (S143).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is over (S144). If it is determined that the jackpot game is over (S144: Yes), the end of the jackpot game is set (S145). It is determined whether it is a definite variation jackpot (S146). The determination as to whether it was a probability variation jackpot became an opportunity to carry out a jackpot game, and it is determined whether the lottery result is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

  If it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has been made (S146: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S144: No), or if it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is not found (S146: No), this processing ends.

  Thus, when the jackpot game starts, the fluctuation start time in each holding area starting from after the jackpot game is updated. Therefore, even when the player operates the frame button 22 during the jackpot game, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also generates the rearrangement data command based on the updated fluctuation start time. It is possible to update the data of the sort rearranging storage area 223k and rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting the fluctuation after the big hit game.

  In addition, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and if it is temporarily stopped, after the remaining fluctuation time has elapsed for the suspension of the special symbol, By calculating the fluctuation start time as a starting point, it is possible to calculate a more accurate fluctuation start time and generate a rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting more accurate change based on the change start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

  Referring to FIG. 138, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). In the main process (FIG. 138, S1400) of the twentieth embodiment, a jackpot inside effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) is added to the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. 36, S1414) is changed to the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414). In the processes of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, and S1415 to S1419 in the twentieth embodiment, the same processes as those of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, and S1415 to S1419 in the first embodiment are performed. . When the process of S1413 is completed, a command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) is executed.

  In the twentieth embodiment, a command determination process (S1414) which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 138, S1400) performed by the MPU 221 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1414). In the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment, each process up to S1565 to S1566 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) in the first embodiment. The processing up to S1501 to 1519 of the command determination processing (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment is the same processing as each processing up to S1501 to 1519 in the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. Is executed.

  In the process of S1517 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) of the twentieth embodiment, when it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation resume command is not received (S1517), during the jackpot game It is determined whether a round number command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1565). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1565: Yes), the jackpot round number and the round effective time are set based on the received round number command (S1566). The round effective time is set to a time of 5 seconds, during which a notification effect during a jackpot game is executed.

  Next, returning to the main processing (S1400) of FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the main processing of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 138, S1400), after the processing of S1410 is executed, or when it is determined that the processing of S1401 is less than 1 ms (S1401: No), the jackpot middle effect processing ( FIG. 140, S1570) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 140, in the twentieth embodiment, a jackpot effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570) which is one of the main processing (FIG. 138, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570). In the jackpot effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570) of the twentieth embodiment, a lottery is performed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player in the notification effect in the jackpot game, and the jackpot becomes a jackpot in the holding ball A process is performed to notify the player whether there is a holding ball.

  In the jackpot middle effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570), first, the value of the final notification counter 223m2 is read out, “1” is added to the value, and the value of the final notification counter 223m2 is updated (S1571). Next, it is determined whether it is in the round effective time (S1572). Whether it is a round effective time or not is determined whether it is a round effective time (five seconds from the start of the round in the present embodiment) set in the process of S1566 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414). If it is determined that it is outside the round effective time (S1572: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the round effective time is in progress (S1572: Yes), it is determined whether the determination notification flag 223m1 is set to ON (that is, determination notification has already been made) (S1573) . If it is determined that the determination notification flag 223m1 is on (S1573: Yes), this process ends.

  If it is determined that the determination notification flag 223m1 is off (S1573: No), a display determination effect command is generated (set). The display confirmation effect command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a background screen or the like for notification effect on the display control device 114.

  A display button operation display command is generated (set) (S1575). This display button operation display command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the character "Please continuously press a button!" On the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize that the notification effect has been started, and can start the operation of the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can easily participate in the notification effect.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576). Here, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) once. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1576: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576: Yes), the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is acquired (S1577). It is determined whether or not the value of the determined notification counter 223m2 acquired with the hit probability based on the number of rounds is met (S1578). Here, when the number of rounds is from 1R to 10R, “0 to 1” is set as the hit determination value, and when the number of rounds is from 11R to 15R, “0 to 9” is as the hit determination value. It is set.

  It is determined whether the obtained determination result of the determination notification counter 223m2 is a hit or not (S1579). If it is determined that the result of the determination is a hit (S1580), it is determined whether there is a pending hold in any of the hold areas of the sorting hold storage area 203u (S1580). If it is determined that there is a hold to be a hit (S1580: Yes), a display confirmation notification command for instructing a confirmation notification display is generated (set) (S1581). The determination notification flag 223m1 is set to on (S1582). Here, the confirmation notification command for display is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the characters "one more time, big hit !!" as shown in FIG. 131 (a) on the third symbol display device 81. . The player can recognize from this display that there is a jackpot in the hold. Therefore, the player can operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of this display. Therefore, even in the big hit, it is possible to play the game without getting bored with the game.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the determination is out of step (S1579: No), or in the case where it is determined that all of the hold areas are out (S1580: No), a display instructing non-confirmation notification display An indeterminate notification command for use is generated (set) (S 1583). Here, the display non-confirmation notification command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the character “Sorry !!!” on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 131 (b). When the character "Sorry!" Is displayed, the player can recognize that the notification is not given because the holding ball is not hit or the number of times the player continuously hit is not enough. Since the notification effect is configured to be executed every round until the confirmation notification is displayed, the player is still hit in the holding ball even if the display "Sorry !!" is displayed in one round. In the hope that there may be, the next round can also participate in the informing effect.

  As described above, when the jackpots overlap between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is adjusted so that the probability variation jackpot is usually started later than the jackpot. Furthermore, when it is informed that there is a big hit in the holding ball, by executing the production of whether or not there is a big hit in the holding ball during the big hit, the running big hit is usually a big hit Even, the player can play the game with expectation that the held hit is not a definite jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing the game with expectation even during the jackpot to the player.

  In addition, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpot is overlapped, and the shortening fluctuation pattern is selected in order to usually start the jackpot earlier than the probability jackpot. Thereby, the player can participate in the notification effect in anticipation that the probability change jackpot should be stored in the hold when the normal jackpot is started through the shortening variation pattern.

  In addition, even if the notification effect is stored when the jackpot is stored, the notification effect is not notified unless the lottery for notifying or not is won, so the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times. It can be made to participate in notification effects for a longer time.

  In addition, since the lottery whether to notify or not is executed each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the timing (such as the number of operations) to be notified every time is not constant, giving the player unexpectedness. Can.

  In addition, since the lottery probability of whether to notify in a round is changed, the easiness of being notified in a round can be changed, and a round in which the player is expected to be notified more can be set. . In the present embodiment, since 11R and higher are set with a high probability, even if the notification effect continues up to 11R, if there is a hit in 11R and later, the fixed effect can be easily displayed. Therefore, the player can continue participating in the notification effect with an expectation that the notification may be issued after 11R even if the notification is not made for several rounds.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when a big hit or a probability change big hit has already been established with one special symbol already, when the other special symbol is established afterward, by adjusting the fluctuation time which becomes the hit, Although the jackpot game of the odd variation jackpot was usually configured to be started later than the jackpot game of the jackpot, the present invention is not limited thereto, but in the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are held, usually the jackpot and the special jackpot The probability variation jackpot may be controlled to be normally started after the jackpot by determining whether each is stored and adjusting the variation time of both reserved special symbols. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time can be adjusted more efficiently. In addition, even when there is only a short time before the start of the probability variation jackpot, it is possible to select the variation pattern so as to normally start the jackpot first.

  Also, if it is determined in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) that a probability change jackpot will be made, a relatively long variation pattern of the variation time is forced in the variation pattern. May be configured to be selected. By configuring in this way, the start of the probability variation jackpot will be delayed further, and in the meanwhile, it is more likely to be played by expecting that the hold that would normally be a jackpot will be established with the other special symbol. The jackpot can be given to the player.

  Further, the configuration described in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment may be combined to cause the sound lamp control device 113 to perform notification.

  In this embodiment, the notification effect can operate the frame button 22 many times during the round effective time, and is configured to execute the lottery each time, but it is not limited to that, it can be performed only once in one round You may configure it. Further, instead of executing the notification effect for each round, only one specific round may be performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not this particular round is to be a round for performing an informing effect by a lottery during a jackpot. By configuring in this manner, the round in which the informing effect is executed becomes random, and when the informing effect is executed, it is possible to feel more fresh and participate in the informing effect. In addition, when the notification effect is executed, if there is a hit in the holding area, it can have more expectation.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is started on one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery game determined to be the other hit that is starting to change is also after one jackpot game. Although the case where the success / failure determination result is maintained has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and when the jackpot is started with one special symbol, the variation determined to be the fluctuation started with the other special symbol is the variation It may be configured to be disabled. In such a configuration, when a big hit and a definite variation big hit are respectively determined for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the big hit is usually started first, until the big hit is finished, It is good to execute the control which delays so that the odd variable jackpot does not start. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the special symbol serving as the probability variation jackpot from fluctuating and becoming invalidated when the jackpot is normally started.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 141 to 149, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described eighth embodiment (see FIGS. 64-72), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined regardless of the number of holding balls at the start of variation.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute control to select the variation pattern based on the number of holding balls at the start of variation. .

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in the following points. In the twenty-first embodiment, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes variable startable, the number of holding balls of the corresponding special symbol is determined, and the variation pattern is selected based on the value. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. The secondary sort reserve storage area 223k of the twenty first embodiment is different from the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k (see FIG. 9B) of the eighth embodiment in the sort order change flag in the reserve areas 1 to 8, respectively. 223k9 has been added.

  When the sort order change flag 223k9 is a sort of the held symbol, and the held symbol display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the change start order, It is a flag which shows that change occurred in the change start order of the reservation symbol display. The rearranging order change flag 223k9 is set to ON by the process of S1895 of the secondary suspension rearranging display notification process (S1871 in FIG. 148) described later. On the other hand, the reserve area is shifted by the reserve being digested, and the special symbol corresponding to the reserve can start changing, and it is turned off when shifting from reserve area 1 of the pending data storage area to the varying data storage area Set to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e (in the twenty-first embodiment) set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the RAM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113. 222 d) will be described.

  The special out-of-time variation pattern table 202e in the twenty-first embodiment is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, and when the variation start of the special symbol, the result of judgment of acceptance is out and the gaming state is low probability gaming state It is a fluctuation pattern table selected by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the (normal probability gaming state). The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 changes the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) or the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) according to the normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e. The number of holding balls corresponding to the special symbol to start (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol in the case of starting to change the first special symbol), the value of the change type counter CS1, and the change pattern determination counter The variation pattern is determined based on the value of CS3.

  The normal special deviation variation pattern table 222d in the twenty-first embodiment is set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and has the same content as the normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the main controller 110. . In the normal special deviation variation pattern table 222d, the winning combination output from the main control device 110 in the follow reordering storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. Based on the command, it is used to discriminate (predict) the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation before starting the fluctuation of the data of each reservation area stored in the sub sort reserve memory area 223k Be Specifically, the variation pattern table 222d for normal time special deviation variation pattern is selected variation pattern when the gaming state at the start of the variation is the low probability gaming state and the result of determination of success or failure determined at that time is out. It is a table. The variation type counter CS1 and variation pattern determination counter CS3 stored based on the prize command in each reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area 223k, and the number of holding balls of the special symbol corresponding to the current condition (the first special symbol In the case of holding, the variation pattern is determined in advance based on the number of holding balls of the first special symbol), and is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 223k3 of the follow sort suspension storage area 223k.

  In addition, the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected is different when the number of holding balls is “0”, “1 to 2”, and “3” in the special-time outlier variation pattern table 202e (222d) Is configured (each counter value is set). When the number of holding balls is “0”, a fluctuation pattern of relatively long fluctuation time is configured to be more easily selected than in the case of other numbers of holding balls. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern to be reached is configured to be more easily selected than in the case of other numbers of holding balls. When the number of holding balls is “1 to 2”, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is set more easily than when the number of holding balls is “0”, while the number of holding balls is set. A fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time relatively shorter than in the case of "3" is set to be easily selected. When the number of holding balls is “3”, a relatively short fluctuation time fluctuation pattern is configured to be selected more easily than in the case of other numbers of holding balls. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the special special deviation variation pattern table 202e (222d) which selects the fluctuation pattern of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, respectively, is omitted for the special special variation pattern table 202e (222d) at the time of normal. ) Are set respectively.

  By configuring in this way, when the holding ball is small, the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b during that time by selecting the fluctuation pattern of a relatively long fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changed (the state in which the lottery game is not being performed) because the holding balls disappear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored by the occurrence of a state in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped changing.

  In addition, when the number of holding balls is "3", which is close to the upper limit value "4", a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, so that the digestion cycle of holding becomes faster and holding It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b in a state where the number of balls becomes the upper limit "4" and overflowing as an invalid ball that does not become a holding ball . Therefore, the player can set the holding ball to the upper limit value “4” and shorten the time for stopping the firing of the game ball, and an efficient game can be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 143, the time reduction / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the time reduction set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113. The probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 222d will be described.

  The special shortfall variation pattern table 202e for time shortening and certainty variation is selected when the gaming state is the short time gaming state or the high probability gaming state (probable oddity gaming state) with respect to the above-mentioned special occasion special variation fluctuation pattern table 202e described above. It differs in the point.

When the number of holding balls is “0”, the special out-of-order variation pattern table 222d for time shortening / probability change selects a fluctuation pattern with a relatively longer fluctuation time than the case where the number of holding balls is “1 to 3” It is easily configured. Further, at this time, the short / probability variation extra deviation variation pattern table is configured so that a variation pattern of variation time having a relatively short variation time is easily selected even when the number of holding balls is “1 to 2” It is done. Therefore, when it is in the time saving game state or the high probability game state, it is possible to make the reserve ball digestion cycle faster. Therefore, in the time-saving game state or the high probability game state, by setting the success / failure determination probability of the normal symbol to a high probability, the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric role member 64 become easy to open, and one open time Since the number of times of opening is also increased, the gaming ball can easily enter the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, but since the holding ball is digested in an early cycle, it is possible to play a game with good tempo.

  The time deviation / probability change special deviation variation pattern table 222d set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has the same configuration as the time reduction / probability change special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e of the main control unit 110. . In addition, it is similarly used to determine the fluctuation pattern in advance, except that it is a fluctuation pattern selected to be in the short game state or the high probability game state with respect to the normal time special out fluctuation pattern table 222d. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  In addition, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the same as the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d set in the ROM 201 of the main control device 113 and the time variation / precise variation special hit variation table 202d. Are set as a special time variation pattern table 222c and a time variation / probability variation special pattern variation table 222c. That is, when the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern is selected based on the respective counter values regardless of the number of holding balls.

  The main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). The main processing (FIG. 144, S1400) of the twenty-first embodiment is the same as the main processing (FIG. 68, S1400) of the eighth embodiment except for the pending number display updating process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840) and the pending reordering process 4. (FIG. 145, S1850) are added. In the processes of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, and S1414 to S1419 in the twenty-first embodiment, the same processes as those of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, and S1414 to S1419 in the eighth embodiment are performed. . When the process of S1412 is completed, the pending reordering process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 145, pending sorting processing 4 (S1850), which is one of main processing (S1400 in FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described in the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing this pending reordering process 4 (S1850). The pending rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) in the twenty-first embodiment is executed based on the data of each pending area stored in the follow reorder pending storage area 223k and the number of current pending balls. This is a process for updating the selected fluctuation pattern and updating the fluctuation start order and the like.

  In the pending reordering process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) of the twenty-first embodiment, the pending reordering order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed first. Although this pending rearrangement order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) will be described later, based on the data of each pending area stored in the follow sort pending storage area 223k and the number of current pending balls, This is processing for selecting and updating the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation again.

  After the pending rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed, it is determined whether or not it is a possible rearrangement period (S1852). In the sortable period, gaming states other than the state with no hold established in the big hit game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is not one or more hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively) are arranged The exchangeable period is set.

  If it is determined that it is a sortable period (S1852: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1853). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the character "May be reorderable!" And the player can operate the frame button 22. Informing a period that is The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be controlled to light a dedicated lamp or the like.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation can be performed, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. In addition, as long as the rearrangement possible period is not particularly provided, and the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the arrangement display may naturally be performed.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1854). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1854: Yes), the reordering flag 223k7 of all the pending areas in which the pending data of the follow sort pending storage area 223k is stored is set to on. (S1855).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reordering period is not reached (S1852: No), or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1854: No), this process is ended.

  With this configuration, when the player wishes to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be focused next (the special symbol to be the variable display start). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and to play the game smoothly.

  Further, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, since the distribution ball 630 is configured to easily win the game ball alternately by the distribution device 630, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured. The game is played evenly and the game can be played efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, based on the fact that the player operates the frame button 22, the control is performed to rearrange and display the held symbol display in the fluctuation start order, but the present invention is not limited thereto, but a new hold Of course, it may be configured to execute each time it is stored. By configuring in this manner, the player can always correctly recognize the order of starting the variable display by the reserved symbol display sorted in the fluctuation start order.

  In this embodiment, the sortable period is other than a state in which there is no hold established in the jackpot game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (state in which there is no hold of one or more first special symbols and second special symbols). The game state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a sortable period even during a jackpot game, or conversely, a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed It may be set to other than, etc., and may be determined as appropriate.

  When the jackpot game is set to a sortable period, it is necessary to sort in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped in the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being suspended and the remaining fluctuation time during temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new holding symbol display is displayed during the jackpot game, the holding symbol display is combined with the display mode already displayed before the holding symbol display is displayed. The sorting can be performed in the correct fluctuation start order, and the player can be notified of the correct fluctuation start order even in the jackpot gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reordering storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the secondary reordering storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 are configured to store data in which the reordering is performed mutually. Not only that, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data (relevant judgment result, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern type, etc.) necessary for sorting by a prize command, Reordering may be performed only by the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, referring to FIG. 146, in the twenty-first embodiment, pending reordering process 2 which is one process of pending reordering process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control apparatus 113. (S1851) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the pending reordering order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851).

  In the pending / reordering order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) in the twenty-first embodiment, it is first determined whether a winning command from the main control device 110 has been received (S1861). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1861: Yes), each counter value stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern determination counter C4) are read out (S1862). The respective data read out in the process of S1862 are stored in the corresponding hold area (the area with the smallest number of the hold areas among the hold areas in which no data is stored) (S1863). On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command is not received (S1861: No), the processing of S1862 to S1863 is skipped and the processing of S1864 is executed.

  Of each reserve area of the sort rearrangement reserve storage area 223k, each data such as the variation pattern and the variation start time is an unupdated reserve area, and the variation start time is calculated sequentially from the reserve area with the earliest variation start time, The change start time storage area 223k5 of the reserve area is stored (S1864). In addition, if it is an unupdated holding area for all the holding areas, the fluctuation start time is determined from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently fluctuating, and the fluctuation start time Recalculate and store from the earlier reserved area of.

  In the process of S1864, it is determined whether the gaming state when the special symbol corresponding to the holding area for which the fluctuation start time has been recalculated becomes capable of fluctuation start is the high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state) (S1864). If it is determined that the gaming state at the start of the change is the high probability gaming state (S1865: Yes), it is stored in the success / failure determination result storage area 223k1 based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time. The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is determined, and the determination result is stored in the acceptance determination result storage area 223k1 (S1866). On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S1865: No), based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability, The value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the pass / fail judgment result storage area 223k1 of the reserve area of the rearrangement hold storage area 223k is judged, and the judgment result is stored in the pass / fail judgment result storage area 223k1 (S1867).

  The sub hold reordering storage area updating process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) is executed. Although subordinating reordering storage area update processing 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) will be described later, the variation pattern is determined in advance for each suspension area based on the result of determination of adequacy determination based on the change start time in advance. Is a process for updating. It is determined whether or not there is a pending area for which each data such as the variation start time and the variation pattern has not been updated in the pending area of the sort rearrangement pending storage area 223k (S1869). If it is determined that there is an unupdated pending area (S1869: Yes), the process returns to S1864 and the same process is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no unupdated pending area in the follow sort pending area 223k (S1869: No), the change start order of each pending area is renumbered based on the change start time, and the change is made It stores in the order storage area 223k4 (S1870). The sub hold rearranging display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) is executed. Although the subordination rearranging display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) will be described later, the reserved symbol display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is rearranged and displayed in the order of start of variation This is a process for executing a notification process for notifying the player that the sort order has been changed, when there is a change in the order of the displayed reserved symbol display, when the player is on.

  Referring to FIG. 147, in the twenty-first embodiment, sub hold reordering hold storage area updating which is one process of sub hold reordering order determination processing (S 1461 in FIG. 146) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113. Process 2 (S1868) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the sub hold reordering pending storage area updating process 2 (S1868).

  In subordinating reordering reserving storage area update processing 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) in the twenty-first embodiment, first, the result of the propriety determination predicted in the processing of S1866 and S1867 of the pending reordering order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851). Is determined to be a jackpot (S1881). If it is determined that the predicted success / failure determination result is a jackpot (S1881: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S1882). It is determined based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type storage area 223k2 in the reserve area of the sort rearrangement reserve storage area 223k.

  If it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S1882: Yes), the follow reading certainty change flag 223k6 of the rearrangement hold storage area 223k is set to ON (S1883). On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is normally a jackpot (S1882: No), the processing of S1883 is skipped and the processing of S1884 is executed.

  The game state at the start of the change is determined, and it is selected at the start of change based on the value of the change type counter CS1 and the value of the change pattern determination counter CS3 from the special hit change pattern table 222c corresponding to the play state. The fluctuation pattern is discriminated (predicted) in advance (S1884). On the other hand, if the predicted success or failure judgment result is out of order (S1881: No), the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is determined, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 222d corresponding to the gaming state And the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter CS3 and the special symbol that selects this fluctuation pattern, the number of the corresponding special symbol held (if the fluctuation pattern for the holding ball of the first special symbol is predicted, that reservation Based on (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol established after the ball), the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation is discriminated (predicted) in advance (S1885). The predicted success or failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in the corresponding storage area of the reordering storage area (S1886).

  As described above, the change start time and change pattern of the reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area are updated in the reserve sort order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851), so that the increase or decrease of the reserve ball, the new reserve Even if a change occurs in the change start order of the reserved symbol display that is already sorted and displayed in the change start order due to the establishment of the, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the change start order based on the updated data each time it can. Therefore, the player can recognize the latest change start order in the changing gaming state, and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, main controller 110 does not execute control for rearranging the reserved symbol display, transmits a winning command, and performs processing necessary for rearranging in voice lamp control device 113, so that the main controller The control load of 110 can be reduced. Therefore, frequently, the data of the pending area can be updated to always update to the latest change order.

  The variation start time of each reserve area changes with the reserve variation time of the same special symbol stored before that. Here, since the variation pattern for determining the variation time varies depending on the number of holding balls, it is changed by increasing the number of holding balls while being held. However, every time there is a change in the number of holding balls, the fluctuation start time, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. are updated, so that it is possible to always update to the correct fluctuation start order. In addition, the number of holding balls can be adjusted to an appropriate number by changing the selected fluctuation pattern according to the number of holding balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the holding ball is lost and a time when the drawing of the special symbol is not performed occurs or the holding ball reaches the upper limit value and the overflow occurs.

  In the present embodiment, the data of the holding area is constantly updated regardless of the increase or decrease of the holding ball, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the data of the holding area is updated when the number of holding balls increases or decreases. It may be configured as follows. Also, the data of the holding area may be updated only when the number of holdings increases. With this configuration, the frequency of updating the hold area can be reduced, and the control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, in the twenty-first embodiment, secondary reordering display which is one process of pending reordering order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The notification process (S1871) will be described. FIG. 148 illustrates the secondary suspension sort indication notification processing (S1871).

  In the sub hold reordering display notification process (S1871 in FIG. 148), it is first determined whether there is an area in which the reordering flag 223k7 is on in any of the respective reserve areas of the sub sort reserving storage area 223k (S1891). . If it is determined that there is a holding area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is on (S1891: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a change in the change order of the holding area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set on (S1892) ). Here, whether or not there is a change in the change start order, it is determined whether or not the update is performed in a different order when renumbering is performed in the process of S1870.

  If it is determined that the change start order has been changed (S1892: Yes), it is determined whether the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1893). If it is determined that the rearranging order change flag 223k9 is on (S1893: Yes), a notification command to notify that the rearranging order has been changed again is generated (set) (S1893). In the present embodiment, as a notification that the rearranging order has been changed again, characters of “the rearranging order has been changed again!” Are displayed in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is off (S1893: No), the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to be on (S1895). A notification command notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed is generated (set) (S1896). Here, as a notification mode for notifying that the sort order has been changed, characters of “the sort order has been changed!” Are displayed in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the player is notified that the reserved symbol display has been rearranged.

  By configuring in this way, even if the change start order is changed, the change pattern which is previously determined to be selected at the start of the change of each hold area is changed due to increase or decrease of the number of hold etc. It is possible to notify the player that the sorting of the reserved symbol display being reordered and displayed has been changed, in an easily understandable notification mode. Therefore, after the player knows that the reserved symbol display has been rearranged, identifying the reserved symbol display can suppress the confusion of the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display. it can.

  In addition, since it was configured to give a different notification when the re-sorted one is changed again, the player can easily make it easy that the current change is changed again. By recognizing, confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

  In this embodiment, when the rearranging order is changed again, the notification is given by characters. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the third symbol display device before changing the rearranging order and after changing the rearranging order It may be configured to be displayed side by side in the lower display area Ds 81. Also, the number of changes may be represented by a number, etc., and the color corresponding to the number of changes (for example, blue for the first change, red for the second change, etc.) May be configured to be displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily identify that the rearranging order has been changed by changing the number of times and the color.

  In addition, when the rearrangement order of the holding area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is changed, a dedicated flag indicating that may be set and set to ON. In this case, the flag may be set to OFF based on execution of the process of notifying of the sort order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the player operates the frame button 22 at the effective time to rearrange and display the held symbol display in the order of start of change, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to display the reserved symbol display, and may be configured to always change the change start order every time it is changed.

  Next, the main processing (FIG. 144, S1400) is returned to continue the description. In the twenty-first embodiment, in the main processing (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the pending number display update processing 5 (FIG. 149, S1871) is executed after the processing of S1405 is executed. Be done.

  149, in the twenty-first embodiment, pending number display updating process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. explain. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the pending number display update process 5 (S1871). In the number-of-retentions display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1871), the reordering flag 223k7 is set to off in the change start order for the suspension symbol display corresponding to the reserving area for which the reordering flag 223k7 is set to on. Display the pending symbol display corresponding to the pending area in the order in which the pending was established. In addition, with respect to the holding symbols displayed in the order of start of fluctuation, with respect to the held symbol display in which the start order of fluctuation is changed, the held symbol display is blinked to be displayed to notify that the change start order has been changed. Execute the process

  In the number-of-helds display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840), first, the held symbol display corresponding to the held area in which the follow sort flag 223k7 is set on is displayed in the variation start order, and the sort flag 223k7 is turned off. A display holding display command for causing the display control device 114 to display the holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area set in the display order in the holding establishment order is generated (S1921).

  It is determined whether or not there is a hold area for which the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON in any of the hold areas of the sub sort reserve storage area 223k (S1922). If it is determined that there is a holding area in which the sorting order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1922: Yes), a holding symbol corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting order change flag 223k9 is set to ON Is displayed blinking (S1923). A rearranging order change notification sound command is set (S1924). Here, as the rearranging order change notification sound command, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as ping-pong) indicating that the rearranging has been performed is output. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is off (S1922: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, when the sort order is changed again, the portion is displayed in a blinking manner, so that the player can easily recognize where the change is made. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to whether or not the displayed holding symbol display has been changed again or not.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which the symbol display for which the sorting order change flag 223k7 is set to ON is repeatedly blinked and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The order change flag 223k7 may be set to OFF, and the blinking display may be performed for a predetermined time to end.

  In addition, although it is configured to blink on the re-changed holding symbol display, notification such as blinking display may be performed on the holding symbol display whose rearranging order has been changed. In addition, as a notification mode to notify that the sort order has been changed, it is configured to notify that the sort order has been changed in a notification mode such as displaying a reserved symbol display in a rotating manner etc. May be In addition, the notification mode may be changed based on the number of times the order has been changed. Specifically, if the number of changes is one, the display of the reserved symbol is shaken and displayed, and if the number of changes is two, the display of the reserved symbol is repeatedly displayed by enlargement and reduction, etc.

  Further, the notification sound notified by the rearranging order change notification sound command may be a voice of “the rearranging order has been changed!”. In addition, based on the number of times of change, notification may be provided such as “Reordering order has been changed again!”, “Reordering order has been changed for the 0th time!”, Or the like.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the variation pattern to be selected is determined by the number of reserved items at the start of variation, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 always always based on the game state. Since the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation is determined in advance and updated, it is possible to always notify the correct start order of the display of the display symbol display.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which updates data each time with respect to the pending | holding area in which all pending | holding data are memorized in this embodiment, the pending | holding area (for example, the special symbol Of the number of holding balls, for the first holding area, even if the holding balls are stored up to four, which is the upper limit value, etc., even if it is configured to stop or prohibit updating Good. By configuring in this manner, the control load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, among the reserved symbol displays displayed in the order of variation start, the variation start order is determined with respect to the reserved symbol display (the future, the variation start order is not changed any more). It may be displayed in a display mode informing that it is being done (for example, the display color of the held symbol display is displayed in a specific color, or fluctuation order such as "HOLD" with respect to the held symbol display which has been confirmed Display a letter to indicate that the

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the rearrangement control is performed in the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, but as described in the first embodiment, the main control device 110 executes the rearrangement process. It may be configured to In this case, each data (variation pattern, fluctuation start time, etc.) of the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u may be updated for each timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Then, each time updating is performed, an update command may be generated based on the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u, and the update command may be output to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, a modification of the twenty first embodiment will be described. In the twenty-first embodiment, the dynamic display of each reserve area of the sub sort reserve area 223k is performed each time the reserve sort order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. By updating the mode on the basis of the current number of balls held, it is informed about the case of notifying the player of the correct start order of fluctuation as needed. However, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, various variation patterns of the super reach are selected by the same value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of increase or decrease in the number of holdings. Further, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter CS3 for which each super reach is selected is configured to be constant regardless of the number of holding balls. By configuring in this manner, in the case of out-of-order super reach, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914). Therefore, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, the pending rearrangement order determination process (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored in each pending area of the follow rearrangement pending storage area 223k. If the fluctuation pattern is constituted by a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation pattern is not changed even if the number of balls is increased or decreased, it is set as a reorderable period. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation pattern is changed due to the increase or decrease of the hold is stored, the rearrangement possible period is canceled (or set to the rearrangement prohibition period) to prevent the rearrangement. In addition, the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation pattern is not changed due to the increase or decrease of the hold is composed of the fluctuation pattern stored at the top of the hold, the fluctuation pattern of the win, and the fluctuation pattern which becomes the outreach Ru.

  By configuring in this manner, when it is possible to notify the player of the correct change start order, the player is informed that the sort is possible, and the sort is executed by operating the frame button 22. It is possible to reduce confusion to the player.

  The configurations of the first to twenty-first embodiments may be combined as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the game machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. The second identification information corresponding to the satisfaction / decision condition that is satisfied is determined based on the establishment of the second validity / decision unit, which determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction / decision condition that is satisfied. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode related to time information of the first and second identifications corresponding to the established success or failure determination conditions when the first or second The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the fulfillment order of the qualification conditions combining the first and the second qualification conditions established until the dynamic display of the information is started. Information about The first information for each suspension information is distinguished while the suspension information storage means for storing the suspension information having at least the suspension information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the suspension information storage means Hold display means displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode, and the first or second success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied, the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions combining the success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition When new hold information is stored, it is based on the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the dynamic display mode for each hold information previously stored. Dynamic display start time information determining means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to new hold information becomes dynamic display start, and storing the information in the hold information storage means; That a predetermined condition is established Triggered by the dynamic display start time information determination unit, based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage unit, the dynamic display mode displayed on the hold display unit, the dynamic display A game machine A1 comprising: rearranging means for rearranging in an order to start the game.

  According to the gaming machine A1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is started when dynamic display is started when the first or second qualification condition is satisfied, the first propriety determination condition and the first 2 Hold information having at least the establishment order of the success / failure determination conditions including the success / failure determination conditions and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is stored in the hold information storage unit. Success or failure of the combination of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition for each hold information while distinguishing the hold information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. The establishment order of the determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. When the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information during dynamic display is stored first Based on the dynamic display mode for each hold information, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means And stored in the pending information storage means. Then, when the predetermined condition is established, the hold displayed on the hold display unit is based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage unit by the dynamic display start time determination unit. The display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display. Thereby, for example, the hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display time of the first identification information in the dynamic display is longer than the remaining dynamic display time of the second identification information in the dynamic display, a newly stored second lottery game The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of 1 is more than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It gets faster. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it has condition distributing means for assisting that the first and second judgment conditions are met alternately in the gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is assisted by the distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be performed in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the first or second judgment condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the sorting means holds the hold information The first or second information corresponding to the newly established holding information and the previously stored holding information, based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each holding information previously stored in the storage means. A game machine A3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order of identification information is determined, and the order is related to hold information and stored in the hold information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the dynamic corresponding to each hold information previously stored in the hold information storage means Based on the display start time information, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is each hold It is stored in the hold information storage means by the sorting means in association with the information. Thus, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and the hold information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display mode can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display mode in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player is notified of the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  The game machine according to any one of the game machines A1 to A3 has operation means operable by the player, and the sorting means satisfies the predetermined condition when the operation means is operated. A game machine A4 characterized in that the hold display mode is rearranged.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the player has operation means operable by the player, and the rearrangement means rearranges the hold display mode on condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated. A game machine A4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to rearrange the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to notify the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  In the gaming machine of any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, the sorting means determines that the predetermined condition is established when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established, the hold display A game machine A5 characterized in that the hold display mode displayed on the means is rearranged.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is newly satisfied, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is rearranged by the rearrangement unit on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display mode is rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A5, in the special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are likely to be hit than the normal time The lottery information for drawing whether or not to shift is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second yes / no decision condition, the first or second yes / no decision condition is established, and the decision condition established And storing the lottery information in the suspension information storage unit in association with the suspension information, and storing the reservation information in the suspension information storage unit, the acceptance / rejection determination unit including the suspension information storage unit Until the dynamic display start of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the memory based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means , It is determined by the game state lottery means whether the game state of the dynamic display start time information corresponding to the hold information is the special game state, and a preliminary determination is performed to determine in advance whether the acceptance or rejection is performed, the results are each hold In the case where the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes dynamically displayable while being stored in the hold information storage means in association with the information The decision is made formally based on the gaming state when the variation start becomes possible, and the dynamic display mode determination means corresponds to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means. Until the first or second identification information becomes able to start dynamic display, the success or failure judgment means determines the dynamic display mode based on the judgment result of the prior judgment stored in the hold information storage means, Retention When the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the information storage means can start dynamic display, the dynamic display is performed based on the determination result of the pass / fail determination means executed in that case. A game machine B1 characterized by determining an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in order to make a lottery whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to win than normal. The lottery information of is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes able to start dynamic display, based on the dynamic display start time decided by the dynamic display start time decision means It is judged by the game state lottery means whether the game state at the time of the dynamic display start corresponding to each hold information is the special game state, and the pre-judgment to perform the presumptive judgment in advance is executed by the pass / fail judgment means. Then, the result is stored in the hold storage means by the pass / fail judgment means in association with each hold information. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, the pass / fail judgment based on the gaming state in that case is judged to be a pass / fail. Officially implemented by means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the determination result of the prior determination by the pass / fail decision means stored in the pending information storage means The dynamic display time is determined. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means executed in that case. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. As a result, even if the hold information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the gaming state at the start of the dynamic display is judged based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the propriety determination is performed. . Therefore, the dynamic display time can be determined in advance based on the correct validity determination result, and it is possible to determine the correct dynamic display start order also when a new success or failure determination condition is satisfied next.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for providing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure condition The first or the first upper limit number of times up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, which is assisted by the condition distributing unit assisting the establishment of the judgment condition alternately and the condition distribution unit [2] A game machine C1 having a reserve storage means for storing a right to play a lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine C1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. It is assisted by the condition distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. The right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the hold storage means when the first or second validity determination conditions are satisfied, assisted by the condition distribution means. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored uniformly, and the first lottery game is played. It is possible to prevent any one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored earlier up to the upper limit number. Therefore, to store the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game up to the upper limit number respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right more than the upper limit number is generated in either one and becomes invalid. it can.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C1, when the gaming area and the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enter, the first starting opening, which satisfies the first success or failure judgment condition, and the game flowing down the gaming area The ball has a second start-up opening where the second hit / fail determination condition is satisfied when the ball enters the ball, and the condition distributing means has game balls at the first start-up opening and the second start-up opening. A game machine C2 characterized by having a game ball guiding portion for assisting in entering alternately.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first hit determination condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second hit determination condition is satisfied. Ru. It is assisted by the game ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means that the game balls alternately enter the first starting opening and the second starting opening. As a result, the player can easily cause the game ball to alternately enter the first starting port and the second starting port by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game Can be performed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

  In the gaming machine of gaming machine C2, when the first or second judgment condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the sorting means holds the hold information storage means Of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established holding information and the previously stored holding information, based on the dynamic display start time corresponding to each holding information previously stored in A game machine C3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is stored in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming ball entered from the entrance of the condition distributing means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction to the first starting opening through the first guiding path to the gaming ball by the gaming ball guiding portion After being guided, the game ball entered from the ball entry next is received while being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated at a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming ball is guided by the gaming ball guiding portion to the second starting opening through the second guiding path. Thereby, it becomes possible to distribute and guide game balls alternately to the first starting opening and the second starting opening using a common member, and a member for distributing to the first starting opening and the second starting opening respectively As compared with the case where is provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine of gaming machine C3, the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance while being rotated to the predetermined angle in the first direction. And the ball enters the ball entrance when the game machine ball receives the ball and enters the second direction, and the first passive part rotates to the predetermined angle, and the second direction rotates to the predetermined angle. A second passive unit is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball, receives the gaming ball having entered the ball, and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the gaming ball received by the first passive unit from the ball entry port is received Prevents the game ball from rotating in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entry port after the game machine rotates in the second direction, or the second passive part enters the ball After receiving the game ball entered from the mouth and rotating it in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entry port next time Gaming machine C4, characterized in that a, a rotation restricting portion which prevents the pivoting in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first passive portion of the gaming ball guiding portion is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. When the first passive portion receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the gaming ball guiding part is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding part of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive portion receives the entered game ball, the game ball is rotated in the first direction to a predetermined angle. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may then rotate in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entrance and is rotated in the first direction, it is then rotated in the second direction before the game ball enters the ball inlet. This is prevented by the rotation restricting portion. Thus, after the gaming ball guiding portion is rotated to guide the gaming ball to one of the guiding paths, the next gaming ball is rotated in the other direction before entering the ball, and then the ball is entered next. A game ball can also be prevented from having a problem that it is guided to the same route as the game ball entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game ball entering the ball entrance to the first starting opening and the second starting opening more accurately alternately, and the right to carry out the first lottery game and the second lottery game is equalized. Can be stored.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine C1 has a gaming area and a common starting opening which establishes the first or second pass / fail judgment condition when a game ball flowing down the gaming area enters the ball, The condition distributing means is characterized in that the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are satisfied alternately in a controlled manner every time the game ball enters the common starting opening. Machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, each time the game ball flowing down the game area enters the common starting opening, establishment of the first and second judgment conditions is alternately distributed by the condition distributing means in a controlled manner. Thereby, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately performed with the common starting opening, and the gaming area can be configured compactly.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5 or B1, after the execution of sorting display of the hold display mode on the hold display means by the sorting means, the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established. In this case, with the display order of the displayed pending display modes being rearranged, the pending display mode indicating the newly established first or second success or failure judgment condition is in the order in which the pending display modes are established. A game machine D1 characterized by being displayed on a display means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, after the execution of the rearrangement display of the suspension display mode by the suspension display means by the rearrangement means, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the display order of the suspension display mode displayed in rearrangement is maintained In the hold state, the hold display mode indicating the newly established first or second pass / fail judgment condition is displayed on the hold display means in the order of the hold. As a result, even when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and the corresponding hold display mode is displayed after the execution of the sort display, the display order of the hold display modes displayed in the rear view is maintained. Thus, the player can correctly recognize the order of starting the dynamic display at the time of sorting. Therefore, the player must identify whether the display mode in which the sorting has been performed or the display mode in which the sorting is not performed is performed before or after the timing in which the display mode is displayed is before or after the sorting is performed. Can. Therefore, it can be easily recognized which order the hold display mode indicates.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine D1, the sorting display is performed in a state where the pending display mode in which the sorting display has been performed and the pending display mode in which the sorting display is not performed are mixedly displayed on the pending display means. When a predetermined condition which becomes an execution trigger of the means is newly established, the sorting means sorts all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. A game machine D2 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in a state in which the pending display mode in which the sorting display has been performed and the pending display mode not yet executed are mixedly displayed on the pending display means, a predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the sorting means is newly added. If the condition is satisfied, all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means are rearranged by the sorting means in the order of starting the dynamic display. As a result, even if the pending display modes of the reordering execution and the reordering non-execution are mixedly displayed, the reordering is executed again to arrange the order of starting the accurate dynamic display, It can be identified by the pending display mode after execution of replacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the on-hold information storage means determines the on / off status by the on / off determination means based on the establishment of the first or second on / off determination condition. A normal hold storage area in which normal hold information including at least the decision information for use and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored, and the normal hold storage area Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored normal holding information can be displayed dynamically, based on the normal holding information, the result of the judgment of the appropriateness by the judgment unit and the determination of the dynamic display mode are made in advance Means for determining the dynamic display mode by the means and the dynamic display start time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means, and storing as sorting information Storage area, and when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area. The first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area newly established and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area. A game machine E1 comprising: rearrangement order determination means for determining the order in which the dynamic display is started and storing the order in the rearrangement storage area.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second propriety determination condition, the normal suspension information having at least the propriety determination information used for the propriety determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode is the suspension information storage It is stored in the normal storage area of the means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area can be dynamically displayed, a result of determination of success or failure and a dynamic display mode are made in advance based on the normal hold information. Dynamic display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting storage area of the storage information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, the condition is newly established based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area, and the normal holding is performed. Determining the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the memory area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal memory area is started, The order is stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area by the rearrangement order determining means. This makes it possible to separately process the data for performing the lottery game and the data for determining the rearrangement order, and to facilitate the process of determining the rearrangement order. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the processing for executing the rearrangement and the like, and it is possible to facilitate the development of the gaming machine.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 includes main control means for executing main control of the game and slave control means for executing game control according to a slave control signal output by the master control means, the main control The means has the pending information storage means, the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means, and the sorting order is determined by the sorting order determining means based on the sorting information. Each time it is determined, a winning signal indicating each sorting order stored in the sorting reserve storage area is output to the slave control means, and the slave control means indicates the winning signal based on the winning signal. According to the secondary suspension information storage means having secondary secondary storage area in which each secondary sort order is stored, and the secondary display mode rearrangement based on the primary sequence stored in the secondary secondary storage area. Gaming machine E2, characterized in that it has a, and the rearrangement unit that row.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means which executes the main control of the game. Reordering information is stored in the reordering storage area of the main control means, and stored in the reordering storage area every time the reordering order is determined by the reordering order determining means based on the reordering information. A winning signal indicating each sort order is output by the main control means to the secondary control means. Further, in the secondary control means, the respective rearranging orders indicated by the winning signal are stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area of the secondary hold information storage means. Then, based on the sorting order stored in the secondary sorting reserve storage area, the sorting of the reserve display mode is executed by the sorting means of the secondary control means. As a result, the main control means does not have to perform processing to rearrange the hold display mode even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the control load of the main control means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 includes main control means for executing main control of the game and slave control means for executing game control according to a slave control signal output by the master control means, the main control The means has the pending information storage means, and indicates each of the sorting information stored in the sorting pending storage area every time the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means. A prize signal is output to the slave control means, and the slave control means includes a slave sort information storage means having a slave sort storage area in which each sort of sorting information indicated by the winning signal is stored based on the prize signal. And determining the sorting order based on the dynamic display start time in each sorting information of the secondary sorting reserve storage area, and storing the secondary sorting reserve storage area in the secondary sorting reserve storage area; ,Previous Gaming machine E3 based on the sort order stored in the slave rearrangement reserved memory area, and having a said rearrangement means for performing the rearrangement of the hold display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means which executes the main control of the game. Every time the sorting information is stored in the sorting storage area of the main control means, a winning signal indicating each sorting information stored in the sorting storage area is outputted by the main control means to the secondary control means. Further, in the secondary control means, the respective rearrangement information indicated by the winning signal is stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area of the secondary hold information storage means. Then, the sorting order is determined based on the dynamic display start time in the sorting information stored in the secondary sorting reserve storage area, and the secondary sorting reserve storage area according to the sorting order determination means of the control means It is memorized. Reordering of the hold display mode is executed by the reordering means of the sub control means based on the stored reordering order. As a result, the main control means does not have to determine the rearrangement order, and the secondary control means can determine the rearrangement order based on the winning signal, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced. . Therefore, the reordering of the hold display mode can be executed with the control load of the main control means suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, the on-hold information storage unit determines the on-off state based on the establishment of the first or second on-off determination condition. Stored in a normal hold storage area in which the pass / fail judgment information used for the pass / fail judgment by the means and the dynamic display decision information used in the determination of the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode decision means Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information can be displayed dynamically, based on the respective information in advance, the result of A reordering storage area in which a dynamic display mode and dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored as reordering information; When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the means stores the reordering valid information in the reordering pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the reordering pending storage area A gaming machine F1 for performing sorting of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means based on each sort of sorting information.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition, the normality holding storage area of the holding information storage means is the success / failure determination information used for the success / failure determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode. Is stored in Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information stored in the normal storage area can be displayed dynamically, based on the respective information, a result of determination of success or failure and a dynamic display mode and a motion are made in advance. The target display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting holding storage area of the holding information storage means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the reordering means stores the reordering effective information in the reordering pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the respective reordering pending storage areas Based on the sorting information, sorting of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is performed. Therefore, the hold display mode displayed when the predetermined condition is established can be accurately rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine F1, the sorting means repeatedly updates and displays the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means for each predetermined update opportunity, and holds the hold display means to the hold display means. With regard to the display mode of the display mode, the hold display mode of the rearrangement hold storage area in which the rearrangement effective information is stored is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, while the rearrangement effective information is stored. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the pending display mode of the sorting pending storage area not being displayed is displayed in the order in which the first or second pass / fail determination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is repeatedly updated every predetermined update opportunity and displayed by the sorting means. The pending display mode of the sorting pending display area in which the sorting valid information is stored is sorted by the order in which the dynamic display is started and displayed by the sorting means. On the other hand, the pending display mode in which the sorting effective information is not stored is displayed by the sorting means in the order in which the first or second yes / no decision condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to maintain and display the pending display mode in which the sorting is performed, in the order in which the dynamic display starts accurately. Therefore, it is possible to divide and display the pending display mode which has not been sorted and has not been sorted, and even if a new pending display mode is displayed after the sorting is executed, the dynamic of the pending display mode which has already been sorted The player can easily recognize the order in which the display is started.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the first lottery game and the second lottery are executed after the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game The lottery information for lottery whether or not to make a transition to a special gaming state in which the success or failure judgment with the game is likely to be hit is obtained on the basis of the establishment of the first or second success / failure judgment condition When storing the hold information corresponding to the 1st or 2nd success or failure judgment condition satisfied and the satisfied or not judgment condition satisfied, the game in which the lottery information is stored in the hold information storage means in relation to the held information The dynamic display start time information includes state lottery means, and when the first or second yes / no decision condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means The game when it becomes possible to start the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored suspension information based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the deciding means The game state lottery means determines whether the state is the special game state, performs pre-judgment to make a pass / fail judgment in advance, stores the result in the hold information storage means, and the result of the pass / fail judgment is If it is a touch to shift to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is earlier than the hold information previously stored, the newly stored With respect to the hold information which becomes an order after the order to become the dynamic display start corresponding to the held information, whether the game state when starting the dynamic display is the special game state again, The game state lottery means Each of the determinations is performed to execute in advance a preliminary determination to perform a yes or no decision, and the result is stored in the suspension information storage unit, and the dynamic display mode determination unit is the suspension information storage unit Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the memory can be dynamically displayed, the acceptance determination unit determines whether or not new suspension information is stored in the suspension information storage unit. The dynamic display mode is determined in advance based on the determination result of the prior determination stored in the suspension information storage unit and stored in the suspension information storage unit while the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit is stored. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the information becomes able to start dynamic display, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the propriety determination means executed in that case. To A game machine G1 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in order to make a lottery whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to win than normal. The lottery information of is selected by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition. Further, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied or not judgment condition is stored, the lottery result is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means The game state lottery means determines whether the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information is able to start dynamic display is the special game state, in advance The pre-judging to make a pass / fail decision is executed by the pass / fail decision means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Then, if the result is the transition to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is earlier than the hold information previously stored, then The game state lottery means respectively determines whether or not the game state when starting the dynamic display is the special game state again with respect to the hold information which becomes the order of, and the prior judgment to make a pass / fail judgment in advance is success or failure It is executed by the determination means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Until new display information is stored in the suspension information storage unit, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit becomes capable of dynamic display start, The dynamic display mode is determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result, and is stored in the hold information storage unit. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means executed in that case. The dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. As a result, the hold information is newly stored, and the order of starting the dynamic display is changed, and even if the hold determination result of the hold information stored earlier is changed, the hold determination result is used. It can be re-judged in advance as appropriate. Therefore, the dynamic display mode can be determined again based on the latest result of the success or failure determination, and the order in which the dynamic display starts can be correctly determined. Therefore, the hold display modes can be rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display starts.

  The main control means for performing main control of the game, and the secondary control means for performing control of the game based on the secondary control signal from the main control means, the main control means is the first success or failure determination condition The second lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the second lottery condition based on the establishment of the first lottery game, and the sub-control unit is configured to execute the second lottery procedure based on the establishment of the second lottery condition; First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means of the main control means, in the order in which the first success / failure determination conditions are satisfied; The second display means is dynamically displayed with the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means of the means in the order in which the second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the first identification information The second display of the second identification information on the first display means And a display control unit capable of performing dynamic display control on each of the stages, and the judgment result of the judgment by the judgment unit becomes a hit, and the first or second display unit displays the first display unit by the display control unit. Alternatively, in the gaming machine to which a bonus game advantageous to the player is given when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the main control means is based on the judgment result of the success or failure judgment means. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information at a predetermined dynamic display time, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means In the case where the display mode signal generation means generates the display mode signal based on the mode and outputs it to the secondary control means, and either the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit If, on the other hand, the first or second identification information is being displayed dynamically, an interruption signal instructing interruption of the dynamic display is generated, while based on the completion of the bonus game based on that hit And management signal generation means for generating a restart signal for instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display, and the display control means of the slave control means displays the display based on the reception of the display mode signal. The dynamic display mode indicated by the mode signal is displayed dynamically on the first or second display means, and the slave control means determines the time of the dynamic display based on the reception of the display mode signal. Based on the dynamic display time measuring means for measuring, the slave time managing means for interrupting the measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means based on the reception of the interruption signal, and the reception of the resume signal. Suspended dynamic display The remaining remaining dynamic display time is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measuring means, and the remaining of the first or second identification information interrupted according to the remaining dynamic display time A following redisplay mode determination means for determining a dynamic redisplay mode which is a dynamic display mode to be displayed during the dynamic display time of the game machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the control of the game is executed by the slave control means in accordance with the slave control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, in the secondary control means, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success / failure determination of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success / failure determination conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the judgment result of the judgment by the judgment unit becomes a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit by the display control unit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is awarded. . Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Further, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information in a predetermined dynamic display time. A display mode signal is generated by the display mode signal generating means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, and is output to the slave control means. Then, when one of the first and second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a collision, the other first or second identification information is dynamically displayed, if An interruption signal indicating interruption is generated by the management signal generating means. On the other hand, on the basis of the end of the bonus game based on the winning, a restart signal instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display is generated by the management signal generation means. In the slave control means, on the basis of the reception of the display mode signal, the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal is displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means. Based on the reception of the display mode signal from the main control means, the time of the dynamic display is measured by the dynamic display time measuring means. The measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means is interrupted by the slave time managing means based on the reception of the interruption signal from the main control means. On the other hand, based on the reception of the resumption signal from the main control means, the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended dynamic display mode is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measurement means, and the remaining The dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode to be displayed at the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information which has been interrupted according to the dynamic display time of Be done. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information interrupted during the bonus game is started, the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining time is determined. The lottery result can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner in the dynamic redisplay mode according to the display time. Also, even if the main control means does not select the dynamic re-displaying mode according to the remaining dynamic display time and instructs the slave control means, the slave control means performs the dynamic re-reading according to the remaining dynamic display time. Since the display mode is determined, the control load on the main control means can be reduced. Therefore, even with the gaming machine that simultaneously executes the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is possible to suppress the load increase of the main control means and perform various effects of the game.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine H1, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the driven redisplay mode determination means is configured by the dynamic display time within the reference time. While determining the short dynamic redisplay aspect which is the dynamic redisplay aspect, the dynamic display time being longer than the reference time if it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time A game machine H2 characterized by determining a normal dynamic re-display mode which is the dynamic re-display mode configured by a display time.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined by the secondary control means that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the short dynamic redisplay mode is a dynamic redisplay mode configured with the dynamic display time within the reference time. The display mode is determined by the driven redisplay mode determining means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, the normal dynamic redisplay mode is determined by the driven redisplay determination means. Thus, it is possible to determine the dynamic redisplay mode in accordance with the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even when the remaining dynamic display time is short, by determining the dedicated dynamic re-display mode, it is possible to inform the determination result of the lottery game so that the player can easily understand.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. A dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition A dynamic display mode determination means for determining an aspect, and a reserve storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. And the number of times determination means for determining the number of times of establishment of the first yes or no determination condition and the second yes or no determination condition stored in the pending storage means, the dynamic display mode determination means determining the number of times Means is the first success or failure When it is determined that there is a difference between the number of times of establishment of each of the condition and the second success or failure determination condition that is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic corresponding to the first or second success or failure determination condition of the larger number of times of establishment. The display mode is determined to be a short dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode of dynamic display time shorter than a dynamic display mode corresponding to the smaller one of the first and second success or failure judgment conditions. The game machine I1 which features.

  According to claim I1, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is established. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the right to perform the first or second lottery game is stored by the hold storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number of times. The number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions stored in the pending storage means is judged by the number judgment means. If the number of times determination means determines that the number of times of establishment of each of the first and second determination conditions is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition is the dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display manner corresponding to the first or second success / failure judgment condition having the smaller number of times of establishment Determine the short dynamic display mode that is the mode. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition with the higher number of times of establishment is performed in a short time, so the first success or failure judgment condition and the first (2) Adjustment can be made so that the difference in the number of occurrences with the pass / fail judgment condition becomes smaller. Therefore, the number of times the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied can be easily stored in the hold storage unit equally up to the upper limit number, and an overflow can be suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. A dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition A dynamic display mode determination means for determining an aspect, and a reserve storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. And the number of times determination means for determining the number of times of establishment of the first yes or no determination condition and the second yes or no determination condition stored in the pending storage means, the dynamic display mode determination means determining the number of times Means is the first success or failure If it is determined that there is a difference between the number of times of establishment of each of the condition and the second success or failure determination condition that is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, It is determined that the display mode is a long dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode of a dynamic display time longer than a dynamic display mode corresponding to the larger number of the first or second success / failure determination conditions. Feature game machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is established. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the right to perform the first or second lottery game is stored by the hold storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number of times. The number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions stored in the pending storage means is judged by the number judgment means. If the number of times determination means determines that the number of times of establishment of each of the first and second determination conditions is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition is the dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success / failure judgment condition of the larger number of times of establishment Determine the long dynamic display mode that is the mode. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this manner, the lottery game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition with a smaller number of times of establishment becomes longer, and the number of times of establishment of the success or failure judgment condition stored in the hold storage unit becomes difficult to reduce. It is possible to adjust so that the difference in the number of times of establishment between the first and second judgment conditions stored in the reserve storage means becomes smaller. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly enabled, the number-of-times determination unit is stored in the hold storage unit The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result determined by the number-of-times determination means. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition is newly enabled, the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition stored in the pending storage means The number of occurrences of is determined by the number determining means. And based on the judgment result, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode. Therefore, the dynamic display mode determination means can determine the dynamic display mode based on the information of the latest establishment number stored in the hold storage means in synchronization with the timing of starting the dynamic display.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the determination result of the success or failure determination means is a hit, the dynamic display manner determination means determines the dynamic display manner regardless of the determination result of the number determination means. And the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the number-of-times determination means if the determination result of the success or failure determination means is not determined. .

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects can be achieved. That is, when the determination result of the pass / fail determination unit is a hit, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit regardless of the determination result of the number determination unit. On the other hand, when the determination result of the success or failure determination means is out, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the determination result of the number determination means. Therefore, in the case of winning, a normal dynamic display mode indicating the winning can be determined to allow the player to have a sense of anticipation as to whether or not to be a bonus game, and in the case of falling off, By determining the dynamic display mode for adjusting the number of times of establishment stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to prevent the loss of the effect of the game.

  A game machine I5 according to any one of the game machines I1 to I4, wherein it is determined that there is a difference of 2 times or more.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, it is stored in the holding storage means when it is determined that there is a difference of two or more Since the dynamic display mode for adjusting the number of times of establishment is determined, the short dynamic display mode or the long dynamic display mode is frequently determined, which makes it difficult to understand the presentation of the game. It can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 and I3 to I5, the dynamic display mode determining means determines that the number of times of establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition of the higher number of establishment times stored in the hold storage means is a predetermined number of times. This is the gaming machine I6 characterized in that the short dynamic display mode is determined when it is determined that the number of times determining means has a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 and I3 to I5, the following effects are exerted. That is, there is a difference between the number of times of establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition which is greater in the number of times of establishment stored in the reserve storage means being equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times and the number of times determination means having a predetermined number of times or more If it is determined that the short dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, when the number of establishments equal to or more than the predetermined number is not stored, the short dynamic display mode is not determined even if there is a difference more than the predetermined number of times by the number judgment means An aspect is determined and it can suppress that the presentation of a game becomes monotonous.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the dynamic display mode determining means determines that the number of times of establishment of the first or second judgment conditions stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and A game machine I7 characterized in that the long dynamic display mode is determined when the judgment means judges that there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the following effects are exerted. That is, there is a difference between the number of times of establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition which is larger in the number of times of establishment stored in the reserve storage means being equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times and When it is determined that the long dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, in the case where the number of times of establishment is not stored a predetermined number of times, the long dynamic display mode is not determined even if there is a difference more than the number of times predetermined by the number of times determination means An aspect is determined and it can suppress that the presentation of a game becomes monotonous.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7, the dynamic display mode determining means moves the identification information corresponding to the first and second judgment conditions stored in the holding storage means. Before the dynamic display can be started, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance, and among the dynamic display modes determined in advance, the pass / fail judgment of the one having the higher number of times of establishment stored in the holding storage means Of the plurality of long dynamic display modes, one long dynamic display mode is determined based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the condition.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7, the following effects are exerted. That is, before the identification information corresponding to the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the reserve storage means can start the dynamic display, the dynamic display mode is determined dynamically Each is determined in advance by means. Among the dynamic display modes determined in advance, one of a plurality of long dynamic display modes is selected based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the pass / fail determination condition of the higher number of establishments stored in the reserve storage means. The long dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, by determining the long dynamic display mode based on the previously determined dynamic display mode corresponding to the success / failure determination condition with the smaller number of times of establishment stored in the reserve storage means, the difference between the numbers of establishment times with each other It is possible to determine a more suitable long dynamic display mode by reducing.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7 or I8, the dynamic display mode determining means includes the identification information corresponding to the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means. Before the dynamic display of can be started, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance, and of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, the one with the larger number of times of occurrence stored in the hold storage means. A game machine I9 characterized in that the dynamic display time of the long dynamic display mode is determined based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the pass / fail determination condition.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7 or I8, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode is determined dynamically before the identification information can start the dynamic display corresponding to the first and second judgment conditions stored in the reserve storage means. Each is determined in advance by means. Among the previously determined dynamic display modes, the long dynamic display is performed based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the pass / fail determination condition in the one having the higher number of establishments stored in the reserve storage means. The dynamic display time of the aspect is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, since the long dynamic display mode is determined in accordance with the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode determined to have the larger number of times of establishment, the difference in the number of times of establishment can be adjusted to be smaller.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. A dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition A dynamic display mode determination means for determining an aspect, and a reserve storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. And a continuous establishment monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition is continuously established, and the dynamic display mode determination means The monitoring means is the first If it is determined that one of the determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition is satisfied continuously, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure determination condition that is continuously satisfied, It is determined to be a short dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode of a dynamic display time shorter than a dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second success / failure determination condition I10.

  According to the gaming machine I10, the first display means performs the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination means, in the order in which the first determination condition is established. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the right to perform the first or second lottery game is stored by the hold storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number of times. Then, it is determined by the continuous establishment monitoring means whether or not one of the first and second determination conditions is continuously established. When the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first success or failure determination condition or the second success or failure determination condition is continuously established, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the first or the first established condition. A short dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode corresponding to the second validity determination condition is a dynamic display mode of the dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second success / failure determination condition Decide on. By thus determining the short dynamic display mode, since the lottery game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition of the continuously established one is performed in a short time, with the first success / failure judgment condition stored in the suspension storage means It can adjust so that the difference of the frequency | count of establishment with the 2nd judgment conditions becomes small. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. A dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition A dynamic display mode determination means for determining an aspect, and a reserve storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. And a continuous establishment monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition is continuously established, and the dynamic display mode determination means The monitoring means is the first When it is determined that either the determination condition or the second success or failure determination condition is satisfied continuously, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure determination condition that is not continuously satisfied Is determined to be a long dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode of a dynamic display time longer than a dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success / failure determination condition of the continuously established one. A game machine I11 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I11, the first display means performs the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the right to perform the first or second lottery game is stored by the hold storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number of times. Then, it is determined by the continuous establishment monitoring means whether or not one of the first and second determination conditions is continuously established. When the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition is continuously established, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the first one that is not continuously established. Dynamic display mode of the dynamic display time longer than dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success / failure judgment condition which is established successively, corresponding to the first / second success / failure judgment condition To determine the long dynamic display mode. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this manner, the lottery game corresponding to the condition of success or failure not established continuously becomes longer, and the number of times of establishment of the condition of success or failure stored in the storage means decreases. Since it becomes difficult, it can adjust so that the difference of the frequency | count of formation of the 1st yes-no decision conditions and the 2nd yes-no-does memorize | stored in the pending | holding memory means may become small. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  A game machine I12, comprising condition distribution means for assisting the first and second judgment conditions to be alternately established in any one of the game machines I1 to I11.

  According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11, the following effects are exerted. That is, the condition distribution means assists the first and second determination conditions to be alternately established. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied in the hold storage means by making the first and second judgment conditions substantially equal.

  In the gaming machine I10 or I12, there is provided a number determination means for determining the number of times of establishment of the first yes or no determination condition and the second yes or no determination condition stored in the hold storage means, the dynamic display mode determination means The continuous satisfaction monitoring means does not judge that either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number of times judgment means is the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition And the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success / failure determination condition having the larger number of occurrences, when it is determined that there is a difference between the number of occurrences of each and a predetermined number of occurrences. A game machine I13 characterized in that the dynamic display mode is determined.

  According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I10 or I12, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions stored in the reserve storage means is judged by the number judgment means. The continuous establishment monitoring means does not determine that either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number of times judgment means determines that the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition If it is determined that there is a difference between the number of times of each establishment and the predetermined number of times or more, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second pass / fail judgment condition having the higher number of times of establishment. , Determine the short dynamic display mode. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, even if the condition is not established continuously, if there is a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined number of occurrences, the condition corresponding to the success or failure determination condition having the higher number of occurrences Since the lottery game to be played is performed in a short time, it is possible to adjust so that the difference in the number of times of establishment between the first and second judgment conditions stored in the holding storage means becomes smaller. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  The game machine I11 or I12 includes number determination means for determining the number of times of establishment of the first yes or no determination condition and the second yes or no determination condition stored in the hold storage means, and the dynamic display mode determination means The said continuous establishment monitoring means does not judge that either the 1st yes / no judgment condition or the 2nd yes / no judgment condition is satisfied continuously, and the said frequency judgment means does not judge with the 1st yes / no judgment condition and the 2nd yes / no judgment condition In response to the determination that there is a difference between the number of times of each establishment and the number of times predetermined, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition with the smaller number of times of establishment Game machine I14 which is characterized in that it is determined in the target display mode.

  According to the gaming machine I14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I11 or I12, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions stored in the reserve storage means is judged by the number judgment means. The continuous establishment monitoring means does not determine that either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number of times judgment means determines that the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition If it is determined that there is a difference between the number of times of each establishment and the predetermined number of times or more, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second pass / fail judgment condition having the higher number of times of establishment. , Determine the short dynamic display mode. As described above, by determining the long dynamic display mode, even if not continuously established, if there is a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined number in the number of establishments, it corresponds to the success / failure determination condition of the smaller number Because the number of lottery games to be played becomes long, and the frequency of establishment of the qualification conditions stored in the suspension storage means is hard to decrease, the difference in the number of establishments between the first acceptance criteria and the second Can be adjusted to be smaller. Therefore, the number of times of establishment of the first and second judgment conditions can be easily stored in the hold storage means evenly up to the upper limit number, and overflow can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2 or G1, displayed at the time when the predetermined condition is established A gaming machine characterized by comprising sorting notification means for giving notification of an executed notification mode indicating that sorting has been performed when sorting is executed by the sorting means for the pending display mode. J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2 or G1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, when reordering is performed for the pending display mode displayed at that time, an executed notification mode indicating that the reordering is performed is arranged It is notified by the change notification means. In this manner, the player can identify whether the currently displayed hold display mode indicates the establishment order or indicates the start order of the dynamic display according to the executed notification mode. Since it is possible, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress confusion of the player's game.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine J1, the sorting notification means is characterized by displaying, as the executed notification mode, a display mode capable of identifying that the sorting has been performed on the hold display means. A game machine J2 to be played.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is displayed by the sorting notification means in a display manner capable of identifying that the reordering has been performed on the hold display means as the notification mode of completion. Therefore, by notifying the executed display mode to the same held display mode as the held display mode, the executed notification mode can be displayed closer to the held display mode, and the player misses the executed notification mode. The effect is that it is possible to prevent the

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the sorting notification means indicates that the sorting display mode has been displayed when sorting is performed by the sorting means. The pending display mode displayed after the reordering execution by the sorting means is reported in the unexecuted informing mode which indicates that the reordering is not performed while the informing informing mode is performed. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exerted. That is, as for the pending display mode displayed when the sorting is performed by the sorting means, the executed notification mode indicating that the sorting has been performed is notified by the sorting notifying means. On the other hand, with regard to the pending display mode displayed after the reordering execution by the reordering means, the non-execution notification mode indicating that reordering is not executed is notified by the reordering informing means. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to distinguish between reordering execution and reordering non-execution, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the arrangement order of the hold display mode, and it is possible to prevent confusion for the game. .

  In the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the pending display modes sorted by the sorting means in an order different from the fulfilling order are individually triggered when the predetermined condition is fulfilled. It has reordering identification means to identify, and the reordering informing means is displayed in the reordering order different from the establishment order based on the information identified by the reordering identifying means as the executed notification mode A game machine J4 characterized by notifying in the display mode which shows that it is the said pending display mode.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the predetermined condition is established, the pending display modes rearranged by the rearrangement unit in the order different from the establishment order are individually identified by the rearrangement identification unit. As an executed notification mode, a display mode indicating that the on-hold display mode is displayed in the sorting order different from the establishment order is notified by the sorting notification means based on the information identified by the sorting identification means . As a result, the player can easily recognize the hold display mode in which the change start order is different from the formation order, and can easily recognize the display order of the hold display mode.

  In the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the suspension display means is configured to display the suspension display area for displaying the suspension display mode in the establishment order, separately from the establishment order suspension display area and the establishment order suspension display area. And a start order hold display area for displaying the hold display mode in the order of starting display, and while the hold display mode is displayed in the establishment order hold display area, the predetermined condition is satisfied. In a state where the display of the hold display mode in the establishment order hold display area is maintained triggered by the event, the dynamic display arranged in the start order hold display area by the rearranging unit is started in the order of starting the dynamic display A game display device J5 characterized in that a hold display mode is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display order is displayed by the hold display area in the hold display means in the order in which the hold display mode is realized. In addition to the establishment order suspension display area, the suspension display mode is displayed in the start order suspension display area of the suspension display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. While the hold display mode is displayed in the establishment order hold display area, the display of the hold display mode in the establishment order hold display area is maintained in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the start order hold display area The hold display mode is displayed in the order sorted by the sorting unit. As a result, the player can simultaneously identify the pending display mode before sorting and after sorting, and can easily determine how sorting has been performed.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1 or J1 to J5, the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit Temporarily stopping means for temporarily stopping the first or second identification information during dynamic display based on the event, and the remaining dynamic of the first or second identification information during temporary suspension after the end of the bonus game The dynamic display start time information based on the fact that the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win, and The determination means dynamically takes time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes a dynamic display start, starting from the end of the bonus game Until the display starts And time information of the redetermined each gaming machine is characterized in that stored in the hold information storage means K1.

  According to the gaming machine K1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1 or J1 to J5, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first or second identification information in the dynamic display is temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means. Then, after the end of the bonus game, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being temporarily stopped is dynamically displayed again by the re-dynamic display start means. The first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information display means becomes the dynamic display start based on the display of the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the collision. The time information until the dynamic display is started from the end of the bonus game as a starting point is redetermined respectively by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the hold information storage means. As described above, when the bonus game is started, the time information until the dynamic display starts is re-determined to the time information starting from the end of the bonus game, so that it is determined in advance during the bonus game. Even when the above conditions are satisfied, the hold display modes can be rearranged in the order of accurately starting the dynamic display.

  In the gaming machine K1, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the dynamic display start time information determination means is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means. With respect to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information, the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the hold information stored in the hold information are stored. Based on the dynamic display mode, the time information until the dynamic display starts from the end of the bonus game as a starting point is re-determined respectively, while the first or second identification displayed in the display mode indicating a win With respect to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means corresponding to the information, the dynamic display starting from the end of the bonus game based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored hold information Gaming machine K2 to, wherein the time until the start is to re-determine respectively.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, it is stored in the hold information storage unit corresponding to the first or second identification information temporarily stopped by the temporary stop unit. Dynamically starting from the end of the bonus game based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored hold information with respect to the current hold information The time information until the display start is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. On the other hand, with respect to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information displayed in the display mode indicating a hit, the corresponding dynamic display corresponding to the stored hold information Based on the mode, the time until the dynamic display start starting from the end of the bonus game is redetermined by the dynamic display start time information determination means. Therefore, since the time information until the dynamic display start is determined by distinguishing the hold information corresponding to the temporarily stopped identification information and the hold information not temporarily stopped, dynamic display is more accurate. Time information until the start can be determined.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the on-hold information storage means determines on / off determination information used for the on / off determination by the on / off determination means and the dynamic display mode based on the establishment of the first or second on / off determination condition. A normal hold storage area in which normal hold information having at least dynamic display determination information used for determining a dynamic display mode by means is stored, and a first or corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area Before the second identification information can be displayed dynamically, based on the normal hold information, the result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means and the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means and the start of the dynamic display in advance The time information is determined by the time information determining means and stored as sorting information, while the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit. And a reordering storage area in which the time information stored as the reordering information is updated and stored in the time information redetermined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. And when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, the condition is newly established based on the time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area. Dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area starts A game machine K3 comprising: rearranging order determining means for determining an order to be stored and storing the order in the rearrangement reserve storage area.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second validity determination condition, the validity determination information used for the determination of success or failure by the validity determination means and the dynamic display determination information used for determination of the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means The normal holding information having at least the following information is stored in the normal holding storage area of the holding information storage means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area can be dynamically displayed, it is determined in advance based on the normal hold information that the result of judgment by the pass / fail judgment means is The dynamic display mode by the target display mode determining means and the time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting storage area of the holding information storage means. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the time information stored as the sort information is the time information redetermined by the dynamic display start time information determination means It is updated and stored in the rearrangement pending storage area. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established, it is stored in the newly established normal suspension storage area based on the time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the rearrangement suspension storage area. The order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal holding information and the normal holding information previously stored in the normal holding storage area is started is determined by the rearrangement order determining means. The order is stored in the reordering storage area. This makes it possible to separately process the data for performing the lottery game and the data for determining the sorting order, and the processing for determining the sorting order can be easily performed. Further, even when the bonus game starts, the time information is updated based on the end of the bonus game, so that sorting can be performed easily even during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine K3, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied during the bonus game, the sorting order determining means corresponds to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting storage area. The normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area newly established based on the time information redetermined by the dynamic display start time determination unit and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area The order in which the dynamic display is started is determined, starting from the end of the bonus game of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to each of the normal holding information, and the order is determined. A game machine K4 characterized by being stored in the rearrangement hold storage area.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied during the bonus game, the time re-determined by the dynamic display start time determining means corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting storage area First identification information and second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the newly established normal hold storage area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area based on the information Starting from the end of the bonus game with, the order in which the dynamic display is started is determined by the rearrangement order determination means, and the order is stored in the rearrangement hold storage area.

  Therefore, also for the first or second success or failure judgment conditions established during the bonus game, the order for starting more accurate dynamic display is determined, and the hold display mode is made in the order for starting the accurate dynamic display It can be rearranged. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed even when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is established during the bonus game.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition that Dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the corresponding first identification information, and determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition Mode determination means and, in the case where the first or second success or failure judgment condition is fulfilled, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied or false acceptance condition is started, the success or failure judgment In the judgment of the success or failure by means The main hold information includes the success / failure determination information to be determined and the dynamic display determination information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the order information for which the success / failure determination condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied Main hold information storage means for identifiably storing whether the determined success or failure judgment condition is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition; and that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means And a main hold information signal generating unit for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control unit of information related to the stored main hold information, the slave control unit including the main hold information signal Sub hold information storage means for storing, as sub hold information, information related to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal based on reception of the first hold information stored in the sub hold information storage means The distinction order of the success or failure judgment conditions in which the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are combined for each subordination information while discriminating subordination information of the judgment condition and the second validity or failure judgment condition is identified Dynamic display mode determined by dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means based on the hold display means displayed in the possible hold display mode and the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means The first or second identification during dynamic display on the first or second display means when the follow-up display mode determination means for determining and the new follow-on information are stored in the sub-hold information storage means Based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the information and the dynamic display mode determined by the follow-up display mode determination unit for each of the sub-hold information previously stored in the sub-hold information storage unit, a new sub The first or second corresponding to the pending information The dynamic display start time information determination means which determines the time information until the separate information becomes the dynamic display start and stores it in the sub-hold information storage means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, Based on each of the time information stored in the sub hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display A gaming machine L1 having sorting means.

  According to the gaming machine L1, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal generating means for generating information on the stored main hold information to the slave control means is generated by the main hold information signal generation means Ru. Then, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition are matched for each sub-hold information while distinguishing the subsidy information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the subwaiting information storage means. The establishment order of the success / failure determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. In the secondary control means, based on the secondary suspension information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the driven display mode determination means. When new secondary hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the first secondary hold information are stored in the secondary hold information storage means The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to new sub hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow display mode determination means for each sub hold information The information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the sub hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Sorting is performed by the sorting unit in the order in which the dynamic display starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means determines that the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. A distinction signal is generated to distinguish between the first and second determination conditions and the first and second determination conditions are met, and the first and second determination conditions are established. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction condition is established based on the establishment signal generation unit sequentially output to the sub control unit and the establishment of the first condition determination condition, and the second Condition of the success or failure judgment Based on standing, and dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to enacted spruce determination condition,
When the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes / no determination condition is dynamically started when the first or second yes / no determination condition is satisfied, the determination regarding the yes / no determination by the yes / no determination unit With the main hold information as the main hold information and the dynamic display determination information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the order information for which the main check information corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied is satisfied A main hold information storage means for identifiably storing whether the success or failure judgment condition is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition, and that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means Based on the main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information related to the stored main hold information, the slave control means comprising: With respect to the number of receptions of the establishment signal until the first or second identification information corresponding to the propriety determination condition that triggered generation of the establishment signal becomes possible based on the reception. Information is distinguished between the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition indicated by the success signal, and the order of establishment of the success or failure judgment condition including the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition is The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition on the basis of the number of sub-holding number storage means which are identifiably stored as sub-holding number information, and the number of sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means. Of the substantive display condition which can identify the fulfillment order of the propriety determination condition which is the combination of the first propriety determination condition and the second propriety determination condition for each sub reserved number information while distinguishing the sub reserved number information of Displayed in Display means, sub-hold information storage means for storing, as sub-hold information, information on main-hold information indicated by the main-hold information signal based on the reception of the main-hold information signal; Followed display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means based on the stored secondary hold information, and new secondary hold in the secondary hold information storage means When the information is stored, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the sub-hold information storage means are previously stored. The first or second identification information corresponding to new sub-hold information becomes dynamic display start based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow-up display mode determination means for each sub-hold information Determine time information The dynamic display start time information determining means stored in the secondary suspension information storage means and the secondary display information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determining means triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a sorting means for sorting the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on the stored each time information. Gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The main control means distinguishes between the first and second judgment conditions based on the first and second judgment conditions and holds the first and second judgment conditions. A formation signal for notifying of is generated by the formation signal generating means, and is output to the control means in accordance with the formation order of the first or second yes / no determination condition. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal generating means for generating information on the stored main hold information to the slave control means is generated by the main hold information signal generation means Ru. Then, the slave control means, based on the reception of the establishment signal, during the period until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition that triggered the generation of the establishment signal becomes possible. Information on the number of receptions of the establishment signal distinguishes the establishment condition from the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition, and the condition determination condition combining the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition Are stored in sub-holding number storage means as sub-holding number information so that they can be identified. The sub-control means distinguishes the sub-holding number information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition based on the sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means for each sub-holding number information. The hold display means performs the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions in which the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are combined with each other as the display of the distinguishable held display mode. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information related to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means is determined by the follow-up display mode determining means based on the sub-holding information stored in the sub-holding information storage means. In the secondary control means, when new secondary hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the secondary hold information storage means First or second identification information corresponding to new sub hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow display mode determination means for each sub hold information stored in The time information until it becomes is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Sorting is performed by the sorting unit in the order in which the dynamic display starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine L3 characterized in that the gaming machine L1 or L2 has condition distributing means for assisting that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is assisted by the distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be performed in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, when the primary hold information signal is received and the secondary hold information storage unit is stored with the secondary hold information, the sort unit holds the secondary hold information storage unit. The first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established sub hold information and the previously stored sub hold information, based on the time information corresponding to each sub hold information previously stored. A game machine L4 characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is related to sub hold information and stored in the sub hold information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the primary hold information signal is received and the secondary hold information is stored according to the secondary hold information storage means, based on the time information corresponding to the respective secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means. The dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is associated with each sub hold information. It is stored in the sub hold information storage means by the sorting means. Thus, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the sub-hold information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display mode can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display mode in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player is notified of the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  One of the gaming machines L1 to L4 has operation means operable by the player, and the sorting means is configured as the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated. A gaming machine L5 characterized by rearranging the hold display mode.

  According to the game described in the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to rearrange the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to notify the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  The rearrangement unit rearranges the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the establishment signal or the main hold information signal is received. The gaming machine L6 according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that

  According to the game described in the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the establishment signal or the main hold information signal is received from the main control unit, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is rearranged by the rearrangement unit on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display mode is rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

  The main control means makes a lottery whether or not to shift the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game is performed, to a special gaming state in which the success or failure of the first lottery game and the second lottery game is likely to be hit than usual. Lottery information is obtained based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition, the first or second success or failure judgment condition is fulfilled, and the main hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored. In this case, it has game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the main hold information storage means in association with the main hold information, and the slave control means is stored in the sub hold information storage means Based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the first and second identification information corresponding to the respective sub hold information can correspond to the respective sub hold information until the dynamic display start becomes possible. Said first or first According to the lottery information, it is determined whether the gaming state when the identification information can be dynamically displayed is the special gaming state, and pre-judging is performed in advance to perform a pass / fail determination, and the results are said to be suspended There is a pre-engagement determination means stored in the sub-hold information storage means in association with information, and the follow-up display mode determination means of the sub-control means corresponds to the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means Before the first or second identification information can be dynamically displayed, based on the determination result of the prior determination stored in the sub-holding information storage unit by the pre-engagement determination unit and the dynamic display determination information The gaming machine L7 according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the dynamic display mode is determined.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, in order to draw lottery whether or not to transition to a special gaming state that is more likely to hit the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after executing the bonus game The lottery information of is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the main hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is associated with the main hold information, and the game state lottery means Are stored in the main hold information storage means. In the secondary control means, the dynamic display start time information determination means determines until the first or second identification information corresponding to each secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means can start dynamic display. Based on selected time information, whether or not the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to each sub-hold information can be dynamically displayed is the special game state according to the lottery information by the game state lottery means The pre-judgment means executes the pre-judgment in which the judgment is made and the acceptance judgment is made in advance. Then, the result is stored by the predetermination means according to the sub hold storage means in association with each sub hold information. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means can start dynamic display, the determination of the prior determination stored in the sub-hold information storage means by the pre-engagement determination means Based on the result and the dynamic display determination information, the dynamic display mode is determined by the follow-up display determination unit of the secondary control unit. As a result, even if the new display information is stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the gaming state at the start of the dynamic display is judged based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the judgment of the status is performed. It will be. Therefore, the dynamic display time information can be determined in advance based on the correct validity determination result, and the dynamic display start order can be determined also when a new validity determination condition is satisfied next.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for providing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure condition The first or the first upper limit number of times up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, which is assisted by the condition distributing unit assisting the establishment of the judgment condition alternately and the condition distribution unit 2 Hold storage means for storing the right to play the lottery game, and the condition distribution means is in a state to assist the establishment of either the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition next It comprises: establishment condition identification means for identifying, and identification result notification means for notifying the player of information indicating the identification result based on the identification result of the establishment identification means. Game machine M1 characterized by Rukoto.

  According to the gaming machine M1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. It is assisted by the condition distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. The right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the hold storage means when the first or second validity determination conditions are satisfied, assisted by the condition distribution means. Further, it is discriminated by the satisfaction condition discriminating means whether the condition distributing means is in the state of assisting the establishment of the first yes / no decision condition or the second yes / no decision condition next. Information indicating the identification result is notified to the player by the identification result notification unit based on the identification result of the establishment condition identification unit. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored uniformly, and the first lottery game is played. It is possible to prevent any one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored earlier up to the upper limit number. Therefore, to store the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game up to the upper limit number respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right more than the upper limit number is generated in either one and becomes invalid. it can. In addition, since the identification result notification means is informed of which state the acceptance / rejection determination condition is to be assisted so as to be satisfied next, it is assisted to be satisfied next after being notified. Even if the success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the player can play the game so that the success or failure judgment condition is not satisfied, as long as the success or failure judgment condition is an overflow.

  In the gaming machine M1, when the game area and the game ball flowing down the game area enter, the first starting opening that satisfies the first success or failure judgment condition and the game ball flowing down the game area enter. It has a second starting opening where the second success or failure judgment condition is established by the ball, and the condition distributing means alternately inserts game balls into the first starting opening and the second starting opening. The gaming machine M2 according to claim 1, further comprising a gaming ball guiding portion for assisting in balling.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first hit determination condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second hit determination condition is satisfied. Ru. It is assisted by the game ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means that the game balls alternately enter the first starting opening and the second starting opening. As a result, the player can easily cause the game ball to alternately enter the first starting port and the second starting port by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game Can be performed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

  In the gaming machine M2, the condition distributing means is a ball entry port through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a game ball entered into the ball entrance through the game ball guiding portion. The game ball guidance unit includes a first induction passage leading to a first starting opening, and a second induction passage leading to the second starting opening via the gaming ball guiding unit, and the gaming ball guiding unit After receiving the game ball entered from the ball mouth and rotating it to a predetermined angle in the first direction to guide the game ball to the first induction path, the game ball entered next from the ball entry port is then said It is received in a state of being rotated in the first direction, is rotated to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and guides the gaming ball to the second guiding path. The game machine M3 which features.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming ball entered from the entrance of the condition distributing means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction to the first starting opening through the first guiding path to the gaming ball by the gaming ball guiding portion After being guided, the game ball entered from the ball entry next is received while being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated at a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming ball is guided by the gaming ball guiding portion to the second starting opening through the second guiding path. Thereby, it becomes possible to distribute and guide game balls alternately to the first starting opening and the second starting opening using a common member, and a member for distributing to the first starting opening and the second starting opening respectively As compared with the case where is provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine M3, the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance in a state of being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, A first passive portion that receives the game ball having entered the ball and pivots to the second direction to a predetermined angle, and the game ball entered to the ball entrance when pivoted to the second direction to the predetermined angle; The second passive unit is disposed at a facing position, receives the gaming ball entered, and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the first passive unit receives the gaming ball entered from the ball entry port, and After pivoting in two directions, before the game ball enters the ball entry port next time, preventing it from pivoting in the first direction, or the second passive part enters from the ball entry port After receiving the ball game ball and rotating it in the first direction, then before the game ball enters the ball entrance, Gaming machine M4, characterized in that it has a rotation restricting portion which prevents the pivots direction.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first passive portion of the gaming ball guiding portion is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. When the first passive portion receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the gaming ball guiding part is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding part of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive portion receives the entered game ball, the game ball is rotated in the first direction to a predetermined angle. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may then rotate in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entrance and is rotated in the first direction, it is then rotated in the second direction before the game ball enters the ball inlet. This is prevented by the rotation restricting portion. Thus, after the gaming ball guiding portion is rotated to guide the gaming ball to one of the guiding paths, the next gaming ball is rotated in the other direction before entering the ball, and then the ball is entered next. A game ball can also be prevented from having a problem that it is guided to the same route as the game ball entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game ball entering the ball entrance to the first starting opening and the second starting opening more accurately alternately, and the right to carry out the first lottery game and the second lottery game is equalized. Can be stored.

  In any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the condition distributing means next enters the ball based on the fact that the game ball enters the first or second starting opening in the establishment condition identifying means. A game machine M5 characterized by identifying a starting opening to be assisted.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first or second starting opening, the condition distributing means identifies the starting opening that assists to enter the ball next. Therefore, the player can recognize the starting opening to be distributed next, and can play a game by suppressing an invalid ball due to an overflow.

  The establishment condition identifying unit detects a state in which the gaming ball guiding unit is pivoted, and based on the detection result, the gaming ball guiding unit guides the gaming ball by a guiding path to be guided next. A game machine M6 characterized by identifying an auxiliary starting port.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball guiding unit guides the game ball next, based on the detection result, by detecting the rotation state of the game ball guiding unit of the condition distributing means, so that the game ball enters the ball The start-up ports assisted by the vehicle are identified by the satisfied condition identifying means. Therefore, the state of the condition distributing means can be accurately identified and notified, and the player can be notified of accurate information to play the game so as to suppress the overflow.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition that Dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the corresponding first identification information, and determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition Mode determination means and, in the case where the first or second success or failure judgment condition is fulfilled, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied or false acceptance condition is started, the success or failure judgment In the judgment of the success or failure by means With the main hold information as the main hold information and the dynamic display determination information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the order information for which the success / failure judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied The main hold information storage means stores the main hold information storage means for identifiably storing whether the success or failure judgment condition is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition, and the main hold information is newly stored in the main hold information storage means. In this case, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and each of the main hold information previously stored in the main hold information storage means Time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to new main hold information starts dynamic display on the basis of the dynamic display determination information of Master display start time to memorize Based on information determining means and that new main holding information is stored in the main holding information storing means, information relating to the stored main holding information and time information corresponding to the main holding information is slave control means A main hold information signal generating unit for generating a main hold information signal to be notified, and the slave control unit relates to information indicated by the main hold information signal based on the reception of the main hold information signal. The sub-hold information of the sub-hold information storing means for storing information as sub-hold information and the sub-hold information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the sub-hold information storage means The hold display means displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode, and the predetermined condition is satisfied, in which case the fulfillment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions obtained by combining the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition is satisfied. The opportunity The hold display mode displayed on the hold display means based on each time information determined by the primary dynamic display start time information determination means indicated by the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means; A gaming machine N1 having sorting means for sorting in the order of starting display.

  According to the gaming machine N1, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, when main hold information is newly stored in the main hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the main hold information storage means first The time information until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new main hold information becomes active based on the dynamic display determination information for each main hold information stored in the It is determined by the display start time information determination means and stored in the sub hold information storage means. The main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information related to the stored main hold information and time information corresponding to the main hold information. Is generated by the main hold information signal generation means. Then, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition are matched for each sub-hold information while distinguishing the subsidy information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the subwaiting information storage means. The order of establishment of the success or failure judgment conditions is performed by the hold display means as a display of the distinguishable hold display mode, and the secondary control means causes the secondary hold information storage means to be triggered when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Based on each time information determined by the primary dynamic display start time information determination means indicated by the stored sub-hold information, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is arranged in the order in which dynamic display is started It is rearranged. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition that Dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the corresponding first identification information, and determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition Mode determination means and, in the case where the first or second success or failure judgment condition is fulfilled, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied or false acceptance condition is started, the success or failure judgment In the judgment of the success or failure by means The main hold information includes the success / failure determination information to be determined and the dynamic display determination information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the order information for which the success / failure determination condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied A main hold information storage means capable of identifiably storing whether the judgment condition is the first judgment condition or the second judgment condition and capable of holding the memory even when the power is off, and the main hold information And a main hold information signal generation means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information related to the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information is stored in the storage means. The slave control information storage unit stores, as slave hold information, information related to the master hold information indicated by the master hold information signal based on the reception of the master hold information signal; The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition are set for each sub-hold information while discriminating the subsidy information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. Dynamic display of the main control means based on the hold display means in which the establishment order of the combined good or bad judgment conditions is displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode, and the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage means A follow-up display mode determination unit that determines the dynamic display mode determined by the mode determination unit, and when the new suspension information is stored in the secondary suspension information storage unit, the first or second display unit The remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the motion determined by the follow-up display mode determination means for each of the sub-hold information previously stored in the sub-hold information storage means New display based on Dynamic display start time information determination means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to sub hold information becomes dynamic display start, and storing it in the sub hold information storage means; The hold display mode displayed on the hold display means based on each of the time information stored in the sub hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means in response to the establishment of the specified condition, A gaming machine N2 comprising: sorting means for sorting in the order of starting the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine N2, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal generating means for generating information on the stored main hold information to the slave control means is generated by the main hold information signal generation means Ru. Then, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. The first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition are matched for each sub-hold information while distinguishing the subsidy information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the subwaiting information storage means. The establishment order of the success / failure determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. In the secondary control means, based on the secondary suspension information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the driven display mode determination means. When new secondary hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the first secondary hold information are stored in the secondary hold information storage means The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to new sub hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow display mode determination means for each sub hold information The information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the sub hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Sorting is performed by the sorting unit in the order in which the dynamic display starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition And a success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination of the second lottery game by executing the success / failure determination of the first lottery game and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination conditions; Based on the determination result, the first success or failure determination signal has a success or failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success or failure determination signal based on the success or failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the determination of success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal, and the second success or failure judgment signal Based on the decision of the second lottery game success or failure A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second display means indicates a hit In the gaming machine to which a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the main control means determines that the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. A distinction signal is generated to distinguish between the first and second determination conditions and the first and second determination conditions are met, and the first and second determination conditions are established. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction condition is established based on the establishment signal generation unit sequentially output to the sub control unit and the establishment of the first condition determination condition, and the second Condition of the success or failure judgment Dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition based on the establishment, and the condition is satisfied when the first or second success or failure determination condition is established Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the validity determination condition is dynamically displayed, the validity determination information on the validity determination by the validity determination means and the dynamic determined by the dynamic display mode determination means Whether the dynamic display determination information related to the display mode is the main hold information and the order information in which the validity determination condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied and the validity determination condition that is satisfied is the first success or failure determination condition or not Means for identifiably storing the information as to the stored main holding information based on the fact that the main holding information is stored in the main holding information storage means A main hold information signal generation means for generating a main hold information signal to be notified to the control means, the slave control means being a trigger for generating the formation signal based on the reception of the formation signal Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the yes / no decision condition can be dynamically displayed, information on the number of receptions of the formation signal is indicated by the first Sub-holding number storage means that distinguishes the second validity determination condition and stores the establishment order of the first determination condition and the second determination condition in combination as the sub hold number information in a distinguishable manner And the number of sub-holdings of each of the sub-holdings of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition based on the sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means The first success or failure per information Based on the holding display means displayed in the distinguishable holding display mode and the reception order of the main holding information signal, the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions combining the constant condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is Sub-hold information storage means for storing information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as sub-hold information, and dynamic display of the main control means based on the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means A follow-up display mode determination unit that determines the dynamic display mode determined by the mode determination unit, and when the new suspension information is stored in the secondary suspension information storage unit, the first or second display unit The remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the motion determined by the follow-up display mode determination means for each of the sub-hold information previously stored in the sub-hold information storage means Visual display To determine the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new sub hold information becomes the dynamic display start, and the dynamic display start time stored in the sub hold information storage means Displayed on the hold display means based on each of the time information stored in the sub hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means in response to the information determination means and that a predetermined condition is satisfied A gaming machine N3 having rearranging means for rearranging the held display mode in the order of starting the dynamic display;

  According to the gaming machine N3, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The main control means distinguishes between the first and second judgment conditions based on the first and second judgment conditions and holds the first and second judgment conditions. A formation signal for notifying of is generated by the formation signal generating means, and is output to the control means in accordance with the formation order of the first or second yes / no determination condition. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied validity determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the main control means, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic judgment is started by the judgment unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is started. The pass / fail judgment information on the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment unit and the dynamic display decision information on the dynamic display mode decided by the dynamic display mode decision unit are main hold information, and the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The main hold information storage means is stored in such a manner as to distinguish between the order information and the established success or failure judgment condition which is the first success or failure judgment condition or the second success or failure judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, a main hold information signal generating means for generating information on the stored main hold information to the slave control means is generated by the main hold information signal generation means Ru. Then, the slave control means, based on the reception of the establishment signal, during the period until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition that triggered the generation of the establishment signal becomes possible. Information on the number of receptions of the establishment signal distinguishes the establishment condition from the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition, and the condition determination condition combining the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition Are stored in sub-holding number storage means as sub-holding number information so that they can be identified. The sub-control means distinguishes the sub-holding number information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition based on the sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means for each sub-holding number information. The hold display means performs the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions in which the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are combined with each other as the display of the distinguishable held display mode. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, information related to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub hold information. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means is determined by the follow-up display mode determining means based on the sub-holding information stored in the sub-holding information storage means. In the secondary control means, when new secondary hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the secondary hold information storage means First or second identification information corresponding to new sub hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the follow display mode determination means for each sub hold information stored in The time information until it becomes is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Sorting is performed by the sorting unit in the order in which the dynamic display starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the hold display mode in the order of start of the dynamic display, it is executed by the secondary control means, so that the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N1, the main storage information storage means is configured to be capable of holding data even when the power is off, and the main control means is a gaming machine when the gaming machine is powered on. Main initial control execution means for executing a main initial control process, which is initial setting, and as one process of the main initial control process, based on the main hold information and time information stored in the main hold information storage means The return data signal generation means for generating return data signals and outputting the same to the sub control means, wherein the sub control means is configured to initialize the game machine when the game machine is powered on. In the slave initial control execution means for executing slave initial control processing, and in the slave initial control processing executed by the slave initial control execution means, the return data signal indicates based on the return data signal from the main control means. Follow up information Gaming machine N4, characterized in that those having the sub suspension information returning unit to be stored in the sub suspension information storage means as the distillate information.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main hold information storage means of the main control means, data is held even when the power is off. In the main control means, when the game machine is powered on, the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, the return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation means based on the main hold information and time information stored in the main hold information storage means, and It is output. In the slave control means, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, slave initial control processing, which is initial setting of the gaming machine, is executed by the slave initial control execution means. In the slave initial control process executed by the slave initial control execution means, the information indicated by the return data signal is based on the return data signal from the main control means as the slave return hold information, and the slave hold information memory means hold information return It is stored by means. As a result, when power is switched back to the gaming machine after a power failure occurs, data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, According to the information storage means, return suspension information is stored. Therefore, the data stored in the secondary hold information storage means can be restored to the state immediately before the power is turned off. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the on-hold display mode displayed immediately before the power-off can be displayed to the player. Since the slave return hold information is stored as information based on the main hold information and the time information, the hold display mode is arranged in the order of the start of change of the hold display mode even when the power is turned off and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It can be changed and displayed.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the main storage information storage means is configured to be capable of holding data even when the power is off, and the main control means is configured to turn on the gaming machine. A main initial control execution means for executing a main initial control process which is an initial setting of the gaming machine, and as one process of the initial control process, stored in the main storage information storage means for the secondary control means And a return data signal generating unit that generates a return data signal based on the main hold information and outputs the generated return data signal to the slave control unit, the slave control unit turning on the game machine. A slave initial control execution means for executing slave initial control processing which is an initial setting of the gaming machine, and slave initial control processing executed by the slave initial control execution means, based on a return data signal from the main control means Return Gaming machine N5, characterized in that those having the sub suspension information returning means for said to be stored in the slave holding information storage means information indicating the data signal as a slave return hold information.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main hold information storage means of the main control means, data is held even when the power is off. In the main control means, when the game machine is powered on, the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, the return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation means based on the main hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, and is output to the sub control means. In the slave control means, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, slave initial control processing, which is initial setting of the gaming machine, is executed by the slave initial control execution means. In the slave initial control process executed by the slave initial control execution means, the information indicated by the return data signal is based on the return data signal from the main control means as the slave return hold information, and the slave hold information memory means hold information return It is stored by means. As a result, when power is switched back to the gaming machine after a power failure occurs, data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, According to the information storage means, return suspension information is stored. Therefore, the data stored in the secondary hold information storage means can be restored to the state before the power-off in the state immediately before the power-off. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the on-hold display mode displayed immediately before the power-off can be displayed to the player.

  In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the secondary storage information storage means is configured to be able to retain stored data even when the power is off, and the secondary storage information return means is from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is collated with the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage means, and if it is determined that they match, the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage means is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the sub-holding information storage means as sub-return holding information.

  According to the game described in the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4 or N5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the slave hold information storage unit of the slave control unit, data is held even when the power is off. In the secondary control means, the secondary holding information return means collates the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means with the information stored in the secondary holding information storage means. As a result, when it is determined that the two match, the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage unit is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the sub hold information storage means as sub return hold information. Therefore, it is possible to update the data in the hold information storage means more correctly. Therefore, when the power is restored, the correct hold display mode can be displayed to prevent the player from being confused.

  In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the secondary storage information storage means is configured to be able to retain stored data even when the power is off, and the secondary storage information return means is from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is collated with the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, and when they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained; A game machine N7 characterized in that when there is no match, the sub-hold information storage means is initialized and displayed in a hold display mode indicating a temporary hold display mode.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4 or N5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the slave hold information storage unit of the slave control unit, data is held even when the power is off. In the secondary control means, the secondary holding information return means collates the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means with the information stored in the secondary holding information storage means. As a result, when it is determined that the two match, the sub hold information stored in the sub hold information storage unit is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the sub hold information storage means is initialized, and a hold display mode indicating a temporary hold display mode is displayed. Therefore, by displaying the temporary holding display mode, a clerk or the like of the game shop can recognize that the data stored in the sub-holding information storage means is abnormal. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display of the hold display mode based on erroneous information for the player, and to prevent the player from being confused.

  In any one of the gaming machines N5 to N7, the dynamic display start time information determining means responds to stored slave return hold information based on the slave return hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. A game machine N8 characterized by determining time information to be stored and storing it in the sub-holding information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N5 to N7, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the slave control means, based on the fact that the slave return hold information is stored in the slave hold information storage means, the time information corresponding to the stored slave return hold information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means , Is stored in the sub hold information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to rearrange and display the hold display mode corresponding to the stored slave return hold information in the order of the variable start after returning from the power-off. Therefore, even after the occurrence of the power failure, the player can be prevented from being confused by notifying the player of the order of starting the change.

  In any one of the gaming machines N4 to N8, the sorting means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the slave return hold information is stored in the slave hold information storage means, A game machine N9 characterized by sorting and displaying the hold display mode.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N4 to N8, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the slave return hold information is stored in the slave hold information storage means, the slave control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the hold display mode starts the dynamic display in the order Sorted and displayed by sorting means. Therefore, by recovering from the power-off, the hold display mode is rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display, so that the order of starting the dynamic display can be recognized immediately after resuming the game, and the game can be understood It can be done easily.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. Determining the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition from the dynamic display mode group group configured in a plurality of dynamic display modes, and based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination means Dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established pass / fail determination condition from the dynamic display mode group configured in a plurality of dynamic display modes; Notification destination determination means for determining which identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information is to be notified to the player based on the result of the determination of success or failure of the determination means; Determined by the notification destination determination means Gaming machine O1, characterized in that those having a visible informing means for informing to view the different information to the player.

  According to the gaming machine O1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display manner of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display manner group including the plurality of dynamic display manners It is determined by means. Also, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display manner of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is dynamically displayed from the dynamic display manner group constituted by a plurality of dynamic display manners. It is determined by an aspect determining means. The notification destination determination means determines which of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed to notify the player to visually recognize which identification information. The identification information determined by the notification destination determining means is notified by the visual identification notifying means so as to visually recognize the player. As a result, the identification information to be viewed is determined based on the determination result of the pass / fail, so the player can easily identify the identification information to be viewed, and the game can be played easily. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine O1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode on the basis of the result of the determination by the success or failure determining means, and the dynamic display mode group includes the condition determining means. The high expectation degree dynamic display mode which is easier to be determined in the case where the success or failure determination result is a hit than in the case of the out-of-focus condition, and the notification destination determination means determines the dynamic display mode determination means Based on the determination of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode, the high expectation degree dynamic display mode is to determine the first or second identification information of the dynamically displayed one as the notification destination. A game machine O2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the result of the success or failure determination of the success or failure determination means. The dynamic display mode group is configured to include a high expectation degree dynamic display mode which is more easily determined than the case of out-of-focus condition when the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means is a hit. Based on the determination of the high expectation degree dynamic display manner by the dynamic display manner determination means, the first or second identification information of the person whose dynamic display manner of the high expectation degree is dynamically displayed is a notification destination It is determined by the notification destination determination means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the high expectation degree dynamic display manner by notifying the player so as to visually recognize the high expectation degree dynamic display manner.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, it is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means that either the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the high expectation dynamic display mode Means for delaying the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the determined high expectation dynamic display mode is terminated, A gaming machine O3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the dynamic display mode determination means determines that the dynamic display mode is to be displayed dynamically by the high expectation degree dynamic display mode by either the first identification information or the second identification information. The dynamic display delay means delays the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode ends. This makes it possible to prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting when the high expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Thus, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high expectation dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, it is determined that the dynamic display mode determining means dynamically displays the high expectation degree dynamic display mode with either one of the first identification information and the second identification information. And the dynamic display time of the other identification information is extended until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed in the selected high expectation dynamic display mode is finished. Gaming machine O4 characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the dynamic display mode determination means determines that the dynamic display mode is to be displayed dynamically by the high expectation degree dynamic display mode by either the first identification information or the second identification information. The dynamic display extension time of the other identification information is extended by the dynamic display extension means until the dynamic display of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode ends. This makes it possible to prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting when the high expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Thus, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high expectation dynamic display mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, a voice output means for outputting a voice preset according to the dynamic display mode, and identification information notified by the notification destination determination means are the first identification information and Volume changing means for muting the sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information or setting the volume to a smaller volume than that based on that determined based on one of the second identification information and the second identification information; A game machine O5 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the audio output means outputs the audio preset according to the dynamic display mode. The voice corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information is silenced or not based on the fact that the identification information notified by the notification destination determination means is determined to either one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The sound volume changing means sets the sound volume smaller than that of the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being concentrated on the identification information determined by the notification destination determination means and to miss the dynamic display mode that is displayed dynamically.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established satisfaction determination condition is based on the determination result of the determination by the determination section, in the case where the determination result of the determination by the determination section is a win, than in the case of out of Determined from a group of dynamic display modes configured with a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high expectation degree dynamic display mode that is easy to be determined, and cope with the success or failure judgment conditions established based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment means Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information to be displayed from the dynamic display mode group on the basis of the result of the determination of the appropriateness by the appropriateness determination means, and the establishment of the first or second Based on When the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is the high expectation dynamic display mode, it is different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the determined high expectation dynamic display mode. With respect to identification information, the high expectation degree dynamic display aspect also for the different identification information by the duplication judgment means for judging whether or not the high expectation degree dynamic display aspect is determined, and the duplication judgment means Dynamically determining the start of the dynamic display of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode corresponding to one of the first identification information and the second identification information when it is determined that And a display delay means, game machine O6 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine O6, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition, the success or failure determination on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure determination means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition is easier to be determined than the case of out-of-focus condition if the success or failure judgment result by the success or failure judgment means is a hit It is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from the dynamic display mode group configured with a plurality of dynamic display modes including the high expectation degree dynamic display mode. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display manner of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display manner group by the dynamic display manner determination means. If the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition is a high expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high expectation dynamic Whether or not the high expectation degree dynamic display mode is determined for the identification information different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the display mode is determined by the duplication determination means. When it is determined that the high expectation dynamic display mode is determined for the different identification information by the duplication determination means, either the first identification information or the second identification information is corresponded The start of the high expectation dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Thereby, even when the high expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, the start of one high expectation dynamic display mode is delayed, Both can prevent the dynamic display of the high expectation dynamic display mode from being started. Therefore, the player can play the game concentrating on the high expectation degree dynamic display mode dynamically displayed first. As a result, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine O6, the dynamic display delay means is longer in dynamic display than the high expectation dynamic display mode in which the identification information of the one whose start of the dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed. A game machine O7 characterized in that the start of the dynamic display of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode in the identification information of the person who delays the start is delayed.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the high expectation degree in the identification information of the person who delays the start of the dynamic display longer than the end of the high expectation degree dynamic display mode in which the identification information of the one whose start of the dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed The start of the dynamic display of the dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. As a result, after the dynamic display of one high expectation dynamic display mode is ended, the dynamic display of the delayed high expectation dynamic display mode is started, so that the player can It is possible to play the game concentrating on the high expectation degree dynamic display mode. Therefore, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The gaming machine O6 or O7 has visual indication notification means for notifying the player to identify identification information different from the identification information whose start of the dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. A game machine O8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O6 or O7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the visual indication notifying means notifies the player of the identification information different from the identification information whose start of the dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Therefore, the player can easily determine which of the identification information should be displayed dynamically. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied In the case where the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is dynamically displayed, the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is dynamically displayed Hold information storage means for storing hold information having at least the pass / fail judgment information of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means executed when the start becomes possible, and the hold information newly stored in the hold information storage means Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes dynamic display start ready, it is judged in advance whether the hold information is appropriated or not. Prior notification determining means and prior notification determining means for determining whether to notify that the result of the prior determination was a hit based on the determination of the success or failure by the prior determination means, and the notification A gaming machine P1 characterized in that it comprises prefetching notification means for notifying a player of the result of judgment of the prior judgment whether the preliminary notification is determined to be notified.

  According to the gaming machine P1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is started when dynamic display is started when the first or second validity determination condition is established, a second function corresponds to the qualification condition established. The hold information storage means stores the hold information including at least the pass / fail judgment information of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means executed when the first or second identification information can be dynamically displayed. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes able to start dynamic display based on the hold information being newly stored in the hold information storage means The decision on the propriety of the hold information is made in advance by the preliminary decision means. It is determined by the advance notification determination means whether to notify that the result of the prior determination was a hit based on the fact that the success / failure determination result by the advance success / failure determination means is a hit. When the advance notification determination means determines to notify that the result of the prior determination is a win, the player is notified by the advance notification means of the success / failure determination result of the advance success / failure determination means. As a result, since the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment is notified in advance by the identification information, the player can be notified of the result of the success or failure judgment more quickly, and the expectation to the jackpot can be increased. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P1, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established qualification conditions is determined based on the establishment of the first qualification conditions, and on the basis of the establishment of the second propriety determination means, There is provided a dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the met or not judgment condition, and the hold information storage means satisfies the first or second judgment condition. Pending information having at least information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established yes-no decision condition is started Is stored, and when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display of the first or second identification information during dynamic display Remembered time and ahead Time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start based on the dynamic display mode for each hold information The dynamic display start time information determination means to be stored in, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game execution means execute the bonus game, are likely to be hit more than usual. The lottery information for lottery whether or not to shift to the gaming state is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second judgment condition, and the first or second judgment condition is established and established And storing the holding information corresponding to the determined judgment condition, the game state drawing means for storing the drawing information in the holding information storage means in association with the holding information, Start the dynamic display Based on the time information determined by the interval information determination means, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start corresponding to each hold information is the special gaming state according to the lottery information, and the presence or absence is determined in advance A game machine P2 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition. The dynamic display mode determining means determines until the dynamic display is started when the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes / no determination condition is started when the first or second yes / no determination condition is satisfied Hold information having at least information on a dynamic display mode is stored in the hold information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information during dynamic display is stored first Based on the dynamic display mode for each hold information, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means And stored in the pending information storage means. A lottery for lottery whether or not to make a transition to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to be hit than usual. Information is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means, it is determined by lottery information whether the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start corresponding to each hold information is the special gaming state, and the prior pass / fail judgment means In accordance with the above, the pass / fail judgment is performed in advance. As a result, the game state at the start of the change is determined in advance, and based on the result thereof, the determination of whether the game is successful or not is performed in advance, so that it is possible to execute the more accurate judgment of success or failure. Therefore, the player can be notified of accurate information in advance, and confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine P2, after it is determined by the prior notification determination means to notify that the result of the prior determination was a hit, if the result of the success or failure determination performed based on the established success or failure determination condition is In the second embodiment, the dynamic display mode determination means has notified that the notification determination means has been hit as the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition. A game machine P3 characterized in that the first or second identification information corresponding to information determines an extended dynamic display mode longer than the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exerted. That is, if it is determined that the preliminary notification determination means announces that the result of the prior determination is notification, then the dynamic is determined if the result of the determination on the basis of the established determination conditions becomes successful. The display mode determining means is a first or second means for responding to the hold information informing that the notification determining means has been a win as the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition. The extended display mode determining means determines an extended dynamic display mode longer than the identification information starts the dynamic display. Here, after being notified that the result of the prior determination is a hit by the pre-read notification means, the lottery game based on the success or failure determination condition established thereafter is stopped and the identification information is displayed earlier than the notified lottery game. When the gaming state is changed, the result of the prior determination may change. Then, as a result of changing the result of the predetermination, although the hit is notified by the pre-reading notification means, a failure that does not become a hit may occur. However, since the extended dynamic display mode is determined, identification information corresponding to the hold information notified in advance is dynamically displayed first. Therefore, since the dynamic display is started in the same gaming state as the gaming state determined when the pre-judgment is performed, the result of the pre-judgment can be matched with the judgment at the start of the dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating success or failure determination result of the first lottery game by means, and second identification information for indicating success / failure determination result of second lottery game by said success or failure determination means is dynamically A second display means to be displayed, a display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display unit by the display control unit, the player is notified Benefit game to be advantageous The first or second identification information corresponding to the established pass / fail determination condition is dynamically displayed when the first or second pass / fail determination condition is established. Pending information storage means for storing pending information having at least the pass / fail judgment information relating to the pass / fail judgment of the first pass / fail judgment condition or the second pass / fail judgment condition established, and the first pass / fail judgment in the hold information storage means The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed in a mutually related dynamic display mode in response to the storage information of the condition and the second success / failure determination condition being stored respectively. It is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determination means for determining a fusion dynamic display mode for informing the determination result of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Tricks machine Q1.

  According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine Q1, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition, the success or failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure determination means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The first success or failure determination condition or first condition established until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure determination condition is started when the first or second validity or failure determination condition is satisfied. 2 Hold information having at least the pass / fail judgment information related to the pass / fail judgment of the pass / fail judgment is stored in the hold information storage means. Dynamically in which the first identification information and the second identification information are related to each other triggered by the holding information of the first and second judgment conditions being stored in the holding information storage means The dynamic display mode determination means determines a fusion dynamic display mode for notifying the determination result of the first lottery gaming machine and the second lottery game by dynamically displaying in the display mode. In this way, it is possible to easily determine at a time the success or failure judgment results of the first lottery game and the second lottery game by the fusion dynamic display mode. Therefore, confusion of the player in which the determination result can not be identified can be suppressed by the player being dynamically and independently displayed the determination result of the first lottery game and the second lottery game.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the fusion dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed in response to the holding information of the first and second judgment conditions being stored in the holding information storage means. A fusion determination unit configured to determine whether a fusion dynamic condition is established, and the dynamic display mode determination unit determines that the fusion dynamic condition is established by the fusion determination unit; If the dynamic determination mode is determined while the fusion determination means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is not established, the determination is made based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. Dynamic display mode independent of the dynamic display mode of the first identification information to be performed and the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment means To decide Gaming machine Q2, characterized in that the at it.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the fusion dynamic condition for dynamically displaying the fusion dynamic display condition is satisfied when the suspension information storage means respectively stores the suspension information of the first yes / no determination condition and the second yes / no determination condition. The determination is made by the fusion determination means. If it is determined that the fusion dynamic condition is established by the fusion discrimination means, the fusion dynamic display mode is determined by the fusion dynamic display mode determination means. On the other hand, when it is determined by the fusion determination means that the fusion dynamic condition is not established, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. And the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied propriety determination condition based on the establishment of the second propriety determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as an independent dynamic display mode. Ru. Thereby, even when the fusion dynamic display mode can not be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the fusion dynamic display mode is dynamic display It is possible to prevent the trouble that the lottery game is interrupted until it becomes possible. Therefore, the player can appropriately execute the dynamic display in accordance with the state of the game.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or 2, the fusion dynamic display mode is configured by a first fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a second fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. Game machine Q3 characterized in that the dynamic display mode determination means synchronously determines the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode, respectively. .

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the fusion dynamic display mode is configured by the first fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and the second fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. The first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are synchronously determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Thereby, since the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are determined in synchronization, the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are started at the same timing. Easy to configure. Therefore, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed in the mutually associated dynamic display mode, it is possible to suppress deviation from the setting of the mutual dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically display a fusion dynamic display mode that can be easily understood by the player, and it is possible to further suppress confusion of the player.

  In the gaming machine Q3, when it is determined that the fusion dynamic condition is established by the fusion determination unit, the first success or failure determination condition and the second success or failure determination condition stored in the hold information storage unit A synchronization adjustment means is provided for assisting the dynamic display mode determination means to determine at a timing synchronized with the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode based on the corresponding hold information. A game machine Q4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined that the fusion dynamic condition is established by the fusion determination unit, the first based on the suspension information corresponding to the first and second determination criteria stored in the suspension information storage unit. It is assisted by the synchronization adjustment means that the dynamic display mode determination means determines the timing at which the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are synchronized. Thus, the dynamic display mode determination means can more easily determine the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode in synchronization with each other. Therefore, the dynamic display related to the first lottery game and the second lottery game is started at the same time by dynamically displaying the first dynamic display mode and the second dynamic display mode in synchronization with each other. The player can easily recognize that. Therefore, confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating success or failure determination result of the first lottery game by means, and second identification information for indicating success / failure determination result of second lottery game by said success or failure determination means is dynamically A second display means to be displayed, a display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display unit by the display control unit, the player is notified Benefit game to be advantageous The game state after the bonus game provided by the bonus game execution means is the normal game state and the bonus game execution means to be provided, based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. It is determined that the success or failure judgment means is a hit when the special game state determination means determines the transition to the special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the success or failure determination means Lottery monitoring means for determining establishment of the first or second success or failure determination condition determined to be shifted to the normal gaming state by the gaming state determination means, and the first or second condition satisfying the condition by the lottery monitoring means Privilege delay means for delaying the start of the bonus game corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition judged to satisfy the success or failure judgment condition, and Gaming machine R1, wherein those having.

  According to the gaming machine R1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. A special gaming state in which the gaming state after the bonus game provided by the special game executing means is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state based on the establishment of the first or second success determination condition. The game state determination means determines which of the two to shift to. If it is in the special game state, it is determined to be a hit by the pass / fail judgment means, and the establishment of the first or second pass / fail judgment condition determined to shift to the normal game state by the game state decision means is determined by the lottery monitoring means Ru. If it is determined by the lottery monitoring means that the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition determined to satisfy the condition is Delayed by the bonus game delay means. Thus, even when winning in the transition to the normal gaming state, the game is executed in the special gaming state until the bonus game is executed, so the player can play the game in the special gaming state longer. It can be done. Thus, the player can be given more benefits.

  In the gaming machine R1, one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means with the other identification information, the one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed. A bonus game carry over means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the identification information until the other bonus game is over, and a determination result of yes or no of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over after the bonus game is over by the bonus game carry over means. A gaming machine R2 comprising: pass / fail determination maintaining means for maintaining the pass / fail determination result determined in the playing state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the playing state after the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when a bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means with the other identification information during dynamic display of either one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the remaining movement of one of the identification information is performed. The target game is carried over by the bonus game carry over means until the other bonus game ends. Then, whether the first identification information or the second identification information carried over after the end of the bonus game by the bonus game carrying over means is determined by the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start regardless of the gaming state after the bonus game It is maintained by the pass / fail judgment maintaining means according to the pass / fail judgment result.

  As a result, while delaying the start of the bonus game, which is a hit to shift to the normal game state, during the special game state, the determination in the special game state of the lottery game in which the dynamic display is started is maintained. Therefore, even if the bonus game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the player is disadvantaged. Therefore, while the bonus game is being delayed, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new winning.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2 of the gaming machine, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition is at least a normal dynamic display mode and the normal It is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group configured with the extended dynamic display mode having the dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode, and based on the establishment of the second validity determination unit And dynamic display mode determination means for determining dynamic display of second identification information corresponding to the established pass / fail determination condition according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group, and the benefit delay means comprises A game machine R3 characterized by delaying the start of a bonus game by causing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the extended dynamic display mode.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no decision condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition is at least the dynamic display mode than the normal dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode group from the dynamic display mode group including the long extended dynamic display modes according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Also, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition It is determined by means. Then, the start of the bonus game is delayed by the bonus delay unit by causing the dynamic display mode determination unit to determine the extension dynamic display mode. Therefore, the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed even while the start of the bonus game is delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the delayed time.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is satisfied. Hold information storage means in which hold information having at least the presence / absence determination information related to the success / failure determination of the first or second success / failure determination condition and the game state information determined by the game state determination means is stored; Based on the fact that the suspension information is newly stored in the storage means, the above-mentioned determination result corresponding to the suspension information and the above-mentioned gaming state determined are determined before the above-mentioned dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The lottery monitoring means is configured to determine, based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the first condition or the first condition that satisfies the condition. It is determined whether or not the second success or failure judgment condition is established, and the benefit delay means holds the hold information corresponding to the first or second success or failure judgment condition determined that the lottery monitoring means satisfies the condition. The dynamic display is performed for the same determination result as the determination which is stored in the hold information storage unit prior to the determined determination result on the basis of being stored in the information storage unit. A game machine R4 characterized in that the dynamic display mode determining means determines the extended dynamic display mode in accordance with the establishment of the start condition.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied, the validity determination of the first or second validity determination condition which is satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is satisfied. The hold information storage means stores hold information including at least the judgment information relating to and the gaming state relating to the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination means. Based on the fact that the pending information is newly stored in the pending information storage means, the gaming state determined as a result to the critical hand corresponding to the pending information is the pass / fail judgment information before the dynamic display start condition is established. It is determined by the prior determination means from the game state information and the game state information. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, it is determined by the lottery monitoring means whether the first or second success or failure determination condition is satisfied. The hold information corresponding to the hold information corresponding to the first or the second pass / fail judgment condition determined that the lottery monitoring means satisfies the condition is stored in the hold information storage means prior to the judged hold condition. With respect to the same propriety determination conditions stored in the storage means, the bonus display means determines the extended dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Thus, even when the hold information to be dynamically displayed earlier is stored when the hold information to be a hit to shift to the normal gaming state is stored in the hold information storage means, it is stored ahead of that Since the extended dynamic display mode is determined as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the held information being held, it is possible to delay the start of the bonus game corresponding to the held information serving as a hit to shift to the normal gaming state. Thus, even when the on-off information storage means stores on-hold information in the on-hold information storage unit, the player is in the on-off special game state for a longer time, when the success or failure determination condition for winning transition to the normal game state is established. I can play a game.

  In the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the benefit delaying means is configured to hold information corresponding to one of the first and second judgment conditions determined to satisfy the condition by the lottery monitoring means. Is stored in the hold information storage unit, and the other determination criterion determined to be determined as the special gaming state is newly established when the determination result is a hit by the prior determination unit. , And the start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information of the other success or failure judgment condition which is a hit to shift to the newly established special game state, a hit to be transferred to the normal game state stored in the hold information storage means A game machine R5 delayed from the start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the state where the hold information corresponding to one of the first and second judgment conditions determined to satisfy the condition by the lottery monitoring means is stored in the hold information storage means, the preliminary judgment means wins the judgment result. In the case where the other success or failure judgment condition determined to determine the special gaming state is newly established, a benefit corresponding to the suspension information of the success or failure judgment condition which is a winning to shift to the newly established special gaming state The start of the game is delayed by the benefit delay means from the start of the benefit game corresponding to the hold information which is a hit to shift to the normal gaming state stored in the hold information storage means. Thus, after the bonus game corresponding to the transition to the normal gaming state is executed, the bonus game corresponding to the transition to the special game state is executed, so even after the two bonus games are executed. In the special game state, the player can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game in a more advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to suppress inhibition of the expectation to the jackpot.

  It has a main control means for executing main control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition Success / failure determination means for executing the first lottery game success / failure determination and executing the second lottery game success / failure determination based on the establishment of the second success / failure determination condition, and the first lottery game success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means The first propriety determination signal includes propriety determination signal generation means for generating a second propriety determination signal based on the determination result of the second lottery game by the propriety determination means, based on the result. The slave control means is a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of determination of a first lottery game based on the first determination result, and a second display means based on the second determination signal. , Indicates the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game (2) A second display means for dynamically displaying identification information, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit, and the first or second identification information indicating a hit on the first or second display means is a display of a stop If it is determined that a bonus game advantageous to the player is awarded, and the main control unit determines that the hit / fail determination unit determines that the game is a win, the gaming state after the bonus game is first A hit type determining means for determining whether to make the first jackpot to shift to the gaming state or to make the second jackpot to shift to the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state; Or, based on the satisfaction of the second success or failure judgment condition, whether the hit or failure is the first jackpot or the second jackpot for the satisfied success or failure condition is the success or failure Based on the determination result of the prior determination means to be determined before the dynamic display start condition which is the condition for the identification information corresponding to the fixed condition to start the dynamic display, and the determination result of the prior determination means A preliminary determination signal generation unit for generating a preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control unit of the determination information, and outputting the preliminary determination signal to the secondary control unit, the secondary control unit including the preliminary determination signal Sub hold information storage means for storing prior determination information until dynamic display start conditions of acceptance determination conditions corresponding to the prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination signal are satisfied based on reception of And a slave monitoring unit that determines, based on the preliminary determination information stored in the secondary storage information storage unit, whether the preliminary determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be made is stored, and the secondary monitoring unit Whether to notify the player of gaming state transition information regarding the prior determination information determined to be the first jackpot based on the determination that the prior determination information indicating that the first jackpot is to be stored is stored. Notification means for notifying the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information when it is determined to notify the player by the prior notification determination means for determining the game notification and the advance notification determination means And a game machine S1 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine S1, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to an instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Then, a first success / failure determination signal based on the success / failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means and a second success / failure determination signal generation means based on the success / failure determination result of the second lottery game are generated. In the secondary control means, the first display means dynamically displays first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game based on the first success or failure judgment signal. Further, based on the second success or failure determination signal, the second display means dynamically displays second identification information indicating a success or failure determination result of the second lottery game. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the first or second display means, a bonus game is given to the player. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, if it is determined that the winning judgment means wins, the gaming state after the bonus game is made the first jackpot to shift to the first gaming state, or the player than the first gaming state Whether to make a second jackpot to shift to the second gaming state which is advantageous to is determined by the hit type determination means. Based on the establishment of the first or second validity determination condition, whether the condition is the first jackpot or the second jackpot is satisfied with respect to the satisfied qualification condition. The identification information corresponding to the pass / fail determination condition is determined by the prior determination means before the dynamic display start condition which is the condition for starting the dynamic display is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, a preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control means of the preliminary determination information on the determination result is generated by the preliminary determination signal generation means and output to the secondary control means . Then, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the prior determination signal, the prior determination information is stored in the sub-holding information storage means until the dynamic display start condition of the pass / fail determination condition corresponding to the prior determination information is satisfied. It is memorized. Based on the prior determination information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not prior determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be made is stored. The game state transition information regarding the prior determination information determined to be the first jackpot is determined based on the fact that the secondary monitoring means determines that the prior determination information indicating that the first jackpot is to be stored is the player. It is determined by the prior notification determining means whether or not to notify to. As a result, when it is determined to notify the player, the notification means notifies the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information. As a result, when the gaming state transition notification mode is notified, the player determines that the remaining time of the second gaming state is short if the current gaming state is the second gaming state, and the rest The game can be played using time effectively. Thus, the player can be given more benefits.

  In the gaming machine S1, the predetermination signal generation means of the main control means generates the predetermination signal capable of identifying a propriety determination condition corresponding to the determination result from the determination result of the predetermination means. The gaming state transition notification mode is configured by a notification mode capable of identifying whether the success or failure determination condition corresponding to the prior determination information is the first success or failure determination condition or the second success or failure determination condition. Game machine S2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, with respect to the judgment result of the preliminary judgment means, the preliminary judgment signal generation means generates a preliminary judgment signal capable of identifying the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the judgment result. The game state transition notification mode is configured as a notification mode capable of identifying whether the success or failure determination condition corresponding to the advance determination notification mode is the first success or failure determination condition or the second success or failure determination condition. As a result, the player can play the game in such a manner that priority determination conditions in which the first jackpot is not established by the gaming state transition notification mode are preferentially established. Therefore, it is possible to play a game by more effectively utilizing the second gaming state. Therefore, more benefits can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, when the main control means determines that the first or second success or failure judgment condition to be the first jackpot is established by the prior determination means during the second gaming state A gaming machine S3 having bonus delay means for delaying the start of the bonus game corresponding to the determined first or second judgment condition.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, when it is determined that the first or second success or failure judgment condition for the first jackpot is established by the pre-judgment means during the second gaming state, the first or second success or failure determined When it is determined that the determination condition is established, the start of the determined benefit game is delayed by the benefit delay means. As a result, the second gaming state is given to the player for a longer time, and the player can be given more profits.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the player performs the first operation of the operation means operable by the player and the operation means thereof, whereby the first success or failure judgment condition is established more than the second success or failure judgment condition. Variable means for changing the first advantageous state which is easy and the second advantageous state where the second success or failure judgment condition is more easily established than the first success or failure judgment condition by performing the second operation different from the first operation. A game machine S4 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the following effects are exerted. That is, by the player operating the operation means operable by the player by the first operation, the first advantageous state in which the first acceptance judgment condition is more easily established than the second acceptance judgment condition, and the first operation different from the first operation By performing two operations, the variable means can change the second advantageous state in which the second success or failure judgment condition is more easily established than the first success or failure judgment condition. Thus, based on the delay information notified by the notification means, the operation means is operated to vary the condition into a state in which the success or failure judgment condition different from the success or failure judgment condition in which the bonus game is delayed is easily established. It is possible for the player to play more lottery games during the second gaming state. Therefore, more profits can be given to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the main control means is provided with a bonus game by the other identification information while dynamically displaying one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The second identification information or second information carried over after the end of the bonus game by the bonus game carry over means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information until the other bonus game is over, and the bonus game carry over means. Characterizing the determination result of the identification information, regardless of the gaming state after the bonus game, according to the determination result in the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start is characterized by including: The gaming machine S5 to be.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the following effects can be achieved. That is, in the main control means, when a bonus game is given by the other identification information during dynamic display of either one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the remaining operation of one of the identification information is performed. The target game is carried over by the bonus game carry over means until the other bonus game ends. Then, whether the first identification information or the second identification information carried over after the end of the bonus game by the bonus game carrying over means is determined by the gaming state at the time of the dynamic display start regardless of the gaming state after the bonus game It is maintained by the pass / fail judgment maintaining means according to the pass / fail judgment result.

  Thereby, during the second gaming state, while delaying the start of the bonus game to be transitioned to the first gaming state, the lottery game in which the dynamic display is started is determined in the second gaming state. Since this is maintained, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the player is disadvantaged even if the bonus game is started while the dynamic display is being performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new win while the bonus game is being delayed.

  In any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the main control means moves at least the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established yes / no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes / no determination condition. It is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group including the dynamic display mode and the extended dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the normal dynamic display mode, and the second pass / fail judgment Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established pass / fail determination condition based on the establishment of the means from the dynamic display mode group according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition; A prior dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined before the dynamic display start condition is established based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure determination condition Determining means; A preliminary dynamic display mode signal is generated to notify the secondary control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the pre-article dynamic display mode determination means, to the secondary control means And means for generating the preliminary dynamic display mode signal to be output, the secondary monitoring means being a first jackpot in which the extended dynamic display mode is determined based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal It is determined whether or not the prior determination information is stored. A game machine S6 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition based on the establishment of the first qualification condition is at least from the normal dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. The dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group configured with the extended dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display time. Also, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied success or failure judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition It is determined by means. In addition, before the dynamic display start condition is established, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition It is determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determining means. The preliminary dynamic display mode signal for notifying the secondary control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means is generated by the preliminary dynamic display mode signal generation means, and is output to the secondary control means Ru. Based on the advance dynamic display mode signal, it is determined by the secondary monitoring means whether or not the advance determination information to be the first jackpot for which the extended dynamic display mode is determined is stored. As a result, the gaming state transition notification mode informs the player that the first jackpot delayed for the start delayed during the second gaming state is satisfied. Therefore, the player can determine that the remainder of the second gaming state is more quickly by notifying the gaming state transition notification mode, and can effectively utilize the remaining second gaming state.

In any one of the gaming machines S3 to S6, the main control means determines whether the first jackpot will be made or the positive variation with respect to the established success or failure judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. The main hold information storage means stores the hold information for determining whether the jackpot will be made until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the prior determination means of the main control means The determination is performed based on the stored hold information, and the benefit delay means of the main control means is configured to hold the hold information corresponding to one of the first and second judgment conditions. In a state where it is determined by the pre-article determination means that the first big hit, the hold information corresponding to the other is newly established, and when it is determined that the hold information becomes the second big hit by the prior determination means, The start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information of the other success or failure judgment condition established is delayed from the start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information serving as the first jackpot stored in the hold information storage means A game machine S7 characterized by
According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines S3 to S6, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, on the basis of the satisfaction of the first or second success or failure judgment condition, a hold for determining whether to become the first jackpot or the probability variation jackpot for the satisfied success or failure judgment condition. The information is stored in the main hold information storage means until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Then, based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage unit, the determination is performed by the prior determination unit. In the main control means, the hold information corresponding to one of the first and second judgment conditions is determined to be the first jackpot by the predetermination means, and the hold information corresponding to the other is newly added. When it is determined that the hold information is to be the second jackpot by the predetermination means, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the hold information of the other newly established success or failure judgment condition is the hold information storage means The benefit delay means delays the start of the benefit game corresponding to the stored first jackpot holding information. Thus, after the bonus game corresponding to the transition to the first gaming state is executed, the bonus game corresponding to the transition to the second gaming state is executed, so two bonus games are executed. The player can be made to play in the second gaming state also later. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game in a more advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to suppress inhibition of the expectation to the jackpot.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating success or failure determination result of the first lottery game by means, and second identification information for indicating success / failure determination result of second lottery game by said success or failure determination means is dynamically A second display means to be displayed, a display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display unit by the display control unit, the player is notified Benefit game to be advantageous It has a bonus game execution means to grant, and when the result of the judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means wins, the game state after the bonus game provided by the bonus game execution means is shifted to the normal game state Based on the establishment of the first type determination means, which is a type determination means for determining either a normal jackpot to be played or a special jackpot to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, and the first display unit corresponds to the established success / failure determination condition based on the establishment of the second 2 Dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, which has already been established before the dynamic display start condition is established Pre-determination means for determining whether the normal or special jackpot is to be made with respect to the first or second success or failure judgment condition before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display start condition is satisfied Under one of the first and second judgment conditions before the first judgment and the second judgment condition, it is judged by the prior judgment means that the normal jackpot will occur, and the other special judgment condition is the special judgment condition. When it is determined by the pre-judgment means that the jackpot will be, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition judged to be the normal jackpot is the bonus corresponding to the judgment criteria judged to be the special jackpot A game machine T1 comprising: benefit start adjustment means for adjusting a start time of a bonus game to be earlier than a start of the game.

  According to the gaming machine T1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. If the success or failure judgment result by the success or failure judgment means wins, it is advantageous to the player over the normal jackpot and the normal gaming state in which the gaming state after the bonus game granted by the bonus game executing means is shifted to the normal gaming state One of the special jackpots to be transferred to the special gaming state is determined by the hit type determination means. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in accordance with the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition based on the satisfaction of the first success or failure judgment condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in accordance with the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Before the dynamic display start condition is established, the dynamic display start condition is satisfied whether the jackpot is a large jackpot or a special jackpot with respect to the already established first or second success or failure judgment condition. Before, it is determined by the prior determination means. Under one of the first and second judgment conditions before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, it is judged by the prior judgment means that the jackpot will usually be a large win, and the other judgment conditions are: The start of the bonus game is adjusted by the bonus start adjustment means so that the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot is earlier than the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot when it is determined by the predetermination means that the special jackpot will be made. Ru. Thus, the jackpot is normally started, and after the transition to the normal gaming state, the special jackpot is executed and the transition to the special gaming state is made, so that the player can have a greater expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ambition of the player from playing the game.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine T1, when the special jackpot is reached as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the acceptance determination condition determined by the prior determination means when the bonus start adjusting means becomes the normal jackpot Dynamic display mode determination means for reducing dynamic display mode having dynamic display time shorter than dynamic display mode determined by dynamic display mode determination means as dynamic display mode corresponding to the pass / fail judgment condition determined by the means As a dynamic display mode for the success or failure judgment condition corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition to be determined to be the special jackpot, or a dynamic display condition determination means as a dynamic display manner corresponding to the normal or not And causing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine an extended dynamic display mode that results in a dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode determined by That the gaming machine T2.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode determination means corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the special jackpot as the dynamic display manner corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the big win The dynamic display mode determination means is caused to determine the reduced dynamic display mode which makes the dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display mode by the bonus start adjustment means. Alternatively, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode determining means corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the normal jackpot as the dynamic display manner corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the special jackpot. The dynamic display mode determination means is made to determine the extended dynamic display mode which makes the dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode by the bonus start adjustment means. Thus, by adjusting the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode which is usually a big win or the dynamic display mode which is a special big win, the start of the bonus game of the normal big win is easily performed than the start of the special big win bonus game. It can be adjusted to be ahead. Therefore, many benefits can be given to the player while enjoying the dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine according to the gaming machine T1 or T2, when the first or second judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is satisfied before the condition is satisfied. Holding information storing means for storing holding information having at least the pass / fail judgment information relating to the pass / fail judgment of the first or second pass / fail judgment conditions, and the first corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means Or the prior mode determination means which determines the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of 2nd identification information before the said dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the determination of the prior mode determination means It corresponds to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means based on the result and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being displayed dynamically on the first or second display means. An end time determining unit configured to determine time information related to a time until dynamic display of the first or second identification information ends, and the benefit start adjusting unit includes: (2) With regard to either one of the success or failure judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition judged by the prior judgment means when the normal jackpot is stored is stored in the hold information storage means The other judgment condition newly established is determined to be the special jackpot condition judged to be the special jackpot by the prior judgment unit, the normal jackpot determined to be the normal jackpot determined by the end time judgment unit The dynamic display time is configured such that the dynamic display corresponding to the special jackpot holding information ends after the dynamic display corresponding to the information ends. The dynamic display mode determining means is configured to determine the dynamic display mode as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the suspension information for the special jackpot, and the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition With regard to either one of the success or failure judgment conditions, newly established when the hold information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition judged by the prior judgment means when the special jackpot is stored is stored in the hold information storage means If it is determined by the prior determination means that the other success / failure determination conditions are the success / failure determination conditions for the normal jackpot, the motion corresponding to the special jackpot information for the special jackpot determined by the end time determination means Dynamic display time configured such that dynamic display corresponding to the normal jackpot holding information ends before dynamic display end time A game machine T3, characterized in that the display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the hold information that usually results in a jackpot.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied, the validity determination of the first or second validity determination condition which is satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is satisfied. The hold information having at least the validity determination information relating to is stored in the hold information storage means. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit of the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit is before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. It is determined by the prior mode determination means. The first or second information corresponding to the pending information based on the determination result in the prior aspect determination means and the remaining dynamic display aspect of the first or second identification information during dynamic display on the first or second display means Time information relating to the time until dynamic display of identification information ends is determined by the end time determination means. With regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the judgment conditions determined by the predetermination means that a large jackpot is normally obtained is newly stored, If it is determined by the prior determination means that the other success / failure determination conditions established in the above are the success / failure determination conditions for the special jackpot, the dynamic display of the suspension information for the normal jackpot determined by the end time determination means The dynamic display mode of the hold information in which the adjustment dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time in which the dynamic display of the special jackpot holding information ends after the time to the end is the special jackpot The dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the benefit start adjusting means. On the other hand, with regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the judgment condition determined by the preliminary judgment means when the special jackpot is made is stored. For the other newly established success or failure judgment conditions, when it is judged by the prior judgment means that it is the success or failure judgment condition for becoming a large jackpot, the dynamic of the special jackpot to be special jackpot judged by the end time judgment means The adjustment dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time is such that the dynamic display of the hold information, which is usually a big hit, is finished before the time when the display is finished, the movement of the hold information, which is usually a big hit As a typical display mode, dynamic display mode determination means is determined by the bonus start adjustment means. Thus, if the dynamic display time of the adjustment dynamic display mode is set so as to narrow the difference between the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot and the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot, the player performs the bonus game with good tempo It becomes possible. Thus, the player can play more lottery games.

  Based on the establishment of the success or failure judgment conditions, the success or failure judgment information acquiring means for acquiring the game's success or failure judgment information, the success or failure judgment means for judging the success or failure judgment information acquired by the success or failure judgment information acquiring means And a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the judgment that the player has won, and an operation means operable by the player and a preset valid period. Operation lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the operation means, and notification means for notifying a player of information related to a game when it is determined that the operation lottery means is a hit A lottery probability of setting a lottery probability that the operation lottery means determines to be a lottery probability different between a first effective period within the effective period and a second effective period different from the first effective period. Characterized in that further means are those having a game machine U1.

  According to the gaming machine U1, on the basis of the establishment of the success or failure judgment conditions, the game success or failure judgment information is acquired by the success or failure judgment information acquiring means. The propriety determination information acquired by the propriety determination information acquisition means is determined by the propriety determination means. The bonus game execution means executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination that the hit is determined by the success or failure determination means. A predetermined lottery is executed by the operation lottery means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player within a predetermined effective period. If the operation lottery means determines that the game is a win, information on the game is notified to the player by the notifying means. The lottery probability that the operation lottery means determines to be a hit is set by the lottery probability changing means to a different lottery probability for the first effective period within the effective period and the second effective period different from the first effective period. As a result, when the player operates the operation means within the valid period, the probability of being notified of the information related to the game can be changed depending on whether it is the first valid period or the second valid period. It is possible to improve the desire to operate the operation means of Therefore, since information relating to the game can be notified by the operation of the player himself, it is possible to suppress boredom in the game.

  In the gaming machine U1, the bonus game is composed of a plurality of small bonus games, and the first valid period is a period during which any small bonus game is executed among the plurality of small bonus games. The second effective period is set during the period in which any one of the plurality of small bonus games different from the small bonus game set during the first valid period is executed. A game machine U2 characterized in that it is set.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1, the following effects are exerted. That is, a bonus game is configured by a plurality of small bonus games. A first valid period is set during a period in which any of the small bonus games is executed among the plurality of small bonus games. In addition, a second validity period is set during a period in which a small bonus game different from the small bonus game for which the first valid period is set among the plurality of small bonus games is executed. As a result, the probability of notifying information related to the game can be changed between the first and second effective periods during the bonus game, and the motivation to operate the operation means can be improved even during the bonus game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game even during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, based on the establishment of the qualification conditions, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the established qualification conditions is established, the qualification determination Before the start of the dynamic display start condition based on the hold information storage means for storing hold information having at least the validity determination information acquired by the information acquisition means and the hold information stored in the hold information storage means The information related to the game is determined to be a hit by the prior determination means among the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means. A game machine U3 characterized by being information related to whether or not hold information is stored.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is acquired by the success / failure determination information acquisition means until dynamic display start conditions for starting dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the satisfied success / failure determination conditions are satisfied based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination conditions. The hold information having at least the success / failure determination information is stored by the hold information storage means. Based on the hold information stored in the hold information storage unit, the preliminary determination unit determines the result of the pass / fail judgment before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The information related to the game to be notified to the player is made up of the information related to whether or not the hold information determined to be a hit by the predetermination means among the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is stored. ing. Therefore, the player can know the result of the pass / fail judgment on the hold information stored in the hold information storage means before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied by operating the operation means. Therefore, the player can know the result of the pass / fail judgment earlier by the operation of the player. In addition, even if the hold information to be hit is not notified by the operation of the operation means, it is expected that there is a hold information to be actually hit only by falling out of the lottery by the operation means, You can enjoy the dynamic display. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player gets bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine U2, regarding the winning determined by the success or failure determining means, a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state in which the gaming state after the bonus game is executed is shifted to the normal gaming state There is a hit type determination unit that determines one of the special jackpot to be transferred to the special game state, and the information related to the game is the jackpot that is the trigger for the bonus game being executed. A game machine U4 characterized in that the information relates to whether it is the special jackpot or the special jackpot.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the advantageous effects described in the gaming machine U2, the following advantageous effects can be obtained. In other words, in the special gaming state where the game state after the bonus game is executed is shifted to the normal gaming state with respect to the win determined by the success or failure judging means, the normal jackpot and the gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The special jackpot to be transferred is determined by the hit type determination means. Information related to whether the winning event of the bonus game being executed is a normal jackpot or a special jackpot is notified as information related to the game.

  In this way, the player can quickly recognize the gaming state after the bonus game is executed during the bonus game by operating the operation means. In addition, since the lottery probability based on operating the operation means is also changed during the bonus game, it is possible to give a change due to the difference in the period in which the operation means is operated during the bonus game. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player gets bored with the game during the bonus game.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification A bonus game executing means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, and is established based on the establishment of the first eligibility determination condition The right to execute the first lottery game is held until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition And holding means for holding the right to execute the second lottery game until dynamic display start conditions for starting dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied based on The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first success / failure determination condition is determined based on the number of reservations held by the holding unit, triggered by the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, Second identification information corresponding to the second success or failure judgment condition Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the video display mode based on the number of reservations suspended by the suspension means in response to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition; For each hold held by the holding means, advance dynamic display mode judgment for judging the dynamic display mode based on the number of holds of the holding means when the judgment condition is satisfied Means, and when the first or second success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the success / failure determination combining the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition which are satisfied until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied Hold information storage means for storing hold information having at least an establishment order of conditions and information on a dynamic display mode determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means, and first success / failure stored in the hold information storage means Judgment condition and second success or failure The order of establishment of the pass / fail judgment conditions, which is the combination of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition, is displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode while distinguishing the hold information from the judgment condition. And the preliminary dynamic display mode discrimination means for each piece of suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means each time the determination condition of the preliminary dynamic display mode discrimination means is satisfied. Based on the dynamic display mode and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display, until the first or second identification information becomes the dynamic display start for each piece of suspension information Time information is determined or updated and stored in the hold information storage means by the start time information update means in response to the start time information update means stored in the hold information storage means and that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the said each time information The hold display mode to be displayed on the hold display unit, a game machine and said those having a rearranging means for rearranging the order to start the dynamic display, the V1.

  According to the gaming machine V1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The right to execute the first lottery game until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is established based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition Is put on hold by the holding means. In addition, the second lottery game is executed until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the second qualification condition. The right to do is held by the holding means. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first success / failure determination condition is triggered by the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, and is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the number of reservations held by the suspension unit. It is determined. Further, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second success / failure determination condition is triggered by the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, based on the number of holds held by the holding means. It is determined by the determination means. The dynamic display mode is an advance dynamic display mode discrimination means based on the number of the hold when the discrimination condition is satisfied for each hold held by the holding means every time a predetermined judgment condition is satisfied. It is determined by If the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied, and until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the establishment order of the validity determination condition which is the combination of the first and second determination conditions satisfied. Hold information having at least information on the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means is stored in the hold information storage means. Success or failure of the combination of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition for each hold information while distinguishing the hold information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. The establishment order of the determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. The dynamic display mode determined by the prior dynamic display mode determination unit for each piece of suspension information and the first or second identification information during dynamic display, each time the determination condition of the preliminary dynamic display mode determination unit is satisfied. Based on the remaining dynamic display mode, time information until the first or second identification information becomes dynamic display start is determined or updated by the start time information update means for each hold information, and the hold information storage means It is memorized. Then, when the predetermined condition is met, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is dynamically displayed based on each time information stored in the hold information storage unit by the start time information update unit. Are rearranged by the rearranging means in the order of starting. Thereby, for example, the hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information in the dynamic display is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information in the dynamic display, storage is newly performed. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It is earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. In addition, since the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information is determined based on the number of holdings of the holding means when the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, it is held while being held. A change occurs in the dynamic display mode determined in advance to be determined by increase or decrease. Therefore, the order in which dynamic display starts is also changed, but each time a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, time information to start dynamic display is also determined or updated, so that more correct dynamic display The player can be informed of the order to start. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine V1, when the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is displayed by being sorted and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, the hold display mode being displayed being sorted As a result of the time information of the corresponding hold information being updated by the start time information updating means, the order monitoring means determines whether or not a change has occurred in the reordered displayed order, and the order monitoring means changes the order Game is characterized by including rearranging and updating means for rearranging and displaying the pending display mode being displayed, in the order of starting a new dynamic display, when it is determined that Machine V2.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is displayed sorted by the order of starting the dynamic display, the time of the hold information corresponding to the hold display mode displayed being rearranged As a result of the information being updated by the start time information updating means, it is judged by the order monitoring means whether or not there is a change in the order displayed. When it is determined by the order monitoring means that a change has occurred in the order, the pending display manners displayed being rearranged are rearranged by the rearrangement update means in the order of starting a new dynamic display. As a result, even if a change occurs in the order in which the dynamic display is started due to increase or decrease of the hold, etc. after the hold display mode is rearranged and displayed after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sort is As it is performed, the player can recognize the correct sort order. Therefore, confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

  In the gaming machine V1 or V2, when the sorting / updating unit rearranges in the order to start a new dynamic display, a change occurs in the change start order of the suspension display mode being displayed being reordered A game machine V3 characterized by having a notification means for notifying the player of.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the sort update unit rearranges in the order of starting a new dynamic display, the player is notified that the change start order of the change of the hold display mode displayed is displayed. It is informed by. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that a change has occurred in the change start order of the hold display mode displayed by the player being rearranged. Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, and V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A game machine Z1 characterized by. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a slot machine Feature game machine Z2. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

Game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that it is a combination of Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when game balls enter a plurality of starting openings provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and the dynamic display of the special symbol notifying the lottery result is It is executed on the display device. In such a configuration, the success or failure of the game is drawn individually corresponding to each starting opening, and the drawing result corresponds to each starting opening (for example, the first special for the two starting openings) After dynamically displaying the symbol and the second special symbol), the lottery result is notified. In this way, it has been proposed that a plurality of special symbols can be dynamically displayed at the same time.
For example, in Patent Document 1, when the game ball enters the first starting opening, the dynamic display of the first special symbol starts, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second special symbol moves dynamically. Start the display. Therefore, when the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the other special symbol while either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed dynamically, the first special symbol and the second special symbol Both will be in the state of displaying dynamically at the same time. Then, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in the display mode informing the big hit, it shifts to the big hit game.
As a type of jackpot, probability change jackpot transition to the high probability gaming state to improve the probability of becoming the jackpot advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game, and jackpot probability that is lower jackpot probability than the high probability gaming state A normal jackpot to shift to the probability game state is set. If a big hit is usually started during the high probability game with one special symbol, the result is determined based on the probability of the normal gaming state in the other special symbol that has already started to change and has not been fixed yet. Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).
By the way, in such a gaming machine, since the dynamic display is executed independently with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are usually short for a big hit and a definite variation big hit. If the big win is usually performed after the odds have been won, the high probability gaming state is ended in a short time, and the player's willingness to play the game in a short time. There was a problem that it was attenuated.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player's willingness to play a game from being attenuated in a gaming machine in which a plurality of special symbols are displayed dynamically at the same time.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes a first lottery game on the basis of the establishment of the first condition, the second lottery on the basis of the formation of the second condition. The 1st display means by which the 1st identification information which shows the success / failure determination result of the 1st lottery game by the success / failure determination means which performs the success / failure determination of a lottery game is displayed dynamically, The 1st by the success / failure determination means 2) Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating success / failure determination result of lottery game, said first identification information on said first display means, said second identification information on said second display means The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control respectively and the result of the judgment of the success or failure by the judgment unit of judgment are the winnings, and the first or second identification information is displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means In the display mode that shows the hit A bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the stop display is made, and the win or absence judgment result by the hit / non-judgment means becomes a win, the bonus game execution means Determined to either the normal jackpot to shift the gaming state after the granted bonus game to the normal gaming state or the special jackpot to transition to the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition based on the determination means and the establishment of the first qualification condition according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition based on the establishment of the means according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition; Before the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, the dynamic display start condition is established whether the normal jackpot or the special jackpot is to be made with respect to the first or second judgment criteria which have already been established. According to one of the first judgment condition and the second judgment condition before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the normal judgment is made when the normal jackpot is reached. If the special jackpot is determined by the judging means, and if it is judged by the prior judging means that the special jackpot is to be made, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the normality deciding condition judged to be the normal jackpot is It has bonus start adjustment means for adjusting the start time of the bonus game so as to be earlier than the start of the bonus game corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition determined to be the special jackpot. It is
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the bonus start adjusting means is a dynamic display corresponding to the judgment condition determined by the prior judging means when the normal jackpot is achieved. As an aspect, when the special jackpot is achieved, the dynamic display mode is shorter than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success / failure determination condition determined by the preliminary determination means. The dynamic display mode determination means is made to determine the shortened dynamic display mode, or as the dynamic display mode for the pass / fail judgment condition corresponding to the pass / fail judgment condition for the special jackpot, corresponding to the hit / fail judgment condition for the normal jackpot Dynamic display mode determination means that extends the dynamic display time which is longer than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as the dynamic display mode to be displayed It is intended to be constant.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the dynamic display start corresponding to the satisfied or false judgment condition is satisfied. Hold information storage means for storing hold information having at least pass / fail determination information relating to the pass / fail judgment of the first or second pass / fail judgment conditions satisfied before the condition is satisfied, and the hold information storage means Prior mode determination to determine the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information being stored, before the dynamic display start condition is established Means for storing the pending information storage means based on the determination result of the prior aspect determination means and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed on the first or second display means Remembered Ending time determining means for determining time information related to the time until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information being ended, and the benefit start adjusting means (1) With regard to either of the success or failure judgment conditions for the success or failure judgment condition, the hold information corresponding to the success or failure judgment condition judged by the prior judgment means when the normal jackpot is reached is the hold information storage means When the other judgment condition newly established is judged to be the special judgment condition to become a special jackpot by the prior judgment means, the end time judgment means judges The dynamic display corresponding to the special jackpot holding information is ended after the time when the dynamic display corresponding to the normal jackpot information corresponding to the normal jackpot is finished Allowing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the adjustment dynamic display mode configured by the dynamic display time as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the special jackpot holding information, and the first With respect to either one of the second judgment conditions and the second judgment conditions, the hold information corresponding to the judgment conditions judged by the prior judgment means when the special jackpot is made is stored in the hold information storage means When it is judged that the other judgment conditions newly established are the judgment conditions which normally become big hit by the prior judgment means, the special jackpot judged by the end time judgment means and Dynamic display such that the dynamic display corresponding to the normal jackpot holding information ends before the time when the dynamic display corresponding to the holding information ends The adjustment dynamic display mode configured by time is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the normal jackpot holding information.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the success / failure determination means of the first lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the first success / failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied.
Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently.
If the success or failure judgment result by the success or failure judgment means wins, it is advantageous to the player over the normal jackpot and the normal gaming state in which the gaming state after the bonus game granted by the bonus game executing means is shifted to the normal gaming state One of the special jackpots to be transferred to the special gaming state is determined by the hit type determination means. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the established success or failure judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in accordance with the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition based on the satisfaction of the first success or failure judgment condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second validity determination condition, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in accordance with the establishment of the dynamic display start condition.
Before the dynamic display start condition is established, the dynamic display start condition is satisfied whether the jackpot is a large jackpot or a special jackpot with respect to the already established first or second success or failure judgment condition. Before, it is determined by the prior determination means. Under one of the first and second judgment conditions before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, it is judged by the prior judgment means that the jackpot will usually be a large win, and the other judgment conditions are: The start of the bonus game is adjusted by the bonus start adjustment means so that the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot is earlier than the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot when it is determined by the predetermination means that the special jackpot will be made. Ru.
Thus, the jackpot is normally started, and after the transition to the normal gaming state, the special jackpot is executed and the transition to the special gaming state is made, so that the player can have a greater expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode determination means corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the special jackpot as the dynamic display manner corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the big win The dynamic display mode determination means is caused to determine the reduced dynamic display mode which makes the dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display mode by the bonus start adjustment means. Alternatively, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode determining means corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the normal jackpot as the dynamic display manner corresponding to the success / failure determination conditions determined to be the special jackpot. The dynamic display mode determination means is made to determine the extended dynamic display mode which makes the dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode by the bonus start adjustment means.
Thus, by adjusting the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode which is usually a big win or the dynamic display mode which is a special big win, the start of the bonus game of the normal big win is easily performed than the start of the special big win bonus game. It can be adjusted to be ahead. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given many benefits while enjoying the dynamic display mode.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied, the validity determination of the first or second validity determination condition which is satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is satisfied. The hold information having at least the validity determination information relating to is stored in the hold information storage means.
The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit of the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit is before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. It is determined by the prior mode determination means. The first or second information corresponding to the pending information based on the determination result in the prior aspect determination means and the remaining dynamic display aspect of the first or second identification information during dynamic display on the first or second display means Time information relating to the time until dynamic display of identification information ends is determined by the end time determination means.
With regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the judgment conditions determined by the predetermination means that a large jackpot is normally obtained is newly stored, If it is determined by the prior determination means that the other success / failure determination conditions established in the above are the success / failure determination conditions for the special jackpot, the dynamic display of the suspension information for the normal jackpot determined by the end time determination means The dynamic display mode of the hold information in which the adjustment dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time in which the dynamic display of the special jackpot holding information ends after the time to the end is the special jackpot The dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the benefit start adjusting means.
On the other hand, with regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, when the hold information corresponding to the judgment condition determined by the preliminary judgment means when the special jackpot is made is stored. For the other newly established success or failure judgment conditions, when it is judged by the prior judgment means that it is the success or failure judgment condition for becoming a large jackpot, the dynamic of the special jackpot to be special jackpot judged by the end time judgment means The adjustment dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time is such that the dynamic display of the hold information, which is usually a big hit, is finished before the time when the display is finished, the movement of the hold information, which is usually a big hit As a typical display mode, dynamic display mode determination means is determined by the bonus start adjustment means.
Thus, if the dynamic display time of the adjustment dynamic display mode is set so as to narrow the difference between the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot and the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot, the player performs the bonus game with good tempo It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play more lottery games.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines )
114 Display Control Device ( First Display Means, Part of Second Display Means )
201 MPU (determine constant means)
202b jackpot type counter (part of the game state determination means)
S1256 period information discrimination means
Part of S1257 production execution means

Claims (3)

Eligibility determining means that executes the determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first determination criteria, and executes the determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second determination criteria,
First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game by the determination means;
A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination of the success or failure of the second lottery game by the success / failure determination means;
Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means;
The player is determined to be in a display mode in which the first or second identification information indicates a hit on the first or second display means by the success or failure judgment result by the success or failure judgment means being a hit. Gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game which is advantageous to
A player who is more than a normal jackpot and the normal gaming state in which the gaming state after the bonus game provided by the bonus game executing means is shifted to the normal gaming state when the success or failure judgment result by the success or failure judgment means becomes a win. A per-type determination means for determining one of the special jackpot to shift to the special game state that is advantageous to the
The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition based on the satisfaction of the first qualification condition, and the second qualification section is established. And dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success / failure determination condition according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition,
Before the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, the dynamic display start condition is established based on whether the normal jackpot or the special jackpot is to be made with respect to the first or second success or failure judgment condition already established. Pre-determination means to determine before
Under one of the first judgment condition and the second judgment condition before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the judgment is made by the prior judgment means that the normal jackpot will occur, according to one of the first judgment conditions and the second judgment condition. In the success or failure judgment conditions, when it is judged by the prior judgment means that the special jackpot will be made, it is judged that the start of the bonus game corresponding to the success or failure judgment conditions judged to be the normal jackpot will be the special jackpot What is claimed is: 1. A gaming machine comprising: benefit start adjustment means for adjusting a start time of a bonus game to be earlier than a start of a bonus game corresponding to a success / failure determination condition.   The bonus start adjustment means is a dynamic display mode corresponding to the yes / no determination condition determined by the prior determination means when the normal jackpot is achieved, the yes / no determination condition determined by the prior determination means when the special jackpot is achieved. Or the dynamic display mode determination means determines a shortened dynamic display mode which makes the dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as the dynamic display mode corresponding to The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the normal jackpot condition as the normal jackpot as the dynamic display mode for the regular judgment condition corresponding to the special jackpot condition to become the special jackpot 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the dynamic display mode determination means determines the extended dynamic display mode which results in a long dynamic display time. When the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the success or failure of the first or second success or failure judgment condition satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the satisfied or false judgment condition is satisfied Holding information storing means for storing holding information having at least the judgment information regarding the
The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means is satisfied by the dynamic display start condition Also, prior mode judging means to judge before.
Based on the determination result of the prior mode determination means and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed on the first or second display means, stored in the hold information storage means End time determination means for determining time information related to the time until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information ends.
The benefit start adjustment means is
With regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, the hold information corresponding to the judgment condition determined by the prior judgment means when the normal jackpot occurs is the hold information. When stored in the storage means, if it is judged by the prior judgment means that the other judgment conditions newly established are the success judgment conditions for special jackpot, the end time judgment means The dynamic display time is configured such that the dynamic display corresponding to the special jackpot holding information ends after the dynamic display time corresponding to the determined normal jackpot holding information ends. Allowing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine an adjustment dynamic display mode as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the special jackpot holding information,
With regard to either one of the first and second judgment conditions, the hold information corresponding to the judgment condition determined by the prior judgment means when the special jackpot is reached is the hold information. When stored in the storage means, if it is judged by the prior judgment means that the other judgment conditions newly established are the success / failure judgment conditions for becoming a large jackpot, the end time judgment means The dynamic display time is configured such that the dynamic display corresponding to the normal jackpot holding information ends before the dynamic display time corresponding to the determined special jackpot holding information ends. In particular, the dynamic display mode determining means is adapted to determine the adjusted dynamic display mode as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the normal jackpot holding information. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,.

Images